JP2024001356A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress decline of a game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine including a game board on which a game using a game ball is performed includes first light emitting means that receives a predetermined control signal and emits light in a light emission mode on the basis of the received control signal and second light emitting means capable of representing information having a higher degree of importance than that of the first light emitting means. The control signal can suppress display of information different from the original information on both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means when a problem occurs, since the control signals are output at a different cycle between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 314

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that include a board on which part numbers and the like are indicated by silk printing (for example, Patent Document 1). Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to provide high reflectance and enhance decorativeness.

JP2006-141683A (Paragraph [0047], Paragraph [0048], and Figure 3)

However, there is a risk that the circuit structure of the board may be inferred from silk-screen printing and the circuits of the board may be fraudulently altered.

The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can take measures against fraud.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are presented below. In addition, the effects, etc. will be explained as necessary. Further, for ease of understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention will be shown as appropriate, but the invention is not limited in any way.

The present invention
A gaming machine equipped with multiple boards,
As multiple boards,
a main control board provided with a display section showing a part number that allows identification of the mounted components;
A magnetic detection board and a magnetic detection board in which neither a display part with a part number that can identify the mounted component nor a board management number display part with a board management number that can identify the board are provided on either side of the board. , has
The magnetic detection board is mounted with a magnetic detection means capable of detecting magnetism and is housed in a predetermined housing member,
The housing member has a product management display section in which a product management number is written that allows identification of the housing member housing the magnetic detection board.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine of the present invention, countermeasures against fraud can be taken.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 7 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the front. It is a perspective view of a dish base unit in a dish unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a top view of the production operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation button unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the production operation ring of the production operation unit seen from the front from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the production operation ring seen from the bottom and front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and seen from the bottom front. (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left. It is an exploded perspective view of the production operation button unit of the production operation unit as seen from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit as seen from the lower front. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation button unit when the press operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation button unit when the press operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between a performance operation ring and a rotational drive unit in a left side view of the performance operation unit. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the press operation section is in the raised position, and (c) is a central press operation section of the press operation section. It is a front view of the dish unit when pressed. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back, and (c) is a state with the top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front and above. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the movable ball extraction piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 101(a) is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 101(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a front component, a game panel, a front unit, etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 viewed from the front right. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit, etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 108 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the back, and (c) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit as seen from the back. It is a left side view of a starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening when it is in the open state. It is an enlarged front view showing parts of a starting port unit and a side unit in the game board. (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first big prize opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of game balls in the first attacker unit in cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit. It is a perspective view seen from behind. It is an explanatory diagram showing a passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section. FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part of the gaming area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged view of the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. (a) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable structure of the rear effect unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back and rear effect unit. It is a front view showing a rear movable decorative body together with a rear decorative board. (a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. (a) is a perspective view of the back movable decoration seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back movable decoration seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body as seen from behind. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back movable ornament. FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in broken lines in the front view of FIG. 147; (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in (a), and (c ) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in the same part as the decorative body in (a). FIG. 143(a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143(a); FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decoration body and the decoration sheet, the light guide radiation plate, and the rear decoration board by enlarging a part of the front side of the rear movable decoration body. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in a section of the first LED, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative board at the part of the first LED, and (b) is an explanatory diagram where the second LED is located on the optical axis of the first LED. It is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide radiation plate in the part where the light guide radiation plate is located, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the effect of the light guide radiation plate in the second decorative part of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, and the LED housing part of the light guide radiation plate and the first LED of the rear decorative board. It is an explanatory view showing an example of arrangement from the front. FIG. 2 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear decorative board together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. (a) is a front view of the back decorative board, and (b) is a rear view of the back decorative board. (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part of a different form from that in (a). FIG. 3(c) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part having a different form from that in (a) and (b). (a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a rear movable decorative body of a second embodiment different from the rear movable decorative body of FIG. 142, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a rear movable decorative body of a third embodiment. FIG. 12(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the rear movable decoration body of the fourth embodiment in cross section. (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable structure of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center lifting mechanism of the back lower center production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center lifting mechanism of the back lower center production unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center decoration body unit of the back lower center presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back lower center decoration unit of the back lower center presentation unit as seen from behind. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising and lowering of the back lower center decoration unit by the back lower center lifting mechanism in the back lower center production unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back bottom center rotating decoration of the back bottom center decoration unit in the back bottom center decoration unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the stop position of the back bottom center rotating decoration. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the detection sensor and each detection sensor in a table. It is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of LEDs of the back lower middle decoration unit in the back lower middle production unit from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back-top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back effect unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back raising/lowering decoration unit in the back upper production unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear ascending and descending decorative body unit in the rear unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing a rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotating decorative body in the back upper presentation unit from the front. (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the back rising/falling decoration unit in the back upper production unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the back rising/lowering decoration with the back rising/lowering decoration unit moved to the appearance position. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the lifting mechanism of the body unit and the rotating mechanism of the back up-and-back rotating decorative body from the front. It is an explanatory view showing a decoration board from the front in a state where a back raising/lowering decoration body unit has been moved to an appearance position in a back upper presentation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration body unit of the back rear left presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear left decoration body unit of the rear rear left production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear left production unit from the front. It is an explanatory diagram showing movement of the back rear left decoration body unit in the back rear left production unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear right presentation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the rear right presentation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear right presentation unit, as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear rear right production unit as seen from behind. It is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the rear right production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of the back right decoration unit in the back back right presentation unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left production unit in the back unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left presentation unit as seen from behind. (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in an open state. (a) is a perspective view of the back front right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right production unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration body unit in the back front right presentation unit as seen from behind. (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right production unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the rear movable decorative body of the rear rear production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back lower middle rotation decorative body of the back lower middle production unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Move the back up/back rotation decoration of the back up/back presentation unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, move the back rear left rotation decoration of the back rear left presentation unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and move the back of the back rear right presentation unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing the rear clockwise rotating ornaments moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. A state in which the rear left rotating decoration of the rear rear left production unit has been moved from the retreat position to the second appearance position, and the rear rear right rotation decoration of the rear rear right production unit has been moved from the retreat position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in FIG. It is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left presentation unit and the shutter unit of the back front right presentation unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. Move the rear movable decoration of the rear rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, move the rear up and rear rotating decoration of the rear upper and rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, rear left rotation decoration of the rear rear left effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, the rear right rotation decoration of the back rear right production unit from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and the rear lower middle rotation decoration of the rear lower middle production unit raised from the lowered position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which it has been moved to its respective position. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with a self-supporting member. It is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the main body frame. Figures (a) to (c) are diagrams for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and are DIP type small connectors that are electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). Figures (d) to (f) show how to prevent solder bridging of each terminal. 209(a) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209(c), and FIG. 209(b) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209(f). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification example in which the final stage terminal and the solder escape pattern are formed separated by a predetermined distance. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram (a) of an over-resist applied to each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram (a) of a copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) side of a board on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and FIG. 3(b) is a schematic diagram of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. 213, which is a continuation of FIG. 213, is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along the YY line. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram (a) of a copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) side of a substrate on which a surface mount type connector is mounted in a modified example, and FIG. 215, which is a continuation of FIG. 215, is an enlarged view of part B in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of a cross section taken along the ZZ line. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. This figure shows the shape of the solid ground at the part where the front side of the disconnection prevention rib part formed on the base comes into contact with the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board, and shows the shape of the solid ground on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board. It is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface, and a schematic diagram (b) of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the shape of a resist with respect to a land when a peripheral control board is poured into a solder bath. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a front view of a peripheral control unit according to a second embodiment. 224 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. 224 is a view taken along arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a third embodiment. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a third embodiment. 224 is a view taken along arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member according to the third embodiment They are diagrams illustrating the method, and are a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board (exposed example (a)), and a schematic diagram of the back side (soldered side) of the peripheral control board (exposed example (b)). , Schematic diagram of the copper foil side of the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board (example (c) in which multiple through holes with lands are arranged), Schematic diagram of the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board (through holes with lands) This is an example (d)) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the installation procedure of the peripheral control board etc. based on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a land formed around a through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to a fourth embodiment, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a foil removal area. Diagram (a) showing a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of a peripheral control board, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, Diagram (b) showing a land and screw fixing designation symbol, foil removal area It is a figure (c) showing. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment. (a) shows a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit is shown in the same figure so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit taken along the CL line in FIG. Continuing from FIG. 238, this is a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit with a portion of the peripheral control unit cut out so that the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 and deformed. It is a figure (c) which shows a part. FIG. 12 is a partially enlarged front view of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening into which a tip of a contact probe according to a fifth embodiment can be inserted and brought into contact. Taking out the ground (GND) on the back side (solder side) of a specific board to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back side (solder side) of the specific board and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment They are diagrams illustrating the method, and are a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back side (solder side) of a specific board (exposed example (a)), and a schematic diagram of the back side (soldered side) of a specific board (exposed example (b)). , Schematic diagram of the copper foil side of the back side (solder side) of a specific board (example (c) with multiple through holes with lands), Schematic diagram of the back side (solder side) of a specific board (through holes with lands) This is an example (d)) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable. Figure (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the production display device, and a diagram (a) shows the state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the liquid crystal output board. b) is a partially enlarged view of part B shown in (a) and part C shown in (b), showing the state where the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through the cutout part. It is figure (c). Figure (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected properly to the connector on the back side of the production display device, and the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally to the connector on the LCD output board. It is a figure (b) which shows the state where there is no. Figure (a) shows the arrangement of the connectors on the relay board, and Figure (b) shows the state in which wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. FIG. 6C is a diagram illustrating a state in which the wiring and harness connectors are not properly connected. 245 is a modification of FIG. 245, and is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of connectors and component arrangement lines on the relay board, and shows a state in which wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (b), and is a figure (c) which shows the state where the connector of wiring and the harness is not normally connected to the connector of a relay board. They are a partial perspective view (a) of the game board seen from the back, illustrating the area where the wiring groove is attached, and a diagram (b) showing the state where the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board. FIG. 247 is a continuation of FIG. 247, and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from behind, with the wiring groove according to the first embodiment attached to the back side of the game board. It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front with the wiring groove according to the first embodiment attached to the back side of the game board. It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from behind with the wiring groove according to the second embodiment attached to the back side of the game board. It is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front with the wiring groove according to the second embodiment attached to the back side of the game board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the light emitting production unit seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the light emitting production unit seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting production unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting production unit disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the arrangement relationship between an LED bare chip and a light guide plate. It is a front view showing a diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of a light guide plate. Figure (a) shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), showing the difference between the flexible flat cable and the connector on the LED board. (b) is an enlarged view of the Z part shown in (a), showing an abnormal state where the flexible flat cable is not fully inserted into the connector of the LED board. (c). It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board with which a door frame is provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board including one LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board including two LED constant current drive circuits. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a method of arranging an LED constant current drive circuit. 264 is an enlarged view of portion D in FIG. 263 viewed from the non-LED mounting surface. This is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment. This is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment. 270 is an enlarged view of section D' in FIG. 265, section D'' in FIG. 266, or section D'' in FIG. 270, viewed from the non-LED mounting surface. This is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the fourth embodiment. 269 is an enlarged view of the portion D''' in FIG. 268 viewed from the non-LED mounting surface. This is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment. A method of arranging a surface display section that allows identification of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (surface) of a decorative board and the corresponding LEDs, in the case of concentrated arrangement (Part 1) (a) and in the case of distributed arrangement. (Part 1) (b), a case of centralized arrangement (Part 2) (c), and a case of distributed arrangement (Part 2) (d), respectively. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor as seen from behind. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 275 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 274. FIG. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error display processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 280 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 280. 282 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on following FIG. 281. It is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the preliminary determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpots, (B) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding types of jackpots, and (C) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpot types. It is a small winning symbol design determination table used for lottery processing regarding types. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing the control state when the movable decorative body is driven, and (B) is a time chart showing the control state when the movable decorative body is driven in a modified example. It is a time chart showing the control state when the movable decoration body is driven. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a performance in which a movable decorative object is displayed in front of a performance display device. It is a time chart showing a control state during a player participation type performance. FIG. 2 is a side view schematically showing light from a light-emitting decoration at a standby position when the pachinko machine is viewed from the side. FIG. 2 is a side view schematically showing light from a light-emitting decoration at an appearance position when the pachinko machine is viewed from the side. It is a figure which shows the back decorative board|substrate in which several holes were provided. It is a front view showing the light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a light emitting area on the side surface side when the game board is viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view showing a light emitting area on the side surface side when the game board is viewed from the left rear. It is a diagram showing an opening provided on the back side of the effect display device. FIG. 99(a) is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of a cross section taken along line CC in FIG. 99(a). It is a front view of the game board in a modification. (A) is a front perspective view of a dot matrix display, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (A), and (C) and (D) are front views of a substrate in a modified example. be. It is a time chart showing the control state of the dot matrix display. It is an explanatory view showing an example of display contents of a dot matrix display. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of an acoustic decoration board, the through-hole on either side, and a reflective sheet. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the position where the light emitted from the pachinko machine installed on the game island can be visually recognized. It is a detailed diagram of the main control unit in the game board. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a signal path when a handle touch sensor detects a signal. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of firing permission command-related processing executed in peripheral control unit steady processing. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine while changing the setting values. It is a time chart showing a modification example of the behavior of the pachinko machine while changing the setting value. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-balls counting process performed by main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting suggestion performance related processing performed in peripheral control part steady processing. This is a specific example of a setting suggestion effect when a normal execution pattern is selected. This is a specific example of a setting suggestion performance when selecting restriction execution patterns A and B. FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine showing the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, which connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame lower assembly 40, which is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in front view.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 182 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. Covers a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral device located on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12), an effect display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the game panel 1100. , and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (brass is used in this embodiment) that are in contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. , a general prize opening 2001 that grants a predetermined benefit to the player (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) by accepting or passing game balls B, a first starting opening 2002, a gate part 2003, and a second starting opening. It includes an opening 2004, a first grand prize opening 2005, and a second grand prize opening 2006. Obstacle nails N having a golden color are planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a first big winning hole 2005, and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B enters the general prize opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate part 2003, second starting opening 2004, first big winning opening 2005, second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. , the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, or displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, Left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production The unit 3800 and the like can be used to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., thereby entertaining the players.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis, and are attached to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flat to the right on the right side surface from the part opposite to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulged portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the upper outer frame member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part, and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c extending downward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 13b. The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends briefly to the contact portion 13d. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part, and the left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends in a short direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting portion 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart laterally, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. At the same time, there is a box-shaped curtain rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first one. Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punched metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders, and communicates the interior space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain plate with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21(a) seen from the front bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a part on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal part 60a vertically and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a surface view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 182 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100; the door frame left side unit 400, which is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 which has a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and has a door window 101a penetrating the front and back, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear, and the speaker duct 103 attached near the right end of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 is attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 105 when viewed from the rear. A door frame relay board cover 107 covers the handle rear relay board 106, which covers the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a handle rear relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. In addition, hereinafter, the frame composed of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be referred to as a "front frame".

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is launched into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing a game where you type.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side when viewed from the front, and closes the front side of the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The gaming area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 which has a rectangular flat shape and whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 which is attached to the lower right front side of the door frame base 101 and to which a handle unit 180 is attached. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front left outside of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the door frame base 101 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side forming the inner periphery and both left and right sides are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and slanted so that the left end side projects slightly further forward than the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. There is an insertion recess 101c that is recessed from the rear to the front near the right end in front view, into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and an insertion recess 101c that passes through the cylinder lock 130 in the front and back directions. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated back and forth on the left side when viewed from the front, and the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are inserted forward. A ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting parts]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching a handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle attachment member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a from the rear end of the tube portion 102a, and a tube portion 102b. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) protrusions 102c protrude into the portion 102a, extend over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a, and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b with screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 102b in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 101b on the door frame base 101.

The cylindrical portion 102a has an inner diameter slightly larger than an outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided at the top of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided at the bottom of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c on the handle base 181. Therefore, in the handle attachment member 102, the base 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the cylindrical part 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

In addition, since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle attachment member 102 can be attached to the slanted handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is in an inclined state extending to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 32, 33, and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. and FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the upper part of the rectangle extending up and down, when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub-relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is used to relay connections between the window interior decoration part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and various boards of the main body frame 4. The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (the portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed into a box shape with an open front and left side in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located, and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat door frame base 101 and imparting rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 that are vertically spaced apart from each other on the back side of the right reinforcing frame 112 are engaged with the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left, right, and upper sides of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch part 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1g. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123, and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular in front view, and flat protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protrusion piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1h. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 in a hinge-rotatable manner relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. I can do it.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 to be described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening, closing and locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the dish unit body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22, etc.).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141 and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extracting port 141b on the rear side of the ball extracting member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. It includes a weight portion 143d that protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 that moves downward through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 when the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 is pressed. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, and the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 206) of the dispensing control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission section 242b, causing the operation transmission section 242b to move downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part 242b, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. The partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 in which the operation transmitting part 242b with which the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 contacts is formed is biased upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extraction member 143, etc. 143a can prevent it from rebounding.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the batted ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142 and recessed forward. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proofing member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the attached string to cause an unauthorized game ball B to enter or exit the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the unauthorized game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launching device 540 is The force causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is inserted. The ball can be cut at the narrowed part of the shape, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1k. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that are fired by the ball firing device 540 and do not reach the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and communicates the lower normal delivery passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. Ball passage 150a, and a full ball receiver that opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full ball dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. A port 150b is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives the filled game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open toward the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received in the full ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 91). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and also allows the player to view the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, and is spaced apart from side to side. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is something.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 that is attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle that covers the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover pedestal 183 is attached to the handle base 181, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") that is attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183. A transparent handle cover 185 is attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decoration board 184 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, a handle 182 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and the transmission gear 188 through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are placed in each of the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle attachment member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d that are spaced apart from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction and protrude outward, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extend in an arc shape as a center and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slits 182e and is locked. A locking protrusion 182f is provided.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. To be more specific, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, which is the part that most protrudes from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, and bulges outward. The side surface in the direction of is concave (gouged) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 182b has a part that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182 and is separated from the most protruding part of the first protrusion 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in the clockwise direction. protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in a clockwise direction at the most protruding portion that bulges outward, and an opposite side surface in a counterclockwise direction curves inward. The first protrusion 182a is recessed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

The third protrusion 182c has a portion that most protrudes from the general outer circumferential surface of the handle 182, which is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of approximately 70 degrees in the clockwise direction. It stands out at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c has side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially straight line, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is sloped more gently than the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the most protruding part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding part of the third protrusion 182c by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees in the clockwise direction, and is further away from the first protrusion 182a. It stands out somewhat high. This fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape and includes three attachment bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the attachment boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the attachment boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward and is transparent. An inner lens 185a formed three-dimensionally from a transparent member is attached to the inside of the handle cover 185 on the back side of the handle cover 185. The surface of the inner lens 185a is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the surface of the handle decoration board 184 disposed behind the inner lens 185a ( It is difficult for the player to clearly see the multiple LEDs mounted on the mounting surface. In addition, the inner lens 185a may have a lens cut on its back surface as well as its front surface (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on its back surface instead of the front surface of the inner lens 185a. (may be formed into a polyhedron). The handle cover 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184. Note that the front surface of the handle cover 185 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the front and back surfaces of the handle cover 185 may have a lens cut. Alternatively, the back surface of the handle cover 185 may be provided with a lens cut (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located further back than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180, and when a player touches the handle 182, etc., it detects the static electricity that acts on the player, and prevents the player from touching the handle 182, etc. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the solenoid fires with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. In other words, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 182 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 Firing solenoid 542 is deactivated. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning to the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving force.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is rotated most clockwise when viewed from the front. When the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the greatest force (so-called "right-handed hitting"), the fourth protrusion 182d is the same as the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is approximately the same as that of the first protrusion 182a, the player can comfortably maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a. It is possible to reduce the player's sense of fatigue and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and a plate base unit 210 attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a dish unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right side of the attachment base 213, and a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213. It includes an upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251; a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit body 252 spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions; It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 which are attached below the plate left upper decoration unit 270 and the plate right upper decoration unit 275, respectively.

The production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a transparent rotary operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a transparent press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. ing. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. an annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation section 302; a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation section 302; and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation section 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 to which the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 that emits light to decorate the production operation ring 330, a decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the production operation ring decoration board 352, and a display operation ring decoration board 353 that is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. a vibration speaker 354, a production operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. It is equipped with.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than in the left and right center when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right side in front view, and has a guide passage section 201a (FIG. 46) whose depth in the front and back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage section 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage section 201a when viewed from the front sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 moves the game ball from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball feed port 211e. It is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game ball The static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed into a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by a lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit seen from the back. Moreover, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the performance operation unit 300 are attached to the front side.

The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the upper plate body 212 at the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 attached to the right side of the mounting base 213 at the front surface of the plate unit base 211. A tray unit relay board 214 is provided.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper tray ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the pan unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e that penetrates through the upper plate body 212, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the tray unit base 211 has a mounting protrusion 211f that protrudes forward to the right of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and on which the mounting base is placed, and a mounting projection 211f that projects forward on the right side of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e, and A slider insertion hole 211g passes through the lower part of the plate body in the front and back, and through which the operation transmission section 242b of the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is inserted, and a slider insertion hole 211g passes through the lower right corner of the plate body in the front and back. A handle insertion hole 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion hole through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, which penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. The opening 211i is provided.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port 211e, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the tray ball, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball socket 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball socket 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240. B is supplied from the ball socket 241a of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45, 46, and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with an open upper and rear side. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and back direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 while being placed on the upper surface of the mounting projection 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed into a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end, and a through hole 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is inserted through the insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 is connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, a plate lower left decorative board 283, and a plate lower right decorative board 288. , and for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and also discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202. After inserting cash or a prepaid card into a machine (omitted), a predetermined number of game balls B are lent into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. This function is used to return the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the loaned game ball B, and to adjust the sound volume related to the performance to be louder or softer.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper plate ball removal button 222 on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the ejection button 222 and has transparency, and a ball lending operation base 223 that is located on the lower right side of the upper plate ball ejection button 222 on the upper surface of the base portion 221. a volume up button 226 located on the lower left of the base section 221, a volume down button 227 located below the volume up button 226 on the top surface of the base section 221, and a ball located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. It includes a lending button 224, a return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223. ing.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (distance dimension over which the upper plate ball withdrawal button 222 moves downward when the player presses it). ) The pressing operation part of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a (reed type) can be pushed slightly downward to turn on the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, while the player can release the pressing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 moves upward to its original position, the pressing operation portion of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns upward, and the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player presses it (the distance dimension that the upper plate ball extraction button 222 moves downward when the player presses the button). ) The press operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) can be pushed slightly downward to turn on the return button tactile switch 225a, but when the player releases the press operation, The return button 225 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation portion of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward, allowing the return button tactile switch 225a to be turned off. The ball rental display section is composed of three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section when the ball rental machine is out of order.

The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged so that one of its three vertices faces upward, and when pressed by the player, it moves slightly downward (when the player presses it) (It is small compared to the distance that the upper plate bulb removal button 222 moves downward when operated.) The press operation part of the tactile switch 226a (surface mount type) for the volume up button is pushed slightly downward, and the button for the volume up button is moved downward. While the tactile switch 226a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation part of the volume up button tactile switch 226a returns upward. The volume up button tactile switch 226a can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, and is arranged so that one of its three vertices faces downward. (It is small compared to the distance that the upper plate bulb removal button 222 moves downward when operated.) The press operation part of the tactile switch 227a (surface mount type) for the volume down button is pushed slightly downward and the volume down button is moved downward. While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves upward to its original position, and the pressing operation part of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The volume down button tactile switch 227a can be turned off.

The ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball lending board 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. It is electrically connected to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. , without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side, the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 described later) The peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (controls the progress of the performance) via the performance drive board 1720 (described later) that drives the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. It is electrically connected to a peripheral control board 1510) which will be described later. The ball rental board 228 and the volume adjustment board 229 are housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 in an adjacent state.

In this way, the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220. The door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 in which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted are connected electrically. The door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side that is connected to is a completely different relay board, and in the various relay boards on the door frame 3 side, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 224a for the return button, etc. The signal transmission path for the switch 225a and the three 7-segment LEDs and the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are configured so that they do not coexist on the same relay board. . This is because the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is a path through which so-called main side signals are transmitted, so the door on the door frame 3 side In contrast, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is a path through which so-called main side signals are transmitted. Therefore, the configuration is such that it passes through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side.

The top surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228 excludes the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are soldered. In the entire area, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist solution. On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the ball rental board 228, the area where a connector (lead type) (not shown) is mounted is a solid green color in the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which soldering is performed. A green resist layer is formed by the resist. Furthermore, although not shown, the top surface (front surface or front surface) of the ball lending board 228 includes a ball lending button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a, three 7-segment LEDs, etc. Near the side electronic component, the part number of the front side electronic component, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component) (This may include the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic components on the front side, and the model number of the electronic components on the front side.) Printed on green resist using silk screen printing. Although not shown, on the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball lending board 228, the part number of the back side electronic component and the back side electronic component are arranged near the back side electronic component such as a connector (surface mount type). Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position of the back side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, ) is printed on a solid green resist by silk printing using white paint that stands out against the green color.

On the other hand, the top surface (front surface or surface) of the volume control board 229 has no pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are soldered. In the entire area, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, the area where a connector (not shown) is mounted is covered with a solid white resist over the entire area excluding soldered pads, through holes, lands, etc. A resist layer is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229 is equipped with electronic components near the front surface, such as a tactile switch 226a for a volume up button and a tactile switch 227a for a volume down button. In addition, the part number of the front side electronic component, the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component The markings on the front side indicating the component mounting direction (mounting direction) and the model number of the electronic components on the front side are solid white with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. It is printed on the resist by silk printing. Although not shown, on the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the volume control board 229, near the back side electronic components such as connectors, there is an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic components and the position where the back side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color.

In this way, the colors of the resist liquids applied to the ball rental board 228 and the volume adjustment board 229, which are accommodated in the ball rental operation unit 220 in an adjacent state, are different in color. To explain this, the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is the path through which the so-called main side signal is transmitted, as described above. Therefore, the tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. It is electrically connected to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. However, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is not a path through which the so-called main side signal is transmitted, as described above. The tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are mounted on the upper surface (front or surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball lending operation unit 220, and The drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 according to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 described later) does not go through the door frame sub-relay board 105 and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. The peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (the peripheral control unit 1500 (described later) that can control the progress of the performance) It is electrically connected to the control board 1510).

That is, in this embodiment, the volume control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance) on the gaming board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1, is electrically connected to the The adjustment board 229 and the ball lending board 228 that is electrically connected to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) that is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to each other in the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. However, the volume control board 229 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating, whereas the ball lending board 228 is coated with a green resist liquid, which is different from the white. Since a green coating film is formed, a worker who connects the wiring can use the color of the coating film thus formed (in other words, the color of the resist) as a guide to connect electrically to the volume control board 229. This can contribute to preventing erroneous connections between the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 and the wiring that is electrically connected to the ball lending board 228. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing incorrect wiring connections.

The volume control board 229 also includes a volume up button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to increase the volume related to the performance, and a volume down button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to decrease the volume related to the performance. 227a is implemented, and the detection results (ON signal due to ON, OFF signal due to OFF) by the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are the control device in the pachinko machine 1. The information is transmitted to the side peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance), and the player can request the payout of game balls B by lending balls to the ball lending board 228. A tactile switch 224a for a ball rental button, a tactile switch 225a for a return button that can request a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card, and a tactile switch 225a for a return button that can request a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) to return cash or a prepaid card. Three 7-segment LEDs that can display the remaining amount of the prepaid card are installed, and the detection results by the ball rental button tactile switch 224a and the return button tactile switch 225a (ON signal when ON, OFF signal when OFF) ) is transmitted to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. In addition, by transmitting the drive signal from the ball rental machine (for example, CR unit) to the ball rental board 228, the ball rental display section configured by three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball rental board 228 displays the ball rental information. While the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the machine is displayed, the volume can be adjusted from the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance). No drive signal is output to the board 229, and the volume control board 229 operates based on a drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance). No electronic components that make up the display section are mounted. In this way, the position of the player's operation is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the performance) on the gaming board 5 side, which is the control device in the pachinko machine 1. Since there is a path to the ball rental machine (for example, CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, it is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball lending board 228 are incorrectly connected, an unintended disadvantage may occur to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, a white resist liquid is applied to the ball lending board 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist liquid different from white is applied to the ball lending board 228. A green coating film is formed to prevent erroneous connections.

In addition, surface-mounted electronic components are used as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229, whereas surface mount type electronic components are used as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229. The tactile switch 224a for the ball rental button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the three 7-segment LEDs are lead-type electronic components. It is possible to determine which wiring is electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and which is electrically connected to the ball rental board 228, based on the type of the wiring. This can contribute to preventing erroneous connections.

By the way, although the reflectance of light is highest for white and lower for dark, as described above, the volume control board 229, which is not provided with a display section, is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film. On the other hand, the ball rental board 228 on which the ball rental display section is provided is coated with a dark green resist solution to form a green coating film. This reduces the efficiency with which the light emitted by the ball rental display section is reflected on the upper surface (front surface or surface) of the ball rental board 228, so that it does not interfere with the production by the production device other than the ball rental display section. I can do it. Note that in this embodiment, green is used as the dark color, but instead of green, purple or black may be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball lending board 228 connects to the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. (for example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 is connected without going through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side or the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. , a drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (an effect to be described later that drives a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and back unit 3000 in response to commands from a peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later). It is electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later and can control the progress of the production), via the drive board 1720), and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. It is connected. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are present on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, for the front (surface) of the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, the same color as the resist liquid applied to the ball lending board 228 is adopted, and a green resist liquid is applied. The configuration is such that a green coating film is formed, and the same color as the color of the resist solution applied to the volume control board 229 is adopted for the front (surface) of the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. It is preferable to apply a white resist solution to form a white coating film. Note that the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is more brittle than the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution. When manufacturing by arranging and cutting out multiple substrates from the same material), cracks or tears may occur.

By the way, when manufacturing a board, as mentioned above, multiple boards are arranged and cut out from a single copper-clad laminate (base material) of a fixed length, so the color of the silk paint and the resist solution are different. The colors will be the same, and a plurality of substrates having the same color will be manufactured. For this reason, for example, by examining white boards, it may be possible to determine whether they are manufactured from the same copper-clad laminate (base material), and if there is a problem with white boards. Once discovered, when checking for other defects, it is sufficient to first trace (find) and examine other white substrates one by one, which has the advantage of contributing to early detection of defects.

Note that the volume adjustment operation, such as increasing the volume related to the performance based on the volume up button 226 or adjusting the volume related to the performance based on the volume down button 227, is performed for a certain period of time (for example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1). The variable display will be displayed for a certain period of time until the peripheral control MPU (hereinafter, a device that also has the functions of a peripheral control MPU may be referred to as a "peripheral control IC" instead of a peripheral control MPU) starts up. It may be possible to execute the special symbol by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) at all times except for a certain period before and after the special symbol stops, or it may be possible to execute the special symbol by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) at all times except for a certain period before and after the special symbol stops. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) allows execution by the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) only when specific conditions such as the period during which the performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration are satisfied. It may be something that Further, the volume adjustment result based on the volume adjustment operation, such as increasing the volume related to the performance based on the volume up button 226 or adjusting the volume related to the performance based on the volume down button 227, is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control MPU). control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or peripheral control IC) may reflect the adjustment at a timing later than the timing of the volume adjustment operation depending on the situation (whether or not variable display is in progress, progress of production, etc.) It may be reflected.

Incidentally, gaming machines having multiple boards have been proposed in the past (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047] and FIG. 5). In the case where the wires are placed in the same position, the person performing the wiring connection work may erroneously connect the wiring electrically connected to one board and the wiring electrically connected to the other board.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before upper plate ball extraction and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45, 46, and the like. The upper plate ball removal pre-unit 230 and the upper plate ball post-removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove the upper plate 201 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the placement protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 at a position behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 that is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and extends vertically, and a front plate that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A slider 232 is provided. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and its lower end is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 that is attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a rear base 241 that is attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 in the vertical direction. an upper plate ball extracting slider 242 that is attached so as to be slidable toward the upper plate ball extracting slider 242; a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward; and a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It is equipped with

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b guides the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then to the rear, and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the accepted game ball B to the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view is provided.

When the ball socket 241a is assembled to the pan base unit 210, the ball socket 241a extends forward through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e of the tray unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an actuation receiving part 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and protruding backward from the rear surface which is the rear side of the actuation receiving part 242a. An operation transmission section 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving part 242a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving part 242a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface. In addition, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding rearward from the rear base 241, and an upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding backward from the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and biases the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the urging force of the spring 243, and can be moved downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

The upper plate ball removal pre-unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal post unit 240 are such that the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper movement end. The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned at the upper end of the movement via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving part 242a. In addition, because the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the batted ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball ejecting button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball ejecting slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball ejecting slider 242 is activated. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmitting portion 242b can now move downward, and the ball extracting member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extracting member 143 to open the partition portion 143a. is retreated from between the entrance port 141a and the ball exit port 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b are discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entrance 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is removed via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiver 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entry port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray before ball extraction unit 230 and the upper tray after ball extraction unit 240 feed the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit seen from the back. Moreover, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into its main parts and seen from the back. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, and the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit which are attached below the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. In addition, when the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the upper part, extends downward, and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward in a flat plate shape from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

The left and right upper side bulges 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and have a plate upper left decoration unit 270, a plate lower left decoration unit 280, a plate right upper decoration unit 275, and a plate lower right decoration unit on the front of each. 285 is installed. The right end of the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

The plate unit main body 252 also has a front notch 252e that is cut upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. A bottom cutout 252f is provided below the bottom. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Furthermore, the dish unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decoration part 252b and into which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle attachment member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. A production operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front and back and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction. 300 is attached. The production operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled to the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom cutout 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower plate 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower plate 202 by opening and closing the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball extractor unit 260 includes a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball extractor base 261 that is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view, and a lower plate ball extractor base 261 that is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in plan view. A slider 262 that is attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable back and forth, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that biases the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-back direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically positioned to match the lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole is formed therethrough. The through hole of the lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending back and forth, and is attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left of the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

The left end of the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending up and down, and the right end side is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 at a position to the left of the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the hole, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. A slit extending left and right is formed in the lower plate ball removal cover 265, into which a projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower plate ball removing unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removing base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the normal state of the lower plate ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is located at the forward moving end due to the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball removal hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball eject button 263 is pushed backward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower plate ball eject button 263. becomes. As this slider 262 moves backward, the projecting pin of the slider 262 presses the lower plate ball removal cover 265 backward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves backward with the left end side as the center. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal cover 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is in an open state. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

Note that when the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressure on the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball extraction lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 are continuously rotated. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward, and the holding mechanism 266 releases the slider 262. Ru. Then, when the pressure on the lower plate ball ejecting button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball ejecting button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265. Thereby, game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The upper left plate decoration unit 270 includes a transparent upper left plate decoration body 271 that has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends left and right, a transparent upper left inner lens 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left plate decoration body 271, and an upper left inner plate A plate upper left decorative board 273 is attached to the rear side of the lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)").

The plate upper left decoration body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate upper left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the central axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the central axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate upper left decoration body 271 is transparent. It should be noted that the surface of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate may be provided with lens cuts on its front and back surfaces. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back surface of the upper left plate decoration body 271 (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper left inner lens 272 is inserted into the upper left decorative body 271 from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate are of a surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and by emitting light, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light. . The upper left inner lens 272 is transparent. The surface of the upper left inner lens 272 of the plate is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract the light irregularly, and the upper left inner lens 272 of the plate is arranged behind the upper left inner lens 272 of the plate. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 273 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the upper left inner lens 272 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the upper left inner lens 272, the back surface may be provided with a lens cut. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

When the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the upper left plate decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper left plate decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The upper right plate decoration unit 275 includes a transparent upper right plate decoration body 276 that has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends from side to side, a transparent upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the upper right plate decoration body 276, and a transparent upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the upper right plate decoration body 276. A plate upper right decorative board 278 is attached to the rear side of the lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)").

The plate upper right decoration body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate upper right decoration body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate upper right decoration body 276 is transparent. It should be noted that the surface of the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate may be provided with lens cuts on its front and back surfaces. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back surface of the upper right plate decoration body 276 (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The upper right inner lens 277 is inserted into the upper right decorative body 276 from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and by emitting light, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate can be decorated with light. . The upper right inner lens 277 is transparent. The surface of the upper right inner lens 277 is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can diffusely refract light, and the upper right inner lens 277 is placed behind the upper right inner lens 277. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 278 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the upper right inner lens 277 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the upper right inner lens 277 may be provided with a lens cut. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

When the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and its left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous. Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the upper right plate decoration board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step in which the upper left side of the plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right side of the plate decoration unit 275 are higher. As a result, the player can hook his or her finger using the level difference between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulge 252a, and the game balls B in the upper tray 201 can be evenly distributed. It can also be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Plate bottom left decoration unit and plate bottom right decoration unit]
The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. It will be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and both left and right sides of the production operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a transparent lower left plate decoration body 281 that has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends left and right, a transparent lower left inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, and a lower left inner plate It is provided with a plate lower left decorative board 283 attached to the rear side of the lens 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)").

The plate lower left decoration body 281 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape with the center at the rear in plan view. is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge part 252a. The plate lower left decoration body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the plate upper left decoration body 271 and the plate right upper decoration body 276, and the center axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and the center axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left rear at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and it is shaped like a bent semi-cylindrical cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration body 281 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the plate lower left decorative body 281 changes so that it becomes thinner toward the left end side. The plate lower left decorative body 281 is transparent. Note that the surface of the lower left plate decorative body 281 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front and back surfaces of the lower left plate decorative body 281 may be provided with lens cuts. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back surface of the lower left plate decorative body 281 (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower left inner lens 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative board 283 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light. . The lower left inner lens 282 is transparent. The surface of the lower left inner lens 282 is cut into a polyhedron (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board 283 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the lower left inner lens 282 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the lower left inner lens 282, the back surface may be provided with a lens cut. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

When the plate lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left edge of the plate upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end is located below the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Continuous with the left edge. The left end of the lower left plate decorative unit 280 appears to have sunk into the door frame 3 because the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 is formed into a spherical shape. Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left plate decoration body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower left plate decoration board 283 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration body 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right plate decoration unit 285 includes a transparent lower right plate decoration body 286 that has a semi-cylindrical shape and extends from side to side, and a transparent lower right inner lens 287 attached to the rear side of the lower right plate decoration body 286. , a lower right decorative board 288 that is attached to the rear side of the lower right inner lens 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). , is equipped with.

The plate lower right decoration body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape with the center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate lower right decoration body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the plate upper left decoration body 271 and the plate right upper decoration body 276, and the center axis extends slightly obliquely to the upper right rear at the right end, and at the left end, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right rear. The central axis extends left and right, and it is shaped like a bent semi-cylindrical cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed into a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the plate lower right decoration body 286 changes so that it becomes thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decorative body 286 is transparent. Note that the surface of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the surface and the back of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate may be provided with a lens cut. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back side of the lower right plate decoration body 286 (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The lower right inner lens 287 is inserted into the lower right decorative body 286 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative board 288 of the plate are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and by emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is decorated with light. I can do it. The lower right inner lens 287 is transparent. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 is cut into a polyhedron (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative board 288 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. Lens cuts may be made (may be formed into a polyhedron), and lens cuts may be made on the front and back surfaces of the lower right inner lens 287 (may be formed into a polyhedron). Instead of the front surface of the dish lower right inner lens 287, a lens cut may be made on the back surface (it may be formed into a polyhedron).

When the plate lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is located below the right edge of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, and its left end is located below the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right edge of . The right end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285 appears to have sunk into the door frame 3 because the right end of the lower right plate decoration body 286 is formed into a spherical shape. Since the lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right plate decoration body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right plate decoration board 288 are made to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the device can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, making it look like a fluorescent light is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the production operation unit in the dish unit as seen from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation button. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the production operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the production when a player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation section 301 is composed of a transparent rotary operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a transparent press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. In the production operation section 301, a rotation operation section 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and a pressure operation section 303 is arranged within the ring. . The press operation section 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and includes a transparent central press operation section 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation section 302, and an outer periphery of the center press operation section 303a and the rotation operation section. 302, and a transparent annular outer periphery pressing operation part 303b disposed between the inner periphery of

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. an annular production operation ring 330 that has a rotation operation section 302; a rotation drive unit 340 that rotates the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330; and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. It includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the operating section 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation section base 320.

The production operation unit 300 also includes a production operation ring decoration board 352 which is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the production operation ring 330 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a production operation ring decoration board 352. The decorative board cover 353 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit is placed so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330. It includes a performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation section relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the performance operation unit 300 at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper and rear side.

The production operation section cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is concave downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and a unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward. A transparent dish center upper inner lens 313 is attached from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a transparent dish center upper inner lens 313 is attached to the rear side of the dish center upper inner lens 313 and can emit light toward the front. A plate center upper decorative board 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 attached from the rear inside the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower inner lens. 315, and a plate center lower decorative board 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape with the front side bulging downward from the rear center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side thereof is the production operation unit attachment part of the dish unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is installed in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled to the dish unit 200, a plurality of drainage holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 has a semi-circular shape in plan view that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. installed. The unit front cover 312 has a transparent plate center upper decorative body 312a whose semicircular arc bulges forward extends in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a lower plate center upper decorative body 312a. It includes a transparent plate center lower decoration body 312b whose semicircular arc bulges forward and extends in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The plate center upper decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are made by cutting a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) in half and extending in a semicircular arc shape with the cut surface facing the center side. It is formed in a bent shape. The plate center lower decoration body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature compared to the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the plate center upper decoration body 312a. It is formed into a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decorative body 312a projects further forward than the front end of the lower plate center decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled into the plate unit 200, both left and right ends of the plate center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the plate right upper decorative unit 275, and the plate center lower decorative body Both left and right ends of the plate 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is transparent.

Furthermore, when the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the same as the door frame. The distance is approximately 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left and right direction.

The dish center upper inner lens 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into and attached to the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear. The plate center upper decorative board 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and has a front (outward ) is equipped with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light toward. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center upper decorative board 314 are of a surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated with light. Note that the surface of the center upper plate decoration 312a may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front and back surfaces of the upper plate center decoration 312a may be provided with lens cuts. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface of the plate center upper decoration body 312a (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The dish center upper inner lens 313 is transparent. The surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish is below (or behind) It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate center upper decorative board 314. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish may be cut. may have a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The dish center lower inner lens 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into and attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear. The plate center lower decorative board 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b, and has a front (outside) upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") ) is equipped with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light toward. The plurality of LEDs on the plate center lower decorative board 316 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be decorated with light. Note that the surface of the lower plate center decorative body 312b may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface as well as the front surface of the lower plate center decorative body 312b may be provided with a lens cut. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface of the plate center lower decoration body 312b (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The dish center lower inner lens 315 is transparent. The surface of the inner lens 315 at the lower center of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the surface of the inner lens 315 at the lower center of the dish is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate center lower decorative board 316. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the lower dish center inner lens 315 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the lower dish center inner lens 315 may be provided with a lens cut. may have a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular arc shape. When the LEDs on the upper center decorative board 314 and the LEDs on the lower center decorative board 316 are made to emit light, the entire area can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, making it appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the plate center upper decoration 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decoration 271 and the plate right upper decoration 276, and the plate center lower decoration 312b is connected to the plate lower left decoration 281 and the plate right It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The operation unit base 320 is inserted from above into the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the section 212a. The operating unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top, and is transparent (for example, milky white).

The operation unit base 320 includes a main body part 321 which has a substantially cubic box-like outer shape and is open at the top, and a main body part 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body part 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a flange portion 322 that is attached to the main body portion 321; a plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 that protrude downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; portion 324, and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward, and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body 321 formed in a size that can accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. A vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 from below, and a portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed as a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified and the vibrations can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the production operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 has a through hole formed at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall to discharge liquid that has entered the main body portion 321 . In the main body 321, a rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall, and an operation section relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has an outer periphery having a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. A production operation ring decorative board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring attachment base 331 of the production operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 of the production operation section cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operating ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing part 325, the upper part of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the flange part. 322 and is exposed to the outside.

When the operating unit base 320 is assembled to the production operating unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Furthermore, when assembled into the production operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in contact with it.

[3-5e-3. Performance operation ring]
The performance operation ring 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55, 56, and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation ring of the performance operation unit viewed from the front from above, and FIG. 55(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from the front from below. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the production operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (rotary operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is approximately twice as large as the longitudinal dimension of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter that is approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in a circular ring. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is approximately 13 cm.

The performance operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably placed on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 are in contact with the outer circumferential surface of the ring mounting base 332 and are rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. A ring removal prevention member 334 is provided. The ring attachment base 331, the rotation base 332, the bush 333, and the ring retaining member 334 are each formed transparent.

In addition, the production operation ring 330 is attached to a ring outer upper cover 335 that is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitutes a part of the rotation operation section 302, and to the lower side of the outer ring upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 is attached to the upper surface of the rotary base 332 on the inner circumferential side of the outer ring upper cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 is a part of the rotary operation section 302. A ring inner cover 337 is provided. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

The ring attachment base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320 and an inner diameter that is approximately the same size as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and a mounting portion 331a on the upper surface that is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside of the mounting portion 331a. A boss portion 331b protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and is used to rotatably attach the bush 333, and a boss portion 331b is provided at intervals in the circumferential direction on the outside of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. It is provided with through holes 331c that penetrate vertically in a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the performance operation ring decoration board 352.

The rotating base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotating base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed into a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331, and when assembled to the performance operation ring 330, faces downward from the inner circumferential side of the ring attachment base 331. This ring gear 332a meshes with the ring side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface part 335a and an outer upper surface part 335a in which an arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b that extends downward from the inner circumferential end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center, and a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c are arranged in the circumferential direction. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 includes an outer lower surface part 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer and lower surface parts projecting upward and toward the center from the inside of the outer lower surface part 336a in the circumferential direction. An outer lower cover mounting portion 336b is provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The inner ring cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc constituting the inside and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. The cylinder surface portion 337b has a shaped cylinder surface portion 337b, and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylinder surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the inner ring cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylinder surface portion 337b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same size as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment part 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the performance operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a region that is 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole has a donut shape. The production operation ring 330 can be decorated with light by a production operation ring decoration board 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotational drive unit 340 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57(a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 57(b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit seen from the back. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front right side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the front left side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotationally driving the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 and detecting rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover which rotatably attaches the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346.

The rotational drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotational position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

The rotation drive base 341 is formed into a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-back direction, and is open to the left. The operating ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a first gear 344a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear, and a second gear 344b in the form of a spur gear that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and a gear portion 345a that protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a and extends in the circumferential direction. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344, and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The circumferential length of the plurality of detection pieces 345b is the same as the interval at which they are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction at an interval that is different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It looks like this. Thereby, the rotational direction and rotational speed of the rotational operation section 302 in the production operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is connected to the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located within the performance operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the performance operation unit 300.

The rotational drive unit 340 is driven by the operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily control the rotational operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. It can be rotated in the direction of Furthermore, the rotary drive unit 340 allows the rotary operation section 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by repeatedly rotating the drive gear 343 in the forward and reverse directions within a predetermined rotation angle range using the operation ring drive motor 342. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type performance can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302.

In addition, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation direction in which the rotation operation was performed. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player's rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation by the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to provide the rotary operation section 302 with an operational feeling that corresponds to the content of the player participation type performance, or to provide a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is for transmitting rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330, and is a gear for the operation section base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a on the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotational drive unit 340. It includes a drive side gear part 350b in the shape of a spur gear that meshes with the gear part 345a of the gear member 345. The ring side gear section 350a and the drive side gear section 350b have pitch circles formed to have the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the production operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then attaching the gear attachment member 351 to the operation unit base 320. It will be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the ring side gear part 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the performance operation ring 330, and the drive side gear part 350b is It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotational drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Performance operation ring decoration board]
The performance operation ring decoration board 352 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the performance operation ring 330, and can decorate the performance operation ring 330 (rotary operation section 302) with light by appropriately lighting a plurality of LEDs.

The performance operation ring decorative board 352 is formed in the form of a circular ring divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative board 352a on the front side and a rear decorative board 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "surfaces (mounting surfaces)") of the front decorative board 352a and the rear decorative board 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the performance operation ring decoration board 352 are of a surface-mounted type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The performance operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the performance operation ring 330 in a state where it is assembled to the performance operation unit 300. The upper side of the performance operation ring decorative board 352 is covered with a transparent decorative board cover 353. The decorative board cover 353 is formed into a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and is a front board cover that covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a, and a rear board cover 353b that covers the rear decorative board 352b from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The production operation ring decorative board 352 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface that emit light, so that the decorative board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331 are formed transparent. or through the through hole 331c of the decorative board cover 353 and the ring mounting base 331, the transparent ring outer upper cover 335, the transparent ring outer lower cover 336, and the transparent ring inner The cover 337 can be decorated with light from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration in which an LED is provided in the rotary operation section 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voices and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operating unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can present a more variety of effects to the player.

[3-5e-8. Performance operation button unit]
The performance operation button unit 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit of the performance operation unit as seen from the top front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 62(a) is a sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. The performance operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the performance operation ring 330, and has a transparent press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The press operation section 303 of the production operation button unit 360 includes a transparent cylindrical center press operation section 303a, and a transparent cylindrical outer circumferential press operation section 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation section 303a. , is made up of.

The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a border. A pair of guide shafts 362 extend upward in a cylindrical shape, and a disc-shaped disc-shaped member that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and has a circular outer circumference smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is attached to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361, and has a circular outer circumference approximately the same size as the button unit base 361. A pair of lift springs 365 are provided, each of which has a pair of guide shafts 362 inserted therethrough and biases the lift base 364 upward.

In addition, the production operation button unit 360 includes a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lift drive motor 367 that is attached to protrude upwards, the spur gear-like lift drive gear 368 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the lift drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A driven gear 369 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member is rotated by the driven gear 369 and has a central shaft 366 inserted therethrough, and is rotatably attached. 370, an elevator cam member 371 whose lower end is connected to the elevator cam drive gear member 370, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and which raises and lowers the elevator base 364 by rotating; and an elevator drive gear. 368, a driven gear 369, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed into a cylinder shape with a bottom that extends vertically and has an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 above the elevating base 364. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the lifting base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward; A transparent center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape with approximately the same diameter and closed at the upper end, and is attached to the upper end of the center button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363. The center button decoration board 376 is mounted on the top surface and has a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon that can emit light upward. The production operation button unit 360 includes a center button main body 373 and a center button cover 375, which constitute a center press operation section 303a.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes an annular outer button decoration board 377 that is attached to the upper surface of the lift base 364 outside the center button body 373 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and A transparent outer peripheral board cover 378 is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the center button main body 373, and the outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the outer periphery of the center button main body 373. A transparent cylindrical outer decorative inner lens 379 with three-dimensional decoration is arranged above the outer button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side of the part, and the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379. A transparent peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 and has a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. The production operation button unit 360 includes an outer substrate cover 378, an outer decorative inner lens 379, and an outer button cover 380, and constitutes an outer pressing operation section 303b.

The production operation button unit 360 also includes a press detection sensor 381 that is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the press operation of the press operation section 303, and a press detection sensor 381 that is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the press operation of the press operation section 303. It includes an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disc shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner circumferential diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. The base main body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately 1/2 the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of lift springs 365 are coil springs, and their lower ends are in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and their upper ends are in contact with the lift base 364. The lifting spring 365 has a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed to have an outer diameter that is approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a center hole 364b that is vertically penetrated through the center hole with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. It includes a standing wall portion 364c projecting upward in a cylindrical shape from the periphery of the central hole 364b, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the standing wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The vertical movement of the lift base 364 is restricted by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and a space is created between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373. is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing locations and is detected by an elevation detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through its center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed like this. By rotating, the elevating cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 using the cam portion 371a to elevate and lower the elevating base 364.

The center button body 373 has a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted thereinto, a central opening 373d penetrating through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364; It includes a press detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom portion 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted through the button spring 374.

The center button body 373 is formed into a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The center opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends briefly downward, and its lower end abuts the upper surface of the lift base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the center button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button body 373.

The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws with washers inserted therein are attached to the lower ends. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting upward movement of the center button main body 373.

The press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 detects when the bottom 373b (lower end of the center opening 373d) of the center button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lift base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 and protrudes downward. This central button body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker urging force than the lifting spring 365.

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is equipped with a transparent structure. The center button cover 375 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a bottom by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In this central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373.

The center button decorative board 376 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of a surface mount type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. ing. The center button decoration board 376 can decorate the center button cover 375 with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light as appropriate. The outer button decoration board 377 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of a surface mount type and is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light. ing. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can decorate the outer periphery decorative inner lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 includes an annular board part 378a that covers the upper side of the outer button decorative board 377 and is attached to the lifting base 364, and a cylindrical shape that extends upward from the inner periphery of the board part 378a and covers the center button body 373. It includes a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral board cover 378 is formed transparent.

The outer periphery decorative inner lens 379 has twisted portions that are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction and extend so as to move upward in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is attached above the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer periphery button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical part 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer periphery decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular part 380b extending from the upper end of the cylindrical part 380a toward the center. . In the outer button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b is formed to have an inner diameter approximately the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the production operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is biased upward by the pair of lift springs 365, and the lift base 364 is biased upward by the pair of lift springs 365. The locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371 is inserted from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position, having moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button body 373 is located at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 protrudes upward more than the top surface of the outer button cover 380. It becomes.

Therefore, when assembled into the production operation unit 300, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 protrudes slightly upwards from the top surface of the production operation ring 330, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 is higher than the top surface of the outer button cover 380. It also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63, etc.).

In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62(a)), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation section 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body 373 The press detection piece 373e is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press operation of the central press operation section 303a is detected. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed, the top surface of the center button cover 375 is at a height that substantially matches the top surface of the outer button cover 380 (see FIG. 65(c)).

In addition, in this state, even if the outer button cover 380 (outer press operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is also not detected by the detection sensor 381. In other words, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected.

When the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view in this lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 that meshes with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When this elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a visible in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c As the cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

As the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam part 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam part 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. Further, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) and the outer circumference button cover 380 (outer circumference press operation section 303b) at the lower position is maintained, and the center button cover 375 The entire pressing operation section 303 including the outer button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is protruding upward than the upper surface of the outer button cover 380.

When assembled to the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 will be in a state that protrudes more than the top surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65(b) etc.) reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation part 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374. The center button main body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the lift base 364, but the lift base 364 is in contact with the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation part 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the lift spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lift base 364, the outer periphery button cover 380 (outer periphery pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the lift base 364 is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer button cover 380 (outer press operation section 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lift spring 365 in the raised position, the lift base 364 is moved through the outer button cover 380 by the lift spring. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 as it moves downward against the urging force of the elevating base 365 . In this state, the outer button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the lift base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center press operation section 303a) protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 (press operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. 62(b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and is operated. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, it returns to its original lowered position.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53, 54, and the like. The operation section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 in the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 installed inside the board box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the production operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a plate center upper decoration board 314, a plate center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, by relaying the connection between the operation button lift drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210. There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in a left side view of the production operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance operation ring and the performance operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. 65(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a front view of the pan unit when the pressing operation part is pressed at the center. FIG. 7 is a front view of the dish unit when the operating section is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by a player. The performance operation section 301 is composed of a large annular rotary operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. The press operation section 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation section 303a located at the center of the rotation operation section 302, and an annular outer peripheral press operation section disposed between the center press operation section 303a and the rotation operation section 302. 303b.

The rotation operation section 302 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, an outer lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337 of the performance operation ring 330. The central pressing operation section 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the performance operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing operation section 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation section 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation section 303 disposed within the ring of the rotation operation section 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In the normal state, the production operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation section 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. Specifically, the top surface of the outer button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the top surface of the production operation ring 330, and the top surface of the center button cover 375 protrudes upward from the top surface of the outer button cover 380. (See Figure 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotational drive unit 340, the performance operation ring 330 is rotated through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

The operating ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operating section 302 can be rotated back and forth and vibrated. This vibration differs from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation section 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in a left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350. When the operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in a left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation using two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

Rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. To be more specific, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is larger than the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , an interval that is not a multiple of an integer. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected depending on the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotational speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type performance can be changed depending on the rotation direction of the rotation operation section 302. Furthermore, when a rotational operation of the rotational operation section 302 is detected, the rotational operation section 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotational operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby making it possible to lighten the rotational operation and assist it. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavier or a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330 is formed by an outer ring upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and an inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation section 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotary operation unit 302 is installed with the outer circumferential surface, the upper surface, and a portion of the inner circumferential surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by the player's hand. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation section 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation section 302 in a way that is easy for the player to do. sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated even when the push operation section 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. Note that since the rotary operation section 302 is attached to the operation section base 320 on the lower surface side, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation ring decoration board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular manner below the performance operation ring 330. Thereby, by causing the LED of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotation operation section 302 of the performance operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the performance operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation section 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in the row are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation section 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotary operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. Thereby, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decorative board) is provided inside the rotating rotary operation section 302.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in the lowered position, protruding slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central press operation section 303a of the press operation section 303 can be pressed. When the center press operation section 303a is pressed downward, the top surface of the center press operation section 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the top surface of the outer press operation section 303b (outer button cover 380), and the press is detected. The sensor 381 detects the pressure.

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer periphery press operation part 303b of the push operation part 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery press operation part 303b (outer button cover 380) does not move downward, and the press is detected. Pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the lift cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 comes off the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation part 303 is vigorously protruded upward together with the lifting base 364 to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation section 303 is located higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330.

When the center push operation section 303a is pressed downward with the push operation section 303 in the raised position, the center push operation section 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center push operation section 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press. Furthermore, the central pressing operation section 303a moves downward together with the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation section 303a and the outer circumferential pressing operation section 303b are moved downwardly from the rotating operation section 302. The height is approximately the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65(c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

Furthermore, when the outer circumference press operation section 303b is pressed downward with the press operation section 303 in the raised position, the upper surface of the central press operation section 303a remains in a state protruding upwardly than the upper surface of the outer circumference press operation section 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b becomes approximately at the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation section 302 (see FIG. 65(a)). . In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect a press.

In this way, regardless of whether the pressing operation section 303 of the present embodiment is in the lowered position or the raised position, unless the central pressing operation section 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, it will not be detected by the pressing detection sensor 381. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to firmly press and operate the central press operation section 303a, so that attention can be drawn to the operation of the performance operation section 301 in a player participation type performance. , it is possible to make the player participatory performance more enjoyable.

Note that even when the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the push operation section 303 is in the raised position, some players may use the push operation section 303 as a cue to make the rotation operation easier, or the push operation section 303 may get in the way and make it difficult to perform the rotation operation. As a result, the operability of the rotary operation section 302 can be changed, and more diverse operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. 66(a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 66(b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), and a door frame left side decorative board 402 to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to the left side base 401 of the door frame, and a transparent left side decoration of the door frame attached to the left side base 401 of the door frame to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. A body 404 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and is composed of a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The left side inner lens 403 is formed transparent. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the left side inner lens 403 has a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) that can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative board 402 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. Note that the left side inner lens 403 may have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the left side inner lens 403, the back surface may have a lens cut. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron). The door frame left side decoration body 404 is transparent. The door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decoration body 404 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. In addition, the surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface as well as the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be provided with a lens cut. A lens cut may be made (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 404 (may be formed into a polyhedron). good).

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is continuous with the left edge of the plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 in the plate unit 200. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. 69(a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69(b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit exploded and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to approximately the same position as the upper plate 201 and lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. and a plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b that can emit light and are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 is designed to make it difficult for players playing with the pachinko machine on the right to see inside the gaming area of the pachinko machine located on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the gaming area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, thereby creating a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the player.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically; A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically; and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A side window interior decoration part decorative board 413 is mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted in parts corresponding to the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b, and a side window interior decoration member. The transparent inner lens 414 is inserted into each of the plurality of side window inner decoration parts 410b of 412.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a transparent right side inner lens 415 that is placed in front of the front end of the side window internal decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411. A through hole 416a is formed that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the right side base 411 of the cage door frame and the right side surface of the right side inner lens 415, and penetrates in the left-right direction to form the side window 410a. It is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side inner lens 415, and is attached to the top and bottom so as to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a that extends in a flat plate shape in the forward and backward directions and penetrates in the left and right direction to form a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). It includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 and a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side inner lens 415.

The door frame right side base 411 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (in this case, three) of side window interior decoration parts 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration part 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated conical cylinder whose front end side has a slightly smaller outer diameter than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed into a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the right side outer panel 416 of the door frame. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper part with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is transparent. Note that the surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the side window interior decoration member 412 Lens cuts may be made on the front and back surfaces of the plurality of side window inner decoration parts 410b (or they may be formed into polyhedrons), The back surface of the decorative portion 410b may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

The side window interior decoration portion decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the side window interior decoration member 412 that is behind the connection base 412a on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") of the side window interior decoration part decorative board 413 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. It is said to be an LED. The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape in the upper, lower, left and right directions around the axis of the side window interior decoration part 410b at the rear of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b. has been done.

The internal inner lens 414 has an X-shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration part 410b into which it is inserted. The internal inner lens 414 partitions the inside of the side window interior decoration part 410b into four parts: top, bottom, left and right. Internal inner lens 414 is formed transparent. The surface of the internal inner lens 414 is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the inner inner lens 414 has a side window interior decoration section arranged behind the internal inner lens 414. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative board 413. Note that the back surface as well as the front surface of the internal inner lens 414 may have a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or the back surface of the internal inner lens 414 may have a lens cut. (may be formed into a polyhedron).

The right side inner lens 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. It is formed. The right side inner lens 415 is formed transparent. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and the surface of the right side inner lens 415 has a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative board 418 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. Note that the right side inner lens 415 may have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on the back surface instead of the front surface of the right side inner lens 415. The lens may be cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, with a rear side extending vertically in a straight line and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. The right side outer panel 416 of the door frame has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed ellipse shape extending vertically, and also connects the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be non-transparent.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and back, with a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wave shape along the right side inner lens 415. The right side inner panel 417 of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed ellipse shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side inner lens 415). The right side inner panel 417 of the door frame is formed to be non-transparent.

The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and is composed of an upper right side decorative board 418a and a lower right side decorative board 418b. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The door frame right side decoration board 418 can decorate the door frame right side decoration body 419 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The door frame right side decoration body 419 is transparent. The door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed into a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side inner lens 415. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 419 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. In addition, the surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface as well as the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be provided with a lens cut. A lens cut may be made (may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be made on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 (may be formed in a polyhedron). good).

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decoration body 276 of the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is connected to the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy manner so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed into a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (column-shaped) side window inner decoration part 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a, and allows the LED of the side window inner decoration part decoration board 413 to emit light. In this way, the side window interior decoration portion 410b can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the side window interior decoration portion 410b with light emitting decoration, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of this embodiment, in a normal state, since the LED of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 that emits light and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration parts 410b is off, the side window The inside of the gaming area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island equipment) through between the three side window interior decoration parts 410b in 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for this pachinko machine 1 (this game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play games can easily play this pachinko machine 1 without having to move along the island equipment to the front of this pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase expectations for playing games on the pachinko machine 1 and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of players located nearby. By making it difficult for players to see the entire gaming area 5a and making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without hesitation. .

Further, when the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are made to emit light using the LEDs of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a can be changed. let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are columnar, the light is emitted in a band-like and radial manner. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult for other players, such as those next to them, to look into the gaming area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the gaming area 5a, it is possible to avoid other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. This can prevent players from feeling uncomfortable because they are unable to concentrate on the game, or from feeling like a loss due to being induced to make mistakes. This can prevent a decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. Figure 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the back, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit with the top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the closed state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the top front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the bottom front. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 that has translucency (for example, has a milky white color) and is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and A translucent (for example, milky white) top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both left and right sides and the upper front of the top base 451, and a top cover 452 is attached to the front end of the top cover 452. a transparent door frame top decoration body 453, and a door frame top bottom plate having translucency (for example, having a milky white color) that connects the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451. 454. In addition, in this embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are configured to have translucency (for example, have a milky white color). A top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover the left and right sides and the upper front of the base 451, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are connected to the door frame top base 451. Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be configured to be transparent instead of having translucency (for example, having a milky white color).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the door A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. We are prepared.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is arranged between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration board 455 (that is, it is arranged behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top center decoration The transparent top central inner lens 458 is placed in front of the top cover 452 (disposed in front of the substrate 455), and the transparent top center inner lens 458 is disposed between the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 (i.e. , a transparent top left inner lens 459 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452 (disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the door frame top left decorative board 456); A top cover 452 is disposed between the decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and in front of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). a transparent top right inner lens 460 attached to the front surface of the lens.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a pair of top center speakers 462 attached to the center speaker box 461 downward. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near both left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. The top lower cover 465 is attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, and the top lower cover 465 is attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer periphery of the top bottom cover 465 from below. a lower cover frame 466 (having a lower cover frame 466), a door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the door frame top base 451, and a top upper cover 452 attached to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top plate 468 has a translucent property (for example, has a milky white color).

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body part 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left and right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a main body part 451a extending from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body part 451a. A front protrusion 451b protrudes forward. The main body part 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the lower side thereof is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101, and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so that their front ends move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 has substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top cover 452 protrudes most forwardly at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved manner so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top cover 452 has an opening 452a on its upper surface that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is transparent. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the curvature decreases from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front edge of the top upper cover 452. It is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decoration 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left and right direction extend downward, and is formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively. In addition, the surface of the door frame top decoration body 453 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the back surface as well as the front surface of the door frame top decoration body 453 may be provided with a lens cut. (may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back side of the door frame top decoration body 453 (may be formed into a polyhedron). .

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends from left to right. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is bent so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 has a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape. It has a pair of center speaker ports 454b, which the top center speaker 462 faces, and a pair of side speaker ports 454c, which vertically penetrate through the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, and which the top side speakers 464 face. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), which are surface-mounted type and full-color capable of emitting multicolor light. It is said to be an LED. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), which are surface-mounted type and full-color capable of emitting multicolor light. It is said to be an LED. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending from side to side. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"), which are surface-mounted type and full-color capable of emitting multicolor light. It is said to be an LED. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the left-right direction and are transparent. The surfaces of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are each cut into lenses (formed into polyhedrons) so that they can refract light irregularly. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top center decorative board 455 placed behind the top center inner lens 458, and the door frame top left decorative board placed behind the top left inner lens 459. 456, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative board 457 located behind the top right inner lens 460. It is difficult for the player to clearly see it. Note that the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may each have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface (or may be formed into a polyhedron), The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may each have a lens cut on their back surfaces instead of on their surfaces (they may be formed into polyhedrons).

The center speaker box 461 is formed into a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. This central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speakers 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration body 404 and the door frame right side decoration body 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[Illumination by top side speaker]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. In the top side speaker 464, vibration parts such as a diaphragm and a center cap are made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene), and magnetic circuit parts such as a magnet and a yoke are made of a translucent resin. The vibration part and the magnetic circuit part are held by the housing part. This housing portion has a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered by a center cap disposed at the front, but is open at the rear.

A top side speaker 464 is attached to a mounting portion (not shown) on the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and a predetermined distance (in this embodiment, approximately The acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the mounting portions formed on the four board mounting bent plates (not shown) extended by 18 mm). Further, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached to the mounting portions formed on the four board mounting bending plates (not shown) together with the acoustic decoration board 469 so as to cover the rear (back) side of the acoustic decoration board 469. This transparent plate protects the rear (back) side of the acoustic decoration board 469 from coming into contact with other members and causing electrical troubles. In this manner, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration board 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, thereby assembling the speaker illumination unit. In other words, the speaker illumination unit includes a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit part of the top side speaker 464. The acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged so as to face the rear surface thereof, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged to cover the rear side of the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464.

A white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") is formed by applying a white resist liquid to the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces of the acoustic decoration board 469. ), a white resist layer is formed. A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) 469a are mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. A constant current controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 flows through the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. Note that the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 receives the light emission data and clock signal that are serially output from the peripheral control board 1510, and based on this, the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 By controlling the constant current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can be turned on, turned off, blinked, gradation lighting, etc. A variety of light emission modes are realized.

The peripheral control board 1510 detects abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, payout device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, main body (opening of frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)). When not, the light emission data that becomes the light emission mode of the production mode is outputted to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. In response, the peripheral control board 1510 detects abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, payout device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, 3 opening, main body frame 4 opening, wire breakage, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) )) is occurring, the light emission data serving as the notification mode is outputted to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal in a mode different from the above-mentioned normal time.

Note that the lighting mode (normal mode) of the production mode is a variety of lighting modes that combine lighting, turning off, blinking, gradation lighting, etc., and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. The main control board 1310 sends commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set when displaying the symbols to the peripheral control board 1510, Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emitting mode as a predetermined effect light emission (normal time) in the effect mode. On the other hand, in the notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode), a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) is lit at maximum brightness, and the dispensing control MPU When the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the opening switch, a door frame release command to that effect is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control board that has received this door frame release command 1310 adds predetermined information (information for preparing the format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the door frame open command that communicates the opening of the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, and sends the command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received such a command after transmitting it to the control board 1510 controls the notification mode to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode).

Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the part number of the surface-side electronic component and the surface-side electronic component are arranged near the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs 769a. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position (also including the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, near the back side electronic components such as connectors, there is an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is placed. Attributes of the back electronic component (which may also include the shape of the back electronic component, the size of the back electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back electronic component, and the model of the back electronic component) The markings on the back side shown are printed by silk printing on a solid white resist using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hardly noticeable compared to white.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination by light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 As described above, it is a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light, and the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, a white coating film is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "solid white resist.") A white resist layer is formed, and a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is further formed on this solid white resist. The front side markings that allow identification are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that the yellow front side markings are not noticeable against the white resist when the full-color LED, which can emit multicolor light, is turned off. In addition, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), it is possible to use a solid white resist with high reflectance and a yellow paint that has a reflectance very close to that of white. The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be maintained high by the combination of .

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is connected to the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464. Since the rear side is covered, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through hole of the cylindrical magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 and emits light. Light is emitted from the center cap that has optical properties, and light is also emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, thereby increasing the power of the top side speaker 464. It is now possible to decorate. As mentioned above, the top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal made of a metal plate with numerous through holes, so the front surface of the top side speaker 464 and its surroundings can be viewed through the through holes of the top lower cover 465. It is possible to visually recognize the illumination of the top side speaker 464.

Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape) and the light is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464. It repeatedly moves between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and is emitted rearward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration board 469. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top base 451 of the door frame has an acoustic decoration board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached, so that the acoustic decoration board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted rearward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, the acoustic decoration When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 (from the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface)), and onto the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the door frame top base 451. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a gap formed by the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba.

As described above, the door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. In the door frame base 101, at positions corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, there are through holes 101k having a shape larger than or the same shape as the outer circumference of the through holes 451ba and penetrating back and forth. are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted backward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 (acoustic decoration on the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate 469), the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the door frame top base. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 through a gap between the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame 451 and the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the left and right through holes 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a to be mounted is directed to the upper left area of the front component 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4, and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. The light will be reflected in the upper right area. In this embodiment, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, but it may also be made of black resin. In addition, hereinafter, when opening and closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the opening/closing axis side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 will be referred to as "the pivot side of the door frame 3" or "the pivot side of the main body frame 4". The opposite side to the opening/closing shaft side may be referred to as the "opening side of the door frame 3" or the "opening side of the main body frame 4."

[Top left area of front component]
On the front (surface) of the upper left area of the front component 1000, there is a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status (in this embodiment, it has a black color except for each transparent area for checking the lighting state of a plurality of LEDs). ), a reflective sheet 1000a, which is a white printed portion having a high reflectance of white or a color close to white, is pasted except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged.

The front (surface) area of the upper left side area of the front component 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is pasted is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and is the area where the door frame 3 is placed relative to the main body frame 4. In the closed state, the area except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is placed is covered by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the reflective sheet 1000a passes through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. It becomes difficult to see. In other words, since the presence of the reflective sheet 1000a, which has no relation to the content of the game performance, can be hidden, it does not become an eyesore during the game.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a reflective sheet 1000a is placed in the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. When the machine 1 is viewed from the front, the front side of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 on the pivot side of the door frame 3 (the pivot side of the main body frame 4). The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (surface) is provided on the game board 5 side, which is provided separately from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). It is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a and emitted toward the front, passing through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the left through hole 101k formed in the outer periphery of the left acoustic decoration board 469, and the left side through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. Light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm of the left top side speaker 464 through a gap between the inner periphery of the hole 451ba and a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing of the left top side speaker 464. is emitted, so the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left side acoustic decoration board 469 can be efficiently used for game effects and notification modes. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of panels are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 that passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by a reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side, which is provided separately from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). In order to emit the light toward the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left side acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the left side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 and enters the gaming area 5a. It does not emit toward the player, nor does it emit toward the rear of the game board 5. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the gaming area 5a or towards the rear of the gaming board 5.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is in the closed state), the reflective sheet 1000a is attached to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. It is provided on the front surface of the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to that of the game board 5, and is configured to reflect the light emitted by the left acoustic decoration board 469 toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a. Therefore, the light leaking backward from the left acoustic decoration board 469 can be reflected toward the front of the reflective sheet 1000a and emitted toward the front of the left acoustic decoration board 469. It is designed to be able to function as a reflective member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress light leakage from the left acoustic decoration board 469 from proceeding toward the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, light directed toward the rear of the game board 5 can be suppressed.

Although not shown, on the reflective sheet 1000a, there is a QR code (registered trademark) that stores a number (management number) that identifies the model of the game board 5 and attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5. and are printed in dark black paint at predetermined locations. Specifications regarding the pachinko machine 1 can be made using the reflective sheet 1000a, a number that identifies the model of the game board 5 (management number), and a QR code (registered trademark) that stores attribute information of the game board 5 such as the manufacturing date of the game board 5. A specific information display section is configured to display information (that is, a QR code (registered trademark) in which attribute information of the game board 5 such as a number identifying the model of the game board 5 and the manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored). ing. When the door frame 3 is open to the main frame 4, the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin (if the front component 1000 is made of black resin, the background will be black), Since the white reflective sheet 1000a is conspicuous, it is possible to naturally direct the line of sight of staff such as a clerk in the game hall to the reflective sheet 1000a due to its attractiveness.

Further, as described above, the front (surface) area of the upper left side area of the front component 1000 to which the reflective sheet 1000a is pasted is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and is an area outside the door frame. 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the area except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged is covered by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the reflective sheet 1000a is Since it is difficult to see through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the management number and QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflective sheet 1000a are difficult to see through the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

Further, in the reflective sheet 1000a, since the reflective sheet 1000a is white, when the background is white, the dark black color stands out, making it easy to visually recognize the management number and the QR code (registered trademark). In addition, when the QR code (registered trademark) is read by a code reading device that is a separate device from the pachinko machine 1 and is carried by an employee such as a clerk at the game hall, the reflective sheet 1000a is white, so that is white, making it possible to easily read a QR code (registered trademark) having a dark black color. In other words, the white color of the reflective sheet 1000a can improve the readability of the QR code (registered trademark). Note that the surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. Further, instead of the QR code (registered trademark), a one-dimensional barcode, letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be used, or a combination of letters, numbers, figures, symbols, etc. may be used as appropriate.

Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000. A through hole is formed in the reflective sheet 1000a in a portion corresponding to a region where a gold-colored pseudo nail is arranged. As described above, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front (surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Since the pseudo nails are also made of gold-colored metal, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, they can be used as reflective members in the same way as the reflective sheet 1000a.

[About the light emitted from the LED of the acoustic decoration board]
Next, the acoustic decoration board 469 on which a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted on the front surface (surface), the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and the front surface (surface) of the upper left area of the front component 1000. The positional relationship between the reflective sheet 1000a attached to the reflective sheet 1000a and the reflective sheet 1000a will be explained with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 is a schematic diagram for explaining the positional relationship among the acoustic decoration board 469, the left and right through holes 451ba, and the reflective sheet 1000a.

As shown in FIG. 318(A), a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is connected to the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464. It is arranged to cover the rear. Therefore, as described above, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is transmitted through the through hole of the magnetic circuit section formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464. Light is emitted from the center cap that has optical properties, and light is also emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, thereby increasing the power of the top side speaker 464. It is now possible to decorate.

Moreover, the door frame top base 451 has a shape larger than the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469, and is formed with a through hole 451ba that penetrates from front to back. Therefore, as described above, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, ), and the reflected light is emitted rearward from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, the reflected light is emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, it is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469). When the plurality of LEDs 469a emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469. A plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 through the plate)), and the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through the gap between the two. As a result, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are emitted through the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451. The light can be visually recognized from behind the door frame 3.

Although not shown, the door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame top base 451 is attached to the door frame base 101. A through hole 101k having a shape larger than or the same shape as the outer periphery of the through hole 451ba and penetrating back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the left and right through holes 451ba.

As shown in FIG. 318(B), when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a reflective sheet 1000a is placed on the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. It is located in the upper left area. Note that the surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. Therefore, as described above, when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front, the shaft passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 on the shaft support side of the door frame 3 (the shaft support side of the main body frame 4). The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 is provided separately from the left acoustic decoration board 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). (b) The light is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a provided on the side of the game board 5 and emitted toward the front. The left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the gap between the outer periphery of the left acoustic decoration board 469 and the inner periphery of the left through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and the left top The light passes through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing of the side speaker 464 and is emitted from the translucent diaphragm of the left top side speaker 464 .

Note that the light reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a not only passes through the inside of the left top side speaker 464 (a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing) but also passes through the outside of the left top side speaker 464. It can also be emitted forward by passing through it. Furthermore, the light that has passed through the inside of the left top side speaker 464 (a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing) is transmitted to the front of the pachinko machine 1 by passing through the through hole of the top lower cover 465. Similarly, the light that has passed through the outside of the left top side speaker 464 is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 by passing through the through hole of the top lower cover 465. can do. Note that, as described above, the top lower cover 465 is formed of punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. However, although the members surrounding the top lower cover 465 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 are made of opaque members, they may be made of transparent or translucent members (translucent members). Alternatively, the light passing outside the left top side speaker 464 may be used as light to decorate the transparent or translucent member. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 not only emits light on the top side speaker 464 but also emits light on the surrounding members of the top lower cover 465. can do.

In the above, in the door frame top base 451, the through hole 451ba is formed which has a larger shape than the outer circumference of the acoustic decoration board 469 and penetrates from the front to the rear. Any configuration may be used as long as it allows light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface to travel rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. In other words, the through hole 451ba does not necessarily need to be located behind the acoustic decoration board 469, but may be located in a part that is not behind the acoustic decoration board 469, such as in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction behind the acoustic decoration board 469. Good too.

FIG. 318(C) shows an example in which the through holes 451ba are provided so as to be located in the upper direction and the lower direction behind the acoustic decoration board 469 in the door frame top base 451, respectively. Even in such a case, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464, and the reflected light is transmitted to the rear of the top side speaker 464, That is, the light is emitted rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, passes through the through hole 451ba that is displaced from the back of the acoustic decoration board 469, and is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451. As a result, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are emitted through the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451. The light can be visually recognized from behind the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 is separated from the left acoustic decoration board 469. The light is reflected by a reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side), and is emitted forward.

In addition, in this example, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is configured to be able to travel rearward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. Although the through hole 451ba is shown, it may have a shape with a plurality of holes (for example, a mesh shape or a punching shape), or at least a portion of the back of the acoustic decoration board 469 in the door frame top base 451. (The back of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the surrounding area) may be formed of a transparent member. Even in such a case, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464, and the reflected light is transmitted to the rear of the top side speaker 464, That is, the light is emitted backward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, passes through a portion through which light can pass, and is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 is separated from the left acoustic decoration board 469. The light is reflected by a reflective sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side), and is emitted forward.

Note that the acoustic decoration board 469 may be formed with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. In such a case, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464, and the reflected light is directed to the rear of the top side speaker 464. It becomes possible to emit the light toward the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a plurality of holes formed in the acoustic decoration board 469. In other words, the light reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 is reflected not only by the gap between the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative board 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, but also by the gap formed in the acoustic decorative board 469. The light can pass through a plurality of holes, and the light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the door frame top base 451. Similarly, the light reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a can also travel forward through a plurality of holes formed in the acoustic decoration board 469, and inside the left top side speaker 464 (around the casing). The light can be emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 by passing through the through-holes of the top lower cover 465 (the plurality of openings formed in the direction) and the through-holes of the top lower cover 465.

In addition, in this example, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 on the reflective sheet 1000a, light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side is emitted. In the receiving area, a number (management number) that identifies the model of the game board 5 and a QR code (registered trademark) that stores attribute information of the game board 5 such as the date of manufacture of the game board 5 are in dark black. Each is printed with paint. However, the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) are the areas on the reflective sheet 1000a that do not receive (hardly receive) light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469. may be printed on. That is, the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) may be printed on a portion of the reflective sheet 1000a that is not behind the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451. As described above, the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) are printed on the reflective sheet 1000a using dark black paint, and the printed portions do not reflect light. In this regard, a management number and a QR code (registered trademark) are printed on the area on the reflective sheet 1000a that receives light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side. By not doing so, when the light is reflected by the reflective sheet 1000a, the light can be efficiently emitted forward.

Next, in a gaming island where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in parallel, positions where the light emitted from the pachinko machines 1 can be visually recognized will be explained with reference to FIG. 319. FIG. 319 is a schematic diagram for explaining the position where the light emitted from the pachinko machine 1 installed on the game island can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 319, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are provided in parallel on the game island so that the front side of the pachinko machines 1 faces outside. When performing maintenance work on a game board 5 or the like that is closed by the door frame 3, the door frame 3 is moved into the main body with the pivot side of the door frame 3 (the pivot side of the main body frame 4) as the axis. It is necessary to open it to frame 4.

On the front side of the door frame 3, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 make it possible to decorate the top side speaker 464 with light emitting light. It is firing towards the target. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, a person located in front of the door frame 3 will see the light emitting mode of the top side speaker 464 emitting light from the front side of the door frame 3. can be recognized.

On the rear side of the door frame 3, when the top side speaker 464 is decorated with light by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the light is emitted from the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the door. The light is emitted toward the rear of the door frame 3 through a gap between the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the frame top base 451 and through the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, even if a person is located behind the door frame 3, the light leaking from the through hole 101k on the rear side of the door frame 3 will be blocked. By visually checking, the light emitting mode of the top side speaker 464 emitting light on the front side of the door frame 3 can be recognized.

As described above in detail, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are designed to emit light in a light emitting manner depending on the game situation. Specifically, there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, payout device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, main body frame) 4 open, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)) Sometimes, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light in a normal light emission mode. In response to this, an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, and dispensing device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, opening of the main body frame 4, etc.) When there is a malfunction (malfunction related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)) , the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light in a notification mode, which is different from the normal mode described above. In such a notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode), a light emission mode is used in which a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) is lit at maximum brightness. As a result, when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, regardless of whether a person is located in front or behind the door frame 3, the person is mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. It is possible to recognize the light emission mode using the plurality of LEDs 469a, and it is possible to grasp the state of the game, such as whether there is any abnormality or malfunction in the pachinko machine 1.

As will be described in detail later, the game board 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1 includes a plurality of light-emitting decorations, including a back top and front rotating decoration 3410, a back top and front decoration 3421, a back top and back decoration 3451, and a back top and back decoration 3451. A rear movable decorative body 3110 and the like are provided. The LEDs mounted on these light-emitting decorations emit light toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). Therefore, a person located in front of the pachinko machine 1 can recognize the light emitting state of the light emitting decoration body emitting light on the game board 5.

Similarly, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes, and also brighten the back side and The sides are also designed to be bright for purposes other than decoration. Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light-emitting decoration body is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and sides, and the light illuminates the transparent part of the back box 3010. By configuring it to pass through, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light emitting area L2 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the side side of the pachinko machine 1 are brightened. ing. Therefore, when the door frame 3 of the other pachinko machine 1 facing one of the pachinko machines 1 installed on the game island is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the back side of one of the pachinko machines 1 can be visually checked. However, it is possible for a person who opens the door frame 3 of the other pachinko machine 1 to the main body frame 4 to visually recognize the light leaking to the back side of the other pachinko machine 1. Thus, the light emitting mode of the light emitting decoration body emitting light on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized.

Similarly to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the LEDs mounted on the light-emitting decoration are designed to emit light in a light-emitting manner depending on the game situation. Specifically, there is an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, payout device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, main body frame) 4 open, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)) Sometimes, the LED mounted on the light-emitting decoration body emits light in the normal light-emission mode. In response to this, an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, and dispensing device 580, detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, opening of the main body frame 4, etc.) When there is a malfunction (malfunction related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)) , the LED mounted on the light-emitting decoration emits light in a notification mode, which is different from the normal mode described above. For example, the notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode) is a light emission mode in which a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red) is lit at maximum brightness. As a result, when the door frame 3 of the other pachinko machine 1 facing one of the pachinko machines 1 installed on the game island is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the door of such other pachinko machine 1 A person who opens the frame 3 to the main body frame 4 can recognize the light emitting mode using the LEDs mounted on the light emitting decoration, and check whether or not there is any abnormality or malfunction in the pachinko machine 1. , it is possible to understand what kind of situation the game is in.

From the above, regarding the gaming situation such as whether there is any abnormality or malfunction in the pachinko machine 1, when the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4, not only the front of the door frame 3 but also the It can be grasped from behind the door frame 3, and furthermore, it can be grasped not only from the front of the Pachinko machine 1 but also from the rear of the Pachinko machine 1. Thereby, when an abnormality or malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the abnormality or malfunction can be quickly dealt with.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, it is determined whether the abnormality is a mild abnormality or a severe abnormality, and if the abnormality is a mild abnormality, the Only some of the LEDs may be set in a notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode) so that the occurrence of an abnormality can be recognized only from the direction. Specifically, among the abnormalities of the pachinko machine 1, minor abnormalities (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, dispensing device 580, etc., opening of the door frame 3, main body When the frame 4 is opened, the wiring is broken, etc.), only the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are set to the notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode), and the light emitting decoration is Do not use the installed LED in a notification mode (a mode different from normal). That is, when a slight abnormality occurs, it can be detected from the front or rear of the door frame 3, but it cannot be detected from the front or rear of the Pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, when a minor abnormality (for example, detection of fraudulent activity) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the light emitting decoration Both of the LEDs and the LEDs installed in the system are in a notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode). In other words, when a serious abnormality occurs, it can be detected from either the front or rear of the door frame 3 or the front or rear of the Pachinko machine 1. In this way, when a minor abnormality occurs, it is not a situation that should be urgently dealt with like a serious abnormality (detection of fraudulent activity, etc.), so it is possible to grasp it only from the front or rear of the door frame 3. We are trying not to make excessive announcements to the outside world.

[Top right area of front component]
On the open side of the main body frame 3, on the front (surface) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000, there is a metal plate for maintaining the attached state of the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. A manufacturing stop FT (see FIG. 10) is provided respectively. That is, on the open side of the door frame 3, metal stops FT are arranged on the front (surface) sides of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. Particularly, on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, a metal stopper FT is arranged at a position corresponding to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the right side. The end portion of the metal stopper FT is inserted into and engaged with a plate stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 4.

Further, the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, by being attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it reinforces the flat door frame base 101. The door frame base unit 100 is given rigidity, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 extending vertically and arranged apart from each other in the left and right directions are connected to each other. an upper reinforcing frame 113 extending left and right, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached at a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112; 114 and the right reinforcing frame 112; and a plurality of door frame hooks of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4, which are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 in a vertically spaced manner. 652 is hooked to the hooking member 116. That is, on the rear side of the door frame 3 and on the open side of the door frame 3, the metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged.

As described above, in this embodiment, on the open side of the main body frame 4, metal stops FT are provided on the front (surface) sides of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In addition, on the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3. The metal stopper FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are both made of metal and have luster. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right side acoustic decoration board 469 ( The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface of the game board 5 is transmitted by the metal stopper FT placed on the front side of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112. Can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the light emitted from the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized. In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of panels are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 that passes through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Although the light from the LED 469a is reflected by the metal stopper FT placed on the front side of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, the door frame base The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right side acoustic decoration board 469 that has passed through the right side through hole 101k formed in the right side through hole 101k is not emitted toward the game area 5a, and the light is not emitted toward the back of the game board 5. It also does not emit light. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the gaming area 5a or towards the rear of the gaming board 5.

Note that since the front component 1000 is made of transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of black resin instead. Even with this configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the acoustic decoration on the right side passing through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the board 469 is transmitted to the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcement. Since the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the right through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, it can be reflected by the frame 112. It does not emit toward the game area 5a, nor does it emit toward the rear of the game board 5. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the gaming area 5a or towards the rear of the gaming board 5.

In addition, a white reflective sheet whose shape is appropriately modified from the above-mentioned white reflective sheet 1000a is attached to the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the surrounding area where the metal stopper FT is arranged. It may be configured as follows. By doing this, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right side acoustic decoration board 469 passes through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface of the game board 5 is transmitted to the metal stopper FT placed on the front side of the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, and the metal right reinforcing frame 112. Since the light can be reflected by the white reflective sheet, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right side acoustic decoration board 469 that has passed through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light is not emitted toward the game area 5a, nor is it emitted toward the rear of the game board 5. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the gaming area 5a or towards the rear of the gaming board 5.

By the way, when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, an employee such as a clerk of the game hall inserts a regular key into the cylinder lock 130 and operates the cylinder lock 130, for example, after inserting the regular key into the cylinder lock 130 A decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decoration body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 is grasped by hand, and the door frame 3 changes from the closed state to the main body frame 4 to the open state. Since the decorative member is continuously pulled, the more work is done to open the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4, the more the load may be repeatedly applied to the joint between the decorative member and the door frame 3, causing damage to the door frame. There is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 on the open side of the door frame 3 is as described above. The plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are mounted on the front side (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 in order to emit the light to the rear through the right side through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. It can emit light towards the rear of 3. A metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3 on the open side of the door frame 3, and a right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4. Since the metal stopper FT is arranged on the (front) side and both are metal members, when an employee such as a clerk at the game hall opens the door frame 3 from the main body frame 3, Through the gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, light reflected by the metal right reinforcing frame 112 and the metal reflective parts such as the metal stoppers FT leaks out, filling the gap. can be made to emit light. As a result, when an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall performs the work of opening the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, for example, the transparent door frame right side of the door frame right side unit 410 provided on the door frame 3 Grasp the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 with your hand and pull the decorative member to the extent that you can see the luminescence in the gap, then stop pulling the decorative member, and then insert your finger into the gap and tighten the door frame. 3 can be opened. Since the time for grasping and pulling the decorative member by hand can be shortened, the time for which a load is applied to the joint between the decorative member (right side unit 410 of the door frame 3) and the door frame 3 can also be shortened. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When opening the door frame]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player is playing a game, a game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5, while flowing down, accidentally collides with another game ball and hits a nail. It may become clogged. When the player shoots game balls one after another toward the game area 5a in this state, more game balls are piled up on top of the packed game balls, resulting in a grape-shaped collection of game balls. In order to resolve the situation in which the game balls have gathered in a grape shape, the player must call an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall and have them remove the game balls that have gathered in the grape shape. An attendant such as a clerk at a game hall called by a player opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is opened. In addition to controlling all the mounted LEDs to turn off, each movable body provided on the game board 5 is controlled to maintain the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether it is activated or not. Control the game board at the time of play. In addition to or instead of controlling the game board when the door is opened, certain LEDs (for example, the front surface of the acoustic decoration board 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 In addition to controlling the lighting of a plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3, if the door frame 3 is equipped with a movable body, the movable body is maintained in the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether it is activated or not. ``Control the door frame when opening''.

When opening the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4, when controlling the door frame at the time of opening, a state in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are all turned off, and/or A specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 lights up in a notification mode to notify that the door is open. It becomes a state where When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through hole of the cylindrical magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 and becomes transparent, as described above. Light is emitted from the center cap, and light is also emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. Furthermore, it is reflected from the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the cylindrical magnetic circuit section) and is repeatedly reflected between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. On the other hand, since the light is emitted backward from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light). Then, since the plurality of LEDs 469a leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration board 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, which is the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469), ) A gap between the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and the door. The light passes through a through hole 101k formed in the frame base 101 and is emitted to the rear of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100.

In other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3, and can also emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3. 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the acoustic decoration board 469 is viewed from the front side of the door frame 3 and the rear side of the door frame 3. The notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) can be visually recognized. In other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light in a notification mode so that it can be seen not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light from at least a portion around the acoustic decoration board 469. As a result, in the game hall, the front side (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can be seen by staff such as clerks of the game hall who pass through the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to convey the notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the screen. Therefore, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is opened. In addition, in the gaming hall, abnormalities or malfunctions may occur to staff such as pachinko players from both the aisle side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the aisle side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. There is an abnormality in the machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball jam in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, opening of the main body frame 4, wiring Disconnections, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorations (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorations (movable bodies), etc.)) can be quickly reported, and the game The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

By the way, if the speaker's diaphragm is torn to pieces with an unauthorized tool, the sound will no longer flow, but while it is easy to see that the speaker's diaphragm is torn to pieces, it is also possible to tear a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool. If you just open it, the sound will change, but the sound will continue to flow. Therefore, if you make a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool and remove or break the wires connected to the speaker's connection terminals to prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker, the magnet may be damaged or hit. Even if the gaming machine were to detect someone illegally acquiring game balls by doing so, no warning sound would be emitted from the speakers in the first place. If a person who commits such illegal acts leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a state where it is waiting for a player, and a silent demonstration (multiple LEDs on the door frame and gaming board switch to a lighting mode for waiting for a player). At the same time as the light is emitted, an image for waiting for the player is displayed on the effect display device capable of displaying the effect image.) will be repeated. If this happens, the clerk or other staff member at the game hall, while waiting for a player, may find that an unauthorized tool has been used to punch a hole in the speaker's diaphragm, disconnecting the wiring connected to the speaker's connection terminal, or disconnecting the wire. This makes it difficult to determine whether sound is coming from the speakers or not.

Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is made with a hole using a wire, since the acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the front surface (surface ) When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted in Light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the diaphragm. Since the diaphragm and center cap of the top side speaker 464 are made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene), the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 and the center cap are made of translucent resin (for example, milky white polypropylene). The light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap shines with high brightness like a spotlight compared to the light emitted from the diaphragm and the center cap. As a result, as described above, the top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal made of a metal plate with countless through holes, so when performing a silent demonstration, the top lower cover 465 can be penetrated. Through the hole, the presence of the hole drilled in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be discovered as a spotlight shining with high brightness. Therefore, it can contribute to determining whether or not the sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

In addition, when the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is made with a wire and a hole is made with a wire to perform a silent demonstration, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are turned off (by chance they are turned off). ), or a state in which the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are turned off within a period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. Also, since the acoustic decoration board 469 on which a white coating film coated with a white resist liquid is formed is arranged behind the top side speaker 464, the background becomes white due to this white coating film, so that the top side speaker Through the holes drilled in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 and the numerous through holes formed in the top lower cover 465, the white color of the white paint film could be visually recognized. The holes are easily visible. This makes it possible to discover whether or not a hole has been illegally punched in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. Therefore, it can contribute to determining whether or not the sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

In addition, a silent demonstration in which the plurality of LEDs provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player-waiting mode, and a player-waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 that can display an effect image. As a result, a plurality of LEDs emit light in the player-waiting mode, so even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is illegally punched with a wire, it cannot be mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. Since the light emitted by the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks through the hole made in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464, it appears that a part of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is emitting light. This makes it possible to discover that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

Note that a translucent speaker net may be provided in front of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. By providing the speaker net, the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be blocked from unauthorized intrusion with a wire, and the act of making a hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be made time consuming. , can contribute to early detection of such fraudulent acts. Furthermore, since the speaker net has translucency, it is unlikely to interfere with light emitted through the translucent diaphragm of the top side speaker 464.

Furthermore, in the top side speaker 464, the vibration parts such as the diaphragm and the center cap were made of translucent resin, such as milky white polypropylene, but they were made of translucent resin, such as gray polypropylene. It may be made of polypropylene having a color similar to black), red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, etc., or it may be made of a transparent resin instead of a translucent resin.

Incidentally, gaming machines that include a front frame in which a light emitting device is provided have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device performs effects, error notifications, etc. that occur during the game. However, when the front frame is opened, it is possible to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, but it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear side of the front frame. There was a problem.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that include a front frame configured to removably hold a game board in the middle frame and cover the front side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (Paragraph [0019] and Figure 1)). By the way, when opening the front frame of a game hall, an employee such as a staff member of the game hall inserts a key into the cylinder lock and operates the rotation operation, and then grasps and pulls the decorative member provided on the front frame with his/her hand. As the number of opening operations increases, there is a risk that the front frame may be damaged due to repeated loads being applied to the joint between the decorative member and the front frame.

Furthermore, gaming machines have conventionally been proposed that include a front frame in which a light emitting device is provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). When some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special manner different from normal times, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, in the same manner as in the past, it was difficult to say that it was sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction.

Furthermore, gaming machines have conventionally been proposed that include a front frame in which a light emitting device is provided (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). When some abnormality or malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, the light emitting device emits light in a special manner different from normal times, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or malfunction. However, as the amount of light directed toward the rear of the game board increases, the amount of light directed toward the front of the game machine decreases, so it is difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction.

Furthermore, a gaming machine in which specific information regarding the gaming machine is provided on the gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). This makes it possible to confirm from the outside whether the game board is a legitimate game board, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized changes to the game machine. However, in the same manner as in the past, since the specific information can be visually recognized from the player side, the decorativeness is lowered, and there is a risk that the game interest will be lowered.

Furthermore, gaming machines that include a speaker in the front frame have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A speaker provided in this gaming machine plays the performance sound generated during the game, as well as error notification sound and the like. By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is torn to pieces with an unauthorized tool, the sound will no longer flow, but it will be easily visible that the diaphragm of the speaker is torn to pieces. Simply drilling a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool will cause the sound to flow, although the sound will change. Therefore, if you make a hole in the speaker's diaphragm with an unauthorized tool and remove or break the wires connected to the speaker's connection terminals to prevent the sound from flowing from the speaker, it will cause magnet bumps and hammer bumps. Even if the game machine is able to detect an act of illegally acquiring game balls by doing so, a warning sound will not be emitted from the speaker. When a person who commits such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state and displays a silent demonstration (the light-emitting device emits light in the player-waiting mode, and the image display device emits light). A player waiting image is displayed.) will be repeated. However, while waiting for players, the staff at the game hall, such as the staff at the game hall, may use unauthorized tools to puncture the diaphragm of the speaker, disconnect the wires connected to the speaker's connection terminals, or disconnect the wires. It was difficult to determine whether sound was coming from the speakers or not.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decoration 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The upper left side decoration 271, the upper right side decoration 276, the upper middle side decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, the right side decoration 419 of the door frame, and the top decoration 419 of the door frame surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. 453 is formed in a half-tube shape, so that the player can see the decoration as if the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, the right side decoration 419 of the door frame, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decoration body 453 are a plate upper left decorative board 273, a plate upper right decorative board 278, a plate center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the LEDs of these decorative substrates can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light. A light emission effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 has an annular, donut-shaped rotary operation section 302 on the top surface that is larger in diameter than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201, and a rotary operation section 302 arranged coaxially within the ring of the rotation operation section 302. A press operation section 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral press operation section 303b and a cylindrical central press operation section 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation section 302 is attached below the rotation operation section 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) large-diameter plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and plate center lower decoration bodies 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and The door frame left side decoration body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side decoration body of the door frame right side unit 410 have the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration body 312a and the lower center plate decoration body 312b. 419 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a.

As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged in the rotation operation part 302, the two plate center upper decoration bodies 312a and the two plate center lower decoration bodies 312b, and the rotation operation part 302, the outer periphery Since the pressing operation section 303b and the central pressing operation section 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 can be made to stand out.

In addition, the plate lower left decorative body 281, the plate lower right decorative body 286, and the lower plate center decorative body 312b, which are arranged below the plate left upper decorative body 271, the plate right upper decorative body 276, and the plate center upper decorative body 312a, are The thickness of the tubular tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the plate center lower decoration body 312b. As a result, since the performance operation unit 300 becomes larger from the bottom end toward the top, it is possible to emphasize the sense of perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotary operation unit 302 that is placed on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The press operation section 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in the production operation unit 300 on the top surface of the dish unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotary operating section 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends upwardly toward the front. Since the upper surfaces of the rotating operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, the rotating operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 face toward the head (face) of the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine 1. The entire operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire structure of the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 can be easily seen, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation section 302 is donut-shaped. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation section 302 is used for rotation operation, when the player participation type performance is executed, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation section 302 is rotated. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and by operating the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to entertain the player's participatory performance and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front and back direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. Therefore, in the tray unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation part 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b are in a state that protrudes more forward than the upper plate 201, and the upper plate center Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made to stand out. At the same time, the appearance of the area around the rotation operation portion 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to make the game more appealing to the players. This makes it easier for players to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine they want to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball firing device 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a ball launcher 540 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending from side to side and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 in a single direction based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIGS. 84(a) to 84(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base unit 501 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5, which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b that penetrates from front to back within the height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

The main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c in front of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and includes a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting section 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front and into which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c when viewed from the front and connect the board unit. A circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-shaped frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is made up of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 or the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side (the front unit 2000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510, which will be described later). It is connected to the effect drive board 1720 (to be described later) that drives the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the back unit 3000, and the opposite end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3. and is connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 84, etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is located at an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably mounted with respect to the main body frame base 501 in the left-right direction. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

Then, a connection cable connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the effect drive board 1720 (described later) of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side, and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. 503 guides the interface board 635 and the side of the drive board unit 1700 on the body frame 4 side that is connected to the effect drive board 1720 (described later) extending from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. The binding band 504 is inserted into a pair of through holes 502d in the same position in the left and right direction among the plurality of through holes 502d formed at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a while in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a. , are attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 84(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded part. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment part 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion in front view, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinged manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 81, 82, and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is sent to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downwardly from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front and has a width that is substantially the same as the top plate portion in the front-rear direction. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a in the front view, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 includes a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is attached. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with a tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged such that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the dispensing base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for electrically connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 88(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the ball B is released from the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been loaded toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 92).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and back right direction and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance path 570a, since the ball cut detection sensor 574 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 90(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the movable ball extraction piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 90(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from behind to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape open to the rear and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a; It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 which is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and whose rotating shaft protrudes between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B, and a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 that detect game balls B. A movable ball extracting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball extracting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball extracting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction in the right direction when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 89, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top by about 1/3 of the total height so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the delivery blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position of about 1/3 height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward to the left in rear view, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device body 581 at a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passageway is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passageway 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball ejecting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 to the left in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 90).

When the ball extractor lever 593 is raised to make the ball extractor movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which were tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extractor movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extractor movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so that the game balls B are closer to the side of the payout passage 580a. It will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extracting movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extracting passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear cover 582. Since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent strong force from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment on the downstream side of the ball extraction passageway 580b, so the pachinko player can It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

Further, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward in the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end in the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper bulb removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper dispensing ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. It is released downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 side or toward the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b is opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full bulb path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball ejection passage 600e flows through the lower ball ejection passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, in the normal state (the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball break detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, there is a gap between the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicates with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B will stay and be stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( In addition to informing the player that the tank is full, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detecting state.

When ejecting the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c and ejected to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall is discharged to the island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 93(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b projects downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the volume is smaller, a sufficiently wide space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and The space is in communication with the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

To be more specific, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection part 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made larger, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the base 626 after the base unit 620b, and a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the power supply board 630 (hereinafter, for the sake of explanation, when looking at the front of the pachinko machine 1, the power supply A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear surface of the board 630 (sometimes referred to as the "surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630") on which electronic components are mounted. A cover 631. The surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631, so that the power supply board 630 is housed in the transparent power supply board cover 631. The front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the power supply board 630 are coated with a green resist solution to form a green coating film (hereinafter, may simply be referred to as "solid green resist"). ), and a power switch 630a having an operation section for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630. In addition to the power switch 630a, the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 has attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic components and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are placed The front side markings indicating the shape of the side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component) are displayed in green. It is a highly visible white paint that is printed on a solid green resist using silk printing. The power switch 630a is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631. Furthermore, since the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is placed in a position that is difficult to see from the player.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of a transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board box 632 housed in the payout control board box 632. A substrate 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc. This is to control and pay out a designated number of game balls B to the player (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (on the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and is attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 98(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and can be attached to the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a locking spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end prevents rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 99 to 106. FIG. 99(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 99(a). FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 101(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 101(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 101(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 101(a). FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and removed from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward; and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that is sloped so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow part 552f has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the opposite end (the right wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction in parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to pass through.

Further, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end above the main guide portion 553a to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guide part 553a and which becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so as to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force is always applied from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction to the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By distributing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so the interruption of the game due to ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in playing due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. and a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outside sides of the detour passage 552g, and the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the bottom A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the upper open part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface part. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a lower position at a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir section 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes towards the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the tank rail 553 extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape, so that the detour passage 552g runs along the front end side of a portion extending diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, so that the wide part of the tank rail 553 is used as the detour passage 552g. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this region. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The area surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as that of the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). (upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged so that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner of the rear end is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner of the rear end is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game balls B spilled outside the main body frame 4 are caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is made higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is controlled from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. Since the game balls B are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the channel through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and ride on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, since the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received in the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 107 to 115. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which the front component, game panel, front unit, etc. are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 107 seen from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board shown in FIG. 107 seen from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board with the front structural members, game panel, front unit, etc. made transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. FIG. 114 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is square when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board, the LED emits light in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative board. If the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative board is rectangular, it means that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side view LED). Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when a player operates a handle 182 of a handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate section that provides a predetermined benefit to the player (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) by accepting or passing the gaming balls B. 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a first big winning hole 2005, and a second big winning hole 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game balls B are placed in the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the gate part 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole in the gaming area 5a. 2006 etc., it is for playing a game that entertains the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B within the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front side of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a game played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 114, FIG. 206, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100.

A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 116, etc.) is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has a transparent panel board 1110, the game panel 1100 is placed from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100 to the rear of the game panel 1100. The presence of various members can be easily recognized (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "transparent game panel 1100").

The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards electrically connected to the above-mentioned door frame sub-relay board 105 (for example, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400). , the side window interior decoration board 413 of the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc.), as well as the main control board 1310 and peripheral control The decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven in response to commands from the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection with the board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510. It includes a performance drive board 1720, and a drive board box 1730 that accommodates the panel relay board 1710 and the performance drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 has its left side in rear view rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000, and its right side in rear view removably attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600. For example, the effect drive board 1720 has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface). ) to form a green resist layer. A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the performance drive board 1720, and attributes of the electronic components such as the part number of the electronic component and an area indicating the position where the electronic component is placed are displayed near these electronic components. (It may also include the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component.) The marking section is a white paint that stands out easily against the green color. Each image is printed using silk screen printing on a solid green resist.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is installed at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, and a second starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first grand prize opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of game balls B according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls B, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. A second grand prize opening 2006 is provided in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the game ball 2004.

In addition, the table unit 2000 has an output port 2010 provided at the lower end of the gaming area 5a to eject the gaming balls B from inside the gaming area 5a, and an outlet 2010 provided in the middle of the up and down direction within the gaming area 5a to eject the gaming balls B. It is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the contents from within the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a, and has a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011. a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front; A second attacker unit 2600 is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006; Comprising a side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate part 2003. There is.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near both left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided at the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010. A back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, a back rear direction unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and a back guidance unit 3050 provided spaced apart from side to side behind the back guidance unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back top effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back and rear effect unit 3100 at the upper part of the back box 3010, and a back top effect unit 3400 provided at the rear of the back front left decoration body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear right effect unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back rear left in the back box 3010. A back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500 and a back front right production unit provided between the back front right decoration body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 116. FIG. 116(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 116(b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front is used for games. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to become lower toward the rear (out port 2010).

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is urged by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 2010 penetrates with a width sufficient to allow the two game balls B to line up in the left and right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and the out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, back unit 3000, etc. arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since this front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a. , it is possible to give the player a sense of openness, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the gaming area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. The frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 115, etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can sufficiently hold the obstacle nails N in the front or attach the front unit 2000. It is said that Note that in this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is at the lowest position within the game area 5a, and a position corresponding to the outlet 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Furthermore, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel board 1110, penetrating the front and back, and through which the front unit 2000 is attached.

Although not shown in the drawings, the panel board 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes passing through the front and back, and the upper and lower edges thereof are spaced apart in the left-right direction. A plurality of engagement step portions formed with a thin plate thickness are provided. The positioning hole is for positioning the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement stepped portion is configured to be removably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engagement claw (not shown) or an engagement piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. be.

As shown in FIG. 116, the panel board 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is such that the left side and bottom side of the center are The width is wide enough to allow the balls B to line up, and the upper side is narrow enough to prevent a plurality of game balls B from being lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to include the panel board 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel board 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step that is approximately the same size as the gaming area 5a. It is provided with a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full bulb path unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper portion of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A cylindrical portion 3081 of an out ball detection member 3080 in a back guiding unit 3050 of a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into this out recess 1123.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are respectively inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, and a plurality of protruding pins arranged outside the holding step. The panel plate 1110 has three engagement claws that elastically engage with the engagement steps on the upper and lower left inclined parts of the panel plate 1110, and protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding step. A pair of engaging pieces that engage with two engaging step portions on the lower side, respectively. The panel holder 1120 is assembled by engaging the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. By elastically engaging the engagement step portion of the holding portion with the engagement pawl, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparent together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, A sense of openness can be given to the player, and the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is transparent along with the front component 1000, light from the performance display device 1600, front unit 2000, back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (towards the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

Further, on the back side of the transparent flat panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, when viewing the game board 5 from the front, in the vicinity of the right side of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, an unauthorized A magnetic sensor 1111 that detects magnetism is attached (see FIG. 113, etc.).

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112, 113, and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with the upper and front sides open, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200, when assembled to the game board 5, covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A transparent main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. This board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B ejected downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and allows them to be ejected from the ejection part 1201 formed on the bottom to the ejection ball receiving part 628 below. I can do it.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) that controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. It is equipped with.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Therefore, traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting hole sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting hole sensor 2401, a general winning hole sensor 3051, a first big winning hole sensor 2402, a second big winning hole. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-outlet sensor 2403, the second sub-outlet sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This functional display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The functional display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, and a second unit that displays the normal lottery results drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display device consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display device consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of game balls B at the gate section 2003 are provided.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the second starting port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of pending game balls B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that displays.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

Here, the configuration of the function display unit 1400 will be briefly described. The function display unit 1400 includes a box that is open at the rear and has an opening, a function display board housed in the box, and a flat cover that closes the opening. The outer shape of the function display board is smaller than the outer shape of the box. In this embodiment, the box body and the cover body are molded from colored opaque (non-transparent) resin (black resin). In addition to black, the colored opaque resin may be gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, or the like. Moreover, the box body and the cover body may be molded with a milky-white resin instead of a colored opaque resin, or may be molded with a colorless and transparent resin.

The box body is provided with LED insertion holes from the back side toward the rear at positions corresponding to the plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, LED bare chips) mounted on the front (surface) of the function display board. It is being Each LED insertion hole is formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lit or blinking light of each LED is not mistaken for the lit or blinking light of an adjacent LED. Further, a locking hole is formed at a predetermined position of the box body, into which locking portions formed on a plurality of attachment pieces of the cover body, which will be described later, are inserted.

Note that a white function display sticker is affixed to the front of the box. This function display sticker has a circular transparent portion formed at a position corresponding to each LED insertion hole when attached to the front surface of the box. That is, the lighting or blinking of the LED mounted on the front (surface) of the function display board is guided through the LED insertion hole and can be visually recognized through the transparent part. Further, the area around the transparent part of the function display sticker is black (it may be a dark color other than black), making it easier to determine the lighting state of the LED by comparing it with the transparent part.

A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, LED bare chips (also referred to as "LED elements")) are mounted on the front (surface) of the function display board, and front-side electronic components (surface) such as a plurality of LEDs are mounted. In addition to the pads to which side electronic components are soldered, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc., to form a white coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as a "solid white coating"). (sometimes referred to as "resist") forms a white resist layer. In this embodiment, the front side (front surface) of the function display board includes the part number of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component), an area indicating the position where the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is placed, etc. Attributes of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components), the size of the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components), The front-side marking section (front-side marking section) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component (which may include the model of the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component)) is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, It is a bright yellow paint that is hard to notice compared to white, and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist. Note that a black resist layer may be formed or a black paint may be silk-printed on at least the area surrounding the area corresponding to the LED insertion hole on the mounting surface of the function display board. As a result, even if the light from the LED leaks to the outside of the LED insertion hole, the black coating film with the lowest reflectance is formed, making it possible to suppress the diffusion of the light.

In addition to the connector housing to which electrical wiring is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. may be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board. In addition to pads to which rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components) such as various capacitors are soldered, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding through-holes, lands, etc., and a white coating film is formed. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "solid white resist.") A white resist layer is formed. In this embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board includes the part number of the rear electronic component (back electronic component), an area indicating the position where the rear electronic component (back electronic component) is placed, etc. Attributes of the rear electronic components (back electronic components) (in addition, the shape of the rear electronic components (back electronic components), the size of the rear electronic components (back electronic components), the rear electronic components (back electronic components) The rear electronic component (rear side electronic component) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component (electronic component) and the model of the rear electronic component (rear side electronic component) may be displayed in a predetermined color (e.g. It is a bright yellow paint that is hard to notice compared to white, and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist.

In this manner, in this embodiment, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist on the front (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the functional display substrate. In addition, in this embodiment, on the front side (front surface) of the function display board, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is made of copper foil, and the front side electronic components (front side electronic components) are Information to identify each electronic component is not formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and there is no information left on the foil left behind by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the information. In the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), the information to specify what kind of electronic component the back side electronic component (back side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern which is copper foil is that information. It is not even formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the foil and leaving behind the foil. In other words, in this embodiment, information for specifying what kind of electronic component the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (surface) of the function display board is. There is no information written on the (front) side of the function display board, and the information to specify what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) mounted on the rear side (back side) of the function display board is. There is no marking on the rear surface (back surface) of the display board.

The product control number (for example, FDU-TYP-A) of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body. A plurality of mounting pieces are extended. A locking portion is formed protrudingly on the outer side of the tip of each of the plurality of mounting pieces. Each locking part is inserted into each locking hole formed at a predetermined position of the box body with a portion of each locking part dissolved when the cover body closes the opening of the box body. By doing this, the cover body and the box body are welded together. In this way, the cover body and the box body of the function display unit 1400 are firmly adhered, and the function display board cannot be taken out without destroying at least part of the cover body and the box body. .

By the way, since the function display unit 1400 is an important unit whose display of lottery results, game status, etc. is controlled by the main control board 1310, it is impossible for the function display board housed in the box of the function display unit 1400 to be tampered with. If so, the lottery results, gaming status, etc. cannot be displayed correctly. In this case, for example, even though a game ball has not actually entered the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, a fraudulent signal may be input to the main control board 1310 as if a game ball had entered the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. Even if a fraudulent act is performed to obtain many lottery opportunities, the functional display unit 1400 cannot correctly display the lottery results, game status, etc., and it is difficult for staff such as game hall clerks to notice.

Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist on the front (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the functional display substrate. In other words, the front side marking part (front side marking part) and the back side marking part (back side marking part) printed by silk printing are not formed on the front side (front side) and rear side (back side) of the function display board. do not have. In addition, in this embodiment, on the front side (front surface) of the function display board, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is made of copper foil, and the front side electronic components (front side electronic components) are Information to identify each electronic component is not formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and there is no information left on the foil left behind by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the information. In the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), the information to specify what kind of electronic component the back side electronic component (back side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern which is copper foil is that information. It is not even formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the foil and leaving behind the foil. This makes it difficult to identify the electronic components mounted on the function display board and understand the circuit configuration.

In this embodiment, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated on the front surface (surface) of the functional display substrate, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is directly mounted on the front surface (surface) of the functional display substrate. The configuration was adopted. LED bare chips (also referred to as "LED elements") are extremely small electronic components that are enclosed in surface-mounted (top-type or side-type), chip-on-board, or bullet-shaped packages. be. For this reason, compared to the case where the LED package is mounted on the front (surface) of the function display board, the depth and distance dimensions of surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, and bullet type packages are smaller. Therefore, the function display unit 1400 can be made smaller. Note that since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the impact caused by a player hitting the door frame 3 etc. is transmitted directly to the door frame 3, the impact to the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board 5 will not be affected. Since the impact caused by the impact is weakened, there is a low probability that a plurality of LED bare chips mounted on the front (surface) of the function display board will be damaged by the impact caused by such a knock.

Examples of methods for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the front (surface) of the functional display board include wire bonding, flip chip bonding, etc. In this embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. did. In this flip chip bonding, unlike wire bonding, wires are not used to electrically connect the electrodes of the LED bare chip and predetermined electrodes on the front (surface) of the functional display board, but instead the electrodes of the LED bare chip are connected to the electrodes called bumps. A protrusion is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the front (surface) of the functional display substrate. This connection part is reinforced with solder, resin, etc.

Further, in this embodiment, there is no area printed by silk printing on the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the functional display substrate. As a result, the step of silk printing can be omitted, so the board manufacturing cost can be lowered by reducing the cost of silk printing plates and the number of manufacturing steps for the board.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the front side electronic components (front side electronic components) mounted on the front side (front side) of the function display board are mounted on the front side (front side) and the rear side (back side) of the function display board. There is no information written on the front (surface) of the function display board to identify whether the electronic component is a ) is not written on the rear (back side) of the function display board, but the board control number of the function display board can be written on the front (front) and /Or it may be written on the rear side (back side). The board management number may be printed using silkscreen printing using paint in a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white, or black or green, which is easy to stand out against white). However, in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), the wiring pattern is made of copper foil, and the board management number is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the board management number. Good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the model of the connector housing mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board is not indicated at all on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display board; It may be written on the front side (front side) and/or the back side (back side). The model number of this connector housing can be indicated by silk-screen printing with paint in a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white, or black or green, which is easy to stand out against white). In the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), the wiring pattern is made of copper foil, and the connector housing model is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the connector housing model. may be formed.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, but instead of being engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, the product control number is engraved on the left side wall of the box body. , the upper wall, the right side wall, and the lower wall, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 may be engraved on any one of the side walls.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back side) of the cover body, but instead of being engraved, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved with a predetermined number. You can print directly on the back side of the cover body with colored paint (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or print on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. It is also possible to attach the printed material to the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body. In addition, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, the product control number of the function display unit 1400 can be attached to any one of the left side wall, upper side wall, right side wall, and lower side wall of the box body. It may be printed directly with colored paint (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or the product control number of the function display unit 1400 may be printed on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. You may also paste a printed version.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, a white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the functional display substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist liquid. Instead of white, a green resist layer may be formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution, or a black resist layer may be formed by a black coating film formed by applying a black resist solution. A resist layer may be formed. The green resist solution is commonly used and therefore inexpensive. Using a black resist solution prevents reflection of light emitted by multiple LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the function display board, so that it does not mix with light emitted by nearby LEDs. can contribute to this.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated on the front surface (surface) of the functional display substrate, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the front surface (surface) of the functional display substrate. However, instead of the bare LED chip, we have installed a surface-mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, or bullet-type LED package on the front (surface) of the function display board. May be implemented.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, flip-chip bonding was adopted as a method for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to the predetermined electrodes on the front (surface) of the functional display substrate, but wire bonding was used instead of flip-chip bonding. may be adopted.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display board, the wiring pattern is made of copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the front side electronic components (surface side) are a plurality of LEDs. Information to identify what type of electronic component each (side electronic component) is was not formed by removing the foil that is formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of that information. A circle symbol is created near the position corresponding to the LED terminal (anode terminal or cathode terminal) and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form a standard terminal symbol on the front (surface) of the function display board. The foil-cut reference terminal symbols are each covered by a white (green or black may be used instead of white) resist that is formed and painted solidly on the front (surface) of the function display board. Good too. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut reference terminal symbol is formed to be electrically insulated from the LED. In addition, as a foil-cut reference terminal symbol, if the surrounding area is a so-called solid ground (board ground), the circle symbol itself may be foil-cut. In addition, the standard terminal symbol for removing foil may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED instead of a circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that allows distinguishing between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal), or a symbol used in the circuit diagram to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal). (The symbol used may be a simplified version of the symbol used to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal.) In addition, if the mounting directions of multiple LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the function display board are almost the same (that is, the mounting directions of the multiple LEDs are the same for mounting workers or automatic machines) ( If there is no item to be mounted in the opposite direction (if a rule has been established in advance), the foil-cut reference terminal symbol should be placed on the front of the function display board near the position corresponding to the terminal of one of the multiple LEDs. Alternatively, foil-cut standard terminal symbols may be formed on the front surface (surface) of the function display board in the vicinity of predetermined positions corresponding to one or more LED terminals. Good too. In this case as well, the standard terminal symbol for removing foil may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED instead of a circle symbol (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal), It may be a simplified version of the symbol used in the circuit diagram (symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal).

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 110, 113, 114, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board accommodating the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 112, 113, and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover body 1601 molded from a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the back side of the protective cover body 1601, a plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a are formed for locking various wirings along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601, and a long ventilation length is formed in the vertical direction. A plurality of holes are formed in a state where they are aligned vertically and horizontally.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and has approximately the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b that protrude upward from the upper end surface, and one lower fixing piece 1601c that protrudes downward from the lower end surface. This effect display device 1600, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward, attaches the back box to two fixing grooves 3010c that are open on the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the lower fixing piece 1601c side forward and inserting the lower fixing piece 1601c into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 117. FIG. 117(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 117(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and its front end protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the panel board 1110, and a portion of its rear end extends through the opening 1110 of the panel board 1110. It penetrates through and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 which are capable of receiving game balls B hit into the gaming area 5a and which are always open, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 which are used for games. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. The first grand prize opening 2005 is different from the first grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B of The game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with a second grand prize opening 2006.

Of the plurality (four in this case) of general winning holes 2001, three are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vertical direction in the right part of the gaming area 5a. It is placed above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 located at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a slightly higher height than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a. The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second big prize opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is located below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is located on the right side of the general winning port 2001 on the right side.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a, and has a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011. a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. ing.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and has a second big prize opening 2006; A side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out port 2012, and a side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate part 2003. A gate member 2800 is provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. FIG. 118(a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit seen from the front, FIG. 118(b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and side unit in the front unit seen from the back, and FIG. ) is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening when it is in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the starting port unit and side unit on the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, directly above the out port 2010, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101. It includes a flat flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 has a shape in a front view that is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long from side to side and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the periphery of the front wall portion 2101 excluding the upper side, and is formed in the shape of a gutter with an open upper side. The bottom surface of this peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and the game ball B can be guided rearward.

The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel board 1110 with the flange part 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall part 2102 in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting port unit 2100, when attached to the panel board 1110, has a first starting port 2002 that can receive the game ball B by means of a front wall portion 2101 and a peripheral wall portion 2102 that protrude forward from the panel board 1110. is forming.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 located directly below the center of Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central release part 2513a of the stage 2513, it will be received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

When the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the slope of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102, and the back unit 3000 It can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 at. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

Although not shown, a decorative sticker is pasted on the front surface of the front wall portion 2101, making it more conspicuous than the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general winning hole 2001, and it is possible to encourage the player to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002. At the same time, by allowing the first starting port 2002 to accept the game ball B, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) is drawn in which an advantageous gaming state such as a "jackpot" game in which the player is advantageous occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for the special lottery result that will be drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a gentler angle (an angle close to horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B backward is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001, so it will be visible to the player. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted.

In addition, when the starting port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. Light emitting decoration is carried out using light from LEDs on the lower back inner first decorative board 3322, the lower back inner second decorative board 3329, etc. of the inner back inner decoration unit 3320.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with a rib that spans the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the first starting port 2002. This rib is formed in a triangular shape (a portion may be rounded) when viewed from the side, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning ports 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200. The distance from the top of the first front wall 2203 to the top of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 is longer than the distance from the top of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 to the sloped part. (the ribs are positioned below the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the timing at which the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is brought into contact with the rib and guided backward is adjusted so that the timing when the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is brought into contact with the first front wall portion 2203. The timing can be delayed compared to the timing at which the robot contacts the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are open to accept game balls B at all times. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in a circular arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning holes 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 includes a flat base plate, and two side units extending from the base plate in the shape of a gutter in the front and back directions, the front end of which is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes downward, and is spaced apart from side to side. a first guide gutter, a first front wall portion that closes the front end sides of each of the two first guide gutter, and a gutter-like extending back and forth from the base plate on the left side of the two first guide gutter. and a second front wall portion that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guide gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion directed upward, and the second guide gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion directed toward the upper left. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 is located near the base plate 2201 so that the upper side extends vertically, and the lower side moves rearward as it goes downward, with the border at about 3/4 of the height from the bottom. It extends diagonally. Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a position about 3/4 of the height from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

This side unit 2200 is attached to the panel board 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The game ball B can be received at the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrude forward from the panel board 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. In addition, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel board 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrude rearward from the base plate 2201 pass through the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110. These first guide gutter 2202 and second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general prize openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game balls B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 are detected by the general winning a prize port sensor 3051, and then It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

Unlike the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker affixed to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning hole 2001. It is less conspicuous than the first starting port 2002. In addition, since the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 in the side unit 2200 are slanted, the three-dimensional effect of these general winning holes 2001 can be emphasized, even if no decorative stickers are pasted on the front. , it doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the back lower left presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, as shown in FIG. Light from the LED of the board 3203 can be used for light-emitting decoration, and the lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in good condition. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has an inclined portion in the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the lower left side of the back in the back unit 3000 is The light radiated forward from the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. You can make it look better.

In this side unit 2200, the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100, so that the side unit 2200 moves relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increasing. Note that the bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, the received game ball B disappears from view in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily drawn to the general winning hole 2001 for a long time while ensuring that the player is aware of the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the player's attention to the next game ball B and other winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. It is possible to enjoy the game within the game area 5a and suppress a decrease in interest.

In other words, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001, so it will be visible to the player. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portions 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are inclined, the first front wall portions 2203 can be viewed from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. It becomes possible for the game ball B to pass in front of the inclined part. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203, since the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front, some players may not accept the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. If the game ball B is not paid out, the player may feel a sense of distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall, and may lose interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of this embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are accepted into the general prize opening 2001 and directed backward. Since the guided game ball B can be made visible to the player for a short time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001. Therefore, even if the user has the illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

In addition, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall part 2203, the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When the game ball B passes through, if most of the game ball B (at least half of the game ball B or more) overlaps with the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front, some players may place the game ball B into the general winning hole 2001. It is possible to create an illusion as if the player has been accepted, and it is possible to entertain the player. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning hole 2001, there is no strong recognition that the game ball B was accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and there is no possibility that it may be an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefits (payout of game balls B and drawing of the first special lottery results) are not given afterwards, it is possible to avoid distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. This allows the player to continue enjoying the game and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning hole 2001 out of the three general winning holes 2001 in parallel to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with the second front wall portion 2205. The first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 has a similar shape. Thereby, when the game ball B is accepted into the left-most general prize opening 2001, some players can be given the illusion that it has been accepted into the starting opening. Even if the game ball B is accepted into the general winning slot 2001, which is under the illusion that it is a starting slot, the special lottery result is not drawn, so the player feels a sense of distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall. There is a fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 that is far to the left from the first starting opening 2002 in the center in the left-right direction (a position where it cannot be accepted for "right-handed hitting"), and the second Since there is no decorative sticker affixed to the front of the front wall portion 2205 to indicate a starting port, it can be reconfirmed that it is not a starting port, and the player may feel distrustful and lose interest in the game. This can be avoided.

In addition, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning holes 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is greater than when the front ends are made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, since a decorative sticker is not pasted on the front surface of the general winning hole 2001, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Although not shown, the angle of inclination from the horizontal in the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is such that variable winning openings such as the big winning opening and the accessory winning opening can be opened and closed. is larger than the inclination angle from the horizontal when the winning opening door rotates around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward and is in the open state so as to guide the game ball B toward the winning opening side. It is an angle. To be more specific, some players may find that if the number of game balls B paid out by receiving game balls B into the variable winning hole is larger than that of the general winning hole 2001, many of the game balls B may be delivered to the variable winning hole. I started hoping for a prize. Alternatively, even if it is a variable winning opening (big winning opening) in which a prescribed number of prizes is determined, the player wishes to win more than the prescribed number of prizes. Therefore, by making the slope of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening more gentle than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall part 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As mentioned above, when the game ball B is accepted into the variable winning hole, the accepted game ball B will be visible for a longer time than the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001. It is possible to make the user reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning hole, and also to convey the joy (feeling of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning hole to the general winning hole 2001. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was received. In addition, since the angle of the winning slot door in the open state is gentle, it takes a long time for the winning slot door to close from the open state, so the game ball B is won more than the specified number for the player. It can make you think that you do.

In addition, in the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, the portion extending diagonally downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. The distance between them is longer. As a result, since the winning hole is the general winning hole 2001, game balls B are paid out, but no drawings such as normal drawings or special drawings are held, so game balls B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 can be made invisible from the player's view at an early stage.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the side unit 2200, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 among the plurality of general winning openings 2001 is inclined, but this is not limited to this, and all general winning openings 2001 are inclined. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball B fired at the firing position in the normal gaming state (so-called "left-handed hit") can enter the general winning hole 2001 whose front surface is not inclined. Although the one provided in the above position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the general prize opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined can be used in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probable change", or "jackpot"). It may be provided at a position where the game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called "right-handed hit") can enter the ball, or it may be provided at both locations.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 with a slope on the front side is greater than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened from when it is closed. The angle is narrow. If the number of game balls B paid out when a prize is won in the grand prize opening is larger than that in the general winning opening 2001, even if the number of game balls B paid out when a prize is won in the grand prize opening is set, the player cannot win more than the specified number I hope. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B that won into the grand prize opening rolls toward the back side is said to be slower than the speed at which the game ball B that entered the general winning hole 2001, which has an inclined front surface, rolls toward the back side. There is. In other words, if a prize is won in the general winning hole 2001 which is smaller than the number of payouts when winning in the big winning hole, the speed of the game ball B that won in the big winning hole is said to be faster than the speed at which it rolls to the back side. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more payouts are made to the winning hole, the longer it takes for the winning hole to disappear from the player's sight. As a result, the winning slot with more payouts can provide a longer period of joy when winning a prize.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 117 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right. This side upper left unit 2300 is entirely transparent.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. 1st attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 121 to 125 and the like. FIG. 121(a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 121(b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as seen from the back. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first big prize opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a passage of the game ball in the first attacker unit in cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the starting port unit 2100 in the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is placed on the front side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. installed. This first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 130, etc.). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper part to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and the first big winning port 2005 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and further than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out opening 2011 is provided at a lower position than the first big winning opening 2005 below the second starting opening 2004.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004, and a first attacker unit that detects the game ball B received in the first big winning port 2005. It is equipped with a big prize opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 that detects illegal magnetism. Two first large prize opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel board 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 forming a flow path for the game ball B, and a front cover 2412 attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. The second starting port door 2414 is attached to the unit base 2411 and can close the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port door 2414 is moved to open and close the second starting port 2004. a solenoid cover 2416 that covers the starting port solenoid 2415; a first large winning port door 2417 that is attached to the unit base 2411 and can close the first large winning port 2005; A first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 to open and close the first big winning opening 2005, and a transmission for moving the first big winning opening door 2417 by transmitting the forward and backward movements of the first attacking solenoid 2418. A member 2419 is provided.

In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the first major winning opening decoration board 2420 for decorating the first major winning opening 2005 with light emission, and to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413, Second starting opening sensor 2401, first big winning opening sensor 2402, first sub-out opening sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, starting opening solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first big winning opening decoration board 2420 and panel relay board A first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with 1710 is provided.

Unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth near the upper end on the right side from the center in the lateral direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a, and a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a. A second opening 2411c that extends horizontally and extends back and forth in the upper part on the left side of the center, two second guide holes 2411d that are arranged horizontally below the second opening 2411c and penetrate back and forth; It has a first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates forward and backward below the first guide hole 2411b.

The first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 is formed so that the left and right width is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b has a cylindrical shape and protrudes rearward, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lower. The second opening 2411c has a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and extends left and right, and the door 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. The second guide holes 2411d each protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape, and are inclined so that the rear end side is lower.

Further, the unit base 2411 has two contact portions 2411e that are arranged left and right along the upper side of the second opening 2411c and protrude forward in a triangular shape. These abutting parts 2411e connect the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 to the contacting part of the front cover 2412 when the first big winning opening 2005 is in a closed state. They work together to distribute the fluid in a large zigzag pattern in the front and rear directions.

The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first big prize opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Furthermore, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2411, at a portion to the left of the first guide hole 2411b and to a portion to the right of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

The front cover 2412 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear, and is formed into a transparent member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 includes a first shelf 2412a that extends downwardly to the left from near the upper right corner, and a game ball that extends leftward from the left end of the first shelf 2412a when viewed from the front. It extends shorter than the first shelf part 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf part 2412a, with an interval slightly longer than the diameter of the first shelf part 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004, and the second shelf 2412b from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B to the left of the left end of the second shelf 2412b so as to be lower to the left. A third shelf part 2412c that extends shorter than the third shelf part 2412b is spaced from the left end of the third shelf part 2412c to the left by a length of four to six times the diameter of the game ball B. It has a fourth shelf part 2412d that extends lower to the left from a lower position than the fourth shelf part 2412d and forms a first big prize opening 2005 with the third shelf part 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left by a length slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

The front cover 2412 also includes a first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a, and a lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall 2412f extends to the same height, a third standing wall 2412g extends vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall 2412e, and a third shelf 2412c. a fourth standing wall 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end to the lower side of the front cover 2412; a fifth standing wall 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf 2412c; and a right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. It has a sixth standing wall part 2412j extending downward from the fourth shelf part 2412d, and a seventh standing wall part 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf part 2412d.

The fifth standing wall part 2412i extends downward from the left end of the third shelf part 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf part 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. , and extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to become lower to the right. It extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The interval in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and a first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, it slopes lower to the left with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow between it and the first horizontal wall part 2412l, and then goes halfway to the fourth vertical wall part 2412h on the left. It has a second horizontal wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to become higher toward the second side wall portion 2412m. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second horizontal wall portion 2412m is formed such that a portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the lower part of each of the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j in the direction approaching each other to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j, respectively. It has an extending third horizontal wall portion 2412n and a partition portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2412n and extends upward. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends in a stepped manner along the upper side of the front cover to become lower to the left, and has an interval that allows the game balls B to flow between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c. It is set apart. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 has triangular shapes in front of the abutting portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and at alternate positions in the left and right direction with respect to the two abutting portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions projecting rearward in shape. When the first big prize opening 2005 is in a closed state, these contact parts hold the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 with the contact part 2411e of the unit base 2411. They work together to distribute the fluid in a large zigzag pattern in the front and rear directions.

The rear cover 2413 has a box shape that is open to the front, and is made of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting opening door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first big winning opening door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to sandwich and hold the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out opening sensor 2403.

The second starting port door 2414 includes a flat door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and a left-right direction extending from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b. A rotating shaft 2414c is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d is provided at a portion remote from the rotating shaft 2414c at the lower part of the arm portion 2414b and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

The door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a, and then bends forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided on the side of the arm portion 2414b closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c.

This second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 with the door portion 2414a. The second starting port door 2414 rotates (rotates) about the rotating shaft 2414c as the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 moves forward and backward, so that the door portion 2414a moves in the front and back direction, and the second starting port door 2414 The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The starting port solenoid 2415 is installed with the plunger protruding toward the front. When the starting port solenoid 2415 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

The first big prize opening door 2417 includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and each of the pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical link pin 2417d projecting rightward from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a, and then bend forward to approximately the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided at the lower part of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. This link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in a transmission member 2419, which will be described later.

This first big winning opening door 2417 can close the first big winning opening 2005 with the door part 2417a. The first big prize opening door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotating shaft 2417c due to the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front and back direction. The first grand prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is installed with the plunger protruding toward the front. When this first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

The transmission member 2419 includes a base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, an extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a, and a transmission member 2419 that penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension 2419b. and a slit 2419c extending vertically. Into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 is slidably inserted.

A plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first large prize opening decoration board 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first large prize opening decoration board 2420 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The first big winning hole decoration board 2420 can decorate the first big winning hole 2005 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are each de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 projects forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a makes it impossible to receive the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

In addition, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 is connected to the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door section 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is located above the first grand prize opening 2005, and the door section 2417a makes it impossible to accept the game ball B into the first grand prize opening 2005. It is in a state of In other words, the first big winning opening 2005 is closed by the first big winning opening door 2417 (door part 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf part 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf part 2412a, and the door part 2414a of the second starting opening door 2414 After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B released from the second shelf part 2412b to the left falls onto the third shelf part 2412c or the door part 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 depending on its momentum, and due to the inclination of these, the game ball B falls to the left. roll towards. Note that when the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left comes into contact with the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c may enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door part 2417a that closes the first big prize opening 2005 is against the contact part 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact part of the front cover 2412. They will come into contact with each other alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzagging in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is released from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right from the first shelf section 2412a, it passes on the right side of the first vertical wall section 2412e, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m, and falls on the second horizontal wall section 2412m. Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Furthermore, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c, it passes between the third standing wall section 2412g and the fourth standing wall section 2412h and reaches the second horizontal wall section 2412m. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and then passes through the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the gaming area 5a. The substrate is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that have passed on the right side of the first shelf section 2412a and the game balls B that have passed through the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c are both It is formed to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate part 2003, the plunger resists the biasing force of the spring. moves backward, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (on the door portion 2414a side) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second starting port door 2414 rotates about the rotating shaft 2414c in a direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 becomes open, and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004. becomes. In other words, the second starting port 2004 is in an open state.

When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g and reaches the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls onto the first horizontal wall portion 2412l. A portion of the first horizontal wall portion 2412l between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g is inclined to be lower to the rear, and due to the inclination, the game ball B rolls backward, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B released rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guide unit 3050 onto the lower board holder 1200. be discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger moves back together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the biasing force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 retreats, the link pin 2417d of the first big prize opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pushed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding within the slit 2419c. It happens.

As a result, the first big prize opening door 2417 rotates around the rotation axis 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Will have to move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first big prize opening door 2417 to the rear of the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened upward, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened. It becomes possible to accept game balls B (see FIG. 124). In other words, the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the first big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, when the game ball B is accepted into the first big winning hole 2005, it passes between the fifth standing wall part 2412i and the sixth standing wall part 2412j, and then enters the fifth standing wall. After passing between the part 2412i and the partition part 2412o or between the sixth vertical wall part 2412j and the partition part 2412o and being detected by one of the two first big prize opening sensors 2402, It falls onto the third horizontal wall portion 2412n. This third horizontal wall portion 2412n is sloped so that it becomes lower toward the rear from the top surface, and the game ball B that falls onto the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the slope, and the unit base 2411 It is emitted backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released backward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. .

In this way, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, in the first big winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first big winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door part 2417a that closes the first big winning opening 2005. By rotating the door part 2417a around the rotation axis 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front and back direction, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened and closed. The depth in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2400) can be made as short as possible. This effect is the same for the second starting port 2004 that is opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

In addition, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning hole 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by a different first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since the game ball B is ejected backward, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from staying between the first big prize opening 2005 and the first big prize opening sensor 2402, and also to release many game balls in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 126(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit seen from the back. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a transparent frame shape, and allows the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 and various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 to be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a part that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, so that the game ball B hit in the game area 5a is placed within the frame. It is made so that it cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 that protrudes from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel board 1110 is inserted. This peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from entering from the outside of the center accessory 2500 into the inside of the frame when assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support section 2503 (flange section 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall section 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel board 1110.

A plurality of support parts 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall part 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the end side of the support portion 2503 protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or is formed in a straight line, so that the support portion 2503 is made inconspicuous. This support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), so that the amount of protrusion from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm). I try to make it less noticeable.

More specifically, a plurality of support parts 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in a support section 2503 provided above a warp entrance 2511, which will be described later, and at a portion where the peripheral wall section 2501 protrudes most to the left, the shape of the peripheral wall section 2501 at that section is in the middle of the vertically extending section. It has a shape that looks like it is bulging out to the left. The tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both upper and lower sides of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, and at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that bulges to the left, It has a different shape from the peripheral wall part 2501, and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower parts (see FIG. 135). When the support part 2503 of this part is assembled to the game board 5, the part extending linearly up and down on the tip side of the support part 2503 is the back front left decoration of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It is approximately along a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the tip edge of the support part 2503 is aligned with the edge of the back front left decorative body 3030, it becomes difficult to distinguish the support part 2503, and the back front left decoration provided at the rear is relatively difficult to distinguish. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support parts 2503, the support part 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends to the right in a quadrangular shape, whereas the peripheral wall part 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this part is located in front of the third back front left decoration unit 3710C in the back front left presentation unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 when assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 107, etc.) ). The end sides of the support portion 2503 extending left and right extend parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, so that the end sides of the support portion 2503 extend in parallel to the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. The support part 2503 is difficult to distinguish (see FIG. 111).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance that is opened on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 when viewed from the front and is located in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. 2511, a warp exit 2512 which is capable of releasing the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. It includes a stage 2513 that can be rolled in the left and right direction and then released into the game area 5a, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 127, etc.). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B that bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is positioned directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel board of the game panel 1100. 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the approximately center position in the left and right direction is slightly higher than both left and right sides. This stage 2513 has a portion that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction (center emitting portion 2513a), and a portion that is the lowest on both left and right sides (side emitting portions 2513b). The game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from these parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central release part 2513a) at the center in the left and right direction of the stage 2513 is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520, which is provided at the upper right corner and consists of two passages through which the game balls B can circulate. When this center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the upper right corner end of the center accessory 2500) is located at the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the front component 1000). 1006), and is formed so that a game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 always passes through the guide path group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the gaming area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in the shape of a groove open to the front, and the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in good condition.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided on the outside of the peripheral wall part 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and includes a first guide passage 2521 that is away from the peripheral wall part 2501 and a first guide passage 2521 that extends along the peripheral wall part 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522 extending from the top. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other in the left and right directions. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally downward to the right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 when the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly under the lower end of the stopper 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B that have come into contact with the stopper 1006 are in the first guide It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Furthermore, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward across the front width in the left and right direction, and an exit opening diagonally downward to the left with a width corresponding to one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530 has its right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, since the support portion 2503 is provided that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is attached to the center accessory 2500 in the region where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it forms the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall part 2501 (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the performance image of the rear performance display device 1600 and the back unit can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. 3000 decorations etc. can be made more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. Thereby, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the strength of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection mold without being deformed.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude briefly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. Obstruction of the visibility of the decoration of the unit 3000, the performance image of the performance display device 1600, etc. can be reduced. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support part 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 of the back unit 3000 and the back front left production unit 3700 are placed as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. , it is possible to prevent the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left presentation unit 3700 from becoming blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. For this reason, according to the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment, the visibility of the decorations etc. provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effects thereof can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the support part 2503 and the like are made transparent, and the support part 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body capable of luminescent decoration or the production display device 1600, the luminous decoration can be performed using the light from them, and the appearance is improved. can do. To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 135 etc., the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support part 2503 (the cross-hatched part in FIG. 135). , Transmits, reflects, refracts, or diffuses the light emitted forward from the LED of the back front left decorative board 3714 in the back front left direction unit 3700, the direction display device 1600, etc., to create a dazzling luminescent decoration. It can be shown to players. Note that the support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the step can diffuse light from the rear, making it look more dazzling.

In addition, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, so that the support portion 2503 on the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) In the close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Thereby, it is possible to widen the area of the game using the plurality of obstacle nails N as much as possible within the game area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same plane as the rear surface of the panel board 1110, and the support portion 2503 Since the support portion 2503 is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel board 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel board 1110. be able to.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the area within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is more It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be more easily seen. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulation area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall part 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support part 2503 may be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall part 2501. You can also do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extends by an amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

Note that the edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left presentation unit 3700 provided at the rear. As a result, since the support part 2503 is different from the rear decoration, it is possible to prevent the support part 2503 from becoming conspicuous and reducing the decorativeness of the rear decoration. can be increased.

Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front left direction unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the lens effect allows those decorations to be Although the example shown above is designed to prevent blurry appearance, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 may be provided near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that is far from the back unit 3000 at the rear. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left presentation unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear may be intentionally made to appear blurred.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating through it, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the peripheral wall 2501 may not have a rear part inserted into the opening 1112, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112. . Furthermore, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 that does not have the opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100, and in this case, the flange portion 2502 is not provided on the center accessory 2500. You can do it like this.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128(a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 128(b) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, side right middle unit, and gate member in the front unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the gate member seen from behind. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a, and It is attached to the front surface of a panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a second big prize opening 2006 that is openable and closable toward the left (see FIG. 129).

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second big winning hole sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006, and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time that acts near the second big winning hole 2006. 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second big winning opening door 2611 for opening and closing the second big winning opening 2006 and the second big winning opening door 2611 to open the second big winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the movement of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second big prize opening door 2611, and a second attacker solenoid 2612 for moving the second big prize opening door 2611. It has a guide path 2613 that guides the accepted game ball B and releases it rearward.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second large winning opening 2006 that opens toward the left at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction, and a second large winning opening 2006 that opens toward the left at a position on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A prize opening door 2611 is provided.

The second big prize opening door 2611 has a semicircular bottom side that bulges out downward, a right side that touches the right end of the bottom side and extends straight upward, and a right side that bulges out to the left from the top end of the right side. It is formed in a so-called feather shape, consisting of an arc-shaped left side that is in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second big prize opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotating shaft 2611a that extends in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as the axis, and a link that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from a position farther from the rotating shaft. It has a pin (not shown). The second big prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached to the lower rotating shaft so that the upper end moves to the left.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is installed with the plunger projecting downward. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction, so that the link pin of the second large prize opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit into which it is inserted, and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

When the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled to the game board 5, its right side is located so as to be in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the second attacker unit 2600 is located on the peripheral wall of the second big prize opening 2006 and the center accessory 2500. A space is formed between the right side of 2501 and the game ball B through which it can flow. In addition, when the second attacker unit 2600 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes further rearward than the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second grand prize opening door 2611 is upright, and the second grand prize opening 2006 is closed by the second grand prize opening door 2611. That is, in a normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006.

In this normal state, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is selected. When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second large prize opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second big prize opening door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second big winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the second big winning opening 2006 becomes open to the left, and the right end side of the second big winning opening door 2611 becomes lower. It will be in a tilted state. In other words, the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state. In this state, when the game ball B that has flown down comes into contact with the second grand prize opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, and then guided by the guiding path 2613 and released backward. The game balls B discharged rearward from the guiding path 2613 are delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and are discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side middle right unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 128 and 129. The middle right side unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is located directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. This side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning hole 2001 is always open upward in the left-right direction with the width of one game ball B, and the general winning hole 2001 is adjacent to the right side of the general winning hole 2001, and the left-right direction is the game ball B. A second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with a width corresponding to two balls B.

In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward, and a second guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 backward. It has two guiding passages 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending rearward from the general winning opening 2001, bent rightward, and further bent rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2701, and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are vertically aligned.

When this side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of each of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Furthermore, when the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, its right end is in approximate contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and its lower end is in approximate contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600, A space is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, in which the game ball B can flow. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second large winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 connects the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It is open upward over almost the entire area between the two (see FIG. 130, etc.).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the first guidance passage 2701, and then guides the game ball B accepted into the general prize opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 through the second guide passage 2702, and then guides the game ball B received into the second sub-out port 2012 to the back side of the panel board 1110. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate components]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 117 and 128. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed within the game area 5a between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is being The gate member 2800 includes a gate part 2003 in which a normal lottery result is drawn, which opens and closes a second starting port 2004 when a game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, and a gate sensor for detecting that a game cow B has passed through the gate part 2003. 2801. The detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is the gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes obliquely toward the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that its extension line passes near the left end of the general prize opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700 when assembled on the game board 5.

When assembled to the game board 5, the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, and the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500. A gap is formed through which the ball B can flow. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game balls B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 130. FIG. 130 is an enlarged explanatory diagram of the right side of the gaming area in FIG. 115. When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided approximately at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at the left and right outside parts and the lower part of the center accessory 2500. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly cause the game ball B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 to enter the part to the right of the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. Thereby, by hitting the game ball B so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, it is possible to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the game balls B that have passed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game balls B that have passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 are adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game balls B mainly flow through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B mainly flows on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and is driven into the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500 with respect to the inside of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. N, you are guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W. be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. After being guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 is transferred to the second delivery port 3062, third delivery port 3063, and fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064, is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3051, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B that are not accepted into the general winning hole 2001 are discharged from the out hole 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. There is a possibility that it will be guided to the side and received into the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may pass between a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning slot 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release parts 2513b on the left and right sides of the central release part 2513a, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is sent to the first starting port sensor. 3052 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052, a first special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is provided. Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the game ball B that circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a passes through the gate part 2003 or is accepted into the second starting opening 2004, the first grand prize opening 2005, and the second grand prize opening 2006. There is no possibility that you will be exposed.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 is higher than the probability that the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are not in an open state, it is possible to encourage the driving operation of the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 ("left hit").

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the game ball B is pushed with such strength that the game ball B enters the upper part of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower toward the right from near the center in the left-right direction. When hit, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide path 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate section 2003.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the left side of the gate member 2800 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. 2003 and the right side of the gate member 2800, the probability decreases in this order, and the liquid flows down toward the side middle unit 2700.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the right side of the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B hits the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. is emitted downwards. The game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the probability is approximately the same on the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800, and the probability is lower on the right side of the gate member 2800. and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received into the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then sent to the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged outside the gaming area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released to the side right middle unit 2700 side. Upon detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery with a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing on the left side of the gate part 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of reaching the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. , and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, It is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and is guided to the second grand prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flowing down to the left.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2006 is detected by the second big winning hole sensor 2601, and after being guided to the back of the gaming panel 1100 outside the gaming area 5a, the game ball B is placed in the back unit 3000. The substrate is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game balls B by this second big prize opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

The game ball B that was not accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006 and flowed down the left side of the second grand prize opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exits the lower right guiding passage 2530. from there to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B released downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B can directly enter the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first vertical wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flown down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to the inclination, and hits the upper surface of the door 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, depending on the momentum, the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left falls onto the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417, and the slope thereof , and after rolling from the door 2417a to the fourth shelf 2412d, it is released from the fourth shelf 2412d to the left outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, by contacting a plurality of obstacle nails N, it does not flow down to the first shelf part 2412a but to the upper shelf part 2412p. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flown down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to the inclination, is released from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left. The contact changes direction downward, and after flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door part 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417, the door part 2417a and the fourth shelf part 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even if the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf part 2412p, the first prize will depend on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf part 2412p and the timing at which the first prize opening 2005 becomes open. It may be accepted into the winning slot 2005.

In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, it may rebound to the right due to the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p, etc. By flowing upward, the first shelf portion 2412a may roll to the right against the inclination thereof, and may be ejected from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right (downward). The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf section 2412a passes between the first standing wall section 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m. However, due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, it rolls to the left and is received into the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned to the gaming area 5a until it reaches the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate part 2003, the second start Since the opening door 2414 moves and the second starting opening 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling leftward on the first shelf 2412a is received into the second starting opening 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When a game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, a second special lottery result is drawn and a bonus such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out is provided.

In addition, when the game ball B is released from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B is received by the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. When a "jackpot" is drawn as a result, the first big prize opening door 2417 moves and the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the first big winning opening 2005 is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first big winning hole 2005 is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by this first big prize opening sensor 2402, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

Note that depending on the momentum of the game ball B released leftward from the second shelf 2412b, it comes into contact with the level difference on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, and flows diagonally downward to the right and connects the second shelf 2412b and the third The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf portion 2412c and the shelf portion 2412c. The game ball B that entered the gap between the second shelf section 2412b and the third shelf section 2412c passes between the third standing wall section 2412g and the fourth standing wall section 2412h and reaches near the left end of the second horizontal wall section 2412m. It falls, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and is received into the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received in any of the second starting opening 2004, the first big prize opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open and close the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006, the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 must receive the game ball B, and the "small hit" is achieved. It is necessary to draw the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "Jackpot" or "Jackpot". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 requires the game ball B to pass through the gate section 2003 to draw (draw) a "normal win" as the normal lottery result. Therefore, the chance of receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player should drive the game ball B so that it flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002. The game ball B can be operated and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to allow the user to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1. This can increase expectations for acceptance.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting slot 2002 and a "small hit" or "jackpot" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning slot 2005 or the second big winning slot 2006 opens and closes, so in order for the game ball B to be accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed hitting", and the first grand prize opening is opened and closed. 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 can increase expectations for receiving the game ball B.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided at the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and the guide passage allows for easy passage through the gate part 2003. , the driving force of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired guide path, and the game ball You can enjoy the typing operation of B.

In addition, by performing a "right-handed hit" and passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003, there is a possibility that a "normal win" will be drawn in which the second starting port 2004 will be in an open state. By allowing the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B, there is a possibility that a "small win" or "big win" will be drawn, so that expectations for the game can be increased and a decline in interest can be suppressed. I can do it.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall; and a locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near both left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, and a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided at the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010. A back guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, a back rear direction unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the back box 3010, and a back guidance unit 3050 provided spaced apart from side to side behind the back guidance unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010. The back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom middle production unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left production unit 3200 and the back bottom right production unit 3250 in the back box 3010. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back top production unit 3400 provided in front of the back and rear production unit 3100 at the upper part of the back box 3010, and a back top production unit 3400 provided at the rear of the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back-rear-left production unit 3500, the back-rear-right production unit 3600 provided behind the back-front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010, the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-rear left decoration in the back box 3010. A back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500 and a back front right production unit provided between the back front right decoration body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Inside this back box 3010, a back front left decorative body 3030, a back front right decorative body 3040, and various production units are attached, and a production display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side. This back box 3010 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting part 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting part 3010b. A notch 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010, to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable left and right.

In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, and the like formed at appropriate positions for mounting decorations, presentation units, and the like.

Further, the back box 3010 has a band-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and both left and right sides of the opening 3010a. This reinforcing plate 3011 reinforces the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Next, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing an enlarged view of the upper left corner of the game board with the door frame made transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3032 affixed to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and its left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3032 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)). This back front left decorative body 3030 is formed to be opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3042 affixed to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and its right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)). This back front right decorative body 3040 is formed to be opaque, and can make the rear member invisible from the front.

The back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge thereof is located outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front when assembled on the game board 5. (See Fig. 111, Fig. 135, etc.). Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are shaped like a flat plate so that when assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the outer peripheral edge thereof is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. It has extended to

To be more specific, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 is moved half way from the bottom of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back rear left presentation unit 3500. It extends to the position of In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended outward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, when assembled to the game board 5, the lower half of the back-rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back-front left decoration body 3030 (the shaded part in FIG. 135). The lifting drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back left lifting drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). Since it extends to the rear left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible to the player, improving the appearance of the game board 5 (Pachinko machine 1). can do.

In addition, the back front left decoration body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and when assembled on the game board 5, the back left lifting drive motor 3554 is extended. Although a part (the upper half) is visible from the front, by assembling it into the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000, the function display unit Instead of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 (functional component) etc. provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right lift drive motor 3654 in the back rear right presentation unit 3600 when viewed from the front. Even through the component 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is not visible from the front (player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (Pachinko machine 1) is improved by making functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear of the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible to the player. Therefore, the same effect as the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exhibited.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a portion of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear are covered. Therefore, the functional parts can be made difficult to see from the player's side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (Pachinko machine 1) can be improved.

Furthermore, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided at the rear can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Also, the functional parts can be made invisible to the player. In other words, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundaries of the game area 5a, giving players a sense of openness, and making it easier to see the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made to appear larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a of the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040 that are decorated with predetermined decorations are located on the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 Since they can be seen from the front through the play area, the outside of the play area 5a can also be decorated with them, and the play area 5a can be made to look larger than it actually is, making it possible to strongly attract the attention of players. It can be the board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Moreover, as described above, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit can be made transparent. 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. The overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

Note that the parts of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 that extend outward from the gaming area 5a allow functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided at the rear to be accessed from the player's side. Since they can be made invisible, all functional parts may be provided outside the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure space for installing all functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a must be relatively reduced. Therefore, as in this embodiment, some of the functional parts are moved outside the gaming area 5a in such a way that the gaming area 5a can be large relative to the size of the gaming board 5. It is desirable to provide one.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a when viewed from the front. As a result, the design inside the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. 5a can be made to appear larger than it actually is, and the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the attention of players.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136(a) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 136(b) is a perspective view of the back guidance unit in the back unit seen from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end inside the back box 3010, and has a shape in which both ends extending left and right are bent upward. The back guiding unit 3050 is formed substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and a first starting opening sensor 3052 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the first starting opening 2002. An out port sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010, a second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, and a warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. A magnetic sensor 3055 is provided at the rear of the camera to detect unauthorized magnetism.

In addition, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first delivery port 3061 where the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 is delivered, and a general winning port 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 to which the game balls B are delivered, a third delivery port 3063 to which the game balls B received in the general winning slot 2001 on the inside side of the side unit 2200 are delivered, and a general delivery port on the left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 receives the game balls B received into the winning port 2001, and the fourth delivery port 3064 receives the game balls B received into the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the first big prize hole 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the second big prize hole 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 receive it. the seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game balls B received are delivered; the eighth delivery port 3068 to which the game balls B received into the general winning slot 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 are delivered; A ninth delivery port 3069 is provided to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Furthermore, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first discharge path that guides the game balls B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharges them downward, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The game balls B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game balls B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are connected to a second discharge path that merges them and discharges them downward, and the balls are delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game balls B downward and discharges them diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game balls B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 are lower than the sixth delivery port 3066. A fourth discharge path is provided, which guides the liquid downward to a position that is further left than the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharges the liquid diagonally to the lower left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with this fourth discharge path.

The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path and then discharged downward. be done. A game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and a game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063. After merging with the ball B in the second discharge path, it is detected by the general winning hole 2001 and then discharged downward. The game ball B received by the general winning port 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning port 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

The game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received into the first big winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B that was delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B that was received by the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is placed on the upstream side of the portion of the fourth discharge path that communicates with the ninth delivery port 3069. It is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3051 and is discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, merges with the fourth discharge path, and passes through the fourth delivery path. It is discharged through four discharge channels.

This back guidance unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out ball detection member 3080 is driven into the gaming area 5a, and is received in the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. To detect the game ball B that was received into the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the gaming area 5a among the game balls B that were not present (game balls B that were not given a benefit, also referred to as "out balls"). belongs to.

The out ball detection member 3080 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and is connected to a cylindrical portion 3081 that extends cylindrically in the front and back direction so that the game ball B can flow therethrough, and A partition part 3082 that divides the interior into left and right parts, a flange part 3083 that projects in a flat plate shape from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081 in the left and right direction, and a flange part 3083 that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081 and holds the game ball B downward. and a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and ejected (see FIG. 114). In the out ball detection member 3080, an out outlet sensor 3053 is provided between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The cylindrical portion 3081 has approximately the same size as the out port 2010, has a width in the left and right direction that is enough for two game balls B to line up (width that does not line up three game balls B), and has a lower inner surface. It slopes downward toward the rear. The partition part 3082 is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081, and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The front end side of the partition portion 3082 is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward.

In the out ball detection member 3080, two out outlet sensors 3053 are provided side by side on the left and right. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing on the left side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical part 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical part 3081. This is to detect game balls B that have been distributed. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two outlet sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B flowing inside the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the location of the outlet sensor 3053, so the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the outlet sensor 3053, and the game ball B can be quickly discharged to prevent it from stagnation in front of the outlet sensor 3053.

When this out ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 114).

When the out ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out-guiding section 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical section 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the ejection portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

This out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the gaming area 5a, and then is guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 and accepted into the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by either of the two outlet sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 ejects the game ball B to the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without bringing it into contact with the board holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection member 3080 of this embodiment, since the two out port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right sides are partitioned by the partition portion 3082, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be detected. It is possible to guide the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the side of the outlet sensor 3053 on the right side. Therefore, depending on the number of game balls B detected per time by each of the left and right exit sensors 3053, it is possible to determine whether the player tends to "hit left-handed" or "hit right-handed." Based on this determination, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the most suitable input operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the user to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, in the out ball detection member 3080, the forward protrusion of the partition portion 3082 is shortened so that the game balls B can easily get over the partition. The game balls B can be released to the left or right side of the section 3082 where the flow rate of the game balls B is relatively small, and the game balls B can be discharged without being delayed at the outlet 2010.

In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is made to protrude below the discharge part 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big prize opening 2006, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows backward by the out ball detection member 3080 and is detected by the out exit sensor 3053. This can prevent the ball from being detected, and only the "out ball" received at the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection member 3080 is shown as being provided on the back unit 3000, but the invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so it is compatible with the existing game panel 1100 that has an out recess 1123. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Moreover, according to this embodiment, it is driven into the gaming area 5a, and the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006. Since the game ball B ("out ball") that was not accepted by any of the players can be detected by the out exit sensor 3053, the first sub out exit sensor 2403, and the second sub out exit sensor 3054, If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of game ball B into the opening is continuously detected, it means that a fraudulent act is being carried out with respect to a specific winning opening. It is possible to notify that fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, since the number of "out balls" can be counted by detecting them, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole The number of "winning balls" counted by the detection of game balls B accepted in 2006, the number of "out balls", general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, first large The "ball output rate" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006. Although not shown, a display section is provided on the rear side of the game board 5 to display a "ball payout rate".

In addition, on the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all balls") hit into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B ("all balls") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), since only the "out ball" is detected by the out hole sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, the "out ball" and "winning ball" are detected. By comparing the numbers of "," and "all balls," it is possible to detect the occurrence of ball jamming in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back and rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137(a) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 137(b) is a perspective view of the back and rear effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back and rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back and rear effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost position in the back box 3010 (the front of the rear wall). The back rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to have approximately the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back side effect unit 3100 includes a back side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back side movable mechanism 3120 that moves the back side movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a transparent plate-shaped decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of first decorative bodies provided at the rear of the decorative body 3111 on the front surface. It includes a rear decorative board 3114 on which an LED 3114a and a second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative body base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 are each of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the rear decorative board 3114 can decorate the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) with light emission.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 also includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable protrusion 3116a protruding leftward from near the lower end, a locking protrusion 3116b triangularly protruding leftward from near the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. have.

The rear movable mechanism 3120 has a U-shape that opens downward when viewed from the front, and includes a unit base 3121 that is installed inside the rear box 3010, and a columnar shape extending vertically on the left side of the unit base 3121. A slide shaft 3122 supports the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a spiral shaft extends vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122. A spiral shaft 3123 in which a shaped groove is formed.

In addition, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a transmission gear 3124 in the form of a spur gear attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a motor gear 3125 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 connected to the rotating shaft. The rear rear drive motor 3126 is attached, the motor base 3127 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

The back movable mechanism 3120 also includes a slide guide 3130 that is screwed onto the spiral shaft 3123 and can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back movable decorative body 3110 from below, and a slide guide 3130 on the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends vertically and can be raised and lowered so that its lower end side can come into contact with the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that biases the transmission slider 3131 upward, and the transmission slider 3131. a link member 3133 that rotates around an axis in the front-rear direction as the link member 3133 moves up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the link member 3133 and can come into contact with the lock protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110; It is equipped with

Further, the rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, a lower rear detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130. A front left cover 3137 is attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a front left cover 3137 is attached to the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Connections between the front right cover 3138 attached, the rear rear drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear rear lower detection sensor 3136 attached to the front lower part of the front left cover 3137 and the production drive board 1720. The back left relay board 3139 is installed between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and connects the back decorative board 3114 of the back movable decorative body 3110 to the effect drive board 1720. A rear right relay board 3140 is provided.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb shock. The upper and lower ends of the slide shaft 3122 are held between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 protrudes to the right from near the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a that is detected by a back and lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and cannot rotate around the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by contacting them. The lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can come into contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130. Furthermore, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can come into contact with the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached to be movable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved vertically only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 includes a lower protrusion 3131a protruding to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding to the right on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from near the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. and a protruding pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower projection 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, a projection pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131, and urges the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 has a triangular shape when viewed from the front, with each vertex being rounded. The link member 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex about an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has an elongated first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and an elongated first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the upper apex from the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the locking member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, forms a flat upper end surface with a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and extends in the left-right direction. A contact surface 3134b that extends and can be contacted by the lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and is inclined so as to move to the left as it goes downward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b, It has a guide surface 3134c on which the locking protrusion 3116b can come into contact.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the behind-the-scenes effect unit 3100 will be explained. In the normal state of the rear effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141(a)), the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in a retracted position moved upward, and the slide guide 3130 is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the locking member 3134 has moved to the right and is located at the locked position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable ornament 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the rear movable ornament The lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of 3110 is in contact with it.

In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the end of upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring 3132. Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force 3132 acts on the link member 3133 in a clockwise direction about the rotation axis, and also biases the locking member 3134 in a direction to slide rightward. Therefore, the locking member 3134 is maintained at the locked position by the biasing force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the relevant position for some reason (malfunction), the remaining members cannot prevent the rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving downward (falling). can.

Further, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the lower rear detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

In the normal state of the retracted position, the back and rear production unit 3100 is located behind the back and top production unit 3400, and is not visible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise in plan view) by the rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed into the spiral shaft 3123 is moved downward. Move to. Even if this slide guide 3130 moves downward, the rear movable decorative body 3110 will not move downward from the retracted position because the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in contact with the locking member 3134. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back/rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 moves to the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It comes into contact with the upper end surface (see FIG. 141(b)). When the slide guide 3130 moves further downward with the back/rear lower detection sensor 3136 detecting the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward, The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

As the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 moves counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the direction of rotation. Then, as the link member 3133 rotates counterclockwise, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left. The locking member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 141(c)).

When the locking member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the locking member 3134 is released, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is not detected by the rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the fallen rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, and thereby stops falling and returns to the appearance position (see FIG. 141(c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 does not come into contact with it.

In the back and rear effect unit 3100, in the state where the back and rear movable decorations 3110 are in the appearance position where they have fallen, the back and rear movable decorations 3110 are visible from the front (player side). In this state, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear decorative board 3114, the rear movable decoration body 3110 (decoration body 3111) can be decorated with light. Players can be entertained by the light-emitting decoration.

When returning the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the appearance position of the lower moving end to the normal retracted position, the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the spiral shaft 3123 in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in plan view). direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, as the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise, and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the locked position, contrary to the above. Become.

Furthermore, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing , the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141(d)).

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to near the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking protrusion 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking protrusion 3116b abuts the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking protrusion 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c applies a force to move the locking member 3134 to the left. As a result, the locking member 3134 slides to the right against the urging force of the spring 3132 which attempts to move it to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking protrusion 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 due to the upward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure by the locking protrusion 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated; The locking member 3134 slides to the right due to the biasing force of the spring 3132 and enters the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the locking member 3134 is positioned below the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the locking member 3134 prevents the rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the upper rear detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the normal state of the retracted position.

According to the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back and rear movable decorative body 3110 extending left and right can be dropped from the retracted position where it cannot be seen from the player side to the appearance position where it can be seen. As a result, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players and to strongly attract the attention of the players.

In addition, since the locking member 3134 that locks (regulates) the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is released by moving to the left, it can be rotated around the axis in the front and rear direction. Compared to the case where the lock is released by moving the back movable decorative body 3110 when the lock is released, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward.

[5-9d-1. Movable decorative body on the back]
Next, the back movable decorative body 3110 in the back and rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the rear movable decorative body together with the rear decorative board. 143(a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143(b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144(a) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body seen from the front, and FIG. 144(b) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body seen from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 147 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in broken lines in the front view of FIG. 147. FIG. 149(a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 149(b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet at the same part as the decorative body in (a), (c) is a front view showing a portion of the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board at the same location as the decorative body in (a).

Further, FIG. 150 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143(a). FIG. 151 is an exploded view of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decoration by the decoration body and the decoration sheet, the light guide radiation plate, and the rear decoration board by enlarging a part of the front side of the rear movable decoration body. FIG. 153(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the rear decorative board in the area of the first LED in a cross section, and FIG. FIG. 6(c) is an explanatory view showing from the front the action of the light guide and radiation plate in the area where the light guide and radiation plate acts, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example of arrangement of one LED from the front. FIG. 154 is an enlarged front view of a part of the rear decorative board together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 155(a) is a front view of the back decorative board, and FIG. 155(b) is a rear view of the back decorative board. FIG. 156(a) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 156(b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part of a different form from that in FIG. 156(a). It is an enlarged sectional view, and (c) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of decoration body which had a metal decoration part of a form further different from (a) and (b).

The rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG. 142, etc., and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. To be more specific, when viewed from the front, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is arranged between two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both left and right ends, and a horizontal direction between the two first decorative portions 3151. It has a plurality of second decorative parts 3152 arranged in a row. The first decorative parts 3151 each imitate one cherry blossom flower. Although not shown, the second decorative parts 3152 each imitate a predetermined character, and by being arranged in rows on the left and right, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (in other words, pachinko A predetermined logo is formed in accordance with the world view of machine 1 (gaming board 5). In this way, the rear movable decoration body 3110 is decorated with a logo placed between two cherry blossom flowers.

As shown in FIGS. 142 to 146, the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 is a decoration that extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 with relief-like unevenness. a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having a transparent flat plate shape, and a translucent region (area) provided with a decoration (picture) provided at the rear of the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative part 3150; A decorative sheet 3112 in the form of a sheet having a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 provided at the rear of the decorative sheet 3112, and a light guide radiation plate 3113 provided at the rear of the light guide radiation plate 3113. A rear decorative board 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs and a plurality of second LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)"), and a rear side of the rear decorative board 3114. A flat decorative base 3115 is attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover it, a left slider 3116 extends vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider 3116 extends vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. A slider 3117 is provided.

Note that the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, and the surface of the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. Indicates the attributes of the side electronic component (which may also include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component.) The front side inscription is printed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a translucent region ( Since the decorative sheet 3112 is arranged in this order, the decorative sheet 3112 has a transparent part (region) and a transparent part (region), the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a transparent flat plate shape, and the rear decorative board 3114 is arranged in this order. Although there are parts (regions) having a characteristic, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 by silk printing is different from that of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and Visible through the decorative body 3111, when the first LED and the second LED are off, the area corresponding to the translucent part (area) and having a predetermined paint color is visible. If it is visible, it is only possible to confirm the presence of the specified paint color, and it is not possible to determine whether the specified paint color indicates letters, symbols, or shapes. On the other hand, if the area corresponds to a transparent part (area) and the color of the specified paint can be visually recognized, the color of the specified paint will be used to display characters, symbols, shapes (i.e., the surface indicated by the surface side markings). Attributes of side electronic components) can be determined.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body with movable decorative body on the back]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front side and the rear side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b that is shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b that protrudes forward. It has a third decorative protrusion 3111c that is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided at a portion forming the outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusions 3111a in the first decorative part 3151 are formed on the outer periphery of the petals of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower, and in the central part imitating the stamens and pistils. . The first decorative protrusions 3111a in the second decorative portions 3152 are formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each second decorative portion 3152 in double (two strips). The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that its front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided on the outside of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape that resembles a cherry blossom or flower petal, which is smaller than the first decorative part 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that its front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided within the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative part 3151 is curved. Moreover, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the second decorative part 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute a part of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 in the decorative part 3150, respectively.

In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes more forward than the second decorative protrusion 3111b (first foil stamping area (see FIG. 156(a))). It has a metal decorative portion 3111d (the darkly shaded portion in FIGS. 147 to 149). The entire decoration body 3111 except for the metal decoration part 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 150 and 156(a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of this embodiment is provided at the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is not provided on the side of the As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 can be made longer than when the metal decoration part 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. This makes it possible to improve insulation against electrostatic discharge and short circuits.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative part 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative part 3111d can impart a sense of luxury. In addition, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be further emphasized due to the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. The metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114, as shown in FIG. The first LED housing portion 3113c is made difficult to see from the front.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a, etc. of the rear back decorative board 3114 is transmitted through the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. By reflecting the light backward, the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear can be illuminated, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by hot stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). To explain in detail, first, an intermediate product before the decoration body 3111 is completed is molded by injection molding of synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted in a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative protrusion 3111a etc. protrudes facing upward. At this time, above the intermediate product of the decoration body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat hot plate having an elastic lower surface and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a position a predetermined distance downward from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111 (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b), and the hot plate is The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil stamped) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, a metal decorative part 3111d is formed in the first foil stamping area FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156(a)). .

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used to form the metal decorative portion 3111d of this embodiment has elasticity at the portion that comes into contact with the decorative body 3111 to which the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred. Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, it can be elastically deformed along that surface, and the metal foil can be kept in good condition even on curved surfaces and other three-dimensional parts. It can be transferred (foil stamped). As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be formed easily without requiring large-scale equipment, and an increase in cost can be suppressed, compared to the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition.

In addition, although in the said embodiment, the metal decoration part 3111d was provided only in the front-end|tip part of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the decoration body 3111, but it is not limited to this. For example, when forming the metal decorative part 3111d using a hot stamping device, the first decorative protrusion can be lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c. A decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

Alternatively, with the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 mounted on the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is stamped using a transfer sheet having metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). It is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil stamping area FS2), and the first Transfer metal foil. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a different color from the first metal foil, the hot plate is moved so that it is lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The second metal foil is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1) and transferred to the tip of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 156(b)). As a result, a decorative body 3111 is formed in which the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b have metal decorative parts 3111d of different colors without performing masking on the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film by plating or vapor deposition on the surface of an intermediate product before the decoration body 3111 is completed, the metal film is peeled off (laser peeling) at a portion other than the first decorative protrusion 3111a using a laser beam. Alternatively, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156(c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in addition to the tip portion.

The decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recessed portion 3111e that is recessed toward the front from the general surface on the rear side. The rear recess 3111e is provided to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The rear recess 3111e equalizes the thickness of the decorative body 3111, thereby suppressing deformation due to resin sink during injection molding.

The rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided in a portion of the flat rear surface corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c so as to be recessed forward. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recessed portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of a first contour portion 3112a, which will be described later, in the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The pattern etc. of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen through the transparent decorative body 3111.

In addition, since the rear recessed portion 3111e is provided in a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is located in front of a first light diffusing portion 3112c and a second light diffusing portion 3112d, which will be described later, in the decorative sheet 3112. located at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear concave portion 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the gap allows light irradiated from the front to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. , diffuse reflection occurs between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front brightens the rear recess 3111e. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not emitting light, light from the front illuminates the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, i.e. , the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 forming the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

Furthermore, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f that protrude rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The attachment boss 3111f is for attaching the decoration base 3115 to the rear side of the decoration 3111. The attachment boss 3111f is provided at a location directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Thereby, the attachment boss 3111f is difficult to see from the front (player side) due to the lens effect of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided at a portion in front of the attachment boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the attachment boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet with movable decorative body on the back]
The decorative sheet 3112 is a thin sheet and has an outer shape that is approximately the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet with a pattern applied to the rear surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 except for the rear part of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111 and in the central part of the first decorative part 3151. A second contour portion 3112b is provided at a portion between the first contour portion 3112a, which corresponds to the second decorative portion 3152, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a is formed doubly on the decorative body 3111; A first light diffusing portion 3112c is provided at a portion of the decorative body 3111 that corresponds to the first decorative portion 3151 and is located inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); A second light provided on the inner side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that corresponds to the second decorative part 3152 and is provided doubly on the decorative body 3111 (the rear part of the third decorative protrusion 3111c). It has a diffusion section 3112d.

In addition, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmitting portion 3112e provided at the rear of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. have.

The first contour part 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, as shown in FIG. It is said to be the area where the interference fringes of light are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed to be opaque. In this embodiment, the hologram portion in the first outline portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111. In addition, the portion imitating cherry blossoms in the first outline portion 3112a is white or pink (pink in this embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The colors are in line with the concept of the Japanese government. Note that the ink (paint) used for the pattern etc. may contain glitter particles that sparkle.

When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, the first contour portion 3112a is located outside and rearward of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metallic decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, continuity can be provided to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, the sense of perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made less noticeable.

Further, the first contour portion 3112a is formed in a light gray or white color on the rear surface side. This improves the coloring of the images and holograms on the front side. Furthermore, the light emitted forward from the light guide and radiation plate 3113 can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide and radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can be made to emit light more brightly, the amount of light emitted forward from the transparent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back movable decoration body 3110 can be decorated with brighter light. At the same time, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be more uniformly decorated with light.

Furthermore, since the first contour part 3112a is provided on the outside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, the first contour part 3112a is provided on the outside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, so that It is located at the rear of the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is transmitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no diffuse reflection, and the pattern and hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

The second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed into a black line shape with a predetermined width, as shown in the figure. This second contour portion 3112b is located behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portions 3111d) provided twice on the decorative body 3111. In other words, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double gold metal decoration portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b brings out the double metal decoration portions 3111d. Therefore, the decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has translucency and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To explain in detail, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149(b) etc., in the first light diffusing part 3112c, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower imitated by the first decorative part 3151, from the center of the petal to the periphery. A predetermined color (this embodiment Multiple dots (pink) are printed. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the first light diffusing part 3112c is made to emit light, the pear-like pattern of the first light diffusing part 3112c causes a slight As a result, a three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the light-emitting decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 is transparent and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities that can disrupt light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided entirely inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light and dark hatching in FIGS. 147 to 149. It is being The second light diffusing portion 3112d is transparent and is formed of a plurality of fine irregularities that can disrupt light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusing portion 3112d are formed in a dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of this embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white color. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 for emitting light from the rear to the second light diffusing part 3112d is made to emit light, the halftone pattern of the second light diffusing part 3112d causes a predetermined The second decorative portion 3152 consisting of the characters can be decorated with light with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind a portion of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and are located on the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. A rear recessed portion 3111e that is recessed forward is provided. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface at the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recessed portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. The state will be as follows. Due to the gap, light irradiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the light from the front causes the first light to The diffusion section 3112c and the second light diffusion section 3112d become brighter. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114 are not emitting light, the light from the front can be used to illuminate the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112, i.e. , the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 forming the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 This constitutes the remainder of the portion 3150 excluding the decoration by the decoration body 3111. In the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on the rear side of a transparent sheet serving as a base. There is. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Moreover, the first light diffusing part 3112c and the second light diffusing part 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by pasting a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusion section 3112c and the second light diffusion section 3112d may be a lens film or a prism film.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since this transparent part 3112e is provided at the rear of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metallic decorative part 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a of the back decorative board 3114 is transmitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted and irradiated onto the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative part 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side side remains transparent, so the first decorative protrusion 3111a is viewed from the rear through the transparent part 3112e. The light irradiated onto the first decorative protrusion 3111a leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. For this reason, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration as if a halo is shining on the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d). In addition, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be illuminated from the front by the light transmitted through the transparent portion 3112e and radiated to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily seen, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of this embodiment is formed to have approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, it is possible to decorate up to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 with the first outline portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram. The decoration of the rear movable decoration body 3110 can be made to look larger. In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered, so the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. By displaying a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 on the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a performance with a sense of unity. It is possible to give a visual impact to the players and attract their attention, and also to entertain the players with the large decorations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the players.

Note that in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, a transparent transmitting portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may also be provided at a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d. As a result, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side is visible through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. , it is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 from becoming unsightly. Moreover, by providing the first contour part 3112a to the rear part of the metal decorative part 3111d, the first decorative protrusion in the first contour part 3112a can be passed through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a is visible, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated with the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be decorated with the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Even if the decorative portion 3150 is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of rear movable decorative body]
As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat body portion 3113a extending left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted; A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. 3113c, and an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f on the side opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. .

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a in front view.

The main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface that is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by approximately 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the rear end of this flange portion 3113b protrudes further rearward than the rear decorative board 3114 when assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110.

The first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumferential shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c are provided behind a portion of the decorative part 3150 with low transparency when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. To be more specific, in the first decorative part 3151, the plurality of first LED housing parts 3113c are provided behind the part of the first light diffusing part 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 where the pink shading by the dots is thick. ing. To be more specific, the first LED accommodating part 3113c provided in the first decorative part 3151 is located closer to the center than the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. The inner circumference is rectangular, and the center of the long side is located on the center line of the petal.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c provided in the second decorative part 3152 are located behind the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second outline part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. It is being For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided at the second decorative portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152. In addition, when the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the respective first LED accommodating parts 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 149(c) and 153(c). It is formed in a state that By connecting the first LED accommodating parts 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to avoid forming a part in the main body part 3113a that is thinner than the thickness of the main part 3113a, thereby preventing damage to the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating part 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the main body part 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front or rear surface) of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the first LED housing part 3113c, the light is A part of the LED accommodating part 3113c is reflected straight toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c and enters the first LED accommodating part. 3113c. When the light emitted inside from one of the four surfaces of the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating section 3113c reaches another surface of the inner circumferential surface, a part of the light on that surface reaches the first LED accommodating section 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the remainder enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In other words, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body part 3113a inside the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED accommodating part 3113c, it radiates to the inside of the first LED accommodating part 3113c. Part of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface and the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c that is incident on the main body 3113a side, so that the light that has passed through the first LED accommodating part 3113c The amount of light will be greatly reduced compared to before passing through.

For this reason, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. Note that since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is accommodated inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the first LED 3114a cannot block the light that is about to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. In the region where the first LED 3114a is accommodated, light is prevented from passing to the opposite side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Thereby, by providing the first LED accommodating part 3113c at an optimal position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative part 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating part 3113c can be It is possible to prevent light from being guided to another second decorative part 3152 and decorated with light, and it is possible to ensure that only a desired second decorative part 3152 among the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 is decorated with light. .

To explain in more detail the operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. In order to decorate with light, a first LED housing part 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decorative part 3152, and light is irradiated into each first LED housing part 3113c toward the inside of the second decorative part 3152. The first LED 3114a is provided so as to In this embodiment, the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, so that they are connected to each other. It is a single hole. Thereby, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" placed below the "i" are provided below the "☆". Therefore, if the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" is made to emit light, there is a risk that the "i" provided above the "☆" will be decorated with emitting light. An extending portion 3113j extending to cover the upper part of the “☆” is provided in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that accommodates the first LED 3114a for decorating a part of the “i” with light emission. ing. This extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for illuminating the "☆" from being guided to the "i" side. As a result, even if "☆" is decorated with luminescence, "i" will not be decorated with luminescence. Further, the extending portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light for illuminating the “i” from being guided toward the “☆” side. Only the desired second decorative portions 3152 such as "i" and "☆" can be reliably decorated with light, and the desired presentation effect can be fully exhibited.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference, as shown in FIG. 152 and the like. The plurality of second LED accommodating parts 3113d are provided behind five circular parts imitating stamens provided around the center of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the center line of each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom flower. Thereby, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing part 3113c and one second LED housing part 3113d are provided on the center line of the petal.

This second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front or rear surface) of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the second LED accommodating part 3113d, the light is A part of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface of the second LED accommodating part 3113d so as to be diffused in a fan shape toward the inside of the main body part 3113a. In this embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decorative part 3151 imitating a cherry blossom flower, the second LED accommodating part 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown, the light irradiated into the main body part 3113a from the first LED 3114a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing part 3113d. The light can make the petals brighter and decorative.

One of the plurality of reflection parts 3113e is formed in the shape of a square pyramid, and is arranged in rows so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, portions around the first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect the light emitted in the direction along the plate surface forward within the thickness of the main body portion 3113a, and emit the light forward from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is formed so that the rear part is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection parts 3113e.

In addition, since the plurality of reflection parts 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on almost the entire rear surface of the main body part 3113a, light can be emitted forward from almost the entire surface, so it is possible to change the model or design. Even if the design of the decorative part 3150 made up of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to changes, etc., there is no need to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the design change can be easily accommodated, reducing costs. can suppress the increase in

The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the leg portion 3113f has a surface facing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c flush with the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving part 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body part 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be irradiated into the main body part 3113a. I can do it. In addition, when the leg portions 3113f are assembled to the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surfaces thereof are in contact with the front surface of the rear rear decorative board 3114, and there is a gap between the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a and the front surface of the rear rear decorative board 3114. can be formed.

The auxiliary reflection section 3113g is provided in a C-chamfer shape along the side opposite to the first LED accommodating section 3113c at the rear end of the leg section 3113f. This auxiliary reflection section 3113g is for reflecting forward the light irradiated from the first LED 3114a to the leg section 3113f.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for constructing a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative substrate 3114. The surface can be made difficult to see, and the appearance can be prevented from becoming unsightly. In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b that protrudes rearward than the rear decorative board 3114, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is connected to the rear decorative board. 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic components 3114e) can be made longer, static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration part 3111d flows to the rear decorative board 3114, and the rear decorative board 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of this embodiment, the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are holes penetrating the main body part 3113a. Heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing part 3113d can be released to the front of the main body part 3113a, and the influence of heat on the rear decorative board 3114 can be reduced.

Moreover, since the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are not blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, etc. Even if the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are formed in a concave shape (groove shape) with a bottom that does not penetrate through the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d, the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d are The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to alleviate the rapid temperature rise due to heat from the housed first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b, and it is possible to suppress the thermal influence on the rear decorative board 3114 and the like. In addition, in the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are closely connected to each other and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that has the extension portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a and to further alleviate a sudden temperature rise.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating part 3113c and a second LED accommodating part 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing section 3113c and the second LED housing section 3113d, the rear surface of the main body section 3113a can be brought as close as possible to the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. Therefore, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has leg portions 3113f that protrude rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portions 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. , a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body part 3113a and the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. As a result, heat from the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the rear decorative board 3114 can be suppressed to suppress the effects of heat. can be reduced. Note that the gap between the main body part 3113a and the board main body 3114c of the rear decorative board 3114 is set to be between "half the distance from the front surface of the board main body 3114c to the light emitting part of the first LED 3114a" to "the distance from the front surface of the board main body 3114c to the third board main body 3114c". It is desirable that the distance be within the range of "the distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a". This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be able to be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the rear decorative board 3114. Furthermore, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 will decrease, causing the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides the light from the first LEDs 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the rear decorative board 3114, and directs the light from the reflecting portion 3113e to the substantially entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted forward even in a portion of the main body portion 3113a where the rear decorative board 3114 is not provided at the rear. In other words, even if the rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the rear decorative board 3114 can be made smaller than the main body part 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body part 3113a and the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 can be made longer, and the decorative body 3111 can be made smaller. The creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to make it easier to exhibit the above-mentioned effects.

[5-9d-5. Rear decorative board of rear movable decorative body]
On the surface (front surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, there are a plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a surface mount type and side view type, a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a surface mount type and a top view type, and a surface mount type LED 3114b. A connector 3114g (in FIG. 155(a), one surface mount type connector 3114g is arranged on the right side of the surface (front) of the rear decorative board 3114) is mounted. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the housing of the connector 3114g is made of white (natural color). It is made of resin with a color that is recognized to be the same as white (natural color). Electronic components 3114e (see FIG. 155(b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor are mounted on the back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. The rear decorative board 3114 has a flat board main body 3114c, and copper foil 3114d (Fig. 154 etc.).

In addition, on the surface (front) of the rear decorative board 3114, on the surface (front) of the board main body 3114c, a first LED 3114a (surface mount type), a second LED 3114b (surface mount type), and a connector 3114g (surface mount A white coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist") is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where the soldering type (type) is soldered. ), a white resist layer is formed. The back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 has pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the area on the back surface (rear surface) of the board main body 3114c where the electronic component 3114e (surface mount type) is mounted is soldered. In the entire area except for this, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist. Furthermore, although not shown, on the surface (front surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, surface-side electronic components such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g that are mounted are provided. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number, area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction of the front side electronic component (mounting direction) Direction), may include the model number of electronic components on the front side) is printed on a solid white resist using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Printed by. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the rear decorative board 3114, near the back electronic components such as the electronic component 3114e, the part number of the back electronic component and the position where the back electronic component is placed are indicated. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as area (may also include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is hardly noticeable compared to the white color.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a dazzling light emitting effect by illumination using light emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are used as described above. In addition, it is a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light, and the light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the surface (front surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 includes a pad that is the surface (front surface) of the board main body 3114c and to which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered. A white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area excluding through-holes, lands, etc., resulting in a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A layer is formed, and furthermore, on this solid white resist, a front side marking part that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that it can emit multicolor light. In addition to making it possible to make the yellow surface side markings inconspicuous against the white resist when the full-color LED is turned off, it is also possible to The surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 (front ) can maintain high reflectance.

Note that when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The rear decorative board 3114 has an outer circumferential shape that roughly follows the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide and radiation plate 3113, and has a gap between it and the flange portion 3113b that is slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to have a substantially constant size. In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has an outer circumferential shape that approximately follows the inner circumference of a flange portion 3115b in a decorative body base 3115, which will be described later, and there is approximately a slight gap between the inner circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to a constant size. That is, the rear decorative board 3114 is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

In the first decorative portion 3151 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. (Metal decoration part 3111d) is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the inner tip. Thereby, the first LED 3114a of the first decoration part 3151 can decorate each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom flower with light.

Furthermore, in the second decorative portions 3152 of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided doubly on the decorative body 3111 It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152 near the rear of the second decorative portion 3111a. Thereby, the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right can be illuminated one by one by the first LED 3114a of the second decoration part 3152.

As shown in FIG. 152, etc., the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are located in a circular part imitating a stamen located on the center line of the five petals in the central part imitating a cherry blossom flower in the first decorative part 3151. It is located at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a, which corresponds to one petal imitating a cherry blossom flower in the first decorative portion 3151. Thereby, the five parts imitating the stamens in the central part of the first decoration part 3151 can be decorated with light emission, respectively, by the second LED 3114b.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type that can emit light forward, when the second LED 3114b is made to emit light, the central part of the first decorative part 3151, which resembles a stamen, is made to look more like a stamen than other parts. It is also possible to emit point light with high brightness, which can strongly attract the attention of players. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decoration part 3150, it is possible to provide a part that emits light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a and a part that emits light in a dotted manner by the second LED 3114b. It is possible to perform a variety of light emitting effects, and it is possible to make it difficult for players to get bored.

The substrate body 3114c is a rigid substrate that is slightly thinner than the body portion 3113a of the light guide and radiation plate 3113. The substrate main body 3114c of this embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the board body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (the shaded portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (in this embodiment, SL=1 mm) inward from the outer peripheral edge of the board main body 3114c. ing. With this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and space distance from the external conductive member of the back decorative board 3114 (for example, the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111) to the copper foil 3114d are secured, and the discharge of static electricity etc. Insulation against short circuits can be improved, and damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

In addition, the outer periphery of the copper foil 3114d is provided to a portion within a predetermined distance from the outer periphery of the board body 3114c regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is is as wide as possible. Thereby, by transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the heat can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, and the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b , and the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent damage due to heat.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 has a predetermined width on the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side to facilitate forward reflection of the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the board main body 3114c side. (the area surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). The light reflection auxiliary area 3114f of this embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d, as shown in FIGS. 151 and 153(a). As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted, so that the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f approaches the vertical line of the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, making it easier to reflect the light emitted toward the substrate main body 3114c forward. I can do it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 153(a) etc., the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the rear end of the leg 3113f protruding toward the rear of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since the leg portions 3113f are brought into contact with each other, the leg portions 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving part 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (amount of light) radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased. and decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with brighter light.

Further, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact within the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153(a), etc.). As a result, even if the white paint film (white resist) applied to the surface is worn out or rolled up due to contact with the leg portions 3113f, only the front surface of the board body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There's nothing to do. Therefore, the exposure of the copper foil 3114d lowers the insulation properties, making it possible to suppress damage due to short circuits caused by static electricity or the like.

As shown in FIG. 150, etc., the rear decorative board 3114 of this embodiment is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, so that the flange portion 3115b (described later) of the decorative body base 3115 and the flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are assembled. 3113b, the outer periphery is double surrounded, making it difficult to see the outer periphery from the outside and preventing deterioration in appearance. In addition, when the rear decorative board 3114 is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115 is inserted from the rear into the gap between the light guide and radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration part 3111d on the front side of the decoration body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 is caused by the presence of the flange part 3115b of the decoration body base 3115. Since it meanders around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative board 3114, causing damage to the rear decorative board 3114. This can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to be 10 mm or more, or a distance that can accommodate a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

In addition, since the back rear decorative board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the back rear decorative board 3114 allows the members (in this embodiment, Light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. This can prevent the decoration sheet 3112 and decoration body 3111 from being irradiated with light from the effect display device 1600 and the like provided at the rear, so that the decoration part 3150 can be unintentionally decorated with light. It is possible to avoid this, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 can reliably perform the desired light emitting effect. In addition, since the back rear decorative board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the rear side from being seen through the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the back rear decorative board 3114, and the rear movable decoration Deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

In addition, the rear decorative board 3114 is configured such that only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, which are accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating part 3113c and the second LED accommodating part 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113, are provided on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating part 3113c and the second LED accommodating part 3113d, the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body part 3113a. Therefore, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, the rear decorative board 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, resistor, etc. as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114, the black electronic component 3114e is hidden from view from the front. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110. In addition, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 that cannot be seen from the front, there is no need to apply white or other colored paint to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see. The cost of the rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base with movable decorative body on the back]
The decoration base 3115 is entirely transparent. The decoration base 3115 penetrates through the flat cover plate part 3115a that covers the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114, the flange part 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover plate part 3115a, and the cover plate part 3115a. The right slider rear portion 3115d extends downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a in front view.

The outer circumferential shape of the covering plate part 3115a is a shape that roughly follows the inner circumference of the flange part 3113b of the light guide and radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed at a substantially constant distance between the cover plate part 3115a and the inner circumference of the flange part 3113b. It is formed to a size that fits. That is, the cover plate portion 3115a (ornament base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the cover plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114, it is possible to prevent other members from coming into contact with the rear decorative board 3114 from the rear and protect the rear decorative board 3114. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 150, etc., the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114, and extends its front end forward of the rear decorative board 3114. protrudes so that it is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the rear decorative board 3114 from the outside, thereby improving the appearance. In addition, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the rear movable decorative body 3110, it is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative board 3114. Due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, the shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front side of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 can be made to meander around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back decorative board 3114 and damaging the back decorative board 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have slit-shaped portions that are long in the left and right directions, and portions that are larger than the slit-shaped portions. These plurality of openings 3115c allow heat from the electronic components 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 to be released to the outside of the rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby affecting the thermal effect on the rear decorative board 3114. can be reduced.

The right slider rear part 3115d cooperates with the right slider front part 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to form a right slider 3117.

Furthermore, the decoration base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e that slightly protrude from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to come into contact with a portion of the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. By bringing the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 into contact with the front surface of the plurality of protrusions 3115e, a gap can be formed between the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate part 3115a. . Thereby, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily dissipated through the gap between the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of the movable decorative body on the back]
Next, the main effects of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in this embodiment will be explained. The rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guiding radiation plate 3113, and the decorative sheet 3112 is sandwiched between the light guiding radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body. The mounting boss 3111f of the decorative body 3111 is assembled by being attached to the decorative body base 3115 with the rear decorative board 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 (see FIG. 143, etc.). Thereby, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front and back direction is made relatively thin.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111, and a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that protrude forward. Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has a first contour portion 3112a equipped with a hologram on which a pattern and light interference fringes are displayed, the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 is Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can provide a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can provide a lens effect. A sense of depth can be given by holograms. As a result, even if the back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel that it is thin, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be fully enjoyed. By making the most of this, players can enjoy themselves.

Further, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour part 3112a, etc. can give a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. , the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so the degree of freedom in arranging the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and it can be placed in a more effective position inside the game board 5. By providing the rear movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to easily realize a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain players. In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner, it is relatively easier to secure a space for arranging other decorative bodies. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that can provide a good-looking pachinko machine 1, can provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy a variety of performances, and has a high appeal to players and can be differentiated. can do.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative part 3111d made of metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. Therefore, the metallic luster of the metal decorative part 3111d can make the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 stand out, and can strongly attract the player's interest. Moreover, since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the metal decoration part 3111d, and it is also possible to give a sense of luxury. As a result, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position where it cannot be seen by the player to the appearance position where it can be seen, the luxurious decorative part 3150 can be seen, giving the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that something good is going to happen, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the decorative body 3111, and the decorative sheet 3112 has approximately the same size as the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, so that the first outline portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is , it is possible to decorate up to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111, and the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look large. In addition, since the back movable decorative body 3110 has the decorative sheet 3112 approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, a performance image that is continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 provided at the rear, thereby creating a sense of unity in the game. It is possible to show this to the players, give a visual impact to the players and attract their attention, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the large decorations, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the players' interest.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a provided at the rear of the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the metal decorative portion 3111d and the second The first LED 3114a can be made difficult to see from the front by the two-contoured portion 3112b, and deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be suppressed to fully exhibit the decorative effect.

Furthermore, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a surrounding the outer periphery of each of the first decorative part 3151 and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152, so that the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually decorated with light emission. As a result, the plurality of second decoration parts 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right can be decorated with light emission in order, or only a specific first decoration part 3151 or second decoration part 3152 can be decorated with light emission. By appropriately embellishing the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 with light emission, it is possible to show a variety of light emitting effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest. can.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 using the side view type first LED 3114a, and then The light from the first LED is emitted forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 because the light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e to decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The distance can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, so even if the back movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front and rear direction, the decorative body 3111 The decorative sheet 3112 can be evenly and uniformly decorated with light, and players can be entertained by the good-looking light-emitting decoration. Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side-view type first LED 3114a can uniformly decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 with light, the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced. It is possible to reliably realize a pachinko machine 1 that can be made thin and has the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has the first LED 3114a of a side view type used for planar light emission, and the second LED 3114b of a top view type. ) In the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect), it is possible to add a region that emits light in a dotted manner with high brightness by the second LED 3114b to a region decorated with light emitting light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a. As a result, it is possible to add sharpness to the light emitting effect by emitting light from the second LED 3114b, making it easier to present the optimal light emitting effect according to the gaming state, making it possible to further entertain the player, and making the game more enjoyable. It is possible to increase expectations for the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED accommodating part 3113c in which a side-view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the light receiving part 3113c is provided on the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in a position close to the desired area to be decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a, the desired area can be decorated with light emission more brightly, and the effect can be enhanced. This allows players to enjoy the highly luminous decorations.

Furthermore, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first LED accommodating part 3113c and a second LED in which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted into the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the rear. Since it has the housing part 3113d, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED housing part 3113c and the second LED housing part 3113d, the rear surface of the main body part 3113a is connected to the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portions 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are in contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114, so that the rear movable decoration body 3110 is located between the main body portion 3113a and the back rear decorative board 3114. Since a gap is formed in the rear decorative board 3114, heat from the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be released through the gap, and It is possible to suppress temperature rise and reduce the effects of heat. Note that the gap between the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the board main body 3114c of the rear decorative board 3114 is set between "half the distance from the front surface of the board main body 3114c to the light emitting part of the first LED 3114a" to "the board main body 3114c". The distance from the front surface of the main body 3114c to the front surface of the first LED 3114a is preferably within the range. This is because if the gap is smaller than this, heat may not be able to be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body portion 3113a and the rear decorative board 3114. Furthermore, if the gap is larger than this, the amount of light incident from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 will decrease, causing the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a risk that it will not be possible to decorate it.

In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114 by the legs 3113f, and has a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. 3115c, by raising and lowering the rear movable decorative body 3110, the surface of the rear decorative board 3114 can be ventilated through the gap or opening 3115c, and the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, Heat from the electronic components 3114e and the like can be released, thereby suppressing a rise in temperature of the rear decorative board 3114.

In addition, a temperature sensor is provided on the back movable decorative body 3110, and when the temperature of the back movable decorative body 3110 (back rear decorative board 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down. The frequency (probability) of execution may be increased. As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, thereby making it possible to ventilate the surface of the rear decorative board 3114, cooling the rear decorative board 3114, and suppressing the occurrence of problems caused by heat.

Furthermore, the rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the rear rear decorative board 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of metal foil provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative board 3114 is made possible by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, allowing light to be emitted. Since it snakes around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be achieved, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the rear decorative board 3114, and the back decorative board 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided at a position a predetermined distance SL inward from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c on the back rear decorative board 3114. This predetermined distance SL also makes it possible to lengthen the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, thereby increasing the insulation against discharges such as static electricity and short circuits, thereby suppressing damage to the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharges and the like.

In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3110, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not yet. Thereby, the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative board 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Furthermore, since the metal decorative part 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative part 3111d is reduced compared to the case where the metal decorative part 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It can be made smaller, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if discharge occurs to the rear decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is driven by the rear rear drive motor 3126 to move up and down (move) between the retracted position where it moves upward and the appearance position where it moves downward. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, right slider 3117, etc. every time it goes up and down, and static electricity generated by the friction is likely to accumulate on the surface of the rear movable decorative body 3110. This rear movable decorative body 3110 has a decorative body 3111 and a decorative body base 3115 that make up the surface, which are made of synthetic resin with low conductivity. Static electricity accumulated throughout is difficult to discharge all at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the rear movable decorative body 3110 of this embodiment, static electricity is likely to accumulate in the metal decorative part 3111d on the front side of the decorative body 3111, but as described above, static electricity is easily accumulated from the metal decorative part 3111d. Since the creepage distance EL to the rear decorative board 3114 is sufficiently long, the rear decorative board 3114 will not be damaged by static electricity discharge, and the movable effect in which the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, and the movable rear movable decorative body It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy both the light-emitting effect in which the 3110 is decorated with light-emitting light.

Note that when the area of the metal decorative part 3111d where static electricity is accumulated is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decorative part 3111d to GND (ground). Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the rear decorative board 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of rear movable decorative body]
Next, with reference mainly to FIG. 157, a rear movable decorative body 3160, a rear movable decorative body 3170, a rear movable decorative body 3180, etc., which are different from the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above, will be described. Explain in detail. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory view showing in cross section the configuration of a rear movable decorative body of the second embodiment, which is different from the rear movable decorative body of FIG. 142, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the composition of a decoration object in cross section, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the composition of a rear movable decoration object of the fourth embodiment in cross section.

As schematically shown in FIG. 157(a), the rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment includes a decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface, and a decorative body 3161 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A decorative sheet 3162 in the form of a sheet with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiation plate 3163 that is provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and internally radiates light in a direction along the front surface forward, and a light guide radiation plate 3162. A rear decorative board 3164 is provided on the front surface of which is mounted a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate light into the interior of the interior of the display device 3163 in a direction along the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the rear movable decorative body 3160 includes a main body 3161a in the form of a transparent flat plate, a flange 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3161a, and a metal part provided on the front surface of the main body 3161a. It has a decorative part 3161c. The main body portion 3161a may be flat, or may be decorated with relief-like unevenness. The metal decoration part 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

The decorative sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet with a predetermined decoration (picture) printed on it. In this decorative sheet 3162, a portion of the decoration with low transparency is located in a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed to have a smaller size than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape with the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and includes an LED accommodating part 3163a into which the LEDs 3164a of the rear decorative board 3164 are inserted from the rear, and a plurality of LED accommodating parts provided on the rear surface. It has a reflecting part 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and has a rectangular inner periphery along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. The plurality of reflection parts 3163b each have a triangular cross-section and are recessed forward, and are provided only at predetermined locations. The plurality of reflection parts 3163b are provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED housing part 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED housing part 3163a. . In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that even if the plurality of reflection parts 3163b are configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, like the reflection parts 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 described above, Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative board 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. The rear decorative board 3164 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED accommodating portion 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 from the rear. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces at a predetermined distance SL inside from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3164. In addition, a white coating film made of white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the rear decorative substrate 3164.

In the rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163, and furthermore, the front surface of the rear decorative board 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3160 in the front and rear direction is thin. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3164. As a result, in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer peripheries of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the rear decorative board 3164 are covered by the flange portion 3161b, making their outer peripheral surfaces difficult to see from the outside. It looks good.

This rear movable decorative body 3160 has a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3164, so that the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the rear decorative board 3164 (copper foil thereof) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative part 3161c flows to the rear decorative board 3164, causing the rear decorative board 3164 to have a sufficient creepage distance EL. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

In this manner, the rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that the rear movable decorative body 3160 may be provided with a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the rear rear decorative board 3164.

Subsequently, the rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an external decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape, and an inner side of the external decorative body 3171 (frame-shaped), as schematically shown in FIG. 157(b). a light-transmitting flat interior decoration body 3172 that closes the inner decoration body 3172; and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided at the rear of the interior decoration body 3172 and radiates light forward in a direction along the entire surface inside the interior decoration body 3172. , and a rear decorative board 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a that irradiate light into the interior of the light guide radiation plate 3173 in a direction along the front surface are mounted.

The outer decoration body 3171 of the rear movable decoration body 3170 includes a main body portion 3171a that has a frame shape and extends back and forth, a support portion 3171b that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body portion 3171a. It has a metal decoration part 3171c provided on the front surface of. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration body 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration part 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body part 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, plating, or vapor deposition.

Although not shown, the interior decoration body 3172 has a relief-like decoration with unevenness. The interior decoration body 3172 is attached to close the front opening of the frame-shaped exterior decoration body 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have approximately the same size as the interior decoration body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the exterior decoration body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED accommodating part 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the rear decorative board 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflective parts 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and has a rectangular inner periphery along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portions 3173b extend in an arc shape centered on a predetermined LED housing portion 3173a, and are provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflection parts 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from each determined LED housing part 3173a forward. In other words, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. Note that even if the plurality of reflection parts 3173b are configured to be able to reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflection part 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above, Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

The rear decorative board 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The rear decorative board 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED accommodating portion 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 from the rear. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces thereof at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3174. In addition, a white coating film made of white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the rear decorative substrate 3174.

In the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, an internal decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of an external decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the external decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the internal decorative body 3172 are substantially coincident with each other, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the interior decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the rear movable decoration body 3170, a light guide radiation plate 3173 and a rear rear decoration board 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decoration body 3171, and the light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the front surface of the rear decorative board 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the rear movable decoration body 3170 in the front and rear direction is thin. In addition, in the rear movable decoration body 3170, a gap having the thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the interior decoration body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the rear decoration board 3174. In this back rear movable decoration body 3160, the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back rear decoration board 3174 are covered by the main body part 3171a of the outer decoration body 3171, and the outer peripheries of these are covered from the outside. It makes it harder to see and makes it look better.

This rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3174 with the main body part 3171a extending to the rear of the external decorative body 3171, so that from the metal decorative part 3171c on the front side of the main body part 3171a. The creepage distance EL to (the copper foil of) the rear decorative board 3174 can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration part 3171c flows to the rear decorative board 3174, and the back decorative board 3174 can be prevented from being damaged.

In this way, the rear movable decorative body 3170 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that a metal decoration portion may also be provided on the front surface of the interior decoration body 3172. Further, the rear movable decorative body 3170 may be provided with a decorative base that covers the rear side of the rear decorative board 3174.

Subsequently, the rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an external decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape, and an inner side of the external decorative body 3181 (frame-shaped), as schematically shown in FIG. 157(c). an interior decoration body 3182 with translucent properties that closes the inner decoration body 3182; and a rear decoration board 3183 on the front surface of which is mounted a plurality of LEDs 3183a that are provided at the rear of the interior decoration body 3182 and can emit light forward. It is equipped with.

The outer decoration body 3181 of the rear movable decoration body 3180 includes a main body portion 3181a shaped like a flat plate, a flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body portion 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. It has a covering metal decorative part 3181c. The metal decoration part 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration body 3181. This metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or vapor deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decoration body 3182 includes a flat body part 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body part 3181a of the outer decoration body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange part 3181b, and and a flange portion 3182b extending to the flange portion 3182b. Although not shown in the drawings, the main body portion 3182a has a relief-like decoration with unevenness formed on substantially the entire surface thereof.

The rear decorative board 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the interior decorative body 3182. In other words, the rear decorative board 3183 is formed in a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. A plurality of top-view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3183. Although not shown in the drawings, the rear decorative board 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil formed on the front and rear surfaces thereof at a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3183. Further, the rear decorative substrate 3183 has a white coating film made of white resist formed on the front surface (both sides).

In the assembled back movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment, an inner decorative body 3182 and a rear decorative board 3183 are inserted into the frame of a frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. In the rear movable decorative body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the internal decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the external decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the internal decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the external decorative body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 is covered by the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182 is covered by the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration body 3181 prevents the outer peripheries of the inner decoration body 3182 and the back decoration board 3183 from being seen from the outside.

This rear movable decorative body 3180 has a flange portion 3182b of an internal decorative body 3182 provided inside a flange portion 3181b of an external decorative body 3181 provided with a metal decorative portion 3181c, and a flange portion 3182b of an internal decorative body 3182. Since the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body part 3182a is apart from the inner periphery of the flange part 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182, the copper of the rear decorative board 3183 (of the rear decorative board 3183) is The creepage distance EL to the metal decorative portion 3181c can be set to a sufficient distance to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3181c from flowing to the back decorative board 3183 and damaging the back decorative board 3183. can do.

In this manner, the rear movable decorative body 3180 of this embodiment can provide the same effects as the rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. Note that a metal decoration portion may also be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the interior decoration body 3182. Further, in the rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base may be provided to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3183.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. Figure 158 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit from the rear. FIG. Figure 159 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 160 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit disassembled and seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit from the front.

The back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250 are located on both the left and right sides of the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 of the back lower middle production unit 3300 when assembled on the game board 5, and are visible from the front. It is made visible through the transparent game panel 1100, front unit 2000, etc.

First, the back lower left effect unit 3200 will be explained. The back lower left presentation unit 3200 includes a transparent back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 having a rearwardly protruding shaft 3201a, and a transparent back lower left decorative body provided behind the back lower left rotating decorative body 3201. 3202, and a back bottom left decorative board which is provided behind the back bottom left decorative body 3202 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "surface (mounting surface)"). 3203, and is provided behind the back lower left decorative board 3203, to which the back lower left rotation decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached, and the back lower left decorative body 3202 is attached, and the back rear effect unit 3100 A unit base 3204 is attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3204.

In addition, the back lower left production unit 3200 includes a back lower left drive motor 3205 that is attached to the front of the unit base 3204 so that the rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and a back lower left drive motor 3205 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the back lower left drive motor 3205. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206 is engaged with the drive gear 3206, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204 and is engaged with the drive gear 3206. A second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and the second transmission gear 3208 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3208, and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower left rotation decorative body 3201. A third transmission gear 3209 in the form of a spur gear is provided, and a front cover 3210 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202.

The lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. An axial shaft 3201a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower left rotation decorative body 3201 is formed to have a length that passes through the back lower left decorative body 3202, the back lower left decorative board 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The back lower left decorative body 3202 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back lower left rotation decorative body 3201 one behind the other, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is shaped like a.

The back lower left rotation decoration body 3201 and the back lower left rotation decoration body 3202 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To be more specific, the lower back left rotation decorative body 3201 and the lower back left rotation decoration body 3202 are formed into a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions, Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), Through the decorative body 3201 and the back lower left decorative body 3202 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 placed behind the back lower left decorative body 3202 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

In the back lower left decorative board 3203, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The back lower left decorative board 3203 is provided with a back lower left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The back lower left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative board 3203. In a state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back lower left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back lower left drive motor 3205, the back lower left production unit 3200 of this embodiment is operated by The lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be rotated around an axis in the front and back direction. In addition, the back bottom left direction unit 3200 lights up a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 to display the back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201 and the back bottom left decoration body 3202. It can be decorated with luminous light.

In addition, the part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203, and the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) is printed with a predetermined paint color on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203, and a transparent back lower left decorative body is printed behind the transparent back lower left rotating decorative body 3201. 3202 and the back lower left decorative board 3203 are arranged in order, so the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 is the back lower left decorative body 3202, Then, it is visible through the lower left rotating decorative body 3201 on the back side, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off, letters and symbols are displayed using the predetermined paint color. , the shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined.

In addition, the multiple LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connectors are The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, a color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)).

Next, the back lower right effect unit 3250 will be explained. The back lower right production unit 3250 includes a transparent back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 having a rearwardly protruding shaft 3251a, and a transparent back lower right decorative body provided behind the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251. 3252, and a back bottom right decorative board that is provided behind the back bottom right decorative body 3252 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). 3253, and is provided behind the back lower right decorative board 3253, to which the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached, and the back lower right decorative body 3252 is attached, and the back rear effect unit 3100 A unit base 3254 is attached to the lower end of the right side of the unit base 3254.

In addition, the back bottom right production unit 3250 includes a back bottom right drive motor 3255 that is attached to the front of the unit base 3254 so that its rotating shaft protrudes rearward, and a back bottom right drive motor 3255 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the back bottom right drive motor 3255. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256 meshes with the drive gear 3256 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 meshes with the first transmission gear 3257. A second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, and the second transmission gear 3258 is engaged with the second transmission gear 3258 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3251a of the lower right rotation decorative body 3251. and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the back lower right decorative body 3252.

The back-bottom clockwise rotation decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. An axial shaft 3251a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length that passes through the back lower right decorative body 3252, the back lower right decorative board 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The back bottom right decorative body 3252 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 one behind the other, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is shaped like a.

The back lower right rotation decoration body 3251 and the back lower right rotation decoration body 3252 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To be more specific, the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 and the back bottom right rotation decoration body 3252 are formed into a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in random directions. Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), Through the decorative body 3251 and the back lower right decorative body 3252 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253 arranged behind the back lower right decorative body 3252 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

In the back lower right decorative board 3253, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The back lower right decorative board 3253 is provided with a back lower right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The back lower right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that projects forward and is detected by the back lower right detection sensor 3253a of the back lower right decorative board 3253. In a state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 161). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back bottom right drive motor 3255, the back bottom right production unit 3250 of the present embodiment transfers the back The lower right rotation decorative body 3251 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the back bottom right effect unit 3250 can decorate the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251 and the back bottom right decorative body 3252 by emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the back bottom right decorative board 3253.

In addition, the part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253, and the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) is printed with a predetermined paint color on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253, and a transparent back lower right decorative body is printed behind the transparent back lower right rotation decorative body 3251. 3252 and the back lower right decorative board 3253 are arranged in this order, so the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower right decorative board 3253 is the same as the back lower right decorative board 3252, Then, it is made visible through the right-turning decoration body 3251 on the bottom side of the back, and when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized when a plurality of LEDs are off, letters and symbols are displayed in the predetermined paint color. , the shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined.

In addition, each of the multiple LED packages mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative board 3253 is made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector is made of resin. The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, a color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)).

On the front surface (front) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253, there are a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a connector (surface mount type), a back lower left detection sensor 3203a (lead type), and a back lower left decorative board 3203a (lead type). A white coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white coating") is formed by applying white resist liquid to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) is soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the white resist layer. On the back side (rear surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253, there are pads and through holes to which the back lower left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and the back lower right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for holes, lands, etc. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253, there is a Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, and the mounting direction of the front side electronic component) (mounting direction) and the model number of the electronic components on the front side) is painted on the solid white resist with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Printed using silkscreen printing. Although not shown, on the back surfaces (rear surfaces) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253, there are located near back side electronic components such as the back lower left detection sensor 3203a and the back lower right detection sensor 3253a. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the part number of the back side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the back side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, and the area where the back side electronic component is placed) The markings on the back side indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) and the model number of the electronic components on the back side are painted solidly with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against the white color. Printed on top using silk screen printing.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the entire surface (front surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253 is covered with the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the plurality of LEDs and connectors are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may simply be referred to as "solid white resist"), and this solid On the painted white resist, the front side markings that make it possible to identify full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, they are white. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side inscription less noticeable on the resist, it also has a solid coating with high reflectance when the full-color LED, which can emit multicolor light, is turned on (when emitting light). The surface (front) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 and the back lower right decorative board 3253 is created by the combination of a white resist and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that has a reflectance very close to that of white. can maintain high reflectance.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

[5-9f. Back and middle production unit]
Next, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162(a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 162(b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle production unit in the back unit seen from the back. Fig. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle lifting mechanism of the back lower middle producing unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 164 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle lifting mechanism of the back lower middle producing unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. Fig. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 166 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle decoration unit of the back lower middle production unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the raising and lowering of the back lower center decoration unit by the back lower center raising and lowering mechanism in the back lower center presentation unit. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the configuration related to the rotation of the back bottom center rotating decoration of the back bottom center decoration unit in the back bottom center decoration unit, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of LEDs of the lower back inner decoration unit in the lower back inner production unit from the front.

The back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back lower middle production unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the back lower left production unit 3200 and the back lower right production unit 3250. The back-bottom center production unit 3300 includes a back-bottom center decoration unit 3320 having a transparent back-bottom rotating decoration body 3310 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back-bottom center decoration unit 3320 that raises and lowers the back-bottom decoration unit 3320. A lifting mechanism 3350 is provided.

The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle direction production unit 3300 has a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. This back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeric decorations formed in a relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface in circles at every 60 degree angle in a clockwise direction around the center. arranged around the circumference. This back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 in a lower back inner decorative body unit 3320 to be described later on the rear side, a first decorative board 3322 in the back lower middle, and a front end side of a board fixing member 3323, It has a recess 3311 that can accommodate.

The lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is formed transparently, and the outer periphery of each of the six number decorations protrudes forward, and further includes a rib portion that connects the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring shape. It is formed to protrude forward. A metal decorative portion 3310a with metallic luster is formed on these protruding outer peripheral portions and rib portions. In other words, the metallic decorative portion 3310a with metallic luster is arranged near the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In this embodiment, the outer periphery and the rib part on which the metal decorative part 3310a with metallic luster is formed are integrally molded with the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, but the outer periphery and the rib part are It may be configured such that the outer circumferential portion and the rib portion thus molded are assembled with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 by molding them separately from the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. In this case, metal decorative portions 3310a having metallic luster are formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion, respectively.

The metallic luster of the metal decoration part 3310a can give a sense of luxury, and the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 can stand out, making it possible to further emphasize the presence of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310. It has become. The metal decorative portion 3310a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping as described above. The back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a metal decorative part 3310a formed only on the outer peripheral part and the rib part that protrude to the front surface, and no metal decorative part 3310a is formed on the side surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. do not have. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decoration part 3310a of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the first decorative board 3322 of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3310a from flowing to the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and damaging the back lower middle first decorative board 3322. Therefore, insulation against discharge of static electricity and short circuits can be improved.

In addition, as described above, the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is formed with a rib portion protruding forward that connects the six number decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring shape. The back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion extending from the peripheral edge portion (periphery side root portion) protruding from the front surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front periphery of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and then the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. The rotary decorative body 3310 is formed to be transparent up to the rear edge of the side surface, and is also provided with a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To be more specific, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion extending from the peripheral edge portion (periphery side root portion) protruding from the front surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front periphery of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, A pear skin-like pattern is formed by a plurality of protrusions extending in short lines in random directions up to the rear edge of the side surface of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and the rib part is the lower back middle rotating decoration. The shading becomes darker as it goes from the peripheral edge portion (peripheral side base portion) protruding on the front surface of the body 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and toward the side rear edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) so that the transparency is low) is applied by printing.

As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the back lower center decoration unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 provided at the rear of the back lower center rotating decoration 3310, and an inner lens (diffusion lens). ) 3321, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front surface (mounting surface)"), a first decorative board 3322 in the lower back, A board fixing member 3323 is attached to the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative board 3322 from the rear side, and has a shaft portion 3323a projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a shaft of the board fixing member 3323. The rotary base 3324 has a shaft hole 3324a into which the portion 3323a is relatively rotatably inserted, and is attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

The surface of the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321 is cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely, and is placed behind the inner lens (diffusing lens) 3321. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side are difficult to clearly see from the player's side. In addition, the back surface as well as the front surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or instead of the surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321. The back surface may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

The lower back inner decoration unit 3320 also includes an area detection piece 3325 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxially with the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference that is coaxial with the area detection piece 3325. It includes a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 at the top, and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324.

Further, the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 has a circular opening 3328a provided at the rear of the rotation base 3324 and through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent back lower center decorative body 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are formed radially from the opening 3328a toward the outer periphery with the center of the circular opening 3328a as the center point, and a rear side of the back lower middle decorative body 3328. a second lower back decorative board 3329 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "front surface (mounting surface)"); and a second lower back decorative board 3329; 3329, and a plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 (lead type) that can detect the area detection piece 3325, and a plurality of area identification sensors 3330 (lead type) that are attached to the front of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, and can detect the position detection piece 3326. A detectable position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) is provided.

In addition, the back lower center decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the second lower back center decorative board 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the board fixing member 3323 is attached, and the back lower center decoration 3328 is attached. a movable base 3332, a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that its rotating shaft protrudes forward; A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a rear lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. and an elevating slider 3336 that is slidably guided in the vertical direction by a slide rail 3360.

The front end sides of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, and the board fixing member 3323 are located between the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324 in the assembled state. , is housed in the recess 3311 of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with either the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 or the rotating base 3324. By appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs on the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side, the part of the number decoration (relief) on the lower back side rotating decorative body 3310 can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The area detection piece 3325 has a larger diameter than the rotation gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168(a), the area detection piece 3325 detects the numbers “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” on the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. It is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis, passing through the numeral decoration and ending between the numeral decorations "5" and "6".

A plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 each protrude rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) so that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is located at the center of the number decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. . In this embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a predetermined angle α degree (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis, and There is an interval of 2×β degrees (θ degrees − α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) between the position detection piece 3326 and the rotation axis (see FIG. 168(a)). .

A plurality of (three in this case) area specifying sensors 3330 are arranged at angular intervals of θ degrees (60 degrees) with the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 as the center. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in clockwise order: a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 detect the numbers "3", "4", and "5" with the "1" decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 positioned directly above the center of rotation. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numerical decoration (see FIG. 168(a)).

The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

The movable base 3332 has a lifting pin 3332a that projects rearward from the lower part of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. This elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the back lower middle elevating mechanism 3350. The back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor whose rotational position can be detected.

This lower back middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the lower back middle rotational decoration 3310 around an axis in the front-rear direction via a rotating gear 3327 by rotating a drive gear 3334 by a back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. I can do it. In addition, the back lower center decoration body unit 3320 is configured such that the lower back center rotating decoration body 331 And the back lower middle decoration body 3328 can be decorated with light emission.

Note that the part numbers of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back, and the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are to be placed, etc. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative board 3322 with a predetermined paint color, and an inner lens (diffusion lens) is printed behind the transparent rotating decorative body 3310. ) 3321 and the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 are arranged in order, so the color of the predetermined paint printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 is the color of the inner lens. (diffusion lens) 3321 and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to visually recognize the color of the predetermined paint when the plurality of LEDs are off, and the color of the predetermined paint is visible. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined by the color.

In addition, each of the plurality of LED packages mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

White resist liquid is applied to the surface (front) of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back, except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which multiple LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, a solid white resist is applied to the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. where the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. A resist layer is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, near the surface side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the part number of the surface side electronic component, the surface Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side (This may include the model number of the electronic component.) is printed on a solid white resist using a yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to notice compared to the white color, and is silk-screened. . Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be placed are written near the back side electronic components such as connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white.

In addition, part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs, an area identification sensor 3330, a position identification sensor 3331, etc. mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, and front-side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position of the front side electronic component (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, ) is printed with a predetermined paint color on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative board 3329 on the lower back side by silk printing, and the transparent lower inner decorative body 3328 Since the second decorative board 3329 in the back lower middle is arranged behind the lower back middle, a predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the back lower middle Visible through the decorative body 3328, when a predetermined paint color is visible when a plurality of LEDs are off, characters, symbols, shapes (that is, Attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation can be determined.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back are each made of a white resin package (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It becomes.

On the surface (front surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, there are pads to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), an area specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), and a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) are soldered. A white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the entire area excluding through-holes, lands, etc., resulting in a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). layers are formed. On the back side (rear side) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, there are pads to which an area specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type), and a plurality of connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, etc. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, the part number of the surface side electronic component and the surface Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side (This may include the model number of the electronic component.) is printed on a solid white resist using a yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to notice compared to the white color, and is silk-screened. . Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be placed are written near the back side electronic components such as connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination by light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs, etc. are soldered, are provided on the surfaces (front surfaces) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329. In the excluded area, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution, and further , On this solid white resist, the front side marking part that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED that can emit multi-color light is printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that the full-color LED that can emit multi-color light can be turned off. In addition to making it possible to make the yellow surface side inscription less noticeable compared to the white resist, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), a solid surface with high reflectance can be used. The combination of the painted white resist and the front side markings printed by silk printing with a yellow paint that has a reflectance very close to that of white allows the first decoration board 3322 on the lower back and the second decoration on the lower back The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the substrate 3329 can be maintained high.

Note that when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, the back lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 extends left and right and has a unit base 3351 attached to both end sides of the back lower left presentation unit 3200 and back bottom right presentation unit 3250, and a unit base 3351. A back lower middle lift drive motor 3352 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so that its rotating shaft protrudes rearward. A drive gear 3353 in the form of a gear, a first transmission gear 3354 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the drive gear 3353 and is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and meshes with the first transmission gear 3354. A second transmission gear 3355 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a gear portion 3356a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity, and an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably attached to the upper center of the front surface of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction.

In addition, the rear lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 at its base end extending in the left-right direction, and in the longitudinal direction in which the drive pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted. A second slit 3357b extends in the longitudinal direction on the distal end side of the first slit 3357a and into which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , and a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip of the unit base 3351. A lower back middle relay board 3358 is attached to the front surface.

Furthermore, the back lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 has a vertically extending elevating slit 3359a through which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the decorative unit 3320 is inserted, and is attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. A slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from behind, and a tip side of the lifting arm 3357 move upward in the moving direction (front view). A spring 3362 biases the lifting arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction (as viewed).

The lower back middle elevation drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part of the unit base 3351 to the left of the center in the left-right direction. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably mounted on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356 . The tip of the lifting arm 3357 extends to the left of the lifting cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes a lower back middle first decorative board 3322, a lower back middle second decorative board 3329, an area specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lifting drive motor. 3352, relays the connection between the back lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358a and the effect drive board 1720.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. An elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in a lower back inner decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted into an elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the front cover 3359 with respect to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The lifting and lowering slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back/lower middle elevation drive motor 3352, the back/lower intermediate lifting mechanism 3350 is connected to the elevator via the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. The drive pin 3356b that revolves due to the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 can be raised and lowered together with the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 which is slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the back bottom center rotating decorative body 3310 and the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 in the back bottom center presentation unit 3300 will be described in detail. In a normal state, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 is in a lowered position where the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the distal end side of the elevating arm 3357 in the back lower middle elevating mechanism 3350 is located lower than the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip moves the back lower middle relay board 3358 up and down. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167(a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below its center of revolution and near the proximal end within the first slit 3357a of the elevating arm 3357. . Specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a biasing force is applied by the spring 3362 to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in a clockwise direction, the line of force of the biasing force is transmitted to the drive pin 3356b that is in contact with the first slit 3357a. , and passes through the center of rotation of the lifting cam gear 3356, so the lifting cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position due to the biasing force of the spring 3362. The biasing force of 3362 does not act on the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the biasing force of the spring 3362, the lifting cam gear 3356 moves counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b. try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end of the lifting arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a, , the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the upward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented.

In the normal state, the back-bottom center production unit 3300 has the number decoration located at the top among the plurality of number decorations in the back-bottom rotating decoration body 3310 located inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be clearly seen from the front (player side) (see FIG. 111, etc.). In addition, in a normal state, the number decoration located at the lowest side is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and the number decoration is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. By making the LED of the second decorative board 3329 emit light, in addition to the light-emitting decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration body, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be decorated with light-emitting light (see FIG. 120, etc.) ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back/lower middle elevation drive motor 3352, a As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. As the driving pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the driving pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the driving pin 3356b slides inside the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end side moves upward.

As the lifting arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the lifting arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. , and the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides toward the base end within the first slit 3357a. At this time, on the lifting arm 3357, a biasing force is applied in the clockwise direction by the spring 3362, so that the biasing force assists the upward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, and The load on the lift drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When this drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the proximal end of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 stops, and at the same time The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back center decoration unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back center decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position in which it has moved most upwardly.

When the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, a normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, the line of force of that force will hit the first slit 3357a. Since the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the rear lower middle elevation drive motor 3352 via the elevation arm 3357 or the like.

In addition, when the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may further revolve to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the lifting arm 3357 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lower middle decoration unit 3320, the lifting cam gear 3356 is rotated clockwise by the force acting from the first slit 3357a through the drive pin 3356b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end of the lifting arm 3357, but since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a, , the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the lifting arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented.

When the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, most of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, the game ball rolling in the game area 5a B is located above the rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and All numerical decorations are clearly visible from the side (see Figure 201).

In order to return the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 from the raised position to the lowered position, the lower back middle lifting drive motor 3352 rotates the drive gear 3353 in the opposite direction to the above, and the lifting arm 3357 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. When the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352. , the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in the lowered position which is the normal state (furthermore, the center which prevents the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall part 2501) The rebound prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the overlapping position when viewed from the front in the pachinko machine 1.

In the back bottom center production unit 3300 of this embodiment, the back bottom center rotational decoration body 3310 is rotated by the back bottom center rotation drive motor 3333 in the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 to rotate the drive gear 3334 via the rotation gear 3327. can be rotated around the longitudinal axis. By rotating this back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front side rotate like a roulette wheel. The back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 even when the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is in any position such as the lowered position or the raised position.

In the normal state of the back-bottom center production unit 3300 of this embodiment, one of the plurality (here, six) number decorations in the back-bottom rotation decoration body 3310 is located directly above the center of rotation (stop position). are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168(a), when the numeral decoration "1" on the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located at the top, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is moved to identify the first area. Detection is performed by three area specifying sensors 3330, a sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c. is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stopping positions of the lower back and middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. When the number decoration "1" is at the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324. is being detected. In other words, as shown in FIG. 168(b), when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are in detection, the number decoration "1" is centered around the stop position. It is located within the range of ±30 degrees.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect the area, the numeral decoration "2" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect the area, the number decoration "3" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the number decoration "4" indicates the range of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within.

Furthermore, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detecting, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numerical decoration of "5" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the number decoration "6" indicates the area of ±30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

In this way, depending on the combination of detection and non-detection of the three area specifying sensors 3330, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c, which number decoration indicates the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether the vehicle is located within the stopping area that includes the vehicle.

Since the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and rotates 30 degrees, the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numeral decoration on the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, when performing such control, it is necessary to identify the stop position area using the three area specifying sensors 3330 and recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of 3310 becomes complicated and the load increases. Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 are provided, and the position specifying sensor 3331 can recognize the origin. This suppresses the complexity of control related to stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and reduces the load.

To be more specific, when it is desired to stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at a desired stop position for the number decoration, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 move the number decoration to the desired stop position. When the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326 because the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotation direction by an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated by a rotation angle of 30 degrees from the stop position.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by α/2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position specifying sensor 3331. Therefore, the position specifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detectable. The angle at which this position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is defined as the origin. Then, when it rotates by β degrees (in this case, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), by stopping the rotation of the back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the back bottom middle rotation drive motor 3333, the desired number is set. The decoration can be accurately stopped at the stop position.

In addition, although the rotation stop of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 was explained by the angle above, it may be made to stop rotation by the rotation step of the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333 which consists of a stepping motor. For example, if one rotation is 396 steps, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by 13 steps with the three area specifying sensors 3330 in a combination that satisfies the desired stop position, the position detection piece 3326 The position identifying sensor 3331 becomes non-detectable when moving away from the position identifying sensor 3331. When the position specifying sensor 3331 rotates 20 steps from the angle at which it is not detected as the origin, the desired number decoration is stopped by stopping the rotation of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333. It can be stopped precisely in position.

Next, the light-emitting decoration in the back-lower-middle effect unit 3300 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 169, the back-bottom center production unit 3300 has a back-bottom first decoration unit 3320 equipped with a plurality of LEDs for illuminating the back-bottom rotating decoration 3310. It includes a decorative board 3322 and a second decorative board 3329 in the lower back. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 are located behind the six number decorations on the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, and each of the number decorations can be decorated with light emission independently.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the second decorative board 3329 on the lower back side are located behind the part on the outside of the plurality of number decorations on the lower back side middle rotating decoration body 3310. The periphery can be decorated with luminescence.

As described above, this back-bottom center production unit 3300 can detect the rotational position of the back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three area specifying sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection by the area specifying sensors 3330. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side, it is rotated in a state in which only a specific number decoration is decorated with light emission, or in a state in which each number decoration is decorated with light emission in a different color. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a performance that strongly attracts the player's interest.

In addition, when the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the number decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be decorated with light by emitting light from the LED in the corresponding part of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back. Thereby, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002. In addition, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002, the LED on the first decorative board 3322 at the bottom of the back emits light (or one light emitting mode is determined from a plurality of light emitting modes and the LED emits light). ).

As described above, according to the back-bottom center production unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating back-bottom center rotating decoration body 3310 having six stop positions can be detected by detecting an area with a length spanning the three stop positions. piece 3325 and six position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting piece 3325, and one position specifying sensor for detecting the position detecting piece 3326. Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. This is repeated, and even until the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become non-detecting, and the area detecting piece 3325 is detected. By combining the area specifying sensor 3330, it is possible to roughly grasp the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

Since the back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 is equipped with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the back bottom middle rotation is performed by the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, the stop position can be accurately detected, and the deviation of the stop position can be detected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stopping position of the back-bottom rotating decoration body 3310 which has a plurality of stopping positions as small as possible.

In addition, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to enjoy the performance (movable performance) by the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, it is possible to suppress the shift of the stop position even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, and it is also possible to By making the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotate, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made faster than when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is made to reciprocate. It can be done quickly. Therefore, the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 that rotates quickly can give a strong impact to the player, strongly attracting the player's interest, and the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 can be made to have a strong impact on the player. It is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is designed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of number decorations are provided on the front side, the roulette wheel rotates in circles and then stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position. Since it is possible to show the player such an effect, it is possible to make the player excited and excited depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to have fun and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back center rotary decoration body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position. , the number of stop positions is the same as the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the ability (grasping of stop positions) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The back and middle rotating decorations 3310 can entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotating base 3324 that rotates together with the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be changed. Therefore, the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be further increased.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally with (together with) the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, but this The present invention is not limited to this, and the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member, such as the drive gear 3334, that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310.

[5-9g. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back top effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170(a) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 170(b) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back and top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back and top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the rear ascending/descending decoration unit in the back upper production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 174 is an exploded perspective view of the rear ascending/descending decoration unit in the back unit as seen from behind. It is a diagram.

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the rotation mechanism of the back top and front rotating decorations in the back top presentation unit from the front. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the lifting mechanism of the back raising/lowering decoration unit in the back upper production unit, and FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a lifting mechanism of the lifting decoration unit and a rotation mechanism of the back up-and-down rotating decoration from the front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative board from the front with the back raising/lowering decoration unit moved to the appearance position in the back upper presentation unit.

The back upper effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the back top presentation unit 3400 includes a transparent back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 having a shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back top and front rotating decorative body. A transparent back top front decoration body 3421 extends left and right through which the shaft 3410a of 3410 passes through the center in the left and right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter referred to as "surface (mounting A back top front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back top front decorative board 3422 and a back top front decorative body 3421 provided at the rear of the back top front decorative board 3422 and on the front surface. is attached to a unit base 3423 rotatably supporting the shaft 3410a of the back and front rotating decorative body 3410.

In addition, the rear upper production unit 3400 has a rear cover 3424 attached to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 between the front unit base 3423. A back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 is installed so as to protrude into the space of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 is attached to the rotating shaft of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and the drive gear 3426 meshes with the drive gear 3426. a rotating gear 3427 which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward; and a back upper front decorative board 3422. It is provided with a back rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) attached to the rear surface and capable of detecting the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, the back upper production unit 3400 includes a back lift/lower drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that its rotating shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3423, and a back lift/lower drive motor 3429. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, a gear portion 3431a that meshes with the motor gear 3430, and a portion that protrudes outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a pass through the rear cover 3424. an elevating cam gear 3431 that is rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424 and has a drive pin 3431b that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a detection piece 3431c that protrudes forward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a; , a rear up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) attached to the rear surface of the back upper/front decorative board 3422 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3431c of the up/down cam gear 3431, and a tip provided with a back upper/rear rotating decorative body 3440. A back lifting decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 around an axis in the front and back direction so that the side moves up and down by the revolution of the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431; A spring 3433 is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and is attached to a spring 3433 that urges the lifting decoration unit 3450 to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward. and a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 that regulates the movement of.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back up/down decoration unit 3450 is a transparent back up/down decoration unit 3440, which has an axial shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the transparent back up/back rotation decoration 3440 passing through the center. A back top and rear decoration body 3451 and a back side provided at the rear of the back top and rear decoration body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"). An upper and rear decorative board 3452 and a back upper and rear decorative body 3451 are attached to the front from the rear of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452, and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3423, and the axis of the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 A lifting unit base 3453 rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

In addition, the back up/down decoration unit 3450 includes a back up/down rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the up/down unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back up/down rotation drive motor 3454. a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the drive gear 3455; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 that meshes with the drive gear 3455 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453; A second transmission gear 3457 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453 and is engaged with the second transmission gear 3457. A rotating gear 3458 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rear end.

Furthermore, the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 includes a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the lifting/lowering unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear up-and-down rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back top and front rotating decoration body 3410 of the back top presentation unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. The shaft 3410a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410 passes through the back upper front decoration body 3421, the back upper front decoration board 3422, and the unit base 3423, and connects the unit base 3423 and the rear. It extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover 3424. The back top front decoration body 3421 has two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top front rotating decoration body 3410 stacked one on top of the other in the center in the left and right direction, and the rear petal is placed between the front petals. It has a decoration that looks like it has been rotated so that it is located at the top.

The back top front decorative board 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decorative body 3421 in the left and right direction. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top front decorative board 3422, the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421 can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the upper and lower back decorative substrates 3422 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back upper front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back upper front decoration body 3421 are formed transparently, and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. To be more specific, the back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed into a pear skin-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions, The concept ( In other words, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in accordance with the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) are printed, and also Pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5 ) concept (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)), a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed. Through the back upper front decorative body 3421 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative board 3422 disposed behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be visually recognized. ing.

In addition, the part number of the front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative board 3422, the attribute of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top front decorative board 3422 by silk printing, and behind the transparent back top front rotating decoration 3410, a transparent back top front decoration 3421, Since the back top and front decorative boards 3422 are arranged in order, the predetermined color of the paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and front decorative boards 3422 by silk printing is transmitted through the back top and front decoration bodies 3421. , or through the back top front decoration body 3421 and the back top front rotation decoration body 3410, and when the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side markings) can be determined based on the color of the predetermined paint.

In addition, each package of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back top and front decorative board 3422 is made of white resin (color recognized to be the same color as white). ing.

A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), a back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back up/down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the front surface (front side) of the back upper front decorative board 3422. The entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. is white due to the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying white resist solution. A resist layer is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mount type), a back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back rise/fall detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper front decorative board 3422. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the back upper front decorative board 3422, the part number of the front electronic component and the front electronic component are written near the mounted front electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back top front decorative board 3422, near the back side electronic components such as connectors, there is an area indicating the part number of the back side electronic components and the position where the back side electronic components are arranged. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is hardly noticeable compared to the white color.

The unit base 3423 has through holes 3423a through which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back up/down detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 has a cylindrical support shaft 3424a that is coaxial with the shaft 3410a of the back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface, and a circular arc shape through which the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is inserted. It has an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 is detected by the back rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. In the elevating cam gear 3431, a gear portion 3431a is formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3431b that protrudes rearward is provided at a portion that bulges outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 passes through the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating and lowering decoration unit 3450. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by a rear elevation detection sensor 3432 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back upper and rear rotating decoration body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. The shaft 3440a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper and rear rotating decoration body 3440 passes through the back upper and rear decoration body 3451, the back upper and rear decoration board 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453. It extends to the rear of the The back top and back decoration body 3451 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 front and back, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration shaped like a tree.

The back upper and rear decorative board 3452 can decorate the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 by emitting light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper and rear decorative substrates 3452 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 are formed to be transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. To be more specific, the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 and the back top and back decoration body 3451 are formed in a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions, Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), but the back side is rotated up and down. Through the decoration body 3440 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and rear decoration board 3452 arranged behind the back top and rear decoration body 3451 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

Note that the part numbers of front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452, and the front-side electronic components such as areas indicating the positions where front-side electronic components are to be placed, etc. (Furthermore, it may include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) is printed with a predetermined paint color on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, and a transparent back top and back decoration is printed behind the transparent back top and rear rotating decoration 3440. 3451 and the back top and rear decorative board 3452 are arranged in this order, so the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 by silk printing is applied to the back top and back decorative board 3451. When the predetermined paint color is visible through the back top and rear decoration body 3451 and the back top and rear rotation decoration body 3440, and when a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the predetermined paint color is visible. Characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side markings) can be determined based on the color of the predetermined paint.

In addition, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper and rear decorative substrates 3452 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized to be the same color as white), and the connectors are The housing is made of white resin (also known as natural color, a color recognized to be the same color as white (natural color)).

A white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, a white resist layer is formed with a solid white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, the part number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are written near the front side electronic components of the plurality of LEDs mounted. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, The inscription on the front side indicating the name (which may include the model number) is printed on a solid white resist using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color, using silk printing. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452, there is an area near the back side electronic components of the connector that indicates the part number of the back side electronic components, the position where the back side electronic components are placed, etc. Attributes of the back electronic component (which may also include the shape of the back electronic component, the size of the back electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back electronic component, and the model of the back electronic component) The markings on the back side showing ``are printed with yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white, on a solid white resist by silk printing.

The elevating unit base 3453 includes a shaft hole 3453a that penetrates back and forth on the base end side (right end side in front view) and into which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and a shaft hole 3453a provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a. The shaft hole 3453a has an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. A drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the lifting unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration resembling a cherry blossom flower formed on its front surface.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist solution and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side marking part (back side marking part) is red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the entire surface (front surface) of the back top front decorative board 3422 and the back top and rear decorative board 3452, excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc., to which a plurality of LEDs, etc. are soldered, is A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and this solid coating further forms a white resist layer. On the white resist, the front surface side marking part that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned off, the white In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side markings inconspicuous on the resist, it is also possible to use a solid white color with high reflectance when a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light). The combination of the resist and the front side markings printed by silk printing with a yellow paint with a reflectance very close to that of white allows the surfaces (front surfaces) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper and rear decorative substrates 3452 to be Reflectance can be maintained high.

Note that when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

Next, the movements of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back rising/lowering decorative body unit 3450 in the back upper presentation unit 3400 will be explained. In the normal state of the back top production unit 3400, the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 attached to the shaft 3410a of the back top and front rotation decoration body 3410 is detected by the back top rotation detection sensor 3428, and the back The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back top and front rotation drive motor 3425, the back top and front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front and back direction via the rotation gear 3427.

In addition, in a normal state, the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450, which is provided with the back up-and-back rotating decoration 3440 on the tip side, extends in the left-right direction, and the entire body excluding the tip side is It is in a retracted position located behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and invisible from the front (see FIG. 176(a)). In addition, the part of the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450 that protrudes to the left from the back upper front decoration 3421 is located behind the back front left production unit 3700 when assembled to the game board 5. It is not visible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevation cam gear 3431 is detected by the back elevation detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below its center of revolution, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

Specifically, a normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in a counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, that force is suppressed. Since the line of force passes through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the lifting cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decoration unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. There isn't. Therefore, the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 via the lifting unit base 3453 and the lifting cam gear 3431.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b that is far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is rotated counterclockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b contacts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, thereby preventing the back lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated counterclockwise by the back lift/lower drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. As the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides inside the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a. Due to the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450, the lifting unit base 3453 rotates counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3453a so that its tip side moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise and moves above the straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the driving pin 3431b moves upward. It begins to slide within the slit 3453b in the direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back up/down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b 's revolution stops.

As a result, the counterclockwise rotation of the back up/down decoration unit 3450 via the up/down unit base 3453 is stopped, and the tip side of the back up/down decoration unit 3450 including the back up/down rotation decoration 3440 is , the appearance position is moved downward from the back upper front decoration body 3421 (see FIG. 176(b)). In this appearance position, the tip side of the rear ascending and descending decoration unit 3450 is located below the center of the rear upper and lower decoration unit 3450 than the rear upper front decoration 3421, so the back upper and rear rotating decoration 3440 etc. are visible from the front. becomes possible.

When the back elevation decoration unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends through the center of rotation of the elevation cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force is applied to further rotate the lifting unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the line of force of that force hits the slit 3453b. Since the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 passes through the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating decorative body unit 3450 moves counterclockwise from the appearance position so that the tip side moves downward. In addition, the weight of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 via the lifting cam gear 3431.

In addition, in the state where the back raising/lowering decoration unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the raising/lowering cam gear 3431 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3431b into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the lifting unit base 3453 attempts to further rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450, the lifting cam gear 3431 is rotated clockwise by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the drive pin 3431b. Attempts to rotate in the opposite direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the lifting unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b contacts the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting unit base 3453 is locked, thereby preventing the back lifting and lowering decoration unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. .

When the back up/down decoration unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back up/back rotation decoration 3440 provided on the tip side becomes visible from the front. In the back up/down decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back up/down rotation drive motor 3454, the back up/down rotation decoration is moved through the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 176(b)). Therefore, when the back vertically rotating decorative body 3440 is visible from the front, if the driving gear 3455 is rotated by the back vertically rotating drive motor 3454, the rotating back vertically rotating decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized. .

When returning the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above using the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429, the drive pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 moves up/down. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the tip side of the back elevating and lowering decoration unit 3450 moves upward. When the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lifting/lowering detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429 is stopped, thereby moving the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 to the retracted position. It can be reinstated.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assisting the rotation of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450 toward the retracted position, and The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 177, the back top effect unit 3400 of this embodiment has a back top front decorative board 3422 provided behind the back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back top front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative board 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, since a back top and rear decorative board 3452 is provided behind the back top and back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and rear decorative body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back top and rear decorative board 3452 are used to emit light as appropriate. By doing so, the back upper and rear rotating decorative bodies 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative bodies 3451 can be decorated with light.

At this time, with the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3450 rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED of the back top and rear decoration board 3452 is made to emit light, so that the back top and rear rotating decoration that has been decorated with light emitting light is emitted. The body 3440 and the back top and rear decorative bodies 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back rear left production unit]
Next, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178(a) is a perspective view of the back rear left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 178(b) is a perspective view of the back rear left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Fig. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 182 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decoration unit of the back rear left presentation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the back-rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back rear left decoration unit in the back rear left presentation unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100 near the left end inside the back box 3010. The back rear left presentation unit 3500 includes a transparent back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back rear left decoration body that rotatably supports the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 on the lower end side. The rear left drive unit 3550 is installed in the back box 3010 and rotates the upper end side of the back left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

The rear rear left rotation decorative body 3510 of the rear rear left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. The rear left rotation decorative body 3510 has a shaft 3510a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 182).

As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a transparent back left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft 3510a of the transparent rear left rotating decorative body 3510 passes through the center, and a back left decorative body 3521. A rear left decorative board 3522 is provided at the rear of the rear left decorative body 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "surface (mounting surface)"). A front cover 3523 is attached from the rear of the left decorative board 3522 to the rear side of the rear left decorative body 3521 and rotatably supports the shaft 3510a of the rear left rotating decorative body 3510; A movable base 3524 is attached to the rear side and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the rear rear left drive unit 3550.

The back left decoration unit 3520 also includes a back left rotation drive motor 3525 which is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that its rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, and a back left rotation drive motor 3525. A drive gear 3526 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525; A gear-shaped rotating gear 3527 is provided.

The back left decorative body 3521 of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back left rotating decorative body 3510 one above the other, so that the rear petals overlap the front petals. It is formed in a rotated shape so that it is located between the two. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back left rotating decorative body 3521 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. To be more specific, the back left rotation decorative body 3510 and the back left rotation decoration 3521 are formed in a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending ridges in random directions, and the back left rotation decoration Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), Through the decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative board 3522 arranged behind the back left decorative body 3521 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) The surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative board 3522 is printed with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and behind the transparent back rear left rotation decorative body 3510, a transparent back rear left decorative body 3521, Since the back left decorative board 3522 is arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative board 3522 by silk printing is applied to the back left decorative body 3521 and then to the back left decorative board 3522. Visible through the rear left rotation decorative body 3510, when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are off, characters, symbols, and shapes are displayed according to the predetermined paint color. (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522 is made of resin in a white color (a color recognized to be the same color as white).

A white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522, excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the back left decorative board 3522, a white resist layer is formed with a solid white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the rear left decorative board 3522, near the mounted front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs, the part numbers of the front-side electronic components and the front-side electronic components are displayed. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back left decorative board 3522, there is an area near the back side electronic components such as connectors that indicates the part number of the back side electronic components and the position where the back side electronic components are placed. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist liquid and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side markings (back side markings) are red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination by light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative board 3522, except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by the process, and a multilayer film is further formed on this solid white resist. The surface side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit color light are silk-printed with yellow paint, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, the yellow surface side is printed against the white resist. In addition to making the marking part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), the solid white resist with high reflectance and the white reflectance The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very similar to the yellow paint.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations depending on the printing machine. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The front cover 3523 has a shape in front view that is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion extending upward from the upper left of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3524 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and its upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating back and forth on the upper end side, and an actuation pin 3524b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. Furthermore, the operating pin 3524b protrudes forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, this back rear left decoration body unit 3520 rotates the back left rotation decoration body 3510 back and forth through the rotation gear 3527 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the rear rear left drive unit 3550 includes a flat reinforcing plate 3551 extending vertically and having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the rear rear left decoration unit 3520. , a vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front of the reinforcing plate 3551 and attached inside the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 attached to the front of the unit base 3552; A back rear left lift drive motor 3554 is installed so that its shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear is attached to the rotating shaft of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554. 3555.

The rear rear left drive unit 3550 also includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. , an elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from near the front outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a; A first slit 3558a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3557b of No. 3557 is slidably inserted, and an operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 extending left and right below the first slit 3558a. It has a second slit 3558b into which it is slidably inserted, and a link member 3558 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. The back left relay board 3561 attached to the front of the back left relay board 3561 and the back left lift detection sensor 3562 (lead type) and.

In addition, white resist liquid is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the back left relay board 3561 in the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the back left lift detection sensor 3562 are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a "solid white resist") formed by a white resist layer. Although not shown in the figure, on the surface (front) of the rear left relay board 3561, the part number of the surface side electronic component, the surface side electronic Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back left relay board 3561, the part numbers of the back side electronic parts and the back side electronic parts are printed near the back side electronic parts such as the connector and the back left lift detection sensor 3562. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the back side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist using silk-screen printing using bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to white. Although the back left relay board 3561 is not a decorative board and has no LED mounted, it is a board provided inside the game board 5. Therefore, the front and rear surfaces of the back left relay board 3561 are equipped with reflectors By functioning as a board), when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided inside the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is directed toward the front of the game board 5 to emit light. They are now able to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has approximately the same length as the unit base 3552, extends vertically, and is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

In the elevating cam gear 3557, a drive pin 3557b passes through a slit 3560a of a partition plate 3560 and is slidably inserted into a first slit 3558a of a link member 3558. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear left elevation detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular arc shape into which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3561 relays connections between the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, the back rear left lift detection sensor 3562, and the production drive board 1720. It is for the purpose of

Next, the operation of the back-rear-left effect unit 3500 will be explained. In the normal state, the back rear left effect unit 3500 is a back rear left decorative body in which a back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is provided on the lower end side (tip side), as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184(a). The unit 3520 is in a suspended retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decoration 3510) is located behind the back front left presentation unit 3700, and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-rear left presentation unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decoration body 3030 and the back-front left presentation unit 3700, and the back-rear left lifting drive motor Only a part of 3554 is facing forward (see FIG. 131, etc.). Note that the front part of the rear left lift drive motor 3554 is covered in front by the part outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see Figure 135).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left elevation detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557, and near the left end of the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left decoration unit 3520 is It is located near the left end of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged in the upward movement direction by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 that is in contact with the first slit 3558a is Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the rotation center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force is applied to the drive pin 3557b through the first slit 3558a due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back left decoration unit 3520 (back left rotating decoration 3510) is moved from the retracted position to the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, etc.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving leftward, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b cannot revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, thereby preventing the rear left decoration unit 3520 from rotating from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear left lift drive motor 3554, the lift cam gear 3557 is rotated counterclockwise via the transmission gear 3556 and gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When this drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides to the right inside the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It happens.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the rear left decoration unit 3520, which protrudes below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a, is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. While the operating pin 3524b slides to the right inside the second slit 3558b, the movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a, and the rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates. It will rotate counterclockwise from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3559, thereby reducing the load on the rear left lifting drive motor 3554.

As the back left decoration unit 3520 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a in this way, the back left rotating decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. As a result, the back-back left rotating decoration 3510 moves to the right of the back-front left presentation unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the rear rear left production unit 3500 of this embodiment, the rotation of the rear rear left decoration unit 3520 when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position state) The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 184(b)). In this first appearance position, the rear left decoration unit 3520 has rotated approximately 44 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b comes to slide leftward within the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left lift drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, and the counterclockwise rotation of the rear left decoration unit 3520 is stopped, resulting in a state of the second appearance position (Fig. 184(c) ). In this second appearance position, the rear left decoration unit 3520 has rotated approximately 74 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back left decorative body unit 3520, a force acts on the back left decorative body unit 3520 to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a, and this force causes the movable base The link member 3558 attempts to move downward through the operating pin 3524b of 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the driving pin 3557b inserted into the first slit 3558a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 also does not rotate, so the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear left decoration unit 3520 does not act on the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lifting cam gear 3557, etc.

In addition, when the rear left decoration unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated counterclockwise to bring the drive pin 3557b into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Also good. As a result, when the rear left decoration unit 3520 attempts to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight, and the link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b, the The lifting cam gear 3557 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the one slit 3558a through the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but because the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b cannot revolve. First, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 can be locked unrotatably in the second appearance position.

When the rear left decoration unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decoration 3510 provided on the lower end side is rotated forward (on the player side). It becomes visible from

In this back left decoration unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated through the rotation gear 3527 that meshes with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see Figure 183). Therefore, when the rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), if the driving gear 3526 is rotated by the back-rear left-rotating drive motor 3525, the rotating rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 will be rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear left decoration unit 3520 from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 moves the motor gear 3555 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction, the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557, and as the link member 3558 moves downward, the rear left decoration unit 3520 is moved downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). When the detection piece 3557c of the elevation cam gear 3557 is detected by the rear left elevation detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left elevation drive motor 3554 is stopped, and the rear left decoration unit 3520 is evacuated. It can be returned to its original position.

As shown in FIG. 183, the back rear left effect unit 3500 of this embodiment includes a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back rear left rotation decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be decorated with light. At this time, with the back left decoration unit 3520 being rotated from the retracted position toward the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED on the back left decoration board 3522 is made to emit light, so that the light emitting decoration is displayed. The player can see the back left rotation decoration 3510 and the back left rotation decoration 3521.

[5-9i. Back right production unit]
Next, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main FIGS. 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185(a) is a perspective view of the back rear right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 185(b) is a perspective view of the back rear right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. Figure 186 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right presentation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 187 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right presentation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. Figure 188 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the back rear right production unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 189 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right decoration unit of the rear rear right production unit disassembled and viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rear right decoration unit in the rear right production unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end inside the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear-right presentation unit 3600 includes a transparent back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3610 that is rotatable around an axis in the front-back direction, and a back-rear-right decoration that rotatably supports the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side. The rear right drive unit 3650 is installed in the back box 3010 and rotates the upper end side of the back right decorative body unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

The rear right rotation decorative body 3610 of the rear rear right presentation unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower. The back right rotation decorative body 3610 has a shaft 3610a that projects rearward from the center of the rear surface in a cylindrical shape (see FIG. 188).

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the back right decorative body unit 3620 includes a transparent back right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft 3610a of the transparent rear right rotation decorative body 3610 passes through the center, and a back right decorative body 3621. A rear right decorative board 3622 is provided at the rear of the rear right decorative body 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)"); A front cover 3623 is attached from the rear of the right decorative board 3622 to the rear side of the rear right decorative body 3621 and rotatably supports the shaft 3610a of the rear right rotating decorative body 3610; A movable base 3624 is attached to the rear side and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the rear right drive unit 3650.

The back right decorative body unit 3620 also includes a back right rotation drive motor 3625 which is attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that its rotating shaft protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and A drive gear 3626 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a drive gear 3626 in the shape of a spur gear is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3610a of the rear right rotation decoration body 3610, which meshes with the drive gear 3626. A gear-shaped rotating gear 3627 is provided.

The rear right decorative body 3621 of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the rear right rotation decorative body 3610 one above the other, so that the rear petals overlap the front petals. It is formed in a rotated shape so that it is located between the two. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

The back right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back right rotation decoration body 3621 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. To be more specific, the back right rotation decoration body 3610 and the back right rotation decoration body 3621 are formed in a pear-like pattern with a plurality of short linearly extending protrusions in random directions. Pachinko machine 1 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept of the game board 5) (in other words, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), but when the back is rotated clockwise. Through the decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative board 3622 placed behind the back right decorative body 3621 can be visually recognized. It looks like this.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative board 3622 by silk printing, and behind the transparent back right rotating decorative body 3610, a transparent back right decorative body 3621, Since the back right decorative board 3622 is arranged in order, the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative board 3622 by silk printing is applied to the back right decorative body 3621 and then to the back right decorative board 3622. Visible through the rear clockwise rotating decorative body 3610, when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized when a plurality of LEDs are off, characters, symbols, and shapes are displayed using the predetermined paint color. (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation) can be determined.

In addition, each package of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

A white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622, excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the rear right decorative board 3622, a white resist layer is formed with a solid white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. is formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622, the part number of the front electronic component and the front electronic component are printed near the front electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back right decorative board 3622, near the back electronic components such as connectors, there is an area indicating the part number of the back electronic component and the position where the back electronic component is placed. Attributes of the back side electronic component (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component). ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using a bright yellow paint that is less noticeable compared to the white color.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist liquid and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side markings (back side markings) are red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative board 3622 except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by the process, and a multilayer film is further formed on this solid white resist. The surface side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit color light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, the yellow surface side is printed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the marking part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a white reflectance The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very similar to the yellow paint.

Note that when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The front cover 3623 has a shape in front view that is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the rear right decorative body 3621 and a portion extending upward from the upper right of the portion in a rectangular shape. . The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a rectangular shape. The front cover 3623 is formed into a shallow container shape that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3624 is formed to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and its upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating back and forth on the upper end side, and an actuation pin 3624b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the operating pin 3624b protrudes forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the back right rotation drive motor 3625 rotates the drive gear 3626, the back right rotation decoration unit 3620 rotates the back right rotation decoration 3610 back and forth through the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a reinforcing plate 3651 in the form of a flat plate extending vertically and having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear right decoration unit 3620. , a vertically extending unit base 3652 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and installed inside the back box 3010, a vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and a unit cover. 3653, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is attached to the front upper part of the unit so that its rotating shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is attached to the rotation shaft of the rear right lift drive motor 3654. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655 is provided.

The rear right drive unit 3650 also includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a that meshes with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b that protrudes rearward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from near the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. 3658a, and has a second slit 3658b extending left and right below the rear right decorative body unit 3620 into which the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back right decorative body unit 3620 is slidably inserted. and a link member 3658 that is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction between.

Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. The rear right relay board 3661 is attached to the front of the rear right relay board 3661, and the rear right lift detection sensor 3662 (lead) is attached to the rear of the rear right relay board 3661 and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657. A lower base 3663 is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652, and the lower part of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

Note that white resist liquid is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the rear right relay board 3661 over the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors and the rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "a solid white resist"). Although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the rear right relay board 3661, the part number of the front electronic component, the front electronic component number, and the Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back right relay board 3661, there are a plurality of connectors, the part number of the back side electronic parts, the back side, etc. near the back side electronic components such as the back right lift detection sensor 3662, etc. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side (This may include the model number of the electronic component.) is printed using silk-screen printing on a solid white resist using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to notice compared to white. . Although the back right relay board 3661 is not a decorative board and has no LED mounted, it is a board provided inside the game board 5, so the front and rear surfaces of the back right relay board 3661 are equipped with reflectors By functioning as a board), when the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided inside the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, this light is directed toward the front of the game board 5 to emit light. They are now able to contribute to the production.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically by approximately the same length as the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663), and is formed into a shallow container shape open to the rear.

In the elevating cam gear 3657, a drive pin 3657b passes through a slit 3660a of a partition plate 3660 and is slidably inserted into a first slit 3658a of a link member 3658. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear right elevation detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3658a near its upper end and a second slit 3658b at its lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular arc shape into which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back right relay board 3661 relays connections between the back back right decorative board 3622, the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right lift drive motor 3654, the back right lift detection sensor 3662, and the production drive board 1720. It is for the purpose of

Next, the operation of the back-rear-right effect unit 3600 will be explained. In the normal state, the back right direction production unit 3600 is a back right decorative body in which a back right rotating decorative body 3610 is provided on the lower end side (tip side), as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191(a). The unit 3620 is in a hanging, retracted position. In this normal state, the back-rear right decoration unit 3620 (back-rear right rotation decoration 3610) is located behind the back-front right presentation unit 3800, and is not visible from the front (player side). It has become.

In addition, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back-rear right presentation unit 3600 is located behind the back-front right decoration body 3040 and the back-front right presentation unit 3800, and the entire back-rear right presentation unit 3600 is located at the front (on the player's side). It has become invisible since then.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevation cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right elevation detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located directly below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is also located near the right end of the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. In addition, in a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620 is It is located near the right end within the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged in the upward movement direction by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 that is in contact with the first slit 3658a is Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force is applied to the drive pin 3657b through the first slit 3658a due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction, and link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 (rear right rotating decoration 3610) is moved around the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear right lift drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lift cam gear 3657, etc.

Note that in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 attempts to move upward due to the biasing force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a through the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of movement to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve, and upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, thereby preventing rotation of the rear right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear right lift drive motor 3654, the lift cam gear 3657 is rotated clockwise via the gear portion 3657a. The drive pin 3657b will revolve in the clockwise direction. When this drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, it slides to the left inside the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the rear right decoration unit 3620, which protrudes below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a, is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. While the operating pin 3624b slides to the left inside the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 retreats. It will rotate clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191(a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the biasing force of the spring 3659, thereby reducing the load on the rear right lift drive motor 3654.

In this way, as the back right decoration unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, the back right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. As a result, the back-back right rotation decoration body 3610 moves to the left of the back-front right presentation unit 3800 and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back and right direction production unit 3600 of this embodiment, the rotational position of the back and right decoration unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 rotates about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted position state) is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191(b)). In this first appearance position, the rear right decoration unit 3620 has rotated approximately 44 degrees clockwise from the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b comes to slide rightward within the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right lift drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, and the clockwise rotation of the rear right decoration unit 3620 is stopped, resulting in the second appearance position (FIG. 191(c)) ). In this second appearance position, the rear right decoration unit 3620 has rotated approximately 74 degrees clockwise from the retracted position.

When the rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620, a force acts on the back right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a, and this force causes the back right decorative body unit 3620 to move. The link member 3658 attempts to move downward through the operating pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the driving pin 3657b inserted into the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 also does not rotate, so the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 rotates from the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the weight of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the lifting cam gear 3657, etc.

Note that even if the rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 may be further rotated clockwise to bring the drive pin 3657b into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the rear right decoration unit 3620 attempts to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a due to its own weight, and the link member 3658 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3624b, The lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a through the drive pin 3657b. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but because the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b cannot revolve. First, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 can be locked unrotatably in the second appearance position.

When the rear right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the rear right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side is rotated forward (on the player side). It becomes visible from

In this back right decoration unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated through the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about a longitudinal axis (see Figure 190). Therefore, when the back right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the rear right decoration unit 3620 from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the rear right lift drive motor 3654 moves the motor gear 3655 in the opposite direction to the above. By rotating in the direction, the link member 3658 can be moved downward due to the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657, and as the link member 3658 moves downward, the rear right decoration unit 3620 is moved downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). When the detection piece 3657c of the lift cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right lift detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right lift drive motor 3654 is stopped, and the rear right decoration unit 3620 is evacuated. It can be returned to its original position.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back-rear-right production unit 3600 of this embodiment has a back-rear-right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back-rear right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back-rear right decorative body 3621. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decorative board 3622, the back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 can be decorated with light. At this time, with the back right decorative body unit 3620 rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the LED on the back right decorative board 3622 is made to emit light, so that the light emitting decoration is displayed. It is possible to show the player the back right rotation decoration 3610 and the back right rotation decoration 3621.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Next, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192(a) is a perspective view of the back front left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 192(b) is a perspective view of the back front left presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left presentation unit, as seen from the front, and FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left presentation unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 195(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in a closed state, and FIG. 195(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left production unit in an open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back box 3010 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030. The back front left presentation unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, from the top: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left presentation unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decoration unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decoration unit 3710B and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left decoration unit 3710 of the back front left production unit 3700 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating in the front and back, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. Shaped shutter support members 3712 are arranged vertically on the front surface of the shutter support members 3712, and each is supported rotatably around an axis in the left and right direction, so that the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730 is provided.

In addition, the back front left decoration unit 3710 closes the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and is provided at the rear of the back front left decoration 3713 in the form of a transparent flat plate and the back front left decoration 3713. The back front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "surface (mounting surface)") and the back front left decorative board 3714 are covered from the rear. A rear cover 3715 is attached to the front cover 3711 and attached to the front of the back-rear left presentation unit 3500.

Further, the back front left decoration unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front left decoration unit 3710. A transmission member 3718 is attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and is attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction. It includes a link member 3719 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3719 to open and close the shutter unit 3730.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 has an outer shape in which the ``convex'' character is turned to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape that is a stylized ``pine''). On the front surface of the front cover 3711, a portion in which a metallic decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3711. In this embodiment, the part having the metallic decorative part 3711a with metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3711, but it is molded separately from the front cover 3711, and this molded part and the front cover are molded separately. 3711 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3711a can give a sense of luxury, and also make the front cover 3711 stand out, making it possible to further emphasize the presence of the front cover 3711. The metal decoration portion 3711a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping as described above. The front cover 3711 has a metal decoration part 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decoration part 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative part 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative board 3714 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decorative board 3714 and damaging the back front left decorative board 3714. Therefore, insulation against discharge of static electricity and short circuits can be improved.

The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing parts 3712a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably support the shaft part 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from near the left end of the front surface. This boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening/closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3730 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3732 in the left and right direction, and a shaft portion 3733 that protrudes from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and then extends from the left side. It has a crankshaft 3734 extending in a cylindrical shape toward the direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape within the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located further back than the shaft portion 3733.

The shaft portion 3731 of the shutter member 3731 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712, so that the shutter member 3731 can rotate about the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening/closing slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 has characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)). It has a pattern on it. The back front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens that can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front left decorative board 3714. The surface of the back front left decorative body 3713, which is an inner lens, is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear front left decorative board 3714 are difficult to clearly see from the player's side. In addition, the front and back left decorations 3713 may have a lens cut on the front and back surfaces (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on the back in place of the front and back left decorations 3713. may have a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is open, the back front left decoration body 3713 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 becomes visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front left decorative body 3713 is formed transparent, the surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (mounted surface) can be visually recognized.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 by silk printing, and the back front left decorative board 3714 is arranged behind the transparent back front left decorative body 3713. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is open, the predetermined paint color printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 is transmitted through the back front left decorative body 3713. If the color of the specified paint is visible when multiple LEDs are off, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the markings on the front side (attributes of the surface-side electronic component shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LED packages mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

On the surface (front) of the back front left decorative board 3714, a white resist liquid is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the back front left decorative board 3714, a solid white resist is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. layers are formed. Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the part number of the front electronic component and the front electronic component are printed near the mounted front electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be placed are marked near the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist liquid and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side markings (back side markings) are red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination by light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. For this reason, white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, excluding the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which multiple LEDs are soldered, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by the process, and a multilayer film is further formed on this solid white resist. The surface side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit color light are silk-printed with yellow paint, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, the yellow surface side is printed against the white resist. In addition to making the marking part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), the solid white resist with high reflectance and the white reflectance The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very similar to the yellow color.

Note that when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with its surface oriented in the left-right direction, and has a front end bent rightward. The support plate 3716 has a portion bent to the right on the front end side attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. Further, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the lower end to the right. This support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in such a direction that the plunger moves downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716, the link member 3719 can rotate around the left-right axis about the support pin 3716a. This link member 3719 has a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted in between, and a second connecting portion 3719a connected to the opening/closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3720 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 made up of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and has a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a, and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be explained. In the normal state of the back front left direction unit 3700, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732, which is a closed state. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is not visible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the back front left decorative body 3713 is placed on the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (a plurality of shutters 3732). has been done.

In a normal state, the rear front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3720 is located at the upper end of movement, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. As the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates around the support pin 3716a. This causes the second connecting portion 3719b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3719a to move downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connection part 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening/closing slider 3720 connected to the second connection part 3719b to move downward.

By moving the opening/closing slider 3720 downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted into the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is positioned below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 will rotate around the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 faces in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the back front provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195(b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the rear front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the biasing force of the spring, and by performing the opposite movement to the above, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the normal closed state.

In this manner, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of this embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the back front left decoration body 3713 is changed from the decoration (pattern) of the shutter unit 3730. The decorations (pictures) can be changed to different decorations (pictures), allowing the player to enjoy changing the decorations.

Further, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, the plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 can be made to emit light when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state. The shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 are made to emit light, so that the back front left decorated with light emission can be shown to the player. The decoration body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front left presentation unit 3700, three back front left decoration units are provided: a first back front left decoration unit 3710A, a second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and a third back front left decoration unit 3710C. 3710, the shutter units 3730 can be opened and closed independently, and the lights can be decorated with light, so by appropriately combining the effects of the three back and front left decorative units 3710, players can enjoy a variety of effects. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Next, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196(a) is a perspective view of the back front right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 196(b) is a perspective view of the back front right presentation unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right presentation unit, as seen from the front, and FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decoration unit in the back front right presentation unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 199(a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right presentation unit in a closed state, and FIG. 199(b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right presentation unit in the open state.

The back front right presentation unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right presentation unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040. . The back front right production unit 3800 has three back front right decorations, from the top: a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right production unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decoration unit 3810B and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right production unit 3800 includes a frame-shaped front cover 3811 that penetrates from front to back and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. Shaped shutter support members 3812 are arranged vertically in a row on the front surface of the shutter support members 3812, and each is supported rotatably around an axis in the left and right direction, so that the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3830 is provided.

In addition, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and is provided at the rear of the back front right decorative body 3813 in the form of a transparent flat plate and the back front right decorative body 3813. A back front right decorative board 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "surface (mounting surface)") and a back front right decorative board 3814 are covered from the rear. A rear cover 3815 is attached to the front cover 3811 and attached to the front of the rear right presentation unit 3600.

Further, the back front right decoration unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right decoration unit 3810. A transmission member 3818 is attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and is attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction. It includes a link member 3819 that rotates, and an opening/closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape shaped like a "convex" character turned to the left and rounded corners (a shape that is a stylized "pine"). On the front surface of the front cover 3811, a portion where a metallic decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metallic decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3811. In this embodiment, the part having the metallic decorative part 3811a with metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3811, but it is molded separately from the front cover 3811, and this molded part and the front cover 3811 may be assembled.

The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3811a can give a sense of luxury, and also make the front cover 3811 stand out, making it possible to further emphasize the presence of the front cover 3811. The metal decorative portion 3811a is formed by stamping a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by hot stamping as described above. The front cover 3811 has a metal decoration part 3811a formed only on its front surface, and no metal decoration part 3811a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811. As a result, the creepage distance from the metal decorative part 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative board 3814 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front right decorative board 3814 and damaging the back front right decorative board 3814. Therefore, insulation against discharge of static electricity and short circuits can be improved.

The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing parts 3812a on the front surface thereof, which rotatably support the shaft part 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from near the right end of the front surface. This boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening/closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip.

The shutter unit 3830 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends of the shutter 3832 in the left and right direction, and a shaft portion 3833 that projects from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis and then extends to the right. It has a crankshaft 3834 extending in a cylindrical shape toward the direction.

The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape within the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located at the rear of the shaft portion 3833.

The shaft portion 3833 of the shutter member 3831 is rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812, so that the shutter member 3831 can rotate about the shaft portion 3833 in the left-right direction. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening/closing slider 3820.

Although not shown, the back front right decorative body 3813 is decorated with characters, items, logos, etc. that are in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)). It has a pattern on it. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens that can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front right decorative board 3814. The surface of the back front right decorative body 3813, which is an inner lens, is cut into a lens (formed into a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear front right decorative board 3814. In addition, the front and back right decorations 3813 may have a lens cut on the front and back surfaces (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or may have a lens cut on the back in place of the front and back surfaces of the back and front right decorations 3813. may have a lens cut (may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 are of a surface mount type and are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is open, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front, as will be described later. In this open state, since the back front right decorative body 3813 is formed transparent, the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 (mounted surface) can be visually recognized.

In addition, the part number of the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are placed, etc. (It may also include the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component.) A predetermined paint color is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 by silk printing, and the back front right decorative board 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back front right decorative body 3813. Therefore, in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is open, the color of the predetermined paint printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted through the back front right decorative body 3813. If the color of the specified paint is visible when multiple LEDs are off, characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the markings on the front side (attributes of the surface-side electronic component shown) can be determined.

Further, each of the plurality of LED packages mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 is made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

On the surface (front) of the back front right decorative board 3814, a white resist liquid is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). On the back side (rear side) of the back front right decorative board 3814, a solid white resist is applied to the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, etc. where various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. layers are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, although not shown, the part number of the front electronic component and the front electronic component are printed near the mounted front electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side electronic component ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white. Although not shown, on the back side (rear side) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the part number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be placed are written near the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the model of the back side electronic component may be included) ) is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing using yellow paint, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out compared to white.

Here, we will explain why we chose white as the color of the resist liquid and yellow as the paint for silk printing. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The yellow reflectance is very close to the white reflectance compared to the red reflectance, and the red reflectance is very far from the white reflectance compared to the yellow reflectance. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the front side markings (back side markings) are red, the red front side will stand out against the white resist. While the markings (red markings on the back side of the white resist) stand out, in the combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), when the background is white, the yellow is not noticeable, and the surface When the side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow front markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) are less noticeable with respect to the white resist.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode changes variously by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, white resist liquid is applied to the entire surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 except for the pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by the process, and a multilayer film is further formed on this solid white resist. The surface side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit color light are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so that when the full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are turned off, the yellow surface side is printed against the white resist. In addition to being able to make the marking part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is turned on (when emitting light), a solid white resist with high reflectance and a white reflectance The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side marking section printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very similar to the yellow paint.

Note that when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with its surface oriented in the left-right direction, and has a front end bent leftward. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion protrudes rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that projects leftward from near the lower end in a cylindrical shape. This support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in such a direction that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is biased by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the left-right axis about the support pin 3816a. This link member 3819 has a first connection part 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side, with the support pin 3816a inserted therebetween, and a second connection part 3819a connected to the opening/closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening/closing slider 3820 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 made up of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and is a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a, and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back-front-right production unit 3800 will be explained. In the normal state of the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832, and is in a closed state. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is not visible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (a plurality of shutters 3832). has been done.

In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a de-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the biasing force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the opening/closing slider 3820 is located at the upper end of movement, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the biasing force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. As the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connecting portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates around the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connection part 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening/closing slider 3820 connected to the second connection part 3819b to move downward.

As this opening/closing slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted into the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 will rotate around the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces in the vertical direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the back front provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 is opened. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the biasing force of the spring, and by performing the opposite movement to the above, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the normal closed state.

In this manner, according to the back front right production unit 3800 of this embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 can be changed to the back front right decoration body 3813. The decorations (pictures) can be changed to different decorations (pictures), allowing the player to enjoy changing the decorations.

Further, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, the plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 can be made to emit light when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state. By making the plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 emit light when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, the light emitting decorated shutter unit 3830 can be shown to the player. The decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, in the back front right presentation unit 3800, three back front right decorative body units are provided: a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. 3810, the shutter units 3830 can be opened and closed independently, and the lights can be decorated with light, so by appropriately combining the effects of the three back and front right decoration units 3810, players can enjoy a variety of effects. I can show you.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 200 to 205 and the like. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board showing the rear movable decoration of the rear effect unit moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board showing the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle production unit moved from the lowered position to the raised position. Figure 202 shows how the back up/back rotation decoration of the back up/back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back rear left rotation decoration of the back back left effect unit is moved from the retraction position to the first appearance position, and the back back right FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board showing the right-rotating decorative bodies on the back of the production unit having been moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. FIG. 203 shows the rear left rotating decoration of the back rear left presentation unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back rear right rotation decoration of the back rear right presentation unit from the retraction position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in a moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit changed from the closed state to the open state, respectively.

Figure 205 shows the back movable decorative body of the back rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back up and rear rotating decoration of the back upper and rear effect unit from the retracted position to the emergent position, and the back rear of the back left effect unit. Move the left-rotating decoration from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-rear right-rotating decoration of the back-rear-right presentation unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower-middle rotation decoration of the back-lower-middle effect unit. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which it has been moved from a lowered position to a raised position.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side middle right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed substantially entirely transparent, in a normal state, , as shown in FIG. 111, through them, the back front left decoration body 3030, the back front right decoration body 3040, and the back bottom left rotation of the back bottom left production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100. Decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 of back top production unit 3400 and back top The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and shutter unit 3730 of the back front left production unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and shutter unit 3830 of the back front right production unit 3800, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory 2500 The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be clearly viewed through the frame.

Furthermore, to explain in detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 extends from the blocking part 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the side to near the right middle unit 2700. Further, the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear rear effect unit 3100 is located at the rear of the upper rear effect unit 3400, and is not visible from the player side.

In addition, the lower back left rotation decoration 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the center and left side of the side unit 2200, and the lower back right rotation decoration 3251 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The back lower left rotating decorative body 3201 and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and front unit 2000.

In addition, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position and is positioned behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper part protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since this back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is viewed diagonally from above from a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the number decoration above the center of rotation can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be clearly seen.

Furthermore, the back top front decoration body 3421 of the back top performance unit 3400 extends left and right at the top of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the top left of the center in the left and right direction is connected to the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory. 2500, and the rest can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 has one petal facing upward at the center in the left and right direction in front of the back top and front decoration body 3421, and can be easily viewed from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. can be visually recognized. In a normal state, the back raising/lowering decoration unit 3450 having the back up-and-back rotating decoration 3440 of the back upper production unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back upper front decoration 3421, and the player It is not visible from the side.

In addition, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 having the back rear left rotating decoration 3510 of the back rear left presentation unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back front left presentation unit 3700 in a normal state. , and are not visible to the player. In addition, the rear right decoration unit 3620 having the rear right rotating decoration 3610 of the rear right presentation unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the front right presentation unit 3800 in a normal state. , and are not visible to the player.

In addition, the three back front left decoration units 3710 of the back front left production unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located within the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and are transparent game panels. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A of the three back front left decoration units 3710 is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The middle second back-front left decoration unit 3710B is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. Most of the lower third back front left decoration unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, and the right part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left production unit 3700, in a normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is in a closed state in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is not visible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Furthermore, the three back front right decoration units 3810 of the back front right presentation unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located within the game area 5a in front view, and are transparent game It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front right decoration unit 3810A of the three back front right decoration units 3810 has its right side located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front. The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front right decoration unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C on the lower side have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center on the right side from a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the normal state of the back front right production unit 3800, the shutter unit 3830 is in a closed state in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is not visible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 performs the back side effects of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , and the back/front right effect unit 3800 perform predetermined effects (movable effects and light emitting effects).

Specifically, as an effect using the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The lock is released, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retreat position to the appearance position. As a result, the player can see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left and right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to have a strong impact on the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage over the player (for example, a "jackpot" game). It is possible to make the player think that the player is going to play the game, and it is possible to make the player feel that the player has a high expectation for the game.

Although not shown in the figure, in this rear rear effect unit 3100, after dropping the rear movable decoration 3110 to the appearance position, the rear rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward, and the rear movable decoration When returning the rear movable decorative body 3110 to the retracted position, by appropriately changing forward/reverse rotation of the rear drive motor 3126, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be made to reciprocate up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 is The movable decorative body 3110 can draw attention, and the movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be enjoyed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 201, as a production using the back lower middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, by rotating the lifting arm 3357 by the back lower middle lifting drive motor 3352, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated around the longitudinal axis by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333. As a result, the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward and is positioned within the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to block a part of the effect image on the effect display device 1600, and the player sees the Since it can be visually recognized and rotates around and around, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

This lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is provided with six number decorations, so by rotating the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, it gives the player the impression that a roulette wheel is spinning. can be given. Therefore, when rotating the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as "Sugoroku", and the numeral decoration of the back lower middle rotating decorative object 3310 that has stopped rotating. The "pieces" may advance depending on the situation. As a result, in order for the "pieces" to advance to the desired "squares", the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower side of the back rotates, depending on whether or not it stops rotating at the position of the desired number decoration, making the player suspenseful. It can make the players' hearts flutter and entertain them. Further, as the "pieces" advance, the player can be made to feel as if his or her expectations are increasing, thereby increasing his or her expectations for the game.

For example, the production using the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower right production unit 3250, the back upper production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is shown in FIG. As shown, in the back bottom left production unit 3200, the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 is rotated by the back bottom left drive motor 3205, and in the back bottom right production unit 3250, the back bottom right rotation decoration body is rotated by the back bottom right drive motor 3255. Rotate 3251. In addition, in the back upper presentation unit 3400, the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back upper front rotation decoration 3410, and the back up/down drive motor 3429 moves the back up/down decoration unit 3450 from the retracted position to the lower side. At the same time as it is rotated to the appearance position, the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 is rotated by the back top and bottom rotation drive motor 3454. Furthermore, in the back rear left presentation unit 3500, the back rear left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right by the back rear left lift drive motor 3554, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 moves the back rear left decoration unit 3520 from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right. Rotate the left rotation decorative body 3510. In addition, in the back right direction production unit 3600, the back right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly to the upper left by the back right lift drive motor 3654, and the back right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position at the upper left. Rotate the clockwise rotating decorative body 3610.

As a result, the back up and back rotating decoration 3440, the back back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 move forward of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration Since the body 3201, the back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, the back top and front rotation decoration 3410, the back top and back rotation decoration 3440, the back back left rotation decoration 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration 3610 rotate, By rotating the six decorations, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, making him think that something good is going to happen, and increasing his expectations for the game.

At this time, the back lifting/lowering drive motor 3429, the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, and the back rear right lifting/lowering drive motor 3654 are repeatedly rotated in the normal and reverse directions as appropriate, so that the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3450, the back rear left decoration The body unit 3520 and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively swung. As a result, the back up-and-back rotating decoration 3440, the back back left-rotating decoration 3510, and the back back right-rotating decoration 3610 rotate while swaying, which can strongly attract the player's attention. Players can be entertained.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven decorations rotate around and around, making the player feel strongly that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" game) will occur in which the player has an advantage. It is possible to increase expectations for the game.

For example, as shown in FIG. 203, as a production using the back rear left production unit 3500 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, in the back rear left production unit 3500, the back rear left elevation drive motor 3554 The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back left rotation decoration 3510 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525. In addition, in the back right direction production unit 3600, the back right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position in the upper left by the back right lift drive motor 3654, and the back right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back right decoration unit 3620 from the retracted position to the second appearance position in the upper left. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorations rotate around at approximately the same height as the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, surprising the player and causing something good to happen. This can make the player think that this is true, and can heighten expectations for the game.

At this time, in the performance display device 1600, the positions of the back left rotation decorative body 3510 and the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 at the second appearance position are based on the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 An effect image may be displayed that corresponds to the position of the eyes of a predetermined character's face according to the world view of the game board 5). As a result, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the character's eyes are spinning, thereby making it possible to entertain the player.

As a production using the back front left production unit 3700 and the back front right production unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right production unit 3800. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decoration body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the changes in the decoration.

Note that the effects using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 include three back front left decoration units 3710 and three back front right decoration units 3810, respectively. , the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, or a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed may be made. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of performances to the players, and it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored.

In the back unit 3000, the back rear production unit 3100, the back lower left production unit 3200, the back lower right production unit 3250, the back lower middle production unit 3300, the back upper production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, the back rear right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all decorations etc. may be made to move. This makes it possible for the player to be convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) will occur as all the decorations move, thereby heightening expectations for an advantageous gaming state. can. In this case, in the back-rear left production unit 3500 and the back-rear-right production unit 3600, the back-rear left decoration unit 3520 and the back-rear right decoration unit 3620 are moved from the retreat position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

Although the movement of each decorative object has been explained above, when each decorative object is moved, the LEDs on the decorative board provided at the rear can be made to emit light as appropriate, giving the player a light-emitting effect of the decorative object. This can further attract the interest of players.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the movable effects and the light emitting effects as described above can be combined as appropriate, and they can also be combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored. The player can be entertained and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[5-11. Main functions and effects of the game board]
Next, the main effects of the game board 5 of this embodiment having the above-described configuration will be explained. In the game board 5 of this embodiment, a game panel 1100 in which a game area 5a is provided on the front side has a penetrating opening 1112, and the game area 5a is a distribution area where game balls B can be distributed. A frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into a non-circulating area and shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112, has its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outer side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes a circulation area and the inner side becomes a non-circulation area. Then, a flat support part 2503 that is thinner than the thickness of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from the same position in the front and back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall part 2501 to the non-circulation area side (inside). At the same time, since a flange portion 2502 that contacts the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since nothing extends to the circulation area side of the part where the support part 2503 is provided, it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall part 2501. Therefore, the substantial circulation area can be made up to the position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the substantial circulation area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. In other words, even if the non-circulation area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) divided by the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is enlarged, the actual distribution area will not become smaller unlike in conventional pachinko machines. . Therefore, by increasing the non-circulation area partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the distribution area in which the game balls B circulate within the gaming area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, the non-circulation area The effect image of the effect display device 1600 as a effect device provided at the rear of the area, the movable body and decoration of the effect unit, etc. can be made more visible, and the game with the game ball B in the circulation area and the non-circulation area can be made more visible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain both the performance and the performance.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall part 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation area side (inside) by the support part 2503, and the peripheral wall part 2502 can be reinforced by the flange part 2502 provided in the part where the support part 2503 is not provided. In addition to being able to reinforce the portion 2501 from the distribution area side (outside), the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (abuts) the part of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support part 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall 2501 can be maintained by the support part 2503 and the like, Deformation and damage to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

In addition, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the support part 2503, the flange part 2502, and the attachment to the game panel 1100, when the game ball B comes into contact with the peripheral wall part 2501, the peripheral wall part 2501 It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being elastically deformed and repelled like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B flowing in the game area 5a from making strange movements different from those in the past due to contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which would cause discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent this and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-circulation area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center Because the performance image of the performance display device 1600 as a performance device provided at the rear and the movable body and decorative body of the performance unit provided on the back unit 3000 can be seen through the accessory 2500), the non-distribution area It is possible to enlarge the range in which the production images, movable bodies, decorative bodies, etc. provided at the rear of the display device can be seen, making it easier to exert the production effect of the production device, and also making it possible to make it easier to exert the production effect of the production device. By having a large visible range of the performance images, movable bodies, decorations, etc. of the performance display device 1600, this pachinko machine 1 can stand out, making it possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players. can.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, the transparent part allows the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light provided in the pachinko machine 1 to be protected. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit light from a light emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support part 2503 and the peripheral wall part 2501 can be illuminated. It is possible to make the game look bright, improve its appearance, and increase its appeal to players. At this time, steps, notches, etc. may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 including the support part 2503 is transparent, a movable body provided behind the support part 2503 (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 or the back rear left effect unit 3500) can be The light emitted by the light emitting means (LED) provides the above effects, and the transparent support portion 2503 allows the player to recognize the presence of the movable body.

In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front and back directions as the front side of the game panel 1100 on the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is 1100, the lens effect caused by the support part 2503 can be reduced, and the support part 2503 can also be used for the rear back front left decorative body 3030 or the production device (production display device 1600). etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 is further reduced, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the production image of the production device, the part behind the support part 2503 (design ) can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, effect image, etc. can be made more visible.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is Because the edge of the edge allows a line different from that of the peripheral wall 2501 to be shown, it becomes difficult to see a single design compared to the case where the shape follows the peripheral wall 2501, and it is possible to create a design that looks like it is made with attention to detail. A pachinko machine 1 having a deep design can be provided.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension of the support portion 2503 from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and may vary at that portion. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the effect of reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front and back direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 on the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to create an illusion as if this were the case, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support portion 2503.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front and rear directions as the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (midway) of the front and back direction of the peripheral wall portion 2501, Compared to the case where the support part 2503 extends from the end side, it is possible to reduce the reduction in the reinforcing effect of the support part 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall part 2501, so that the strength of the peripheral wall part 2501 can be sufficiently increased. The peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented from being deformed or damaged even if game media come into contact with it.

Furthermore, the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped to fit the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 so that the rear side thereof is inserted into the opening 1112. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made difficult to see by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is shaped along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is It looks like it protrudes forward from the periphery of the opening 1112, and can give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, creating a good-looking pachinko machine in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is divided by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image, the movable body, the decoration of the effect unit, etc. of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear of the non-distribution area can be clearly seen from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600 It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can fully exhibit the performance effects of etc.

Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is made to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed diagonally, the peripheral wall part 2501 extends forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the peripheral wall 2501 appears to protrude, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the presence of the peripheral wall 2501, and also to make it easier for the player to recognize the circulation area and non-circulation area partitioned by the surrounding wall 2501.

Furthermore, a flange portion 2502 extending toward the circulation area (outside) is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and a flange portion 2502 extending toward the circulation area side (outside) is provided in the portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Since the support part 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside) is not provided, the support part 2503 may obstruct the visibility of the presentation device (the presentation display device 1600 or the presentation unit of the back unit 3000). This makes it possible to enlarge the area in which the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable bodies of the effect unit can be seen, making it easier to exhibit the effect of the effect by the effect, and also making it easier for players to see the effect of the effect by the effect. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making the presentation enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the center accessory 2500, the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502 can maintain the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same level as conventional products, so the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally molded with resin and made of metal. It is possible to prevent the molded product from deforming when it is removed from the mold.

In addition, since the support portion 2503 extends into a flat plate shape that is thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded from synthetic resin, only the support portion 2503 is separated from other portions. It is possible to avoid an increase in the difference in the amount of shrinkage, and it is possible to prevent deformation of the center accessory 2500 during molding.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and a flat game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side. , are respectively transparent, and a rear rear left lift drive motor 3554 as a functional component of the rear rear left production unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and a rear rear right lift drive of the rear rear right production unit 3600. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part thereof is outside the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is placed between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. The back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extend from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a so as to cover at least the parts of the lift drive motor 3554 and the back right lift drive motor 3654 in the game area 5a. Therefore, it is possible to cover and hide at least a portion of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040, Through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the inside of the game area 5a, it is possible to make the rear rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right lifting drive motor 3654 difficult to see from the player side, improving the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to being able to suppress the deterioration of the front back left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 on the front side instead of the back rear left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654, The overall appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the Pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, it becomes difficult to see the boundaries of the game area 5a divided by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not divided. This gives a sense of openness, and even if the gaming area 5a is the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, the gaming area 5a can be made to look larger. Therefore, since the playing area 5a appears larger than that of conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players, increase their expectations for playing with this pachinko machine 1, and increase their expectations for playing the game. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to players.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged to cover at least the portion in the game area 5a in front of functional components such as the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen within the gaming area 5a, thereby improving the appearance of the gaming area 5a. In addition to achieving the same effects as described above, it is also possible to make the functional parts difficult to see even when viewed diagonally from the center of the gaming area 5a.

Furthermore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have continuous decorations over the entire surface, and when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have decorations that are continuous over the entire surface. Since the decorations of the left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the continuous decorations can make it difficult to distinguish the outer boundary of the gaming area 5a, giving a sense of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than its actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. By making it stand out, it is possible to further increase its appeal to players.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back rear left production unit 3500 and It is possible to prevent the back-rear-right presentation unit 3600 etc. from being seen, and the appearance is improved by allowing the back-rear-left presentation unit 3500, back-rear-right presentation unit 3600, etc. to be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 from deteriorating and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 as functional parts are arranged outside the gaming area 5a in front view (the back left lifting drive motor 3554 Since the rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 are placed completely (entirely) outside the gaming area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a are The back left lift drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lift drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them. By maintaining the balance, it is possible to prevent the space of the gaming area 5a from becoming smaller. In other words, since a part of the rear right lifting drive motor 3654 is arranged within the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a can be reduced. This makes it possible to relatively increase the space of the gaming area 5a, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can further exhibit the above-mentioned effects. Furthermore, by providing some of the drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for accessories that move within the gaming area 5a outside the gaming area 5a, the space within the gaming area 5a can be enlarged. The range of performances performed within the game area 5a is expanded. All drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) for the accessories that move within the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Furthermore, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light from the lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the performance display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, making it appear as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light, and the entire pachinko machine 1. can improve the appearance of Although opaque decorative seals 3032 and 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the bases 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are Since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042) is made of a transparent material, light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted to the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back side. It is possible to give the impression that the front right decorative body 3040 is reached and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can also be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can reach.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component, it can be seen that it is a functional component even if it does not cover the whole part by covering it to some extent. It can be spicy and can be made to look like part of the decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not large enough to cover the entire back rear left lifting drive motor 3554, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. The game area 5a can be made to look larger while reducing the cost of the game area 3030. Note that at least a part of the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 and the back rear right lifting drive motor 3654 are covered and hidden by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040. 1 (a portion closer to the boundary line dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, for a predetermined location where there is no drive source outside the gaming area 5a (such as the lower left location in FIG. 131, that is, the lower left corner location on the game board 5), it extends from inside the gaming area 5a to outside the gaming area 5a. By providing decorations, the game area 5a can be made to look larger.

In addition, the frame of the front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a is closed from the rear by a transparent gaming panel 1100, and the gaming area 5a is located in front of the gaming panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the gaming area 5a. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. Similar effects can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not get in the way of the game ball B within the gaming area 5a, facilitating smooth gaming within the gaming area 5a. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by entertaining the user.

In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in front view, the back front left decorative body The rear left effect unit 3500 and the rear right effect unit 3600 behind the back front right decoration body 3030 and the back front right decoration body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the extent that the inside part of the door window 101a in the back rear left lifting drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 is used to lift the back rear left. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so it is possible to avoid the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily long. The cost of the back front left decoration body 3030 (Pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning holes 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. In contrast, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucent decoration. (A sticker is pasted), so the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 faces forward (toward the player), making the first starting opening 2002 more noticeable than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier to direct the player's consciousness toward the first starting hole 2002 rather than the general prize winning hole 2001, the number of game balls B accepted into the first starting hole 2002 decreases (or the first starting hole The player's attention is concentrated on the general prize opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002. It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest, and it is also possible to make the player reliably recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim for, and to make the player aim at the first starting port 2002. You can enjoy playing games.

Depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted into the first starting port 2002, it can make the player nervous, and if the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002, Depending on whether or not a winning game (for example, a "jackpot") that generates an advantageous gaming state is drawn by drawing the first special drawing result, the player can be excited and excited, and can increase their expectations for the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest. After that, when a winner is drawn in the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second grand prize opening 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern, providing great enjoyment to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games. At this time, if the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002 is accepted into the general winning hole 2001, the first special lottery result will not be drawn, but the game ball B will be paid out as a benefit. Therefore, the player can continue to enjoy the game without discouraging the player, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting hole 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 will be greatly different, so a sticker is pasted on the front of the first starting opening 2002, and a sticker is pasted on the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it will not make the players feel uncomfortable, and it can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unsightly, allowing the players to enjoy playing with the pachinko machine 1 and reducing their interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 and the first starting hole 2002 can be visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning slot 2001 or the first starting slot 2002, and to fully experience the joy of being accepted. This can prevent a decline in interest. In addition, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of a transparent material, the light from the lighting in the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 Since it is possible to reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the means (LED on the decorative board), the general prize opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look gorgeous, and the appearance is good. This can increase the appeal to players.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the accepted game ball B is transferred to the general winning opening. Since the game ball B received in 2001 is guided backwards more slowly, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 where the first special lottery result lottery is held is transferred to the general prize winning port 2001. Since the game ball B that has been accepted can be guided backward at a later timing, the game ball B that has been accepted into the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting slot 2002 where the lottery for the first special lottery result is held, the joy (feeling of superiority) caused by receiving the gaming ball B into the first starting slot 2002 is transferred to the general prize winner. The game ball B can be enjoyed by the player for a longer time than when it was received into the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning hole 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 is immediately rearward ( Since the game ball B can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and ejected faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, it is useless for the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the same for a long time, to direct the player's attention to the next game ball B, and to make the game proceed smoothly, thereby suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall part 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203. Since this is made possible, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall part 2203 of the general winning hole 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning hole 2001 when viewed from the front. Depending on the player, this can create an illusion as if the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and the player can enjoy it. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning hole 2001, there is no strong recognition that the game ball B was accepted into the general winning hole 2001, and there is no possibility that it may be an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefit (the first special lottery result lottery) is not awarded afterwards, it is possible to avoid distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall, and it is possible to avoid the feeling of distrust towards the pachinko machine 1 and the gaming hall, and to This allows the player to continue enjoying the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced in amount. Decorations such as stickers on the front surface of the mouth 2001 can be omitted. Therefore, since the cost of the general prize winning hole 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more enjoyable for players by using the cost for the performance device and the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom center production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating back bottom center rotation having a plurality of even numbered (six in this case) stopping positions is provided. The decoration body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length equal to half of the stop position, and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 (six in this case) corresponding to each stop position, and the area detection piece 3325 A plurality of (here, three) area specifying sensors 3330 that detect half of the stop positions, and one position specifying sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326. Therefore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detection pieces 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease repeatedly. Thus, by combining the area specifying sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325, the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

To be more specific, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, the number of area detection pieces 3325 is half of the three stop positions that are lined up. The minimum number of area specifying sensors 3330 required to detect movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half the number of stop positions. Then, the three area specifying sensors 3330 are set as a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the first stop position. (position of the decorative numeral "3"), only the first area specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the area detection piece 3325. From this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position marked with the decorative numeral “2”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are activated. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "6"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a becomes non-detecting, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position marked with the decorative numeral "5"), the second region specifying sensor 3330b becomes non-detecting, and only the third region specifying sensor 3330c detects the area. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "4"), the third area specifying sensor 3330c also becomes non-detecting, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 detect the area detecting piece 3325. is not detected. After that, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral "3"), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. Detection and non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above are repeated as the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates.

In this way, since the area detection piece 3325 is provided with a length that extends to half the number of stop positions, the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be combined to perform the back-bottom rotation decoration. Not only can the rotation of the body 3310 be detected, but also all area specifying sensors 3330 will not become non-detectable even before the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the medium rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is equipped with a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 are detected by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. Therefore, it is possible to accurately grasp the stopping position of the back-lower-middle-rotating decoration body 3310, which has a plurality of stopping positions, by minimizing the deviation of the stopping position.

In addition, since it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, it is possible to accurately stop the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 at an arbitrary stop position. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling uncomfortable (discomfort), and it is possible to enjoy the production (movable production) by the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and suppress a decrease in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (back and middle rotating decorative body 3310) without causing discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift in the stop position can be suppressed, and the By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotation speed) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made faster than when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is made to reciprocate. It can be done quickly. Therefore, the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 that rotates quickly can give a strong impact to the player, strongly attracting the player's interest, and the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 can be made to have a strong impact on the player. It is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by making the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotation surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player in front, and after rotating round and round, an arbitrary Since it is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect in which the rotation stops at the stop position, the player is excited and excited depending on whether or not the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. This allows the user to enjoy the movable effect of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop positions can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (area specifying sensors 3330) required to detect movement to any stop position. The number of stops is the same as the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the ability (grasping the stop position) of the plurality of sensors (area specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. This allows players to enjoy themselves and to prevent them from losing interest by using the back-bottom rotating decorative body 3310 that has more stopping positions.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, as the back lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 in the back lower middle production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the one having six stop positions was shown, but it is not limited to this. It may have four to ten stopping positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, a rotating movable body (lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310) having a plurality of stop positions is shown, but the movable body having a plurality of stop positions is not limited to this. For example, it may be "something that goes around", "something that moves in a straight line", "something that moves in an arc shape", "something that moves in a curved shape", etc.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that controls. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is housed in the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, and for the purpose of explanation, the rear surface of the board holder 1200 is shown when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front. The surface of the main control board 1310 opposite to the front side (that is, the rear surface) may be referred to as the "surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310" on which electronic components are mounted. The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game has a green coating film (hereinafter referred to as "green paint film") formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface), although detailed illustrations are omitted. (Sometimes it is simply referred to as "a solid green resist.") A green resist layer is formed, and a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc. are built-in. The main control MPU is a microprocessor, the main control I/O port is an input/output device (I/O device), the main control input circuit receives detection signals from various detection switches, and drives various solenoids. The main control MPU is equipped with a main control solenoid drive circuit for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU, and a RAM clear switch having a press operation section for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like. On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch, attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as the part number of the surface-side electronic components and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are placed (in addition, The front side markings indicating the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component may be displayed in green. The white paint is easily noticeable on the other hand, and it is printed using silk printing on a solid green resist. The RAM clear switch is exposed from a transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, so it is placed in a position that is difficult to see from the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate part 2003, and a second A second starting hole sensor 2401 detects the game ball B accepted in the starting hole 2004, a general winning hole sensor 3051 detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, and a general winning hole sensor 3051 detects the game ball B accepted in the first big winning hole 2005. The first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects the game ball B, the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects the game ball B accepted into the second big winning hole 2006, and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects the game ball B accepted into the out hole 2010. a first sub-out port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011, a second sub-out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012, Detection signals from magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. that detect illegal magnetism within the gaming area 5a are input via the main control I/O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs control signals from the main control I/O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, thereby controlling the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid. 2612, etc., or from the main control I/O port to the function display unit 1400's status display, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special symbol display, and first special reservation number display. A drive signal is output to the machine, the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, the round display, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are non-operating. While a contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general prize opening sensor 3051, the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub-out opening sensor 3054 are contact-type ON/OFF operation type mechanical switches. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and Detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning hole 2005 and the second big winning hole 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters the ball frequently. , Detection of the game ball B by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the first big winning hole sensor 2402 and the second big winning hole sensor 2601 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3051.

Furthermore, since game balls B frequently enter the out port 2010, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used as the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since game balls B do not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches that have a shorter lifespan than proximity switches. is used.

The main control MPU also transmits various information regarding games (gaming information) and various commands regarding payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed explanation will be given later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the press operation section of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B, etc. is housed in a payout control board box 632 that is removably attached to the rear side of the transparent power board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. When looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front, the surface opposite to the front side (that is, the rear side) of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 is the "surface of the payout control board 633" on which electronic components are mounted. (mounting side)” may be written. The payout control board 633 that controls the payout etc. of the game balls B has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid coating") formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface). A green resist layer is formed by a dispensing control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding dispensing, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs firing control. A firing control section 633b that performs ball feeding control, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error cancellation switch that has a press operation section that cancels the error displayed on the error LED indicator. During maintenance, the game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, and payout device 580 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201), and the ball extraction operation is started. It is equipped with a ball removal switch and a button for removing the ball. On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch, attributes of the surface side electronic component such as the part number of the surface side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the surface side electronic component is placed (further, The front side markings indicating the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component may be displayed in green. The white paint is easily noticeable on the other hand, and it is printed using silk printing on a solid green resist. The error release switch is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that accommodates the payout control board 633. Since the error release switch is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is placed in a position that is difficult for players to see.

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch press operation part from the RAM clear switch through the payout control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is also input. Detection signals from the sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port. When the payout control MPU detects the release of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame release switch, the dispensing control MPU transmits a door frame release command to the main control board 1310 to notify the main body frame 4, and When the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected based on the detection signal from the switch, a main body frame opening command notifying the fact is transmitted to the main control board 1310. Upon receiving such a command, the main control board 1310 adds predetermined information (a format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 The main control board 1310 adds predetermined information (a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) and sends it to the peripheral control board 1510. (information for adjusting the transmission format) is added and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received such a command controls the light emitting mode of the door frame 3 to a notification mode, for example. In addition, based on the detection signal from the door frame release switch and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch, either one of opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, or When both are detected, a frame opening command may be sent to the main control board 1310 as a unified command. In this case, the main control board 1310 adds predetermined information (information for formatting the command to be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the frame opening command and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received this frame opening command controls the light emitting mode of the door frame 3 to be a notification mode, for example.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on an error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by ascertaining the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

Regarding the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 182, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

Note that the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the payout control MPU to store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 during power-off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 has a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid green resist") formed by applying a green resist liquid to its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface). ), a green resist layer is formed, and as shown in FIG. The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600 based on the effect. On the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, near the plurality of electronic components that constitute the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512, there are displayed areas such as the part number of the electronic component and the position where the electronic component is placed. The notation indicating the attributes of the electronic component (which may also include the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component) is displayed in green. Each is printed using silk printing on a solid green resist using an easily noticeable white paint.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance, although detailed illustrations are omitted. The sound source IC includes a sound source IC that performs this, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to.

The peripheral control MPU has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls each decorative board of the game board 5 based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the provided color LEDs, etc. is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motors for operating various production units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the game board decoration drive board serial I/O port to the drive motors of the game board 5 or Door-side drive data for sending to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 and operation button lift drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, and each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I/O port. In addition to sending control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to the effect display control unit 1512 from the serial I/O port for the display control unit. , and outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Further, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and controls the production display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal. Monitoring operations.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and extracts sound information from the sound ROM, and extracts sound information from the vibration speaker 354 provided in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc., the top center speaker 462, and the top side. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the top central speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 are provided with an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, etc.). signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used in conjunction with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

The display commands output from this peripheral control MPU to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable object drive commands, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from display commands. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Performance display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined in advance for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates the drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "order of overlapping sprites").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the effect display device 1600 performs sub-scanning based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, each pixel for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115, 130, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is struck into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more clockwise the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The speed of the ball B flowing down is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. It flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500. When the game ball B flowing down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the gaming area 5a from the center release part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, since the center release part 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, there is a high probability that the first It is accepted into the starting port 2002. When game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "probability change (probability change) win", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "win" is held.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flown down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pulled toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and will be moved to the center side in the left-right direction. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall part 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 Through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520, a plurality of After coming into contact with the obstacle nail N, there is a certain probability that the object passes through the gate section 2003.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance which opens at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. and a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stopper 1006 (so-called right-hand hit), it enters the first guide path 2521 and is struck with such force that it does not hit the stopper 1006 (right-hand hit). If the game ball B is hit with a force that is somewhat weaker than the ball B, it will enter the second guide path 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 flows through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide path 2522 than through the first guide path 2521. Further, the configuration is such that when flowing through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521, the flow passes through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability.

When the game ball B passes through this gate section 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the normal lottery result is "normal win", the first attacker unit The second starting port 2004, which is closed at 2400, remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0 .01 to 600 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, the normal fluctuation time from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result is set to a relatively long time (600 seconds in this example) in normal times (non-time saving state), and in the time saving state (600 seconds). In the short time state), the time is changed to a short time. As a result, the normal lottery results are frequently derived during the time saving period (time saving state), and as a result, the second starting port 2004 is frequently brought into the open state. In this way, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened during time saving (time saving state), so a game aiming at the ball entering the second starting port 2004 (so-called "right-handed hitting") is prohibited. I will do it.

Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 after the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result is finished. Further, the maximum number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at four, and for more than four, even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is not held and is discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B passing through the gate part 2003 and the left side of the gate part 2003 has a high probability of reaching the side right middle unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate part 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. , and is sometimes accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game balls B are accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is accepted into the second sub-out port 2012, it is ejected to the outside of the gaming area 5a without having a chance to be accepted into the second grand prize opening 2006, the second start opening 2004, or the first grand prize opening 2005. .

In addition, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate part 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and is received by the general winning hole 2001, the second big winning hole 2006, and the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no opportunity for it to be accepted into the starting hole 2004 or the first big winning hole 2005, and it is discharged outside the gaming area 5a.

In this way, when the game ball B is received at the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is ejected outside the gaming area 5a, so that the second sub-out port 2012 is not provided to the player. It is possible to encourage a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower acceptance probability of the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. , the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide path 2522 can be encouraged. In other words, rather than "right-handed hitting" in which the game ball B contacts the stop portion 1006, it is possible to encourage a driving operation that requires delicate adjustment of the rotating operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B can be promoted. It is possible to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1, which is mainly based on.

The game ball B passing on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 and enters the second big prize opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left of the central accessory 2500, it is released to the first attacker unit 2400 side via the lower right guide passage 2530.

At this time, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small win" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize Since the opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted into the second big winning opening 2006 with a high probability. When the second big prize opening 2006 is in the open state, when game balls B are received in the second big prize opening 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls, or , 13) game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big prize opening 2006 is placed between the first shelf 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b, with the upper left side After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first prize opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d, and enters the gaming area 5a. released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second starting port door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate part 2003 is a "normal win", and the second starting port door is opened. When the game ball 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received into the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous gaming states advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small win", "probability change (probability change) win", "time reduction (time saving)" A special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a "win" is held.

In addition, when the game ball B is rolling on the first big prize opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state (e.g., "jackpot"), after the special variable time has elapsed, the first big prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. Then, the game ball B becomes ready to be accepted. When the first big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, when game balls B are received in the first big prize opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls, or , 13) game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, by allowing the first big prize opening 2005 to accept the game balls B when the first big prize opening 2005 is ready to accept the game balls B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, thereby encouraging the player. Can entertain.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result will be drawn that will generate a "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation (probability change) win," and "time reduction (time saving) win."Then, the special lottery results that have been drawn will be It is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time).It should be noted that when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, a lottery is drawn. The special lottery results include “Lose”, “Small hit”, “2R jackpot”, “5R jackpot”, “15R jackpot”, “Probability change (probability change) win”, “Time saving (time reduction) win”, “ There are "variable time saving winnings", "probable variable time saving winnings", "second jackpot", etc.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the second big prize opening 2006 is kept open to accept the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening/closing pattern of closing after the opening is repeated multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "jackpot", after the first jackpot opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game ball B, a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the first jackpot When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the prize opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is (referred to as a round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a ``2R jackpot'' is repeated for 2 rounds, a ``5R jackpot'' is repeated for 5 rounds, and a ``15R jackpot'' is repeated for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in "Jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the probability that a special lottery result such as "Jackpot" will be drawn will be changed ("probable winning"), and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result will be changed. There is a ``win'' (``time saving hit'').

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second jackpot", after the first jackpot 2005 becomes able to accept game balls B in a predetermined pattern, ST (special・Generate time). This ST is something that maintains a state of reliable variation or time saving for a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls B from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. It will be put on hold. The maximum number of reserved special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than 4, Even if game balls B were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without holding the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The suggestion of this special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three stop-displayed pattern rows form a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also performs a performance operation on the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301 are operated. In a player participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotary operation unit 302, assist rotation operation, or inhibit rotation operation, and the operation button lift drive motor 342 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 includes each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. Lower left production unit 3200, back lower right production unit 3250, back lower middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, and back front By appropriately using the right presentation unit 3800, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to entertain the players with various effects, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is requested, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Self-supporting auxiliary member]
Next, the self-supporting member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference mainly to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting member. The self-supporting member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is installed between the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the table board 8 of the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the island equipment. When installing (attaching) the pachinko machine 1 to the machine, it helps the pachinko machine 1 to stand on its own and prevents it from falling over. This self-supporting member 7 is formed into a block shape. Moreover, the self-supporting member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting member 7 is provided on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting member 7 is provided with a mounting section that is mounted on the mounting section of the dish unit 200. In this embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove extending back and forth as an attachment part, and the self-supporting member 7 is provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as an attachment part. ing. As a result, by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction with respect to the dish unit 200 and inserting the attached part of the self-supporting member 7 into the mounting part of the dish unit 200, the self-supporting member 7 can be attached to the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (installed). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. . Further, when removing the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment, the self-supporting member 7 can be easily attached by sliding it in the opposite direction from when it was removed.

Note that the attachment (attachment) between the attachment part of the dish unit 200 and the attachment part of the self-supporting member 7 is not limited to the above-mentioned method, but includes "insertion of a protrusion into a hole" and "attachment of a claw". ``By locking'', ``By magnetic attachment with a magnet'', ``By hook and loop fastener'', ``By suction cup'', ``By using removable adhesive material'', etc. Further, the location where the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is provided is not limited to the bottom surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be “inside”, “at least one side of the left and right”, “the front”, etc. .

After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, the self-standing auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting part of the tray unit 200 and stored on the game hall side, and when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island equipment, it is removed from the mounting part of the tray unit 200. It is attached to the unit 200 and used. The self-supporting member 7 may be attached to the tray unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer to the game hall, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 includes the tray unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450, which protrude significantly forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by attaching the self-supporting member 7 to the mounting portion on the lower side of the tray unit 200, it is possible to assist the independence of the Pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment of the game hall, by attaching the self-supporting member 7 to the mounting part of the dish unit 200, the space between the dish unit 200 and the table plate 8 of the island equipment can be increased. The self-supporting member 7 located at the top can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping forward, so when installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be held down to prevent it from tipping over. The pachinko machine 1 does not need to be installed, and the effort required for installation work is easy.

In addition, by attaching the self-supporting member 7 to the attachment part of the tray unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from falling over, so it is possible to avoid damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to the fall, and The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the players.

Furthermore, since the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with a mounting portion for attaching the self-supporting member 7, by attaching the self-supporting member 7 to the mounting portion of the tray unit 200, the independence of the pachinko machine 1 is assisted. Since it is possible to prevent the door frame 3 from falling forward, it is possible to make the presentation device, decorative members, etc. provided on the door frame 3 larger or to make them protrude further forward, making it possible to It is possible to easily construct a pachinko machine whose appearance is significantly different from that of the other pachinko machines, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 etc. are made to protrude largely forward in the door frame 3, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction, it is shown that the self-supporting member 7 can be attached and detached from the attachment part of the dish unit 200, but the present invention is not limited to this. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be attached to and detached from the plate unit 200 by sliding it in the left and right direction.

In addition, the self-supporting member 7 is made removable from the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) that is removably provided to the door frame 3 is also provided. , the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, etc.). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine 1 to be able to stand on its own in a stable state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, a part of the pachinko machine 1 can be fixed by attaching the self-supporting member 7, which has been removed from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, to the door frame 3 as a functional member. It can be made to function as a constituent functional member. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member that also serves as the self-supporting member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the pan unit 200, it can function as a self-supporting member 7, and by removing it from the lower side of the pan unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it can function as a functional component. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the removed self-supporting member 7, and there is no need to manage the removed self-supporting member 7 so that it is not lost. The burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be made detachable from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and functional members (for example, a "board cover that covers a board", "wiring ``Wiring holding member that holds the game media'', ``protective cover that protects the rear of the performance display device, movable decorative body, etc.'', ``storage tank where game media are stored'', ``guidance member through which game media circulates'', etc.) It may be used for both purposes. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the self-standing support member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (pan unit 200), and the pachinko machine 1 is stabilized. to be able to stand on their own in a state of On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, the self-standing support member 7 removed from the door frame 3 can be attached to a predetermined part of the main body frame 4 to function as a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting member 7 is made detachable, there is no need to separately store the removed self-supporting member 7, and there is no need to manage the removed self-supporting member 7 so that it is not lost. The burden on the game hall side can be reduced. In addition, when the self-supporting member 7 is configured to double as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4, the detachable functional member cannot be touched by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that does not cause discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, when the self-supporting member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 The number of parts involved can be reduced, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the self-supporting member 7 may be provided so as to be housed within the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. As a result, when there is no need for the pachinko machine 1 to be attached to an island equipment and made to stand on its own, the self-supporting member 7 can be housed in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, and the presence of the self-supporting member 7 improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the situation from worsening or the self-supporting member 7 becoming a hindrance to the game. On the other hand, when installing or removing the pachinko machine 1 from the island equipment, the self-supporting member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. Therefore, installation work and removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Additionally, in this case, compared to the case where the self-supporting member 7 is removed and stored separately, there is no need to store the self-supporting member 7, and it is a hassle to manage the self-supporting member 7 so that it does not get lost. The burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, although the above-mentioned embodiment showed the self-supporting member 7 having the attached part attached to the attachment part of the dish unit 200, it is not limited to this, and it is assumed that it does not have the attached part. Also good.

Further, although the self-supporting member 7 is shown as being removable from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting member 7 may be built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). When installed on an island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be made to protrude downward and come into contact with the serving plate 8. Thereby, after installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment, there is no need to remove the self-supporting member 7 and store it separately, and the effort required for management on the game hall side can be reduced.

[9. Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
The decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back and rear production unit 3100 of this embodiment are the decorative members of the present invention, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in this embodiment The light guiding radiation plate 3113 in this embodiment is the decorative plate of the present invention, the flange portion 3113b of the light guiding radiation plate 3113 in this embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the present invention, The back decorative board 3114 in this embodiment corresponds to the decorative board of the present invention, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b in this embodiment correspond to the LED of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in this embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention. ing.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear and rear presentation unit 3100, the front side of the rear decorative board 3114 on which the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b are mounted is , since the decoration body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 which constitute the decoration member are arranged, and the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the front side of the decoration body 3111, the back decoration board 3114 and the metal decoration are arranged. Since the decorative sheet 3112 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are located between the decorative body 3111 excluding the metal decorative part 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative part 3111d is removed from the metal decorative part 3111d. It is possible to prevent linear discharge from the portion 3111d to the rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, even if the static electricity of the metal decorative portion 3111d attempts to discharge to the rear decorative board 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the interior of the decorative body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, etc. The light must pass along the front surface of the light guide and radiation plate 3113, pass around the outer periphery, bypass the rear end of the flange portion 3113b that protrudes rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113, and flow to the inside of the flange portion 3113b (toward the rear decorative board 3114 side). First, the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, etc. can provide a sufficient creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d to the rear decorative board 3114.

At this time, since the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 is formed smaller than a predetermined value with respect to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 etc. so as to be surrounded by the flange part 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 is The static electricity that has detoured inward needs to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the extent that the rear decorative board 3114 is smaller, further increasing the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the rear decorative board 3114. Therefore, it is possible to suppress discharge to the rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the rear decorative board 3114, so that the first LED 3114a mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 is caused by discharge (spark). It is possible to avoid damage to the second LED 3114b, etc., and the decoration body 3111 having the metal decoration part 3111d can be reliably decorated with light by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114. This allows the player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit on the back decorative board 3114 is placed a predetermined distance SL inward from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c, static electricity is transferred from the outer periphery of the back decorative board 3114 to the copper foil 3114d. Even if an attempt is made to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creepage distance EL can be further increased by the predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and the discharge will be discharged to the rear decorative board 3114 (copper foil 3114d). It can prevent you from putting it away. Therefore, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the back decorative board 3114, so that the discharge (spark) can cause the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs mounted on the back decorative board 3114 to It is possible to avoid damage to the second LED 3114b, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with a flange portion 3113b that surrounds the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outward from the decorative body 3111 when the decorative body 3111 is viewed from the front. There is no need to do this, and the appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the rear decorative board 3114 in the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear production unit 3100 are decorated with the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and Since it is covered with the body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114. In addition, in the rear decorative board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the board main body 3114c, and copper foils 3114d forming a circuit are mounted on both sides of the board main body 3114c. , are arranged at a predetermined distance SL inward from the outer peripheral edge of the board main body 3114c, and the front surface of the back decorative board 3114 is connected to the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear surface of the back decorative board 3114 is covered with the cover plate part 3115a of the decoration base 3115. The flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 extends to the rear side, and the flange portion 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 from the cover plate portion 3115a of the decorative body base 3115 extends to the front side. The route of the creepage distance EL through which static electricity is discharged from the metal decorative part 3111d provided on the opposite side of the back decorative board 3114 to the copper foil 3114d of the back decorative board 3114 is located on the outside of the flange part 3113b. Proceeding to the rear side, folding back inside the flange part 3113b at the tip (rear end) of the flange part 3113b, proceeding to the front side between the flange part 3113b and the flange part 3115b, and folding the flange part at the tip (front end) of the flange part 3115b. 3115b, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the rear decorative board 3114 can be made sufficiently long, and the discharge to the rear decorative board 3114 can be made long enough. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the rear decorative board 3114, so that the discharge (spark) can cause the It is possible to avoid damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, etc. The second LED 3114b makes it possible to reliably perform light-emitting decoration, allowing players to enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (rear movable decorative body 3110), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. .

In addition, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the substrate body 3114c of the rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, static electricity is also discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent this from occurring and reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the legs 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the protrusion 3115e of the decoration base 3115 are brought into contact with a portion of the rear decorative board 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided on the rear decorative board 3114 at the portion where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 come into contact. This suppresses static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d through the portion of the rear decorative board 3114 that is in contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115. , and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided on the back rear decorative board 3114 where the light guiding radiation plate 3113 and the decorative body base 3115 come into contact, the vibration inside the pachinko machine 1 and the rear movable decorative body 3110 are prevented. Even if friction occurs between the light guiding radiation plate 3113, the decorative body base 3115, and the rear decorative board 3114 due to vibrations caused by movement, the copper foil 3114d will not be worn or peeled off due to the friction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as disconnection of the circuit connecting the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, second LEDs 3114b, electronic components 3114e, etc., or short circuits caused by the peeled copper foil 3114d. This allows the electronic components 3114e and the like to function reliably and achieve the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, as described above, by covering both sides of the rear decorative board 3114 with the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115, discharge of static electricity from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance of the coating film can be lowered, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost of the coating film can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the rear decoration board 3114 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 of the rear production unit 3100 are made to emit light, the rear side is emitted from the first LED 3114a. The light irradiated in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 faces the light-emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c in which the first LED 3114a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is accommodated. The light enters the main body part 3113a from the part where the light guide and radiation plate 3113 A light-transmitting decoration body 3111 and a decoration sheet 3112 provided on the front side provide light-emitting decoration. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are shaped like a flat plate, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced. In addition, the leg portion 3113f is projected rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 so as to be continuous with the portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c that is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a. Since the light receiving part 3113i of the light guide radiation plate 3113 that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be made wider, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter into the main body part 3113a, so that it is not radiated forward. By increasing the amount of light emitted, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be decorated with brighter light. In the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light in the direction along the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting parts 3113e, so that the first LED 3114a is directed forward. Compared to the case where the light is emitted toward the front, the distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front part of the light guide radiation plate 3113 where light is emitted forward is longer, and the distance from the first LED 3114a is longer. Light can be spread widely and radiated forward. Therefore, the entirety of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be illuminated evenly and brightly, the appearance of the luminescent decoration on the decorative body 3111 etc. is not impaired, and the presentation effect of the decorative body 3111 etc. can be fully exhibited. be able to. In this way, since the dimension (thickness) of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arranging the rear movable decorative body 3110 within the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, which is different from the conventional method. It is now possible to place the rear movable decorative body 3110 in an area that is not placed in other pachinko machines, and by placing the rear movable decorative body 3110 in an unexpected position, it strongly attracts the player's attention. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 which can be easily selected by players as a pachinko machine for playing games, and which is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 are housed in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light from the first LEDs 3114a is Heat can be diffused into the first LED accommodating part 3113c, and a rise in temperature of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Further, since a gap is formed between the main body part 3113a and the rear decorative board 3114 by the leg parts 3113f projecting rearward from the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the Heat from the first LED 3114a can be discharged, and accumulation of heat from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the light emission of the first LED 3114a becomes unstable or is damaged due to the heat accumulated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114. In addition to being able to reliably emit light as intended, the decoration body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (rear movable decoration body 3110) can be reliably illuminated with light by the first LED 3114a, and the light emission by the rear movable decoration body 3110 can be Decrease in interest can be suppressed by allowing players to enjoy decorations (light-emitting effects).

Furthermore, since the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has an auxiliary reflection portion 3113g capable of forwardly reflecting the light from the first LED 3114a on the side opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, auxiliary reflection is possible. The portion 3113g allows the light incident from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f to be radiated to the outside of the leg portion 3113f (main body portion 3113a) from the opposite surface, and the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the opposite surface. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility of light passing through the leg portion 3113f, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the main body portion 3113a, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, a copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit for causing the plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and second LEDs 3114b) to emit light is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative board 3114, and the copper foil 3114d has excellent thermal conductivity, so the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d, and the heat can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, making it difficult for the heat from the first LED 3114a to accumulate. Thus, the above-mentioned effects can be reliably exerted.

In addition, on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114, by not providing the copper foil 3114d, a light reflection auxiliary area 3114f that is recessed backward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a is provided, and the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is , since the leg portion 3113f forming a part of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate body 3114c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is brought into contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation It is possible to increase the amount of rearward protrusion of the leg portions 3113f without widening the gap between the main body portion 3113a of the plate 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114, allowing more light from the first LED 3114a to be directed to the main body portion. 3113a, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (rear movable decorative body 3110) can be decorated with brighter light.

In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is recessed backward from the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114, the angle at which the light is irradiated from the first LED 3114a to the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is adjusted to the rear decorative board 3114. Since the angle can be set almost perpendicular to the front surface, the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f can easily reflect the light from the first LED 3114a forward, making the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 brighter. It is possible to achieve the same effect as described above by using luminescent decoration.

Furthermore, since a part of the light from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f recessed backward in the rear decorative board 3114, the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 Compared to a case where a reflective protrusion protrudes forward on the light emitting surface side of the LED, a shadow of the protrusion is cast by the light from the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114, and the shadowed area becomes darker. Instead, the entire rear movable decorative body 3110 can be decorated with light with uniform brightness.

In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f of the rear decorative board 3114 is formed without providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming the circuit for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light, Since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f can be easily formed compared to the case where the substrate main body 3114c is physically recessed by cutting, pressing, etc. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the leg portions 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are brought into contact with the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg portions 3113f are made of copper on the rear decorative board 3114. Since there is no contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg portion 3113f and the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f due to vibrations within the pachinko machine 1, the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) will not be worn out due to the friction. It will not peel off or peel off. Therefore, it is possible to avoid problems such as disconnection of the circuit for causing the first LED 3114a etc. to emit light or short circuit due to the peeled off copper foil 3114d, and ensure that the first LED 3114a etc. emit light. A desired light emitting effect can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, since a white coating film is provided on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decorative substrate 3114, the white color of the coating film allows the light irradiated onto the front side of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to be reflected forward. This makes it possible to brighten the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 and to decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (rear movable decorative body 3110) with brighter light.

In addition, the white coating film allows the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, circuit pattern, etc. provided on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 to be passed through the decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the front. Since it can be made difficult to see from the rear movable decoration body 3110, it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration of the rear movable decoration body 3110, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can fully exhibit the decoration effect.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flat plate-shaped plate provided between the decoration body 3111 (decoration sheet 3112) of the back movable decoration body 3110 of the back and rear production unit 3100 and the back and rear decoration board 3114 This is because the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with a first LED accommodating part 3113c and a second LED accommodating part 3113d which penetrate through and into which the first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 are inserted. , compared to the case where the first LED accommodating part 3113c and the second LED accommodating part 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted are formed in a concave shape with a bottom that does not penetrate, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are The volume (thermal volume) of the space into which the LED 3114 is inserted can be increased, and the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be diffused. At this time, since the adjacent (close) first LED accommodating parts 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (thermal volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a is inserted can be further increased. Heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to be accumulated, so that the accumulated heat may make the light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b unstable, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b may become unstable. Damage to the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body) can be reduced, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be reliably emitted as intended. 3110) can be reliably decorated with light emitting light, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) by the rear movable decoration body 3110, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the light guide radiation plate 3113 is arranged so as to be continuous with the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a that emits light in the direction along the front surface is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a. The legs 3113f projecting rearward from the main body 3113a are brought into contact with the front surface of the board main body 3114c of the rear decorative board 3114, and the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the board main body 3114c of the rear decorative board 3114 are brought into contact with each other. Since a gap is formed between the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be discharged through the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, and to reduce the possibility that the light emission becomes unstable or damaged. In addition to being able to reliably emit light as described above, the decoration body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be reliably decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, and the light emission decoration (light emission effect) by the rear movable decoration body 3110. It is possible to entertain the players and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the rear decorative board 3114, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decorative body 3111 are provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110, by moving the rear movable decorative body 3110, the generation of wind can be Since the front and rear sides of the rear decorative board 3114 can be ventilated to release heat from the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, and electronic components 3114e, it is difficult for heat from the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. to accumulate. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b becomes unstable or that the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are damaged due to the accumulated heat. It can produce effects.

Furthermore, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e does not affect the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. In addition, it is possible to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from malfunctioning due to the heat from the electronic component 3114e, and to achieve the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, since the adjacent (close) first LED housing parts 3113c are connected to each other, a thin part is formed between the first LED housing parts 3113c in the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is possible to avoid storing the light guide and radiation plate 3113, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be made less likely to be damaged.

Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c are mounted on the light guide radiation plate 3113, respectively. By inserting it into the first LED accommodating part 3113c and the second LED accommodating part 3113d, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (main body part 3113a) and the front surface of the board main body 3114c can be brought as close as possible. The dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 (rear movable decorative body 3110) can be reduced.

Moreover, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the board body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, it can be seen from the front through the decoration body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) from becoming unsightly, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and fully exhibit its decorative effect. .

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metallic A first LED 3114a is mounted on the back decorative board 3114 on the rear side of the decorative portion 3111d, with the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in between, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is visible from the front to the rear. Since the metal decoration part 3111d makes it difficult to see the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating part 3113c from the front, the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating part 3113c can be made difficult to see from the front (player side). It can be avoided that the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) is impaired and the appearance becomes poor due to the visible portion 3113c, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be reliably exhibited. This allows the player to enjoy the decoration of the decoration body 3111 and prevents the player from losing interest.

Moreover, since the first LED housing part 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is shaped along the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111, even if the first LED housing part 3113c is visible through the decorative body 3111, Since the first LED accommodating part 3113c is along the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the first LED accommodating part 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decorative protrusion 3111a, which is seen by the player. The presence of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be made difficult to notice, and the decorativeness of the decoration body 3111 can be prevented from being impaired and the appearance becomes poor, and the decorative effect of the decoration body 3111 can be ensured. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can exhibit the same functions and effects as described above.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the third decorative protrusion 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metallic decorative part 3111d), the metal decorative part 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative protrusion 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate light to a portion of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 that is behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and from the first LEDs 3114a, the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since the light is irradiated into the main body part 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and the light in the direction along the front surface irradiated inside by the plurality of reflection parts 3113e of the main body part 3113a is radiated forward. The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused over as wide a range as possible in the rear part of the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the main body 3113a and then radiated forward. A wide range of the decorative protrusion 3111c can be decorated with light with uniform brightness, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c surrounded by the metal decorative part 3111d in the decorative body 3111 can be made more conspicuous, so that the decorative body 3111 can be illuminated with light. The decorative effect can be further enhanced, the player can enjoy the decoration of the decorative body 3111 (back movable decorative body 3110), and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. At this time, since the light is emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the point-like light source of the first LED 3114a from being seen from the front through the decorative body 3111. can be reduced. Because of this, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be evenly decorated with light emitting light, so that the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111, which increases interest in the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

In addition, when the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is decorated with light by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first one of the rear decorative substrate 3114 on the inner circumferential surface of the first LED accommodating part 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is Since the leg portion 3113f that protrudes backward is provided in the area to which the light from the LED 3114a is irradiated, the area of the area (light receiving portion 3113i) to which the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated is widened by the leg portion 3113f. This allows more light from the first LED 3114a to enter the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 allows more light from the first LED 3114a to be radiated forward, so that the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated with brighter light. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration with a higher presentation effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decorative portion 3111d and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a shape along the metal decorative portion 3111d. , the brightness of the light-emitting decoration can be made different across the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (metal decoration portions 3111d). To be more specific, when the light traveling in the direction along the front surface inside the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 reaches the part (inner circumferential surface) of the first LED housing part 3113c that penetrates back and forth, A part of the light is reflected to the inside of the main body part 3113a by the inner circumferential surface, and the rest is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing part 3113c. When the light emitted inside the first LED housing part 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED housing part 3113c, a part of the light is emitted inside the first LED housing part 3113c due to the inner peripheral surface. The remaining light is reflected into the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light inside the main body part 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing part 3113c, the amount of light is greatly reduced and the light is guided to the opposite side, and the side opposite to the first LED housing part 3113c becomes dark. . For this reason, when the first LED 3114a is provided on both sides of the first LED accommodating part 3113c, if only the first LED 3114a on one side is made to emit light, the one side becomes brighter than the first LED accommodating part 3113c. At the same time, the other side becomes dark, and when only the first LED 3114a on the other side is made to emit light, the other side becomes brighter than the first LED accommodating part 3113c and one side becomes darker, and when both first LEDs 3114a are made to emit light, the first LED accommodating part 3113c both sides of will be bright. Since the plurality of first LED accommodating parts 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decorative part 3111d, as described above, by causing the first LEDs 3114a to emit light as appropriate, one side of the metal decorative part 3111d can be set as a border. It is now possible to brighten only one side, brighten only the other side, or brighten both sides, allowing players to see a variety of light-emitting effects, making it difficult for players to get bored and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

Since each of the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c is surrounded by the metal decorative part 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a), the first decorative protrusions 3111a are located between the third decorative protrusions 3111c. The first LED accommodating part 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 provided at the rear of the part allows the light from the first LED 3114a to decorate the other third decorative protrusion 3111c to emit light. Therefore, only the predetermined third decorative protrusion 3111c (the first light diffusing part 3112c and the second light diffusing part 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be decorated with light emission in a good condition. Therefore, a predetermined message can be suggested to the player by making the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c emit light in a predetermined order, or by making a special third decorative protrusion 3111c emit light. Therefore, it is possible to present a more diverse variety of light emitting effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, when the second LED 3114b of the rear decorative board 3114 is made to emit light, the light passes through the second LED accommodating portion 3113d passing through the light guide radiation plate 3113 and directly hits the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112). Therefore, the portion of the decoration body 3111 that is irradiated with light from the second LED 3114b can be decorated with light emitting light in a dotted manner brighter than the portion that is decorated with light emission by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player the area illuminated in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a and the area illuminated in a dotted manner by the second LED 3114b, making it possible to add sharpness to the illumination decoration of the decoration body 3111. Therefore, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and also to enhance the presentation effect of the light-emitting decoration, thereby making it possible to entertain the players and suppress a drop in interest.

Further, as described above, since the first LED 3114a and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be made difficult to see from the front by the metal decorative portion 3111d, the distance from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114 in the front-rear direction Even if the dimensions (thickness) of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) are reduced, the decorative properties of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) are not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be fully exhibited. Therefore, since the dimension (thickness) in the front and back direction from the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear surface of the back and rear decorative board 3114 in the rear movable decoration body 3110 can be reduced, the rear movable decoration body in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. 3110 can be arranged more freely.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decoration body 3111 of the rear movable decoration body 3110 of the back and rear presentation unit 3100, the first decoration protrusion 3111a that protrudes most forwardly, and the first decoration Three decorative protrusions each have a curved front surface: a second decorative protrusion 3111b that protrudes smaller than the protrusion 3111a, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that protrudes smaller than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a by foil stamping, the part where the metal decoration part 3111d is not provided remains transparent. In other words, since the decoration body 3111 has a metal decoration part 3111d and a transparent part (transparent decoration part), the structure is such that the metal decoration part and the transparent decoration part are assembled as in the conventional case. Since there is no need for it and there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress an increase in the dimension in the front-back direction, and as a result, the thickness in the front-back direction can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) within the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, making it possible to arrange the decorative body 3111 in areas that cannot be placed in conventional pachinko machines. By arranging the decorative body 3111 in an unexpected location, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player, making it easier for the player to choose the pachinko machine to play, and appealing to the player. A pachinko machine 1 with high power can be provided.

Moreover, a metal decorative part 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a among the three decorative protrusions in the decorative body 3111, and the metal decorative part 3111d follows the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since 3111d is curved, the light inside this pachinko machine 1 and the light inside the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, making the metal decoration part 3111d sparkly. In addition to being able to make the metal decoration part 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) shine, the three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration part 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) can be emphasized. can strongly attract the attention of

In addition, when the metal decorative parts 3111d are provided on both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, parts with different metallic luster in the front and rear directions will be visible in the decoration of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the sense of depth can be further increased with respect to the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can more easily attract the attention of the player.

In addition, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c having different amounts of forward protrusion, and the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is Since the metal decoration part 3111d is provided, three-dimensional effect can be given to the decoration of the decoration body 3111 by the three decoration protrusions having different protrusion amounts. As a result, a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be shown to the player, so even if the thickness (front and back dimension) of the decoration body 3111 is made thinner, the decorative effect does not deteriorate, and the decoration body 3111 It is possible to reduce the dimension in the front and back direction of the decorative body 3111, increase the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111, and fully exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111, thereby strongly attracting the attention of players. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing.

Moreover, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative protrusions of the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative part 3111d, and since the metal decorative part 3111d protrudes most forward, the metal decoration The part 3111d can be made more conspicuous, and the apparent difference between the metal decoration part 3111d and the parts other than the metal decoration part 3111d can be made to look large, giving a more three-dimensional effect to the decoration of the decoration body 3111. I can do it. Therefore, even if the front and back dimensions of the decorative body 3111 are reduced, a three-dimensional decoration can be seen. Therefore, the front and back dimensions of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved. It is possible to easily realize a pachinko machine 1 that can play the game.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased by reducing the dimension of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction (by reducing the thickness), so it is possible to place a presentation member on the front or rear side of the decorative body 3111. Since it is possible to provide a large number of performance members, it is possible to present a variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Moreover, since the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided with the metal decorative part 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c, which are not provided with the metal decorative part 3111d, protrude forward. Due to the lens effect caused by this, a sense of depth is given to the decorative pattern on the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 give the player a more three-dimensional decoration. be able to. Moreover, since the decorative sheet 3112 is in the form of a sheet, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, an increase in the thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to provide a performance member (rear movable decoration body 3110) consisting of a decorative body 3111 and a decorative sheet 3112 that are thin in the front and rear direction, and a pachinko machine that provides the same effects as described above. It can be set to 1.

Moreover, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative part (the first contour part 3112a and the second contour part 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour part 3112a and the second contour part 3112b are It is possible to reduce the possibility that the rear side of the decorative body 3111 is visible through the transparent side surface of the decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the decorative body 3111 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side of the decorative body 3111 can be difficult to see due to the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, so that the decoration of the decorative body 3111 looks bad. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be fully exhibited.

In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first decorative protrusion is formed by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. It is possible to give the player the illusion that a metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of 3111a. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 on the outside of the metal decorative portion 3111d in front view, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b form the metal decorative portion. 3111d can be made to look wider. For this reason, the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 allow the player to see decorations with a higher decorative effect, thereby creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention. can be provided.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be formed more easily than in the case of dipping it in a plating tank or depositing vaporized metal. , it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the hot stamping device for stamping the metal decorative portion 3111d with foil is equipped with an elastic flat hot plate, the hot plate comes into contact with the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. When in contact, the surface of the hot plate elastically deforms to take a shape that follows the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred to the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It can be transferred (foil stamped) in a good condition so that it adheres closely to the surface. Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil stamping using a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet with the metal foil first comes into contact with the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, so that the transfer sheet is pulled. Therefore, the metal foil can be transferred neatly without wrinkles, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can have a good appearance.

In addition, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decoration body 3111 is an elastic flat surface, even if the shape of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is different, the transfer sheet can be printed without replacing the hot plate. metal foil can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily respond to model changes, design changes, etc., and an increase in costs can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 is made to have elasticity, depending on the distance the hot plate is moved toward the decorative body 3111, in other words, the hot plate is moved toward the first decorative protrusion. Depending on the strength with which the first decorative protrusion 3111a is pressed, the amount (depth) that the first decorative protrusion 3111a is recessed into the hot plate can be varied, and the hot plate in the first decorative protrusion 3111a (decoration body 3111) It is possible to widen or narrow the range of the area in contact with. In other words, the range of foil stamping on the decorative body 3111 (the decorative protrusion protruding forward) can be freely changed. As a result, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided due to model change or design change, the range of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative movement amount of the hot plate. can.

Furthermore, as described above, the elastic surface of the hot plate allows the range of foil stamping on the decorative body 3111 (first decorative protrusion 3111a, etc.) to be freely changed. When the decorative protrusion 3111b is also provided with the metal decorative part 3111d, the colors of the metal decorative part 3111d can be made different between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. To be more specific, in the conventional technology, when trying to form metal decoration parts of different colors on one member (decoration body), for example, after forming a metal layer of the first color on the entire surface, masking treatment is required. By forming a second color metal layer over the entire surface and removing the masking, it is possible to make the masked and unmasked areas have different colors. Alternatively, after forming a metal layer of the first color on the entire surface, forming a metal layer of the second color thereon, and peeling off a part of the metal layer of the second color by laser peeling or the like, The color can be made different between the peeled area and the unpeeled area. However, no matter which of the above techniques is used, there is a problem in that it takes time and effort to manufacture the decorative body, and the cost increases. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the elastic surface of the hot plate allows the range of foil stamping on the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 to be freely changed. Using a transfer sheet with metal foil of the first color, move the hot plate so that it is immersed in the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and transfer the metal foil of the first color to the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the first. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is transferred to the decorative protrusion 3111a, and then, using a transfer sheet having a second color metal foil, only the first decorative protrusion 3111a is submerged without contacting the front surface of the second decorative protrusion 3111b. The hot plate is moved so that the second color metal foil is transferred to the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As a result, it is possible to easily form the metal decorative portions 3111d of different colors between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost and to achieve better decorativeness. The pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a decorative body 3111 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative part 3111d is formed by foil stamping, the metal foil remains peeled off in areas other than the metal decorative part 3111d, compared to the case where the metal decorative part 3111d is left by using laser peeling. Therefore, deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. Specifically, when using laser peeling, if the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to be peeled has irregularities such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the focal length of the laser changes depending on the position of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a portion that is more than a predetermined distance away from (or close to) the focal length, and there is a possibility that peeling remains, resulting in poor appearance. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only in necessary parts by foil stamping, and there is no need to peel off the metal foil after foil stamping to form a transparent part, resulting in a good appearance. A decorative body 3111 can be formed.

In addition, as described above, by reducing the thickness in the front and back direction, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased, so the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be placed in a standby position (retracted) where they cannot be seen from the player side. Since the rear movable decorative body 3110 is movable between the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the appearance position visible from the player side, by moving the rear movable decorative body 3110 to the appearance position, the metal decorative portion 3111d is displayed. The appearance (visibility) of the highly decorative movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) on the back makes the player think that something good will happen, and increases expectations for the game. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by increasing the level of interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear and rear production unit 3100, a flat light guide radiation plate is attached to the flat decorative body 3111 having the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface. 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114, the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 is extended rearward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114 is extended rearward. Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decorative body base 3115 between the flange portion 3113b and the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114, the flange portion 3115b extends from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the rear decorative board 3114. The route of the creepage distance EL advances rearward on the outside of the flange portion 3113b, turns back inside the flange portion 3113b at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b, travels forward between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and then exits the flange portion 3113b. The front end of the portion 3115b has a meandering route that folds back toward the inside of the flange portion 3115b, and the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the rear decorative board 3114 is sufficiently long (10 mm or more, or a discharge voltage of at least 10 kV). (distance at which it is possible to prevent At this time, a decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface, a rear decorative board 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b are mounted for decorating the decorative body 3111 with light emission, Since the decoration base 3115 covering the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114 is provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110, which tends to generate static electricity when moved in the vertical direction, the rear movable decorative body 3110 Static electricity is easy to accumulate, and if static electricity is accumulated on the metal decorative part 3111d, the accumulated static electricity will be discharged at once due to its high conductivity, and the discharge voltage will become high, causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to However, as mentioned above, since the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d to the rear decorative board 3114 can be made sufficiently long, the metal decoration part 3111d It is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated on the rear decorative board 3114 from being discharged to the rear decorative board 3114, and to prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the rear decorative board 3114. This makes it possible to reliably decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having the metal decorative portions 3111d with light emitting light, allowing the player to decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (back movable decorative body 3110) with light emitting light. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making the user enjoy the light-emitting display.

In addition, in the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, a metal decorative part 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward so as to constitute a predetermined decoration. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d to the rear decorative board 3114 is determined by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the front-rear direction. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made longer and that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114 is covered by the decorative body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the rear decorative board 3114. At the same time, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in other members provided at the rear of the decoration base 3115 (for example, the effect display device 1600) from being discharged to the rear decorative board 3114. It is possible to more reliably prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, etc. of the rear decorative board 3114 due to discharge of static electricity.

Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit pattern on the rear decorative board 3114 is prevented from coming into contact with (the legs 3113f of) the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, the metal decoration part The creepage distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the rear decorative board 3114 can be made as long as possible, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the copper foil 3114d of the back decorative board 3114 is provided so as not to come into contact with the legs 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, vibrations from inside and outside of the pachinko machine 1 act. Even if the leg portion 3113f and the copper foil 3114d are in contact with each other, friction does not occur between the leg portion 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the copper foil 3114d is not worn out due to the friction and the circuit is not disconnected. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction in which the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b stop emitting light, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be decorated with light to reliably exhibit a desired presentation effect.

Further, the decorative body 3111 includes a metal decorative part 3111d, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decorative board 3114. Therefore, the shine of the metal of the metal decoration part 3111d can give a sense of luxury, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. To provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make a decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) stand out by embellishing a part 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c and strongly attracts the attention of players. I can do it.

Furthermore, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that protrudes forward in a predetermined decorative shape, a three-dimensional effect is imparted to the metal decorative portion 3111d. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make the decorative part 3111d more conspicuous, further enhance the sense of luxury due to the metal decorative part 3111d, and strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, since the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 is double surrounded by the flange part 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange part 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 is surrounded by the flange part 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. 3113b and the flange portion 3115b so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved.

Furthermore, since the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a light guide radiation plate 3113 that diffuses light, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b of the back rear decorative board 3114 is diffused and Since the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be irradiated with light, the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) can be illuminated with uniform brightness. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the light-emitting decoration, and to further enhance the effect of the light-emitting effect of the rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby making it possible to entertain the players and suppress a decrease in interest. .

In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3114 extends rearward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 that diffuses the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and radiates it forward, the light guide A part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated to the outside from the flange portion 3113b, so that the flange portion 3113b can also be decorated with light. This can be made more difficult to see from the player's side, and since the flange portion 3113b is also decorated with light, the appearance of the light-emitting decoration of the back movable decorative body 3110 can be improved, which makes it more enjoyable and interesting for the player. The decrease can be suppressed.

Note that the same effects as described above can also be achieved in the rear movable decorative body 3160, the rear movable decorative body 3170, and the rear movable decorative body 3180.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back and rear production unit 3100, a transparent light guiding radiation is provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A plate 3113 and a rear decorative board 3114 are provided, and LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated therein. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 are made to emit light, the light from the first LEDs 3114a is transmitted from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the plate surface within the thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The light is irradiated in a direction along the direction, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide and radiation plate 3113, and is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide and radiation plate 3113. Become. The light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is irradiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 that constitute the decorative member, so that the transparent portion provided with the decorative portion 3150 is irradiated forward. The decorative members (decoration body 3111 and decoration sheet 3112) having luminosity will be decorated with light emission.

At this time, the light irradiated from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflecting parts 3113e within the thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to form the decorative body. 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, compared to the case where the first LED 3114a is directed forward to emit light. The distance to which the light is emitted forward can be increased, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is made to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and can be suppressed from appearing to emit light in a dotted manner. The sheet 3112 can be evenly decorated with light to make it look beautiful, and it is possible to entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, in the rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the flat decorative members (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front and rear direction can be reduced. This makes it easier to secure a space for arranging the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, as well as arranging other presentation members (back top-front rotating decorative body 3410, back top-front rotating decorative body 3440, etc.). A pachinko machine 1 can be provided which can more easily entertain players by providing a variety of performance members.

Furthermore, the decorative member (back movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative part 3150 has relief parts such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first outline part 3112a, the relief part can give the decoration part 3150 a three-dimensional effect, and the relief part can give the decoration part 3150 a three-dimensional effect. A sense of depth can be given to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear due to the lens effect. Therefore, the embossed part of the decorative body 3111 and the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 allow the player to see a three-dimensional decoration (decorative part 3150) with a sense of depth. Even if the back and rear movable decoration body 3110 is made thinner, the decorative effect does not decrease, and it is possible to attract and entertain players, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner. The above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as a first outline portion 3112a on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 having relief portions such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. 3112, even if the transparent decorative body 3111 is not colored, the decorative body 3111 can be made to look colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet 3112, reducing the cost of the decorative body 3111. can be done. In addition, by changing the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the decoration body 3111 (rear movable decoration body 3110) can be easily changed, so it is easy to change the model or design. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

Further, the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion where a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed by interference fringes of light, and the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 , light from other LEDs and performance display devices 1600 provided in this pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are the hologram of the first outline portion 3112a. By hitting the area, a predetermined hologram can be shown due to interference fringes of light, so the hologram can improve the appearance of the decoration part 3150, strongly attracting the player's interest, and the hologram Accordingly, a three-dimensional effect can be given to a part of the decoration part 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and even if the rear movable decorative body 3110 is made thin, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling thin.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed by a hologram, the hologram is formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it is visible through the transparent decorative body 3111 having an embossed part such as 3111c, the lens effect of the embossed part can give a sense of depth to the pattern such as a hologram, which can strongly attract the attention of players. Possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, it is possible to use printing technology to form the hologram portion, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, in the decorative member consisting of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is made flat and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is made the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, the transparent decorative member The outer periphery of the decorative sheet 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame-like object on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration portion 3150), a sense of openness is imparted to the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110. At the same time, it is possible to make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (such as the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112) can be made more noticeable, the decorative effect of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be fully exhibited, and the rear movable decorative body The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that light is transmitted between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. is not diffusely reflected, the pattern of the first outline portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decoration body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be fully exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, it is possible to reduce the front and rear dimensions of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 as much as possible, so that the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 can be made as small as possible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced and the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

Furthermore, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and the pattern on the decorative sheet 3112 allows decoration up to the outer periphery of the rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). Therefore, by making the decoration of the member adjacent to the rear movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the rear movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be presented to the player. It is possible to make a visual impact on the players and attract their attention, and also to entertain the large decorations, thereby suppressing a decline in the players' interest.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LEDs 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 are housed from the rear, the first LED housing portions 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be accommodated. By housing the first LED 3114a in the portion 3113c from the rear, it is possible to bring the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the back rear decoration board 3114 as close as possible, and the front and back of the rear movable decoration body 3110 The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into the thickness of the plate. Therefore, compared to the case where light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the light guiding and radiating plate 3113, there are parts of the light guiding and radiating plate 3113 that are difficult for light to reach from the outer peripheral surface (for example, the central part). However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the area and irradiating light from its inner surface, the area can be made to emit bright light. 3112) can be illuminated evenly.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the rear decorative board 3114 is of a side view type, simply by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and causing it to emit light, the first LED 3114a can be accommodated. Light can be irradiated from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects is reliably realized. be able to.

In addition, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light can be emitted to substantially the entirety of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, there is no need to change the reflective part 3113e, and it is possible to easily respond to changes in the decoration of the decoration body 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easily adaptable to model changes, design changes, and the like.

Note that the rear movable decorative body 3160 and the rear movable decorative body 3170 can also provide the same effects as described above.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the invention is not limited to this, and a game machine (parrot machine) that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as above can be achieved.

In the above embodiment, the decorative parts 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 include the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111. Although the example shown above is composed of the decoration by the first contour part 3112a, the second contour part 3112b, the first light diffusion part 3112c, and the second light diffusion part 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, it is limited to this. It's not something you do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be made into one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be provided on the decorative member.

In addition, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have receiving slots that can accept gaming media (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large When game media is accepted into the receiving slot, the player is provided with benefits (such as payout of game media, opening/closing operation of the variable prize opening, etc.). (e.g., the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous), the player can enjoy the operation of inserting the game medium so that the game medium is received into the desired receiving slot. ing. This type of gaming machine has a decorative member whose surface is plated with metal and a notch that penetrates from front to back and is closed by a transparent lens part, and a decorative member that is provided on the rear side of the decorative member and passes through the lens part to the front. A device including a decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light have been mounted has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-223485). According to the technology of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the shine of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decorative member (lens portion) is illuminated by the light emitted from the LED, thereby attracting the attention of players. It can attract and entertain people. By the way, in a decorative member whose surface is coated with a metal decorative part by metal plating, as in the technique of this document, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the area of the metal decorative part becomes highly conductive. Therefore, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged all at once, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the decorative member on which the metal plating is applied, the metal plating and the decorative substrate are as close as possible, so the decorative member ( Static electricity accumulated in the metal plating may be discharged between the metal plating (metal plating) and the decorative substrate, and sparks may be generated. Therefore, sparks (discharge) occur between the metal plating and the decorative board, which damages the LEDs mounted on the decorative board, making it impossible to perform light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) on the decorative member. As a result, it becomes impossible to entertain the players, and there is a fear that the players' interest may be reduced.

[Electrical connection method between main body frame and game board 5]
Next, a method of electrically connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of a drawer connector mounted on a relay board provided on the main body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically establish an electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is placed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board to be installed, and a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. It is provided.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 is connected to the drawer connector (concave type) of the main body frame 4. Each terminal of the panel-side drawer connector (convex type) and each terminal PN of the main body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 are electrically connected.

For example, to explain the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is formed of a non-conductive resin and has a rectangular opening on the front side. It also has a box-shaped main body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction, and a plate-shaped base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear side of the box-like main body DCNa, so that the overall shape is formed in the shape of an English letter T. There is.

A game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is connected around the opening DCNaa of the box-like main body DCNa for a predetermined distance from the front surface of the opening DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-like main body DCNa. Slanted portions DCNaaa are formed for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-like main body DCNa. The game board side drawer connector of the game board 5 is located at the center part (one location) on the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa and at the left and right parts of the inner upper surface (one location on the left part and one location on the right part). This prevents the (convex type) from being inserted into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN upside down in a different direction from the normal orientation, and also prevents the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 from being inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The horizontal position of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN when inserted into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in the normal orientation A groove DCNaab that prevents misalignment and enhances the fit between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 is formed from near the front of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa. They are each formed toward the bottom surface of the box-like main body DCNa.

On the bottom surface of the box-like main body DCNa, there are pin type terminals PN arranged in two rows in the left and right direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left and right direction). ) passes through the box-like main body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

Attachment through holes DCNba and DCNba are formed on the left and right sides of the base body DCNb, respectively. When mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see Figure 209), first insert the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN into the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba. Rivets (not shown) are respectively inserted from the front of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), and the end portions are crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). Thereby, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

In addition, on the back side of the base body DCNb, when mounting the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side relay board KB (see Figure 209), A cylindrical protrusion DCNbb is formed so that the connector (concave type) DCN is mounted in the normal direction.

The main body frame side relay board KB (see Figure 209) includes a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN as well as a DIP (Dual A small (Inline Package) type connector is mounted and electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) By electrically connecting each terminal of the drawer connector (type) and each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, the game board is connected via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness) not shown. A control signal line is formed for transmitting various control signals by the main control board 1310 provided in 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in main body frame 4.

The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided in the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4, and also connects various power sources from the power supply board 630. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that supply to various boards provided in the game board 5, and is shown in the drawing in addition to the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side. A main body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' that is not shown is provided on a main body frame-side relay board KB' (not shown) that is separate from the main body frame-side relay board KB. This body frame side relay board KB' has a DIP (Dual Inline Package) that is electrically connected to this body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN'. A type of small connector is mounted and electrically connected to each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, various sensors, etc. via wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is electrically connected to the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 on another game board side. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) of the main body frame 4, and is connected to each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (not shown). (Concave type) By electrically connecting each terminal PN of DCN', the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 and the door are connected via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness) not shown. A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals and detection signals from each decorative substrate provided in the frame 3, various sensors, various speakers, and the like. The structure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) is the same as the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN', and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) The method of fixing to the main body frame side relay board KB' (not shown) is the same as the method of fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets). There is.

In addition, the method for fixing the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to the game board side relay board (not shown), Another game board side relay board (not shown) of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (this other game board side relay board is , is different from the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted.) The method of fixing to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the method of fixing to the main body frame side relay board KB (fixing method using rivets).

Rivets are used to fix the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB (see Figure 209).By using the drawer connector, the game board 5 can be connected to the main body. Although it is possible to automatically establish an electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board to the main body frame 4, when attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, it is necessary to connect the game board drawer of the game board 5. A large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, so this large force causes the pin type of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN This is to prevent the surface to which each terminal PN is soldered on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) from peeling off. In addition, the case where the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB (see Figure 209) using bolts and nuts, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) are shown in the figure. In the case where the game board 5 is fixed to a relay board on the game board side, there is a drawback that the nut may loosen when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the main body frame 4.

In this embodiment, a pin type terminal is used as each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, but if a bellows type terminal using a terminal and a contact is used, the following problems arise. For example, when each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is used as a terminal, and each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is used as a contact, the pachinko machine 1 If the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, the contacts between the terminal and the contacts (specifically, large currents (inrush currents) flow through contacts for various power supply lines) may become welded. becomes. If you try to forcefully push the game board 5 into the main body frame 4 in this welded state, the contact of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side may bend and break, or the game board 5 may be inserted into the main body frame 4. When removing the connector from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the contacts may be peeled off and damaged, making the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN unusable.

In addition, if the terminals and contacts weld, there is a risk that various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on various control boards may be damaged due to damage to the connector, so special circuits are required to prevent welding. The problem is that it needs to be established.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned problem does not occur at all by using pin type terminals PN for each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. In other words, even if an operator accidentally attaches the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 with the power turned on to the pachinko machine 1, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body Each terminal PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main frame side of the frame 4 is not welded to each other, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, prevention of solder short circuit will be explained with reference to FIG. 209. Figure 209 shows diagrams (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a DIP type that is electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type). Figures (d) to (f) show how to prevent solder bridging of each terminal of a small connector. Note that, in FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a board ground (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. Further, in FIG. 209, the solid line arrow indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the board is poured into the solder tank, and the dashed line arrow indicates the direction in which the board is flowed into the solder tank.

As described above, the main body frame side relay board KB placed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4 is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 as well as this main body frame side drawer connector ( (Concave type) A small DIP type connector that is electrically connected to the DCN is mounted. The terminals of this DIP type small connector are of a pin type arranged in two rows. The main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the left and right direction on the main body frame side relay board KB. and the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb are arranged (predetermined position for the drawer connector), whereas the DIP type small connector is arranged vertically on the main body frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type The two rows of terminals of the small connector are arranged at positions rotated 90 degrees from the two rows of terminals PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main frame side (predetermined position for small connectors). .

The main body frame side relay board KB has a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on its surface (mounting surface) KBx when the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed in the predetermined position for the drawer connector. The terminals PN are inserted into through holes KTH1 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "land KTH1") having lands, and the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the positioning hole. The mounting through-holes DCNba, DCNba of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, which are inserted into KBb, and the mounting holes KBa, KBa formed at the positions corresponding to these mounting through-holes DCNba, DCNba communicate with each other to connect the main body. Rivets (not shown) are inserted from the front of the frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN into the mounting through-holes DCNba and DCNba, respectively, and the ends are caulked and fixed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame-side relay board KB. . Then, when the DIP type small connector is placed in the predetermined position for the small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the DIP type small connector has a through hole KTH2 having a land. (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "land KTH2").

When the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed in the predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, there are two levels in the vertical direction, and the first level is the first level from the bottom. The six terminals PN in one row and the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when a small DIP type connector is placed in the predetermined position for small connectors on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, there are six stages in the vertical direction, with the first stage from the bottom being the first stage from the bottom. Two terminals PN in the first row, two terminals PN in the second row which is the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN in the third row which is the third row from the bottom, and two terminals PN in the fourth row from the bottom. The two terminals PN in the fourth row, the two terminals PN in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the two terminals PN, in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. becomes.

On the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for a drawer connector, and a DIP type small connector is placed at a predetermined position for a small connector. When placed, each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each terminal of the DIP type small connector protrude from the back surface (solder surface) KBy. In this state, by flowing the back side (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side into the solder bath, each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 are relayed on the main body frame side. It is possible to solder to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the board KB, and each terminal of the small DIP type connector and each land KTH2 can be soldered to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. I can do it.

The direction in which the back side (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side flows into the solder bath is from below from the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second stage from the bottom of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main frame side. The direction is towards the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first stage, and the direction is towards the two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth stage from the bottom of the DIP type small connector. The direction is toward the two terminals in the first row. In other words, for the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first stage from the bottom, are the final stage terminals, and for the DIP type small connector, they are the first stage from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row become the final stage terminals.

When pouring the back side (solder side) of the board into the solder tank, the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side, such as the terminals of DCN and DIP type small connectors, should be placed in the solder tank with the pin type terminals lined up. If the solder is allowed to flow in the same direction, there is a risk that solder bridges will occur along the direction of flow, especially between the terminals at the final stage and the terminals at the stage before it. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the final stage terminal.

In the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as mentioned above, the six terminals PN in the first row from the bottom are the terminals in the final stage, so the six terminals PN in the first row Each land KTH1 is connected to a solder relief pattern KNP1 having a rectangular shape that is vertically long and has a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (that is, each of the six terminals PN in the first row They are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB so that the land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 are electrically connected to each other.

In the DIP type small connector, as mentioned above, the two terminals in the first row from the bottom are the final terminals, so each land KTH2 of the two terminals PN in the first row solder escape pattern KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and has a width equal to the outer diameter of land KTH2 (that is, each land KTH2 of the two terminals in the first row and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are respectively formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB.

In this way, by forming a solder escape pattern on the final stage terminal, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges at the final stage terminal and contribute to the prevention of solder short circuits. may occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines on the boundaries of each stage by silk printing on the resist (Countermeasure 1 using silk printing), A method in which horizontal lines are printed on the boundaries of each stage using silk printing, and vertical lines are printed on the lands of each horizontally adjacent terminal and the boundaries of solder relief patterns (Countermeasure 2 using silk printing). An example of this method is to surround the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure by printing and fill the area (countermeasure 3 using silk printing).

[Measure by silk printing 1]
First, as a method capable of suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines at the boundaries of each stage by silk printing on the resist (Countermeasure 1 using silk printing) will be described.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in Figure 209(a), the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, and the six terminals PN in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB at the boundary between the six terminals PN and the horizontal line KSH1 by silk printing. In other words, the horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the resist on the back side (solder side) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing, so when viewed from the resist surface, the horizontal line KSH1 looks like a vertical wall like a mountain range. are connected. As a result, when the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the mountain range-like vertical wall called the horizontal line KSH1. The vertical line KSH1, which looks like a mountain range, is the horizontal line at the boundary between the six terminals PN and land KTH1 in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and the six terminals PN and land KTH1, which are the first row from the bottom. When the solder tries to stay on the resist by the wall, a force is exerted to separate the solder, so that solder bridging can be suppressed in each vertically adjacent terminal PN and land KTH1.

As shown in Figure 209(d), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back side (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back side (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fourth row, which is the eye, and the fourth row is the fourth row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals and the two terminals in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, A horizontal line KSH2 is silk-printed on the back side of the main body frame side relay board KB ( (Solder side) KBy, and a horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the boundary between the two terminals in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. In other words, the horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the resist on the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing, so when viewed from the resist surface, the horizontal line KSH2 resembles a vertical wall like a mountain range. are connected. As a result, for example, when the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and over the mountain range-like vertical wall called the horizontal line KSH2. , a mountain range-like vertical line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2, in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. When the solder tries to stay on the resist by the wall, a force is exerted to separate the solder, so that solder bridges can be suppressed at each vertically adjacent terminal. Horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2, which is the fourth row from the bottom, and the fourth row from the bottom. Horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and land KTH2 in the fourth row, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the third row, which is the third row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between one terminal and land KTH2 and two terminals and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom, and two terminals and land KTH2 in the second row from the bottom. and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the first row from the bottom, and the two terminals and land KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom. Similar to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the fifth column, which is the fifth stage, the solder is separated by the horizontal line KSH2, which is a mountain-like vertical wall that tries to stay on the resist. By applying the force, it is possible to suppress solder bridging between the vertically adjacent terminals and lands KTH2.

[Measure by silk printing 2]
Next, as a method that can suppress the occurrence of solder bridges, horizontal lines are printed on the resist by silk printing at the boundaries of each stage, and vertical lines are printed on the land and solder escape patterns of each terminal adjacent in the left and right direction. A method of printing on each boundary (Countermeasure 2 using silk printing) will be explained. Countermeasure 2 using silk printing is based on the above-mentioned countermeasure 1 using silk printing, in addition, vertical lines are printed using silk printing on the lands of each terminal adjacent to each other in the left and right direction and the boundaries of solder relief patterns adjacent to each other in the left and right direction. Since this is a method to do this, explanation of Countermeasure 1 using silk printing will be omitted.

In the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in Figure 209(a), there is also a horizontal line KSH1 from the bottom as shown in Figure 209(b). Of the six terminals PN and land KTH1 in the first row, and the six terminals PN and land KTH1 in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, each terminal PN and land KTH1 adjacent in the left and right direction, A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing at the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent to each other in the left and right direction. In other words, the vertical line KSV1 is printed on the resist on the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing, so when viewed from the resist side, the vertical line KSV1 looks like a mountain range. This results in a series of vertical walls. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder tank, the solder can flow over the resist and along the mountain range-like vertical wall called the vertical line KSV1. The solder flowing on the mountain range-like vertical wall indicated by the vertical line KSV1 attempts to stay on the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or to the right of the vertical wall, with the vertical wall indicated by the vertical line KSV1 bordering on the mountain range-like vertical wall. By exerting a force that separates the solder, it is possible to suppress solder bridging in each terminal PN and land KTH1 that are adjacent in the left and right direction, and in the solder escape pattern KNP1 that is adjacent in the left and right direction.

In addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in Fig. 209(d), each terminal of the DIP type small connector also has a horizontal line KSH2 printed on the screen in the first row from the bottom as shown in Fig. From the two terminals and land KTH2 in the first row to the two terminals and land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent to each other in the left and right direction and the solder adjacent to each other in the left and right direction A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB at the boundary between the relief pattern KNP2 and the vertical line KSV2 by silk printing. In other words, the vertical line KSV2 is printed on the resist on the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing, so when viewed from the resist surface, the vertical line KSV2 looks like a mountain range. This results in a series of vertical walls. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder bath, the solder can flow over the resist and along the mountain range-like vertical wall called the vertical line KSV2. The solder flowing on the mountain range-like vertical wall called the vertical line KSV2 flows to the left of the vertical wall or to the right of the vertical wall with the mountain range-like vertical wall called the vertical line KSV2 as a boundary, and tries to stay in the resist. This generates a force that separates the solder, thereby suppressing solder bridges between the terminals and lands KTH2 that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction, and in the solder escape patterns KNP2 that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

[Measure by silk printing 3]
Next, as a method to suppress the occurrence of solder bridges, we will discuss a method of enclosing the land and solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined shape using silk printing on the resist and filling that area (Countermeasure 3 using silk printing). explain.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. , are surrounded by a horizontally long rectangular shape by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, and within the area KSA1 surrounded by this rectangular shape, each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 are Print to fill in the area excluding. In other words, each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1 are surrounded by a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 will be printed so as to be filled in, if you look at each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, you will see that each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP1 becomes a depressed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA1, and also prevent solder from flowing into each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1, which is a depressed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. When the solder flows, it is unable to overcome the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1 from each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which are recessed areas, and attempts to stay there, causing a force that causes the solder to separate. As a result, solder bridging can be suppressed in each of the terminals PN and lands KTH1 that are adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions, and in the solder escape patterns KNP1 that are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

For each terminal of the DIP type small connector, as shown in Fig. 209(f), the land KTH2 into which each terminal of the DIP type small connector is inserted and each solder relief pattern KNP2 are connected to the body frame side relay board KB. The back side (solder side) KBy is surrounded by a vertically long rectangular shape by silk printing, and the area KSA2 surrounded by this rectangular shape except for each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2 is filled in. Print. In other words, each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are formed in an area KSA2 surrounded by a rectangular shape by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 will be printed so as to be filled in, if you look at each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, you will see that each land KTH2 and each solder The escape pattern KNP2 becomes a depressed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder tank, the solder must flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2. It is possible to suppress the amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2, and also prevent solder from flowing into each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2, which is a depressed area formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. As the solder flows, the solder tries to stay on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2 from each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas, and a force that separates the solder acts, causing the solder to move vertically, horizontally, and vertically. Solder bridging can be suppressed in each of the terminals and lands KTH2 that are adjacent to each other in the direction, and in the solder escape patterns KNP2 that are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction.

Connectors to which silk printing measures 1 to 3 have been applied are more likely to have solder bridges on the board because the silk-printed areas are much more conspicuous than connectors to which silk printing measures 1 to 3 have not been applied. When visually confirming whether or not a problem has occurred, the operator can quickly direct his/her line of sight because it serves as a mark for where on the board the operator should focus.

[Modified example]
In this embodiment, when the board is poured into the solder tank, the above-mentioned measures 1 to 3 using silk printing are applied to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and solder short circuits. Countermeasures 1 to 3 can also be used as indicators to indicate which connector is to be soldered directly to the board by the operator.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when the board is poured into the solder bath, the above-mentioned countermeasure 3 using silk printing is applied, and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is shaped into a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 209(c). Surrounded area KSA1 and each terminal of the DIP type small connector were used to prevent solder short circuits by preventing solder bridges from occurring using the rectangular area KSA2 shown in FIG. 209(f). Instead of the rectangular shape, a region surrounded by another shape may be used to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and prevent solder short circuits. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modification of FIG. 209(c), and a diagram (b) showing a modification of FIG. 209(f). Note that, among the reference numerals in FIG. 210, the same components as those in FIG. 209 are designated by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 210, the solid line arrow indicates the direction in which solder flows when the board is poured into the solder tank, and the dashed line arrow indicates the direction in which the board flows into the solder tank.

In the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. , is surrounded by silk printing on the back side (solder side) KBy of the relay board KB on the main body frame side, and each land KTH1 and each solder are surrounded by the area KSA1' surrounded by this shape. The area excluding the escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled in. Furthermore, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1' becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder tank, the solder needs to flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA1'. The amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1' can be suppressed, and each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are recessed areas formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1'. When the solder flows, the solder is separated from each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which are recessed areas, because it cannot go over the slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1' and tries to stay there. By applying the force, solder bridging can be suppressed in each terminal PN and land KTH1 that are adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions, and in the solder escape pattern KNP1 that is adjacent in the horizontal direction.

Furthermore, in each terminal of the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. A shape approximately three times larger is surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are excluded from the area KSA2' surrounded by this shape. Print to fill in the area. Furthermore, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2' becomes a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back side (solder side) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB is poured into the solder tank, the solder needs to flow over the resist and over the slightly elevated plateau of the silk-printed area KSA2'. The amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA2' can be suppressed, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 are recessed areas formed on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2'. When the solder flows, the solder tries to stay on a slightly elevated plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2' from each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are recessed areas, and a force is exerted that separates the solder. As a result, solder bridging can be suppressed in each of the terminals and lands KTH2 that are adjacent to each other in the vertical and horizontal directions, and in the solder escape patterns KNP2 that are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, the final stage terminal and the solder escape pattern are connected and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, but they are separated by a predetermined distance. It may be formed by FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a modification example in which the final stage terminal and the solder escape pattern are formed with a predetermined distance apart.

As shown in Fig. 211(a), the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a land KTH1, into which the terminal PN of the final stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a land KTH1 that is long in the vertical direction. A solder relief pattern KNP1' having a rectangular shape whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (it may have a rectangular shape with one side having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance ( For example, they are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB at a distance of 1/3 to 1/2 of the outer diameter of the land KTH1. Good too. This solder relief pattern KNP1' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground, and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in Fig. 211(a), the land KTH2, through which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, is long in the left and right direction and has a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH2. The solder escape pattern KNP2' having a rectangular shape (which may have a rectangular shape in which one side is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) is separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a third of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). They may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB at a distance of 1 to 1/2 length). This solder relief pattern KNP2' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground, and is in an insulated state.

In addition, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. A solder relief pattern KNP1'' (a rectangular shape with one side equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1) having a rectangular shape with a length and a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and a semicircular shape on the opposite side from the land KTH1. ) and may have a semicircular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH1. ) may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. This solder relief pattern KNP1'' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground, and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in Fig. 211(b), the land KTH2, into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, is long in the left and right direction and has a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH2. Solder escape pattern KNP2'' is rectangular and has a semicircular shape on the side opposite to land KTH2 (has a rectangular shape with one side having the outer diameter of land KTH2 and has a semicircular shape on the side opposite to land KTH2) ) and are separated by a predetermined distance (for example, one-third to one-half the length of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and are attached to the back surface of the main body frame side relay board KB. (Solder surface) They may be formed respectively on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder relief pattern KNP2'' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground, and is in an insulated state.

In addition, in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. Solder relief pattern KNP1''' has a rectangular shape with a long width equal to the outer diameter of land KTH1 and a triangular shape on the opposite side from land KTH1 (a square shape with one side equal to the outer diameter of land KTH1). ) and may have a triangular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one-third to one-half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). They may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB at a distance of 1. This solder escape pattern KNP1''' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground, and is in an insulated state.

In the DIP type small connector, as shown in Fig. 211(c), the land KTH2, into which the terminal of the final stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, is long in the left and right direction and has a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH2. Solder escape pattern KNP2''' has a rectangular shape and has a triangular shape on the side opposite to land KTH2 (has a rectangular shape with one side having the outer diameter of land KTH2 and has a triangular shape on the side opposite to land KTH2) ) and the back surface of the main body frame side relay board KB ( (Solder surface) They may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2''' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or solid ground, and is in an insulated state.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the solder relief pattern KNP1 (KNP2) having a rectangular shape is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the final stage terminal is inserted. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side that is not covered may be semicircular (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211(b)) or triangular (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211(c)).

Furthermore, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the board flows into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the dashed-dotted arrow in FIGS. 209(a) to 209(c)) is determined in advance. If the board can be flowed in the opposite direction in addition to this direction (that is, if the board can be flowed into the solder bath from both directions), take measures 1 to 3 using silk printing described above. It is also possible to prevent solder short circuits by preventing the occurrence of solder bridges. In this case, a solder escape pattern having a rectangular shape is connected to the land through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted depending on the flow direction. Note that the shape of the solder relief pattern on the opposite side, which is not connected to the final stage terminal, can be changed to a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in Figure 211(b)) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in Figure 211(c)). ). Further, the final stage terminal and the solder escape pattern may be formed with a predetermined distance apart. The solder escape pattern described above only needs to be formed at both ends of the connector with respect to the direction in which the board flows into the solder bath. Further, when designing a board, if it is not known in which direction the board will flow, the above-mentioned solder escape pattern is formed in both directions so that the solder can flow from either direction.

Incidentally, conventionally, there have been various types of control boards, such as a main control board that controls game progress and gaming profits, a sub-control board that controls effects that are executed as the game progresses, and an image control board that controls display of an image display device, etc. A game machine in which the board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, the terminals of the components are soldered by pouring various boards into a solder bath, but there is a problem in that solder bridges are formed at adjacent terminals and short circuits due to solder occur. was there.

[Prevention of peeling due to over resist]
Next, prevention of peeling by over-resist will be explained with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. Here, the over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be explained first, and the over-resist applied to the case fixing land of the surface-mount type connector will be explained. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram (a) of an over-resist applied to each terminal of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along the line XX in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram (a) of a copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) side of a board on which a surface mount type connector is mounted, and FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram (b) of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213, and is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section taken along the YY line in c). Note that in some of FIGS. 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

[Over-resist applied to each terminal of main body frame side drawer connector (concave type)]
To explain the over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIGS. ) has a through hole formed in the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, Lands each having an outer diameter KTHD1 are formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame-side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame-side relay board KB are different. The outer diameter is KTHD1 and they are the same size.

On the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, resist liquid is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr. A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. Furthermore, although a resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, the back surface (solder surface) In the region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1, a back side (solder side) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed.

In this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the front surface (mounting surface) side and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the back surface (solder surface) side are the same size. Note that the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the board ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. (GND) (that is, solid ground) is electrically connected to the same ground (GND) through a through hole (not shown).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the area corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, an over-resist occurs in which the outer periphery of the land KTH1 is covered by the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. is applied. This allows the resist to cover the entire outer periphery of the land KTH1 on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 against loads from multiple directions. It can be made uniform.

Further, on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, a region of the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1 has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the resist opening KByra on the back side (solder side) is formed, an over-resist is created in which the outer periphery of the land KTH1 is covered by the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. has been done. As a result, on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, the entire outer periphery of the land KTH1 can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be applied to the land KTH1 against loads from multiple directions. It can be made uniform.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB are formed by adhering the copper foil surfaces, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is larger than the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface. The bond between and solder is stronger.

Incidentally, when fixing the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the main body frame side relay board KB, rivets were used as described above. This is because by using the drawer connector, it is possible to automatically establish an electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 by simply attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4. When installed in the frame 4, a large force may be applied from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the box-shaped body DCNa of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the soldered surface of each pin type terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the back surface (solder surface) of the main body frame side relay board KB from peeling off due to large force.

However, by using the drawer connector, external force will be applied to the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side, so the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the frame side relay board KB may peel off from the base material KBo, or the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface may peel off from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. There may be cases where you do so.

Therefore, in this embodiment, an over-resist is applied to the land KTH1 on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB, so that the copper By increasing the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, the drawer connector can be used to prevent drawer connectors (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side when installing and removing the game board 5. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame-side relay board KB and the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the main body frame-side relay board KB will not work as a base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling off from KBo or peeling off of the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1.

Note that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 on which over-resist is applied takes into account the area where each terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted and soldered to the land KTH1, and The outer diameter of the land is larger than that of a land without over-resist. This means that when the terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is soldered to the land KTH1 on which over-resist is applied, the joint area is the terminal PN of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to ensure that the bonding area is greater than the bonding area when soldered to a land without over-resist. Thereby, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is applied can be made greater than the bonding strength to the land on which the over-resist is not applied.

Also, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land into which the terminal is inserted is the same, if over-resist is not applied, the land will have the normal size outer diameter, and if over-resist is applied, the land will have the same outer diameter. It is necessary to prepare a land with an outer diameter larger than the normal size at the board design stage, and if the designer mistakenly places a land without over-resist on a land with over-resist, the terminal There is a problem in that the bond between the pad and the land may be insufficient, resulting in solder failure.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resist, for a board on which there is at least one land to which over-resist is applied (for example, the main body frame side relay board KB), all the lands are , the same land as the land to which over-resist is applied is arranged as a land to which no over-resist is applied. This ensures sufficient bonding between the terminal and the land, making it possible to reliably prevent solder defects from occurring.

Note that the land is also attached to the game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The above-mentioned over-resist is applied to the film. In addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, there is another body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) that is separate from the body frame side relay board KB' (not shown). The above-mentioned over-resist is also applied to the land on this body frame-side relay board KB' (not shown). In addition, another game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' (not shown) of the body frame 4 (this other game board drawer connector (convex type) The side drawer connector (concave type) is different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 which is electrically connected to the DCN.) is mounted on another game board side relay board (this The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted. The above-mentioned over-resist is applied to the land also on the substrate (which is different from the substrate).

In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are different. Although the outer diameter is KTHD1 and the same size, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB is larger than that of the main body frame side relay board KB. The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back side (solder side) side resist opening KByra may be made larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the back side (solder side) side resist opening KBxra.

[Modified example]
In addition, in the embodiment described above, regardless of the presence or absence of over-resist, for a board on which there is at least one land to which over-resist is applied (for example, the main body frame side relay board KB), all the lands are Therefore, the same land as the land on which over-resist is applied is placed as the land on which no over-resist is applied, but when no over-resist is applied, a land with an outer diameter of the normal size (in other words, a land on which over-resist is applied) is placed. A land (with a normal size outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1) may be arranged. That is, a land to which over-resist is applied and a land having an outer diameter of a normal size when no over-resist is applied may coexist. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land into which the terminal is inserted is the same, if over-resist is not applied, the land will have the normal size outer diameter, and if over-resist is applied, the land will have the same outer diameter. It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the normal size at the board design stage.

[Over resist applied to the housing fixing land of surface mount type connector]
The over-resist applied to the case fixing pad KSPF of the surface-mount type connector KCN mounted on the board KC will be explained as shown in FIGS. 213(a), (b) and FIGS. 214(c) and (d). , a pad KSP having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction to which each terminal (for example, six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered, various wiring patterns respectively connected to each pad KSP, A vertically long rectangular shape in which both sides of the surface mount type connector KCN's casing (metal casing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides) are soldered and fixed to the surface (mounting surface) of the circuit board KC. By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC, the shaped chassis fixing pad KSPF can be fixed to each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and each chassis fixed. Pads KSPF are respectively formed. The casing of the surface mount type connector KCN is made of non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing parts are provided on both sides (left and right sides) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

The surroundings KCxa of each pad KSP and various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP are connected to the board ground (GND) (that is, a solid ground) by removing the copper foil at the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. ) is not electrically connected and insulated from the On the other hand, each case is fixed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC at the four corners of each case fixing pad KSPF. A thermal pattern KCxb is provided in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) via a cross-shaped pattern. This thermal pattern KCxb connects both sides of the casing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal casing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides) to the surface of the board KC (mounting surface) to each casing fixing pad of the KCx. When soldering the KSPF, it is possible to prevent the heat that melts the solder from being taken away from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF. Note that both sides of the casing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal casing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides) are connected to the surface of the board KC (mounting surface) on each casing fixing pad KSPF of the KCx. By soldering to the board KC, the fixation of the surface mount type connector KCN to the board KC can be strengthened compared to the case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. , both sides of the casing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal casing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides respectively) are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) of the board KC, allowing surface mount It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for the signals connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC, a resist liquid is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, but the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr In the area corresponding to each pad KSP, a pad surface (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed, and in the area corresponding to each case fixing pad KSPF. A housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF is formed in . Further, a resist liquid is applied onto the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

Note that the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC and the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the board KC. ) are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) through a through hole (not shown).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, in the region of the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr corresponding to the case fixing pad KSPF, an opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the case fixing pad KSPF is formed. Since the resist opening KCxra on the surface (mounting surface) side for the case fixing pad is formed in the shape, the case fixing pad is formed from the rectangular outer periphery of the case fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the case fixing pad KSPF. An over-resist is applied in which the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered by the resist. As a result, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC, the entire outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF can be covered with the resist, so that high peel strength can be applied to each housing fixing pad KSPF in multiple directions. It can be made uniform for the load from.

Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KCo of the board KC are formed by adhering the copper foil surfaces, each pad KSP and each casing formed on the copper foil surface are different from adhesion between the base material KCo and the copper foil surface. The bond between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

By the way, in this embodiment, examples of the board KC on which the surface-mount type connector KCN is mounted include boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Various wiring and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on boards such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used when removing dust and cigarette tar from the pachinko machine 1, when performing various inspections, etc. , after being removed by a staff member such as a clerk at a game hall, it is reconnected after the work is completed. However, most of the staff such as game hall clerks who perform such work are inexperienced in handling circuit boards, and when removing various wirings and harnesses from connectors, or connecting various wirings and harnesses to connectors, , may be done by brute force (i.e., using excessive force).

Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors, so for example, the above-mentioned surface mount type connector KCN When used mounted on the board KC, when the above-mentioned work is carried out by a staff member such as a clerk at an amusement hall, the force associated with insertion and removal of the harness into and from the surface mount type connector KCN will be applied to the surface mount type connector KCN. Due to this large force, both sides of the surface mount type connector KCN's casing (the metal casing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides) are attached to the copper foil of the surface of the board KC (mounting surface) KCx. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp peels off from the base material KCo, and accordingly, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC peels off from the base material KCo. The various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp may peel off from the base material KCo together with each pad KSP.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, over-resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF to prevent the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if force is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN when the harness is inserted into and removed from the surface mount type connector KCN, the surface mount type connector KCN is not formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. The case fixing pad KSPF that is attached to the board does not peel off from the base material KCo, and as a result, each pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC peels off from the base material KCo. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo together with each pad KSP.

[Modified example]
Note that in this embodiment, the above-mentioned over-resist is applied to the case fixing pad KSPF of the board KC on which the surface-mount type connector KCN to which external force is applied is mounted; In addition to boards such as the control board 633, if a surface mount type connector into which various wiring and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted, peripheral control boards 1510, power supply boards 630, interface boards 635, various decorative boards, and various relays are installed. The above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the substrate, various drive substrates, etc., or the substrate may be provided on a movable body that is driven by an electric drive source and is movable. When the board of the movable body is subjected to a load due to wiring or harnesses that are electrically connected to the board of the movable body as the body operates, the casing of the board of the movable body on which the surface mount type connector is mounted. The above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the fixed pad, and if the switch is a surface mount type that has a press operation part and is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, various types of over-resist may be applied to the fixed pad. The above-mentioned over-resist may be applied to the case fixing pad of the board for fixing the switch, or if some external force is applied to the board, resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, ICs, etc. The above-described overresist may be applied to the pads of the board to which various terminals of lead type or surface mount type electronic components are soldered.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a region of the front surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF has a rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the housing fixing pad surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, the resist opening KCxra is formed from the rectangular outer periphery of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Over-resist was applied so that the outer circumference of the case-fixing pad KSPF was covered with resist, but instead of applying over-resist to the case-fixing pad KSPF, a through-hole with a land around the case-fixing pad KSPF was used. It is also possible to form a plurality of lands and apply over-resist to each land. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the board on which a surface mount type connector is mounted in a modified example, and FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the board. be. FIG. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215, and is an enlarged view of part B in FIG. It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line in c). Note that, in some of FIGS. 215 and 216, various wiring patterns and board ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "solid ground") are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

A modification example in which over-resist is not applied to the case fixing pad KSPF, a plurality of through holes having lands are formed around the case fixing pad KSPF, and over-resist is applied to each land is explained as shown in FIG. 215(a). 216(b) and FIGS. 216(c) and (d), each terminal (for example, has six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN has a vertically elongated rectangular shape to which it is soldered. The pads KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, and both sides of the casing of the surface mount type connector KCN (the metal casing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are connected to the surface of the board KC ( a housing fixing pad KSPF having a vertically elongated rectangular shape that is soldered and fixed to the mounting surface), a plurality of through holes KCTH having lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "land KCTH"), The solid ground connection wiring pattern that connects the chassis fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid ground is created by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. Various wiring patterns connected to KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each solid ground connection wiring pattern are formed. Further, each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC is the same as the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the board KC. Note that the solid ground connection wiring pattern that connects the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the solid ground also has a function as a thermal pattern for the housing fixing pad KSPF.

For the right case fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged adjacent to the right side of the case fixing pad KSPF. For the left case fixing pad KSPF, three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged adjacent to the right side of the case fixing pad KSPF.

On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC, a resist liquid is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, but the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed in a region corresponding to the land KCTH. In addition, although a resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the board KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr, the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr is In a region corresponding to the land KCTH, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. In this modification, the opening diameter of the resist opening KCxra on the front (mounting surface) side and the opening diameter of the resist opening KCyra on the back (soldering surface) side are the same size. Note that the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC and the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the board KC. ) are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) through a through hole (not shown).

In this way, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a region of the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr corresponding to the land KCTH has a surface (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH. ) side resist opening KBxra is formed, an over-resist is applied in which the outer peripheral portion of land KCTH is covered with resist from the outer periphery of land KCTH toward the center of land KCTH. In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a region of the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr corresponding to the land KCTH has an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH on the back surface (solder surface) side. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, an over-resist is applied in which the outer periphery of the land KCTH is covered by the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH. Thereby, the peel strength can be increased so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not peel off from the base material KCo by applying overresist to each land KCTH.

As described above, the right case fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and the two rows are arranged adjacent to the right side of the right case fixing pad KSPF. In addition, as described above, the left case fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction. are placed next to each other on the left. As a result, even if the chassis fixing pad KSPF is not over-resisted, each land KCTH is over-resisted, so that the chassis fixing pad KSPF and each land KCTH are connected to the above-mentioned solid ground connection wiring pattern. By being connected, even if force is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN when the harness is inserted or removed from the surface mount type connector KCN, the surface mount type connector KCN is not formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC. When the housing fixing pad KSPF tries to peel off from the base material KCo, the peel strength due to each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC is increased. This makes it difficult for the housing fixing pad KSPF to peel off from the base material KCo.

In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the board KC is the same as the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the board KC. However, compared to the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC is may be made larger or smaller. In addition, in this modification, the opening diameter of the front side (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter of the back side (solder side) side resist opening KByra are the same size, but the front side (mounting side) The opening diameter of the back side (solder side) side resist opening KByra may be made larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

In addition, in this modification, the right case fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above. are arranged adjacent to each other on the right side, and as described above, on the left side chassis fixing pad KSPF, there are two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction. Although it is arranged to be adjacent to the left side of the left case fixing pad KSPF, instead of or in addition to this, the right case fixing pad KSPF has two lands equally spaced along the vertical direction. Two rows of KCTHs may be arranged adjacent to each other above and/or below the right-hand case fixing pad KSPF, or the left-hand case fixing pad KSPF may have two rows arranged adjacent to each other above and/or below the right-hand case fixing pad KSPF. Two rows in which two lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals may be arranged adjacent to each other above and/or below the left case fixing pad KSPF.

Incidentally, conventionally, there have been various types of control boards, such as a main control board that controls game progress and gaming profits, a sub-control board that controls effects that are executed as the game progresses, and an image control board that controls the display of an image display device. A gaming machine in which the board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). By the way, like the gaming machine described in this document, various Connectors installed on boards are subject to loads when inserting and removing wires, so for example, if someone who is inexperienced in handling boards removes wires from a connector or connects a wire to a connector, excessive force may be used. There was a problem in that the copper foil on the board peeled off due to the load on the connector.

[Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 included in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. FIG. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In addition, in FIG. 218, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although it protrudes from the top, it has been omitted for the sake of clarity in the drawing.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and A liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the base body 1502 and a base body 1502 closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 at predetermined positions, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various boards installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 have peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing images to the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having about two-thirds of the area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side, and is arranged close to the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are located in the upper right corner of the cover body 1501 with the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a square shape in the remaining approximately one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is twice larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is arranged at the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, which will be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, which will be described later. connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and share the same ground. (GND). Note that the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. There is.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.When viewed from the front, the cover body 1501 has an oblong rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (thickness: 2 mm) on the top and left sides. Cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively protruded toward the rear (toward the front side of the Pachinko machine 1) on the bottom side and the right side, thereby forming a box shape with an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a is equipped with an air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly to the upper right of the center when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles whose center point is the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, there are predetermined cylindrical holes inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. Note that by forming the arc-shaped slit hole 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally taking out various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed diagonally in the cover flat plate 1501a near the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and installed, the front side surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front side surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, screw a metal pan head screw (not shown) with a seat (a screw having a shape in which a pan head head and a flat washer are integrated) into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the rear, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, thereby preventing the air cooling fan FAN from popping out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is now possible to prevent

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there is a gap (with a predetermined distance) between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

Note that the cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a higher position than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a shorter distance than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). A wiring draw-out recess 1501ab is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, along the lower side when viewed from the front, and a volume adjustment switch. The position corresponding to 1510d is a closed, almost horizontally long rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and connector CN1 at the top, and connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom) in the connector recess. 1501ac is placed at a position lower than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position where the distance is longer than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. It is formed to protrude. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. It is formed. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac generally occupies the lower right area when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. They are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has 1 position along its lower side corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A position where the connector recess 1501ad as a closed horizontally long rectangular area is lower than the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the bottom of the connector recess 1501ad. Each of them will be exposed.

Further, when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front, a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae is formed along the left side thereof at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. A mounting recess 1501af for attaching a wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae is larger than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position where the distance is shorter than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) and protrudes toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 1503a with a predetermined height (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A protruding portion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and a mounting hole 1501afb1 is formed at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front side surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front side surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, respectively. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, it closes the wiring drawer opening 1501ae and also connects a flexible flat cable (FFC) to be connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Abbreviation for Cable.A flexible flat cable has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. )) The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wires from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and project outwardly at the top and bottom, respectively, with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge part 1501cc arranged above the guide part 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge part 1501cd arranged below the guide part 1501cb and protruding outward are formed, respectively. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hook parts 1501cca and 1501cda that protrude forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hanging parts 1501cc and 1501cd. Furthermore, a cover side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right side cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at the positions so as to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Further, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil that is the surface thereof is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. By screwing in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws. Become. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw. It is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan-head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to connect the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are inserted into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside the side end faces (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of attachment boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. has been done. The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are surrounded by copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and circular copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands Wiring patterns 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Further, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil that is the surface thereof is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is 1520r1 and 1520r3 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. ) and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, The seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shafts (screw parts) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. It becomes electrically connected to the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan-head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is connected to the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of attachment boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 and a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 are formed diagonally protruding from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at the position. ing. The four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are surrounded by copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. 1530rf4 and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively. Further, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil that is the surface thereof is not exposed.

When attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and then attach the cover flat plate. The liquid crystal output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the metal The bearing surfaces of the pan head screws made by the manufacturer are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shafts (screw parts) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw. It becomes electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. Thereby, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan-head screw, the cover body 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and become the same ground (GND).

Note that when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 are inserted into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the side end surfaces (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is arranged between the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side and the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be done.

In this manner, when various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, which has the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, 2.3 mm). is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the right side, lower right side, lower left side, and left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation expels the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades, thereby controlling the surroundings. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there are gaps between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501. Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected to each other. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the air is taken in from the above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501). A gap formed between the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, a gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover body 1501, and a gap formed between the liquid crystal output board 1530. It will be taken in through the gap formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the cover body 1501 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510) , the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. is smaller than the sum of Therefore, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are This allows the flow velocity of air flowing into each to be kept low.

Note that when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. When taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 However, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation sucks in air through the blades and causes the air to flow into the surrounding area. Air may be sent out toward the control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color.When viewed from the front, the upper side of the base flat plate 1502a has a horizontally long rectangular shape; Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are provided on the left side, lower side, and right side to protrude toward the front (back side of the Pachinko machine 1), thereby forming a box shape with an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, when the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are placed inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. When they fit together, they become inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is positioned at a predetermined interval along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (in other words, the peripheral control board Each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and 1510y, the peripheral control board 1510 may warp due to the force when inserting the connectors for connecting the wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the protruding terminals. Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent electrical wiring patterns formed on the control board 1510 from being broken.

When viewing the base body 1502 from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca that protrudes outward is formed on the left base side wall 1502c near the opening side of the base body 1502. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab at positions corresponding to plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving parts 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag parts 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped groove shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are inserted into The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. By turning it around, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked onto the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. It is now possible to engage.

Further, a base side sealing part 1502ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to a cover side sealing part 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right side base wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes the peripheral control section 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the effect display control section 1512 (functions of various ROMs). ), and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces, etc. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects performed while waiting for players), and various schedule data that regulate the progress of effects. A control ROM 1510b (including the functions of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above), which stores in advance the peripheral data stored in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c is composed of SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 to which various control information (peripheral data) stored in ROM 1520a can be transferred and stored; A volume adjustment switch 1510d, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power generation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. We are prepared. The backup power source 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). Communication, etc.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side are used. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed via a corresponding connector among connector CN3, connector CN6, and connector CN7).

In this embodiment, SPI communication and I2C communication are used to connect the electric drive sources (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and the door frame. Drive data is transmitted to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive sources (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicate via connector CN3) provided on the game board 5 side. Emission data is sent to the LED control IC for the multiple LEDs provided for the camera (communicating via the connector CN7) and the multiple LEDs provided for the door frame 3 (communicating via the connector CN3). or receive signals from various sensors installed on the game board 5 side (communicating via connector CN6) as detection data, or receive signals from various sensors installed on the door frame 3 side (communicating via connector CN3). (communicating)) as detected data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various types of parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotational state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), Signals from various sensors that confirm the operation and origin position of controlled objects (not shown) are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 are input from GPIO (via connector CN6). A signal is output from the GPIO to the LED ML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned to SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in accordance with the SATA standard, achieving a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , and can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memories) that can achieve high data communication speeds. Various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the board. We are prepared. The front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector SCN3 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector SCN4 for connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of multiple types of video signals. The multiple types of video signal formats include, for example, the RGB format, the LVDS format, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) format, the eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) format, and the clockless format. , four systems (total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, a peripheral control board that adopts eDP method instead of MIPI method, has one system of RGB system, two systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system of eDP system. 1510 can also be created.

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, there is further an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , is equipped with. The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (+37 VDC, +12 VDC, and +5 VDC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LED ML1 is for checking (monitoring) the state in which +5V DC is being supplied, and remains lit in the state in which +5V DC is being supplied. The LED ML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V DC is being supplied, and remains lit in the state in which +12V DC is being supplied. The LED ML3 is for checking (monitoring) the state in which +37V DC is being supplied, and remains lit in the state in which +37V DC is being supplied. The LED ML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and remains lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be brightly illuminated by lighting LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of peripheral control board 1510.

Special connectors SCN1, SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The provided special connector SCN4 has a floating mechanism, and is similar to connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and connectors CN8 to CN8 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The structure is completely different from CN10. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the socket and the plug fit together. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which there is no vertical movement at all when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from the front when they are fitted together.

Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and special connectors SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are plugs. (Mounting surface) Each of the special connectors SCN4 provided in 1530x is a socket.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and plug are connected. are mated. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mated, the socket is aligned in the front-rear direction (pachinko The structure includes a floating mechanism that can absorb errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the machine 1. Note that the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. , even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) moves as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 will touch the flat cover plate of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the special connector SCN3.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are connected. Fit together. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mated, the socket is aligned in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1 The structure includes a floating mechanism that can absorb errors in the front-rear direction that occur when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range toward the back and front of the device. Note that the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 will be the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (top surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the special connector SCN4.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (functions of the image ROM of the above-mentioned effect display control section 1512, etc.). ). Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided for the door frame 3 and game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, turning off, etc.) of various LEDs etc. installed in multiple units, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., and door frame 3 and game board 5. Examples include drive data for driving and controlling the various movable performance bodies provided.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, which is cheaper than a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize high-speed transfer speed through communication compliant with the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to reduce costs, reduce power consumption, and read out various stored data at high transfer speeds. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are By employing a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected to the control board 1510 by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise that invades the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 connects the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its surface (mounting surface) 1520x to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( Mounting surface) After inserting and pushing in the plug of special connector SCN1 provided for 1510x, it is necessary to fix peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 together with peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. By employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a can be absorbed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket, and to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Furthermore, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension and distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing errors in the longitudinal direction that occur when connecting the plug and socket, damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be improved. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs, from the connector CN10, the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, which is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, to the performance display device 1600 to inform the progress of the game performance (for example, to the player). An image that conveys that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image that tells that a jackpot gaming state will not occur, a state that a jackpot gaming state will not occur but a jackpot gaming state will occur compared to the normal state. This is an important board for drawing images such as images that convey that the player is approaching) and demonstrations (demonstration performances that are performed while the player is waiting). Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. After inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By employing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with a floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb errors in the front and rear direction that occur when fixing and pushing the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be reliably formed.

Furthermore, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension and distance tolerance. be. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing errors in the front-back direction that occur during the process, damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and socket can be prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be reliably established. can be formed.

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected to each other. Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is possible to arrange the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 against the front surface of the peripheral control board 1510. Compared to the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be made smaller. This can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging electrical drive sources and drive mechanisms that can be used, as well as various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[How to assemble peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ( Mounting surface) 1520x and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are directed toward the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are directed toward the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. . As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Next, insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and screw them into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form the cover flat plate 1501a on the back side. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Next, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are filled with metal (not shown). The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting pan head screws made by the manufacturer and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this way, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a last.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining its movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restraining in the vertical and horizontal directions. No protrusion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the peripheral control board 1510 is restrained in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional errors caused by such restraints are eliminated. When fixing to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a have dimensional dimensions, respectively. This is because the company is able to absorb this amount with ample margin.

Next, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are Insert into the guide receiving parts 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement part 1502ca of the base body 1502, and insert the L-shaped hook parts 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook parts 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502, respectively.

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. When the base body 1502 is wrapped around the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501, a metal (not shown) A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted therein is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base-side sealing part 1502ea, thereby forming a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea, which is attached to the base side sealing portion 1502ea, is in a sealed state.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact), and the base body 1502 The front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the wafer are brought into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 become electrically connected. In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the structure is such that the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which is made up of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505. is enhanced.

Next, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are inserted through the wiring draw-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw (not shown) with a seat (a screw having a shape in which a pan head head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the drawer and attachment holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the rear, respectively.

Next, a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the production display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wire pull-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is assembled by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, respectively. 1503 is fixed in the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wires are covered by the wire cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 Insert the engaging portion 1502ca side (formed at is inserted and screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix it.

In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed in the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side of the cover body 1501.) At the same time, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the side (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when looking at the cover body 1501 from the back), the surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed. (Mounting surface) 1520x Insert and push the socket of special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into the plug of special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (mounting surface) 1530x Insert and push the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided for the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided for When the body 1501 is viewed from the back, the cover body 1501 can be fixed to the left side of the cover body 1501). Even in the installation procedure of these various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 that are equipped with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front and back direction that occurs when pushing in is absorbed, and the plug and socket can be easily connected. It is possible to prevent damage to the plurality of connection terminals formed on the board, and to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to connect the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are multiple types of game boards installed in pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board installed in the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a that stores data for each game board's game specifications. By storing peripheral data corresponding to the board, the board is dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that is dependent on the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and is not dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and thus becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused. Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that stores peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board, and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the inter-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are multiple types of video signal formats input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as the RGB format, the LVDS format, the MIPI format, the eDP format, and the clockless format. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of systems are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. In other words, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced in accordance with the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In this embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Since this is adopted, a liquid crystal output board 1530 compatible with the video signal format (LVDS format) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards), and the noise is removed. (Hereinafter, this may be referred to as "the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin"). As a result, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate with a dedicated filter for removing such noise, which can contribute to cost reduction of various types of substrates.

Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, these plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501, and also have the function of being able to confirm whether or not there is any tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the status of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually confirmed, that is, from multiple angles. In order to be able to check the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the outside, they are arranged in a dispersed manner so that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, since the LED ML1 disposed near the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state when +5V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, it is originally supplied with +5V DC. Although it has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of the control ROM 1510b, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pins. It is now possible to contribute to

Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A larger area than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Furthermore, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, In other words, the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the IC pins are arranged in a large area so that the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins can be seen from multiple angles. As a result, modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. This can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Furthermore, the LED ML3 placed near the special connector SCN1 is designed to remain lit when +37V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, special connector SCN1 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and special connector SCN1 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It also has the function of a spotlight to brightly illuminate the board-to-board connector formed by the special connector SCN3, so that the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510 ) The special connector SCN3 provided in the 1520x can contribute to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector.

Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) has a larger area. They are distributed and arranged so that This allows modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. This can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Furthermore, since the LED ML4 placed near the special connector SCN2 is designed to remain lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, it is originally used to check (monitor) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Although it has a function, it brightly illuminates the inter-board connector between the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By having the function as a spotlight, the inter-board connector can be visually recognized by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is now possible to contribute to improving sexual performance.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with product numbers and The SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 is designed so that the model and the status of the IC pins of the SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 can be visually confirmed, that is, the surface and the status of the IC pin of the SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed from multiple angles. They are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to form an area larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thereby, modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, since the LED ML2 placed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while being supplied with DC +12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of DC +12V being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM1510c (that is, SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2) This contributes to improved visibility of the state of the IC pin and the state of the IC pin.

Also, among the plurality of blades that make up the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN, the gaps between the blades (specifically, the gaps between the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN) The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

In this embodiment, LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface-mount type, wide with an angle of about 120 degrees, and of a type with weak directivity. It is also suitable for use as lighting. When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various boards (cover A space having a distance of a predetermined height (in this embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a (the surface facing the back surface side of the flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By lighting up LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted from areas on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, which are opposite to the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the surrounding area thereof. Reflecting portions (not shown) are respectively formed to reflect the light and direct it again to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective parts (not shown) may be made of a brightly colored paint such as white, or may be a glossy colored paint, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

In addition, near the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5, so the ball path formed by these When the game balls rub against each other, they become charged and generate electrostatic discharge, which becomes a source of noise. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. Furthermore, since the pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row facing away from the island equipment of the game hall, other pachinko machines may become a noise source and may be affected by the noise. As described above, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to the influence of noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data A configuration is adopted in which the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). This prevents noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Noise can be removed by flowing it to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

[Partial foil removed from solid ground]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is grounded (GND) except for areas where wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns are formed. , is formed as a so-called solid ground (board ground) (also referred to as "solid ground"), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is also formed as a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. It is formed as a so-called solid ground (substrate ground) (also referred to as a "solid ground"), in which the area other than the area where various land patterns are formed is grounded (GND). The solid ground (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are the same as those on the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes (holes (copper By being electrically connected through the plated holes), they are connected to the same ground (GND).

Further, as described above, the base flat plate 1502a is spaced at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front, and does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and 1510 protrudes from the back side (solder side) 1510y, so it does not interfere with the protruding terminals). Vertically elongated wire breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are respectively formed to prevent the control board 1510 from warping and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from breaking.

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are in a state of being sealed, as described above, , the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and become inscribed (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502 The front surface of ~1502aa3 comes into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the side with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is passed to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards), and the noise is removed. It is now possible to do so.

Incidentally, the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A solid ground was formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this abutting part, and the solid ground was covered with a resist. One is to form a solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board 1510 and cover it with a resist, and the other is to form a solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this abutting part and cover it with a resist. As a result of testing, it was found that the noise resistance was higher when the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in this contact area was covered with resist without forming a solid ground. .

When electromagnetic noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 comes into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When electromagnetic noise enters through such unexpected routes, electronic components that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns that are electrically connected to these electronic components are formed on the base body 1502 to prevent disconnection. If the front surfaces of portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to the portion that abuts the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510, malfunction or damage may occur.

Moreover, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with which of the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Since it is not possible to predict whether or not the breakage will occur, it is difficult to place electronic components susceptible to electromagnetic noise and wiring patterns electrically connected to the electronic components away from a particular disconnection prevention rib.

In addition, when a high voltage is applied to the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, electromagnetic wave noise passes through the resist and solidifies. When the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the solid gland are in contact with each other through a resist, high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the base body 1502 may be applied to the contact portion to infiltrate the brand. It is considered that this causes an unnecessary loop wiring to be formed in which electromagnetic wave noise enters the Betaglan from the disconnection prevention rib portion.

Here, the solid surface of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The shape of the ground will be explained with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the shape of the solid ground at the part where the front side of the disconnection prevention rib portion formed on the base body comes into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. (a) is a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the peripheral control board, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

As described above, the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction, and are similar to the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board. As shown in FIG. 220(a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings are such that a vertically long rectangular foil-cutting area 1510ya having a horizontal distance dgw and a vertical distance dgh is located on the copper foil surface. They are formed at 1510 yp. That is, on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board, there is formed an area where part of the beta gran is foiled (removed).

These foil-cut areas 1510ya have a distance dg0 between the left side and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 that is greater than or equal to the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. each formed. The length of the distance dg0 between the left side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the left side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In this embodiment, the distance dg0 between the left side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the left side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is approximately 3.0 times longer than the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

In addition, the distance dg1 between the right side and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya is greater than or equal to the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. They are each formed separately. The length of the distance dg1 between the right side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the right side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In this embodiment, the distance dg1 between the right side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the right side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is approximately 3.0 times to 3.0 times the length of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

In addition, the distance dg2 between the upper side and the upper side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya is greater than or equal to the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. They are each formed separately. The length of the distance dg2 between the upper side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the upper side of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0 of the horizontal distance (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In this embodiment, the distance dg2 between the upper side of these foil-cutting areas 1510ya and the upper side of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is approximately twice to 3.0 times the length of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The length is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

That is, by forming the foil-cut area 1510ya on the copper foil surface 1510yp where the solid ground is formed on the back surface (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil-cut area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the solid ground. It is an insulated area.

When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil removal area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. Note that a solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board that corresponds to the foil removal area 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, and the foil removal area 1510ya and No foil-cutting areas of the same shape are formed at all.

As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and there are When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and connected to the same ground (GND). GND). Therefore, in this embodiment, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transmitted from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 to the peripheral control via the foil cutout area 1510ya. A "noise-proof route" is formed that cannot enter the solid ground on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board, and the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is Noise can be removed by forming a "noise route" that flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards) via the metal pan-head screw.

[Reuse of peripheral control board]
As mentioned above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board, and is also a board that is not dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused.

As described above, the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular copper foil for soldering (so-called " On the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape are formed, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed toward the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the peripheral control board 1510 is The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to secure the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion (the seat surface of the head) of the metal pan head screw.

In this way, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw (seat surface of the head). By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removal using metal pan-head screws. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 may rub against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 and peel off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 may The screw may rub against the seat surface of the screw pan (the seat surface of the head) and be peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, or the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 or the peripheral control board 1510. If the copper foil on the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, it will oxidize and deteriorate electrical connectivity, making it difficult to reuse the peripheral control board 1510. The problem is that it is difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have Each piece is soldered to prevent the copper foil from being exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. It electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. Covered to allow connection. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from coming off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. The copper foil portions of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are not exposed and oxidation can be prevented, and the copper foil portions on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 It is possible to improve the electrical connectivity when the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and to prevent soldering. Electrical connection occurs when the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw (seat surface of the head) due to the viscosity of properties can be improved.

As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 can be transmitted to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards) through the metal pan-head screws. ), the above-mentioned "noise escape route" is reliably formed, so that the noise countermeasure effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be stably maintained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are as described above. , each is soldered so that the copper foil on its surface is not exposed. As mentioned above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, so they are soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the solder thickness is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised part of the solder), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw may There is a problem in that the contact area decreases and electrical connectivity deteriorates. Furthermore, as described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Because of the contact, if the thickness of soldering to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised part of the solder), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 The contact area between the side lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a decreases, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. Note that if the thickness of soldering to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a part where the solder bulges), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 will be damaged. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, insert metal pan head screws into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This will cause distortion of the control board 1510, and may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, which is in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw, is attached to the peripheral control board 1510. Place a metal mask on the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula), and apply it from the hole formed in the metal mask. By putting the back side (solder side) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness of the soldering to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the thickness of the metal mask. I can do it. Also, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is For foil, a metal mask is formed by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula). By applying the solder paste through the holes and placing the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste with heat, the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be adjusted. The thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modified example]
In the present embodiment described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have The copper foils were soldered to each other so that they would not be exposed, but the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface of the pan head (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the side lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4, and comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) The copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the 1510x side may be covered with a resist solution. The surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with copper foil when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. Ru. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and are inserted toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screw. It can be a state. Also, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is By applying and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same, so that the through hole 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw into ~1510r4 and screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rf4, place a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula). The solder paste was applied through a hole formed in a metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 was placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. ) may be poured into a solder bath for soldering. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to deteriorate, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is made so that the soldering does not bulge in some parts. It needs to be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is poured into the solder bath.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape is formed on the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as the "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (a shape in which a single circle in which the resist has a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221(b), and a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes each having a predetermined length are arranged in an annular manner at the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, and as shown in FIG. 221(c), the resist has a vertical line having a predetermined width. and horizontal lines (a shape in which the resist has a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction spaced apart by a predetermined distance), or a shape in which the resist has a predetermined width ), as shown in FIG. 221(d), the resist may have a shape in which lines having a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and are upward-sloping to the right. A shape in which a plurality of lines are formed in a diagonal shape (the resist may be in a shape in which a plurality of lines having a predetermined width are formed in a diagonal shape with a predetermined distance apart and downward to the right), a small circular shape (not shown), Examples include aggregated shapes.

In this way, a portion of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the peripheral Since it is designed to be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil that is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist liquid and has a predetermined shape. Any material may be used as long as it can suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The coating can be made even so that it does not bulge in some areas. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

Note that the predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The process may also be performed on the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is coated so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. By covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, metal pan head screws were used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a "chrysanthemum washer").

In the embodiment described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the cover 1501 made of conductive resin, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with each other. ~1510rb4 and the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw are in contact with each other, so that the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan-head screw. However, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The cover 1501 made of resin may be replaced with a cover 1501' made of metal. In this case, the base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of conductive resin, or may be made of metal instead of conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae may be made of conductive resin or metal.

Note that an amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes a large amount of power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier board and the heat of the amplifier board itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air through the metal board box. Furthermore, when the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air through the metal partial case.

The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box consisting of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or is attached to a metal partial case. Noise may enter the case. Therefore, like the peripheral control board 1510 described above (that is, so that the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected), a plurality of When the land and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case come into contact with each other, , the multiple lands formed on the back side (solder side) of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other, so that the metal The metal cover body or metal partial case of the metal board box is electrically connected to the plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case is electrically connected to the plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board. The partial case and the ground (GND) of the amplifier board can be electrically connected. In addition, the heat of the amplifier board itself is transmitted from the ground (GND) of the amplifier board to the metal cover body of the metal board box or the metal partial case through the metal pan-head screw, and the heat is efficiently radiated to the outside air. You can also do that.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan-head screws. Therefore, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 were electrically connected, but it can also be used in a two-story board (so-called "turtle child board"). can. For example, multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the parent board, multiple lands on the child board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the child board, and multiple lands on the parent board are electrically connected to the ground (GND) on the parent board. By screwing the and multiple lands of the child board at both ends of a metal support (spacer), electricity can be transmitted through the multiple lands of the parent board, multiple lands of the child board, and the metal support (spacer). can be connected to each other. This allows the ground (GND) of the parent board and the ground (GND) of the child board to be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

In addition, in the embodiment described above, the peripheral control board 1510 was housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin, but the main control board box 1320 housing the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are also housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin. When the payout control board box 632 is configured to be made of conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 must be transparent according to regulations, and therefore, those made of conductive resin are used. Although it is not possible to do so, the board box that accommodates the power supply board and the various relay board boxes that accommodate various relay boards are configured to be made of conductive resin, and the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box. They may be fixed using the same method. In this way, the same noise suppression effect as the above-described peripheral control board box 1505 made of conductive resin can be achieved for the board box that accommodates the power supply board and the various relay board boxes that accommodate the various relay boards. can.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 3, near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500. An inter-board connector consisting of the special connector SCN1 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and an inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to a ball tank. By arranging it closer to the center of the tank rail 552, it can be placed away from the tank rail 553. As described above, the tank rail 553 allows the metal powder of the game ball B to be transferred to the outside through the plurality of notches 553aa formed on its lower side (the lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front). By arranging the above-mentioned inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the game ball B at the above-mentioned inter-board connector. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the inter-board connector is formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The board-to-board connector with the special connector SCN4 is a peripheral control unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). 1500 is installed, as shown in Figure 217, the area above the board-to-board connector can be reduced by arranging it vertically long, so dust, some kind of metallic powder, etc. The adhesion area can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned board-to-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area above the board-to-board connector increases, so the area to which dust, some kind of metallic powder, etc. can adhere increases significantly. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left and right direction, as shown in FIG. 217, and the top surface area of each connector is However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac is Even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted by the protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust, some kind of metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. There is. In this way, in order to prevent dust, some kind of metallic powder, etc. from adhering to each electrical terminal, the direction in which the inter-board connectors are arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, as described above, are determined. is selected.

In the embodiment described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with plugs for special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a socket for special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a socket for special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the embodiment described above, various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is equipped with a special connector (or a socket), and the peripheral control board 1510 is also equipped with a special connector (or a socket). A special connector) can be provided. Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a plurality of types of video signal formats are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, so the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a special connector that becomes a plug (or a special connector that becomes a socket), and correspondingly, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is equipped with a special connector that becomes a socket (or a special connector that becomes a plug). special connectors).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one or in combination in any of the holes 1501e, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B) does not fall toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. This makes it possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling onto various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. Note that the reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 Foreign matter generated by game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of game ball B) falls and enters into the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring increases.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the top side of the cover 1501e. In this way, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, lower side, and right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. Note that the reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B) falls into the peripheral control board box 1505 and enters the peripheral control board box 1505, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to fall onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that electrical troubles will occur due to foreign objects.

[Other noise countermeasures using peripheral control unit]
In addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 that constitute the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above. At the same time, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) with metal pan-head screws. Since it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards and become the same ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is removed from the various boards. (hereinafter referred to as "noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which noise countermeasures are taken by the peripheral control board box that can remove noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 (hereinafter referred to as "the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments") 222 to 241. In addition, in FIGS. 222 to 241, various members are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, and The explanation will be omitted except for a part of the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments.

In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is entirely made of conductive polycarbonate containing carbon. In contrast to the structure made of resin, in the noise countermeasure structure using the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of transparent material. In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, a metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box. In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, a metal shield plate is not housed in the peripheral control board box.

222 to 226 are configurations of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 etc. is covered with a metal shield plate. A part of the shield plate is configured to come into contact with the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member, and FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 223 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 225 is an exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. 226 is a cross-sectional view along the -X line, and FIG. 226 is a view taken along arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment.

227 to 230 are configurations of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in which the noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are further strengthened. 1510 etc., where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further in contact with each other via a conductive elastic member, and FIG. 228 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 229 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 229 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment. FIG. 230 is a perspective view of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board for making good contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board and the conductive elastic member. 2 is a schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board (example (a) of bare side), and a schematic diagram of the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board (example of bare side (b)). )), Schematic diagram of the copper foil side of the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board (example (c) where multiple through holes with lands are arranged), Schematic diagram of the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board (example (c)) of the copper foil side of the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board This is an example (d)) in which a plurality of through holes are arranged.

231 to 235 are configurations of noise countermeasures using a peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 etc. is covered with a first shield plate made of metal, The back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board 1510, etc. is covered with a second metal shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510, etc. is sandwiched between the first metal shield plate and the second metal shield plate, A part of the first metal shield plate and a part of the second metal shield plate are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, etc., and FIG. 232 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 232 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control board etc. according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 234 is a diagram showing a mounting procedure, and FIG. 234 is a diagram showing a land formed around a through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, and a diagram showing a foil removal area. FIG. 235 is a diagram (a) showing a land formed around a through hole on the back side (solder side) of a peripheral control board, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, and a land and screw fixing designation symbol. (b) showing the foil-cutting area, and (c) showing the foil-cutting area. In addition, in FIG. 227, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing, and in FIG. 228, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and The conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate that can be contacted is shown by a two-dot chain line for ease of viewing the drawing.

236 to 241 are configurations of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in which the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 etc. are covered with a metal shield plate. The area where a part of the ground (GND) of a specific board is exposed among the various boards housed in the peripheral control board box and the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 are not covered at all, but are connected through a conductive elastic member. FIG. 236 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is a back exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 238 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment. (a) shows a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and a part of the base body constituting the peripheral control unit is shown in the same figure so that the state in which the conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238, in which the conductive elastic member is made of metal of the production display device 1600. FIG. 240 is a diagram (c) showing a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit, with a part of the peripheral control unit cut out to show the state in which it is deformed when pressed against the back cover, and FIG. 240 shows the tip of the contact probe. FIG. 241 is an enlarged front view of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening through which the peripheral control unit can be inserted and brought into contact; FIG. It is a diagram showing a method for taking out the ground (GND) on the back side (solder side) of a specific board to make good contact with the elastic member, and is a schematic diagram of the copper foil side of the back side (solder side) of the specific board ( Schematic diagram of the back side (solder side) of a specific board (exposed example (b)), Schematic diagram of the copper foil side of the back side (solder side) of a specific board (through hole with land) An example (c) in which a plurality of through holes are arranged, and a schematic diagram of the back side (solder surface) of a specific board (an example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged).

[Comparison between the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of polycarbonate coated with carbon. The cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) has various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various boards and are configured to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the box shape is open at the rear and longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction. a cover body 1501 molded from transparent non-conductive resin, and peripheral controls that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. a substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering the liquid crystal output board 1530, and a conductive elastic material that is attached (glued) to a predetermined location of the metal shield plate 1540. It includes a member 1545 and a base body 1502 molded from a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to respective predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, so that a metal shield is installed. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by sandwiching the plate 1540 between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502. ing.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is installed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged to match the boss hole 1501ag1, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Place it like this. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, It is arranged to match the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and is also formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged to match the attachment boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, among the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other, respectively. At the same time, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. Also, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the seating surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, respectively. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, it connects to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, it is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange it to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, among the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, land 1520rf4 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 are respectively in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are brought into contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, respectively. Furthermore, the shafts (screw parts) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, it is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

When attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is installed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the liquid crystal display The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In this state, among the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the land 1530rf1 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501am2, respectively. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are brought into contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (screw parts) of the metal pan-head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, it connects to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1520. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, it is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540. When the cover body 1501 is clamped and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various boards, there is a predetermined distance between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. A gap (2.3 mm) is formed.

As described above, the sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the ventilation hole formed in the plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1501az and the above-mentioned gap (the gap formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, and the gap formed between the area in the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two gaps formed in the cover body 1501. It is smaller than the sum of the area of the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 and the gap formed between the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10. Therefore, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. , air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied to a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the flat cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and to a metal shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in air through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a low level.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a has an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d on the right side when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d bent and formed on a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later. A vertically long rectangular through-hole 1502ab is formed, the shape being one size larger than the back surface shape of 1540d.

Note that on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 has a shape that is equal to the outer shape of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil-cutting regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a large circumferential shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil-cutting regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-cut areas NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal areas NR1, NR2, and NR3. A "noise-free route" is formed.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
A metal shield plate 1540 that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. An L-shape is bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the second embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a) at the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side of the shield plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). Attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed, respectively.

In addition, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in this second embodiment In this case, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are respectively formed that are bent backward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 and is bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the second embodiment, 21 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from its upper end to its lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a has cutouts formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and approximately at positions corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is When the cover body 1501 is clamped and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer circumference of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and The wiring drawer recess 1501ab is inserted into the opening 1540aa of the shield plate 1540a without contacting it.

The metal shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane, and The back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 are parallel to the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively. In the second embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 are protruded from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. This is one of the pair of attachment boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed in the same manner. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are protruded from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530. This is one of the pair of attachment boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. These are two of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 that are formed to protrude.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is attached to the cover body 1501. When the board is held and fixed by various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height (this section In the second embodiment, a space having a width of 14.8 mm) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is placed within this space, thereby forming two spaces.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the surface of each type of substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of a shield flat plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later. (12 mm in the second embodiment) (see FIG. 225), and the surface of a shield flat plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, and the back surface of a cover flat plate 1501a. A second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment).

The first space 1505a includes various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power generation circuit (not shown), resistor (not shown), etc. capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN3, etc.), and the liquid crystal output board 1530. While various electronic components and the like (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN4, etc.) are accommodated in the second space 1505b, no various electronic components and the like are accommodated in the second space 1505b. This makes it possible to take countermeasures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) by housing various electronic components etc. that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and also to accommodate them in the second space 1505b. This is because heat emitted from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not housing various electronic components and the like that generate heat. . In other words, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) and also functions as a heat sink.

In the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In other words, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. There is. When the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, this rotation causes air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation hole 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, the cover The first space 1505a (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can also be air-cooled.

[Conductive elastic member of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1545a, It is composed of a rectangular foam 1545b as a core material covered by a conductive covering part 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive covering part 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester woven fabric on which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed, and a polyimide film on which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. An example of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive coating 1545a to another member.

Note that the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular cross-sectional shape (sliced shape) with a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm (see FIG. 226), and the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226). has a rectangular shape (see Figure 226) with a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Method for assembling peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
A method of assembling peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed on the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the hole 1501ah2, and the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. do.

Next, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into attachment boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Next, insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and screw them into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form the cover flat plate 1501a on the back side. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It is in a state where it is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Next, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so they can be left as they are or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is covered. It is in a state where it is held and fixed between the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a last.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining its movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restraining in the vertical and horizontal directions. No protrusion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the peripheral control board 1510 is restrained in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional errors caused by such restraints are eliminated. When fixing to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a have dimensional dimensions, respectively. It is now possible to absorb it with ample margin.

Next, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are Insert into the guide receiving parts 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement part 1502ca of the base body 1502, and insert the L-shaped hook parts 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking parts 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 into the base body. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 to cover the base body 1502 as it is. When placed over the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. A metal one-way screw is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base-side sealing part 1502ea, thereby forming a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea, which is attached to the base side sealing portion 1502ea, is in a sealed state.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact). In addition, in the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (projection length) extending to the back surface is 2.7 mm.

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the structure is such that the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which is made up of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505. is enhanced.

Next, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are inserted through the wiring draw-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw (not shown) with a seat (a screw having a shape in which a pan head head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the drawer and attachment holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the rear, respectively.

Next, a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the production display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wire pull-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is assembled by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, respectively. 1503 is fixed in the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wires are covered by the wire cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Next, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 1545 adhesive tape 1545c is attached (adhered).

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. When viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted into the mounting groove forming the mounting part formed in the peripheral control unit 1500, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting hole that forms the mounting part formed on the back side of the.

The effect display device 1600 includes a picture frame-like metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The picture frame-like metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, etc. The entire rear surface of this frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. It is housed in a transparent non-conductive synthetic resin box (the above-mentioned protective cover body 1601). Further, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side thereof, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of a peripheral control board 1510 etc. housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the same ground (GND) is established. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment part formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the production display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back side of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box and contacts the metal back cover of the performance display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member 1545, as shown in FIG. They are in contact with each other. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), which causes dimensional tolerances and assembly errors to occur. Dimensional deviations can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 Since it can be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line such as 1510 and set to the same ground (GND), the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, The peripheral control unit 1500 (various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530) can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

A cover body 1501, a base body 1502, and a wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are formed by molding a transparent non-conductive resin, and there is no space inside the cover body 1501. , peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are attached to predetermined positions together with metal shield plate 1540, so that shield plate 1540 is held between cover body 1501 and various boards. Once fixed, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of each board. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has invaded from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503, and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has invaded the production display device 1600, is transmitted to the board through the metal shield plate 1540. A "route through which noise escapes" can be formed by guiding the noise to the ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removing it. As a result, there is no need to provide each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), which reduces the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. We will explain the arrangement of and. As described above, these plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501, and also have the function of being able to confirm the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the 1510, the status of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number) , pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the status of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are checked from multiple angles. The control ROM 1510b is arranged in a dispersed manner so that the control ROM 1510b has a larger area than the control ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, modifications to the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . Furthermore, since the LED ML1 disposed near the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state when +5V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, it is originally supplied with +5V DC. Although it has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of the IC pins, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pins. This can contribute to improving the visibility of the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and improving the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. In addition, the area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and is further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the status of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and the contents silk-printed on each are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area that can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. This establishes the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence relationship, modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, modification of the inter-board connector by special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, This can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LED ML3 placed near the special connector SCN1 is designed to remain lit when +35V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has the function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is used as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the following functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the IC pin status is improved, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is improved. The special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 contribute to improved visibility of the inter-board connectors. .

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape consisting of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), 1530 and are arranged separately so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. This establishes the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the content silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Furthermore, since the LED ML4 placed near the special connector SCN2 is designed to remain lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, it is originally used to check (monitor) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Although the peripheral control board 1510 has a special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4, it has a spotlight function that brightly illuminates the board-to-board connector. The visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connectors is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , it is now possible to contribute to

In addition, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are connected to the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as well as the product numbers and models of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In other words, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 is designed so that the status of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c2 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually confirmed. In order to be able to check the status of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 from multiple angles, they are distributed over areas larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is located. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, modifications to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. I can do it. Furthermore, since the LED ML2 placed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while being supplied with DC +12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of DC +12V being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM1510c (that is, SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2) This can contribute to improved visibility of the IC pin status, improved visibility of the IC pin status, and improved visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Also, among the plurality of blades that make up the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN, the gaps between the blades (specifically, the gaps between the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN) The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. Thereby, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

Note that LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity, so they are not suitable for use as lighting. is also suitable. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is attached to the cover body 1501. When the board is held and fixed by various substrates, as described above, there is a predetermined height between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by placing the metal shield plate 1540 within this space. . As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of each type of substrate (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components included in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The interior of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as illumination.

In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has gloss, and the area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 faces each of the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. And for the surrounding area, it also has a function as a reflection part that can reflect the light emitted by LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective parts may be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

In addition, near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. Since the units 560 are arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path constituted by these units and are charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. Moreover, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in rows facing away from the island equipment of the game hall. As described above, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to the influence of noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as non-conductive resin, as described above, and the inside of the cover body 1501 is In the space, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is connected to the cover body 1501 and the various boards. A configuration was adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates by being clamped and fixed. In addition, in the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, as described above. By electrically connecting with the ground (GND) line of the two terminals, a configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is established.

As a result, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 can be removed by being guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540.

In the second embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with a metal shield plate 1540. When the shield plate 1540 is clamped and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates by being A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by placing a metal shield plate 1540 within this space. These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of each type of substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. A distance dimension of a second predetermined height is established between the first space 1505a (12 mm in the second embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (1.6 mm in the second embodiment). In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. This is a case where a large performance unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism that can operate the movable performance body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, and the depth direction is If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components etc. that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and also to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by accommodating various electronic components etc. that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components and the like that generate heat inside the first space 1505a, heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540. I can do it.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal shield plate 1540, so that the metal shield plate 1540 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the peripheral control board 1510. Visually check the product number and model (or management number), the status of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.). In addition, the product numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the status of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the IC direction, part number, pin number, etc.), and the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. The status of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually confirmed. However, it is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and peripheral data ROM 1520a. Note that a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that in addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the surroundings thereof can also be viewed. . In addition, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 It is also possible to configure a configuration in which a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 that corresponds to a larger area (the shape formed by the special connector SCN3 and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board). In order to be able to check the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530, the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) is shown. A rectangular opening may be provided at a position of the metal shield plate 1540 that corresponds to a large area.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be transferred to the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By expelling air to the outside, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in air through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a low level. However, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, air is sucked in through the blades by this rotation and air is sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. Good too. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Note that also in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 comes into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x, place a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and use a squeegee (like a spatula) to The solder paste is applied from the hole formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to deteriorate, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is made so that the soldering does not bulge in some parts. It needs to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape is formed on the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as the "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 221(a), the resist is A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may have a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221(b), As shown in FIG. 221(c), a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in an annular manner at the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape consisting of lines in the direction and lines in the horizontal direction (a shape in which the resist has a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction spaced apart by a predetermined distance), or a shape in which the resist ), as shown in FIG. 221(d), the resist may have a shape in which lines having a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance. (The resist may have a shape in which a plurality of lines with a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and a plurality of diagonal lines with a downward slope to the right are formed.) Although not shown in the drawings, Examples include shapes that are a collection of small circular shapes.

In this way, a portion of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the peripheral Since it is designed to be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil that is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist liquid and has a predetermined shape. Any material may be used as long as it can suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The coating can be made even so that it does not bulge in some areas. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

Note that the predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The process may also be performed on the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is coated so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. By covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

Further, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, metal pan head screws were used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrysanthemum washer").

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and a metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded into this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of polycarbonate coated with carbon. The cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) has various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each is fixed with a screw, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various boards and become the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment further strengthens the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, and the peripheral control board 1510 etc. A configuration is adopted in which a region where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the display device 1600 is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are further brought into contact with each other via a conductive elastic member.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and is shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 228, each side of the shield plate 1540a is moved rearward as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intruding from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Side walls 1540ae are formed by bending (toward the front surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). These side walls 1540ae have no ventilation holes 1540az formed therein. Furthermore, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, these side walls 1540ae have their end surfaces at a predetermined distance from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since they are separated by a distance (for example, 3.9 mm), they do not come into contact with each other and do not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various boards. Note that the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above. Detailed explanation will be omitted.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and includes a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output. A conductive substrate that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 is placed at a position corresponding to the area ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530 is exposed. A plurality of insertion openings 1502az each having a square shape (having a vertical distance and a horizontal distance of approximately 8 mm) into which the elastic members 1507 are inserted are formed in the base flat plate 1502a. Although these insertion ports 1502az are formed to protrude to the front and rear sides of the base flat plate 1502a, the front end surface of each insertion port 1502az is connected to peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. is formed so as not to come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of various boards at a predetermined distance (for example, 1.5 mm), and the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is made of a metal shield plate. It is formed so as to be placed on the same plane as the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of 1540.

There are seven regions ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these regions, and peripheral data ROMs are inserted into the base plate 1502a. There is one region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520 is exposed, and one insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at a position corresponding to this region ROP, and one insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base plate 1502a at a position corresponding to this region ROP. There are two regions ROP where part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these regions ROP. In other words, a total of 11 regions ROP are provided on the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. A total of 11 insertion openings 1502az are provided in the base flat plate 1502a at positions corresponding to each region ROP. Furthermore, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed on the back side of the flat base plate 1502a near each insertion opening 1502az. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the manufacturer's operator inserts the conductive elastic member 1507 for substrate. As described above, since the base body 1502 is molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the surface side of the flat base plate 1502a. Note that the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

[Conductive elastic member for substrate of peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 that can electrically connect the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board box A region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various boards such as the control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed is connected to the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. It has a conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate that can be electrically connected. This conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1507a and a rectangular foam 1507b as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1507a. , is composed of. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include a polyester woven fabric on which a copper and nickel metal coating is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1507b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used.

The conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction (when the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is viewed from the right side in FIG. 228, the width is about 11 mm, the depth is about 8 mm, and the height is about 8 mm). have. When the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502 described above, it is guided by the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, and the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate has cushioning properties (elasticity). By pressing the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, the conductive elastic member 1507 for substrate becomes difficult to come off from the insertion opening 1502az.

[Partial exposed area of ground of various boards of peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
Here, a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed will be described. The area ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has the same structure. The region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. The region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is as shown in FIGS. 230(a) and (b). The peripheral control board 1510 is designed so that a part of the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1510y of the board 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front face of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board. A resist liquid is applied onto the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

Note that it is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole as the region ROP without exposing the solid ground. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230(c) and 230(d), the area ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes to be connected are lined up in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction, and the copper foil is formed so that a land is formed around each through hole on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. A resist liquid can be applied onto the foil surface 1510yp to form a backside (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

[Method for assembling peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
Since the method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method for assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board described above will be described. Before installing the peripheral control unit 1500, the manufacturer's worker installs the peripheral control unit 1500 on the mounting part formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. Then, the conductive elastic members 1507 for boards with serial numbers 1 to 11 are inserted and pushed into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502 from the longitudinal direction in order, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Work is performed to bring a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into contact with the exposed region ROP.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-like metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The picture frame-like metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, etc. The entire rear surface of this frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. Housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to its rear side, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 etc. housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. By connecting them to the same ground (GND), they are connected to the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment part formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the production display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back side of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box and contacts the metal back cover of the performance display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member 1545, as shown in FIG. They are in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), which causes dimensional tolerances and assembly errors to occur. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 It can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to be the same ground (GND).

In addition, conductive conductors for each board, one side of which is in contact with the area ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed. The other end of the elastic member 1507 passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the corresponding transparent synthetic resin box, and comes into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIG. They are in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby reducing the dimensional tolerance. The conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate can absorb dimensional deviations due to errors or assembly errors. As a result, the state in which an external force is applied in the longitudinal direction of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board is maintained, and as a repulsive force, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board is applied to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 , and a contact surface with the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed, and a contact surface with the metal back cover of the production display device 1600, The ground (solder side) on the back side (solder side) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to each other to maintain good electrical connection. GND) and the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 are electrically connected securely, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 etc. housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. They can be connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, in addition to the metal shield plate 1540, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has invaded from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has invaded the production display device 1600 can be further prevented. Through the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board, a "noise escape route" can be formed in which the noise is guided to the board ground (the ground (GND) of various boards) and removed. As a result, there is no need to provide each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), which reduces the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). can contribute.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered to each other so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed, but the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered to each other so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed. The copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the mounting surface (boss) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the peripheral control board 1510 may be coated with a resist solution to cover it. The surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with copper foil when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. Ru. Even with this configuration, metal pan head screws are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and are inserted toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 are electrically connected via the metal pan screw. It can be a state. Also, the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is By applying and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thickness of the resist layer in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 becomes the same, so that the through hole 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw into ~1510r4 and screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be transferred to the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By expelling air to the outside, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in air through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a low level. However, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, air is sucked in through the blades by this rotation and air is sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. Good too. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Also, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 comes into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x, place a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and use a squeegee (like a spatula) to The solder paste is applied from the hole formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to deteriorate, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is made so that the soldering does not bulge in some parts. It needs to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape is formed on the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as the "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 221(a), the resist is A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may have a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221(b), As shown in FIG. 221(c), a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in an annular manner at the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape consisting of lines in the direction and lines in the horizontal direction (a shape in which the resist has a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction spaced apart by a predetermined distance), or a shape in which the resist ), as shown in FIG. 221(d), the resist may have a shape in which lines having a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance. (The resist may have a shape in which a plurality of lines with a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and a plurality of diagonal lines with a downward slope to the right are formed.) Although not shown in the drawings, Examples include shapes that are a collection of small circular shapes.

In this way, a portion of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the peripheral Since it is designed to be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil that is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist liquid and has a predetermined shape. Any material may be used as long as it can suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The coating can be made even so that it does not bulge in some areas. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

Note that the predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The process may also be performed on the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is coated so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. By covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

Further, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, metal pan head screws were used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrysanthemum washer").

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and a metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded into this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of polycarbonate coated with carbon. The cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) has various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various boards and are configured to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the box shape is open at the rear and longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction. a cover body 1501 molded from transparent non-conductive resin, and peripheral controls that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. a substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield placed on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades various substrates such as the liquid crystal output board 1530. A plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined location on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board. A metal board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 disposed on the backside (solder side) side of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades various boards such as 1530; The base body 1502 is molded from a transparent non-conductive resin and covers the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are placed between a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface. A peripheral control board box formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is attached to a predetermined position of the cover body 1501 while being sandwiched between the (solder side) side shield plate 1555 and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. 1505 (sealed substrate box) is configured.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
First, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. are formed as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively, and on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The difference is that mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. In addition, in the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 even when the power is cut off is provided from a holder (not shown). A cylindrical pop-out prevention part 1501aw is formed to protrude from the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power supply 1510e so that the power supply to the real-time clock IC (not shown) is not interrupted by the protrusion. This is different from the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. Note that the end face of the pop-out prevention portion 1501aw is spaced apart from the backup power source 1510e by a predetermined distance (for example, 1 mm).

Further, when attaching various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral Metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted into the through holes (excluding those into which the mounting boss protrusions are inserted) of various boards such as the data ROM board 1520 and the LCD output board 1530, and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board are mounted on the back side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. When attaching various boards such as 1530, etc., insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) directly into a specific through hole among the multiple through holes in various boards such as peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530. After performing the first fixing method of inserting and fixing by screwing into the mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, various types of peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected to each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 so as to cover the backside (solder side) side of the board. , and the corresponding through holes other than the specific through holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output board 1530, and cover the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502 to close the base flat plate 1502a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes of the mounting bosses formed on the front side, and each through hole is formed on the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal board back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555. The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other boards are screwed into mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a through other through holes, respectively. 2 Perform the fixing method.

In the first fixing method, when attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a is formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later. are arranged so as to align with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later. The hole 1540c2a is arranged to match the attachment boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. It is arranged to match the hole 1540c1a, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole is formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later. 1540b1a is arranged to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

In the first fixing method, when attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a is formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, which will be described later. are arranged so as to align with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Peripheral control is then performed by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into specific through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 are brought into contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, respectively.

Then, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 as specific through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, among the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, and 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, respectively. becomes. In addition, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal The board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that they are connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby connecting the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the output board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Become.

Then, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into specific through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 among the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and mounting is performed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing into the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, among the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, and 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 are brought into contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, respectively. Become. Furthermore, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the metal shield The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, thereby connecting the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. .

After this first fixing method, in a second fixing method, a metal plate (described later) is attached so as to cover the back side (solder side) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the board are connected to various peripheral control boards 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. Corresponding through holes other than the specific through hole in the board include through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 in peripheral control board 1510, through hole 1520r2 in peripheral data ROM board 1520, and through hole 1530r3 in liquid crystal output board 1530. The opening of the cover body 1501 is closed with the base body 1502, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, which will be described later, formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. are inserted into the through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board, and the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and Corresponding through holes other than specific through holes in various boards such as the liquid crystal output board 1530 include through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 in the peripheral control board 1510, through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, They are fixed by passing through the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

By sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the peripheral control board 1510 can be attached to the back side of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. It is in a state where it is held between the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the board. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 , are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the L-shaped attachment of the metallic board back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being connected to the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the back surface (solder surface) of the metal board is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that they are made of metal. The shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the board is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 must be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, it is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder side) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 to connect the power supply. It will be connected to the ground (GND) line of the board 630.

Furthermore, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, a land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a shield on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal board are formed. The surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the plate 1555 is brought into contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the backside (solder side) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, the metallic board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground (GND), the metal board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Become.

Furthermore, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, a land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and a shield plate on the back surface (solder surface) side of the metal board are formed. The surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of 1555 comes into contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back side (solder side) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, the metallic board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is connected to the same ground (GND). Therefore, the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, thereby connecting the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal board back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. .

Furthermore, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the conductive elastic member 1545 that is attached (bonded) to a predetermined location of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is The shield plate 1555 is pressed against and in contact with the front side of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the manufactured board. As a result, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-mentioned predetermined distance is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

As described above, the sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the ventilation hole formed in the plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1501az and the above-mentioned gap (the gap formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, and the gap formed between the area in the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two gaps formed in the cover body 1501. It is smaller than the sum of the area of the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 and the gap formed between the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10. Therefore, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. , a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a metal substrate surface (mounted When air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a low level. It is now possible to do so.

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
On the front side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, through holes 1502ag1 are provided at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Attachment bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 are formed, respectively. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of these mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6, thereby fixing the base 1502 to the cover body 1501.

Note that on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 has a shape that is equal to the outer shape of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil-cutting regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a large circumferential shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil-cutting regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-cut areas NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal areas NR1, NR2, and NR3. A "noise-free route" is formed.

[Metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
Disposed on the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has dimensions of a predetermined distance between the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are respectively bent backward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in the fourth embodiment.

In addition, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is provided at a predetermined distance between the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are respectively formed that are bent backward by a dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a), and a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) and bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the fourth embodiment, 9.9 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a) above the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. A connecting piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from its upper end to its lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and approximately at positions corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring pull-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, together with the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer circumference of the shield flat plate 1540a, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring drawer recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a fit into the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a. It is inserted without contact.

The metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 are parallel to the surface of the shield plate 1540a, respectively. In the fourth embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively.

In a state where various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. is a space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of each type of substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By arranging the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 in this space, two spaces are formed.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of each type of substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of a shield flat plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later. (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) and a second predetermined height distance between the front surface of a shield flat plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of a cover flat plate 1501a, which will be described later. and a second space having a dimension (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment).

The first space includes various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e, power generation circuit (not shown), resistor (not shown), capacitor (not shown)). , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN3, etc.), and provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. While various electronic components, etc. (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN4, etc.) are housed in the second space, no various electronic components are housed in the second space. This makes it possible to take countermeasures against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) by housing various electronic components etc. that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and also to accommodate them in the second space 1505b. By not housing various electronic components etc. that generate heat, the heat emitted from the various electronic components etc. in the first space is transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is to convey information efficiently. In other words, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) and also functions as a heat sink.

The shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has holes of the same shape at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A ventilation hole 1540az is formed. In other words, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the horizontal direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. There is. When the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the rotation causes air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, the cover The first space 1505a (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can also be air-cooled.

In addition, the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is affected by noise that enters from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. As a countermeasure against (electromagnetic wave noise), each side of the shield flat plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). Side walls 1540ae are formed respectively. These side walls 1540ae have no ventilation holes 1540az formed therein. Furthermore, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, these side walls 1540ae have their end surfaces at a predetermined distance from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since they are separated by a distance (for example, 3.9 mm), they do not come into contact with each other and do not come into contact with various electronic components mounted on various boards.

In addition, the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a circular shape through which a protrusion prevention part 1501aw having a cylindrical shape protrudes from the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502. An opening 1540aw is formed.

[Metal board backside (solder side) side shield plate of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
Disposed on the back side (solder side) of various boards that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that invades various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The metal board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is located at the upper left side, lower left side, upper right side, and lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are respectively formed on the sides thereof and bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the fourth embodiment, 2.3 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1555a). These L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are bent so that their respective surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

Cutout portions 1555aa1 to 1555aaa3 are formed in the shield flat plate 1555a so as not to interfere with disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502, respectively. Further, on the shield flat plate 1555a, among the attachment bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, a mounting boss 1502af4 that comes into contact with the back side (solder side) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, A cutout portion 1555aa5 is formed so as not to interfere with the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the mounting boss 1502af5 that is in contact with the mounting boss 1502af5. In addition, on the front side of the shield flat plate 1555a, electrical connections other than the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided so as to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) is attached (adhered) to prevent short circuits caused by physical connections. In addition, the side wall 1540ae and the ventilation hole 1540az, which are formed on the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, are not formed in the shield flat plate 1555a at all.

Note that, in the lower area of the notch 1555aa5 on the front surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, a wire is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is the area where the conductive elastic member 1545 (attached) is pressed and contacted.

In a state where a metal substrate back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the back side (solder side) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. By disposing a metal board back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 near the back side (solder side) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, Various substrates absorb heat emitted from various electronic components and the like, and the absorbed heat is taken away from the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, so that various substrates can be efficiently cooled. In other words, the metallic board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 has a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic wave noise) and also functions as a heat sink.

Note that when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back side of the metal substrate back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is in contact with the front surface of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502.

[Conductive elastic member of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), It is composed of a conductive coating part 1545a, a rectangular foam 1545b as a core material covered by the conductive coating part 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating part 1545a. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and one in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. As the foam 1545b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. An example of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive coating 1545a to another member.

The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular cross-sectional shape (cut into rings) with a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , has a rectangular shape with a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Method for assembling peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
A method for assembling peripheral control unit 1500 will be explained. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is attached. The through hole 1540c1a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side is arranged. The through hole 1540c2a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 The L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is arranged so that the through hole 1540b1a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the cover plate 1501a is arranged so as to match the attachment boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Next, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, 1520r4 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1, 1520r4 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 are arranged to match the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 233, by the first fixing method, a metal pan (not shown) is directly attached to the back side (solder side) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is fixed by inserting screws and screwing them into various mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. With this first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark for the through hole to be fixed and a serial number near the screw fixing instruction mark are silk-printed on the back side (solder side) of various boards. This serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which a manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in metal pan head screws (not shown) to fix them. Note that the color in which the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number are silk-printed near the screw fixing instruction mark differs depending on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. ) The area indicating the position (including specification of orientation) of various electronic components mounted on the screen and the part number are printed in the same color as the silk screen (in this case, white).

Specifically, in the through hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH1, which surrounds the land 1520rb1 on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a solid white line, is silk-printed. A white serial number 1 is printed as a silk screen print in the vicinity of this screw fixing instruction mark DTH1 surrounded by a rectangular white line. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH2, which surrounds the land 1520rb4 on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a thick white solid line, is printed as a silk print. , a white serial number 2 is printed as a silkscreen in the vicinity of this screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 surrounded by a rectangular white line.

Further, in the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3, which surrounds the land 1530rb1 on the back side (solder side) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a thick white solid line, is printed as a silk screen. A white serial number 3 is printed as a silk screen print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3, surrounded by a rectangular white line. Further, in the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4, which surrounds the land 1530rb4 on the back side (solder side) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 with a thick white solid line, is printed as a silk screen. A white serial number 4 is printed as a silk screen print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4, surrounded by a rectangular white line.

Further, in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH5, which surrounds the land 1510rb2 on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board 1510 with a thick white solid line, is printed as a silk screen. A white serial number 5 is printed as a silk screen print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5, surrounded by a rectangular white line. Further, in the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH6, which surrounds the land 1510rb3 on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board 1510 with a thick white solid line, is silk-printed. A white serial number 6 is printed as a silk screen print in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6, surrounded by a rectangular white line.

The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are formed in the peripheral control board 1510 by the manufacturer's worker inserting and screwing in and fixing metal pan-head screws (not shown) in order from serial number 1 to serial number 4. There may be a slight deviation from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even in such a case, by fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions can be restrained, and the dimensional errors caused by such restraints can be avoided. When fixing the control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are Since this can be absorbed by the dimensional margin provided in each, the position of the peripheral control board 1510 is finely adjusted to fit the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 to the cover flat plate 1501a. It can be fitted to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side.

The manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in metal pan-head screws (not shown) in sequence to serial numbers 1 and 2, thereby forming them on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 are in contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, respectively. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metallic substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As a result, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

The manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in metal pan-head screws (not shown) in sequence from serial number 3 to serial number 4, and then screws and fixes the screws, which are formed on the back side (solder side) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 are brought into contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, respectively. Furthermore, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the metal shield The plate 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

A manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in metal pan-head screws (not shown) in sequence from serial number 5 to serial number 6, and then fixes them, thereby forming them on the back (solder side) side of the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 are brought into contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws, respectively.

In addition, when the manufacturer's worker inserts and screws in the metal pan-head screws (not shown) in order from serial number 1 to serial number 6, the manufacturer's worker inserts serial number 1 to serial number 6 in order. If you randomly insert metal pan head screws (not shown) and screw them in and fix them without inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) and screwing them in and fixing them, then one of serial numbers 1 to 6 will be inserted. A mistake may occur where the user forgets to insert a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the item indicated by the serial number and screw it in to secure it. If such a mistake occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) will be shipped with incomplete fixation using metal pan-head screws (not shown).

In addition, through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of peripheral data ROM board 1520, through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of liquid crystal output board 1530, and through holes 1510r2 of peripheral control board 1510, which are indicated by serial numbers 1 to 6 by the manufacturer's operator, Any one or more of the through holes other than 1510r3, that is, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510. Even if the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501 after fixing by accidentally inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) directly into the through hole and screwing it into the mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the metal pan head screw that was incorrectly inserted and the metal pan head screw that was incorrectly inserted. Since it always interferes with the head of the pan head screw, a gap is formed between the base body 1502 and the cover body 1501, so that the cover body 1501 cannot be completely covered by the base body 1502.

In this way, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a last.

Next, L of the metallic board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is installed so as to cover the backside (solder side) side of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The through-holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the letter-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 are arranged to match the through-holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the L-shaped shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is mounted. The through hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is arranged to match the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is formed. The through hole 1555b4a is arranged to match the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. In this way, the metal board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is arranged to cover the backside (solder side) sides of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, since no holes such as ventilation holes are formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board, the above-mentioned screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to 1 are not formed. The serial number 6 is also covered by the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board, making it difficult to see. In other words, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from various angles of the assembled peripheral control board box 1505 molded from transparent non-conductive resin. However, the fact that the various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by the first fixing method described above is different from the back side (solder side) of the metal board. The shield plate 1555 makes it invisible, and the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. Attach (adhere) adhesive tape 1545c.

Next, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and at the same time Insert the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. Then, with the base body 1502 wrapped around the opening side of the cover body 1501, and with the base body 1502 placed over the cover body 1501, a mounting boss formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a is fixed by the second fixing method. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed in to fix them.

Specifically, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag1 of the mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front side of the base flat plate 1502a, and the L-shape of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is inserted. The through-hole 1555b1a formed in the shaped mounting piece 1555b1, the through-hole 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through-hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. It is fixed by passing through and screwing into the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag2 of the mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is inserted. The cover passes through the through hole 1555b2a formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through hole 1510r4 formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. It is fixed by screwing into the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the L-shaped shield plate 1555 on the metal board back surface (solder surface) side. It will be in a state where it is sandwiched between the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 , are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the L-shaped attachment of the metallic board back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. In other words, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being connected, the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal board The back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag3 of the mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) of the metal board is inserted. It is fixed by passing through the through hole 1555b3a formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1555b3 and the through hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively, and screwing into the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 comes into contact with the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board. The state will be as follows. In other words, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back side (solder side) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As a result, the metallic board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

In addition, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag4 of the mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front side of the base flat plate 1502a, and is inserted through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing into the formed mounting boss hole 1501ah4. In addition, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and passed through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing into the mounting boss hole 1501am3 provided.

In addition, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag6 of the mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) of the metal board is inserted. It is fixed by passing through the through hole 1555b4a formed in the liquid crystal output board 1555b4 and the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively, and screwing into the mounting boss hole 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back side (solder side) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 comes into contact with the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board. state. In other words, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back side (solder side) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, the metallic board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

By this second fixing method, when metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a and fixed, the metal board surface The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (bonded) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against and in contact with the front surface side of the metal substrate back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555. As a result, the metallic board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metallic board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), which causes dimensional tolerances and assembly errors to occur. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface (solder surface) sandwich various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected reliably, and the periphery is sandwiched between the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Since it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of various boards such as the control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530, and can be set to the same ground (GND), noise (electromagnetic waves) The peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, various boards such as liquid crystal output board 1530) and the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520) , and the periphery of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

Next, a metal one-way screw into which a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted is inserted into the cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501, and the screw is inserted toward the base-side sealing part 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. Screw it. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward in the base-side sealing part 1502ea, thereby forming a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing part 1501ea formed on the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea, which is attached to the base side sealing portion 1502ea, is in a sealed state.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are inscribed (surface contact).

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the structure is such that the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which is made up of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505. is enhanced.

Next, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN are inserted through the wiring draw-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw (not shown) with a seat (a screw having a shape in which a pan head head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the drawer and attachment holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the rear, respectively.

Next, a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the production display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wire pull-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the attachment recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is assembled by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 toward the rear, respectively. 1503 is fixed in the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wires are covered by the wire cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. When viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted into the mounting groove forming the mounting portion formed in the peripheral control unit 1500, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing into the mounting hole that forms the mounting part formed on the back side of the.

A cover body 1501, a base body 1502, and a wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are formed by molding a transparent non-conductive resin, and there is no space inside the cover body 1501. , a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are made of metal, such as a board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and a metal board back surface (solder side) side shield plate 1555. When the board is clamped and attached, the metal shield plate 1540 on the front side of the board (mounting side) and the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board are connected to the ground (GND) of each board. It is configured. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is removed from the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder surface). Through the side shield plate 1555, it can be guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. As a result, there is no need to provide each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), which reduces the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). can contribute.

Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are explained. The arrangement of the circular ventilation hole 1540az will be described. As described above, these plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501, and also have the function of being able to confirm the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are connected to the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the control board 1510b, the status of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) In other words, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the status of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. They are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to occupy an area larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, modifications to the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . Furthermore, since the LED ML1 disposed near the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state when +5V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, it is originally supplied with +5V DC. Although it has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of the IC pins, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pins. This can contribute to improving the visibility of the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and improving the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. In addition, the area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and is further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the status of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and the contents silk-printed on each are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area that can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. This establishes the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence relationship, modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, modification of the inter-board connector by special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, This can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. In addition, the LED ML3 placed near the special connector SCN1 is designed to remain lit when +35V DC is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has the function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is used as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the following functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the IC pin status is improved, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is improved. The special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 contribute to improved visibility of the inter-board connectors. .

In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape consisting of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), 1530 and are arranged separately so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. This establishes the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the content silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Furthermore, since the LED ML4 placed near the special connector SCN2 is designed to remain lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, it is originally used to check (monitor) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Although the peripheral control board 1510 has a special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4, it has a spotlight function that brightly illuminates the board-to-board connector. The visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connectors is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , it is now possible to contribute to

In addition, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are connected to the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as well as the product numbers and models of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In other words, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 is designed so that the status of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c2 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually confirmed. In order to be able to check the status of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 from multiple angles, they are distributed over areas larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is located. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, modifications to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. I can do it. Furthermore, since the LED ML2 placed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while being supplied with DC +12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of DC +12V being supplied, it also has the function of a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM1510c (that is, SDRAM1510c1, 1510c2) This can contribute to improved visibility of the IC pin status, improved visibility of the IC pin status, and improved visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Also, among the plurality of blades that make up the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN, the gaps between the blades (specifically, the gaps between the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN) The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. Thereby, it is possible to check whether or not an unauthorized board is placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

Note that LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted type with a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity, so they are not suitable for use as lighting. is also suitable. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are protected by a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface (solder side) side shield plate 1555. In the state where it is held and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, there is a predetermined height between the front surface of each type of substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space is formed with a distance dimension of A space is formed. As described above, these two spaces are between the surface of each type of board (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and the cover flat plate. and a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) from the back surface of the spacer 1501a. As described above, the first space accommodates various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components included in the liquid crystal output board 1530. There is. The interior of the first space thus formed can be brightly illuminated by lighting LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as illumination.

In addition, since the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has gloss, and the metal substrate faces each of the light emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and its surroundings is provided as a reflecting part that can reflect the light emitted by LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. It also has the function of These reflective parts may be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

In addition, near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. Since the units 560 are arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path constituted by these units and are charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. Moreover, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in rows facing away from the island equipment of the game hall. As described above, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to the influence of noise (electromagnetic wave noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as non-conductive resin, as described above, and the inside of the cover body 1501 is In the space, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted on a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface (solder surface) side. By being attached while being sandwiched by the shield plate 1555, the metal board front side (mounting side) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 can be connected to the ground (GND) of various boards. We adopted a configuration in which it is electrically connected to the In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, as described above. By electrically connecting with the ground (GND) line of the two terminals, a configuration is adopted in which the same ground (GND) is established.

As a result, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that enters from the body 1502 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral data through the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back surface (solder side) side shield plate 1555. It can be removed by leading to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that enters from the body 1502 is transmitted to the board ground (the ground of various boards) through a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface (solder side) side shield plate 1555. (GND)) and can be removed.

In the fourth embodiment, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, and a metal board In a state where the back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is sandwiched and attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface of each board (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the cover flat plate 1501a are A space having a predetermined height distance (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed between the rear surface and the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 in this space. are arranged, two spaces are formed, and these two spaces are the surface of each board (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A first space having a distance of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A second space having a distance of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) was formed between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. This is a case where a large performance unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism that can operate the movable performance body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, and the depth direction is If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components that are susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise) in the first space. By not housing various electronic components etc. that generate heat, the heat emitted from various electronic components etc. in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space via the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. I can communicate well.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, so that the control provided for the peripheral control board 1510 is The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the status of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) ), and also the product numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the status of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silkscreen printed on the peripheral control board 1510. The contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually checked, and the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be visually checked. ), the status of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) However, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and peripheral data ROM 1520a. It can also be configured as follows. Note that a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 so that the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and peripheral data ROM 1520a as well as the surroundings thereof can be viewed. It can also be configured as follows. In addition, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 It is also possible to configure a configuration in which a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the shield plate 1540 on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side that corresponds to a larger area (the shape formed by the special connector SCN3 and the special connector SCN3). In order to check the connection state of the inter-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) It is also possible to configure a structure in which a rectangular opening is provided at a position of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 that corresponds to a larger area (shape constituted by).

[Around the through holes of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
Here, the surroundings of the through holes formed in various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 234(a), on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, there is a metal board surface (mounting surface) side. Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 are formed that come into contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 and are electrically connected. In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(a), a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a metal board surface (mounting surface) ) A land 1520rf4 that comes into contact with the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 and is electrically connected is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 234(a), on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, there is a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. A land 1530rf1 that comes into contact with the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 and is electrically connected is formed.

These lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, and 1530rf1 are in contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and are electrically connected. Therefore, a "noise escape route" is formed through which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). Note that the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are connected to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. , 1501am1 are in contact with each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2, 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2, and lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1, this intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards).

Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through-holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, there are formed holes on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Foil-cutting regions NR5 and NR6 are formed having a circular shape that is one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are formed in the foil-cutting region NR5. , NR6, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 234(b), a cover flat plate 1501a is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Foil removal areas NR7, NR8, NR9 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 formed on the back side are formed, and the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 can be mounted. The surfaces (boss surfaces) abut on the foil removal regions NR7, NR8, and NR9, respectively. In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, there is a Foil removal areas NR10, NR11, NR12 are formed which have a circular shape that is one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4, and the mounting surface of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 (boss surface) abuts on foil removal regions NR10, NR11, and NR12, respectively.

These foil-cutting areas NR5 to NR12 prevent noise (electromagnetic wave noise) from entering from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is isolated from the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be able to do so. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to the peripheral control via the foil removal areas NR5 to NR12. A "noise-proof route" is formed that prevents noise from entering the solid grounds of various boards such as the board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. Lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 are formed which are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Further, as shown in FIG. 235(a), on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r2 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, there is a metal board back surface (solder surface). ) A land 1520rb2 is formed that comes into contact with the surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the side shield plate 1555 and is electrically connected. In addition, as shown in FIG. 235(a), on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, there is a metal substrate on the back surface (solder surface) side. A land 1530rb3 that comes into contact with the surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 and is electrically connected is formed.

These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3 are electrically connected by contacting the surfaces of L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board. Therefore, a "noise escape route" is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board flows to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards). Note that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are attached to mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, and The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1502af6 come into contact with each other. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 of the shield plate 1555 on the back surface (solder surface) of the metal board. Even if it invades 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4 and lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, 1530rb3, this invaded noise (electromagnetic wave noise) flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

Further, as shown in FIG. 235(b), metal pan-head screws (not shown) are attached to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6, which are surrounded by solid white thick lines, are printed as silk printing around the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 235(b), a metal pane (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which screws are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, which are surrounded by thick white solid lines, are printed as silk prints around the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 235(b), metal pan-head screws (not shown) are attached to the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4, which are surrounded by thick white solid lines, are printed as silk prints around the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4, respectively.

Note that even if metal pan-head screws (not shown) are directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the areas indicated by the thick white solid lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 are Although the areas near the through-holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 overlap the heads of metal pan head screws (not shown), the outer peripheral portions of the solid white thick line areas of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 overlap with the metal pan head screws (not shown). By being larger than the outline of the screw head, the solid white thick lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 make the heads of the metal pan head screws (not shown) stand out. This helps prevent mistakes such as forgetting to insert, screw in, and secure pan head screws (inadvertent mistakes). Furthermore, even if metal pan-head screws (not shown) are directly inserted and screwed into the through-holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the areas indicated by the thick white solid lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 are Although the areas near the through-holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 overlap with the heads of metal pan-head screws (not shown), the outer periphery of the solid white thick line areas of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1, DTH2 overlaps with the heads of metal pan-head screws (not shown). By being larger than the outline of the head of the pan head screw, the solid white thick line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 makes the head of the metal pan head screw (not shown) stand out. This helps prevent mistakes such as forgetting to insert and screw in pan-head screws (inadvertent mistakes). Furthermore, even if metal pan-head screws (not shown) are directly inserted and screwed into the through-holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, the areas indicated by the thick white solid lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 are Although the areas close to the through-holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 overlap the heads of metal pan head screws (not shown), the outer peripheral portions of the solid white thick line areas of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 overlap with the metal pan head screws (not shown). By being larger than the outline of the screw head, the solid white thick lines of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 make the heads of the metal pan head screws (not shown) stand out. This helps prevent mistakes such as forgetting to insert, screw in, and secure pan head screws (inadvertent mistakes).

Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as shown in FIG. A foil-cutting region NR13 having a circular shape one size larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af4 abuts the foil-cutting region NR13. Further, on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, as shown in FIG. A foil-cutting region NR14 having a circular shape one size larger than the outer circle of the attachment boss 1502af5 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af5 abuts the foil-cutting region NR14, respectively.

These foil-cut areas NR13 and NR14 are connected to the ground (GND) of various boards so that noise (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented from entering from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a. isolated from. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is transmitted from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a to the solid ground of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the foil removal areas NR13 and NR14. A ``noise-proof route'' is created that cannot be penetrated.

In this way, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the through holes 1520r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530, in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by thick white solid lines are each printed as silk printing. The holes 1530r1, 1530r4 and the through holes 1510r2, 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes into which metal pan head screws (not shown) are directly inserted and screwed to be fixed to the cover body 1501. On the other hand, through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, on which no screw fixing instruction marks are silk-printed, through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by screwing, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the attachment bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1501 and the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 This is a through hole that is clamped and fastened together with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of 1501a.

That is, metal pan-head screws are directly inserted into a plurality of through holes provided in various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and are screwed into the cover body 1501. If there is a mixture of through-holes and through-holes that are clamped and fastened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the manufacturer's operator will install a silk screen on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1, DTH2 printed as prints, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3, DTH4 printed as silk printing on the liquid crystal output board 1530, screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 printed as silk printing on the peripheral control board 1510. By visually observing the through-holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are through-holes into which metal pan-head screws are directly inserted and screwed to be fixed to the cover body 1501, the through-holes 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, 1520r4, through-holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and a through-hole 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is a through-hole that is sandwiched and tightened together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. 1510r4, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Screwing work into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are the through holes to be fixed, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (screwing and fixing) work) can be carried out smoothly. Therefore, it can contribute to improving work efficiency.

In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal board back surface (solder side) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to each other. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is connected to the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield. Either or both of the plate 1540 and the metal board backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 are in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, it is electrically floating relative to various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Electrically floating metal may function as an antenna that picks up noise and become a noise source. It is necessary to avoid making them for various types of substrates. Therefore, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are illustrated. In addition to the case where the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 are electrically connected by wiring not shown, there is a case where the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 are electrically connected by wiring not shown. As described above, this metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 has the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to provide rigidity, and also functions as a body frame metal ground. It is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 described above via a ground wire. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via an island equipment ground wire (not shown).

In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When placed so as to cover the back side (solder side) of various boards such as Because they were not formed at all, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to 6 were also covered by the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board, making them difficult to see. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the substrate. In this way, an operator at the manufacturer can check whether various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method through the plurality of holes (in other words, It is possible to visually check whether the metal pan-head screws are inserted and fixed in the parts where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are located.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, there are Screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 are printed as silk prints, surrounding the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 into which the unillustrated metal pan-head screws shown in 235(b) are directly inserted and screwed, respectively, with solid white thick lines, Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, there are metal pan-head screws (not shown) shown in FIG. 235(b). Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4, which are directly inserted and screwed, are surrounded by thick white solid lines, respectively, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 are printed as silkscreens, and through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 are formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530. On the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 around the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4, the metallic pan-head screws (not shown) shown in FIG. Although the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 surrounded by solid lines are printed as silkscreens, they may be replaced by thick white dashed lines (one-dot chain line, two-dot chain line).

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the colors in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are silk-printed are the colors in which the peripheral control board 1510, Areas indicating the positions (including specification of orientation) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and their part numbers are silk-printed. The area is the same color as the printed color (white), but indicates the position (including specification of orientation) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various boards and their part numbers. may be a different color from the color printed as silk printing. For example, if the area indicating the position (including orientation specification) of various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various circuit boards and the part number are printed in white as silk printing, The screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 may be silk-printed in a color different from white, such as yellow or black.

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other, and the land 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the metal board surface are in contact with each other. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the land 1530rf1 formed on the surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the metal board The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2. The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are not brought into contact with the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is installed. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It is configured so that it does not come into contact with the land 1520rf4, but contacts the surface of the metal substrate back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555, and the L-shaped metal board surface (mounting side) side shield plate 1540 The back surface of the mounting piece 1540b2 is not brought into contact with the land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, but is brought into contact with the surface of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It may be configured as follows. This means that the metal shield plate 1540 on the front side of the board (mounting side) and the shield plate 1555 on the back side (solder side) of the metal board are electrically connected by the conductive elastic member 1545 described above. This is because it can be done.

In this case, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metallic board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and It is configured so as not to come into contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition, the metal board back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 has penetrations formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal board front side (mounting side) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a, respectively. The base body 1502 also corresponds to through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Through holes are formed at the respective positions. Further, on the back side of the cover body 1501, through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, which are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2, respectively, of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, Screw holes are formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 come into contact with the surface of the metal board back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. (that is, a state in which good electrical connectivity can be achieved between the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555). Screw holes are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into through holes formed in the base body 1502 so as to be sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. They can be fixed by screwing them towards each other.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be transferred to the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By expelling air outward, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. Air flows into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. However, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, air is sucked in through the blades and directed toward the peripheral control IC 1510a. Alternatively, the air may be sent out. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Furthermore, in the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 234 ( For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (something like a spatula), apply it through the hole formed in the metal mask, and heat the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in a reflow oven. Although the solder paste is dried in the step, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal board surface (mounting surface) side are in contact with each other. In order to prevent the contact area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to deteriorate, the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with solder so that it does not bulge in some parts. It is necessary to make it uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape is formed on the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It will be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as the "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may have a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221(b), As shown in FIG. 221(c), a rectangular shape having a predetermined width and a predetermined length is formed in a chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in an annular manner at the centers of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape consisting of lines in the direction and lines in the horizontal direction (a shape in which the resist has a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction spaced apart by a predetermined distance), or a shape in which the resist ), as shown in FIG. 221(d), the resist may have a shape in which lines having a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance. (The resist may have a shape in which a plurality of lines with a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and a plurality of diagonal lines with a downward slope to the right are formed.) Although not shown in the drawings, Examples include shapes that are a collection of small circular shapes.

In this way, a portion of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the peripheral Since it is designed to be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil that is the surface of lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist liquid and has a predetermined shape. Any material may be used as long as it can suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder tank and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The coating can be made uniform so that it does not bulge in some areas. The solder soldered in this manner is applied to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

Note that the predetermined figure formed by such a resist may also be formed on the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. By covering the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

Further, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, metal pan head screws were used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrysanthemum washer").

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and a metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded into this transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of noise countermeasures using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is all made of polycarbonate coated with carbon. The cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) has various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When they are fixed with screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various boards and are configured to be the same ground (GND).

On the other hand, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the box shape is open at the rear and longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction. a cover body 1501 molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, and peripheral controls that can control the progress of the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. a substrate 1510 , a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 , a liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 , and a transparent non-conductive substrate that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 The base body 1502 is molded from a synthetic resin. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 at predetermined positions, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

In the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the fact that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of transparent non-conductive resin, T Liquid crystal output substrate 1530 in that conductive elastic member 1508 for substrate is fitted into the back side of base flat plate 1502a such that a part of conductive elastic member 1508 for substrate having a shape of a letter protrudes from the back side of base body 1502. The area ROP where a part of the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed is provided on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the ground (GND) test pad of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is Noise countermeasures by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that the cover body 1501 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side, and the cover body 1501 is formed with an opening for contacting the probe with the test pad. The configuration is different from that of .

[Base body of peripheral control board box according to fifth embodiment]
The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is mostly similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and has a shape similar to that of the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. A vertically elongated rectangular conductive elastic member 1508 that can come into contact with the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 is fitted into a position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. The rib portion 1502aw is formed to protrude forward from the surface of the base flat plate 1502a at a predetermined distance (distance that does not contact the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion opening 1502az having a square shape (8 mm on a side) is formed in the base flat plate 1502a at the center of the rectangular rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. The T-shaped conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and has a T-shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1508a and the conductive coating portion 1508a. The foam body 1508b has a foam body 1508b. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include those in which a copper and nickel metal coating is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed on a polyimide film. As the foam 1508b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. The T-shaped foam body 15808b has a base portion that has a vertically long rectangular parallelepiped shape (when the T-shaped foam body 15808b is viewed from the right side in FIG. 237, the width is about 3.5 mm and the depth is about 3.5 mm). When viewing the T-shaped foam body 15808b in FIG. 237 from the right side, the protrusion has a rectangular parallelepiped shape extending rearward from the center of the T-shape (approximately 16 mm in width and approximately 16 mm in height) in width. 5 mm, depth is approximately 8 mm, and height is approximately 8 mm). The conductive elastic member 1508 for the board is assembled after the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled (the method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the method for assembling the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and the explanation thereof will be omitted). ), the base part having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction of the T-shaped conductive elastic member 1508 for substrate is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and is fitted by pushing in the vertical direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238(a), a rectangular parallelepiped protrusion long in the front-rear direction of the T-shaped conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate protrudes rearward from the back side of the base flat plate 1502a. The state will be as follows.

When the base portion of the T-shaped conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction is inserted and pushed into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, as shown in FIG. ), the front surface of the base part, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape long in the vertical direction, is pressed against and comes into contact with the area ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed. state, and the upper back side and lower back side of the base which has the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction (in other words, the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction to which the protruding part that has the shape of a long rectangular parallelepiped in the front and back direction is not connected) (the back surface of the base portion having 1502a) are respectively locked to the surface of the base flat plate 1502a.

In this way, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate is formed into a T-shape, and the insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502 at the center of the rib portion 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. With this configuration, when the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate is inserted and pushed into the insertion opening 1502az, as described above, the base portion of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate, which has the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction, The upper back surface side and the lower back surface side (that is, the back surface of the base part having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction to which the protrusion part having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction is not connected) are respectively engaged with the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. Therefore, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate can be made difficult to come off from the insertion opening 1502az, and is easy to handle.

Note that on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, the area corresponding to the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 has a shape that is equal to the outer shape of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Foil-cutting regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a large circumferential shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil-cutting regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil-cut areas NR1, NR2, and NR3 are connected to the ground ( GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) cannot enter the solid ground of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal areas NR1, NR2, and NR3. A "noise-free route" is formed.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-like metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The picture frame-like metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of this frame-shaped metal frame is covered and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected. Housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment part formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the production display device 1600, a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board protrudes from the back side of the base body 1502. A state in which the protruding part having the shape of is in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and being crushed (in the fifth embodiment, the protruding part having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front and back direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board) When the T-shaped conductive elastic member 1508 for the board is deformed into an H-shape, as a repulsive force, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board The conductive elastic member 1508 has a contact surface with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed, and a contact surface with the metal back cover of the production display device 1600. , and maintain a good electrical connection between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the metal back cover of the production display device 1600. are electrically connected securely, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM). The ground (GND) of the substrate 1520 can be electrically connected to the same ground (GND). As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board through the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board). 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520). Because it is electrically connected to the line and can be connected to the same ground (GND), the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and It can be constructed for the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1500 (various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530). Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are formed of transparent non-conductive resin. , the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and other various boards are attached to their respective predetermined positions, and then a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the vertical direction is attached to the T-shaped conductive elastic member 1508 for the board. When the shaped base part is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502 and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting part formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the production display device 1600 connects the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the surrounding It is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the data ROM board 1520. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the performance display device 1600 is guided to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards) through the metal back cover of the performance display device 1600 and removed. It is now possible to form a route out. As a result, there is no need to provide each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise), which reduces the cost of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). can contribute.

Note that the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 () (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 () is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520). A test pad (not shown) is provided on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (which is electrically connected to the ground (GND)). As shown in FIG. 240, the cover body 1501 has a tip of a contact probe (hereinafter simply referred to as a "contact probe") for a test pad (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output board 1530. An opening 1501at is formed into which a so-called "test lead" for checking continuity of a "tester" can be inserted and brought into contact. By bringing this contact probe into contact with the test pad, the metal back cover of the performance display device 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. This allows the inspection company to easily perform inspection work to determine whether or not the connection is established.

[Partial exposed area of the ground of various boards of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
Here, a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed will be described. The area ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is as shown in FIGS. 241(a) and (b). A part of the board ground (GND) (that is, solid ground) formed on the copper foil surface 1530y of 1530y has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for board 1508, and is larger than the front face shape of the base part. A resist liquid is applied onto the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be exposed and placed inside the rectangular rib portion 1502aw formed on the surface of the base flat plate 1502a. is applied to form a back side (solder side) side resist layer 1530yr.

Note that it is also possible to adopt a method of using a through hole as the region ROP without exposing the solid ground. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241(c) and 241(d), the area ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the solid ground on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to arranging a plurality of through holes to be connected in the vertical and horizontal directions, the copper foil is formed so that a land is formed around each through hole on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530. A resist liquid can be applied onto the foil surface 1530yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be transferred to the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of air holes are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Although it is possible to suppress the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed to a low level, when the blades of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the blades to Alternatively, air may be sucked in and sent out toward the peripheral control IC 1510a through the peripheral control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the air cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but simply to air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Note that also in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 comes into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x, place a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and use a squeegee (like a spatula) to The solder paste is applied from the hole formed in the metal mask by spreading the solder paste using a metal mask, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow oven to dry the solder paste with heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be poured into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity to deteriorate, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is made so that the soldering does not bulge in some parts. It needs to be uniform.

For example, a resist layer 1510xr that is partially coated with a resist solution and formed into a predetermined shape is formed on the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil, which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as the "predetermined shape", as shown in FIG. 221(a), the resist is A shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may have a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), as shown in FIG. 221(b), As shown in FIG. 221(c), a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are arranged in an annular manner at the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. A shape formed in a lattice shape consisting of lines in the direction and lines in the horizontal direction (a shape in which the resist has a predetermined width and a plurality of lines in the vertical direction spaced apart by a predetermined distance), or a shape in which the resist ), as shown in FIG. 221(d), the resist may have a shape in which lines having a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance. (The resist may have a shape in which a plurality of lines with a predetermined width are spaced apart by a predetermined distance and a plurality of diagonal lines with a downward slope to the right are formed.) Although not shown in the drawings, Examples include shapes that are a collection of small circular shapes.

In this way, a portion of the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist solution to form a resist layer 1510xr formed into a predetermined shape, and the peripheral Since it is designed to be soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil that is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 It is possible to suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 (in other words, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with a resist liquid and has a predetermined shape. Any material may be used as long as it can suppress the amount of solder soldered to the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4). As a result, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The coating can be made even so that it does not bulge in some areas. The solder thus soldered is applied to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so that it can be electrically connected.

Note that the predetermined figure formed by such a resist is applied to a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the seat surface of the pan head portion (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The process may also be performed on the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan head portion of the metal pan screw. It is coated so that it can be connected to. In addition, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is poured into a solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with resist liquid. By covering the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

Furthermore, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, metal pan-head screws were used when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, or a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrysanthemum washer").

In addition, in the noise countermeasure configuration using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and a metal back cover are electrically connected and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box, and the transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are molded separately. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded into this transparent synthetic resin box.

Incidentally, conventionally, boards such as a main control board that controls game progress and gaming profits, a sub-control board that controls effects that are performed as the game progresses, and an image control board that controls the display of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine has been proposed in which the player is placed on the back side (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, like the gaming machine described in this document, the gaming machines are installed in multiple rows facing each other in the hall, so the board on which electronic components are mounted is susceptible to the effects of noise generated from the gaming machine located across the hall. There was a risk that the board would malfunction due to noise.

In addition, conventionally, gaming machines have been equipped with a ROM in which image data such as symbols, various background images, texts, characters, etc. are stored, and an effect control board on which is mounted a CPU, etc. that controls a display device that displays various images. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island equipment of the game hall are charged with static electricity as the game balls rub against each other as they circulate between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge.

Furthermore, conventionally, gaming machines have been equipped with a ROM that stores image data such as designs, various background images, texts, characters, etc., and a board on which electronic components such as a CPU that controls a display device that displays various images are mounted. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, since some of the various boards provided in gaming machines are housed in board boxes, it is necessary to carry out work to accommodate the boards in the board boxes, and there has been a demand for improvement in work efficiency.

[How to install the flexible flat cable]
Next, the flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the production display device, and the flexible flat cable is connected to the liquid crystal display. Figure (b) shows a state in which the output board is electrically connected to the connector, and is a partially enlarged view of section B shown in (a) and section C shown in (b), showing the flexible flat cable. Fig. 244 is a diagram (c) showing a state in which each connector is electrically connected through the notch, and Fig. 244 shows a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected properly to the connector on the back side of the production display device. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally to the connector of the liquid crystal output board. FIG. Note that, in FIG. 243(c), the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243(b) is shown rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600. At the same time, these multiple flat conductors are covered with an insulator, and compared to normal round electrical wiring, the thickness (diameter) is one-third to five times the thickness (diameter) of normal round electrical wiring. As shown in FIG. 242, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba are provided on the back side of the main body LFCa on the upper end side of the main body LFCa, which is vertically long and has a predetermined width. In order to reinforce the electrode LFCba, which has a rectangular shape that is longer than the predetermined length of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba that are exposed and have a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and are exposed. A reinforcing plate LFCca is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa, and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body LFCa. A reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb having a predetermined thickness and a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrodes LFCbb is formed on the surface side of LFCa.

The plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are connected to the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c (see FIG. 243 (see (a)), the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of this main body LFCa are connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The connector CN10 is electrically connected to the connector CN10.

The flexible flat cable LFC is formed by being bent 90 degrees to the left at a portion having a predetermined distance in the vertical direction from the upper end of the main body LFCa, so that it has a straight bent portion LFCd rising upward to the right (the predetermined distance in the vertical direction is This is the distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line rising to the right.), as well as the predetermined distance dimension in the left and right direction (in this embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction) from the bent portion LFCd (the center point of the straight line rising to the right). ), a bent portion LFCe is formed that is smoothly bent toward the front and then smoothly bent toward the right, and is formed to be parallel in the front-rear direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the production display device]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to a control board 1600c that covers the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the production display device 1600, as shown in FIG. 243(a). It is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca. This control board 1600c includes various electronic components that restore the drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and display an image on the liquid crystal panel 1600a, and LEDs that constitute the backlight of the liquid crystal panel 1600a. Alternatively, various electronic components are mounted to adjust the brightness of cold cathode tubes.

The electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted properly into the connector 1600ca. Poor contact may occur between the electrode LFCba of the connector 1600ca and the corresponding electrode of the connector 1600ca. By inserting the electrode at an angle to the electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors, one electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba is connected to the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to this one electrode LFCba, and the other electrode adjacent to this electrode. Contact with each may cause a short circuit, which may damage the control board 1600c and various electronic components mounted on the control board 1600c.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b of the production display device 1600. To serve as a mark for insertion, place it near the left side of the position corresponding to the left edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the left outer side of the position corresponding to the left edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and the right side of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) A long solid guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is engraved on the right outer side). These guidelines G1L and G1R are stamped in the process of pressing the metal back cover 1600b with a press machine.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b of the production display device 1600. After being inserted, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off from the connector 1600ca, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off. In order to prevent the electrodes LFCba of the flat conductor and the electrodes of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba from being diagonally shifted and coming into contact with other adjacent electrodes and causing a short circuit, the flexible flat cable LFC is wrapped with a metal backing. As an area for pasting the fixed seal SFC having a rectangular shape long in the left and right direction to be fixed to the back side of the lid 1600b, hook brackets (") are placed at positions slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC. Each of these four bracket-shaped guidelines G2, G2, G2, G2 is stamped in the process of pressing the metal back cover 1600b with a press machine. By fixing the flexible flat cable LFC to the back side of the metal back cover 1600b by the fixed seal SFC, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LCD output board]
As shown in FIG. 243(b), the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. electrically connected. In addition to the connector CN10, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is also mounted with the above-mentioned connectors CN8 and CN9, and a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. In addition, by inserting and electrically connecting the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 described above, the display of the effect display device from the peripheral control board 1510 is performed as described above. The drawing data of the image to be drawn on the device is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the flexible flat cable. It will be input to the control board 1600c via the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600.

The electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted properly to the depths of the connector CN10. Poor contact may occur between the electrode LFCbb of the connector CN10 and the corresponding electrode of the connector CN10. By being inserted obliquely to the electrode LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors, one electrode LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb is connected to the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to this one electrode LFCbb, and the other electrode adjacent to this electrode. When the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 electrically connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to each other, a short circuit may occur, and various electronic components mounted on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 electrically connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530 may be damaged.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. In order to serve as a landmark for A long solid line guideline G3U that extends linearly to ) and a long solid guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction are printed by silk printing.

Note that in this embodiment, no through hole is formed in the region where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. This is because even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed due to the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubbing against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is flat. This is to prevent the mold conductor from shorting due to the through hole.

[Relationship between the reinforcing plate of the flexible flat cable and the connector]
When inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the presentation display device 1600, it is necessary to The electrode LFCba of the type conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly connected to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the production display device 1600. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which they match and overlap in the front-back direction. Note that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC must be inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the production display device 1600. In other words, if the pushing amount is insufficient, the lower end peripheral portion of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba will be exposed from the connector 1600ca.

In addition, when inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the flat conductor The electrode LFCbb is oriented to face the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted to the depths of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which they match and overlap in the front-back direction. Note that if the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted all the way into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, that is, the pushing amount If the electrode LFCbb is insufficient, a portion around the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb will be exposed from the connector CN10.

[Flexible flat cable not connected properly]
The plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the production display device 1600. As shown in FIG. 244(a), when the main body LFCa is inserted diagonally, the left end side of the main body LFCa covers the guideline G1L that extends linearly in the vertical direction and cannot be seen, and the right end side of the main body LFCa The electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction, and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower edge of the connector 1600ba. A portion of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the connector 1600ba is exposed from the connector 1600ba. In this way, the guidelines G1L, G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca allow the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to cover the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. It is possible to easily determine visually whether the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c to be covered is properly inserted to the back. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, a worker moves the electrodes LFCba of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the display device 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the connector 1600ca, it can be easily determined visually whether or not the electrode LFCba is properly inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

In addition, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and are not inserted diagonally. 244(b), the upper edge of the main body LFCa covers the guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction and cannot be seen, and the lower edge of the main body LFCa in the left-right direction The left edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (in FIG. 243(c), the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb) is inclined to the guideline G3L that extends linearly to the left edge of the connector CN10. It is in a state where it is inclined with respect to the side (the lower end side of the connector CN10 in FIG. 243(c)), and a part of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10. In this way, the guide lines G3U, G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcb cause the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to reach the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. It is possible to easily judge visually whether or not the connector CN10 is properly inserted all the way to the back of the provided connector CN10. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, a worker connects the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. When the electrode LFCbb is inserted into the connector CN10 prepared for use in the connector CN10, it can be easily determined visually whether the electrode LFCbb is properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

[Modified example]
In the above-described embodiment, in the left-right direction, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is located near the top of the position corresponding to the top side of the main body LFCa (that is, near the top and outside of the position corresponding to the top side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guideline G3U that extends linearly to ), a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed using silk printing, but a rectangular area with guideline G3U as the top edge and guideline G3L as the bottom edge was printed solidly using silk printing. You can leave it there. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solidly painted rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the solidly painted rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed due to the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubbing against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 This prevents the resist from peeling off due to peeling off of the silk printing in the rectangular area where 1530x is painted solidly, so that the copper foil surface of 1530x, which is the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 covered with resist, is not exposed. In addition, it is possible to prevent the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC from shorting.

In the above-described embodiment, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is located in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa (that is, the upper outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. A long solid line guideline G3U that extends linearly to ), a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but a rectangular area with guideline G3U as the top edge and guideline G3L as the bottom edge, and a liquid crystal display corresponding to the inside of the area. A foil removal area may be formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output board 1530. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the rectangular area from which the foil has been removed can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the rectangular area from which the foil has been removed can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed due to the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubbing against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, there is no copper foil surface in the first place, in other words, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is exposed, so the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC may short-circuit. can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the left and right direction, there is a A long solid line guideline G3U that extends linearly to ), a long solid guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing, but some areas of the copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 were removed. The guidelines G3U and G3L may be formed by removing the resist liquid, or the guidelines may be formed by not applying the resist liquid to a part of the area when applying the resist liquid to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. G3U and G3L may be formed.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are correctly inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. If the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC come off from the connector CN10, or the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC In order to prevent the electrode LFCbb of the type conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb from being diagonally shifted and coming into contact with other adjacent electrodes and causing a short circuit, the flexible flat cable LFC is connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530. A fixing sticker having a vertically elongated rectangular shape to be fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x may be attached. In this case, on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the area where the fixed seal is pasted is placed slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal, for example, with hook brackets ("). Guidelines in the form of shapes (lines, symbols, etc.) may be printed by silk-screen printing, or may be formed on a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. By removing the copper foil, a guideline in the shape of an angle bracket (") (a figure such as a line or symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. When applying the resist liquid, a guideline in the shape of a hook bracket (") (a shape such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by not applying the resist liquid to a part of the area.The flexible flat cable LFC is a fixed seal. By being fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back side of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, in cases where a board is provided on a movable body that is operated by driving an electric drive power, a flexible flat cable is used as the electrical wiring to electrically connect the board and the drive board. Good too. Since a load is applied to the movable body due to the electric wiring as the movable body operates, this load may be so large that it cannot be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of wires or harnesses for electrical wiring, the load on the movable body due to the flexible flat cable due to the operation of the movable body can be suppressed, and the overload of the electrical drive source can be reduced. It can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the left and right direction, there is a A long solid line guideline G3U that extends linearly to ) is printed with a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction, so that on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, workers can When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb to be formed are inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, it is visually checked whether the electrodes LFCbb are properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10. However, for example, as an indication of the standby position (original position) of a movable body that is activated by the drive of an electric drive power, the board near the standby position (original position) of the movable body Graphics such as lines and symbols indicating the standby position (original position) of the movable body may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when an employee such as a clerk at an amusement hall inspects a pachinko machine, he or she can manually move the movable body to the standby position (original position) without turning on the power to the pachinko machine. It can be done. In addition, even when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used to determine whether the movable body has shifted from the standby position (original position), so it can be used to check for malfunctions of the movable body. You can also do that.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vertical direction, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is provided. A long solid line guideline G1L that extends linearly to ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b of the production display device 1600, and is located at a position corresponding to the upper edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction near the top (that is, near the top and outside of the position corresponding to the top side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the bottom edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction near the bottom of the position corresponding to (that is, near the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom edge of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is attached to the liquid crystal output board 1530. However, instead of the solid line, a dashed line or a dashed double dotted line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vertical direction, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is provided. A long solid line guideline G1L that extends linearly to ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b of the production display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guideline G1L that extends linearly in the vertical direction near the right side of the position (that is, the inner right side near the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The effect display device 1600 includes a long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction near the left side of the position corresponding to the side (that is, inside left side near the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). It may be formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b. In this case, instead of the solid line, a dashed line or a dashed double dot line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. In the above-described embodiment, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is located in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa (that is, the upper outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. A long solid line guideline G3U that extends linearly to ) is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed near the bottom of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (in other words, There is a long solid line guideline G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction (near the lower inner side of the main body LFCa of the cable LFC at a position corresponding to the upper end side), and a long solid line guideline G3U (near the upper end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC at a position corresponding to the lower end side). That is, a long solid guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (near the upper inner side of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). In this case, instead of the solid line, a dashed line or a dashed double dot line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the vertical direction, the left side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) is provided. A long solid line guideline G1L that extends linearly to ) is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b of the production display device 1600, and corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The effect display device 1600 includes a long solid line guideline G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction at a position, and a long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. It may be formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b. In other words, the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1L match and overlap in the front-back direction, and the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G1R match in the front-rear direction. This results in an overlapping positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, a dashed line or a dashed double dot line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. In the above-described embodiment, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is located in the upper vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa (that is, the upper outer side of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) in the left-right direction. A long solid line guideline G3U that extends linearly to ) is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and a long solid guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530. A long solid line guideline G3U and a long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 at a position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In other words, the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3U match and overlap in the front-back direction, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guideline G3L match in the front-rear direction. This results in an overlapping positional relationship. In this case, instead of the solid line, a dashed line or a dashed double dot line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

In the embodiment described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC cover the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. When the connector 1600ca is properly inserted all the way, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower edge of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship that matches and overlaps in the front-rear direction, as shown in FIG. 243(c). As a result, the distance between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca was the same as the length (insertion length) when the electrode LFCba was properly inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca. In addition, when the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted to the depths of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, , as shown in FIG. 243(c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship that matches and overlaps in the front-rear direction, so that the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb The distance between the electrode LFCbb and the lower end side was the same as the length (insertion length) when the electrode LFCbb was properly inserted deep into the connector CN10.

In this way, in the embodiment described above, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) when the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca. , if the distance between the upper and lower edges of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) when the electrode LFCba is correctly inserted to the depths of the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC In a state in which the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side are properly inserted to the depths of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the presentation display device 1600, the reinforcing plate LFCca is If the lower end side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca do not match in the front-rear direction and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is arranged in a positional relationship parallel to and spaced apart from the lower end side of the connector 1600ca, the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca The lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end of the connector 1600ca can be determined by the distance between the lower end of the connector 1600ca and the lower end of the connector 1600ca. It becomes difficult to use and distinguish. Similarly, the distance between the top and bottom sides of the reinforcing plate LFCcb was the same as the length (insertion length) when the electrode LFCbb was correctly inserted all the way into the connector CN10, but the top edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb If the distance between the electrode LFCbb and the lower end side is longer than the length (insertion length) when the electrode LFCbb is correctly inserted all the way into the connector CN10, in other words, the electrode LFCbb is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state in which the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb are properly inserted to the depths of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10, do not match in the front-rear direction and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is arranged in a positional relationship parallel to and spaced apart from the lower edge of the connector CN10, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower edge of the connector CN10, Since the electrodes LFCbb are separated from each other, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the electrode LFCbb has been properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10 using the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower edge of the connector CN10. .

Therefore, in such a case, when the electrode LFCba is properly inserted all the way into the connector 1600ca, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca, it should be on the extension line of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca. , a solid line extending linearly to the left (in the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the left outer side of the position corresponding to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) Instead of the solid line, it may be a dashed line or a dashed double dot line, or it may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca. It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or it may be formed in an L-shape integrally with the guideline G1L described above. A solid line (instead of a solid line, it may be a dashed line or a dashed double dotted line, or a dashed line or a dashed double dotted line, (This guideline G1R' may intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G1R, or may be an L-shaped line formed integrally with the above-mentioned guideline G1R.) ) is preferably engraved on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, when the electrode LFCbb is properly inserted all the way into the connector CN10, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower edge of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, on the extension line of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the flexible flat cable A solid line (instead of a solid line) extending linearly upward near the top of the position corresponding to the top side of the main body LFCa of the LFC (that is, near the top and outside of the position corresponding to the top side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) , may be a dashed-dotted line or a dashed-double-dotted line, or may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. Alternatively, it may be an L-shape formed integrally with the guideline G3U described above.Also, it may be a rectangular shape (having the vertical distance of the guideline G3U' and the horizontal distance of the guideline G3U). The inside thereof may be printed in solid color by silk printing. A solid line (instead of a solid line, a dashed line or a dashed double dot line may be used) extending linearly downward to the lower outer side of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb ) guideline G3L' (this guideline G3L' may intersect with the above-mentioned guideline G3L, or may be formed in an L-shape integrally with the above-mentioned guideline G3L. Also, A rectangular shape having the vertical distance of the guideline G3L' and the horizontal distance of the guideline G3L (the inside of which may be printed solidly by silk printing); It is preferable to print on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing.

Note that instead of silk printing, guidelines G3U' and G3L' can be printed by removing the copper foil from a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, as in the above-mentioned modification. Alternatively, guidelines G3U' and G3L' may be formed by not applying the resist liquid to some areas when applying the resist liquid to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. You can. In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification example, by removing the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the guideline G3L' and the guideline G3L described above are removed. By forming a rectangular shape having a distance dimension in the left and right direction (the copper foil inside this rectangular shape may also be removed), guidelines G3U, G3L and guidelines G3U', G3L' are formed, respectively. You can.

[Connector connection method]
Next, connect to the connectors provided on the relay board that relays various wirings to the peripheral control board 1510, the relay board that relays various wirings to the main control board 1310, and the relay board that relays various wirings to the payout control board 633. The wiring and harness connectors will be described with reference to FIG. 245. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of the connectors on the relay board, and a diagram (b) showing the state in which the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. FIG. 6(c) is a diagram showing a state in which the wiring and harness connectors are not properly connected to each other.

By the way, if the wiring or harness connector is not inserted correctly into the connector on the relay board, poor contact may occur between the electrodes of the connector, and if the connector on the wiring or harness is not inserted at an angle to the connector on the relay board. When the connector is inserted into the connector, adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other, causing a short circuit, which may damage various electronic components mounted on the relay board and various control boards electrically connected to the relay board.

In this embodiment, the front surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD has a socket-side connector SCK into which the plug-side connector PLG of the wiring and harness KDCBL is inserted, as shown in FIG. 245(a). There is. The connector SCK on the socket side is a right-angle type (also called a "side type"), and has a box-like shape in which an opening SCKb is formed on the lower side SCKaa of the main body SCKa, which has a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction. is formed. A plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into this opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa where the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The connector PLG on the plug side has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb, which has the same distance dimension in the left-right direction as the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is integrally formed. Note that, as described above, the lower side surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, and the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD In this embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side.

When the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb, which is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa, becomes the socket-side connector. The opening SCKb of the SCK comes into contact with the formed lower surface SCKaa and comes into surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245(b), the surface of the main body PLGb that is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG). The lower surface PLGbb) of PLGb and the lower end side KDeg of relay board KD (that is, the board end of relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship in which they match and overlap in the front-back direction.

In this way, the connector SCK on the socket side is arranged at a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, and a distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction from the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side. Therefore, when the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are They will be placed in an overlapping positional relationship that matches. As a result, on the assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer, when an operator correctly inserts the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the operator's finger will The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG), and the lower end side of the relay board KD KDeg (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) is placed on the same plane by touching the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG with the opening of the socket-side connector SCK. It is easy to judge whether or not the SCKb has been inserted all the way to the back, and it is also possible for staff such as game hall clerks to check the pachinko machine by placing it on the same plane as mentioned above. By the tactile sensation of the hand being placed, it can be easily determined whether the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted to the depths of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

Note that if the plug part PLGa of the plug side connector PLG is not properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket side connector SCK and is inserted obliquely, the plug side The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, , the end of the relay board KD) and protrudes by an amount dSP. As a result, a worker on the assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk at an amusement hall who inspects pachinko machines can check that the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side is at the lower end of the relay board KD by the amount of protrusion dSP. By protruding from the side KDeg, the finger of an operator or an attendant such as a game hall clerk can be attached to the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb that is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (i.e. , the lower side PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (in other words, the board edge of the relay board KD) are touched by the tactile sensation of the hand that there is a step. , it can be easily determined that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

[Modified example]
In the above-described embodiment, the socket-side connector SCK has a distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG, as a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. and is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG when the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. The surface of the main body PLGb opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are front and back. They were supposed to be arranged in a positional relationship that matched the direction and overlapped, but the component placement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side was printed with a silk screen as a solid line that was larger than the outline of the connector SCK on the socket side. At the same time, when the plug part PLGa of the plug side connector PLG is properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket side connector SCK, the main body PLGb is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug side connector PLG. Arrange so that the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) matches the lower side of the component placement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side. may be done. FIG. 246 is a modification of FIG. 245, and is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of connectors on the relay board and component placement lines, and shows that the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state, and figure (c) which shows a state where the connector of a wiring or harness is not normally connected to the connector of a relay board.

For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246(a), a socket-side connector SCK into which a plug-side connector PLG of the wiring or harness KDCBL is inserted is arranged. The connector SCK on the socket side is formed in a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed with respect to the lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. A plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into this opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245(a) is on the relay board The surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD has a predetermined distance dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of KD, which is about twice the distance dimension, which is at least 5 mm. It is located in

The reason why the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is spaced apart from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 is briefly explained. When mounting components or pouring the board into a solder bath, it is necessary to form a so-called "saved board (area where electronic components cannot be mounted)", and it is necessary to form a 3mm to 5mm inward from each edge of the board. Electronic components cannot be mounted over the entire area (from each edge of the board to its periphery). If you want to mount electronic components without forming this waste board (that is, if you want to mount electronic components in a range from each edge of the board to its periphery), you can use a gripping jig to fix the board or to prevent the board from warping. Although it is necessary to use a jig, in this case as well, electronic components cannot be placed in the area of the board that is held between the gripping jig and the board warp prevention jig, which is approximately 5 mm inward from the edge of the board. Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. 245(a) has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The distance dimension is about twice that of the distance dimension, which is at least 5 mm. As a result, when the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb, which is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG, The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is arranged above the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, so that it is arranged inside the relay board KD. It will be done.

Around the connector SCK on the socket side, a rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side is located at least on the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, and on the socket side. The lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has a second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The connector PLG on the plug side has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction and has a size smaller than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb, which has the same distance dimension in the left-right direction as the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is integrally formed. As described above, the rectangular component placement line DSLK indicating the component position of the socket side connector SCK is formed around the socket side connector SCK, and at least the opening SCKb of the socket side connector SCK is formed. The lower side SCKaa of the connector SCK on the socket side and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side have a second distance dimension dw3 and are printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD. In this embodiment, the second distance dimension dw3 is a distance dimension in which the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. The distance dimension is the same (that is, the distance dimension (thickness) dcw in the vertical direction of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side).

When the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb, which is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa, becomes the socket-side connector. It comes into contact with the lower surface SCKaa of the opening SCKb of the SCK and comes into surface contact. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the surface of the main body PLGb that is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG). The lower side PLGbb) of PLGb and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. As a result, a worker on the assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk at an amusement hall who inspects pachinko machines can connect the plug part PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG to the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. It is possible to easily determine visually whether or not it has been properly inserted all the way. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

Note that if the plug part PLGa of the plug side connector PLG is not properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket side connector SCK and is inserted obliquely, the plug side The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb that is formed integrally with the plug part PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the component placement line of the connector SCK on the socket side. The arrangement is such that it protrudes from the lower side of DSLK by a protruding amount dSP. As a result, a worker on the assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk at an amusement hall who inspects pachinko machines can check that the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side is aligned with the component placement line DSLK by the amount of protrusion dSP. By protruding from the lower side DSLKeg, it can be easily determined visually that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted all the way into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

Incidentally, conventionally, there have been various types of control boards, such as a main control board that controls game progress and gaming profits, a sub-control board that controls effects that are executed as the game progresses, and an image control board that controls display of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which the board is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). By the way, like the gaming machine described in this document, various Some of the connectors installed on the board are used for inserting and removing wiring, and others are for inserting and removing connectors that are electrically connected to the wiring at one end. During the connection work, it was necessary to check electrically the connector, which took time.

[Wiring groove]
In this embodiment, when looking at the game board 5 from the front with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, there is a payout at a predetermined distance on the back left side of the game board 5, as described above. A back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. A ball guiding unit 570 is arranged on the upper left side of the back side of the game board 5 and is attached to the rear side of the left side of the back plate 551e. A payout device 580 is disposed, and an upper full ball path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e is disposed on the lower left side of the game board 5.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the back left part 551e, which is arranged a predetermined distance from the back left side of the game board 5, connects the left back side of the game board 5 and the front side of the left back part 551e. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 113, a plurality of protective cover bodies 1601 molded from a non-conductive transparent resin cover the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. The formed L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a is arranged along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are retained by the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a.

The game balls B are polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubbed against each other during circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and discharged with electrostatic electricity, thereby emitting electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, payout device 580, and upper full ball path unit 600 that can hold the game balls B are attached. .

In other words, since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are connected to each other. The space formed (hereinafter referred to as "wiring routing space") is in an environment where it is susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from game ball B.

Further, various types of electric wires routed in the wiring space include, for example, wiring for transmitting control signals and wiring for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various types of electric wires coexist in the wiring space. Wiring that transmits control signals is susceptible to noise and can cause problems due to electromagnetic noise (for example, legitimate data changing to other data and becoming garbled, or signals being output even though they were not originally intended). In contrast, wiring for supplying various power sources is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

Therefore, among the various wiring routed in the wiring routing space, it is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise to avoid troubles caused by electromagnetic noise for the wiring that transmits control signals that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, there is no need to take measures against electromagnetic noise for wiring that supplies various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise.

Therefore, a configuration in which wiring grooves for routing various wiring lines are provided on the back left side of the game board 5 (hereinafter referred to as "wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments") will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 252. do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view (a) of the game board seen from the back, illustrating the area where the wiring grooves are attached, and (b) a diagram showing the state in which the wiring grooves according to the first embodiment are installed on the back side of the game board. FIG. 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247 and is a diagram (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is attached to the back side of the game board, and FIG. 249 is a diagram according to the first embodiment. 250 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the wiring groove is installed on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind; FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front with the wiring grooves according to the second embodiment installed on the back side of the game board. FIG. FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the back in a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is installed on the back side of the game board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front. In addition, in FIGS. 247(b) and 248(c), for ease of viewing the drawings, only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed to the wiring grooves for the first and second electromagnetic noise countermeasures, and other various wirings are omitted. . Furthermore, in FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

[Area where the wiring groove is installed]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, the back plate 5 is located at a predetermined distance from the back of the left side of the game board 5. A space is formed by the portion 551e between the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e. In this space, various wirings are secured to L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a formed on a protective cover body 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the performance display device 1600. 1601 are arranged along the vertical direction. In the wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247(a), instead of the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601, a mounting boss hole is formed in the protective cover body 1601. Two 1601d are formed on the upper side and two on the lower side.

[Wiring groove according to first embodiment]
The wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a conductive metal wiring groove 1605, as shown in FIGS. 247(b), 249, and 250, and is a thin metal flat plate (plate thickness: .0 mm to 2.6 mm) are bent by press working to form a groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, and on the left and right walls of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed on the upper and lower sides, respectively, by being bent by press working. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, respectively, thereby creating a notch 1605c in a portion corresponding to the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b. are formed respectively, and L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. Notches 1605c are formed in corresponding portions, respectively. Note that cutout holes 1605bb are formed by press working at the tips of the mounting surfaces 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b.

The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is connected to the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various boards provided on the game board 5. ). This is to prevent the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 from being electrically floating with respect to the various substrates included in the game board 5. In other words, electrically floating metal may function as an antenna that picks up noise and become a noise source, so electrically floating metal is not made on the various boards included in the game board 5. .

The notch holes 1605bb formed in the mounting surface 1605ba of the four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in the metal wiring groove 1605 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After each of the mounting boss holes 1601d is inserted into the notch hole 1605bb (the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is the same as or smaller than the plate thickness dimension of the notch hole 1605bb). When a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed in from the notch hole 1605bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 are connected to each other. A space outside the groove is formed between the bottom outer surface 1605d. In addition, when the game board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is attached to the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is connected to the payout base unit 550 as described above. By being closed off by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, a groove space is formed in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605.

In other words, the space between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front of the back plate left part 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550 is separated by the metal wiring groove 1605. An extra-groove space can be formed between the metal wiring groove 1605 and the front surface of the groove part 1605a having a U-shaped cross-section, and an inner-groove space can be formed within the groove part 1605a having a U-shaped cross-section in the metal wiring groove 1605. It has become. In other words, the space outside the groove formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the source of electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, the groove space in the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space facing the source of electromagnetic noise. Note that the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 of the space outside the groove is larger than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the in-groove space.

Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. Although the space where the wiring is routed, that is, the space where the wiring is routed, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, since the metal wiring groove 1605 is conductive, electromagnetic wave noise is removed from the space within the groove. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the outside space.

As a result, troubles caused by electromagnetic noise can be avoided by routing the wiring that transmits control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise into the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and the influence of electromagnetic noise can be avoided. Wiring for supplying various types of power that are difficult to receive can be routed into the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

For example, in addition to the performance display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a and can display a predetermined performance image, a sub-performance display device (not shown) that can display a predetermined performance image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, a flexible flat cable 1606 (FFC (abbreviation for Flexible Flat Cable) is used to transmit drawing data (control signals) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to a sub effect display device (not shown). A plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. It is an important wiring that transmits drawing data (control signals) to the sub-effect display device (not shown), and when affected by electromagnetic noise, the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) In order to prevent troubles such as disturbances or images like a sandstorm, the wires are routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. In addition, various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals by positive side wiring and negative side wiring, and peripheral control board for the peripheral control unit 1500 The various types of wiring through which detection signals from various sensors inputted to the 1510 are transmitted have a conductor (single wire material or stranded wire material) covered with an insulating material, and when affected by electromagnetic noise, the surrounding The regular data output by the control board 1510 changes to other data and is garbled and received (input) at the output destination, or is output as a signal that is output even though it is not originally output. In order to prevent troubles such as reception (input) at the end of the metal wiring groove 1605 or detection signals from various sensors being accurately received (input) to the peripheral control board 1510, It is passed around. Twisted pair cables and various types of wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the space outside the groove.

On the other hand, the wiring for supplying various power supplies such as +24V, +12V, and +5V (which may also include ground (GND)) created by the power supply board 630 described above is made of conductors (single wire material or stranded wire material). The surrounding area is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (which may also include ground (GND)) is stabilized, so compared to control signals, electromagnetic noise is less Even if it is influenced by the metal wiring groove 1605, the voltage fluctuation due to this influence is very weak and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise, so it can be routed in the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

Various power sources from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board through various power supply lines that are electrically connected from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. 5 and supplies various power supplies from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 so as not to be placed close to the flexible flat cable 1606. The metal wiring groove 1605 is routed toward the metal wiring groove 1605 through cutouts 1605c formed on the lower side of the right side wall and the left side wall of the groove portion 1605a, which has a U-shaped cross section. The metal wiring groove 1605 is routed upward along the groove space, and is routed from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to various boards provided on the game board 5.

In this way, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 separates the space through which the wiring passes (the space in which the wiring is routed) into the space outside the groove where the wiring for transmitting control signals that is susceptible to electromagnetic noise is routed, and the space outside the groove where the wiring is routed for transmitting control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Since it can be configured as a two-story building divided into a groove space for routing wiring for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected, the front side of the left side of the back plate 551e and the side of the game board 5 are separated. It is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the space (wiring routing space) formed on the left rear surface.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be explained. The flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and these flat conductors are coated with an insulator. Compared to normal round electrical wiring, the thickness is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of normal round electrical wiring, and the liquid crystal display of peripheral control unit 1500 is It is bent from the output board 1530 to a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times to form a three-dimensional shape. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba are placed exposed on the back side of the main body 1606a with a predetermined length on the upper end side of the left side of the main body 1606a, which is a long strip in the direction, A reinforcing plate 1606ca is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606ba, which has a thick rectangular shape and is longer than a predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrodes 1606ba, while the lower end of the main body 1606a On the side, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the back side of the main body 1606a, and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb having a predetermined thickness and exposed on the front side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606cb is formed to reinforce the electrode 1606bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the conductive electrode 1606bb.

The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 1606a are connected to a metal back (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

Note that a capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is connected between the power line and the board ground (GND) in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. is implemented, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected to a power line and a board ground (GND) on a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back side of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Capacitors called bypass capacitors such as decoupling capacitors (not shown) and bypass capacitors (not shown) for the power supply are mounted between them, and by lowering the power source impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game ball B is achieved. Improving sex.

A flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 connects the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 passes between the rear surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the area except for the display area, and is routed to the extra-groove space formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605, and is guided downward along this extra-groove space. The board holder 1200 is attached to the back of the game board 5 as it is, and is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the top of the back of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). be done.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 connects the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the performance display of the game board 5. The wire can be routed to a space outside the groove formed by a conductive metal wiring groove 1605 by passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the device 1600 except for the display area. Furthermore, as described above, the effect display device 1600 has the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame covered with a metal back cover. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 can cover between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area. The flexible flat cable 1606 can function as a shielding member that can prevent electromagnetic noise from penetrating toward the flexible flat cable 1606 in the area where it passes through.

[Modified example]
Note that the metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring not shown, and is the same ground as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various boards provided on the game board 5. (GND), but instead of or in addition to this, an L-shaped connecting piece is pressed at the bottom of the groove portion 1605a of the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 toward the protective cover body 1601. By providing a connecting piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connecting surface of this L-shaped connecting piece can be inserted into the protective cover body 1601 through the connecting piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601. It may be in contact with the metal back cover of the production display device 1600 and electrically connected, or a conductive elastic member may be attached to the connection surface of this L-shaped connection piece and the connection provided on the protective cover body 1601. Through the one opening, the metal back cover of the performance display device 1600 inside the protective cover body 1601 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (the surface opposite to the surface attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece) come into contact. (In other words, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece passes through the connection piece opening provided in the protective cover body 1601 and connects the metal part of the performance display device 1600 inside the protective cover body 1601. (It may be electrically connected to the back cover through a conductive elastic member.) The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering part, a rectangular foam as a core material covered by the conductive covering part, and a foam adhered to the conductive covering part. conductive adhesive tape. Examples of the covering part include those in which a copper and nickel metal coating is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam include heat-resistant polyurethane foam. Examples of the conductive adhesive tape include a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive coating to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece.

Also, wiring for transmitting control signals output from the main control board 1310 described above to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner when looking at the front of the game board 5 is placed outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. It may be routed into the space and then routed upward along the space outside the groove. In this way, the noise resistance of the wiring to the function display unit 1400 against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved.

Further, the metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring not shown, and is the same ground as the ground (board ground (GND)) of various boards provided on the game board 5. (GND), but even if the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically floating with respect to the various boards included in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna that picks up noise and becomes a source of noise. If there is no risk of this occurring, or if the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligibly small, the metal wiring groove 1605 should not be electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown). , it may be in an electrically floating state.

The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a vertically long thin metal flat plate, but the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 has the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. ' may also be configured as '. In this case, conductive plating (e.g., noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating) is applied to the entire front and back surfaces of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605', and the part to which conductive plating is applied is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring not shown, and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (board ground (GND)) of the various boards included in the game board 5. Even with this configuration, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605' coated with conductive plating has the same effect as the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 described above (that is, reduces electromagnetic noise). It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the inner groove space to the outer groove space.) Note that even if the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605' coated with conductive plating is electrically floating relative to the various boards provided on the game board 5, it will not function as an antenna that picks up noise. If there is no risk of it becoming a noise source, or if the electromagnetic wave noise from the noise source is negligible, do not electrically connect the conductive plating to the board ground (GND) via wiring not shown. Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

Further, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a vertically long thin metal flat plate, and the conductive resin wiring groove 1605' has the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. ' may also be configured as '. Even with this configuration, the electrically conductive resin wiring groove 1605'' has the same effect as the electrically conductive metal wiring groove 1605 described above (that is, it reduces electromagnetic noise from the space inside the groove to the space outside the groove). (It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the object.)

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals. may be arranged so that flat conductors that transmit control signals and flat conductors that are electrically connected to substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. In this way, the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but the flexible flat cable 1606 is particularly vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise (that is, easily susceptible to the influence of electromagnetic noise). The flat conductor that transmits data (hereinafter referred to as the "flat conductor that is susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic noise") should be connected to the board ground (GND) and electrically adjacent to the flat conductor that is vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic noise. The flat conductor, which is susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic noise, is sandwiched between the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the board ground (GND). You can. In this way, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but in addition to the flat conductors transmitting control signals, these flat conductors include: A configuration that includes a flat conductor that is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) and a flat conductor that supplies various power supplies, and the board ground (GND) and the power supply are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, the power source should be an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current by rapidly increasing the resistance when the temperature rises to a certain temperature, or an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current by suppressing the current when the temperature rises, or An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current reaches (The main body generates heat, this heat reduces conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body cools down, the conductivity returns and returns to normal.) It is preferable to do so. This is because, as mentioned above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness that is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electrical wiring. Because the flexible flat cable 1606 is thin and thin, the overcurrent protection circuit or overcurrent protection circuit can prevent short circuits in the flexible flat cable 1606 when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, ensuring safety and preventing damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring groove according to second embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 248(c), 251, and 252, the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608, and has a U-shaped cross section that is long in the vertical direction. A groove 1608a is formed, and mounting pieces 1608b projecting outward from the top and bottom are integrally molded on the left and right walls of the groove 1608a, which has a U-shaped cross section. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed on the same plane as the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and mounting holes 1608bb are formed at the tips of the mounting pieces 1608b. has been done. Further, a wiring insertion notch 1608d is formed approximately at the center of the left side wall of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the opening side. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded from a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded from a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The thickness of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the height of the mounting piece 1608b of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. be.

The mounting holes 1608bb formed in the mounting surface 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601, respectively. After each attachment boss hole 1601d is inserted, the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the attachment boss hole 1601d is smaller than the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) of the attachment piece 1608b. ), when a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed in from the mounting hole 1608bb toward the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608. The bottom outer surface 1608c of the protective cover body 1601 is brought into contact with the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b. Further, when the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is attached to the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is the dispensing base unit 550. By being blocked by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, an internal groove space is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608.

Note that the height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening sides of the left and right side walls of the groove portion 1608a, and the L-shape in the metal wiring groove 1605. The height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1605ba of the mounting piece 1605b to the opening side surface of the left and right side walls of the groove portion 1608a is the same dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction), They are at the same height. Furthermore, the height (distance dimension in the depth direction) H3 of the in-groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is the outer groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H1, and height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of the in-groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. , is added to the length.

Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space where the wiring is routed, that is, the space where the wiring is routed, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and since the resin wiring groove 1608 is non-conductive, the electromagnetic wave noise is removed from the resin wiring groove 1608. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shield member that can prevent the resin from entering the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

For example, in addition to the performance display device 1600 that is placed in the center of the game area 5a and can display a predetermined performance image, a sub-performance display device (not shown) that can display a predetermined performance image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In this case, a flexible flat cable 1609 (FFC (abbreviation for Flexible Flat Cable) is used to transmit drawing data (control signals) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to a sub effect display device (not shown). A plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel, and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. It has the same shape as the flexible flat cable 1606 in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above, and is important for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub effect display device (not shown). If the wiring is affected by electromagnetic noise, troubles will occur such as the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) being distorted or becoming an image resembling a sandstorm.

Therefore, a special structure was adopted in which a shield wire 1610 woven into a mesh is provided over one of the flat surfaces of the flexible flat cable 1609, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. This shielded wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the board to which the upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected, and the ground (board ground (GND)) of the board to which the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

When the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times to form a three-dimensional shape, a cutout for wiring insertion is formed in a groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. The wire is routed through the part 1608d to the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, and extends from the bent portion toward the lower end of the groove space to the groove space by a predetermined distance from the lower end. The portion extending to this portion is formed such that the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided faces toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. That is, in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface where the shield wire 1610 is provided on the flexible flat cable 1609 are connected. The space formed between them (that is, the small space in which the flexible flat cable 1609 is arranged) does not face the source of electromagnetic noise. The space formed from the surface where the groove portion 1608a is provided to the opening side of the groove portion 1608a is a space facing the source of electromagnetic noise.

Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the back plate left portion 551e, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 are formed on the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. Although the space where the cables are routed, that is, the space where the wiring is routed, is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided in a direction in which electromagnetic noise enters. It is formed to face the

In addition, the wiring for supplying various power sources such as +24V, +12V, and +5V (which may also include ground (GND)) created by the power supply board 630 described above has a conductor (single wire material or stranded wire material) whose periphery is It is coated with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power sources (which may also include ground (GND)) is stabilized, so compared to control signals, it is less susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic noise. Even if it is affected, the voltage fluctuation due to this influence is very weak and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise, so it can be routed in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

In the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the flexible flat cable 1609 and various types of wiring that supply various power sources coexist. The groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided is directed toward the groove portion having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. 1608a toward the opening side. Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided.

Various power sources from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board through various power supply lines that are electrically connected from the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. 5 and various types of power supply from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield wire 1610 is provided. The inner groove space is formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 from below the groove portion 1608a which has a U-shaped cross section and is routed toward the resin wiring groove 1608 which is non-conductive. The wires are routed upward along the groove space and are routed from the upper end of the resin wiring groove 1608 to the various boards provided on the game board 5.

In this way, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 provides a shield for the flexible flat cable 1609, which is the wiring for transmitting control signals that is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the wire 1610 is provided and where the shield wire 1610 is not provided is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shield wire 1610 is provided. By orienting the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, a space is formed between the front surface of the left side of the back plate 551e and the left side back surface of the game board 5. It is possible to improve noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the (wiring routing space).

In addition, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply board 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield wire 1610 is provided, flexible flat wiring, which is a wiring that transmits control signals that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise, can be used. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic noise can be arranged coexisting in the groove space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

Note that the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment differs from the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment described above. Various wirings that transmit various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, twisted pair cables that transmit control signals through positive wiring and negative wiring, and wires that are input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The resin wiring groove 1608 itself cannot be used to route various wirings through which detection signals from various sensors are transmitted.

Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be explained. The flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub-effect display device (not shown), and these flat conductors are covered with an insulator. Compared to normal round electrical wiring, it is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of normal round electrical wiring, and as mentioned above, it is flexible. The flat cable 1609 has a special structure in which a shield wire 1610 woven into a mesh is provided over one side of both flat surfaces of the flat cable 1609, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin. The flexible flat cable 1609 is bent from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 toward the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times to form a three-dimensional shape. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba are exposed with a predetermined length on the back side of the main body 1609a on the upper end side, which is the left side of the main body 1609a, which is a strip-shaped main body 1609a that is long in the horizontal direction and has a predetermined width. A reinforcing plate 1609ca is formed on the surface side of the main body 1609a to reinforce the electrode 1609ba having a predetermined thickness and a rectangular shape longer than the predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrodes 1609ba. On the other hand, on the lower end side of the main body 1609a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609bb are arranged exposed with a predetermined length on the back side of the main body 1609a, and predetermined electrodes 1609bb are arranged on the front side of the main body 1609a. A reinforcing plate 1609cb is formed to reinforce the electrode 1609bb, which has a thick rectangular shape and is longer than a predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrodes 1609bb.

A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above. The shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the connector, while the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back side of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5, and A shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of the control board via a connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown).

Note that a capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is connected between the power line and the board ground (GND) in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. is implemented, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected to a power line and a board ground (GND) on a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back side of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub-effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Capacitors called bypass capacitors such as decoupling capacitors (not shown) and bypass capacitors (not shown) for the power supply are mounted between them, and by lowering the power source impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game ball B is achieved. Improving sex.

A flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 connects the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. Through a wiring insertion notch 1608d formed in a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 that passes between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the area except for the display area. The back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown) is guided downward along the groove space, and is then guided into the board holder 1200 which is attached to the back surface of the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector on the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the top.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 connects the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the performance display of the game board 5. A notch for wiring insertion formed in a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 that passes between the back surface of a protective cover body 1601 that covers the device 1600 except for the display area. It can be routed to the groove space formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 via the resin wiring groove 1608d. Furthermore, as described above, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame of the effect display device 1600 is covered with a metal back cover. As a result, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 can cover between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area. It can function as a shielding member that can prevent electromagnetic noise from penetrating toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the area where it passes through.

[Modified example]
The flexible flat cable 1609, which is provided with a shield wire 1610 woven into a mesh over one surface, is made by bending a horizontally long belt-shaped main body 1606a having a predetermined width by repeating mountain-folding and valley-folding multiple times. However, a shield wire 1610 woven into a net shape may be provided on one side of a short flexible flat cable 1609' in which a belt-shaped main body 1606a is folded once in a mountain or valley manner. For example, when two boards are placed in an environment affected by electromagnetic noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609' having a shield wire 1610 woven into a mesh on one facet is used to connect the two boards. By electrically connecting them, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved. Note that this shielded wire 1610 has an upper end side electrically connected to the ground (board ground (GND)) of one of the two boards, and a lower end side of the flexible flat cable 1609'. It is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the other of the two substrates.

Further, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area. The flexible flat cable 1609 can function as a shielding member that can prevent electromagnetic noise from penetrating toward the flexible flat cable 1609 in the area where the flexible flat cable 1609 is located. Further, in this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 was formed to face the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, by combining mountain folding and valley folding of the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this area, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield line 1610 is not provided in this area can be folded into the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 may be formed so as to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. In this way, the shield wire 1610 is secured in the area passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 that covers the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area. The side of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can prevent electromagnetic noise from penetrating toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield called the metal back cover of the production display device 1600, and a shield wire 1610 is provided. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 is covered with a shield wire 1610 to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the flexible flat cable 1609.

In addition, the protective cover body 1601 that covers all but the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 and the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 were configured separately, but the protective cover body 1601 As long as it is made of non-conductive resin, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be integrally molded.

Further, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above. At the same time, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via this connector (not shown), and a plurality of The electrode 1609bb of the flat conductor is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper side of the back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. At the same time, the shield wire 1610 was electrically connected to the ground of the control board (substrate ground (GND)) via a connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown). Therefore, for example, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged at both ends may be electrically connected to the shield wires 1610, respectively. Even with this configuration, the shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition, the control board can be connected to the control board via the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown) that covers the upper back surface of the liquid crystal panel (not shown) in the sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)).

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but between the flat conductors there is a flat conductor electrically connected to the board ground (GND) may be arranged so that flat conductors that transmit control signals and flat conductors that are electrically connected to substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. In this way, the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals. The flat conductor that transmits data (hereinafter referred to as the "flat conductor that is susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic noise") should be connected to the board ground (GND) and electrically adjacent to the flat conductor that is vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic noise. The flat conductor, which is susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic noise, is sandwiched between the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the board ground (GND). You can. In this way, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but in addition to the flat conductors transmitting control signals, these flat conductors include: A configuration that includes a flat conductor that is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) and a flat conductor that supplies various power supplies, and the board ground (GND) and the power supply are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, the power source should be an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current by rapidly increasing its resistance when the temperature rises to a certain temperature, or an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current by suppressing the current when the temperature rises, or a An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current reaches (The main body generates heat, this heat reduces conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body cools down, the conductivity returns and returns to normal.) It is preferable to do so. This is because, as mentioned above, the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness that is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electrical wiring. Because it is thin and thin, when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, the flexible flat cable 1609 can be prevented from shorting by the overcurrent protection circuit and overcurrent protection circuit, ensuring safety and preventing damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decorative devices]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, a back effect unit 3400 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. Here, a case where a light emitting effect unit 5000 is provided in place of the back effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. Figure 253 is a perspective view of the light-emitting production unit seen from the front, Figure 254 is a perspective view of the light-emitting production unit seen from the back, and Figure 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light-emitting production unit disassembled and seen from the front. Figure 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting unit disassembled and seen from the rear, Figure 257 is a front view showing the arrangement relationship between the LED bare chip and the light guide plate, and Figure 258 is the light guide unit arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. FIG. 259 is a front view showing the diffuser sheet that has been installed, and FIG. (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is correctly inserted into the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), showing the LED board of the flexible flat cable. It is a figure (c) which shows the abnormal state where insertion into a connector is insufficient. Note that in FIGS. 253 to 256 and FIG. 259, only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable is shown and other parts are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

[Light-emitting production unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a circular light emitting effect main body 5010, a T-shaped main body attachment part 5020 for attaching the emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part of the back box 3010, A control signal is guided into the light emitting effect main body 5010 along the back side of the main body attachment part 5020 and is output from the effect driving board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. A flexible flat cable 5030 (FFC (abbreviation for Flexible Flat Cable) that transmits data to the main body 5010 is a cable that is bent into a three-dimensional shape by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times. The conductor is coated with an insulator.)). Here, first, the light emitting effect main body 5010 will be explained, and the method of assembling the main body mounting part 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be explained in order.

[Light-emitting display body]
The light emitting display main body 5010 is made of a circular decorative body 5040 molded from transparent resin, and a thin circular transparent resin plate that is housed inside the decorative body 5040 and has a notch in the upper part. A diffusion sheet 5050 to be molded and a guide molded from a transparent resin having a circular shape with a notch in the upper part and housed inside the decoration body 5040 while being disposed on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050. A light plate 5060, an LED board 5070 which is housed inside the decoration body 5040 while being disposed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, and has a circular shape with a notch in the upper part, and a rear opening of the decoration body 5040. The lid body 5080 is molded from a transparent resin and has a circular shape with a notch in the upper part.

[Decoration body]
At the center of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 molded from a circular transparent resin, a convex portion 5040a that matches the outer shape of the character protrudes forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. There is. The outer periphery of the convex portion 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex portion 5040a is printed on the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 and the entire area of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex portion 5040a have a world view of the character. A background pattern (not shown) is printed with a design that represents the image. Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with characters and background patterns, the light emitting mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is changed from the front of the light emitting production unit 5000 (in other words, the pachinko machine 1 The player seated in front of the decorative body 5040 can easily see the change in the light emitting pattern of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040.

On the rear surface 5040y side of the decoration body 5040, a member accommodation recess 5040b is formed, which has a circular shape with a cutout in a part of the upper side and accommodates the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070. ing. On the upper left side of the member storage recess 5040b when viewing the decoration body 5040 from behind, there is a reverse placement prevention piece for preventing the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 from being accommodated upside down. 5040c is formed to protrude from the bottom inner surface of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 with a length of a first distance dimension. Furthermore, when viewing the decoration body 5040 from behind, on the upper left, right, and lower sides of the member accommodation recess 5040b, there are lids that regulate the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070, and that close the member accommodation recess 5040b. 5080 to the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 are formed so as to protrude from the bottom inner surface of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 by a first distance dimension. (Total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). In addition, on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 when looking at the decorative body 5040 from behind, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided with a second distance dimension toward the rear from the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040. (total of two mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED board]
The LED board 5070 has a circular shape with a notch in a part of the upper side, and a notch 5070a is formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. Through-holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member-accommodating recess 5040b.

A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. This LED bare chip (also referred to as "LED element") is an extremely small electronic component that is enclosed in a surface-mount type, chip-on-board type, or bullet-type package. In this embodiment, instead of mounting an LED package in which an LED bare chip is encapsulated on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. We adopted a configuration that directly implements the

Examples of methods for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 include wire bonding, flip chip bonding, etc. In this embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, unlike wire bonding, a wire is used to electrically connect the electrode of the LED bare chip and a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, but instead of using a wire to electrically connect the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070 A protrusion called a protrusion is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. This connection part is reinforced with solder, resin, etc.

On the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, five LED rows are provided in the vertical direction, in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in one row with a predetermined distance apart, and the first row from the bottom is 5070c1. In the fifth row 5070c5 from the bottom, six LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and in the second row 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth row 5070c4 from the bottom, LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. In the third stage 5070c3 from the bottom, eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction.

On the center line in the left-right direction of the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, a third row of LEDs 5070c3 is arranged. The fourth stage, which is one level above the LED row of the third stage 5070c3, is located on the intermediate line that passes approximately the midpoint between this center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070 and is parallel to this center line and the upper side of the LED board 5070. A 5070c4 LED array is arranged. Then, on an intermediate line that passes approximately the midpoint between this center line and a straight line that is parallel to this center line and passes through the lowest point of the circumference of the LED board 5070, and is parallel to this center line and the above-mentioned straight line, respectively. The LED row of the second stage 5070c2, which is one level below the LED row of the third stage 5070c3, is arranged. One of the LED rows of the fourth stage 5070c4 is placed on a vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left among the LED rows of the third stage 5070c3. At the same time, the first LED bare chip 5075 of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 is arranged, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 and the fourth LED bare chip 5075 are arranged. The seven LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row of 5070c4 are arranged so that they are not lined up vertically, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 in the third row of LEDs 5070c3 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the second row of LEDs 5070c2 are arranged so that they are not lined up vertically. The two LED bare chips 5075 are arranged so as not to be vertically aligned in a line. Note that the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 are arranged in a line in the vertical direction.

On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, on the upper side of the LED board 5070 and below the two through-holes 5070b, there is a fifth row of LEDs 5070c5, which is one level above the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4. is arranged, and the LED row of the first stage 5070c1, which is one level below the LED row of the second stage 5070c2, is arranged on the lowest point side of the circumference of the LED board 5070 and above one through hole 5070b. has been done. A vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the first LED bare chip 5075 and the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 and one from the left of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 The vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the 1st LED bare chip 5075 and the 2nd LED bare chip 5075 coincides, and on this straight line, the 1st LED from the left in the LED row of the 5th stage 5070c5 A bare chip 5075 is arranged, and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left side of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 is arranged, and seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c3 and the fifth LED bare chip 5070c5 are arranged. The six LED bare chips 5075 in the LED row are arranged so as not to be vertically lined up, and the seven LED bare chips 5075 in the second stage 5070c2 LED row and the six LED bare chips 5075 in the first stage 5070c1 are The LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a staggered manner so as not to be vertically lined up. Note that the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged on the above-mentioned straight line. Furthermore, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 are arranged. Among them, the second to seventh six LED bare chips 5075 and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the first stage 5070c1 LED row are arranged in a line in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, a connector 5070d is mounted that transmits a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. The lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into this connector 5070d and electrically connected. The upper end side of this flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the effect drive board 1720 and electrically connected. The control signal output from the production drive board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and controls the light emission mode of the LED bare chips 5075 mounted in plurality on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. be done.

Note that green resist liquid is applied to the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x and back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, except for various lands and through holes. The surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is further printed entirely with white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. In other words, the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is white, while the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 is green, and even though they are the same board, the colors of the front and back surfaces are different. It's different. The reason why the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is white is that the light emitted by the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is refracted by other members. When the light returns to the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the surface (mounting surface) of the LED board 5070 functions as a reflective sheet that can efficiently refract the returned light forward again. This is to make the 5070x have it.

[Modified example]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 by inputting a control signal from the production drive board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. was. That is, in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect driving board 1720 is controlled by electronic components for controlling LEDs (for example, ICs such as LED drivers and gradation control drivers) mounted on itself. The signal was output to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030. Electronic components for LED control mounted on this effect drive board 1720 may be configured to be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back side (solder side) 5070y of the LED board 5070, any electronic component for LED control that has a height dimension (distance dimension in the depth direction) comparable to the height of the connector 5070d can be used. Even if this LED control electronic component is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, it can be used as is without changing the dimensions of the decorative body 5040 or the lid body 5080. This can contribute to miniaturization of the effect drive board 1720. Furthermore, with this configuration, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075. You can also do it.

In addition, although flip chip bonding was adopted as a method for electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, wire bonding may be adopted instead of flip chip bonding. good.

[Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 5060, which is molded from transparent resin and has a circular shape with a notch in the upper part, has a notch 5060a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through-holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three attachment boss holes 5040d formed in the member-accommodating recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040.

The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. The back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060 has a cutout in a part of the upper side at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 so as to cover the LED bare chips 5075. It has a cylindrical shape (hereinafter referred to as "semi-cylindrical shape"), and the axis of this semi-cylindrical column is tilted slightly downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, so that the curved surface of the semi-cylindrical shape is tilted obliquely. An entrance recess 5060c is formed respectively. The bottom of the entrance recess 5060c does not penetrate the surface 5070x of the light guide plate 5060 and remains within the light guide plate 5060. Note that when the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 with the back surface 5060y in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED bare chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semicircular column. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is enclosed in the entrance recess 5060c.

On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape is formed from the opening side of the entrance recess 5060c in a section from the center point through which the axis of the semicircular cylinder passes to the position of a concentric circle spaced apart by a predetermined distance. A notch is formed in a part of the upper side of this cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the cylindrical flat surface 5060d and the opening side of the entrance recess 5060c are similar.

On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, beyond the section defined by the flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape from the center point through which the axis of the semicircular cylinder passes, a prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross section is formed concentrically, and A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the center point through which the axis of the semicircular column passes increases. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the prism portion 5060e is the distance dimension of a straight line connecting the center points of adjacent LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 (hereinafter referred to as "block reference distance in the left-right direction"). ). On the other hand, the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the prism part 5060e is from the notch part formed in the upper part of the flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape to one level below the stage of the LED bare chip 5075 sealed in the main entrance recess 5060c. The distance dimension from the center point of the nearest LED bare chip arranged in the stage to the final stage prism pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "vertical block reference distance dimension").

On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, an entrance recess 5060c, a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape, and a prism portion 5060e are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. Each single prism block 5060f is formed to form a prism surface. The horizontal distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f becomes the block standard distance dimension in the horizontal direction, and the vertical distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f becomes the block standard distance dimension in the vertical direction. Among the multiple LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x, the one closest to the left and right outer circumferential portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 (LED row of 1st stage 5070c1 to LED of 5th stage 5070c5) The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in each row, the first row 5070c1, the sixth LED bare chip 5075 from the left among the five cross-section LED rows, the second row 5070c2, and the fourth row 5070c4 on the left side. For the 7th LED bare chip 5075 and the 8th LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the third row of LEDs), the horizontal distance dimension of the single prism block 5060f is not the horizontal block standard distance dimension. , the final stage prism pattern is formed to extend to the outer peripheral end of the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060.

On the other hand, a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060, whereas a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, and the surface is flat without any processing. ing.

In this embodiment, instead of mounting an LED package in which an LED bare chip is sealed on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED bare chip sealed in the LED package is mounted on the surface of the LED board 5070. (Mounting aspect) We adopted a configuration in which it is directly mounted on the 5070x. As a result, the thickness of the light guide plate is different from the thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. can be made smaller by the depth distance dimension in the package, thereby ensuring a larger depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 and contributing to the three-dimensional modeling of the light emitting effect main body 5010. be able to. In addition, since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if the impact caused by a player hitting the door frame 3 etc. is transmitted directly to the door frame 3, the impact to the light emitting unit 5000 provided on the game board 5 will not be affected. By weakening the impact caused by the impact, there is a low probability that the multiple LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 will be damaged by the impact caused by the impact.

[Modified example]
Note that in this embodiment, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is encapsulated on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. ) 5070x, but if the depth and distance of the light-emitting display body 5010 of the light-emitting display unit 5000 does not interfere with the three-dimensional shape of the light-emitting display body 5010, a side-type LED bare chip may be used instead of the LED bare chip. A surface-mount type LED package may be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. In this case, the dimensional distance of the single prism block 5060f composed of the entrance recess 5060c, the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the prism portion 5060e increases, and the thickness of the light guide plate also increases. The light emitting surface of the side-type surface-mounted LED package does not face the diffusion sheet 5050, but faces below the incident recess 5060c. Proceed to the front diffusion sheet 5050.

[Diffusion sheet]
The diffusion sheet 5050 is formed by processing a thin circular transparent resin plate with a notch in the upper part, and has a notch at a position corresponding to the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. A portion 5050a is formed, and through holes 5050b are formed at positions corresponding to three attachment boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. The back side of the diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with white paint and processed to have a satin finish with fine irregularities, and the diffusion sheet 5050 is processed to have a satin finish with fine irregularities, and is used to absorb light from a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. When the light is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

The back surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040 in a state where it is in contact with the front surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 molded from transparent resin. The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040 while being in contact with the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. As described above, on the rear surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, an incident recess is provided at a position corresponding to a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 so as to cover the LED bare chips 5075. 5060c are formed respectively.

As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, five LED rows are provided in the vertical direction in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in one row and spaced apart by a predetermined distance. The LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows of the tiers are each enclosed in an entrance recess 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060. When the light-emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the entrance recess 5060c is brightly illuminated, so that the LEDs of each stage of LED rows sealed in each entrance recess 5060c are brighter than the area where the entrance recess 5060c is not formed. Light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the light guide plate 5060 molded with transparent resin and exits from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, increasing the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident recess 5060c. In this case, the region in which the space of each incident recess 5060c exists is arranged like a point light source, and it is difficult to illuminate the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 uniformly.

Therefore, on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, which are long in the horizontal direction and are coated with white paint, are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. At the same time, white paint is sprayed in dots on areas other than these five areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 to form a diffusion area 5050d that diffuses light. The area coated with this white paint becomes an opaque area where the rear or front cannot be seen through the diffusion sheet 5050. Note that no paint is applied to the surface 5050x of the diffusion sheet 5050.

Specifically, on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 of the LED board 5070, and a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 of the LED board 5070. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED column 5070c3 of the third stage of the LED board 5070, and a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the fourth stage 5070c4 of the LED board 5070. A white band region 5050c4 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row 5070c5 of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED board 5070.

The vertical distance dimensions of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 have the same distance dimension. For example, the vertical distance dimension of the white band region 5050c1 is at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. It has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d constituting the single prism block 5060f of the above-described light guide plate 5060. Furthermore, among the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band regions 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance dimension, for example, in the left-right direction of the white band region 5050c1. has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060, which is formed at the position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. are doing. Further, among the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance dimensions in the left-right direction of the white band regions 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance dimension, for example, in the left-right direction of the white band region 5050c2. has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape constituting the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060, which is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. are doing. Also, among the distances in the left-right direction of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the distance in the left-right direction of the white band region 5050c3 corresponds to the above-mentioned light guide plate 5060 formed at the position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. It has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape constituting the single prism block 5060f.

In this way, on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a band shape long in the left and right direction and coated with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 of the LED rows of each stage. By doing so, the light emitted from each entrance recess 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed toward the light guide plate 5060, so that the area where the space of each entrance recess 5060c exists is like a point light source. It can soften the state of emitting light.

Furthermore, since the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is white as described above, it is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, passes through the light guide plate 5060, and the surface of the LED board 5070 ( Mounting surface) The light returning toward 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

Further, the light emitted from the prism section 5060e constituting the single prism block 5060f is diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. In other words, the light emitted from each entrance recess 5060c is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed toward the light guide plate 5060, which softens the state in which the region where the space of each entrance recess 5060c exists emits light like a point light source. At the same time, the light returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED board 5070 and efficiently emitted forward again, and this emitted light passes through the prism. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it is possible to contribute to the aspect in which the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 is illuminated uniformly. This can contribute to uniformly illuminating the surface (surface 5060x) of the light guide plate 5060 facing the diffusion sheet 5050, so that the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable due to the light emitting effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the light emission effect.

[Lid body]
The lid body 5080, which is molded from transparent resin and has a circular shape with a notch in the upper part, has a notch part 5080a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through-holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three attachment boss holes 5040d formed in the member-accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

In addition, the lid body 5080 is formed with a plurality of long ventilation holes 5080c arranged vertically and horizontally, and a flexible flat cable 5030 is provided at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface 5070y of the LED board 5070. A wiring opening 5080d is formed through which the wiring passes.

Furthermore, when viewing the lid 5080 from behind, on the center left and right sides of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080, a mounting boss hole 5080e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 is provided with a third distance dimension toward the rear from the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. (total of two mounting boss holes 5080e). The outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 is the same as the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decoration body 5040 of the light emitting production main body 5010 mentioned above. It has the same outer diameter as the hole 5040e.

[Body mounting part]
The T-shaped main body attachment part 5020 that attaches the light-emitting production main body 5010 to the upper part of the back box 3010 has a T-shaped groove part in which the side walls are formed toward the rear, except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. a base body 5020a, and two metal L-shaped plates 5020b having a symmetrical shape that reinforce the base body 5020a along the side walls excluding the upper and lower sides of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, 5020b, and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, there are positions corresponding to two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light-emitting effect main body 5010, and a position corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the left and right sides of the upper side of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light-emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020d are formed at positions corresponding to two attachment boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. When the base body 5020a is viewed from behind, a plurality of metal plates 5020b, 5020b and a metal plate 5020c are fixed to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Mounting boss holes 5020e are formed to protrude rearward from the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a with a length of a fourth distance dimension (a total of 11 mounting boss holes 5020e). hole 5020e). The outer diameter of the mounting boss hole 5020e is the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 (the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decoration body 5040 of the light-emitting production main body 5010). The outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed in the outer diameter of the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5040e is about two times smaller than that of the outer diameter of the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed in the outer diameter of the mounting boss holes 5040e.

The two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a have two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, which are attached to the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, which are attached to the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, which are attached to the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, which are attached to the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, which are attached to the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, which are attached to the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, which are attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Through-holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right sides of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light-emitting production main body 5010, respectively. At the same time, through holes 5020bb are formed at positions corresponding to a plurality of attachment boss holes 5020e formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. In addition, a metal plate 5020c attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a has holes formed through the metal plate 5020c at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove. Holes 5020ca are formed respectively.

Furthermore, when looking at the base body 5020a from behind, a flexible flat cable 5030 is connected to the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a that is connected to this bottom. A wiring opening 5020f is formed to allow the wiring to pass through. Although not shown, a plurality of through holes are formed at the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a to attach the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part of the back box 3010.

In addition, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to the board ground (GND) via wiring not shown, and the ground of various boards provided on the game board 5. (Substrate ground (GND)) is the same ground (GND).

[Flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals output from the production drive board 1720 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It has multiple flat conductors covered with an insulator, and compared to normal round electrical wiring, it is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of normal round electrical wiring. Although not shown in the drawings, the area from the effect driving board 1720 to the light emitting effect main body 5010 is bent by repeating mountain folds and valley folds multiple times to form a three-dimensional shape. Along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c, and fold the mountain into the light emitting production body 5010, The main body 5030a is bent in three-dimensional form by repeating valley folds multiple times, and has a plurality of flat surfaces on the back side of the main body 5030a (not shown) on the upper end side of the main body 5030a, which is long in the horizontal direction and has a predetermined width. An electrode having a rectangular shape that is longer than the predetermined length of a plurality of exposed flat conductor electrodes that have a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a and has a predetermined length and is exposed. A reinforcing plate is formed to reinforce the main body 5030a, while a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb having a predetermined length are arranged exposed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a on the back side of the main body 5030a. A reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb having a predetermined thickness and a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed flat conductor electrodes 5030bb is formed on the surface side of the main body 5030a. .

Electrodes of a plurality of flat conductors (not shown) formed on the upper end side of this main body 5030a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the production drive board 1720, whereas electrodes are formed on the lower end side of this main body 5030a. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are electrically connected to a connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 of the light emitting display main body 5010.

Note that a capacitor called a bypass capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor for power supply (not shown) is connected between the power line and the board ground (GND) in the production drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. is implemented, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, between the power line of the LED board 5070 of the light emitting production main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected and the board ground (GND), a decoupling capacitor (not shown), a bypass capacitor (not shown) for power supply, etc. A capacitor called a bypass capacitor is mounted, and by lowering the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

As mentioned above, the flexible flat cable 5030 is bent three-dimensionally and routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so there is a flexible flat cable near the back surface of the game panel 1100. There is also a portion where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game balls B are polished in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubbed against each other during the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and discharged with static electricity, thereby emitting electromagnetic noise. . Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and its vicinity are in an environment where it is susceptible to electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030 that transmits the control signal to the light-emitting production main body 5010 is susceptible to noise and is prone to problems caused by electromagnetic noise (for example, legitimate data may change to other data and become garbled, or a signal that was not originally output may occur). However, as mentioned above, the area near the back of the game panel 1100 is susceptible to electromagnetic noise. There are some parts that are passed around.

Therefore, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of electromagnetic noise in the width direction (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "both ends") ) is used as a ground (GND) line as a power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged on both electrodes of the flat conductor. As a result, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors, the other electrodes except the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flat conductors are connected from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line, which is the electrode of the flat conductors on both ends of the ends. By placing a ground (GND) line between the source of electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge and the other electrodes (electrodes containing control signals) except for the electrodes of the flat conductor on both ends, Noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game ball B can be improved for other electrodes (electrodes including lines that transmit control signals) other than the electrodes of the flat conductor on both sides of the extreme end. .

In addition, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the most end are used as a ground (GND) line as a power line so that the power line is arranged together, and the most end A power supply line (for example, a +5V line) is arranged on the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on both sides. The power line (for example, +5V line) is strong against noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise, so it can be placed at the end of the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, which is closest to the electrodes on both sides. preferable. Furthermore, among the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends, the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on one of the ends and the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the other flat conductor on the other end. A power supply line is arranged on one side of the flat conductor, or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of one flat conductor on the farthest side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other flat conductor on the farthest side.

Furthermore, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, in addition to making the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flat conductor a ground (GND) line, However, in the part that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, two metal L-shaped plates are attached along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body attachment part 5020 of the light-emitting production main body 5010. 5020b, and is designed to be routed so as to pass between 5020b and metal plate 5020c. In other words, the flexible flat cable 503 is shielded by the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c, so that the portion of the flexible flat cable 503 that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, is , noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved.

As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors covered with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason for adopting the white color is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, so it can be mounted on various decorative boards provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflector that reflects the light emitted by the LED, the light leaking to the rear of the rear unit 3000 is suppressed as much as possible, and this contributes to reducing the effect of the light emitted by the light emitted by the LED. be.

[Modified example]
In order to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game ball B, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both sides of the extreme end are connected to the power supply line. Although the ground (GND) line is used as the power supply line so that the ground (GND) line can be arranged, the power supply line (for example, a +5V line) may be used as the power supply line so that the power supply line can be arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because the power supply line (eg, +5V line) is resistant to noise and is not easily affected by electromagnetic noise. In this case, among the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on both ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor at the extreme end and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor at the other end A ground (GND) line is arranged on one side of the electrode, or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of one of the flat conductors on the farthest side and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other flat conductor on the farthest side. ing.

In addition, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100 at the main body attachment part of the light emitting effect main body 5010. It is designed to be routed along the bottom inner surface of a T-shaped groove formed in a base body 5020a of the 5020, passing between two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and a metal plate 5020c. However, at least one of the electrodes of the flat conductor on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along one of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b. It is also possible to do so. In this way, the portion of the flexible flat cable 503 that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b, so that the part that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b, so that the part that is routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is susceptible to electromagnetic noise, is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b and can contribute to improving noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals. may be arranged so that flat conductors that transmit control signals and flat conductors that are electrically connected to substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. In this way, the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved for the plurality of flat conductors that transmit control signals.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals. The flat conductor that transmits data (hereinafter referred to as the "flat conductor that is susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic noise") should be connected to the board ground (GND) and electrically adjacent to the flat conductor that is vulnerable to the effects of electromagnetic noise. The flat conductor, which is susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic noise, is sandwiched between the flat conductors that are electrically connected to the board ground (GND). You can. In this way, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved for the flat conductor which is vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting control signals, but in addition to the flat conductors transmitting control signals, these flat conductors include: A configuration that includes a flat conductor that is electrically connected to the board ground (GND) and a flat conductor that supplies various power supplies, and the board ground (GND) and the power supply are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, the power source should be an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current by rapidly increasing the resistance when the temperature rises to a certain temperature, or an overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor that suppresses the current by suppressing the current when the temperature rises, or An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when the current reaches (The main body generates heat, this heat reduces conductivity and cuts off the current, and when the main body cools down, the conductivity returns and returns to normal.) It is preferable to do so. This is because, as mentioned above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness that is about one-third to one-fifth of the thickness (diameter) of a normal round electrical wiring. Because it is thin and thin, when an overcurrent flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented from shorting by the overcurrent protection circuit and overcurrent protection circuit, ensuring safety and preventing damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[How to assemble the light-emitting production unit]
Next, a method of assembling the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be briefly described. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 are arranged in order according to the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c formed in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5040d, and finally, the member A lid 5080 is placed to close the accommodation recess 5040b. In this state, the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080 are arranged on the same plane and are flush with each other, and the end surface of the reverse placement prevention piece 5040c and the end surface of the mounting boss hole 5040d are The above-mentioned first distance dimension is set in advance so that it does not protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and fits between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed in from the through hole 5080b formed on the back surface 5080y side of the lid body 5080 toward the attachment boss hole 5040d and fixed. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 are arranged and housed in the member accommodation recess 5040b of the decoration body 5040 when the decoration body 5040 is viewed from the front.

Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are attached to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. A metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed in from the through hole 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e. A pan head screw is screwed in from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c toward the attachment boss hole 5020e to fix it. The end surface of the mounting boss hole 5020e does not protrude from the back surface of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, and the metal plate 5020c, and the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, and the metal plate 5020c. The above-mentioned fourth distance dimension is set in advance so as to fall within the range.

Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through the wiring opening 5020f formed in the main body attachment part 5020. Note that a method for attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described later.

Next, the base body 5020a of the main body attachment part 5020 is arranged to match the attachment boss hole 5040e formed on the back surface 5040y of the decoration body 5040 and the attachment boss hole 5080e formed on the back surface 5080y of the lid body 5080. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is screwed in from the through hole 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b toward the mounting boss holes 5040e, 5080e to fix them. As described above, the end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b, and fit between the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b. A second distance dimension and a third distance dimension are set in advance.

Next, the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body attachment part 5020. The assembly of the light emitting production unit 5000 is completed by routing it so that it passes through.

Incidentally, conventionally, boards such as a main control board that controls game progress and gaming profits, a sub-control board that controls effects that are performed as the game progresses, and an image control board that controls the display of an image display device, etc. A game machine has been proposed in which a wire is disposed on the back side and various wiring members are routed around (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machines from the island equipment of the game hall are charged with static electricity as they rub against each other as they circulate between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machines, so they can be drawn around to the game machines. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from game balls for various types of wiring.

[How to attach the flexible flat cable to the LED board]

Here, a method for attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. 259. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 and inserted all the way. electrically connected.

Since the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted all the way into the connector 5070d, the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors and the plurality of flat conductors Poor contact may occur between the electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d.

Therefore, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, as shown in FIG. Near the top of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (in other words, near the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so as to serve as a mark for normal insertion. A long solid line guideline G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction (upper and outer) and a lower part of the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (in other words, a lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) A long solid guideline G4L extending linearly in the left-right direction near the corresponding position (lower outer side) and a guideline G4L for reinforcing the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guideline G4V extending in a straight line that matches the vertical straight line of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb is printed by silk printing.

Note that no through hole is formed in the area where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. This is because even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed due to the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubbing against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is This is to prevent the conductor from shorting due to the through hole.

[Relationship between the reinforcing plate of the flexible flat cable and the connector]
When inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, use a flat conductor. The conductor electrode 5030bb faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, whereas the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. . As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are correctly inserted to the depths of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259(b), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb and the guideline G4V are arranged in a positional relationship that matches and overlaps in the vertical direction. Note that if the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted all the way into the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the insertion amount ( If the amount of push-in is insufficient, as shown in FIG. 259(c), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is separated from the guideline G4V by the amount of insufficient insertion SRT. In this way, on the assembly line of a pachinko machine manufacturer, a worker connects the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the connector 5070d, it can be easily determined visually whether the electrode 5030bb is properly inserted to the back of the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

Note that the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted all the way into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. When the main body 5030a is inserted obliquely, the upper side of the lower end of the main body 5030a covers the guideline G4U that extends linearly in the left-right direction and cannot be seen, and the lower end of the lower end of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the left-right direction. It will be in a state where it has an inclination with respect to the guideline G4L. In this way, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 by the guidelines G4U, G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cb. It is possible to easily judge visually whether or not the connector 5070d is properly inserted all the way into the connector 5070d. As a result, on the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, a worker attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted into the connector 5070d to be mounted, it can be easily determined visually whether the electrode 5030bb has been properly inserted to the back of the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the efficiency of confirmation work.

[Modified example]
Note that it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the top of the position corresponding to the top side of the bottom end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the top and outside of the position corresponding to the top side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U is located near the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left-right direction. A long solid guideline G4L extending in a straight line is printed by silk printing, but a rectangular area having the guideline G4U as the upper side and the guideline G4L as the lower side may be printed solidly by silk printing. . Even with this configuration, the upper side of the solidly painted rectangular area can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the solidly painted rectangular area can function as the guideline G4L. Furthermore, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed due to the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubbing against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 is exposed. This prevents the resist from peeling off due to the peeling of the silk printing in the solid rectangular area, and prevents the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 covered with the resist from being exposed. It is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 from shorting out.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper outer side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U is located near the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left-right direction. A long solid line guideline G4L extending in a straight line was printed by silk printing, but the back side of the LED board 5070 corresponds to a rectangular area with the guideline G4U as the upper side and the guideline G4L as the lower side and the inside of the area. (Solder surface) A foil removal area may be formed on the copper foil surface of 5070y. Even with this configuration, the upper side of the rectangular area from which the foil has been removed can function as the guideline G4U, and the lower side of the rectangular area from which the foil has been removed can function as the guideline G4L. Furthermore, as the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 is exposed. Even if it is peeled off, there is no copper foil surface in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED board 5070 is exposed, so it is possible to prevent the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 from shorting. can.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper outer side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U is located near the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left-right direction. A long solid line guideline G4L extending in a straight line was printed by silk-screen printing, but by removing the copper foil from a part of the copper foil surface of the back side (solder side) 5070y of the LED board 5070, the guideline G4U was printed. , G4L may be formed, or guidelines G4U and G4L may be formed by not applying the resist liquid to a part of the area when applying the resist liquid to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder side) 5070y of the LED board 5070. You can.

Further, after the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are properly inserted into the connector 5070d on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 50700, the flexible flat cable The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are removed from the connector 5070d, and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030, In order to prevent short circuits due to the diagonal misalignment of each electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d and contact with other adjacent electrodes, the flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 50700. A fixed sticker having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction may be attached. In this case, on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 50700, the area where the fixed sticker is pasted is placed in a place slightly outward from the positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed sticker, for example, in the shape of a hook bracket ("). (It may be a figure such as a line or a symbol.) may be formed by printing each guideline by silk printing, or the copper foil in a part of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 50700 may be formed. A guideline in the shape of a hook bracket (") (a shape such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by removing the , or a resist liquid may be applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 50700. When the flexible flat cable 5030 is attached to the LED board with a fixed seal, a guideline in the shape of a hook bracket (") (a shape such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed by not applying resist solution to a part of the area. By being fixed to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the flexible flat cable 50700, the posture of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be fixed.

Further, it extends linearly in the left-right direction near the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the upper outer side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guideline G4U is located near the bottom of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, near the bottom outside of the position corresponding to the bottom side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) in the left-right direction. A long solid guideline G4L extending linearly in the vertical direction of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid line guideline G4V extending in a straight line that matches the straight line was formed on the LED board 5070, but instead of the solid line, a dashed line or a dashed double dotted line may be used, and the guidelines G4U and G4L may not be inserted. It may be an arrow line indicating the direction, or for the guideline G4V, it may be an arrow indicating the position of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb.

[Each decorative board for the door frame]
Next, each decorative board included in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 260 to 264. FIG. 260 is a block diagram illustrating the electrical connection of each decorative board provided in the door frame, FIG. 261 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 263 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board equipped with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 263 is a schematic diagram of a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. This is an enlarged view. Here, we will explain the electrical connections between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board provided in the door frame 3, an overview of the LED constant current drive circuit, a decorative board equipped with the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current drive circuit. A method of arranging the drive circuit will be explained.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, including the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, the center upper plate decoration 312a, the left side decoration 404 of the door frame, and the side The side window interior decoration part 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 of the window interior decoration member 412 are arranged, respectively, and the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration 276, and the plate A lower left plate decoration 281, a lower right plate decoration 286, and a lower central plate decoration 312b are arranged below the upper center decoration 312a, respectively.

Behind the plate left upper decorative body 271, a plate left upper decorative substrate 273 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the plate left upper decorative body 271 is disposed, and a plurality of plates are mounted on the plate left upper decorative substrate 273. The display is decorated with light emitting light using full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right plate decorative body 276, an upper right plate decorative board 278 formed in the shape of a long and thin strip extending from side to side along the upper right decorative body 276 is arranged. The light emitting decoration is performed using full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, five LEDs). Behind the plate center upper decorative body 312a, a plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape along the plate center upper decorative body 312a is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 provide light emitting decoration.

The door frame left side decorative body 404 has a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b, which are formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404 at the rear thereof. A door frame left side decorative board 402 is arranged, and a plurality of full color LEDs are mounted on each of the left side upper decorative board 402a and the left side lower decorative board 402b (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative board 402a 5 pieces on the left side lower decorative board 402b, and 10 pieces on the lower left side decorative board 402b). The side window interior decoration parts 410b are arranged in plural rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and behind the side window interior decoration parts 410b are side windows formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412. A window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is disposed, and a plurality of full color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 are used for light emitting decoration. The door frame right side decorative body 419 has a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419 behind it. A door frame right side decorative board 418 consisting of 4 pieces on the right side lower decorative board 418b, and 10 pieces on the lower right side decorative board 418b).

Behind the door frame top decoration body 453, a door frame top center decoration board 455 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending from side to side along the center portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 is arranged. A door frame top left decorative board 456 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the left side of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is disposed, and a plurality of door frame top right decorative boards 457 are mounted on each of the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Light-emitting decoration is provided by full-color LEDs (in the present embodiment, 11 LEDs are placed on the door frame top center decorative board 455, 7 pieces are placed on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and 6 pieces are placed on the door frame top right decorative board 457).

Behind the plate lower left decorative body 281, a plate lower left decorative board 283 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending from side to side along the plate left lower decorative body 281 is arranged, and a plurality of plates are mounted on the plate left lower decorative board 283. The lighting is decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the plate lower right decorative body 286, a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending from side to side along the plate right lower decorative body 286 is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment) are mounted to decorate the area. The plate center lower decorative body 312b has a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape along the plate center lower decorative body 312b behind it. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 provide light emitting decoration.

Note that the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the effect operation ring decoration board 352 formed in the form of a ring divided into front and rear parts, as described above. The performance operation ring decorative board 352 includes a front decorative board 352a formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape on the front side, and a rear decorative board 352b formed in the shape of an elongated strip plate having the shape of a semicircular arc on the rear side. , is composed of. The rotation operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the light-emitting decoration is performed by 9 pieces).

In this way, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip. As a result, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distance dimensions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, etc. can also be provided.

[Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
The upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the upper center decorative board 314, the upper left side decorative board 402a, the lower left side decorative board 402b, and the side upper left decorative board 273, upper left decorative board 278, upper left decorative board 402b, and lower left side decorative board 402b are arranged on various decorative bodies and decorative parts of the door frame 3. Window interior decoration part decorative board 413, right side upper decorative board 418a, right side lower decorative board 418b, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, plate lower left decorative board 283, the door frame side decorative boards such as the bottom right decorative board 288, the bottom center decorative board 316, the front decorative board 352a, and the back decorative board 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. Electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 260.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives light emission data, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, and is serially outputted from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1, and light emission data SDAT2, which is a second serial system on the door frame side, and clock signal SCLK2 are input independently. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. ) line and is grounded (GND).

[Door frame side 1st serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the pan unit relay of the pan unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the board 214 and also to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

The first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the pan unit relay board 214, are connected to the bottom left decorative board 283, the bottom right decorative board 288, and are input to the operation section relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

The first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the plate lower left decorative board 283, are input to the plate upper left decorative board 273, respectively. In other words, the plate lower left decorative board 283 becomes a bridging board that transmits the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decorative board 273. The decorative board 283 and the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate are electrically connected. The first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the plate lower left decorative board 283, which serves as a bridging board. In addition, a connector (not shown) for outputting the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate is provided. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left decorative board 273 that is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 (that is, the final stage after the lower left decorative board 283) has an illustration of the lower left decorative board 283. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided, into which the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively outputted from output connectors that are not shown. .

The door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the lower right decorative board 288 of the plate, are respectively input to the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate. In other words, the plate lower right decorative board 288 becomes a bridging board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper right decorative board 278. The lower right decorative board 288 and the upper right decorative board 278 are electrically connected. The first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the plate lower right decorative board 288, which serves as a bridging board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and an illustration for outputting the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the upper right decorative board 278, respectively. A connector for output that does not work is provided. On the other hand, the upper right decorative board 278, which is electrically connected to the lower right decorative board 288 (that is, the final stage after the lower right decorative board 288), has the lower right decorative board 278. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided to which the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of 288. ing.

The door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the operation relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300, are connected to the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate It is input to the lower center decorative board 316 and the front decorative board 352a of the production operation ring decorative board 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) that are input to the front decorative board 352a are respectively input to the rear decorative board 352b. In other words, the front decorative board 352a serves as a bridging board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. and the rear decorative board 352b are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The front decoration board 352a, which serves as a bridging board, receives the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) from the operation section relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300, respectively. An input connector (not shown) is provided for input, and for outputting the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, the rear decorative board 352b that is electrically connected to the front decorative board 352a (that is, the final stage after the front decorative board 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative board 352a. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided to which the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) respectively output from are input.

Here, for example, a brief description will be given of the plate lower left decorative board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input. Then, the plate lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dispersion circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current of the current to flow to sdLED1 to sdLED6. It mainly consists of a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the pan unit relay board 214. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 283x is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, by having the heat dispersion circuit 283c take charge of a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

Also, for example, a brief description will be given of the upper left decorative board 273 to which the first serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) from the lower left decorative board 283 are input. The plate upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dispersion circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink type constant current drive circuit 273x that can flow a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , and a maximum current setting circuit 273y that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x performs control to flow a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate lower left decorative board 283. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 273x is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, by having the heat dispersion circuit 273c take charge of part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[Second serial system on door frame side]
The door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. In addition to being input to the board 402b, the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the lower right side decoration board 418b of the door frame right side decoration board 418, and the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. are entered respectively.

The +12 V DC and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative board 402b of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are input to the left side upper decorative board 402a of the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) that are input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are connected to the door frame top right decorative board. 457 is input.

The door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) that are input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top right decorative board 457 becomes a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top center decorative board 455. The door frame top right decorative board 457 and the door frame top center decorative board 455 are electrically connected together. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridging board has a second serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC +12V, and ground. Input connectors (not shown) into which (GND) are respectively input are provided, and the second serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) are connected to the center of the top of the door frame. Output connectors (not shown) for outputting to the decorative board 455 are provided. In addition, the door frame top center decorative board 455 that is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative board 457 (that is, the downstream part of the door frame top right decorative board 457) has an illustration of the door frame top right decorative board 457. Input connectors (not shown) are provided to which the second serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output from output connectors that are not shown. , a second serial system on the door frame side (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) are provided with output connectors (not shown) for outputting them to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

The door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) that are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 becomes a bridging board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. The door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are electrically connected together. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative board 456 that is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative board 455 (that is, the final stage after the door frame top central decorative board 455) has a Inputs (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output from output connectors (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455. Only one connector is provided.

Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is inputted. To briefly explain the left side lower decorative board 402b, the left side lower decorative board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat dispersion circuit 402bc, and 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, and allows a constant current to flow through hdLED1 to hdLED8. It mainly consists of a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 402bax that can perform a constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax causes a constant current to flow through the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the plate upper left decorative board 273, and A sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx that can flow a constant current to hdLED10 and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, and hdLED9, hdLED10, and the left side. It mainly consists of a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper side decorative board 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx controls the circuit board on which it is mounted (the lower left side decorative board 402b) based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. A constant current is controlled to flow through the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 on the left side upper decorative board 402a.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, by having the heat dispersion circuit 402bc take charge of a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the upper left side decorative board 402a. ing.

In this way, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the board (lower left side decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is transmitted to the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the board on which it is mounted (lower left side decorative board 402b), as well as to the subsequent board. The heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative board 402a can disperse the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current across the board (lower left side decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted and to the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left side decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board. has been done. Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the lower left side decorative board 402b and the upper left side decorative board 402a is always required. The operator who performs this work is careful not to touch the connector on the left side lower decorative board 402b, the connector on the left side upper decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc on the left side lower decorative board 402b, or the heat dissipation circuit 402bc on the left side upper decorative board 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the lower left side decorative board 402b and the upper left side decorative board 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, as well as static electricity. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components caused by

Note that, as described above, the left side upper decorative board 402a receives DC +12V and ground (GND) from the left side lower decorative board 402b, and also receives fixed input from five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Each line that carries current is input. As described above, the left side upper decorative board 402a includes a heat dispersion circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402ac not only has the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx, but also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[Light emission data]
Here, to briefly explain the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 that are serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for specifying the light emission mode, and are the data for specifying the light emission mode. It consists of key information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit is designated among the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

[Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an overview of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 261. In this embodiment, since the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 are the same circuit, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the plate lower left decorative board 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and can set the maximum current of the current to be passed to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. It mainly consists of a maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of

[Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output current for each channel. In this embodiment, an output channel LR is used for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. In other words, in this embodiment, the light emission mode of up to eight full-color LEDs can be controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 using one constant current drive circuit. is now possible.

The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current drive section 283xi. It mainly consists of

[Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that receives +12V DC from the +12V power supply line and can generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (+5V DC in this embodiment) used within the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current drive section. 283xi, and this internal power supply Vreg powers the reset section 283xb, data line buffer 283xc, clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current drive section 283xi. is now able to operate.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. It is used within H.283x. This is because when the +5V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is used, this +5V power line must be routed through electrical wiring, so the length of the +5V power line that supplies +5V DC is reduced. The longer it becomes, the easier it is for noise to penetrate. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the +5V power supply line and +5V DC is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED will flicker due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, by eliminating the need for the constant current drive circuit 283x to use the +5V power line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630, the constant current drive circuit 283x can be regulated from the +12V power line, which has extremely high noise resistance compared to the +5V power line. The linear power supply 283xa of the current drive circuit 283x has a configuration in which +5V DC is independently created as an internal power supply Vreg.

In this way, in this embodiment, by using the internal power supply Vreg only within the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg. This makes it possible to stabilize the internal power supply Vreg. This stabilizes the internal power supply Vreg, which can contribute to preventing flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 caused by external noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Furthermore, input electrical wiring for the +5V power supply line and external transmission electrical wiring are unnecessary, contributing to miniaturization of the connector.

[Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset section 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current drive section 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current drive section 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current drive section 283xi start operating.

For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. There is. For example, if a line that transmits a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal increases, making it easier for noise to enter. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the constant current drive circuit 283x will be reset due to the influence of the external noise and the LED will turn off. Therefore, in this embodiment, by eliminating the need for a reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, a configuration is adopted in which a reset signal is independently created as an internal reset signal RST in the reset section 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x. did.

In this way, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards, but only within the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, thereby making it possible to stabilize the internal reset signal RST. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x is not reset due to external noise, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to preventing unexpected extinguishing and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise. Further, input electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line and external transmission electrical wiring are unnecessary, contributing to miniaturization of the connector.

[buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "data line") that transmits serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side). This circuit is capable of inputting serial data, shaping the waveform of a signal transmitting the serial data, and outputting the shaped signal to the outside of the logic processing section 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "clock line") that transmits a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side). This circuit is capable of receiving a clock signal from the input circuit, shaping the waveform of the clock signal, and outputting the waveform to the outside of the logic processing section 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x, respectively.

As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across multiple boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of both the data line and the clock line become longer, making it easier for noise to enter. Therefore, in this embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x can be reduced. A configuration is adopted in which the waveform is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and subsequent boards.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the lengths of both the data line and the clock line become long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. This makes it possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it can be made resistant to external noise.

[Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify individuals) of the constant current drive circuit 283x using three ID resistors (not shown) based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa. It is now possible to do so.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not something that is set appropriately by receiving data from software.

[Oscillator, logic processing section]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x that has been shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) is input to the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Sometimes, gradation information is taken in from this serial data, and control is performed to set the gradation degree in the output channel in the PWM section 283xh based on a signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the gradation information is taken in. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and the setting is made in the PWM section 283xh. control to maintain the current contents.

[PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation level) of the LED in each output channel from turning off to turning on (maximum brightness) in a total of 128 steps from gradation level 0 (zero) to gradation level 127. The gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control section (not shown) for one output channel. In other words, the PWM section 283xh individually includes PWM gradation control sections 1 to 24 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control sections) corresponding to output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8. ing. When the gradation level is set, these PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 control the constant current drive unit 283xi to flow a current that corresponds to the set gradation level.

[Constant current drive section]
The constant current drive unit 283xi operates one constant current drive unit (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation level is set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to PWM gradation control unit 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh described above. A current driver causes a constant current to flow through the LED elements that make up the full color LED. In other words, the constant current drive unit 283xi includes constant current drivers 1 to 24 (ie, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 (ie, 24 constant current drivers).

Constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit red (R) light that constitute the full color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. While being electrically connected, the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 has one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit green (G) light that constitute the full color LEDs in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. While being electrically connected, the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 have one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit blue (B) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. While being electrically connected, the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element, which constitute the full-color LED corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line and receives +12V DC.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 1 to constant current driver 8), so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. It is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24), so that the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24 side, respectively. ing.

Constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 each absorb a constant current flowing to an individually set red (R) LED element that constitutes a full-color LED, thereby converting the red (R) LED element that constitutes a full-color LED. can emit light. Constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 each absorb a constant current flowing to an individually set green (G) LED element that constitutes a full-color LED, thereby converting the green (G) LED element that constitutes a full-color LED. can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 each draw a constant current flowing to the individually set blue (B) LED elements that make up the full color LED, thereby converting the blue (B) LED elements that make up the full color LED. can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light from 24 LED elements, that is, 8 full-color LEDs, with individually set constant currents. This makes it possible to turn off the light, turn on at one gradation level, blink at one gradation level, etc.

[Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit red (R) that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and output channels LG1 to LG1. Resistor Rg that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits green (G), which configures the full-color LED in the eight output channels up to LG8, and configures the full-color LED in the eight output channels from output channels LB1 to LB8. It is composed of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current drive section 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 provided in the constant current drive section 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). There is. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 included in the constant current drive section 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). There is.

[Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative board including an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262. Here, a decorative board including one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board including two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. Note that the above-mentioned LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 are configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 261 and 262, for convenience of explanation, the above-mentioned output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are indicated by the same reference numerals.

[Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board equipped with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distributed circuit 283c is provided.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives the light emission data SDAT1, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, which is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , clock signal SCLK1 are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V DC, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is connected and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the plate lower left decorative board 283 connects the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 to the plate unit 200. It is input via the dish unit relay board 214. The +12V DC is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and is also input to the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and The signals are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to constant current driver 22). Note that the output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

Based on the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a selects a signal from the light emission data SDAT1 when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are individually controlled and lit in a controlled manner so as to match the captured tone information.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x).

Note that the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the top left decoration of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above). In addition to being input to the board 273, +12 V DC and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate via the lower left decorative board 283 of the plate. This prevents noise that has entered the data line and clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-mentioned constant current drive circuit 283x) from being transmitted to the subsequent board, the upper left decorative board 273. , the waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

The +12V DC is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and is also input to the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and The signals are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (the above-mentioned constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to constant current driver 22). Note that the output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

Based on the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a selects a signal from the light emission data SDAT1 when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is captured, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled and lit in a controlled manner so as to match the captured tone information.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

In addition to the lower left decorative board 283 and the upper left decorative board 273, the lower right decorative board 288, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper right decorative board 456 are used as decorative boards equipped with one LED constant current drive circuit. , and a door frame top right decorative board 457.

[Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. Equipped with ~hdLED10 and a heat dispersion circuit 402bc.

As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 receives the light emission data SDAT2, which is the second serial system on the door frame side, which is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , clock signal SCLK2 are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power line of the power supply board 630 to receive +12V DC, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. It is connected and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC +12V, and ground (GND). There is. DC +12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and is also input to the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, which constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. , and are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements, respectively.

In this embodiment, as described above, one constant current drive circuit controls the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually for up to eight full-color LEDs to control the light emission mode. It is now possible to control it. Therefore, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emission mode of the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two The light emission mode of the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 is controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board, across the board on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). The light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

Of the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are It is electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, and drives full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) through heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba through heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. ~LB8 (the above-mentioned constant current driver 17 ~ constant current driver 24) are electrically connected.

Among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 have cathode terminals of red (R) LED elements that constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10, respectively. It is electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 (the above-mentioned constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dispersion resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, and drives the full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (the above-mentioned constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 10) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (the above-described constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18).

In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board to the left-side lower decorative board 402b, the red ( The cathode terminal of the LED element R) is connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative board 402a and the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative board 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current driver 3 to constant current driver 7 described above) and constitute the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are, respectively, Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-mentioned constant current driver The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements, which are electrically connected to the constant current driver 11 to constant current driver 15) and which constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, are connected to the heat dispersion resistors huRb1b to 15 on the left side upper decorative board 402a, respectively. huRb5b, and electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the above-mentioned constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the left side lower decorative board 402b. has been done. Note that the output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

Based on the second serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba selects a signal from the light emission data SDAT2 when its own ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2. The gradation information is captured, and among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and lit to match the captured gradation information. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb receives data from a door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is taken from the emission data SDAT2, and the gradation information is set to 10. Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled to dim and light, and the left side lower decorative board 402b becomes the subsequent board. Five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a are individually controlled to dim and turn on.

As mentioned above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suck) type, so it generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, hdRb1 to hdRb8, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink (suck) type, so it sinks the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and also Heat is generated by sucking a constant current flowing through five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is a substrate following the lower side decorative board 402b. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The heat dispersion resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10 constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is a subsequent board to the left side lower decorative board 402b. For huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc on the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the left side upper decorative board 402a Heat dispersion resistors huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in It is now possible to do so.

Further, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the battery, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

In addition to the left side lower decorative board 402b, the decorative boards equipped with two LED constant current drive circuits include a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, a side window interior decoration part decorative board 413, and a right side decorative board 414. There is a lower decorative board 418b and a door frame top central decorative board 455.

In addition to the left side upper decorative board 402a, there is a right side upper decorative board 418a as a decorative board that does not include any LED constant current drive circuit.

[How to arrange the LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 263 and 264. In this embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuits provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 are the same circuit, as described above. Here, a constant current drive circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. The type of IC package for the constant current drive circuit is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) with a square planar shape (width length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). ), which is the so-called VQFN. Among the four edges of the constant current drive circuit, one edge is the input side, and the remaining three edges are the output sides 1 to 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 264, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in this embodiment is formed into an elongated strip shape, and one is provided with one LED constant current drive circuit and the other is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side, which is formed in a vertically extending elongated strip shape and has two LED constant current drive circuits. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the upper plate center decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 263(a), the lower left side decorative board 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are , is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Note that a connector LDUCN for connecting electrical wiring to the left side upper decorative board 402a is mounted on the upper end side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the LEDs on the left side lower decorative board 402b are not mounted. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay board 105 and electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b are provided with electrodes (so-called pads), through holes, test pads, etc. for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding lands etc. has been done. In this embodiment, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b reduces the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is now possible to increase the

On the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are shown. The areas and are not printed at all as silk printing. Further, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not formed as a cutout using white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b.

This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is reduced due to the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed. This is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

Further, the door frame left side decoration body 404 shown in FIG. 75 provided on the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403, as described above. A left side inner lens 403 is attached to the rear of the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame. As described above, the left side inner lens 403 is formed to be transparent and has a lens cut (formed in a polyhedron) so that it can refract light diffusely. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame left side decorative board 402 located behind the door frame. When a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), his line of sight changes depending on the direction of his head (face), and the left side lower decorative board 402b provided in the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame temporarily changes. Even if the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 402bx, there are many full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 on the solid white resist painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. The part number corresponding to hdLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed are not silk-printed at all, so it corresponds to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player. This prevents the player from seeing the part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed. Therefore, the numbers that identify the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and the auxiliary lines that indicate the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the part numbers that correspond to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area (area indicating the position where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged).

Note that on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is placed are completely printed as silk. Not printed. This prevents the player from seeing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN, which has no relation to the game, and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is placed.

Further, as described above, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b using a solid white resist. The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 each have a white resin package (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. As described above, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Not yet. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Furthermore, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is written in foil letters (that is, the wiring that is made of copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). The foil-cut letters are formed by creating a letter with a pattern and punching out the surrounding copper foil. covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed to be electrically insulated from the electronic components. Note that the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is written on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b instead of on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. (copper plane) may be formed by forming characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil and then removing the surrounding copper foil. The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b are marked with foil-cut letters (that is, letters are made with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and the surrounding area is They may also be formed as cut-out characters (cut out characters formed by cutting out copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b are formed as a solid earth, as will be described later. Therefore, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is determined by making a letter with a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and then removing the surrounding copper foil. The characters are not formed as cut-out characters (formed by cutting out characters), but are formed as cut-out characters by cutting out characters from either one or both of the solid ground of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid ground of the non-LED mounting surface 402by. You can leave it there.

On the other hand, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b, there are a constant current drive circuit 402bax and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, etc. are to be placed are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) as silk-screen printing, and electronic components are placed near these areas. The corresponding part number is printed in yellow (or black) as a silkscreen. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is placed is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 264(a)) on the lower left side decorative board. It is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, and IC1 (FIG. 264 ( (See a) is printed as a silk screen with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Then, the areas indicating the positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are placed are silk-printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 264(a)). The maximum current setting is printed on the solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, and the maximum current setting is printed on the right side near these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the circuit 402bay and the corresponding part numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 264(a)) are silk-printed in yellow (or black) on the LED on the lower left side decorative board 402b. Each is printed on a solid white resist on the non-mounting surface 402by.

Furthermore, the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b corresponds to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The areas to be printed are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 264(a), only the chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are shown respectively). At the same time, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed near these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 above or below (Fig. 264(a) shows hdLED4, hdLED5, which are full-color LEDs, etc.). Only the corresponding part numbers LED4 and LED5 are shown respectively) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

Note that on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, there is an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is placed. is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) not shown as silk-screen printing, and the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk-screen print near this area. ing.

Furthermore, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b are not white, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is not white. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having one of black, brown, and blue colors. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color, have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so has been implemented.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a lighting test is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b (for example, (performed for each LED element) for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are displayed near the plurality of check pins on the lower left side decoration. It is printed in yellow (or black, not shown) as silk printing on a solid white resist on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the board 402b. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

In addition, in the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED, and connectors that do not have a white color are replaced by LEDs that use a full-color LED light emission. Because the reflectance on the mounting surface would decrease, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all, but the area corresponding to the member placed in front of the LED mounting surface due to full-color LED light emission is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in that area, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that area. In this case, on the solid white resist on the non-LED mounting surface, areas indicating the positions where electronic components and connectors are to be placed are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines, not shown) as silk printing. At the same time, near this area, part numbers corresponding to electronic components and connectors are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative board 402b are formed as so-called solid earths, in which areas excluding land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic components and connectors are grounded (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounted surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

As described above, the lower left side decorative board 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, so when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the lower left side decorative board 402b The width dimension from the left end side 402beg1 to the right end side 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. Therefore, if the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or right edge 402beg2 of the lower left decorative board 402b becomes extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn out from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on that edge. However, because there are restrictions on the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance between adjacent wiring patterns, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge of the wiring pattern. .

Therefore, in this embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b. The configuration was adopted.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower right edge of the four edge edges of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b. By arranging it near the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the input side terminal is connected to the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC +12V, ground (GND), and resistors Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left edge, upper left edge, and upper right edge are mainly the output side 1 terminal to output side, respectively. The terminals on the output side 1 to 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the second serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT2), as shown in FIG. , clock signal SCLK2), etc. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Moreover, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b. In addition, the remaining two end sides can be arranged at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left decorative board 402b. As a result, from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the minimum distance dimension is limited by the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns. You can also extract all wiring patterns. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in the left side lower decorative board 402b formed in the shape of a long and thin strip extending vertically.

In addition, by adopting this arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, group 1 is made up of four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4, and group 1 is made up of four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be placed between the group 2 consisting of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to group 1 and group 2 can be reduced. can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of wiring patterns between group 1 and group 2 from becoming longer or shorter in favor of either group 1 or group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern placement and routing on the workpiece.

Furthermore, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is connected to the vertically central portion of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full color LED in FIG. 263(a) In addition, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be placed closer to the lower side than the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b (Fig. 263(a)). (the portion where hdLED6, which is a full-color LED, is arranged), and can be placed above hdLED8, which is a full-color LED configured in group 2 and whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 can be secured on the lower left side decorative board 402b, and at the same time, from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx , the area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the left-side upper decorative board 402a shown in FIG. 262 is provided on the left-side lower decorative board. 402b.

In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) with a rectangular planar shape, and are 0805 (designation: 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length) in the so-called EIA format. length: 1.25 mm). In other words, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and capacitors (not shown) are larger than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and one end side of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb in the longitudinal direction is the left end side of the left side lower decorative board 402b. 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and one end side of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It is arranged like this. In other words, the end sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, which are arranged such that the end sides of the land patterns are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the resistor Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are respectively arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b so as to be non-parallel.

In addition, as described above, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is as follows: The door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are arranged in a tilted state and are almost the same. Unlike the other decorative substrates of the frame 3, the decorative substrates are Since the width dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge is large, the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is arranged so that it is parallel to the upper end side and the lower end side. In other words, in this embodiment, the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are parallel to the edges of the decorative board, and the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are not parallel to the edges of the decorative board. There is a mixture of and. In this embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 includes, in addition to the 11 full-color LEDs provided on itself, another central decorative board on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. one LED constant current drive circuit (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, Illustrated by one LED constant current drive circuit (here, the second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)) of the second maximum current setting circuit) Two heat dispersion circuits (the first constant current drive circuit is the first heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance), the second constant current drive circuit is the second heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) In addition to its own seven full-color LEDs, the door frame top left decorative board 456 controls another left decorative board (not shown) on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted. One LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided in 457 has one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit) equipped with another right decorative board on which two full color LEDs (not shown) are mounted, in addition to the six full color LEDs provided on itself. , maximum current setting circuit) directly controls light emission through one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistor) provided in itself (not shown). The other central decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending from side to side along the central part of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is formed on the left side of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative board is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the right side of the door frame top decoration body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistor) on each of the other central decorative substrate, the other left decorative substrate, and the other right decorative substrate. As described above, the heat dispersion circuit (here, the second heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistor)) provided in the door frame top central decorative board 455 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other central decorative board are In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative board 455 itself, it also prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has the ability to. In addition, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other left decorative board are the LED constant current drive circuit (accurate) provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself. In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit), it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Furthermore, as described above, the heat dispersion circuit provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat dispersion circuit of the other right decorative board are different from the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately) provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself. In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit), it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

In addition, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and 10 full color LEDs When viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10 are located close to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. In contrast, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged near the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. A configuration is adopted in which the LED is disposed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of the sink (suck) type, and generate heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. Therefore, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx from the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, even in the left side lower decorative board 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less likely to affect the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

In addition, by arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx to be inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the constant current drive circuit The land patterns of 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so that their edges are parallel to the left and right sides of the decorative board (i.e., the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decoration body 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared to the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the one in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board is a better decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be made shorter. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left and right direction.

[Central top decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 263(b), the plate center upper decorative board 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a, 314b, 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 facing upward of the production operation unit 300, while the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, which is the side facing upward of the production operation unit 300. Note that when the plate center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 263(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the plate center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the plate center upper decorative body 312a). A connector HCN for connecting the operation section relay board 392 and electrical wiring is mounted on the right side along the upper end side 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the decorative board 314 on the center of the plate are provided with electrodes (so-called pads), through holes, test pads, etc. for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area excluding lands etc. has been done. In this embodiment, a solid white resist is applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, so that the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is emitted to the front (that is, to the side facing upward of the production operation unit 300). It is now possible to increase the reflectance of

On the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are shown. The areas and are not printed at all as silk printing. Furthermore, the board management number of the center upper plate decorative board 314 is not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, even as cut-out characters using white resist.

This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 due to the light emitted by the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reduced due to the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed. This is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

Further, as described above, the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. , a plate center upper decorative board 314 is attached below (or behind) the plate center upper inner lens 313. As described above, the plate center upper decoration body 312a is formed transparent because the unit front cover 312 is formed transparent. As described above, the inner lens 313 on the upper center of the plate is formed transparent, has a lens cut (formed in a polyhedron), and is formed so as to be able to diffusely refract light. It is difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the plate center upper decorative board 314 disposed below (or behind) the lens 313. When a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his head (face), his line of sight changes depending on the direction of his head (face), and temporarily the upper center of the plate provided in the upper center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 is displayed. Even if the player can see the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314, full-color LEDs are not visible on the solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 in the first place. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed are not silk-printed at all, so the full-color LEDs have no relation to the game for the player. This prevents the part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the numbers that identify the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) and the auxiliary lines that indicate the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the part numbers that correspond to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area (indicating the position where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged).

In addition, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is placed are completely printed as silk. Not printed. This prevents the player from seeing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN, which has no relation to the game, and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is placed.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is covered with a white resist. The full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing made of white (also called natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) with a white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. As described above, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. Not yet. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the center upper decorative board 314, the board management number of the upper center decorative board 314 is written in foil letters (that is, the wiring that is made of copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). The foil-cut letters are formed by forming letters with a pattern and cutting out the surrounding copper foil. covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed to be electrically insulated from the electronic components. In addition, the board control number of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is written on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 instead of on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. (copper plane) may be formed by forming characters using a wiring pattern made of copper foil and removing the surrounding copper foil, or by forming characters on the layer (copper plane) on which the copper foil is formed, or by cutting out the surrounding copper foil. Letters are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate (that is, letters are formed using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), and the surrounding area is They may also be formed as cut-out characters (cut out characters formed by cutting out copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are formed as a solid earth, as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the upper plate center decorative board 314 is determined by cutting out letters (in other words, in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), letters are made from the wiring pattern made of copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed. The letters are not formed as cut-out characters (cut-out characters formed by cutting), but are formed as cut-out letters by cutting out characters from either one or both of the solid ground on the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid ground on the non-LED mounting surface 314y. You can leave it there.

On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, are on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314. Areas indicating the locations of electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various distributed resistors are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) (not shown) as silk-screen printing, and there are also markings near these areas. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

In addition, the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate corresponds to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish. The areas to be displayed are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. are each printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

Note that on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish, there is an area indicating the position where the connector HCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish is placed. is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) not shown as a silkscreen, and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as a silkscreen near this area. ing.

Furthermore, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are not white, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is not white. The package is made of black resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because their reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs decreases.

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate (for example, (performed for each LED element) for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed near the plurality of check pins as a decoration on the center of the plate. It is printed in yellow (or black, not shown) as silk printing on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the board 314. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are formed as so-called solid earths, in which areas excluding land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic components and connectors are grounded (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314 and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounted surface 314y of the upper plate center decorative board 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). There is.

Note that in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color that reduces reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED, and connectors that do not have a white color are replaced by light emission from a full-color LED. Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that area. In this case, on the solid white resist on the non-LED mounting surface, areas indicating the positions where electronic components and connectors are to be placed are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines, not shown) as silk printing. At the same time, near this area, part numbers corresponding to electronic components and connectors are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

As described above, the plate center upper decorative board 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape. Therefore, the plate center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. When viewed (that is, when the plate center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the plate center upper decorative body 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. The width dimension extending up to this point is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, if the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative board 314, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx Since the distance between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative board 314 becomes extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn out from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on that edge. However, because there are restrictions on the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance between adjacent wiring patterns, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge of the wiring pattern. .

Therefore, in this embodiment, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. The configuration was adopted.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the lower left edge of the four edges of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is the input point when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314. By arranging it near the upper end side 314eg1 of the plate center upper decorative board 314, the input side terminal is connected to the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) as shown in FIG. ), DC +12V, and ground (GND), and the resistors Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left edge, the upper right edge, and the lower right edge are mainly connected to the output side 1 terminal to the output side, respectively. The terminals on the output side 1 to 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) etc. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. There is.

Furthermore, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the plate center upper decorative board 314. In addition, the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative board 314. As a result, from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the minimum distance dimension is restricted by the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns. You can also extract all wiring patterns. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape.

In addition, by adopting this arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, group 1 is composed of four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4, and group 1 is composed of four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be placed between the group 2 consisting of hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to group 1 and group 2 can be reduced. can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of wiring patterns between group 1 and group 2 from becoming longer or shorter in favor of either group 1 or group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of wiring pattern placement and routing on the workpiece.

Moreover, by adopting such an arrangement, when the plate center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 263(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the plate center upper decorative board 314 is The constant current drive circuit 314ax is connected to the semi-circular center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 (the full-color LED shown in FIG. 263(b)). 263 (b ), and to the left of hLED8, which is a full-color LED configured in group 2 and whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. I can do it. As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured on the plate center upper decorative board 314, and at the same time, from the constant current drive circuit 314bx , an area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs, hLED9 and hLED10, can be secured on the upper center decorative substrate 314 of the dish.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) with a rectangular planar shape, and are 0805 (designation: 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length) in the so-called EIA format. length: 1.25 mm). In other words, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are larger than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, unlike the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitors (not shown) have one end side in the longitudinal direction at the upper end side of the plate center upper decorative board 314. 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) is perpendicular to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative board 314. It is arranged like this. In other words, the edges of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, which are arranged such that the edges of the land pattern are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and the resistor Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are respectively arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 so as to be non-parallel.

In addition, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative board 314, and 10 full-color LEDs are arranged. When viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the center upper decorative board 314, hLED1 to hLED10 are located close to the lower edge 314eg2 of the center upper decorative board 314 and are arranged in a semicircular arc shape on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314. In contrast, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged near the upper end side 314eg1 of the upper plate center decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314. A configuration is adopted in which the LEDs are placed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, are of the sink (suck) type, as described above, by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. I get a fever. Therefore, even in the center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less likely to affect the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

In addition, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged such that the end sides of the land patterns are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative board 314. 314ax and 314bx, in which the end sides of the land patterns are arranged parallel to the left and right sides of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decoration body 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared to the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the one in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board is a better decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be made shorter. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the production operation unit 300, so a large production operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3, and the production operation unit 300 can perform a light emitting effect.

[Metal pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the types of IC packages for the constant current drive circuits, which are the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx on the lower left side decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx on the upper decorative board 314 in the center of the plate, are as follows. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative board 402b will be described with reference to FIG. 264.

A metal pad FP is exposed at the center of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, forming a so-called exposed pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad"). This IC package can improve heat dissipation and bondability by being soldered to a board.

In addition to each lead pad, the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with an EPad land pattern EP having a square shape. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid earth of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Nine thermal via TVs are arranged in a grid pattern within the area of the EPad land pattern EP. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the EPad land pattern EP to the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out within the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is of the sink (suck) type, and generates heat by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. In other words, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, heat can be radiated throughout the lower left side decorative board 402b.

To briefly explain the relationship between the land pattern EP for EPad and the nine thermal via TVs, the joint area where EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad is the constant current The number and diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered does not become too large, preventing the generation of voids, and the bonding area does not become too small, making it stable. This makes it possible to obtain a high bonding strength. Note that the land pattern EP for EPad can also be formed by dividing it into a lattice, but in this case as well, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain stable bonding strength, the constant current drive circuit is used as described above. The bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP needs to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

Further, in contrast to the case where the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx When the end edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the heat dissipation effect against the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the land pattern EP for EPad should also be placed on the left side in the same way. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower side decorative board 402b and inclined at 45 degrees, , the land pattern EP for the EPad is also arranged at a 45 degree inclination. When the edge of the land pattern EP for EPad is arranged parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the edge of the land pattern EP for EPad and the lower left side decorative substrate 402b The distance between the left end side 402beg1 or the right end side 402beg2 is shorter, and the distance to the edge of the board is shorter. In other words, the room for heat radiation on the board is smaller. . On the other hand, when the end side of the land pattern EP for EPad is arranged with an inclination of 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b Or, the distance dimension of the right edge side 402beg2 is the part where the distance between the apex of the land pattern EP for EPad and the edge of the board is shortened, but the two sides touching that apex are not parallel to the edge of the board. Since there is a wide room for heat radiation on the substrate, it can be said that the heat radiation effect is higher than when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate are parallel.

As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in this embodiment is formed into an elongated strip shape, and one is provided with one LED constant current drive circuit and the other is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. As an example, in this embodiment, as described above, the lower left side decorative board 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically and includes two LED constant current drive circuits, and the lower left side decorative board 402b is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, and The dish central upper decorative board 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape will be explained, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs are placed will be used to explain the LEDs emitted by the full-color LEDs. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and the area where the full-color LED is placed can be visually recognized by the player. We have explained in detail the measures that have been taken to reduce reflectance and prevent this from occurring.

Here, other configurations of the present invention in which measures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. are taken (hereinafter referred to as "configurations for measures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second to fifth embodiments") are shown in FIGS. This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 265 shows the structure of a measure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, FIG. 266 shows a structure of a measure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 267 shows a section D' of FIG. 268 is an enlarged view of section D'' in FIG. 266 or section D'' in FIG. 270 viewed from the non-LED mounting surface; FIG. 268 is an enlarged view of the portion D''' in FIG. 268 viewed from the non-LED mounting surface, and FIG. 270 is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 265 to 270, the components having the same functions as the embodiment shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the first embodiment") are shown. are designated with the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 267, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. Furthermore, various electronic components are omitted from FIG. 269 for ease of viewing the drawing.

The performance operation ring decoration board 352, the center button decoration board 376, and the outer button decoration board 377 in the performance operation unit 300, and the handle decoration board 184 in the handle unit 180 have the reflection according to the first embodiment described above. Structure of countermeasures against rate reduction, etc. (The part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed make it possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to light emission from the full-color LED. , measures such as reduced reflectance that can prevent players from seeing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed, to the player. However, configurations of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to second to fifth embodiments, which will be described later, may also be adopted.

[Comparison between the structure of the measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the first embodiment and the structure of the measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 to The part number corresponding to the hdLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed are not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, there is a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and a maximum current setting circuit. Areas indicating the locations of electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg, and various distributed resistors are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) as silk-screen printing, and there are markings near these areas. Part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) as silk screen printing. Further, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, there are full color LEDs to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk-printed near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, full-color LEDs are mounted on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. Part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314, there is a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, and a maximum current setting circuit. 314ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) not shown in the drawings, and these areas are Part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity. Further, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish, there are full-color LEDs to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk screen printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. On the top, part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be placed are printed in silkscreen. Specifically, the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed are silk-printed with solid yellow lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. At the same time, near these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 are printed in yellow on the left side or above as silk printing. Each is printed on a solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative board 402b.

Furthermore, on the solid white resist painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be placed is printed as a silk screen with a solid yellow line (not shown). Near this area, a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as a silk screen.

Further, as described above, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b using a solid white resist. The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 each have a white resin package (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a lighting test is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, 1 (can be performed for each LED element) for the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are written near the plurality of check pins on the lower left side decorative board. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the LED mounting surface 402b is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing on a solid white resist. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data sent to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

Here, white is used as the color of the resist liquid applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the white resist liquid applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is used. The reason why yellow was adopted as the paint for the silk-screen printing of the areas showing the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 will be explained. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. When silk-screen printing is performed on a white resist that is solidly painted with red paint on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, full-color LEDs are silk-printed with red paint on the white resist. While the area indicating the position where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are conspicuous, the combination of white and yellow (countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment) configuration), if the background is white, the yellow will not stand out, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 will be placed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 will be marked with yellow paint on the left side. When silk printing is performed on a solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower decorative board 402b, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are silk-printed with yellow paint on the white resist. The area indicating the position and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are not easily noticeable. Note that the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are the front side electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. This is a front-side notation (sometimes simply referred to as the "notation") that allows identification of the front-side electronic component. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component may be included) ).

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 produces a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b includes electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors, through holes, and test holes. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area excluding pads, lands, etc. by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. is formed, and furthermore, on this solid white resist, an area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed, which makes it possible to specify the full color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and an area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed. The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is silk-printed with yellow paint, so when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, it is a full-color LED that is silk-printed with yellow paint on a white resist. In addition to making it possible to make the areas indicating the positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 inconspicuous, when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are turned on (light emission (time), the area indicating the position where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be placed is printed by silk printing with a solid white resist with high reflectance and yellow paint that has a very close reflectance to white. , the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b can be maintained high by the combination of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers.

Note that when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the yellow printed by silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange due to variations between printing machines. In some cases. In addition, because the ink companies that supply silk printing paint have a wide range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), the same board manufacturing company or multiple board manufacturers may not be able to use the paint for silk printing. Even if you specify yellow, it will not be exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make it completely the same yellow), but it will be a color with a wide range of yellow.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the maximum current The areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various distributed resistors are to be placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk-screen printing, and these areas Part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) as silk screen prints nearby. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is placed is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267(a)) on the lower left side decorative board. It is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, and IC1 (FIG. 267( (See a) is printed as a silk screen with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Then, the areas indicating the positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are placed are printed as solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 267(a)). The maximum current setting is printed on the solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, and the maximum current setting is printed on the right side near these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and the corresponding part numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 267(a)) are silk-printed in yellow (or black) on the LED on the lower left side decorative board 402b. Each is printed on a solid white resist on the non-mounting surface 402by.

Furthermore, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b are not white, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is not white. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having one of black, brown, and blue colors. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color, have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so has been implemented.

In addition, also in the structure of measures against reflectance reduction etc. according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. , part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed are printed as silk-screen printing. Specifically, the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed are silk-printed with solid yellow lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 on a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. At the same time, near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right, the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 are silk printed in yellow on the decorative board at the center of the plate. The LED mounting surface 314x of 314 is printed on a solid white resist.

Furthermore, on the solid white resist painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be placed is printed as a silk screen with a solid yellow line (not shown). Near this area, a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as a silk screen.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is covered with a white resist. The full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing made of white (also called natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) with a white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, a lighting test is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate (for example, (can be performed for each LED element) for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed near the plurality of check pins on the decorative board at the center of the plate. The LED mounting surface 314x of the LED mounting surface 314 is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing on a solid white resist. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

Here, white is used as the color of the resist liquid applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, and the white resist liquid applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate is used. The reason why yellow was adopted as the silk-printed paint for the areas where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be placed and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 will be explained. First, the closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white paint film. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. When silk-screen printing is performed on a white resist that is painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate with red paint, full-color LEDs are silk-printed with red paint on the white resist. While the area indicating the position where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are placed and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are conspicuous, the combination of white and yellow (countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment) configuration), if the background is white, the yellow will not stand out, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 will be placed, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 will be marked in the center of the plate with yellow paint. When silk-screen printing is performed on a solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314, full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, which are silk-printed with yellow paint on the white resist, are arranged. The area indicating the position and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are not easily noticeable. Note that the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are the front side electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. This is a front-side notation (sometimes simply referred to as the "notation") that allows identification of the front-side electronic component. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area shown (in addition, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component may be included) ).

In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light. The light emission mode changes in various ways by turning on (light emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314 includes electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, and connectors, through holes, and test holes. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area excluding pads, lands, etc. by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. is formed, and furthermore, on this solid white resist, an area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged, which makes it possible to specify full color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and hLED1 to hLED1, which are full color LEDs, are formed. The part number corresponding to hLED10 is silk-printed with yellow paint, so when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, it is a full-color LED that is silk-printed with yellow paint on a white resist. In addition to making it possible to make the areas indicating the positions of hLED1 to hLED10 and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 inconspicuous, when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are turned on (light emission (time), the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be placed is printed by silk printing using a solid white resist with high reflectance and yellow paint that has a very close reflectance to white. , hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the corresponding part numbers, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 can be maintained high.

In addition, when yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, due to variations between printing machines, the silk printing may be pale yellow, dark yellow, or orange. Ink companies that supply printing paint also have a range of yellows (yellow on the bright side, yellow on the dark side), so yellow is specified as the paint for silk printing for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies. However, the yellow color will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to make the yellow color completely the same), and the yellow color will have a wide range.

On the other hand, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, a resistor Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions of electronic components such as Rb, Rg, and various distributed resistors are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines, not shown) as silk-screen printing, and electronic components and other areas are printed near these areas. Corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk-screen printing.

In the second embodiment, the resistor, capacitor, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are not white, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because their reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs decreases.

In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 causes the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be reflected forward (that is, toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300). It is now possible to increase the rate.

In this way, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed. , the corresponding part number, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b corresponds to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs. The part number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) and the area (solid yellow line) indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be placed are printed on silkscreens, and the decorative board above the center of the plate is printed. On the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of 314, part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged. The difference is that the area (solid yellow line) indicating the position of the image is printed as a silk screen.

The white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b can increase the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It looks like this. In addition, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the production operation unit 300) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is now possible to increase the Therefore, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed are printed in black as silk on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. If printed, the black silk printing reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED, resulting in a problem that the light emitted from the full-color LED is not used efficiently. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decoration 271 of the plate, the lower left decoration 281 of the plate, the upper right decoration 276 of the plate, the lower right decoration 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75) The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , is formed transparent, and when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). The player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided. In this case, a problem arises in that the player can see the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed, which has no relation to the game at all to the player.

Therefore, in the structure of the measures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed are silk-printed. By printing yellow, which is brighter than black, on a solid white resist on the LED mounting surface, it is used to help indicate the mounting position of full-color LEDs on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface. It can be difficult to find lines (i.e., areas that indicate where full-color LEDs are placed) or numbers that identify full-color LEDs (i.e., part numbers that correspond to full-color LEDs).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed are silk-printed, and unlike black, the area is yellow, which is a bright color. By printing on the white resist that is painted solidly on the LED mounting surface, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to light emission from the full-color LED.

The structure of the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment can also provide the same effects as the structure of the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, it is difficult for players to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to light emission from the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the second embodiment, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed is silk-printed, and unlike black, a bright color When printing on a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface in yellow color, the symbol representing the polarity of the full-color LED (also the symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that allows you to distinguish between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal)) Alternatively, it may be configured to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED by adding a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can be used to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal).

In addition, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full-color LED, and connectors that do not have a white color are Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the LED mounting surface, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that area. In this case, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where electronic components and connectors are placed is printed as a silk screen with a solid yellow line (not shown), and in the vicinity of this area, Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged has a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, and a solid yellow line is printed on the LED mounting surface as silk printing. It was constructed by printing on a solid white resist, but the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed is set in a shape smaller than the outline of the full-color LED (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED body, or just a single line). (thick line) and may be printed as a silk screen on a white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface with a solid yellow line. By doing this, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area printed by silk printing that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed is covered by the full-color LED body, so the yellow area surrounding the full-color LED body is The solid line no longer exists, which can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between the structure of the measures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment and the structure of the measures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 to The part number corresponding to the hdLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed are not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, there is a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and a maximum current setting circuit. Areas indicating the locations of electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg, and various distributed resistors are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) as silk-screen printing, and there are markings near these areas. Part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk screen printing. Further, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, there are full color LEDs to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk-printed near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, full-color LEDs are mounted on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. Part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314, there is a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, and a maximum current setting circuit. 314ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) not shown in the drawings, and these areas are Part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity. Further, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish, there are full-color LEDs to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk screen printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. ~ The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is a foil-cut letter (in other words, a letter is formed by making a letter with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and cutting out the surrounding copper foil). In FIG. 266(c), only the foil-cut letter LED7 is shown as a part number corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. In the area where the copper foil is removed except for each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), the area formed by removing the copper foil (excluding each terminal and wiring pattern) ( In 266(c), only the foil cutout area LSLK7 is shown as the area corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are respectively covered by the resist. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed as foil-cutting areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, and these foil-cutting areas Near the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, to the left or above, part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as cutout characters on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, respectively. , the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are respectively covered by a white resist that is applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed to be electrically insulated from the electronic components.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil cutout area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (in other words, a wiring pattern is not formed). In the layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, it is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil), and near this region there is a foil (not shown) with a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN. It is formed as a punched character (that is, a punched character is formed by creating a character using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil).

Furthermore, as described above, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b using a solid white resist. The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. In this way, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a lighting test is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, 1 (can be performed for each LED element) for the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the check pins are written in foil (not shown) near the plurality of check pins. In other words, characters are formed using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then the surrounding copper foil is removed. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data sent to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the maximum current The areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various distributed resistors are to be placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk-screen printing, and these areas Part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) as a silkscreen in the vicinity. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is placed is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267(a)) on the lower left side decorative board. It is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, and IC1 (FIG. 267( (See a) is printed as a silk screen with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Then, the areas indicating the positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are placed are printed as solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 267(a)). The maximum current setting is printed on the solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, and the maximum current setting is printed on the right side near these areas LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the circuit 402bay and the corresponding part numbers R1, R2, R3 (see FIG. 267(a)) are silk-printed in yellow (or black) on the LED on the lower left side decorative board 402b. Each is printed on a solid white resist on the non-mounting surface 402by.

Furthermore, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b are not white, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is not white. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having one of black, brown, and blue colors. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color, have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so has been implemented.

In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil cut-out character (that is, a cut-out character is formed by creating a character with a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and then cutting out the surrounding copper foil). At the same time, the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is a foil-cut area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (in other words, each terminal in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). The area where the copper foil is removed is formed by removing the copper foil, excluding the wiring pattern and the area where the copper foil is removed. The cut out characters are covered respectively. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil cutout areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, and these foil cutouts Near the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right, full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 are formed as cutout characters on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314 in the center of the plate, respectively. A white resist applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the center upper decorative board 314 covers the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters, respectively. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed to be electrically insulated from the electronic components.

Note that on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil-cut area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (in other words, a wiring pattern is not formed). In the layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, it is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is written near this area as a foil (not shown). It is formed as a punched character (that is, a punched character is formed by creating a character using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then punching out the surrounding copper foil).

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is covered with a white resist. The full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing made of white (also called natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) with a white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. In this manner, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, a lighting test is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate (for example, (can be performed for each LED element) for the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the check pins are written in foil (not shown) near the plurality of check pins. In other words, characters are formed using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and then the surrounding copper foil is removed. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax forming the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, a resistor Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Areas indicating the positions of electronic components such as Rb, Rg, and various distributed resistors are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) (not shown) as silk-screen printing, and electronic components and other areas are printed near these areas. Corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk-screen printing.

In the third embodiment, the resistor, capacitor, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are not white, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because their reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs decreases.

In addition, in the structure of measures against reflectance reduction etc. according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate causes the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be reflected in the forward direction (that is, toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300). It is now possible to increase the rate.

In this way, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed. , the corresponding part number, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in foil letters (i.e., In the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), characters are formed using the wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters (cut out characters). The area indicating the placement position is the foil removal area excluding each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown) (in other words, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and wiring pattern). The foil-cutting area and the foil-cutting characters are each covered by a solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, and further, the plate On the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed in foil letters (that is, the wiring pattern is made of copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). In addition, the area indicating the position where full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed excludes each terminal (not shown) and wiring pattern (not shown). It is formed as a foil removal area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil from the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern), and is formed as a foil removal area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil from the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), and is The difference is that the foil-cutting area and the foil-cutting characters are each covered by a white resist that is painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x.

The white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b can increase the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It looks like this. In addition, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the production operation unit 300) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is now possible to increase the Therefore, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed are printed in black as silk on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. If printed, the black silk printing reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED, resulting in a problem that the light emitted from the full-color LED is not used efficiently. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decoration 271 of the plate, the lower left decoration 281 of the plate, the upper right decoration 276 of the plate, the lower right decoration 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75) The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , is formed transparent, and when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). The player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided. In this case, a problem arises in that the player can see the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed, which has no relation to the game at all to the player.

Therefore, in the structure of the measures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, is formed as a blank letter, and the By forming an area indicating the position where an unrelated full-color LED is to be placed as a foil-cutting area and covering the foil-cutting character and the foil-cutting area respectively with a white resist that is painted solidly on the LED mounting surface, full color can be achieved. The wiring pattern of the LED, the foil-cut area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed), the number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED), are made of copper foil to have the same color, and are covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface to create a foil-cut area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (in other words, the position where the full-color LED is placed) This can make it difficult to find out the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED).

In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the third embodiment, part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs, which have no relation to the game for the player, are formed as foil-cut letters, and the By forming an area indicating the position where an unrelated full-color LED is to be placed as a foil-cutting area and covering the foil-cutting character and the foil-cutting area respectively with a white resist that is painted solidly on the LED mounting surface, full color can be achieved. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to light emission from the LED.

The structure of the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment can also provide the same effects as the structure of the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, it is difficult for players to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED) and the foil-cut area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to light emission from the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the third embodiment, it is possible to omit the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface, so the cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing steps for the board can be reduced. Manufacturing costs can be lowered.

In addition, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the third embodiment, in the foil-cutting area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil-cutting area). , a symbol representing the polarity of a full-color LED (a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal), or a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal)) It may be configured to clearly indicate the mounting orientation of the full-color LED by adding a ``simplified version'').

In addition, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full-color LED, and connectors that do not have a white color are Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the LED mounting surface, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that area. In this case, the LED mounting surface has an area indicating the position where electronic components and connectors are placed, a foil-cut area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (in other words, a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). ), excluding each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed by cutting out the copper foil), and in the vicinity of this area, there is a letter (not shown) with the part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector. In other words, characters are formed using a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed.

In addition, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the third embodiment, the foil-cutting area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged as the foil-cutting area) , the shape was larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, but in the foil-cutting area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed as the foil-cutting area). , it may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED main body). In this case, the cutout characters and the foil cutout area are not connected and are formed in mutually independent areas. By doing this, when a full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-cutting area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed is covered by the full-color LED body, so there is no foil-cutting area surrounding the full-color LED body. This can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between the structure of the measures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment and the structure of the measures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 to The part number corresponding to the hdLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed are not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, there is a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and a maximum current setting circuit. Areas indicating the locations of electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg, and various distributed resistors are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) as silk-screen printing, and there are markings near these areas. Part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) as silk screen printing. Further, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, there are full color LEDs to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk-printed near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, full-color LEDs are mounted on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. Part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314, there is a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, and a maximum current setting circuit. 314ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) not shown in the drawings, and these areas are Part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity. Further, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish, there are full-color LEDs to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk screen printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. ~The part number corresponding to hdLED10 is a white resist cutout character using double-coated white resist (FIG. 268(c) shows only the white resist cutout character as a part number corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. ), and the area indicating the position where full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed is a white resist removal area using twice-coated white resist (FIG. 268(c) shows hdLED7, a full-color LED). (Only the white resist removed area LSLK7 is shown as the area corresponding to the area.). Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is coated with white resist as the first of two coats of white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is coated with white resist. (In other words, white resist liquid is applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b as the first of two coats of white resist). The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative board 402b is coated with the second coat of white resist in an area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be placed (predetermined pin number placement). The white resist removal area LSLK7, which corresponds to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED, as shown in FIG. Notches are formed at positions corresponding to designated notch marks.) are masked as white resist cutout areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, and in the vicinity of these white resist cutout areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 to the left. Or, with the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 being masked as white resist-cut characters above, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is covered with white resist. covered. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, but the first layer of white resist covers the entire surface, and the second layer of white resist covers the LED mounting surface 402bx. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed becomes the white resist removed area LSLK1 to LSLK10. In addition, part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as white resist-cut characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b are the same. As a result, shading occurs between the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist. Looking at the base (the copper foil part and the area excluding the copper foil part, the same applies hereinafter), in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer overlaps with the white resist of the second layer. The resist looks dark, but in areas where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap due to masking, the white resist of the first layer becomes darker than the second layer. Since it is not covered with the white resist of the eye and is exposed, the white resist of the first layer appears pale. In other words, if you look at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b through the second layer of white resist, you can identify the white resist cutout characters in the first layer of white resist. ing.

Note that on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is placed is formed as a white resist removal area (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed near this area. The numbers are formed as white resist-cut characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. There is a difference in shading between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In the area where the white resist of the eye overlaps with the white resist of the first layer, the white resist of the second layer appears darker, but because it is masked, the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer overlap. In areas where the first layer of white resist does not overlap, the first layer of white resist is not covered by the second layer of white resist and is exposed, making the first layer of white resist look pale. It happens. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the area where the white resist is removed in the first layer of white resist. It has become.

In addition, since the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is coated with white resist twice, the white resist cutout characters and white resist cutout area in the first layer of white resist and the white resist cutout area The refractive index of light changes from that of the white resist layer. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It is now possible to do so.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b is covered with a white resist. The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. In this manner, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a lighting test is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, 1 (can be performed for each LED element) for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the check pins are written in white resist-cut letters (not shown) near the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Rg, an area indicating the position where electronic components such as various distributed resistors (not shown) are to be arranged is formed as a white resist removal area using two coats of white resist, similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. At the same time, near these areas, part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed as white resist-cut letters using two coats of white resist, similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b is coated with white resist as the first coat of white resist, so that the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b is coated with white resist. It is covered with a resist (that is, a white resist liquid is applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b as the first of two coats of white resist). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b is coated with a second coat of white resist, for example, an area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is placed (placement of a predetermined pin number). The white resist removal area LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to a notch mark for instructing the arrangement.) are masked as white resist removal areas LSLKa, and a constant current is applied above and near these white resist removal areas LSLKa. With the part number IC1 (see FIG. 269(a)) corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax being masked as white resist-cut characters, the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b is white. covered with resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b, similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. The entire area is covered with the white resist, and the entire area is covered except for the masked area with the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area becomes a depression and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A white resist blanking area LSLKa is formed as a region to be filled, and IC1, which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is formed as a white resist blanking character.

Note that the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a white resist (not shown) in an area indicating the position where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various distributed resistors (not shown) are arranged. This area is formed as a blank area, and in the vicinity of this area, white resist blank letters R1, R2, not shown, indicate part numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. R3, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components such as resistors and capacitors such as various distributed resistors (not shown) are formed as white resist-cut characters (not shown). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal area (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is written near this area. They are formed as white resist-cut characters (not shown).

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first layer of white resist and the transmittance of the second layer of white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b are the same. As a result, shading occurs between the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist. Looking at the base of 402by (the copper foil part and the area excluding the copper foil part, the same applies hereinafter), in the area where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the second layer The white resist looks dark, but in areas where the second layer white resist and the first layer white resist do not overlap due to masking, the first layer white resist becomes darker. Since it is not covered with the second layer of white resist and is exposed, the first layer of white resist appears pale. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist cutout characters formed on the first layer of white resist. In addition, it is now possible to identify areas where the white resist has been removed.

In addition, since the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b is coated with white resist twice, the white resist removed characters and white resist removed area in the first layer of white resist and the white resist removed area The refractive index of light changes from that of the second layer of white resist. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It is now possible to do so.

Furthermore, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b are not white, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is not white. The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of resin having one of black, brown, and blue colors. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color, have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of full-color LEDs, so has been implemented.

In addition, also in the structure of measures against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-cut character using two coats of white resist, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed uses two coats of white resist. It is formed as a white resist removal area. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish is coated with white resist as the first of two coats of white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish is coated with white resist. (In other words, white resist liquid is applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 as the first of two coats of white resist.) Then, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, a second coat of white resist is applied to an area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be placed (predetermined pin number placement). For example, the white resist cut-out area HSLK7, which corresponds to hLED7, which is a full-color LED, includes a notch mark that indicates the placement of the fifth pin of hLED7, which is a full-color LED. Notches are formed at corresponding positions) are masked as white resist removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1, which is a full color LED, is located near and to the right of these white resist removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. ~h The entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is covered with white resist, with LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to LED10, being masked as white resist-cut characters. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314, but the first layer of white resist covers the entire surface, and the second layer of white resist covers the LED mounting surface 314x. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed becomes the white resist removed area HSLK1 to HSLK10. In addition, part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are formed as white resist-cut characters.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are the same. As a result, shading occurs between the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314 If you look at the underlying layer, you can see that in the area where the second layer of white resist overlaps with the first layer of white resist, the second layer of white resist looks darker, but because it is masked, the second layer of white resist looks darker. In areas where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered by the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the white resist of the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. In other words, if you look at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 through the second layer of white resist, you can identify the white resist cutout characters in the first layer of white resist. ing.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is placed is formed as a white resist removal area (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is formed near this area. The numbers are formed as white resist-cut characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. There is a difference in shading between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314 through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In the area where the white resist of the eye overlaps with the white resist of the first layer, the white resist of the second layer appears darker, but because it is masked, the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer overlap. In areas where the first layer of white resist does not overlap, the first layer of white resist is not covered by the second layer of white resist and is exposed, making the first layer of white resist look pale. It happens. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the area where the white resist is removed in the first layer of white resist. It has become.

In addition, since the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314 is coated with white resist twice, the white resist-cut characters and white resist-cut area in the first layer of white resist and the white resist-cut area in the second layer The refractive index of light changes from that of the white resist layer. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It is now possible to do so.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is covered with a white resist. The full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing made of white (also called natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) with a white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, a lighting test is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate (for example, (can be performed for each LED element) for the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the check pins are written in white resist-cut letters (not shown) near the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, there are a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various distributed resistors (not shown). A region indicating the position where electronic components such as the like are to be placed is formed as a white resist removal region using two coats of white resist, similar to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, and these regions. Nearby, a part number corresponding to the electronic component is formed as a white resist-cut letter using two coats of white resist, similar to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first layer of white resist and the transmittance of the second layer of white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are the same. As a result, shading occurs between the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist. Looking at the base of 314y, in the area where the second layer of white resist overlaps with the first layer of white resist, the second layer of white resist looks darker, but because it has been masked, In areas where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered by the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. The first layer of white resist will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist cutout characters formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. In addition, it is now possible to identify areas where the white resist has been removed.

In addition, since the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is coated with white resist twice, the white resist removed characters and white resist removed area in the first layer of white resist and the white resist removed area The refractive index of light changes from that of the second layer of white resist. As a result, when looking at the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It is now possible to do so.

Furthermore, the resistors, capacitors, etc. mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are not white, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is not white. The package is made of black resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because their reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs is reduced.

In addition, also in the structure of measures against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 causes the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be reflected forward (that is, toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300). It is now possible to increase the rate.

In this way, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed. , the corresponding part number, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing. In the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 painted twice in white. The characters are formed as white resist-cut characters using resist, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed are formed as white resist-cut areas using double-coated white resist. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are formed as white resist-cut characters using two coats of white resist, and the full-color LED The difference is that the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is formed as a white resist removal area using twice-coated white resist.

The white resist applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b can increase the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It looks like this. In addition, due to the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314, the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the production operation unit 300) due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is increased. It is now possible to increase the Therefore, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed are printed in black as silk on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. If printed, the black silk-screen printing reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED, resulting in a problem that the light emitted from the full-color LED is not used efficiently. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decoration 271 of the plate, the lower left decoration 281 of the plate, the upper right decoration 276 of the plate, the lower right decoration 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75) The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , is formed transparent, and when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). The player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided. In this case, a problem arises in that the player can see the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed, which has no relation to the game at all to the player.

Therefore, in the structure of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, is printed with white resist-cut letters using double-coated white resist. At the same time, by forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, as a white resist-free area using double-coated white resist, the mounting position of the full-color LED can be changed. It is difficult to find the white resist removal area that indicates the location of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed) or the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED). I can do it.

In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fourth embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, is printed with white resist-cut letters using double-coated white resist. At the same time, by forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, as a white resist-free area using double-coated white resist, the light emission by the full-color LED is created. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

The structure of the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment can also provide the same effects as the structure of the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED) and the area where the white resist is removed using two coats of white resist that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the position where the full-color LED is placed) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area (indicated by the area shown in FIG.

In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to omit the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface, so the screen printing plate cost and the manufacturing of the board can be omitted. The reduction in the number of steps can contribute to lowering substrate manufacturing costs.

In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal area using a double-coated white resist indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed) is used. When forming the polarity of the full-color LED (symbols used in circuit diagrams (symbols that can distinguish between anode terminal and cathode terminal)), or symbols used in circuit diagrams (symbols that can distinguish between anode terminal and cathode terminal) can be used. It may be configured to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED by adding a symbol (which may be a simplified version of the symbol) that can be distinguished from the other.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full-color LED, and connectors that do not have a white color are Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the LED mounting surface, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that area. In this case, an area indicating the position where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors to be mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged is formed as each terminal (not shown) and a white resist removal area (not shown), and the vicinity of this area In addition, part numbers corresponding to electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as white resist-cut characters (not shown).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface of the decorative board, but the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the second layer of white resist, the masked area becomes a depression, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED and connector will be placed is formed as a white resist-free area. In addition, part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs and connectors were formed as white resist-cut characters, but the white resist-cut areas and white resist-cut characters may be formed using other methods. . For example, after coating the LED mounting surface and non-LED mounting surface of a decorative board with white resist once or multiple times, and before the white resist dries, an area indicating the position where full-color LEDs and connectors will be placed is applied. A method of forming a white resist-free area by pressing a plate and forming a white resist-free character by pressing a plate showing the part number corresponding to a full-color LED or connector, After coating the non-LED mounting surface with white resist once or multiple times, and after this white resist has dried, use laser irradiation to remove the white resist from the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED or connector will be placed. An example of this method is to form part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs and connectors as white resist-cut characters.

In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal area using two coats of white resist indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (in other words, indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed) When forming the area), the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed was configured to have a larger shape than the outer shape of the full-color LED, but the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed is It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the external shape (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED body, or simply a single thick line). In this way, when a full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed is covered by the full-color LED body, and the periphery of the full-color LED body is also covered with the second white layer. Since the resist and the first layer of white resist overlap, the second layer of white resist becomes darker, which can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison between the structure of the measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the first embodiment and the structure of the measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1 to The part number corresponding to the hdLED10 and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed are not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, there is a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and a maximum current setting circuit. Areas indicating the locations of electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg, and various distributed resistors are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) as silk-screen printing, and there are markings near these areas. Part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are printed in yellow (or black) as silk screen printing. Further, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, there are full color LEDs to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are silk-printed near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, as described above, full-color LEDs are mounted on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. Part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314, there is a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, and a maximum current setting circuit. 314ay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, various distributed resistors, and other electronic components are printed with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) not shown in the drawings, and these areas are Part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity. Further, as described above, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish, there are full-color LEDs to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the dish. Areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. and corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk screen printing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. - A reference terminal symbol without foil is placed near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal among the 1st to 6th terminals of the hdLED 10 (in other words, the wiring pattern is made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)). A circle symbol is made as a terminal symbol, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form a standard terminal symbol (Figure 270(c) shows the terminals 1 to 6 of hdLED7, which is a full-color LED). Only the foil-cut standard terminal symbol PRO is shown in the vicinity of the position corresponding to terminal 1. The area where the copper foil is removed except for the wiring pattern (that is, the area where the copper foil is removed from the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) except for each terminal and the wiring pattern (FIG. 270(c)) Only the foil-cut area LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. and its foil-cut reference terminal symbol are respectively covered. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil-cutting areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, and these foil-cutting areas Foil removal reference terminal symbols are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b in the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 and near the positions corresponding to the No. 1 terminals of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, respectively, and The foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol are each covered by a white resist that is applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative board 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut standard terminal symbol is formed to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the foil-cutting standard terminal symbol is not formed in the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged (that is, in the foil-cutting area LSLK1 to LSLK10), but is formed in a so-called solid ground (substrate ground). When arranged like this, the circle symbol itself is formed as a foil cutout.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil cutout area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (in other words, a wiring pattern is not formed). (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed by removing the copper foil), and within this area, the first terminal of each terminal of the connector LDLCN. Make a circle symbol as a standard terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and remove the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. A foil-cut standard terminal symbol) is formed by cutting out the foil.

Further, as described above, a white resist layer is formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b using a solid white resist. The full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 each have a white resin package (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the housing of the connector LDUCN is white (also called a natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all. Moreover, there is no area printed by silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, a lighting test is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b (for example, 1 (can be performed for each LED element) for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B) that constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, regarding the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b in the configuration for measures against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by according to the third embodiment is as shown in FIG. This is the same as the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b in the configuration of the countermeasure described above, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. A standard terminal symbol without foil is placed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 among terminals 1 to 6 (in other words, a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)) is used as a standard terminal symbol. A foil-cut reference terminal symbol (which is formed by making a circle symbol and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol) is formed, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are placed is provided for each terminal (not shown). and a foil-free area excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil from the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern). The foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol are each covered by a solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil-cutting areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, and these foil-cutting areas Foil-cut reference terminal symbols are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 in the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and near the positions corresponding to the No. 1 terminals of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, respectively. A white resist applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 covers the foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol, respectively. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut reference terminal symbol is formed to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the foil removal standard terminal symbol is not formed in the area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged (that is, in the foil removal area HSLK1 to HSLK10), but is formed in the so-called solid ground (substrate ground). When arranged like this, the circle symbol itself is formed as a foil cutout.

Note that on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil-cut area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (in other words, a wiring pattern is not formed). (copper plane), excluding each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed by removing the copper foil), and within this area, the first terminal of each terminal of connector HCN Make a circle symbol as a standard terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and remove the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. A foil-cut standard terminal symbol) is formed by cutting out the foil.

Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is covered with a white resist. The full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 have their respective packages made of white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a housing made of white (also called natural color). It is made of resin in a color recognized to be the same as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate is an electronic component that has a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted). Full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) with a white resist that covers the entirety (solid color) are mounted. In this way, in the fifth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from a full-color LED. Not implemented at all. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, there is no area printed by silk printing at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate, a lighting test is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate (for example, (can be performed for each LED element) for the LED elements that emit red (R), the LED elements that emit green (G), and the LED elements that emit blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed. Note that some of the plurality of check pins allow checking the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, regarding the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment described above The configuration is the same as that of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 in , and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, also in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 are coated with a solid white resist. layers are formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate causes the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 to be reflected in the forward direction (that is, toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300). It is now possible to increase the rate.

In this way, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment, on the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed. , the corresponding part number, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing, and are solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be placed are not printed at all as silk printing. , in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, no part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and , a foil-cut reference terminal symbol is placed near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs (that is, a circle is placed as a reference terminal symbol in the wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)). A standard terminal symbol is formed by making a symbol and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. At the same time, an area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are placed is provided for each terminal (not shown) and It is formed as a foil-free area excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil from the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern), A white resist applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b covers the foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol, respectively, and further covers the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314. , no part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed at all, and in the vicinity of the positions corresponding to terminals 1 to 6 of terminals 1 to 6 of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs. Standard terminal symbol without foil (that is, in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), a circle symbol is created as a standard terminal symbol with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed. At the same time, an area indicating the position where full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is formed as a foil-cutting area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed). layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as an area formed by removing the copper foil), and is a solid white color that is painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314. The difference is that the foil removal area and the foil removal reference terminal symbol are respectively covered by the resist.

The white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b can increase the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It looks like this. In addition, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the side facing upward of the production operation unit 300) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. It is now possible to increase the Therefore, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed are printed in black as silk on the white resist that is solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. If printed, the black silk printing reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED, resulting in a problem that the light emitted from the full-color LED is not used efficiently. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decoration 271 of the plate, the lower left decoration 281 of the plate, the upper right decoration 276 of the plate, the lower right decoration 286 of the plate, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75) The plate center upper decoration body 312a, the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the side window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453) are as described above. , is formed transparent, and when a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). The player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided. In this case, a problem arises in that the player can see the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed, which has no relation to the game at all to the player.

Therefore, in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fifth embodiment, no part number is formed that corresponds to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game to the player, and also has no relation to the game to the player. A region indicating the position where a full-color LED without a color is placed is formed as a foil-cutting region, and a white resist is applied solidly to the LED mounting surface to form a foil-cutting region (as described above, within this foil-cutting region, A foil-cut standard terminal symbol is formed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 of the full-color LED.) By covering the full-color LED wiring pattern and the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED The area indicating the position where the LED is placed) and the foil-cut standard terminal symbol formed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 of the full-color LED are made of copper foil so that they have the same color and are easy to use when mounting the LED. By being covered with a white resist formed on the surface, it is possible to find the foil-cut area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is to be placed), and to find the area that corresponds to the No. 1 terminal of the full-color LED. It may be difficult to find the foil-cut reference terminal symbol formed near the position.

In addition, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, there is no part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game to the player, and a component number that corresponds to the full color LED, which has no relation to the game to the player, is not formed at all. By forming an area indicating the position where a full-color LED is to be placed as a foil-cut area and covering the foil-cut area with a white resist that is applied solidly to the LED mounting surface, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LED is reduced. can be prevented from decreasing.

The structure of the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment can also provide the same effects as the structure of the countermeasure against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, it is difficult for players to see the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED) and the foil-cut area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is placed). In addition, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to light emission from the full-color LED.

In addition, in the structure of the countermeasure against reflectance reduction etc. according to the fifth embodiment, it is possible to omit the process of silk printing on the LED mounting surface, so that the screen printing plate cost and the number of manufacturing steps for the board can be reduced. Manufacturing costs can be lowered.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, a foil-cut reference terminal symbol (i.e. , in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), a circle symbol is made as a reference terminal symbol using a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form a standard terminal symbol). By forming this, it is also possible to indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED on the LED mounting surface. In addition, a standard terminal symbol without foil is placed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 among each terminal of the connector (in other words, a circle symbol is used as the standard terminal symbol in the wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)). It is also possible to indicate the mounting direction of the connector on the LED mounting surface by forming a foil removal standard terminal symbol (which is formed by making a foil removal reference terminal symbol) and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol.

Here, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, each of the full-color LEDs is mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314. Among the terminals (terminals 1 to 6), there is a standard terminal symbol with foil removed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 (in other words, a reference terminal with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)) A brief explanation will be given of the formation of a foil-removed standard terminal symbol (which is formed by creating a circle symbol as a symbol and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol).

When a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surfaces of the decorative substrates, such as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative substrate 314, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate must be placed near the full-color LEDs, such as LED1, LED2, . . . , LED50, etc., as part numbers corresponding to a plurality of full-color LEDs.

However, the more full-color LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of the decorative board, the more the part numbers corresponding to the plurality of full-color LEDs such as LED1, LED2, ..., LED50, and the terminals of the plurality of full-color LEDs increase. It is necessary to secure an area for arranging the reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal (terminals 1 to 6), and it is difficult to secure this area. Therefore, a notation method that combines the part number corresponding to multiple full-color LEDs and the reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to terminal 1 of each terminal (terminal 1 to terminal 6) of multiple full-color LEDs When writing LED1, LED2, ..., LED50, etc. as foil-cut standard terminal symbols near the position corresponding to terminal 1 among the terminals (terminals 1 to 6) of a full-color LED, , LED1, LED2, ..., LED50, etc., and the wiring pattern must be spaced apart so that they do not come into contact and electrically connect. It is necessary to route the wiring pattern so as to avoid the foil removal standard terminal symbol (by bending the wiring pattern, providing through holes, etc.), and there are restrictions on how the wiring pattern can be routed.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decorative board 314 are provided with terminals of full-color LEDs. (Terminals 1 to 6), there is a standard terminal symbol with foil removed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 (in other words, a standard terminal symbol with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane)) By creating a circle symbol and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol to form a foil-cutting standard terminal symbol, the area in which the foil-cutting standard terminal symbol is placed can be kept small. Since the need to route the wiring pattern to avoid terminal symbols is suppressed, artwork can be done (designed) with less restrictions on the routing of the wiring pattern. This eliminates the need to provide unnecessary through holes on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b and the upper decorative board 314 in the center of the dish, thereby suppressing the reduction in the area to which the white resist solution is applied. This can contribute to increasing the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 or the side facing upward of the production operation unit 300) due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, in the foil-cutting area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil-cutting area). , a symbol that represents the polarity of a full-color LED (a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal), or a symbol that is used in a circuit diagram (a symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal) The configuration may be such that the mounting orientation of the full-color LED is clearly indicated by adding a ``simplified version''.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color that reduces the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of a full-color LED, and connectors that do not have a white color are Because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the LED mounting surface, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that area. In this case, the LED mounting surface has an area indicating the position where electronic components and connectors are placed, a foil-cut area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (in other words, a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). ), excluding each terminal and wiring pattern, the area is formed by removing the copper foil), and within this area, there is an area near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of the electronic component or connector. (In other words, in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), make a circle symbol as the standard terminal symbol with a wiring pattern made of copper foil and remove the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol.) A standard terminal symbol (standard terminal symbol) is formed.

In addition, in the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, in the foil-cutting area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil-cutting area) , the shape was larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, but in the foil-cutting area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed as the foil-cutting area). , it may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a rectangular shape smaller than the full-color LED main body). In this case, make a circle symbol as a standard terminal symbol with a copper foil wiring pattern in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and remove the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. The foil-cutting reference terminal symbol to be formed) and the foil-cutting area are not connected and are formed in mutually independent areas. By doing this, when a full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-cutting area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed is covered by the full-color LED body, so there is no foil-cutting area surrounding the full-color LED body. This can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, a foil-cut standard terminal symbol was formed on the LED mounting surface near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED. However, if the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface are mounted in almost the same direction (in other words, the mounting direction of the multiple full-color LEDs is the same for the mounting worker or automatic machine (in other words, the mounting direction of the multiple full-color LEDs mounted in the opposite direction) If a rule is set in advance), a standard terminal symbol without foil is placed on the LED mounting surface near the position corresponding to the first terminal of each terminal of one of the multiple full-color LEDs. (For example, a foil may be formed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 among terminals 1 to 6 of hdLED 7, which is a full-color LED shown in FIGS. 270(a) and 270(c).) A foil removal standard terminal symbol (PRO) may be formed on the LED mounting surface near a position corresponding to terminal No. 1 among the predetermined terminals of one or more full-color LEDs (for example, Among the terminals 1 to 6 of the full-color LEDs hdLED1, hdLED2, hdLED9, and hdLED10 shown in FIG. 270(a), there is a foil-cut reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the terminal 1).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface has a foil-cut standard terminal symbol near the position corresponding to terminal No. 1 among the terminals of the full-color LED, and each terminal symbol of the connector. A foil removal reference terminal symbol was formed near a position corresponding to terminal No. 1 among the terminals. In other words, the same foil-cut standard terminal symbol was formed. This standard terminal symbol without foil is formed by creating a circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol using a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. Ta. Therefore, a circle symbol is used as a reference terminal symbol in the wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the full-color LED terminals. is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol, and a layer where the wiring pattern is formed as a reference terminal symbol with foil removed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 among each terminal of the connector. (Copper plane), a square symbol may be formed as a reference terminal symbol using a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the copper foil around the outside of the square symbol may be removed. In this case, the part number of the full-color LED and the part number of the connector may be included in the foil-cut standard terminal symbol.

For example, each foil-cutting standard is formed near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b shown in FIG. 270(a). For the terminal symbols, write the full-color LED part number from number 1 to number 10 from the bottom to the top of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b for the 10 full-color LEDs. Make sure that each is placed inside the circle symbol. In other words, the numbers are circled. In this case, the outer periphery of the circle symbol, the area extending a predetermined distance along the outer periphery of the circle symbol from the inner part to the outer periphery of the number having a predetermined size, and the area necessary to form the number ( For example, the number 8 is formed by cutting out the copper foil in the two round-shaped holes (top and bottom). Further, for the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the number 1 is placed inside the square symbol. In other words, the number is surrounded by a square. In this case, the outer periphery of the square symbol, the area extending a predetermined distance along the outer periphery of the square symbol from the inner part to the outer periphery of the number having a predetermined size, and the area necessary to form the number ( For example, the number 8 is formed by cutting out the copper foil in the two round-shaped holes (top and bottom). Note that the alphabets A to Z (uppercase) or the alphabets a to Z (lowercase) may be used instead of numbers. Since up to 26 part numbers can be written in one alphabetical character, this can contribute to keeping the area occupied by foil-cut reference terminal symbols small. On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b adopting this mode, lighting inspection is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b ( For example, this is done for each LED element, which constitutes one full-color LED, such as an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and foil cutting standards corresponding to each of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided near the plurality of check pins. A terminal symbol is formed. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed.

In addition, in the configuration for measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, a foil-cut standard terminal symbol is formed on the LED mounting surface near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED. As a reference terminal symbol without foil, a circle symbol was created with a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the wiring pattern was formed (copper plane), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol was removed. . Instead of this circle symbol, for example, from the bottom to the top of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b shown in FIG. It may be a serial number of 10. In this case, remove the copper foil around the outside of the number (serial number) and the part necessary to form the number (for example, for the number 8, the part of the hole with two round shapes, the top and bottom). It is formed. In this way, this serial number can indicate the location of the first terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED, and also indicate the part number that specifies one full-color LED among the ten full-color LEDs. Note that the alphabets A to Z (uppercase) or the alphabets a to Z (lowercase) may be used instead of numbers. Since up to 26 part numbers can be written in one alphabetical character, this can contribute to keeping the area occupied by foil-cut standard terminal symbols small. On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b adopting this mode, lighting inspection is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b ( For example, this is done for each LED element, which constitutes one full-color LED, such as an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and foil cutting standards corresponding to each of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided near the plurality of check pins. A terminal symbol is formed. Several check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, when an operator conducting an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected and conductive, allowing various inspections to be performed.

In addition, in the structure of the measures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, regarding the structure of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the measures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment described above are The structure is the same as that of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the structure of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is the same as that of the lower reflectance according to the third embodiment described above. The structure is the same as that of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the top center decorative board 314 in the configuration of countermeasures such as the above, and the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b and the non-LED mounting surface of the top center decorative board 314 314y, areas indicating the positions where electronic components are placed are printed as solid yellow lines (or solid black lines) as silk-screen printing, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-printed near these areas. These are printed in yellow (or black) as follows. On the other hand, for example, the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402a of the left side upper decorative board 402a are different from the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative board 402b, as described above. It is controlled so that a constant current flows by an LED constant current drive circuit 402bb mounted in 402by, and no LED constant current drive circuit is mounted.

For this reason, the LED mounting surface of the left side upper decorative board 402a in the configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance etc. according to the fifth embodiment is provided with the lower left side decoration in the configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance etc. according to the fifth embodiment. Similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the board 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, near the position corresponding to the 1st terminal among the 1st to 6th terminals of the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. A foil-cut standard terminal symbol is formed on the top left side, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are placed is formed as a foil-cut area excluding each terminal (not shown) and wiring pattern (not shown). The foil-cutting area and the foil-cutting reference terminal symbol are each covered by a white resist that is applied solidly to the LED mounting surface of the decorative board 402a. Furthermore, on the LED mounting surface of the left-side upper decorative board 402a in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, a foil removal standard is placed near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the connector (not shown). Terminal symbols are respectively formed.

In other words, as described above, no LED constant current drive circuit is mounted on the LED non-mounted surface of the left side upper decorative board 402a in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment. Even if the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are mounted on the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a in a configuration that takes measures to reduce reflectance due to the shape, terminals 1 to 6 of the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. A foil removal standard terminal symbol is formed near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the No. However, the routing of the wiring patterns for the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 and connectors (not shown) is unlikely to be complicated, and the foil-cut standard terminal symbols are unlikely to interfere with the routing of the wiring patterns.

Further, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, a white resist layer is formed with a solid white resist on the LED mounting surface of the left side upper decorative board 402a. The five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, each have a white resin package (a color recognized as the same color as white), and the connector (not shown) has a white housing (also known as a natural color). It is made of resin with a color that is recognized to be the same as white (natural color). In other words, the LED mounting surface of the left-side upper decorative board 402a in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment is of the same color (same color) as the white resist that covers the entire surface (solid coating). huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs that are electronic components with packages of a certain color (recognized to be a certain color), and a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that covers the whole (solid color) A connector (not shown) having a housing is mounted.

Since the plurality of heat dispersion resistors constituting the heat dispersion circuit 402ac do not have white color, they are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a in the configuration for measures against reduced reflectance, etc. according to the fifth embodiment. has been done. Unlike the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the plurality of heat dispersion resistors constituting the heat dispersion circuit 402ac have no polarity. On the non-LED mounting surface of 402a, no foil-cut standard terminal symbols are formed near the respective positions of the plurality of heat dispersion resistors, and the part numbers corresponding to the plurality of heat dispersion resistors are silk-printed in yellow (or , black) and are not printed at all.

In other words, there is no area printed by silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the left side upper decorative board 402a in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment. As a result, the step of silk printing can be omitted, so the board manufacturing cost can be lowered by reducing the cost of silk printing plates and the number of manufacturing steps for the board.

Also, in the structure of the fifth embodiment as a countermeasure against reflectance reduction, etc., a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a. It is formed. As a result, the white resist painted solidly on the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a increases the reflectance toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) caused by the light emitted from the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. is now possible.

In addition, the LED mounting surface of the left side upper decorative board 402a in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment corresponds to the first terminal among the terminals of huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs. A foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed near the position where the foil removal reference terminal symbol is located, and a foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the terminals of the connector (not shown). In other words, the same foil-cut reference terminal symbol is formed. This standard terminal symbol without foil is formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the circle symbol by making a circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane). There is. Therefore, a standard terminal symbol without foil is placed near the position corresponding to terminal 1 among the terminals of huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, and a wiring pattern made of copper foil is used as a standard in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane). While a circle symbol is created as a terminal symbol and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed, a wiring pattern is created by removing the foil as a reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to terminal 1 among each terminal of the connector. In the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed, a square symbol may be formed as a reference terminal symbol using a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the copper foil around the outside of the square symbol may be removed. In this case, the part number of the full-color LED and the part number of the connector may be included in the foil-cut standard terminal symbol.

For example, for each foil removal standard terminal symbol formed near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal of huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a, , From the bottom to the top of the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a, for the five full-color LEDs, place the full-color LED part numbers from numbers 1 to 5 inside the circle symbols, respectively. to be done. In other words, the numbers are circled. In this case, the outer periphery of the circle symbol, the area extending a predetermined distance along the outer periphery of the circle symbol from the inner part to the outer periphery of the number having a predetermined size, and the area necessary to form the number ( For example, the number 4 is formed by removing the copper foil from the triangular hole part. Further, for a connector (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a, the number 1 is placed inside the square symbol. In other words, the number is surrounded by a square. In this case, the outer periphery of the square symbol, the area extending a predetermined distance along the outer periphery of the square symbol from the inner part to the outer periphery of the number having a predetermined size, and the area necessary to form the number ( For example, the number 4 is formed by removing the copper foil from the triangular hole part. Note that the alphabets A to Z (uppercase) or the alphabets a to Z (lowercase) may be used instead of numbers. Since up to 26 part numbers can be written in one alphabetical character, it is possible to contribute to keeping the area occupied by the foil-cut standard terminal symbol small.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a corresponds to the first terminal among the terminals of huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs. A foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed near the position where the foil removal reference terminal symbol is located, and a foil removal reference terminal symbol is formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the connector (not shown). In other words, the same foil-cut reference terminal symbol is formed. This standard terminal symbol without foil is formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the circle symbol by creating a circle symbol as a standard terminal symbol with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane). There is. Therefore, instead of this circle symbol, for example, serial numbers 1 to 5 may be used for the five full-color LEDs from the bottom to the top of the LED mounting surface of the left side upper decorative board 402a. In this case, the copper foil is removed from the outer periphery of the number (serial number) and the part necessary to form the number (for example, the part of one triangular hole for the number 4). Ru. In this way, this serial number can indicate the location of the first terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED, and also indicate the part number that specifies one full-color LED among the five full-color LEDs. Note that the alphabets A to Z (uppercase) or the alphabets a to Z (lowercase) may be used instead of numbers. Since up to 26 part numbers can be written in one alphabetical character, this can contribute to keeping the area occupied by foil-cut standard terminal symbols small.

In the embodiment described above, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. , a configuration is adopted in which the LEDs are arranged at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and a predetermined number of full color LEDs are divided into group 1 and group 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is disposed between group 1 and group 2 has been adopted, the present invention can also be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative board provided on the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 include decorative substrates provided in various presentation units of the game board 5.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 performs light emission control by supplying a constant current to eight full-color LEDs, but is not limited to full-color LEDs; , red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green, or other monochromatic LEDs. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the light emission of up to 24 monochrome LEDs.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, +12V DC supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3; The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5V) created with the linear power supply provided for the constant current drive circuit (the linear power supply 283xa provided for the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 261) is set as the current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may also be used as a voltage for lighting an LED. For example, for one output channel among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, a maximum of one single color LED (for example, When an LED (excluding red LED) is electrically connected, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5V) created by a linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of that single color LED, and the The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. Also, for one output channel among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, a maximum of two monochrome LEDs (for example, When red LEDs) are electrically connected in series, the configuration is such that the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5V) created by a linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is connected. It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. The decorative board configured in this way can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to the decorative board provided for the game board 5.

Further, in the embodiment described above, +12V DC supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channel of the constant current drive circuit Among LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full color LED for one output channel is electrically connected via the heat dispersion resistance of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. However, a plurality of full color LEDs may be electrically connected in series for one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. In addition, if it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, instead of the +12V DC supplied (output) from the power supply board 630, the power supply board 630 supplies (output) it. DC +35V may be used as the voltage for lighting the LED. The decorative board configured in this way can be applied not only to the door frame 3 but also to the decorative board provided for the game board 5.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are different from each other. When the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the top side to the bottom side of the decorative board is large, so the constant current drive circuit The edges of the land pattern are arranged so that they are parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. For any one decorative board or any two of the frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit The sides may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the top and bottom sides of the decorative substrate. In addition to its own full-color LED, the door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of another right-hand decorative board on which, for example, two full-color LEDs are mounted, using its own LED constant current drive circuit. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may directly connect, in addition to its own full-color LED, another left decorative board on which, for example, one full-color LED is mounted, using its own LED constant current drive circuit. Light emission may be controlled.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, etc. are provided on the door frame 3. Although the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates included in each decorative body are coated with a solid white resist, they may be printed using white silk printing instead. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and non-LED mounting surface of various decorative boards with white silk printing, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the position where the full color LED is placed is printed as silk printing. Each will be printed in yellow (or black).

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, various decorative substrates included in each decorative body provided on the door frame 3, such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314, On the non-LED mounting surface, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards were silk-printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), but the mounting position of the full-color LEDs was (In other words, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed is silk-printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line)), the symbol indicating the polarity of the full-color LED (used in the circuit diagram) A full-color LED can be added with a symbol (a symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal) or a simplified version of the symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that allows you to distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal). It may be configured to clearly indicate the direction of implementation.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, each decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIGS. Lower left decorative board 3203, back lower right decorative board 3253 provided in the back lower right presentation unit 3250, back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and back lower middle second decorative board 3329 provided in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320, back upper The back top and front decorative board 3422 provided in the production unit 3400, the back top and back decorative board 3452 of the back rising and falling decoration unit 3450, the back rear left decorative board 3522 provided in the back rear left decoration unit 3520, and the back rear right decoration unit 3620. The back-rear-right decorative board 3622 provided for the front side, the back-front left decorative board 3714 provided for the back-front left decorative unit 3710, and the back-front right decorative board 3814 provided for the back-front right decorative unit 3810) are used for the front (front) and rear ( A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution to the back surface), and The parts numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are placed make it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light) on the white resist painted solidly on the front (surface) of each decorative board. The markings such as the area indicating the area are printed with yellow paint by silk printing, and the structure of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above (the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, and the arrangement of the full-color LED) The region indicating the position of the full-color LED can prevent the reflectance from decreasing on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LED. 107 to 205 in that measures such as reducing reflectance have been taken to prevent the area indicating the position where the LED is placed from being seen by the player. When mounting electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and capacitors on the rear surface (back side) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. On the solid white resist on the rear surface (back side), areas indicating the positions where electronic components are to be placed are printed as silk-screen printing with solid yellow lines (or solid black lines), and the areas near these areas are printed. The part numbers corresponding to the electronic components may be printed in yellow (or black) as silk-screen printing, or a modification of the configuration of measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the second embodiment described above may be used. May be adopted. In addition, for each decorative board included in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, the configuration of the countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment (including modified examples), and the third embodiment Configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the embodiment (including modified examples), Structure of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment (including modified examples), and Reflectance according to the fifth embodiment Any one of the configurations (including modified examples) for countermeasures against reduction, etc. may be adopted.

Incidentally, gaming machines have conventionally been proposed that include various boards that are supplied with power from a power board and can control illumination (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, inside a gaming machine, lines that transmit power and control signals are routed to various circuit boards, and as the length of these lines increases, there is a risk that various circuit boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

Furthermore, conventionally, a game machine has been proposed that includes a front frame configured to cover a window opening in the front and back of the game board with a see-through protection plate (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014] , and Figure 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame becomes thinner, and the decorative substrates housed in the left and right sides also become strip-shaped. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body within the game board becomes larger, so that the decorative board provided on the game board also becomes a strip-shaped one. However, when a light emitting control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on a strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem in that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emitting control means to the light emitting means.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that are equipped with a movable accessory device that is placed in standby at the lower front of the display screen of the performance display device and that operates during the performance (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-058064 Publication (paragraph [0040], FIGS. 4, 8, and 9)). A decorative substrate is mounted inside the movable accessory device, on which a light emitting means is mounted opposite to the back surface of the light emitting section (lens) on the design surface. However, there is a risk that the number identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, and the like, which have no relation to the game to the player, may be visible to the player through the light emitting part.

Furthermore, a gaming machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting means is mounted has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The game provides the player with a variety of effects using light emission effects using such light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected on the mounting surface of the decorative board, the reflectance decreases due to the number identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed in the past in which a decorative board on which electronic components such as a light emitting body (light emitting means) are mounted facing the back surface of a light emitting part (lens) is provided on the frame side or the game board side (for example, , JP 2015-058064 A (paragraph [0011], paragraph [0040], FIG. 1, FIG. 2, FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). However, there is a risk that an auxiliary symbol identifying an electronic component mounted on the decorative board, which has no relation to the game to the player, will be visible to the player through the light emitting section.

[Silk printing with light-colored paint on the white paint film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board and door frame]
Next, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board is silk-screened with light-colored paint, and each decorative board is provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, as shown in FIGS. Each decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 205 (hereinafter may be referred to as "each decorative board provided on the game board 5") and countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment described above. Each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 employing the configuration will be explained.

[Silk printing with light-colored paint on the white coating formed on the surface of each decorative board included in the game board]
First, as each decorative board provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, for example, the back decorative board 3114 provided in the back movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIG. 145, the back lower left effect shown in FIG. Back bottom left decorative board 3203 provided in the unit 3200, back bottom right decorative board 3253 provided in the back bottom right effect unit 3250 shown in FIG. 159, back bottom middle first provided in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 shown in FIG. Decorative board 3322 and second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, back upper front decorative board 3422 provided in the upper back effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171, back ascending and descending decoration unit provided in the upper back effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 3450, a back upper and rear decorative board 3452, a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided in the back left decorative unit 3520 shown in FIG. 181, a back rear right decorative board 3622 provided in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 shown in FIG. , a back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710 shown in FIG. 193, a back front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back front right decorative body unit 3810 shown in FIG. , a white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A full-color LED layer is formed on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5, making it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light). Part numbers corresponding to the LEDs, areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are to be placed, etc. are printed using yellow paint using silk printing. In other words, each decorative board included in the game board 5 has the same configuration as the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment described above, and The effect of the structure of the countermeasure described above, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed makes it possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to light emission from the full-color LED. In addition, it has the effect that it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed. (measures have been taken to reduce reflectance, etc.).

Here, to briefly explain the members arranged in front of the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the front (front) of the rear decorative board 3114 provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110 is as shown in FIG. As shown in 145, toward the front, there is a transparent plate-like light guiding and emitting plate 3113, a sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 having a translucent part (region) and a transparent part (region), and a transparent A flat plate-like decorative body 3111 is arranged in this order, and is covered with a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-like decorative sheet 3112, and a game board side transparent member such as the decorative body 3111. As shown in FIG. 159, the front (surface) of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 provided in the back bottom left presentation unit 3200 has a transparent back bottom left decorative body 3202 and a transparent back bottom left rotation plate facing forward. The decorative bodies 3201 are arranged in this order, and are covered by transparent members on the game board side, such as a back lower left decorative body 3202 and a back lower left rotating decorative body 3201. As shown in FIG. 159, the front surface (front surface) of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 provided in the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 has a transparent back bottom right decorative body 3252 and a transparent back bottom right rotation plate toward the front. The decorative bodies 3251 are arranged in this order, and are covered by transparent members on the game board side, such as a back lower right decorative body 3252 and a back lower right rotation decorative body 3251.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, the front surface (front surface) of the lower back inner first decorative board 3322 provided in the lower back inner decoration unit 3320 has a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 toward the front, and They are arranged in this order as a transparent back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, and are covered by game board side transparent members such as an inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and a back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. As shown in FIG. 165, on the front (surface) of the second lower back decorative board 3329 provided in the lower back inner decorative body unit 3320, a transparent lower inner decorative body 3328 is arranged. It is covered by a transparent member on the game board side, such as. As shown in FIG. 171, the front surface (surface) of the back top front decoration board 3422 provided in the back top presentation unit 3400 has a transparent back top front decoration body 3421 or a transparent back top front decoration body toward the front. 3421 and a transparent back top and front rotating decoration body 3410 are arranged in this order, and are covered with game board side transparent members such as the back top and front decoration body 3421 and the back top and front rotation decoration body 3410. As shown in FIG. 173, the front surface (surface) of the back upper and rear decoration board 3452 of the back raising and lowering decoration unit 3450 provided in the back upper production unit 3400 has transparent back upper and rear decorations 3451, A transparent back upper and rear rotating decoration body 3440 is arranged in this order, and is covered with game board side transparent members such as a back upper and rear rotation decoration body 3451 and a back upper and rear rotation decoration body 3440.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 181, the front surface (front surface) of the back rear left decorative board 3522 provided in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 has, as shown in FIG. They are arranged in the order of rear left rotation decoration 3510, and are covered by game board side transparent members such as back rear left rotation decoration 3521 and back left rotation decoration 3510. As shown in FIG. 188, the front surface (front surface) of the back right decorative board 3622 provided in the back right decorative body unit 3620 has, as shown in FIG. The rotating decorations 3610 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the transparent members on the game board side, such as the back right rotating decoration 3621 and the back right rotating decoration 3610. As shown in FIG. 193, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710 has a transparent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713 and a frame-shaped shutter toward the front. A support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and are covered by a game board side transparent member such as a back front left decorative body 3713. As shown in FIG. 197, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has a transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813 and a frame-shaped shutter toward the front. A support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and are covered by a game board side transparent member such as a back front right decorative body 3813.

In this way, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is covered by the game board side transparent member. As described above, the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is coated with white resist liquid to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and is covered by the game board side transparent member.

Since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a plurality of lights mounted on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) change their light-emitting manner in various ways by turning on (light-emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can see the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 through the transparent member on the game board side, and the player is discouraged from playing the game. There is a risk that the entertainment will be lowered, and it is also inefficient that the performance member including the decorative board on which the LED that is turned off is mounted cannot contribute in any way to the progress of the performance.

Therefore, in this embodiment, each decoration provided on the game board 5 is set in a state in which a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) mounted on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are turned off. The white coating film formed on the front (surface) of the board makes the transparent member on the game board side look like a white member. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 effectively reflects external light. The concept of Pachinko machine 1 (Game board 5) (in other words, the world of Pachinko machine 1 (Game board 5) view) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, since the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is covered with a transparent member on the game board side, a plurality of LEDs ( When the full-color LED (capable of emitting multicolor light) is off, the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 makes the transparent member on the game board side appear as if it were a white member. It is visible. As a result, even when each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is used as a type of decoration visible to the player, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, The white paint film formed on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 can effectively reflect and emit external light, allowing external light of various colors to be reflected from the transparent member on the game board side. By emitting it to the outside, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and is covered with a transparent member on the game board side. Among the transparent members on the game board side, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotation decoration 3201, the lower back left rotation decoration 3202, the lower back right rotation decoration 3251, the lower back right decoration 3252, the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310, Back top and front rotating decoration 3410, back top and front rotation decoration 3421, back top and back rotation decoration 3440, back top and back decoration 3451, back left rotation decoration 3510, back back left decoration 3521, back and right rotation decoration As described above, the body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities that can disturb light. In line with the concept of Pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (in other words, the worldview of Pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)), the shading becomes darker (lower transparency) as you go from the center to the periphery. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed. In other words, among the transparent members on the game board side, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotation decoration 3201, the lower back left rotation decoration 3202, the lower back right rotation decoration 3251, the lower back right rotation decoration 3252, and the lower back middle rotation decoration. Body 3310, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left decorative body 3521, back rear The right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 are transparent and have a pink shaded area. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 becomes a white background. , a pink shading area stands out from this white background, decorative sheet 3112, back bottom left rotation decoration 3201, back bottom left decoration 3202, back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, back bottom right decoration 3252, back bottom Middle rotating decoration 3310, back top and front rotation decoration 3410, back top and front decoration 3421, back top and back rotation decoration 3440, back top and back decoration 3451, back left rotation decoration 3510, back back left decoration 3521 , the back right rotation decoration 3610, and the back right rotation decoration 3621 can provide the player with three-dimensional beauty.

In this embodiment, as described above, the metal decoration parts (gold material) such as the metal decoration part 3111d, the metal decoration part 3310a, the metal decoration part 3711a, and the metal decoration part 3811a are made by hot stamping gold metal foil. In contrast to foil stamping, a white resist is applied solidly to the front (surface) of each decorative board placed behind each decorative body on which such a metal decorative part (gold material) is formed. On the top, a front-side marking part that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed with yellow paint using silk printing. Since the gold color is a gold-like color and shines yellow like gold, the yellow color of the front side inscription is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3111d. In gaming machines, in addition to the obstacle nail N made of brass and the metal decoration part formed by foil stamping using hot stamping as described above, the golden material used in the gaming machine is, for example, silver plated with yellow material (for example, transparent). Examples include a yellow resin with optical properties, a member covered with a yellow printed material, a golden printed material, and the like.

[Example of placing a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area etc. placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board and surrounding the transparent area with the gold material (metal decoration part) ]
In addition, as each decorative board provided on the game board 5, for example, the back decorative board 3114 provided in the back movable decorative body 3110, the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 provided in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, and the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 provided in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320. As described above, the front surfaces (surfaces) of the second decorative board 3329, the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decoration unit 3710, and the back front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back front right decoration unit 3810 are white. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a resist solution (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"), and this solid coating is On the white resist, a surface-side marking part that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed with yellow paint by silk printing, and a metal decoration part with metallic luster is placed nearby. In addition, as mentioned above, the surface-side marking section allows identification of the surface-side electronic components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5, and indicates the part number of the surface-side electronic components. , the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, (This may include the model of the electronic component on the front side.)

For example, to explain the rear decorative board 3114 provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110, the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110 is directed forward as shown in FIG. A transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-like decoration sheet 3112 having a translucent part (region) and a transparent part (region), and a transparent flat decoration body 3111 are arranged in this order. It is covered with game board side transparent members such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. The entire decorative body 3111 is colorless and transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d with metallic luster. The metal decoration portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is a multicolor light emitting device printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114. Since the front side marking part that makes it possible to identify possible full-color LEDs has a yellow color, the color (yellow) of the front side marking part is similar to the color (golden color) of the metal decoration part 3111d. There is.

Note that full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are not mounted on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3111d of the transparent plate-shaped decorative body 3111 provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110. On the other hand, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponding to the transparent area of the transparent plate-like decorative body 3111 excluding the rear decorative substrate 3114.

When the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating formed on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 is made transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d with metallic luster among the decorative body 3111. Although it is visible through the area, the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d is visible due to the white coating formed on the front (surface) of the back decorative board 3114 as a white background. Due to the eye-catching property, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, making it difficult to visually recognize the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 is applied to the metallic decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 with metallic luster. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area except for the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back decorative substrate 3114, the color of the metal decorative portion 3111d ( Due to the eye-attractiveness of the back decorative board 3114, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front (surface) of the back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, even when the rear decorative board 3114 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Since the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) view) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. Although it is possible to visually recognize the front side marking part having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify it through the transparent area of the decoration body 3111 except for the metal decoration part 3111d with metallic luster, the backside decoration board 3114 Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) becomes a white background, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the decoration body 3111 from the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 due to its attractiveness due to its color (gold). Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decoration part 3111d that is formed (formed), even if the front side marking part is silk-printed in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration part 3111d, this yellow The existence of silk printing can be made difficult to understand.

In addition, through holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. Through-holes, lands, etc. are visible from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed, but the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d makes them visually appealing, making them invisible to the front of the rear decorative board 3114. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (surface) to the metal decorative part 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative part 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Since the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be made difficult to understand, when working on artwork for routing the wiring pattern of the rear decorative board 3114, it is possible to restrict the position, size, and number of through holes and lands. This can increase the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the rear decorative board 3114, and can also contribute to shortening the time required for artwork work.

[Example of placing a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent lens placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board]
To explain the first decorative board 3322 and the second decorative board 3329 included in the lower back interior decoration unit 3320, the front surface of the first decorative board 3322 ( As shown in FIG. 165, the transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and the transparent back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 are arranged in this order toward the front, and the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 , and a transparent member on the game board side such as the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. As shown in FIG. 165, on the front (surface) of the second lower back decorative board 3329 provided in the lower back inner decorative body unit 3320, a transparent lower inner decorative body 3328 is arranged. It is covered by a transparent member on the game board side such as. The entire lower back center rotating decorative body 3310 is transparent except for the metallic decorative part 3310a having metallic luster. The metal decoration part 3310a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and has a white color solidly painted on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back and the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back. Since the surface-side notation printed by silk printing on the resist and which makes it possible to identify the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light has a yellow color, the color (yellow) of the front-side notation indicates that the metal decoration portion 3310a is The color is similar to that of the original (gold).

Note that while a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 corresponding to the metal decorative part 3310a of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the metal decorative part A full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322, which corresponds to the transparent area of the lower back inner rotating decorative body 3310 excluding 3310a.

When the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is replaced with the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 with metallic luster. Although it is visible through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative part 3310a, the white coating formed on the front (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the lower back forms a white background. The eye-attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a draws the line of sight from the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back center rotating decorative body 3310. It will be guided naturally. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322. can be made difficult to see. In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back can be visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3328 in the lower back. However, because the back bottom center rotating decorative body 3310 in which the metal decorative part 3310a with metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the back bottom center decorative body 3328 is arranged, the back bottom center second The white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background, and the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a provides an attractive appearance to the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. ), the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of the second lower back decorative board 3329. can be made difficult to see. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the lower back is coated with the metallic luster of the rotating decorative body 3310 on the lower back. Although it is visible through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3310a held, the white coating formed on the front (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the lower back forms a white background. The color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a allows the metal decoration portion 3310a to be provided (formed) from the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the lower back side to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the rotary decoration body 3310 on the lower back side. The line of sight will be guided naturally. As a result, even if the first decorative board 3322 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back central rotary decoration body 3310 is By attracting the eye, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the lower back side. In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back can be visually recognized through the transparent decorative body 3328 in the lower back. However, because the back bottom center rotating decorative body 3310 in which the metal decorative part 3310a with metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the back bottom center decorative body 3328 is arranged, the back bottom center second The white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background, and the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a provides an attractive appearance to the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. ), the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. As a result, even if the second decorative board 3329 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back central rotary decoration body 3310 is By attracting the eye, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, a multicolor light emitting device printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back Although the front side marking part having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 excluding the metal decoration part 3310a with metallic luster. The white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the lower back forms a white background, and the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a provides an attractive color to the first decorative substrate 3322 on the lower back. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3322 to the metal decorative part 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the front side marking part is the color of the metal decorative part 3310a (gold). ), even if it is printed using silkscreen printing in a yellow color similar to that of yellow silkscreening, the existence of this yellow silkscreen printing can be made difficult to notice. In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, a multicolor light emitting multicolor LED printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front (surface) of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back Although the front side marking part having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED can be visually recognized through the transparent lower back middle decoration body 3328, there is a metal decoration part with metallic luster in front of the back lower middle decoration body 3328. 3310a is provided (formed), the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 on the back bottom becomes a white background. Because of the visual appeal due to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) on the rotary decorative body 3310 from the front surface (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back Since the line of sight is naturally guided, even if the front side notation is silk-printed in a yellow color similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a, the existence of this yellow silk-printing can be made difficult to notice. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, through holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front (surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. Through-holes, lands, etc. are visible from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed, but the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a makes them more visible, so the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ) By drawing the eye to the metal decorative portion 3310a, the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be made difficult to notice, so when performing artwork for routing the wiring pattern of the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back. This eliminates the need to be restricted by the position, size, and number of through holes and lands, increasing the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back, and reducing the time required for artwork work. It can also contribute to shortening the time. In addition, through holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front (surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. Through-holes, lands, etc. stand out from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed, but the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a makes them visually appealing, making them difficult to see on the second decorative board in the bottom of the back. 3329, the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. ) By drawing the eye to the metal decorative portion 3310a, the presence of through holes, lands, etc. can be made difficult to notice, so when doing artwork for routing the wiring pattern of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back. This eliminates the need to be constrained by the position, size, and number of through holes and lands, increasing the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern on the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back, and reducing the time required for artwork work. It can also contribute to shortening the time.

[Example of placing a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration body placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board and surrounding the transparent decoration body with the gold material (metal decoration part)]
To explain the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the front (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is as shown in FIG. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3713, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and the back front left decorative body 3713 and other game boards are arranged in this order. It is covered by a side transparent member. A metal decorative portion 3711a with metallic luster is formed on the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3711. The metal decoration part 3711a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is a multicolor printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714. Since the surface-side markings that enable identification of the full-color LED that can emit light have a yellow color, the color (yellow) of the surface-side markings is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3711a. ing.

Note that, while a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3711a of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the metal decorative portion 3711a is Full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, which corresponds to the area within the frame of the removed frame-shaped front cover 3711.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the back front left decorative body 3713 is transparent, so the back front left decoration placed behind the back front left decorative body 3713 Although the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the back front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, the back front left The white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 becomes a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a attracts attention from the front (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, making it difficult to visually recognize the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714. As a result, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3730 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the back front left decorative body 3713 is transparent, so the back front left decoration placed behind the back front left decorative body 3713 Although the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the back front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, the back front left The white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 becomes a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a attracts attention from the front (surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. As a result, even when the back front left decorative board 3714 is used as a type of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. , the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 can be made difficult to see, so the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) worldview) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, in the open state where the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730 and the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the front (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 is painted solidly. A front side marking part having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light printed by silk printing on a white resist is printed on the back front left decorative body 3713, within the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and on the shutter unit. Although it is visible through the frame of 3730, the white coating formed on the front (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 forms a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a is Due to the eye-attractiveness, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, so that the front surface side notation is similar to the metal decorative portion 3711a. Even if it is printed with yellow silk printing similar to the color (gold) of (gold), the presence of this yellow silk printing can be made difficult to notice.

In addition, through holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front (surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714. The through-holes, lands, etc. stand out from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed, but the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a makes them more visible, making them more visible on the back front left decorative board 3714. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front (surface) to the metal decorative part 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative part 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. By doing this, the existence of through holes, lands, etc. can be made difficult to understand, so when working on artwork for routing the wiring pattern on the back front left decorative board 3714, it is necessary to check the location, size, and number of through holes and lands. Therefore, the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back front left decorative board 3714 can be increased, and it can also contribute to shortening the time required for artwork work.

[Example of placing a golden material (metallic decoration part) in front of a transparent decorative body placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board and surrounding the transparent decorative body with the golden material (metallic decoration part)]
To explain the back front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810, the front (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810 is as shown in FIG. A transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and the back front right decorative body 3813 and other game boards are arranged in this order. It is covered by a side transparent member. A metal decorative portion 3811a with metallic luster is formed on the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3811. The metal decoration part 3811a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is a multicolor printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814. Since the surface-side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs capable of emitting light have a yellow color, the color of the front-side markings (yellow) is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3811a. ing.

Note that a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3811a of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, but the metal decorative portion 3811a is Full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, which corresponds to the area within the frame of the removed frame-shaped front cover 3811.

In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the back front right decoration 3813 is transparent, so the back front right decoration placed behind the back front right decoration 3813 is Although the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the back front right decorative body 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, the back front right The white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 becomes a white background, and the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a attracts attention from the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, making it difficult to visually recognize the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814. As a result, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided at the rear of the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the back front right decoration 3813 is transparent, so the back front right decoration placed behind the back front right decoration 3813 Although the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the back front right decorative body 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, the back front right The white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 becomes a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a attracts attention from the front (surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. As a result, even when the back front right decorative board 3814 is used as a type of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. , the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 can be made difficult to see, so the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) worldview) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, in the open state where the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830 and the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the front (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 is painted solidly. A front side marking part having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light printed by silk printing on a white resist is printed on the back front right decorative body 3813, within the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and on the shutter unit. Although it is visible through the frame of 3830, the white coating formed on the front (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 forms a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative part 3811a is Due to the eye-catching property, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, so that the front surface side notation is similar to the metal decorative portion 3811a. Even if it is printed with yellow silk printing similar to the color (gold) of (gold), the presence of this yellow silk printing can be made difficult to notice.

In addition, through holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front (surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814. The through-holes, lands, etc. stand out from the white paint film because the copper foil is exposed, but the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a makes them more visible, making them more visible on the back front right decorative board 3814. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front (surface) to the metal decorative part 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative part 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. This makes it difficult to notice the presence of through holes, lands, etc., so when working on artwork for routing the wiring pattern on the back front right decorative board 3814, be sure to check the location, size, and number of through holes and lands. Therefore, the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the back front right decorative board 3814 can be increased, and it can also contribute to shortening the time required for artwork work.

[Example of placing a transparent decoration placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board between a gold material (metal decoration part) and a gold material (metal decoration part)]
In addition, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 111, the back bottom center decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom center presentation unit 3300 shown in FIG. The back top effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171 is placed above it, the back front left decoration unit 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 shown in FIG. The back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 shown in FIG. 197 is arranged, the back lower left effect unit 3200 shown in FIG. The shown back lower right production unit 3250 is arranged.

The lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 placed below the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the back front left decoration unit 3710 placed on the left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Metal decorative parts 3310a, 3711a, 3811a are provided (formed) on the front cover 3711 of the front cover 3711 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5. All have golden color.

On the other hand, the back top front decoration body 3421 and the back top front rotating decoration body 3410 of the back top presentation unit 3400 arranged above the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparent, and the back top front decoration body 3410 is transparent. The front side marking part that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light is printed on the solid white resist on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3422 by silk printing, and the front side marking part is yellow. The color (yellow) of the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 placed on the left side of the back top presentation unit 3400 and the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 placed on the right side of the back top presentation unit 3400. The color is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810. In other words, the back upper front decorative board 3422 having a yellow surface side inscription similar to gold is the metal decorative part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the front cover of the back front right decoration unit 3810. 3811 (the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3781 of the back front right decoration unit 3810). (because the color (yellow) of the front side notation is visible through the back top front decoration 3421, or through the back top front decoration 3421 and the back top front rotating decoration 3410) Even so, the presence of the back top and front decorative substrates 3422 can be made difficult to notice, and the presence of the front side markings can be made difficult to notice due to the attractiveness of the golden metal decoration parts 3711a and 3811a.

In addition, the back lower left decoration body 3202 and the back lower left rotating decoration body 3201 of the back lower left presentation unit 3200 arranged on the lower left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are formed transparently, and the back lower left decoration board 3203 has a yellow color on the front side markings that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light, which is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front side (surface) of the 3203. The color (yellow) of the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710, which is placed at the upper left of the back lower left effect unit 3200, and the lower right side of the back lower left effect unit 3200. The color is similar to the gold color of the metal decorative portion 3310a of the lower back center rotating decoration 3310 of the lower back center decoration unit 3320. In other words, the back lower left decorative board 3203 having a yellow surface side marking similar to gold is attached to the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320. Because it is arranged mixed with the metal decoration part 3310a of the middle rotating decoration unit 3310 (the metal decoration part 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the back lower middle rotation decoration of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320) 3310), the color (yellow) of the front side inscription can be visually recognized through the back bottom left decoration body 3202 and the back bottom left rotating decoration body 3201. Even if there is, the presence of the back lower left decorative board 3203 can be made difficult to notice and the presence of the front side marking part can be made difficult to notice due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decoration parts 3711a and 3310a.

In addition, the back lower right decoration body 3252 and the back lower right rotating decoration body 3251 of the back lower right production unit 3250 arranged on the lower right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are transparent, and the back lower right decoration body 3251 is transparent. The front side markings that enable identification of full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light are printed on the solid white resist on the front surface (surface) of the substrate 3253 by silk printing, and the front side markings are yellow. The color (yellow) of the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 located at the upper right of the back lower right presentation unit 3250 and the lower left of the back lower left presentation unit 3200 The color is similar to the gold color of the metal decorative portion 3310a of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 to be arranged. In other words, the back lower right decorative board 3253 having a yellow surface side marking similar to gold is attached to the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320. Because it is arranged mixed with the metal decoration part 3310a of the middle rotating decoration unit 3310 (the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 and the back lower middle rotation decoration of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320). 3310), the color (yellow) of the front side inscription can be visually recognized through the back lower right decorative body 3252 and the back lower right rotation decorative body 3251. Even if there is, the presence of the back lower right decorative board 3253 can be made difficult to notice and the presence of the front side marking part can be made difficult to notice due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decoration parts 3811a and 3310a.

[Example of placing an obstacle nail near a transparent decoration placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board]
As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 includes a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and an outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. As described above, the front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100. This makes it possible to visually recognize the presence of various members arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the game panel 1100 from the front of the front component 1000 (that is, the front of the game board 5). (Sometimes referred to as "transparent game panel 1100").

Further, as described above, in the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, the center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, the starting port unit 2100 is formed from a transparent member, and the side unit 2200 is transparent. The upper left side unit 2300 is made of transparent material, and the unit base 2411, front cover 2412, and rear cover 2413 of the first attacker unit 2400 are made of transparent materials. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 111, the existence of the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower right effect unit 3250, and the back lower middle effect unit 3300 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be detected using a transparent game panel. 1100 and various transparent members of the front unit 2000, it can be visually recognized.

For example, in the back lower left presentation unit 3200, transparent decorations called a back lower left rotation decoration 3201 and a back lower left decoration 3202 are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100. A back lower left decorative board 3203 will be arranged at the rear. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted on the front (surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203. In this way, behind the transparent game panel 1100, transparent decorations such as the lower back left rotating decoration 3201, the lower back left decoration 3202, and the lower back left decorative board 3203 are arranged in this order. The front (surface) of the back lower left decorative substrate 3203 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A white resist layer is formed. On the white resist painted solidly on the front (surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203, the part numbers of the front side electronic components such as a plurality of full color LEDs, areas indicating the positions where the front side electronic components are placed, etc. are displayed. Indicates the attributes of the side electronic component (which may also include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the model of the front side electronic component) The inscription on the front side is printed in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N (brass is used in this embodiment)) by silk printing.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (brass is used in this embodiment) that come into contact with game balls and have a predetermined gauge arrangement are mounted on a transparent game panel 1100. Since the nails are planted, it is possible to take advantage of the attractiveness of the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N. In other words, since the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the number of gold-colored obstacle nails N is attractive to the user, so that the player is placed behind the transparent game panel 1100. Even if the front side (surface) of the back lower left decorative board 3203 can be visually recognized through the transparent decorative bodies 3201 and 3202, the back lower left decorative board 3203 This contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the yellow (color similar to the gold color that the plurality of faulty nails N have) surface side markings printed by silk printing on the solid white resist.

Similar to the back lower left rendering unit 3200, the back lower right rendering unit 3250 also contributes to making the existence of the front side notation difficult to understand. In other words, since the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the number of gold-colored obstacle nails N is attractive to the user, so that the player is placed behind the transparent game panel 1100. The front (surface) of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 can be visually recognized through the transparent decorative bodies of the back bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 and the back bottom right decoration body 3252 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250. Even if it is possible, yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N ) contributes to making it difficult to understand the existence of the front side notation.

Furthermore, in the same way as the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 also contributes to making the existence of the front side notation part difficult to understand. In other words, since the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the number of gold-colored obstacle nails N is attractive to the user, so that the player is placed behind the transparent game panel 1100. The front surface (front surface) of the first decorative board 3322 of the back bottom middle direction unit 3300 is passed through the transparent decorative body called the back bottom center rotating decoration body 3310 and the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the back bottom center direction direction unit 3300. Even if it can be visually recognized, or through transparent decorations such as the back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 and the back bottom middle decoration body 3328 of the back bottom middle production unit 3300 arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100. , Even if the front (surface) of the second decorative board 3329 of the lower back middle presentation unit 3300 is visible, the first decorative board 3322 of the lower back right presentation unit 3250 and the lower back To make it difficult to understand the existence of the yellow (color similar to the gold color possessed by the plurality of obstacle nails N) surface side marking part printed by silk printing on the solid white resist on the second middle decorative board 3329. Contributing.

For example, in a state where the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light that are mounted on the front (surface) of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200 are turned off, the surface of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 is turned off. The front side inscription formed in yellow similar to gold on the white paint film formed on the front side is transparent decoration called the back bottom left decoration body 3202 of the back bottom left direction production unit 3200 and the back bottom left rotating decoration body 3201. Although it is visible through the body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203 forms a white background, so that the front of the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203 is visible. The eye is naturally guided from the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203 to the gold-colored obstacle nails N due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored obstacle nails N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 arranged in becomes. As a result, even when the back lower left decorative board 3203 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the golden obstacle nail N, and the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203 is Since the white paint film formed on the machine can be made difficult to see, the worldview of the gaming machine is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

Similar to the back lower left effect unit 3200, the point that the decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed also holds true for the back lower right effect unit 3250. In other words, when the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, which are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, are turned off, the The front side inscription formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white paint film is a transparent decorative body called the back bottom right decorative body 3252 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 and the back bottom right rotating decorative body 3251, Although it is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253 forms a white background, so that it is placed in front of the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253. The eye is naturally guided from the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253 to the gold-colored obstacle nails N due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored obstacle nails N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100. . As a result, even when the back lower right decorative board 3253 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the golden obstacle nail N, and the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253 is Since the white paint film formed on the machine can be made difficult to see, the worldview of the gaming machine is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

Further, in the same manner as the back lower left effect unit 3200, the same holds true for the back lower middle effect unit 3300 as well, in that deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed. In other words, when the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative board 3322 of the lower back center production unit 3300, are turned off, the first decorative board 3322 of the lower back center The front side inscription formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of is called the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the back lower left direction unit 3200 and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Although it is visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the back bottom forms a white background, so that the first decorative board 3322 on the back bottom Due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored obstacle nails N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 placed in front of the surface of the decorative board 3322, the gold-colored obstacle nails N are removed from the surface of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back. This will naturally lead your gaze to the area. In addition, when the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the second decorative board 3329 of the back bottom middle production unit 3300, are turned off, the second decorative board 3329 of the back bottom middle direction is turned off. The front side inscription formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of Although it is visible through the decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back becomes a white background, so that the second decoration in the lower back is visible. Due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored obstacle nails N planted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 placed in front of the surface of the substrate 3329, the gold-colored obstacle nails N are drawn from the surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. The line of sight will be naturally guided. As a result, even when the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative board 3329 are used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the gold-colored obstacle nail N. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the white paint film formed on the surfaces of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative board 3329, so that the world view of the gaming machine is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

Note that a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N were planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, but instead of this, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the cells The sheet has a part designed in gold (the same color as the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N, or a color close to this gold color), and due to the attractiveness of the part designed in gold, for example, the design in this gold color is The back bottom left decorative board in the back bottom left presentation unit 3200 is passed through the transparent decorative bodies of the back bottom left rotation decorative body 3201 and the back bottom left decoration body 3202 in the back bottom left presentation unit 3200, which are arranged behind the bottom left presentation unit 3200. Even if the front (surface) of 3203 is visible, the yellow (cell sheet) printed by silk printing on the solid white resist on the back lower left decorative board 3203 in the back lower left presentation unit 3200 This contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the front side markings (a color similar to the gold color of the designed part). When the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, which are mounted on the front (surface) of the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200, are turned off, the LEDs are formed on the surface of the back bottom left decorative board 3203. The front side inscription formed in a yellow color similar to gold on a white paint film is covered with a transparent decorative body called a back bottom left decoration body 3202 of a back bottom left direction unit 3200, a back bottom left rotating decoration body 3201, and a transparent Although it is visible through the game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203 forms a white background, so that it is placed in front of the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203. The eyes are naturally guided from the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203 to the golden designed part of the cell sheet due to the eye-attractiveness of the golden designed part of the cell sheet pasted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100. becomes. As a result, even when the back lower left decorative board 3203 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the golden designed part of the cell sheet, and the back lower left decorative board 3203 is used as a type of decoration visible to the player. Since the white paint film formed on the surface of 3203 can be made difficult to see, the worldview of the game machine is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, similar to the back lower left production unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front of the game panel 1100, and this cell sheet is colored gold (the same color as the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N, or There is a part designed in a color similar to gold), and due to the attractiveness of this part designed in gold, the decorativeness of the back lower right direction unit 3250 placed behind this part designed in gold also decreases in decorativeness. The point is that it is possible to suppress the In other words, when the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (surface) of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 are turned off, the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back bottom right decorative board 3253 are The front side inscription formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white paint film is a transparent decorative body called the back bottom right decoration body 3252 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 and the back bottom right rotating decoration body 3251, Although it is visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253 forms a white background, so that it is placed in front of the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253. The eyes are naturally guided from the surface of the back lower right decorative board 3253 to the golden designed part of the cell sheet due to the attractiveness of the golden designed part of the cell sheet pasted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100. The Rukoto. As a result, even when the back lower right decorative board 3253 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eyes are drawn to the golden designed part of the cell sheet, and the back lower right decorative board 3253 Since the white paint film formed on the surface of 3253 can be made difficult to see, the worldview of the game machine is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, similar to the back lower left production unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front of the game panel 1100, and this cell sheet is colored gold (the same color as the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N, or There is a part designed in a color similar to gold), and due to the attractiveness of this part designed in gold, the decorativeness of the back and middle direction unit 3300 placed behind this part designed in gold also decreases in decorativeness. The point is that it is possible to suppress the In other words, when the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative board 3322 of the lower back center production unit 3300, are turned off, the first decorative board 3322 of the lower back center The front side inscription formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of is called the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the back lower left direction unit 3200 and the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. Although it is visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 on the back bottom forms a white background, so that the first decorative board 3322 on the back bottom Obstacle nails having a gold color are removed from the surface of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back due to the attractiveness of the golden designed part of the cell sheet pasted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 placed in front of the surface of the decorative board 3322. The line of sight will naturally be directed towards N. In addition, when the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, which are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the second decorative board 3329 of the back bottom middle production unit 3300, are turned off, the second decorative board 3329 of the back bottom middle direction is turned off. The front side inscription formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of Although it is visible through the decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the second decorative board 3329 in the lower back becomes a white background, so that the second decoration in the lower back is visible. Obstacle nails N having a golden color are drawn from the surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back due to the attractiveness of the golden designed portion of the cell sheet pasted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 placed in front of the surface of the substrate 3329. This will naturally lead your gaze to the area. As a result, even if the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative board 3329 are used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the golden designed portion of the cell sheet will be visible to the player. By being attracted, it is possible to make it difficult to see the white paint film formed on the surfaces of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative board 3329, so that the world view of the gaming machine is not easily disrupted. . Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

[Silk printing with light-colored paint on the white paint film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the door frame]
On the other hand, each decorative board included in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the second embodiment described above (hereinafter, may be referred to as "various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3"). For example, the handle decoration board 184 provided in the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. A plate upper right decorative board 278 provided in the decoration unit 275, a plate lower left decorative board 283 provided in the plate lower left decorative unit 280 shown in FIGS. Lower decorative board 288, plate center provided in the production operation section cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. Lower decoration board 316, performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided in the performance operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, center button decoration board 376 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 60, shown in FIG. The outer button decoration board 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 shown in FIG. 67, the door frame right side unit shown in FIG. 410, a door frame right side decorative board 418 for the door frame right side unit 410 shown in FIG. 70, and a door frame top center decoration for the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. There are a board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456 provided for the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, a door frame top right decorative board 457 provided for the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, etc., as described above. , a white resist is formed by applying a white resist solution to the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A full color LED layer is formed on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, making it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light). Since the part number corresponding to the LED, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed, etc. are printed with yellow paint by silk printing, the structure of the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment described above is In other words, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is placed makes it possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the light emission of the full-color LED, and it is also convenient for players. This has the effect of preventing players from seeing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is placed (lower reflectance). measures have been taken).

Here, to briefly explain the members arranged in front of the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, the front (surface) of the handle decorative board 184 provided in the handle unit 180 is , as shown in FIG. 38, a transparent inner lens 185a and a transparent handle cover 185 are arranged in this order toward the front, and are covered with door frame-side transparent members such as the inner lens 185a and the handle cover 185. ing. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front side (surface) of the upper left plate decoration board 273 provided in the upper left plate decoration unit 270 includes, in the forward direction, a transparent upper left inner lens 272 and a transparent upper left decoration body. 271, and are covered by door frame side transparent members such as an upper left inner lens 272 and an upper left decorative body 271. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the upper right plate decoration board 278 provided in the upper right plate decoration unit 275 includes, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, a transparent upper right inner lens 277 and a transparent upper right decoration body. 276, and are covered by transparent members on the door frame side, such as an inner lens 277 on the upper right side of the plate and a decorative body 276 on the upper right side of the plate. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the lower left plate decoration board 283 provided in the lower left plate decoration unit 280 has, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, a transparent lower left inner lens 282 and a transparent lower left decorative body. They are arranged in the order of 281, and are covered with transparent members on the door frame side, such as a lower left inner lens 282 and a lower left decorative body 281. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (surface) of the lower right plate decoration board 288 provided in the lower right plate decoration unit 285 includes, as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, a transparent lower right inner lens 287 and a transparent lower right inner lens 287. They are arranged in the order of lower right decorative body 286, and are covered by door frame side transparent members such as the lower right inner lens 287 and the lower right decorative body 286.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the plate center upper decorative board 314 provided in the production operation section cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 has a transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 and a transparent plate center upper surface. The upper decorative body 312a is arranged in this order, and is covered by the door frame side transparent members such as the inner lens 313 on the center of the dish and the upper decorative body 312a on the dish center. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the plate center lower decoration board 316 provided in the production operation section cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 includes a transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 and a transparent plate center lower decoration. They are arranged in this order as body 312b, and are covered by door frame side transparent members such as inner lens 315 under the center of the dish and decorative body 312b under the center of the dish. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (surface) of the performance operation ring decorative board 352 provided in the performance operation unit 300 includes, in this order, a transparent decorative board cover 353, a transparent ring mounting base 331, and a transparent rotation operation section 302. It is covered by door frame-side transparent members such as a decorative board cover 353, a ring attachment base 331, and a rotation operation part 302. As shown in FIG. 60, a transparent center button cover 375 is arranged on the upper surface (surface) of the center button decoration board 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the door frame of the center button cover 375 etc. It is covered by a side transparent member. As shown in FIG. 60, the upper surface (surface) of the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300 includes a transparent outer circumference board cover 378, a transparent outer circumference decoration inner lens 379, and a transparent outer circumference decoration inner lens 379. The outer button covers 380 are arranged in this order, and are covered with door frame side transparent members such as an outer circumferential substrate cover 378, an outer circumferential decorative inner lens 379, and an outer circumferential button cover 380.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front (surface) of the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 has a transparent left side inner lens 403 and a transparent door frame left side inner lens 403 toward the front. The left side decorative body 404 is arranged in this order, and is covered with door frame side transparent members such as the left side inner lens 403 and the door frame left side decorative body 404. As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (surface) of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 has a transparent internal inner lens 414 and a transparent side window interior decoration toward the front. 410b, and are covered with door frame side transparent members such as an internal inner lens 414 and a side window interior decoration part 410b. As shown in FIG. 70, the front (surface) of the door frame right side decorative board 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 has a transparent right side inner lens 415 and a transparent right side door frame toward the front. The decoration bodies 419 are arranged in this order, and are covered with door frame side transparent members such as the right side inner lens 415 and the door frame right side decoration body 419.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the front (surface) of the door frame top center decorative board 455 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top center inner lens 458 and a transparent door frame top toward the front. The decoration bodies 453 are arranged in this order, and are covered by the door frame side transparent members such as the top center inner lens 458 and the door frame top decoration body 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front (surface) of the door frame top left decorative board 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top left inner lens 459 and a transparent door frame top decoration body toward the front. 453, and are covered with door frame side transparent members such as a top left inner lens 459 and a door frame top decoration body 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (surface) of the door frame top right decorative board 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top right inner lens 460 and a transparent door frame top decorative body toward the front. 453, and are covered by door frame side transparent members such as a top right inner lens 460 and a door frame top decoration body 453.

In this way, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is covered with the door frame side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating film, and is covered by the door frame side transparent member.

Since the pachinko machine 1 provides a dazzling light-emitting effect through illumination using light-emitting parts such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of light-emitting lights mounted on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3. LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) change their light-emitting manner in various ways by turning on (light-emitting) or turning off the light. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can see the front side (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 through the transparent member on the door frame side, which may discourage the player from playing the game. There is a risk that the entertainment will be lowered, and it is also inefficient that the presentation member including the decorative board on which the LED that is turned off is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the presentation at all.

Therefore, in each decorative board included in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, it is mounted on the front (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. When the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 makes the door frame side transparent. The component appears to be a white component. As a result, even when the light emitting effect using multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) is not in progress, the light emitted from the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 can be displayed. The white paint film can effectively reflect and emit external light, so the concept of Pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) is to emit external light of various colors from the transparent member on the door frame side In other words, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) is not likely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in each decorative board included in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the front surface (surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is Since it is covered by the frame-side transparent member, the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) mounted on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 are turned off. In this state, the door frame-side transparent member appears to be a white member due to the white coating film formed on the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. As a result, when each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, a state in which a light emitting effect using a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) is not in progress. However, since the white coating film formed on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 can effectively reflect and emit external light, various colors can be used. By emitting external light from the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the structure for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment is coated with a white resist liquid. A white coating film is formed and covered by a transparent member on the door frame side. Among the transparent members on the door frame side, the handle cover 185, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, the upper center decoration 312a of the plate, and the lower center decoration 312b of the plate. , the rotation operation section 302, the center button cover 375, the outer button cover 380, the door frame left side decoration 404, the side window interior decoration 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453, as described above. As such, it is made transparent. On the other hand, among the transparent members on the game board side that cover the white paint film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 described above, the decoration sheet 3112, the back lower left rotation decoration 3201, the back Lower left decorative body 3202, back lower right rotating decorative body 3251, back lower right rotating decorative body 3252, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front rotating decorative body 3421, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, back upper and rear decoration body 3451, back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, back rear left rotation decoration body 3521, back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and back rear right decoration body 3621 have the parts of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). The difference is that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed according to the concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)).

To briefly explain this, the pachinko machine 1 is designed to be able to provide the player with a performance with a different world view by replacing the game board. In order to reduce the manufacturing costs of the various substrates used in door frames and game boards, the resist solution applied to various substrates is usually colored green, which is inexpensive. However, when providing a dazzling effect to players through the collaboration of the light emitting effect by the game board and the light emitting effect by the door frame, when multiple LEDs are turned off, the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the door frame is ) If the green color of the resist solution applied to the area is visually recognized as it is, it does not match the worldview of the game board and may disrupt the worldview of the game board, which may disturb players and reduce their interest in the game.

Therefore, in each decorative board included in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, it is mounted on the front (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. When the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 makes the door frame side transparent. The component appears to be a white component. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white coating formed on the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 can be By using a white background that is easily dyed with a different color, it is possible to easily dye the world view of the game board, thereby making it difficult for the world view of the game board to collapse. In other words, even if the game board is replaced with respect to the door frame 3 installed in the game hall, as described above, it will be mounted on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. When the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the door frame side transparent member formed on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is a white member. By making it appear as if there is a new game board, it is possible to prevent the world view of the replaced game board from becoming inconsistent.

In addition, as described above, the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment is coated with a white resist liquid. A white resist layer is formed by the white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") that is covered by the door frame side transparent member. Among the transparent members on the door frame side, for example, a transparent rotary operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing the player are formed transparently, and the production operation unit The surfaces (mounting ) are placed at positions that are easily visible to the player through the corresponding transparent member on the door frame side. The closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating, it has a high reflectance. For this reason, in a combination of white and yellow (configuration of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow will not stand out, and if the front side markings are yellow, the yellow front side will be compared to the white resist. The markings are hard to stand out. In addition, as mentioned above, the surface-side marking section allows identification of the surface-side electronic components mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, and the mounting direction of the front side electronic component) (mounting direction), and may include the model of the front side electronic component).

On the other hand, as described above, the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310 are coated with a green resist solution to form a green coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as a "solid green coating"). ), a green resist layer is formed, and the attributes of the front side electronic component such as the part number of the front side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is placed (in addition, The front side markings that indicate the shape of the front electronic component, the size of the front electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component, and the model of the front electronic component) are white. It is printed using silk printing on a solid green resist with paint. The power supply board 630 is housed in a transparent power supply board cover 631, and is exposed from the transparent power supply board cover 631, provided with a power switch 630a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. The main control board 1310 is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320, and is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM. The power switch 630a is located at the back of the pachinko machine 1, so it is difficult for players to see, and the RAM clear switch is located at the back of the game board 5, so it is difficult to see the player. It is placed in a location that is difficult for people to see.

The closer the color is to white, the higher the reflectance is, whereas the closer the color is to black, the lower the reflectance is. For this reason, if the background is a color closer to black than white, the white color will stand out, and in the case of a combination of green and white, if the background is green, the white color will stand out, so the front side markings will be white. In some cases, the green surface side markings stand out against the green resist. In other words, the white front-side markings (white back-side markings against the green resist) stand out against the green resist painted solidly on the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310. .

In other words, since the power switch 630a and the RAM clear switch are placed in positions that are difficult for the player to see, the white color of the paint printed by silk printing is a combination that is easy to see against the green color of the resist liquid. Also, the surface-side markings such as electronic part numbers, which have no relation to the game to the player, are not visible to the player through the transparent power supply board cover 631 and the transparent main control board box 1320. On the other hand, a transparent rotary operation section 302 that can be rotated and operated by the player and a transparent press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing the player are arranged in a position that is easily visible to the player, and the resist liquid Due to the combination of the white color of the paint and the yellow color of the silk-printed paint, which makes it difficult to see, the rotary operation part has transparent markings on the surface, such as electronic part numbers, which have no relation to the game for players. 302 and the transparent press operation part 303, it can be made difficult for the player to see. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

In addition, a performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided in the performance operation unit 300, a central button decoration board 376 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300, and an outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300. Even when a decorative board such as the above is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, a transparent rotation operation section 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing the player can be used. is placed in a position that is easily visible to players, and the yellow color of the silk-printed paint is a combination that is difficult to see against the white color of the resist liquid, making it completely irrelevant to the game for players. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to visually recognize the surface-side markings such as electronic part numbers that do not have a numeral through the transparent rotary operation section 302 and the transparent press operation section 303. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

[White coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board and door frame]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player is playing a game, a game ball shot toward the game area 5a of the game board 5, while flowing down, accidentally collides with another game ball and hits a nail. It may become clogged. When the player shoots game balls one after another toward the game area 5a in this state, more game balls are piled up on top of the packed game balls, resulting in a grape-shaped collection of game balls. In order to resolve the situation in which the game balls have gathered in a grape shape, the player must call an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall and have them remove the game balls that have gathered in the grape shape. An attendant such as a clerk at a game hall called by a player opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is opened. In addition to controlling all the mounted LEDs to turn off, each movable body provided on the game board 5 is controlled to maintain the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether it is activated or not. ``control the game board at the time''. In addition to or instead of controlling the game board when the door is opened, certain LEDs (for example, the front surface of the acoustic decoration board 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 In addition to controlling the lighting of a plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3, if the door frame 3 is equipped with a movable body, the movable body is maintained in the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether it is activated or not. ``Control the door frame when opening''.

Furthermore, if game balls become stuck in the game ball supply nose of the island equipment in the game hall, the game balls from the island equipment in the game hall will not be supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the game balls will not be paid out to the players. If a ball jam occurs in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guide unit 570, payout device 580, etc. shown in FIG. You will need to call someone in charge, such as a store clerk, to clear the ball jam. An attendant such as a clerk at a game hall called by a player opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is opened. As mentioned above, control is performed to turn off all of the plurality of LEDs mounted, and control is performed to maintain each movable body provided on the game board 5 in the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether it is activated or not. Performs "control of the game board when it is opened". In addition to or instead of controlling the game board when the door frame 3 is opened, a specific LED (for example, the front surface of the acoustic decoration board 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is used. In addition to controlling the lighting of a plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3, if the door frame 3 is equipped with a movable body, the movable body is maintained in the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether it is activated or not. The above-mentioned ``control of the door frame when opening'' is performed.

When opening the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 or when opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 (that is, when opening the front frame), control and/or opening of the game board at the time of opening is performed. When controlling the door frame at the time, a specific LED ( For example, all the lights except for a plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are turned off, so when the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can The front (surface) of the board becomes visible through the transparent member on the game board side, and/or a specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469) is mounted. The front side (surface) of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, excluding the decorative board provided on the door frame 3, can be visually recognized through the transparent member on the door frame side, which may discourage players and reduce their enjoyment of the game. There is a risk that the In addition, when the performance is progressing according to the schedule data, the player cannot visually recognize the progress of the performance at all, but the performance member equipped with the decorative board on which the LED that turns off is mounted, The concept of Pachinko machine 1 (Game board 5) (that is, the world view of Pachinko machine 1 (Game board 5)) cannot be conveyed to the players, and they cannot experience the world view of Pachinko machine 1 (Game board 5). There is also a risk that the player may be given a period of time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, each decoration provided on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 that adopts the structure for measures against reduction in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment. A plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are mounted on the front surface (surface) of the board (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided for the game board 5 and door frame 3"). When the LED) is off, the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member are white members due to the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3. It looks like this. As a result, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 blocks external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, The world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is conveyed to the player so that the player can experience the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

Note that when the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, but as described above, the lights on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are Formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 when the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) mounted on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board are turned off. The white coating film makes the transparent member on the game board side and the transparent member on the door frame side appear to be white members. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) are turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 blocks external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) The world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is conveyed to the player so that the player can experience the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

[Modified example]
In addition, in the embodiment described above, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) (hereinafter referred to as "door frame 3 Among the transparent members on the door frame side that cover the white paint film formed on the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative board prepared for , upper right plate decoration 276, lower left plate decoration 281, lower right plate decoration 286, upper plate center decoration 312a, lower plate center decoration 312b, rotation operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer button cover 380, door The frame left side decoration 404, the side window interior decoration 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are transparent, whereas each decorative board provided on the game board 5 Among the transparent members on the game board side that cover the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of Lower right decorative body 3252, back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left decoration body 3521, back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and back rear right decoration body 3621 are the concept of Pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of Pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) The difference is that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) are printed along the same lines, but among the door frame side transparent members, the handle cover 185, the upper left plate decoration 271, Upper right plate decoration 276, lower left plate decoration 281, lower right plate decoration 286, upper center decoration 312a, lower center decoration 312b, rotation operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer button cover 380, door frame The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) in accordance with the world view of ) may be printed.

In other words, among the door frame-side transparent members that cover the white paint film formed on the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, the handle cover 185, the plate upper left decoration 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, plate lower left decoration 281, plate lower right decoration 286, upper plate center decoration 312a, lower plate center decoration 312b, rotation operation part 302, center button cover 375, outer button cover 380, door frame left side decoration A game that covers the body 404, the side window interior decoration part 410b, the door frame right side decoration body 419, the door frame top decoration body 453, and the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5. Among the transparent members on the board side, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3202, the lower right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower right rotating decorative body 3252, the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the back Top-front rotating decorative body 3410, back top-front rotating decorative body 3421, back top-back rotating decorative body 3440, back top-rear decorative body 3451, back rear left-handed rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left-handed decorative body 3521, back right-handed rotating decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 are colored in the same predetermined color (in this embodiment, pink ) may be applied by printing. In this way, by making the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 into one, the world view based on the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can be improved. can be expressed. In other words, in order to match the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (in other words, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)), the transparent member on the door frame side and the transparent member on the gaming board side are colored with related colors (associative colors). ) (For example, colors with gradation, colors related to the sea, sky, and space, colors related to animals and plants, colors related to vehicles, robots, colors related to sports, colors related to fire, colors related to rain, snow, Christmas, New Year, summer vacation, winter vacation, spring vacation) , beaches, hot springs, ski resorts, etc.) or the same color to make the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 one, and to create the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (i.e. , the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can be more clearly expressed.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment (hereinafter referred to as "door frame 3 The transparent member on the door frame side (for example, the handle cover 185, the upper left decoration of the plate 271) covers the white coating formed on the front (front) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative board prepared for , upper right plate decoration 276, lower left plate decoration 281, lower right plate decoration 286, upper plate center decoration 312a, lower plate center decoration 312b, rotation operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer button cover 380, door The frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453) are formed transparently, but they do not adhere to the contour of the door frame side transparent member. A metallic decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster and a metallic decorative part (golden colored) with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional design are provided on the surface of the transparent member on the door frame side. ). In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is transferred to the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be visually recognized through the door frame 3, the white paint film formed on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 forms a white background, so that the color ( Due to the eye-catching property (gold color), the line of sight is naturally guided from the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member. becomes. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative part provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member, and the white color formed on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. The coating film can be made difficult to visually recognize. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment (hereinafter referred to as "door frame 3 The transparent member on the door frame side (for example, the handle cover 185, the upper left decoration of the plate 271) covers the white coating formed on the front (front) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative board prepared for , upper right plate decoration 276, lower left plate decoration 281, lower right plate decoration 286, upper plate center decoration 312a, lower plate center decoration 312b, rotation operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer button cover 380, door The frame left side decoration 404, the side window inner decoration 410b, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453) are formed transparently, but they do not adhere to the contour of the door frame side transparent member. A metallic decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster and a metallic decorative part (golden colored) with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional design are provided on the surface of the transparent member on the door frame side. ). In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is transferred to the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be visually recognized through the door frame 3, the white paint film formed on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 forms a white background, so that the color ( Due to the eye-catching property (gold color), the line of sight is naturally guided from the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member. becomes. As a result, even when each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the transparent member on the door frame side. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) or the top surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In addition, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, it is printed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. Although the front side marking part having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light can be visually recognized through the transparent member on the door frame side, the front (surface) or top surface of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 The white paint film formed on the (surface) becomes a white background, and the front (surface) or top surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 is made more attractive due to the color (gold) of the metal decoration part. Since the line of sight is naturally drawn to the metal decoration provided (formed) on the transparent member on the side of the door frame, the markings on the front side are silk-printed in yellow, which is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration. This yellow silk printing can make it difficult to notice even when the screen is on.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the metal decorative portion 3111d (a decoration provided (arranged) in front of the decorative body 3111) in the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIGS. (including the hologram part in the first contour part 3112a of the sheet 3112), the metal decoration part 3310a of the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 shown in FIG. 163, the front cover of the back front left decoration unit 3710 shown in FIG. The metal decoration parts of each decoration body provided on the game board 5, such as the metal decoration part 3711a in 3711 and the metal decoration part 3811a in the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration body unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197, are all gold as a predetermined color. However, the metal decorative parts of each decorative body provided on the game board 5 may all have an opaque gold color as a predetermined color, or may all have a translucent gold color as a predetermined color. It may be configured to have a golden color (having translucency), or it may be constituted by a mixture of a predetermined color having an opaque gold color and a translucent gold color (having a translucency). You can leave it there. In the following modified examples, the same is true, and the metal decoration parts are all gold-colored as the predetermined color, but the metal decoration parts in each decoration provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3 are the same as the predetermined color. The color may be entirely opaque gold, the predetermined color may be semitransparent (translucent) gold, or the predetermined color may be opaque gold. It may be composed of a mixture of gold-colored materials and translucent (translucent) gold-colored materials.

[A modification in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area etc. placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part) Example 1]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as each decorative board provided on the game board 5, for example, the back decorative board 3114 provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 145, the front face (surface) of the 3113 includes, as shown in FIG. A shaped decorative sheet 3112 and a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with game board-side transparent members such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. The entire decorative body 3111 is colorless and transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d with metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). As described above, the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). ), a white resist layer is formed, and a yellow marking is printed on the solid white resist to identify the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light. have. For this reason, the color (yellow) of the front surface side marking portion was similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, by further forming a metallic decorative part 3111d with metallic luster on the outer peripheral part of the decorative body 3111, the entire part except for the metallic decorative part 3111d with metallic luster is formed colorless and transparent. It may be configured to surround the area.

In this case, a metallic decorative part 3111d with metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral part of the decorative body 3111 so as to surround the area where the entire area excluding the metallic decorative part 3111d is colorless and transparent. The size and arrangement of the metal decorative portions 3111d (thickly shaded portions shown in FIGS. 149 to 149) and other members related to these metal decorative portions 3111d may be changed as appropriate.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back decorative board 3114 is replaced by a metallic luster of the decorative body 3111. Although it is visible through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3111d, the white coating formed on the front (surface) of the back decoration board 3114 forms a white background, so that the metal decoration cannot be seen. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d, the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the back decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, making it difficult to visually recognize the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating formed on the front surface (surface) of the back decorative board 3114 is replaced by a metallic luster among the decorative bodies 3111. Although it can be seen through the transparent area except for the metal decorative part 3111d with The eye is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 to the metal decorative part 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 due to the eye-catching property due to the color (gold) of the metal decorative part 3111d. Become. As a result, even when the rear decorative board 3114 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Since the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) view) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

Further, even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, printing is performed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. The front side marking part having a yellow color that makes it possible to identify the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the decoration body 3111 excluding the metal decoration part 3111d with metallic luster. However, since the white coating film formed on the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 becomes a white background, the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the surface) to the metal decoration part 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111, the front side marking part is silk-printed in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration part 3111d. Even if it is printed, the existence of this yellow silk printing can be made difficult to notice.

[A modification in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent area etc. placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part) Example 2]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, as each decorative board provided on the game board 5, for example, the back decorative board 3114 provided in the rear movable decorative body 3110 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 145, the front face (surface) of the 3113 includes, as shown in FIG. A shaped decorative sheet 3112 and a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with game board-side transparent members such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and the decorative body 3111. The entire decorative body 3111 is colorless and transparent except for the metallic decorative portion 3111d with metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). As described above, the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). ), a white resist layer is formed, and a yellow marking is printed on the solid white resist to identify the full-color LED that can emit multicolor light. have. For this reason, the color (yellow) of the front surface side marking portion was similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Therefore, in addition to the front side notation, for example, a solid white mark is added to the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 so as to surround the metal decorative part 3111d with a thick solid line or a figure having another shape. It may be configured to be printed in yellow on the resist by silk printing.

In this case, a figure having a thick solid line or other shape is printed in yellow by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 so as to surround the metal decorative part 3111d. 147 to 149) and other members related to these metal decoration parts 3111d may be changed as appropriate.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white paint film formed on the front surface (surface) of the back decorative board 3114 is replaced by a metallic luster of the decorative body 3111. Although it is visible through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3111d, the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the back decoration board 3114 forms a white background, so that the metal decoration The eye-catching property due to the color (gold) of the portion 3111d naturally guides the line of sight from the front (surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, making it difficult to visually recognize the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) is not easily disrupted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

Even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating formed on the front surface (surface) of the back decorative board 3114 is replaced by a metallic luster among the decorative bodies 3111. Although it can be seen through the transparent area except for the metal decorative portion 3111d with The eye is naturally guided from the front surface (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 to the metal decorative part 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111 due to the eye-catching property due to the color (gold) of the metal decorative part 3111d. Become. As a result, even when the rear decorative board 3114 is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the metal decorative part 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, Since the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) view) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

Further, even with this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, printing is performed by silk printing on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114. In addition to the yellow front side notation that makes it possible to identify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light, thick solid lines or other shapes are added to the decorative body 3111, excluding the metal decorative part 3111d with metallic luster. Although it is visible through the transparent area, the white paint film formed on the front (surface) of the back decorative board 3114 forms a white background, which makes the color (gold) of the metal decorative part 3111d invisible. ), the line of sight is naturally guided from the front (surface) of the rear decorative board 3114 to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Even if a figure having a solid line or other shape is printed with yellow silk printing similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3111d, the existence of this yellow silk printing can be made difficult to notice.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed at the joint of the transparent member on the transparent frame side placed in front of the yellow silk-printed board]
In addition, in the embodiment described above, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration of countermeasures for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment (hereinafter referred to as "door frame 3 The transparent member on the door frame side that covers the white paint film formed on the front (surface) or upper surface (surface) of each decorative board prepared for body 276, lower left plate decoration 281, lower right plate decoration 286, upper plate center decoration 312a, lower plate center decoration 312b, door frame left side decoration 404, door frame right side decoration 419, and door frame top Decorative body 453) is formed transparent, and the joint between the left side of door frame top decorative body 453 and the upper side of door frame left side decorative body 404 (the joint between the left side of door frame top decorative body 453 and the left side of door frame A metal decorative part (gold color) with metallic luster is provided (formed) on the upper side of the decorative body 404 (designed so that it looks like it is connected to the upper side of the decorative body 404), and the bottom of the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame is The joint between the side and the left side of the upper left plate decoration 271 (the part designed so that the lower side of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the left side of the upper left plate decoration 271 appear to be connected) has a metallic luster. A metal decorative part (golden color) with A metallic decorative part (gold color) with metallic luster is provided (formed) in the part designed so that the left side of the decorative body 312a appears to be connected to the left side of the upper plate center decorative body 312a. The joint between the left side of the upper right plate decoration 276 (the part designed so that the right side of the upper center plate decoration 312a and the left side of the upper right plate decoration 276 appear to be connected) is made of metal with metallic luster. A decorative part (gold) is provided (formed) at the joint between the right side of the upper right plate decoration 276 and the lower side of the door frame right side decoration 419 (the right side of the upper right plate decoration 276 and the right side decoration of the door frame). A metal decoration part (gold color) with metallic luster is provided (formed) on the lower side of the door frame right side decoration body 419). and the right side of the door frame top decoration 453 (the part designed so that the upper side of the door frame right side decoration 419 and the right side of the door frame top decoration 453 appear to be connected) has a metallic luster. It is also possible to provide (form) a metal decorative part (gold color) with a . In addition, the joint between the right side of the lower left plate decoration 281 and the left side of the lower plate center decoration 312b is designed so that the right side of the lower left plate decoration 281 and the left side of the lower plate center decoration 312b appear to be connected. A metallic decorative part (gold color) with metallic luster is provided (formed) at the joint between the right side of the plate center lower decorative body 312b and the left side of the plate lower right decorative body 286 (the lower plate center decorative body 286). A metallic decorative part (gold color) with metallic luster is provided (formed) in a part designed so that the right side of the decorative body 312b and the left side of the lower right plate decorative body 286 are connected. Good too. In this way, a metallic decorative part (gold) with a metallic luster is provided as a joint between the transparent members on the door frame side (a part designed so that adjacent transparent members on the door frame side appear to be connected). By (forming) this joint, you can hide it.

[Modified example in which a golden material (glossy sheet member) is placed in front of a transparent game panel board placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board]
In the embodiment described above, the center accessory 2500 is a flat flange that protrudes from the outer periphery of a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) and abuts the front surface of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. 2502, but a glossy sheet member having glitter that shines in the form of particles (in gold or a color mixed with gold) is provided on the front surface of this flange portion 2502, and a glossy sheet member is provided on the front side of this flange portion 2502. A decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light may be mounted may be arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The front surface (surface) of the decorative board is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the glossy sheet member, when the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front, even if the glossy sheet member is arranged to cover all or part of the front (surface) of the decorative substrate. Alternatively, the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate may not be covered at all, but may be placed close to it in the vertical direction or in the horizontal direction. They may be spaced apart. A white resist layer is formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region is formed on the solid white resist and indicates the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is placed, which makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light). The inscription on the front side is printed with yellow paint using silk printing. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement and in contact with the game balls. In this way, in front of the front (surface) of the decorative board, a glossy sheet member having glitter that glitters in the form of particles (gold or a color mixed with gold) and a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are arranged. Therefore, the existence of the decorative board is made difficult to notice due to the visibility caused by the glossy sheet member with glitter that shines in the form of particles (gold or a color mixed with gold) and the plurality of gold-colored obstructing nails N. Even if the color (yellow) of the front side markings is visible through the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, it can be printed on the white resist painted solidly on the decorative board by silk printing. It is possible to make the existence of the printed yellow (color similar to the gold color of the glossy sheet member and the obstacle nail N) surface side marking part difficult to understand.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a transparent game panel board placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board]
Further, in the embodiment described above, a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is mounted is arranged on the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a decorative board is arranged between the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 and the decorative board. An inner lens three-dimensionally formed from a transparent member may be placed between the two. On the surface of the inner lens, lens cuts are made in some specific areas or the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be refracted diffusely, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board placed behind the inner lens. Further, the front surface (surface) of the decorative board is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the inner lens, when the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front, the inner lens may be arranged to cover all or part of the front (surface) of the decorative substrate. A white resist layer is formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region is formed on the solid white resist and indicates the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is placed, which makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light). The inscription on the front side is printed with yellow paint using silk printing. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement and in contact with the game balls. Although a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are arranged in front of the front (surface) of the decorative board, the yellow (obstacle nails N) printed by silk printing on the white resist painted solidly on the decorative board It has no decorative relationship with the markings on the front side (color similar to gold). The presence of the decorative board can be made difficult to notice due to the visibility provided by the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front side markings can be made clear by the lens-cut area on the inner lens. It can be difficult to understand.

[Modification 1 in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a transparent member placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the embodiment described above, a logo decoration body (logo decoration movable body) having a logo may be provided on the game board 5 so as to be operated. The logo decoration body is composed of a transparent inner lens placed behind a transparent front decoration body, a decorative substrate placed behind the inner lens, and a base member etc. placed behind the decorative substrate. be. In the front decoration body, the logo area (for example, the area of the letters "ABC") is formed transparent, and the other area except the logo area is formed as a metallic decoration part (gold color) with metallic luster. There is. In other words, the logo area is surrounded by a metallic decorative part (gold) with metallic luster. On the surface of the inner lens, lens cuts are made in some specific areas or the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be refracted diffusely, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board placed behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region is formed on the solid white resist and indicates the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is placed, which makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light). The inscription on the front side is printed with yellow paint using silk printing. The presence of the decorative board can be made difficult to notice due to the attractiveness of the gold color of the metal decoration part with metallic luster, and the existence of the color (yellow) of the front side marking part can be hidden by the lens cut on the inner lens. The area can be made more difficult to understand.

[Modification 2 in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a transparent member placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board and the transparent area is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the embodiment described above, a graphic decoration body (a graphic decoration movable body) having a predetermined graphic may be provided on the game board 5 to operate. The graphic decoration body has a transparent inner lens placed behind a transparent front decoration body, a decorative substrate placed behind the inner lens, and a base member etc. placed behind the decorative substrate. be. The front decoration has a metal decoration part (gold color) with metallic luster on its outer periphery, and a metal decoration part with metallic luster on the outer periphery of one area (for example, the central part). (golden color) is formed. Then, in this one area (for example, the central part), in addition to the figure area (for example, the eyelid part of the human body's eyeballs, the human body's mouth part, the human body's ear part), letters, numbers, figures, and symbols. etc.) are formed as a metallic decorative part (gold color) with a metallic luster. Furthermore, the front decoration body has a metallic luster formed on the outer periphery of one area (for example, the central part) from the inside of the metallic decoration part (gold color) that has a metallic luster formed on the outer periphery. The area extending to the outside of the metal decorative part (gold) held is transparent. In addition, the front decoration includes a metal decoration part (gold color) with metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral part of one area (for example, the central part). A region extending to the outside of the outer peripheral portion of the region where the graphic region is formed is transparent as a metal decorative portion (gold color) having a shape. On the surface of the inner lens, lens cuts are made in some specific areas or the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be refracted diffusely, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board placed behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region is formed on the solid white resist and indicates the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is placed, which makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light). The inscription on the front side is printed with yellow paint using silk printing.

In other words, the front decoration has a metallic luster formed on the outer periphery of one area (for example, the central part) from the inside of the metallic decoration part (gold color) that has a metallic luster formed on its outer periphery. The area extending to the outside of the held metal decorative part (gold) is transparent, and the metal decorative part (gold) has a metallic luster and is formed on the outer periphery of one area (for example, the central part). Since the area extending from the inside of one area (for example, the central part) to the outside of the outer peripheral part of the area where the graphic area is formed as a metal decorative part (gold color) with metallic luster is formed transparently, The transparent area is surrounded by a metallic decoration (gold color) with metallic luster. In this way, the presence of the decorative board can be made difficult to notice due to the attractiveness of the gold color of the metallic decorative part with metallic luster, and the existence of the color (yellow) of the front side marking part can be used as a lens for the inner lens. The cut area can be made more difficult to understand.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is placed in front of a transparent member placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board to surround the gold material (metal decoration part)]
Further, in the embodiment described above, a graphic decoration body (a graphic decoration movable body) having a predetermined graphic may be provided on the game board 5 to operate. The graphic decoration body has a transparent inner lens placed behind a transparent front decoration body, a decorative substrate placed behind the inner lens, and a base member etc. placed behind the decorative substrate. be. The front decorative body has a graphic area (for example, the eyelid part of the human body's eyeballs, the human body's mouth part, the human body's ear part, as well as a hexagon or octagon) in one area (for example, the central part). It is formed as a metal decorative part (golden color) with metallic luster, and a region surrounding this part is formed transparent. In other words, the metallic decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is surrounded by a transparent area. In addition, when the front decoration is formed as a graphic area in one area (for example, the center part) and as the eyelid of the eyeball of the human body, the metal decoration part (golden color) with metallic luster is placed on the upper and lower eyelids. The upper eyelid opens from the lower eyelid, and this opened part and other areas except the upper and lower eyelids are transparent. In other words, the upper and lower eyelids, which are metallic decorative parts (gold) with metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent area. In addition, when the front decoration body is formed as a figure area in one area (for example, the center part) as a human mouth, the metal decoration part (gold color) with metallic luster becomes the upper lip and the lower lip. opens from the lower lip, and this opened part and other areas except the upper lip and lower lip are formed transparent. In other words, the upper lip and lower lip, which are metallic decorative parts (golden in color) with metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent region. In addition, when the front decoration is formed as a figure area in one area (for example, the center part) in the shape of a human ear, hexagon, or octagon, the metal decoration part (gold) with metallic luster is attached to the ear. (The inner region of the ear may be formed transparent, may be formed with translucency in a predetermined color (red, blue, black), or may be formed opaque.) The outer periphery of the hexagon (the inner region of the hexagon may be formed to be transparent, may be formed to have translucency in a predetermined color (red, blue, black), or may be formed to be opaque. ), the outer periphery of the octagon (the inner region of the octagon may be formed to be transparent, may be formed to have translucency in a predetermined color (red, blue, black), or may be formed to be opaque. ), and other areas of the human body except for the ears, hexagons, and octagons are formed transparently. In other words, the human ear, hexagon, and octagon, which are metal decorative parts (gold) with metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent area. On the surface of the inner lens, lens cuts are made in some specific areas or the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be refracted diffusely, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly see the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board placed behind the inner lens. A white resist layer is formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region is formed on the solid white resist and indicates the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is placed, which makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light). The inscription on the front side is printed with yellow paint using silk printing. In other words, the metallic decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is surrounded by a transparent area, so the metallic decorative part (golden) with metallic luster is solidly painted on the front (surface) of the decorative board. It is surrounded by white resist. In this way, the presence of the decorative board can be made difficult to notice due to the gold color of the metallic decorative part with metallic luster, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front side marking part can be used as a lens for the inner lens. The cut area can be made more difficult to understand.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the back bottom center rotating decoration body 3310 of the back bottom center production unit 3300 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 201, when the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the area where the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is placed in the standby position (original position) is covered with a decorative board. Due to its absence, it will no longer be possible to perform light emitting effects in this area. Therefore, in the area where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is placed at the standby position (original position), the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is placed in the area where the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is placed at the standby position (original position). In order to avoid interference, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board may be placed behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 with the front surface (surface) facing the front of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5). A white resist layer is formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist solution. A region is formed on the solid white resist and indicates the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is placed, which makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light). The inscription on the front side is printed with yellow paint using silk printing. When the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the standby position (original position), the front (surface) of the decorative board is covered by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, so when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front, I don't understand the existence of the decorative board at all.

However, as the lower back center decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the decorative board disposed behind the lower back center rotating decoration 3310 gradually appears and becomes visible. Therefore, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board are controlled to emit light during the period from when the back and middle decoration unit 3320 starts moving to the raised position until it returns to the standby position (original position). be done. As a result, the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, making it easy to see the presence of the yellow front side markings printed by silk printing on the solid white resist on the front (surface) of the decorative board. It can be made difficult. In addition, the yellow front side markings printed by silk printing on the solid white resist on the front (surface) of the decorative board are the metal parts of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320. The color is similar to the gold color of the decorative portion 3310a, and furthermore, even when the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the front (surface) of the decorative board will not touch the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Since it can be placed in the vicinity of the metal decorative part 3310a, due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorative part 3310a, the movement of the lower and middle decoration unit 3320 to the raised position is started, and the decorative board can be seen. Even if the decorative board is in a solid state, the yellow (color similar to the gold color of the metal decoration part 3310a) printed on the white resist by silk printing on the front surface side marking part It can make its existence difficult to understand. In addition, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted in contact with the game balls and in a predetermined gauge arrangement, so that the plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N increase the visibility. Even when the decorative board is in a visible state after the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, printing is performed by silk printing on the white resist that is painted solidly on the decorative board. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the existence of the yellow (color similar to the gold color that the plurality of obstacle nails N have) surface side markings.

[Avoiding concentration of placement of front side display area printed by silk printing]
Next, avoidance of placement concentration of the front side display portion printed by silk printing will be briefly explained with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 shows a method of arranging a surface display section that allows identification of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of a decorative board and the corresponding LEDs. In the case of concentrated arrangement (part 1) (a), FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the case of distributed arrangement (part 1) and (b). Note that pads, through holes, lands, etc. are omitted in FIGS. 271(a) to 271(d). The decorative boards KC shown in FIGS. 271(a) to 271(d) are applied to each decorative board included in the game board 5, and to the door frame 3 which adopts the structure for reducing reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment described above. This is shown as an example of each decorative substrate provided.

The front surface (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A resist layer is formed, and it is compatible with full-color LEDs, making it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs that can emit multicolor light) on the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. Attributes of the electronic component, such as the part number to be used and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed (in addition, the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component) ) is printed on the front with yellow paint using silk printing.

First, consider the case where four full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front (surface) KCx of the decorative board KC. Areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions and part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are printed with yellow paint by silk printing, for example, as shown in FIG. 271(a). 271 (b ), the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are arranged in a dispersed manner, not concentrated, outside the area that surrounds all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 that indicate the positions where the four full-color LEDs are placed. Let's consider the case of placement.

In addition, the positions where areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where four full-color LEDs are arranged are placed on the front surface (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the case of concentrated arrangement, and the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the case of distributed arrangement. ) It is assumed that the positions where the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are placed in KCx are the same.

In both cases of centralized placement and distributed placement, areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicate the positions where four full-color LEDs are placed, part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs, and other electronic components (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, connectors may also be included.) and are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so the front side (surface ) to KCx (hereinafter referred to as "yellow occupancy") are the same.

In addition, each of the areas except the areas printed with yellow paint by silk printing (that is, the white resist painted solidly on the front (surface) KCx of decorative substrate KC) is printed by silk printing with yellow paint. The ratio of the decorative substrate KC to the front surface (surface) KCx (excluding the area where the yellow color occupies) (hereinafter referred to as "white occupancy") is larger than the yellow occupancy. In this way, the white occupancy rate in which white occupies the surface of the decorative substrate KC due to the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is determined by the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, etc. ) is larger than the yellow occupancy rate that occupies KCx, so even if the decorative board KC (white paint film) is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, Compared to the yellow color of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, etc., the white color of the white paint film, which is a type of decoration visible to players, catches the eyes of the players more, making it difficult to notice the existence of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, etc. can contribute to Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In the case of concentrated arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are arranged in a concentrated manner in an area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full color LEDs are arranged. Specifically, in the case of concentrated placement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is placed below the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is placed, and below the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED2 is placed. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged, a part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED3 is arranged above an area KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and above an area KCp4 indicating the position where the full-color LED 4 is arranged. A part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged.

In this way, when four full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1-KCn4 are locally concentrated in an area surrounding all the areas KCp1-KCp4 indicating the positions where full-color LED1-LED4 are arranged, Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white paint film, even if the yellow color has a high reflectance, a region of reduced reflectance where the reflection efficiency is reduced will be formed. In addition, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are locally concentrated. The presence of KCn4 is noticeable.

In other words, in the case of concentrated placement, the white color of the white paint film, which is a type of decoration that is visible to the player, is in a local area that surrounds all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 that indicate the positions where full-color LED1 to LED4 are placed. In comparison, the yellow color of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 catches the eye of the player more, making it easier to notice the existence of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, there is a risk that the decorativeness will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are not concentrated but dispersed outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 that indicate the positions where the four full color LEDs are placed. It is arranged as follows. Specifically, in the case of distributed arrangement, part number KCn1 corresponding to full-color LED1 is placed at the upper left of area KCp1 indicating the position where full-color LED1 is placed, and part number KCn1 corresponding to full-color LED1 is placed at the upper right of area KCp2 indicating the position where full-color LED2 is placed. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged on the lower left side of an area KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED 4 is arranged. A part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED4 is arranged at the lower right of KCp4.

In this way, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full color LED1 to LED4 are arranged, and the full color LED1 to LED4 are not arranged at all. ~If the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are distributed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 that indicate the positions where LED4 is arranged, the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers Since the above-mentioned region of reduced reflectance, which is formed when KCn1 to KCn4 are arranged in a concentrated manner, is not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white paint film, but the yellow part numbers KCn1 to High reflectance due to KCn4 can be maintained. In addition, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 exist because the four full color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are distributed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 that indicate the positions where the full color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged. is not noticeable.

In other words, in a local area that surrounds all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 that indicate the positions where full-color LED1 to LED4 are arranged, the yellow occupancy rate is higher when the concentrated arrangement is adopted than when the dispersed arrangement is adopted. (by the proportion of the front surface (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the area of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint to the local area), whereas in the case of distributed arrangement, Yellow occupancy rate (local area of the front (surface) KCx of the decorative board KC in the areas of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint) ) will be lower by the proportion of In this way, in a local area that surrounds all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 that indicate the positions where full-color LED1 to LED4 are placed, it is better to adopt the dispersed arrangement than to use the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. The white color of the white paint film, which is a type of decoration visible to the player, catches the eye of the player, making it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

Note that even if the case of distributed arrangement is adopted, the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where full color LED1 to LED4 are arranged corresponds to four full color LEDs due to the arrangement with other electronic components. There may be cases where it is necessary to place one or two of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, but even in this case, the yellow occupancy rate ( In the regions of part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed with yellow paint by silk printing, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC (corresponding to the proportion of the local region KCx) increases.

In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rules may be established as a method for arranging the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 271(b), one of the four full-color LEDs (which may be another electronic component) is selected as a reference, and the width of the selected full-color LED is Use dimensions and height dimensions. When selecting a part number KCn3 corresponding to a full-color LED3 having a width dimension Nw and a height dimension Nh as a reference, areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where full-color LED1 to LED4 are arranged are selected. First, the full-color LED 3 is placed so that the full-color LED 3 is outside the surrounding area, and then the full-color LED 1 is placed above the full-color LED 3 at a distance Ph, which is the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3 multiplied by a predetermined number. The LED 4 is arranged on the right side of the full-color LED 3 by a second distance Pw that is the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3 multiplied by a predetermined number, and the full-color LED 2 is spaced apart from the full-color LED 3 by a first distance that is the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3 multiplied by a predetermined number. Ph and a second distance Pw, which is the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 3 multiplied by a predetermined number, and is placed on the upper right side of the full-color LED 3. Note that the positions where LED1, LED2, and LED4 are arranged may be the same value multiplied by the above-mentioned predetermined number, or the values may be changed individually.The positions where full-color LED1 to LED4 are arranged may be The selection may be made so as to be outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LED1 to LED4 are arranged.

Next, consider the case where two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front (surface) KCx of the decorative board KC. Areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the placement positions and part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to two adjacent full-color LEDs are printed using yellow paint by silk printing, for example, as shown in FIG. 271(c). As shown in , part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full color LEDs are placed above the areas KCp1 to KCp2 that indicate the positions where two adjacent full color LEDs are placed, that is, the areas KCp1 to KCp2 and the parts are arranged. In the case of a concentrated arrangement in which numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged in a concentrated manner in the vicinity, and in the case of a concentrated arrangement in which numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged in a concentrated manner, as shown in FIG. Next, let us consider a case of distributed arrangement in which two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged separately.

Note that the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC in the case of concentrated arrangement is the position where areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where two full-color LEDs are arranged, and the front surface (surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the case of distributed arrangement. ) It is assumed that the positions where the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are placed in KCx are the same.

In both cases of centralized placement and distributed placement, areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicate the positions where two full-color LEDs are placed, part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs, and other electronic components (resistors, capacitors, In addition to the IC, connectors may also be included.) and are printed with yellow paint using silk printing, so the front side (surface ) to KCx (hereinafter referred to as "yellow occupancy") are the same.

In addition, out of the white resist that is solidly painted on the front (surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, excluding the areas printed by silk printing with yellow paint, each is printed by silk printing with yellow paint. The ratio of the decorative substrate KC to the front surface (surface) KCx (excluding the area where the yellow color occupies) (hereinafter referred to as "white occupancy") is larger than the yellow occupancy. In this way, the white occupancy rate in which the white color occupies the surface of the decorative substrate KC due to the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is determined by the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2, etc. ) is larger than the yellow occupancy rate that occupies KCx, so even if the decorative board KC (white paint film) is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, Compared to the yellow color of part numbers KCn1 to KCn2, etc., the white color of the white paint film, which is a type of decoration visible to players, catches the eyes of the players more, making it difficult to notice the existence of part numbers KCn1 to KCn2, etc. can contribute to Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In the case of concentrated arrangement, part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full color LEDs are respectively arranged above areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where two adjacent full color LEDs are arranged, that is, part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are respectively arranged. KCn2 is concentrated and arranged. Specifically, in the case of concentrated placement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is placed near and above the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is placed, and the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is placed at the position where the full-color LED2 adjacent to the full-color LED1 is placed. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged near and above the region KCp2 shown.

In this way, if the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are respectively placed above the areas KCp1 to KCp2 that indicate the positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are placed, the parts corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are Since the numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged in a locally concentrated manner, the reflectance of the yellow color is lower than the reflectance of the white color of the white paint film, but even though it has a high reflectance, the reflection efficiency decreases. A region of reduced rate will be formed.

In other words, in the case of concentrated placement, a white paint film, which is a type of decoration that is visible to the player, is formed in a local area near and above areas KCp1 to KCp2, which indicate the positions where two adjacent full-color LED1 to LED2 are placed. Compared to the white color, the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 catches the eye of the player more, making it easier to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Therefore, there is a risk that the decorativeness will be reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of distributed arrangement, two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are distributed at positions away from areas KCp1 to KCp2 that indicate the positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. It is placed. Specifically, in the case of distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is placed at the lower left of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED1 is placed, and the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1 is placed at the position where the full-color LED2 adjacent to the full-color LED1 is placed. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is arranged at the lower right of the region KCp2 shown.

In this way, if two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are distributed and arranged at positions away from areas KCp1 to KCp2 that indicate the positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, two full-color LEDs and The corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are not locally concentrated and are not arranged at all, and the above-mentioned reduced reflectance region is not formed at all, so although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white paint film, It is possible to maintain high reflectance due to yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. In addition, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full color LEDs are distributed and arranged at positions away from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 that indicate the positions where two adjacent full color LEDs are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are arranged separately. The presence of KCn2 is not noticeable. Therefore, deterioration in decorativeness can be suppressed.

In the case of distributed arrangement, the following rules may be provided as a method of arrangement of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 271(d), one of the two full-color LEDs (which may be another electronic component) is selected as a reference, and the width of the selected full-color LED is Use dimensions and height dimensions. When selecting a part number KCn1 corresponding to a full color LED1 having a width dimension Nw and a height dimension Nh as a reference, areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where full color LED1 to LED2 are arranged are selected. The two full-color LEDs and their corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are distributed so that they are all outside the surrounding area, that is, at positions away from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 that indicate the positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are placed. After arranging the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1, first arrange the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 by a second distance Pw' (second distance 2 distance Pw' corresponds to the full-color LED 1 by at least a relationship that is greater than or equal to the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 1 so that the distance is the distance equal to the minimum length of the character string of the full-color LED 1. It is spaced apart from part number KCn1 and placed to the right of full color LED1. Note that the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is placed at another location along the vertical direction of the full-color LED 2 placed to the right of the full-color LED 1 (for example, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is placed). When the full-color LED 2 and the corresponding part number KCn2 are placed in the upper right corner of the KCp2), a second distance Ph' (the second distance Ph' is at least , a relationship is established that is greater than or equal to the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 so that the distance is at least the height of the character string of the full-color LED 1.) from the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 Place it. Note that the value multiplied by a predetermined number for the horizontal direction described above and the value multiplied by a predetermined number for the vertical direction described above may be the same value, or the values may be changed individually. The two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 may be selected to be distributed and arranged at positions away from the position where LED2 is arranged.

In the case of distributed arrangement, the full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 may be arranged, for example, when two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front (surface) KCx of the decorative board KC. , When placing another full-color LED at the upper right, lower right, upper left, or lower left of one full-color LED among two full-color LEDs, according to the rules described above, two full-color LEDs are placed. One of the full-color LEDs (another electronic component may be used) is selected as a reference, and the width and height of the selected full-color LED are used. Since the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be placed apart from each other by the above-mentioned second distance Pw' and/or second distance Ph', the positions where the two full-color LEDs are placed can be determined. Two full-color LEDs and corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be distributed and arranged at positions away from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 shown.

Incidentally, gaming machines that include a decorative board on which a light emitting means is mounted have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A decorative member covering the decorative board was placed in front of the light emitting means provided in this gaming machine. By the way, if the decorative member is made of a transparent material, the color of the resist liquid applied to the surface of the decorative board will be visible when the light emitting means is turned off, disrupting the world view of the gaming machine and causing disconcert. There was a risk that interest in the game would decline.

Furthermore, gaming machines that include a board on which an operation section is provided have been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-205304 (paragraphs [0106] to [0112], and FIG. 9)). This board was housed in a housing member. By the way, if the accommodating member is made of a transparent or translucent material, the electronic part number formed on the surface of the board on which the operating section is provided will be visible through the accommodating member. However, since the electronic part number has nothing to do with the game for the player, if the electronic part number is visible through the housing member, there is a risk that the world view of the game machine will be disrupted and the player's interest in the game will be reduced. there were.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that include a board on which a part number and the like are displayed by silk printing (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-141683 (paragraph [0047], paragraph [0048], and FIG. 3)). . Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to provide high reflectance and enhance decorativeness. However, if the board is used as a type of decoration that is visible to the player, the silk printing will also be visible to the player, which may reduce the decorativeness.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been proposed that include a board on which a part number and the like are displayed by silk printing (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-141683 (paragraph [0047], paragraph [0048], and FIG. 3)). . Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to provide high reflectance and enhance decorativeness. However, if silk printing is provided on a coating film coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color, there is a risk that the reflectance of the substrate will decrease.

[Structure of magnetic sensor]
Next, a magnetic sensor 1111 attached to the back side of a transparent flat panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 near the starting port unit 2100, a magnetic sensor 2404 provided in the first attacker unit 2400, a magnetic sensor 2404 provided in the first attacker unit 2400, The magnetic sensor 2602 provided in the second attacker unit 2600 and the magnetic sensor 3055 provided in the back guidance unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described. Here, since the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, and 3055 have the same structure, the magnetic sensor 1111 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 272 and 273. FIG. 272 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor as seen from the front, and FIG. 273 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor as seen from the rear.

The magnetic sensor 1111 includes a box 1111a that is open at the rear and has a rectangular opening 1111aa that is long in the vertical direction, a magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the box 1111a, and a flat cover that closes the opening 1111aa. A body 1111c is provided. The external shape of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is smaller than that of the box 1111a, and when the magnetic sensor board 1111b is housed in the box 1111a, the distance between the outer periphery of the magnetic sensor board 1111b and the inner periphery of the opening 1111aa ( clearance) is approximately 0.5 mm to 0.7 mm. The magnetic sensor 1111 is attached so that the front side of the box body 1111a is in surface contact with another member, and as described above, the front side of the box body 1111a is attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. It is attached in surface contact (abutment) with the back side of a transparent flat panel plate 1110.

The box body 1111a is molded from a colorless and transparent resin, and a part of the socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN to be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, which will be described later, is provided on the upper side wall of the box body 1111a. A rectangular connector housing insertion hole 1111ab is formed so as to be exposed. In addition, vertically long rectangular locking holes 1111ac are formed in the left and right walls of the box body 1111a, into which locking portions 1111caa formed on a pair of attachment pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c, which will be described later, are inserted. has been done. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom of the box 1111a, there are front side electronic components (front side electronic components) which also serve as reinforcement of the box 1111a and are mounted on the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and the bottom of the box 1111a. A triangular prism-shaped spacer 1111ad is formed to prevent contact between and.

At the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, there are a pair of cover bodies 1111c, which will be described later, when the cover body 1111c closes the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a with the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the box body 1111a. In order to prevent interference between the mounting piece 1111ca and the magnetic sensor board 1111b, a pair of notches 1111ba are respectively formed.

On the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, in addition to a magnetic detection element MSD capable of detecting magnetism, a magnetic detection determination result can be outputted to the outside based on a detection signal from the magnetic detection element MSD. Controller CTR, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. are mounted, and in addition to pads to which front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) such as magnetic detection element MSD, controller CTR, various resistors, and various capacitors are soldered. A white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding through-holes, lands, etc., resulting in a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). A resist layer is formed. In this embodiment, the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b has an area indicating the part number of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) and the position where the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is arranged. (Furthermore, the shape of the front electronic component (front electronic component), the size of the front electronic component (front electronic component), the attributes of the front electronic component (front electronic component) The front side marking section (front side marking section) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) may include the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component). , yellow, which is a bright color that is hard to notice compared to white), and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist.

On the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, in addition to the connector housing MCN to which electrical wiring is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. are mounted. In addition to pads to which rear-side electronic components (back-side electronic components) such as various capacitors are soldered, a white resist solution is applied to the entire area excluding through-holes, lands, etc., and a white coating film is formed. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "solid white resist.") A white resist layer is formed. In this embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b has an area indicating the part number of the rear electronic component (back electronic component) and the position where the rear electronic component (back electronic component) is placed. (In addition, the shape of the rear electronic component (back electronic component), the size of the rear electronic component (back electronic component), and the attributes of the rear electronic component (back electronic component) such as The rear electronic component (rear side electronic component) is displayed in a predetermined color (e.g. , yellow, which is a bright color that is hard to notice compared to white), and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist.

The socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN is formed to be parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and four sockets are formed parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. Various terminals are arranged in a row. That is, the connector socket connected to the tip of the electrical wiring (harness) inserted into the socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN is parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. As a result, when the magnetic sensor board 1111b is housed in the box 1111a and the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is covered by the cover 1111c, it cannot be connected to the connector socket inserted into the socket insertion port of the connector housing MCN. The electrical wiring (harness) can be prevented from covering the rear surface (back surface) and front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b.

Note that a wiring pattern is formed on the magnetic sensor board 1111b so that the controller CTR is electrically connected to the connector housing MCN, and the connector housing MCN is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via electrical wiring (harness). By being connected to the main control board 1310, the controller CTR of the magnetic sensor board 1111b and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected. The four various terminals of the connector housing MCN are composed of a power line (for example, DC +5V), a ground (GND) line, a signal line 1, and a signal line 2. The controller CTR can output a magnetic detection result (the presence or absence of a magnet approaching) as a detection signal to the main control board 1310 via the signal line 1 and/or the signal line 2.

Further, the controller CTR is configured such that the magnetic sensing distance of the magnetic sensing element MSD is set in advance by various resistors mounted on the front (front) or rear (back) surface of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. For example, there are multiple magnetic detection distance setting terminals of the controller CTR, and in order to obtain a predetermined magnetic detection distance, one of the plurality of magnetic detection distance setting terminals of the controller CTR is connected to the magnetic detection distance setting terminal of the corresponding controller CTR. In this case, one end of the power supply line is electrically connected to the power supply line, and the other end of the resistor is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor (so-called "pull-up resistor"), The magnetic detection distance setting terminal of the corresponding controller CTR is electrically connected to a ground (GND) supply line that is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line. Note that the controller CTR may be configured to be able to set the magnetic sensing distance of the magnetic sensing element MSD based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 via the signal line 1 and/or the signal line 2. good.

In this manner, in this embodiment, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist on the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. In addition, in this embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is made of copper foil, and the front side electronic components (front side electronic components) are connected to each other. The information for identifying each electronic component is not formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the information, and there is no foil left behind, and the information on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is not ) contains information to specify what kind of electronic component the back side electronic component (back side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane). The information is not even formed by removing the foil that is formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside. That is, in the present embodiment, information for specifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is. There is no marking on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and there is no information written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b to identify what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) is. No information is written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b.

The cover body 1111c is molded from a colorless and transparent resin, and the product control number 1111cb (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back side) of the cover body 1111c. A pair of flat mounting pieces 1111ca extend forward from the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the (front surface). A locking portion 1111caa having a vertically elongated rectangular shape is formed protrudingly on the outer side of the tip of the pair of attachment pieces 1111ca. The locking portion 1111caa is located at the front side of the cover 1111c so that it can be smoothly inserted into the locking holes 1111ac formed in the left and right walls of the box 1111a when the cover 1111c closes the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a. There are chamfers on both corners. The locking portions 1111caa are locked by being inserted into locking holes 1111ac formed in the left and right walls of the box 1111a when the cover 1111c closes the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a.

A pair of locking holes 1111ac formed in the left side wall and right side wall of the box body 1111a and a locking part 1111caa formed in a pair of attachment pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c have a rectangular shape that is elongated in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c, the pair of locking holes 1111ac formed in the left and right walls of the box 1111a and the pair of cover 1111c are closed. By locking the locking portions 1111caa formed on the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca, the cover body 1111c locks the pair of box bodies 1111a that are locked with the locking portions 1111caa formed on the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca. Rotation about the locking hole 1111ac as the main axis can be prevented.

Here, a method for assembling the magnetic sensor 1111 will be briefly described. First, the surface of the magnetic sensor board 1111b on which the connector housing MCN is not mounted, that is, the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, is inserted into the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a, and the connector housing insertion hole formed in the box 1111a is inserted. Insert the connector housing MCN of the magnetic sensor board 1111b into the magnetic sensor board 1111ab so that a part of the connector housing MCN is exposed from the box body 1111a. The magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is sent to the bottom of the box body 1111a until the formed spacers 1111ad come into surface contact (abutment).

When the four corners of the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b and the spacers 1111ad formed at the bottom four corners of the box body 1111a are in surface contact (abutment), the front side of the box body 1111a and the magnetic sensor board 1111b are in contact with each other. The front surface (surface) is in a parallel positional relationship.

Subsequently, when covering the cover body 1111c in the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a, the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c are inserted into the pair of notches 1111ba of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and the cover body 1111c is attached to the box body. When pushed toward the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a, the locking portions 1111caa formed in the pair of attachment pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c are inserted into the pair of locking holes 1111ac formed in the left and right side walls of the box body 1111a. and locked. As a result, the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c. In this state, the front surface (front surface) of the cover body 1111c is in surface contact with the surface of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and the magnetic sensor board 1111b is brought into contact with the surface of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. The cover body 1111c is sandwiched between the spacer 1111ad and the front surface (surface) of the cover body 1111c. As a result, the game area 5a of the game board 5 is accommodated in the box 1111a of the magnetic sensor 1111 due to vibrations caused by the game balls flowing down, vibrations caused by the operation of various electrical drive sources (solenoids, motors, etc.). This makes it possible to prevent (stabilize) the magnetic sensor board 1111b from wobbling.

In addition, when the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c, the upper side wall of the box 1111a, the left side wall of the box 1111a, the left side wall of the box 1111a, and the The lower side wall, the rear end surface of the right side wall of the box body 1111a, and the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c are arranged on the same plane and are flush with each other.

By the way, the magnetic sensor 1111 is an important element that detects illegal magnetism, so if it is tampered with, it will not be able to notify the main control board 1310 of the approach of the magnet. Even if a magnet game is performed in which a ball is guided to the first starting port 2002 of the ball 2100 and entered to obtain a large number of lottery chances with a small number of balls, the main control board 1310 is unable to detect any fraudulent activity caused by this magnet game. . As described above, in the magnetic sensor 1111, the box body 1111a and the cover body 1111c are molded from transparent resin, so the magnetic sensor board 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a, and the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a is formed into the cover body 1111c. If it is installed in the vicinity of the starting port unit 2100 and on the back side of the transparent flat panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 while being blocked by the A person can visually check the state of the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

However, the person who intends to commit the fraudulent act can check the condition of the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, especially the part number of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) printed by silk printing, and the front side electronic component. Attributes of the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component), such as the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) is placed (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component), The front side marking section may include the size of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component), the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component), and the model of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component). There is a risk that the (front side notation) may become a source of information for identifying the mounted electronic components, understanding the circuit configuration, and modifying the circuit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist on the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. In other words, the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b have no front side markings (front side markings) and rear side markings (backside markings) printed by silk printing. Not yet. In addition, in this embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is made of copper foil, and the front side electronic components (front side electronic components) are connected to each other. The information for identifying each electronic component is not formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the information, and there is no foil left behind. ) contains information to specify what kind of electronic component the back side electronic component (back side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane). The information is not even formed by removing the foil that is formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside. This can make it difficult to identify the electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1111b and understand the circuit configuration.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1111 has the box body 1111a and the cover body 1111c molded from transparent resin, so that the magnetic sensor board 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a, and the magnetic sensor board 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a. When the opening 1111aa is closed with the cover body 1111c and it is attached to the back side of the transparent flat panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the starting port unit 2100, the game hall is closed. An employee such as a store clerk can visually check the state of the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall can visually check the condition of the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to check whether there is any fraud on the magnetic sensor board 1111b. I can do that. In addition, when an attendant such as a clerk at a game hall opens the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, the various members constituting the game board 5 are molded (formed) from transparent resin, and therefore the magnetic sensor board is exposed. The state of the rear surface (back surface) of 1111b can now be visually confirmed. As a result, an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall can visually check the state of the rear (back side) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to check whether there is any fraud on the magnetic sensor board 1111b. I can do that.

Further, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached so that the front side of the box body 1111a is near the starting port unit 2100, and the back side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. ing. In addition, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the front surface (surface) of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for measures against reflectance reduction, etc. according to the second embodiment, as described above. The plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) mounted on the "front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the front surface") are turned off. In this state, the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 makes the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member appear as if they were white members. Therefore, the magnetic sensor 1111 is also transparent in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 near the starting port unit 2100 due to the white coating film formed on the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111. A box body 1111a molded from a colorless and transparent resin of a magnetic sensor 1111 attached to the back side of a flat panel plate 1110 appears as if it were a white member. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1111 is also blended into (assimilated into) the transparent member on the game board side and the transparent member on the door frame side, so that it does not interfere with the player's vision and is less likely to become an eyesore during the game.

Further, in this embodiment, since the magnetic sensor 1111 has a box body 1111a and a cover body 1111c molded from transparent resin, the magnetic sensor board 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a, and the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a is formed in the cover body. 1111c, the electrical wiring (harness) connected to the connector socket inserted into the socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN does not cover the front (front) and rear (back) surfaces of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. You can do it like this. As a result, the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the back side of the transparent flat panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 near the starting port unit 2100, and the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b and The electrical wiring (harness) does not obstruct (obstruct the eyes) when checking the condition of the rear (back side).

Note that in the present embodiment described above, front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b are mounted on the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. There is no information written on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b to identify what kind of electronic component it is, and there is no information written on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. Although there is no information written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b to identify what kind of electronic component the electronic component is (back side electronic component), the board management number of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is not written on the magnetic sensor board 1111b. It may be written on the front surface (front surface) and/or the rear surface (back surface) of 1111b. The board management number may be printed using silkscreen printing using paint in a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white, or black or green, which is easy to stand out against white). However, in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), the wiring pattern is made of copper foil, and the board management number is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the board management number. Good too.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, although the model of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is not written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, the model of the connector housing MCN may be written on the front surface (front surface) and/or the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. The model number of this connector housing MCN is indicated by silk printing using paint in a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a bright color that is hard to stand out against white, or black or green, which is easy to stand out against white). Alternatively, the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) has a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the connector housing MCN model is formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the connector housing MCN model. It may also be formed by leaving a foil.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the product control number 1111cb (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c, but instead The product control number 1111cb (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 may be engraved on any one of the left side wall, upper side wall, right side wall, and lower side wall of the box body 1111a.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the product control number 1111cb (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back side) of the cover body 1111c, but instead of the engraved part, the product control number of the magnetic sensor 1111 is You can print the control number 1111cb (ABC-001) directly on the back side (back side) of the cover body 1111c with paint in a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or you can print it on a colorless transparent sheet. , a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet printed on it may be attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c. Moreover, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c, the product control number 1111cb( ABC-001) may be printed directly with paint in a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or a magnetic sensor may be printed on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. 1111 with product control number 1111cb (ABC-001) printed on it may be attached.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, the controller CTR is configured such that the magnetic sensing distance of the magnetic sensing element MSD is set in advance by various resistors mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. However, it is now possible to set the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 (signal transmitted via signal line 1 and/or signal line 2). It may be configured as follows. In this way, if you want to detect the approach of a magnet at an earlier stage, you can greatly change the setting of the magnetic detection distance, and if you want to detect the approach of a magnet at an earlier stage, you can change the setting of the magnetic detection distance. When determining whether or not the object is approaching, the magnetic detection distance can be set to a smaller value. As a result, the main control board 1310 can grasp the state of the approach of the magnet by changing the setting of the magnetic detection distance, and in response to the approach of the magnet, it will first issue a minor warning (for example, if the door frame The full-color LED on the door frame 3 blinks red slowly (for example, every 1 second), and a warning is issued in a stepwise manner (for example, the full-color LED on the door frame 3 blinks red quickly (for example, every 0.5 seconds). ) flashes and a warning sound (e.g. "beep, beep, beep") is heard repeatedly), and in the final stage, a false alarm is issued to indicate that the magnet has been damaged (for example, the full-color LED on the door frame 3 turns red). The light will turn on and a warning announcement will be made (for example, a voice will repeatedly say, ``An act of fraud is occurring.'').

Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, the magnetic sensor 1111 was attached to the back side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the starting port unit 2100. , when the magnetic sensor 1111 is installed at the front or rear in the area where the movable body operates, or even when it is installed at the front or rear near the area where the movable body operates, the box body 1111a of the magnetic sensor 1111 There is no silk printing on the solid white resist at all on the front (front) and rear (back) sides of the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the (in other words, the front (front) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b The front side marking part (front side marking part) and the rear side marking part (back side marking part) printed by silk printing are not formed on the rear surface (back side), and the magnetic sensor board 1111b is On the front (front surface), there is a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, in order to identify what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is. The information is not formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information and leaving the foil remaining, and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b has a layer (on which the wiring pattern is formed). The information for identifying what kind of electronic component each back side electronic component (back side electronic component) is in the copper foil wiring pattern (copper plane) is removed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of that information. Even if the state of the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is reflected on the casing of the movable body, the reflected content will not be reflected on the magnetic sensor board 1111b. It may be difficult to identify the mounted electronic components and understand the circuit configuration.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the front side (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b has a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and a front side electronic component (front side electronic component). Information for specifying what kind of electronic component each is was not formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and the remaining foil was formed by removing the surrounding copper foil from the outside of the information. On the rear side (back side), there is a wiring pattern made of copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), and it is used to identify what kind of electronic component the rear side electronic component (back side electronic component) is. The information was not formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information and leaving the foil remaining. In other words, in this embodiment, information for specifying what kind of electronic component the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b is. In order to identify what kind of electronic component is the rear electronic component (back electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. No information was written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. Therefore, a circle symbol is created near the position corresponding to the front side electronic component (front side electronic component), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form a foil-removed standard terminal symbol. The foil removal reference terminal symbols may be formed on the front surface (front surface) and covered with a white resist that is painted solidly on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. A circle symbol is created near the position corresponding to the electronic component (electronic component), and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed to form a standard terminal symbol, which is formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. The foil removal reference terminal symbols may be respectively covered by a white resist that is painted solidly on the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate 1111b. The wiring patterns forming these foil-cut reference terminal symbols are electrically insulated from the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) and the rear side electronic component (back side electronic component), respectively. In addition, as a foil-cut reference terminal symbol, if the surrounding area is a so-called solid ground (board ground), the circle symbol itself may be foil-cut. In addition, as the foil removal standard terminal symbol, instead of the circle symbol, a symbol representing the polarity of the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) or the back side electronic component (back side electronic component) may be used (used in the circuit diagram). (It may be a symbol or a simplified version of the symbol used in the circuit diagram). Furthermore, among the front side electronic components (front side electronic components) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, the mounting directions of specific front side electronic components (specific front side electronic components) are almost the same. In some cases (in other words, for mounting workers or automatic machines, a rule has been established in advance that certain front-side electronic components (specific front-side electronic components) must be mounted in the same direction (there is no such thing to be mounted in the opposite direction). ) is the vicinity of the position corresponding to the terminal of any one specific front-side electronic component (specific front-side electronic component) among the plurality of specific front-side electronic components (specific front-side electronic components). A standard terminal symbol without foil may be formed on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, or a terminal symbol of one or more specific front-side electronic components (specific front-side electronic components) may be formed in advance. A foil-cut reference terminal symbol may be formed on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b near the corresponding position. In this case as well, the standard terminal symbol for removing foil may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED instead of a circle symbol (the symbol used in the circuit diagram may be used, or the symbol used in the circuit diagram (anode terminal and cathode terminal (It may be a simplified version of the symbol that can be distinguished from the symbol.) Furthermore, among the rear side electronic components (back side electronic components) mounted on the rear surface (back side) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, the mounting directions of specific rear side electronic components (specific rear side electronic components) are almost the same. In some cases (in other words, for mounting workers or automatic machines, a rule is established in advance that the mounting direction of specific rear-side electronic components (specific rear-side electronic components) is the same (there is no one that is mounted in the opposite direction). ) is located near the position corresponding to the terminal of any one specific rear electronic component (specific rear electronic component) among a plurality of specific rear electronic components (specific rear electronic component). A standard terminal symbol without foil may be formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, or a terminal symbol of one or more specific rear-side electronic components (specific rear-side electronic components) may be formed in advance. A foil-cut reference terminal symbol may be formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b near the corresponding position. In this case as well, the standard terminal symbol for removing foil may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED instead of a circle symbol (the symbol used in the circuit diagram may be used, or the symbol used in the circuit diagram (anode terminal and cathode terminal (It may be a simplified version of the symbol that can be distinguished from the symbol.)

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, it has the light emitting production unit 5000 shown in FIG. 255 as a decorative member. This light emitting production unit 5000 includes an LED board 5070 shown in FIG. 255 as a substrate, a light guide plate 5060 shown in FIG. 255 as a light guide member, a diffusion sheet 5050 shown in FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and a decoration body 5040 shown in FIG. 255 as a decoration body. . The LED board 5070 is mounted with an LED bare chip 5075 shown in FIG. 255 as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is arranged in front of the LED board 5070 and can emit the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075 forward. Diffusion sheet 5050 is placed in front of light guide plate 5060. Decorative body 5040 is arranged in front of diffusion sheet 5050. The diffusion sheet 5050 has five white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, which have a long band shape in the left and right direction, and are coated with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 in FIG. 258 as opaque areas at least in positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075. is formed.

In this way, the light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075, which is a light emitting means, is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member, via the light guide plate 5060, which is a light guide member. Five white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5, which are long in the horizontal direction and are coated with white paint, are formed on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque area, at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075, which are light emitting means. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075, which is the light emitting means, is mounted does not shine brightly in the decorative body 5040, which is the decorative body like a point light source, and is coated with white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque area. It is made to be softened by five white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 having a band shape long in the left and right direction. This contributes to uniformly illuminating the surface 5060x, which is the surface of the light guide plate 5060, which is a light guide member, facing the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member, so that the light emitting effect of the decorative body 5040, which is a decorative body, It is difficult to give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the light emission effect.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, games can be played, and the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 shown in FIG. 249 is used as the conductive member, and the metal wiring groove 1605 shown in FIG. 249 is used as the first wiring member. The wiring is routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 249, and the wiring is routed to the space inside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. . The metal wiring groove 1605 is conductive, and the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is vulnerable to the influence of electromagnetic noise. The wiring routed in the space inside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is more resistant to the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

A metal wiring groove 1605 is formed on the bottom inner surface of a groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. The metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 250, which is the other side of the conductive member that does not face the source of electromagnetic noise, has a U-shaped cross section. On the bottom outer surface 1605d of the groove portion 1605a, wiring is arranged to be routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

In this way, the wiring formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member, is more resistant to the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member. The wiring to be routed in the groove space is placed on the bottom inner surface of the groove portion 1605a, which has a U-shaped cross section, of the metal wiring groove 1605, which is one side of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the source of electromagnetic noise. The metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, is arranged and is less susceptible to the influence of electromagnetic noise than the wiring routed in the groove space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member. The wiring to be routed in the space outside the groove to be formed is placed at the bottom of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the other side of the metal wiring groove 1605 that does not face the source of electromagnetic noise. By being placed on the outer surface 1605d, the wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, and the second wiring member are arranged in a space affected by electromagnetic noise. Wiring routed in the groove space formed by a certain metal wiring groove 1605 can be arranged in a mixed manner. Therefore, noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, games can be played, and the machine is equipped with a flexible flat cable 5030 shown in FIG. 254 as a planar wiring member. The flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors arranged in parallel and covered with an insulating material as a plurality of conductors including a ground wire which is a power supply line and a control line. As the endmost conductor in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of electromagnetic noise, the flat conductors on both ends are arranged as ground wires that are power supply wires. In other words, among the plurality of flat conductors including a ground line, which is a power line, and a control line, the ground line, which is a power line, is arranged between the electromagnetic noise generation source and the control line.

In this way, the flexible flat cable 5030, which is a planar wiring member, has a plurality of flat conductors, which are a plurality of conductors, including a ground line, which is a power supply line, and a control line, arranged in parallel, Among the plurality of flat conductors including a ground line and a control line, the ground line, which is a power supply line, is placed between the source of electromagnetic noise and the control line. The noise resistance due to electromagnetic noise can be improved with respect to the flat conductor, which is a conductor other than the flat conductors on both sides of the extreme end, as the conductor at the extreme end. Therefore, noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play games, and the door frame 3 of FIG. 10 is used as the front frame, and the door frame top unit 450 of FIG. 73 is used as the light emitting device. It has a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board 469. The door frame 3 is provided to be openable and closable, and the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 of the door frame top unit 450 are mounted on the upper front surface at a predetermined position of the door frame 3. It is provided. The door frame top unit 450 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3, and can also emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3.

Specifically, the pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 have vibrating parts such as a diaphragm and a center cap made of translucent resin. (for example, polypropylene with a milky white color), and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a through hole through which the magnet and the magnetic circuit section such as the yoke pass through in the front and rear. held by the body. This housing portion has a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered by a center cap disposed at the front, but is open at the rear. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, there are mounting portions formed on four board mounting bent plates (not shown) extending rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 by a predetermined distance (about 18 mm in this embodiment). A decorative board 469 is attached. When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit part of the top side speaker 464. The acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged so as to face the rear surface thereof, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged to cover the rear side of the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464.

When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through hole of the cylindrical magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 and is emitted from the translucent center cap. At the same time, light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, so that the top side speaker 464 can be illuminated. It has become. Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape), and the light is reflected on the top side speaker 464. It repeatedly moves between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and is emitted rearward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469.

As described above, the speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top base 451 of the door frame has an acoustic decoration board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached, so that the acoustic decoration board 469 is exposed. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted rearward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the light emitted from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. The light is emitted to the rear of the door frame top base 451 through a gap between the outer circumference of the door frame top base 451 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451.

As described above, the door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. In the door frame base 101, at positions corresponding to the left and right through holes 451b formed in the door frame top base 451, there are through holes 101k having a shape larger than or the same shape as the outer circumference of the through holes 451b and penetrating back and forth. are formed respectively. As a result, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted rearward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the light is emitted backward from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 passes through the gap between the outer circumference of the substrate 469 and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and through the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. Ejects to the rear.

In this way, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 of the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3, and the door frame 3 Since it is possible to emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is open, the door frame top unit 450 can be emitted from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. The notification mode based on the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can be visually recognized. As a result, in the game hall, the acoustic decoration board of the door frame top unit 450 can be used by staff such as clerks of the game hall who pass through the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. A notification mode can be transmitted by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of 469. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, games can be played, and the door frame 3 of FIG. 10 is used as the front frame, the speaker bracket 463 of FIG. 73 is used as the front frame light emitting means, and the top It has a speaker illumination unit composed of a side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate. The door frame 3 is provided to be openable and closable, and the speaker illumination unit is provided to the door frame 3 and is capable of emitting light in a manner different from normal when an abnormality or malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1. This is provided in the door frame 3 so that when the door frame 3 is in the open state, it is visible not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3, that it emits light in a manner different from normal times. ing.

Specifically, the pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 have vibrating parts such as a diaphragm and a center cap made of translucent resin. (for example, polypropylene with a milky white color), and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a through hole through which the magnet and the magnetic circuit section such as the yoke pass through in the front and rear. held by the body. This housing portion has a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a cylindrical shape is covered by a center cap disposed at the front, but is open at the rear. On the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, there are mounting portions formed on four board mounting bent plates (not shown) extending rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 by a predetermined distance (about 18 mm in this embodiment). A decorative board 469 is attached. In this manner, the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, and the acoustic decoration board 469 and the transparent plate are attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, thereby assembling the speaker illumination unit. In other words, the speaker illumination unit includes a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate. When the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit part of the top side speaker 464. The acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged so as to face the rear surface thereof, and the front surface (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is arranged to cover the rear side of the magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464.

When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front (surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through hole of the cylindrical magnetic circuit section of the top side speaker 464 and from the translucent center cap. At the same time, light is emitted from the translucent diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing, so that the top side speaker 464 can be illuminated. It has become. Furthermore, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, it is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke that constitutes the magnetic circuit section formed in a cylindrical shape) and the light is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464. It repeatedly moves between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, and is emitted rearward from the rear surface of the top side speaker 464, that is, the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469.

The peripheral control board 1510 detects abnormalities in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, ball jamming in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guiding unit 570, payout device 580, etc., detection of fraudulent activity, opening of the door frame 3, main body Opening of the frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) (hereinafter, (This may be described as "occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction." The output signal is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown). In addition, the lighting mode (normal time) of the production mode is a variety of lighting modes that combine lighting, turning off, flashing, gradation lighting, etc., whereas the notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode) is a predetermined lighting mode. The light emitting mode is such that the color (in this embodiment, red) is lit at maximum brightness.

In conventional gaming machines, when the door frame 3, which is the front frame, is in an open state, light emission can be seen from the direction (front) facing the front side of the door frame 3, which notifies the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction. However, there was a problem in that it became difficult to visually recognize the light emitted from the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3 (rearward) to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction. In this regard, in this embodiment, when the door frame 3 is open, abnormalities and malfunctions can be detected externally from both the front side of the door frame 3 and the rear side of the door frame 3. The notification light emission can be visually recognized (that is, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction in a new manner, both in the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and in the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. ). As a result, in the game hall, staff such as clerks of the game hall can be informed of abnormalities and malfunctions from both the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It is possible to quickly convey information and improve the work efficiency of the game hall.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a lottery is performed based on the results of the starting conditions, a variable display of symbols is performed based on the results of the lottery, and a predetermined number of symbols is determined as a result of the variable display of the symbols. A gaming machine that provides a specific gaming profit to a player by deriving a fluctuating winning result, the gaming machine being provided with a gaming board that is equipped with a symbol display device that displays variations in the symbols, and the gaming board. A frame body, a front frame provided to be openable and closable with respect to the frame body, a detection means for detecting an open/closed state of the front frame, and a detection means provided on the front frame for detecting an open state of the front frame. Based on this, the front frame light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a special manner different from normal times.

Specifically, for example, as a starting condition, the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in FIG. 111, and in the main control board 1310 in FIG. 206, an advantageous gaming state ( For example, a special lottery result that generates a "big hit," "medium win," "small win," "probability fluctuation (probability change) win," and "time saving (time saving) win" is drawn. The main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 111 based on the result of the lottery, and uses a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal to display a variable pattern. A predetermined winning fluctuation result is derived as a special lottery result that is a result of the fluctuation display of symbols, thereby providing an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability win") It is now possible to give "per fluctuation (probability change)" and "per time reduction (time saving)"). A game board 5 equipped with a function display unit 1400 for displaying symbols in a variable manner, a main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 10 serving as a frame on which the game board 5 shown in FIG. A door frame 3 shown in FIG. 10 is provided as a front frame, a door frame release switch is provided on the door frame 3, and a door frame release switch is provided as a detection means for detecting the open/closed state of the door frame 3 to detect the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. Based on the detection of the open state of the door frame 3, the speaker bracket 463, top side speaker 464, and acoustic decoration board 469 shown in FIG. , and a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate. In addition, while the lighting mode (normal mode) of the production mode is a variety of lighting modes that combine lighting, turning off, blinking, gradation lighting, etc., the notification mode (different mode from normal mode) is a predetermined lighting mode. The light emitting mode is such that the color (red in this embodiment) is lit at maximum brightness.

Further, the front frame light emitting means includes a light emitting board having a light emitting part mounted on a board surface facing the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitting board has a light emitting part mounted thereon that emits light in the special mode. from at least a portion of the periphery of the light emitting board so that when the light emitting part is emitting light in the special mode, it can be seen not only from the front of the front frame but also from the rear of the front frame. The light emitting section is arranged to leak light.

Specifically, for example, a speaker illumination unit composed of a speaker bracket 463, which is a front frame light emitting means, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate is a board facing the front side of the pachinko machine 1. It consists of an acoustic decoration board 469 as a light emitting board on which a plurality of LEDs 469a are mounted as light emitting parts on its surface. From at least a portion around the acoustic decoration board 469, so that the LED 469a emitting light in the notification mode can be seen not only from the front of the door frame 3 as the front frame but also from the rear of the door frame 3 as the front frame. The plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light.

Furthermore, when the open state of the front frame is not detected, the front frame light emitting means performs a predetermined effect light emission based on a fluctuation pattern that is set when the symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner; A light reflecting section (white printed section, metal member) capable of reflecting light leaked from the light emitting section forward is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the front door light emitting means when the front frame is in a closed state. .

Specifically, for example, a speaker illumination unit composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate, which are front frame light emitting means, is configured such that the door frame 3 is in an open state as a front frame. When it is not detected (when the dispensing control MPU detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, it sends a door frame opening command to the main control board 1310 to notify that fact). However, when the main control board 1310 does not receive this door frame opening command), the main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400, and changes the pattern using a plurality of LEDs based on this control signal. The main control board 1310 sends a command corresponding to the variation pattern set when displaying the symbols in a variable manner to the peripheral control board 1510, and based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 emits a predetermined effect light (usually Based on the clock signal, the light emission data that becomes the light emission mode of the presentation mode is outputted to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467, and the light emission data is turned on, turned off, blinks, and gradation lighting. A light emitting part is mounted on the acoustic decoration board 469 as a light emitting part at a position corresponding to the rear of the speaker illumination unit when the door frame 3 is in the closed state. As a light reflecting section capable of forwardly reflecting light leaked from a plurality of LEDs 469a, a reflective sheet 1000a (a white printed section having a white color with high emissivity or a color close to white) shown in FIG. metal members) etc. are provided.

Further, a covering portion constituting the back side of the light emitting substrate is a transparent member, and leakage of light from the light emitting portion is made visible from behind the front frame through the transparent member.

Specifically, the speaker illumination unit is composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration substrate 469, and a transparent plate, and a transparent plate is used as a covering portion constituting the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, which is a light emitting substrate. The plate is a transparent member, and the light leakage from the plurality of LEDs 469a of the acoustic decoration board 469 is made visible from the rear of the door frame 3 through the transparent plate that is the transparent member.

Further, a plurality of light emitting substrates constituting the front frame light emitting means are provided, and at least one of the plurality of light emitting substrates is provided on the open end side of the front frame.

Specifically, the speaker bracket 463 as a front frame light emitting means, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration board 469, and the acoustic decoration board 469 as a light emitting board constituting a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate are used in the pachinko machine 1. are arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, so that a plurality of acoustic decoration boards 469 are arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3. At least one of the acoustic decoration boards 469 is disposed on the upper right side of the door frame 3 when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front, and the acoustic decoration board 469 is provided on the open end side of the door frame 3. Thereby, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened, the light emitted from the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized.

Further, a plurality of the light emitting substrates constituting the front frame light emitting means are provided, and the light reflecting section is provided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting substrates.

Specifically, the speaker bracket 463 as a front frame light emitting means, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration board 469, and the acoustic decoration board 469 as a light emitting board constituting a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate are used in the pachinko machine 1. A plurality of reflective sheets 1000a (white printed with high emissivity or a color close to white) shown in FIG. 10), a reflective sheet 1000a is placed in the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front, and as a light reflecting part, The metal stop FT placed in the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 is located at a position corresponding to the sound decoration board 469 on the right side when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front. It is arranged in the upper right area of the front component 1000 of No. 5.

Further, the light reflecting section is a white printed section provided on the game board and provided outside the game area of the game board.

Specifically, the reflective sheet 1000a shown in FIG. 10 (a white printed portion having a white color with high emissivity or a color close to white) as a light reflecting portion is provided on the game board 5, and is provided on the outside of the game area 5a of the game board 5. This is a white printing section provided in the

The white printed portion has a larger area than the light emitting substrate. Specifically, the surface area of the reflective sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the front.

The light reflecting section is a metal member provided on the frame. Specifically, the metal stopper FT, which is arranged as a light reflecting part in the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in FIG. 10, is made of metal (metallic member) and has luster. .

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the main control unit shown in FIGS. 113 and 114 is used as a plurality of boards on which components are mounted and circuits are formed. 1300, a main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) in a transparent main control board box 1320, a magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded from colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. 113, etc. We are prepared. Among the plurality of boards, a transparent main control board box 1320 is the first member placed in a position that is difficult for players to see, and a board attached to (housed in) this transparent main control board box 1320 is A green coating film is formed on the main control board 1310 using a green resist liquid as a first insulating coating material, and also as a display section for identifying electronic components (RAM clear switch, etc.). It is formed of a paint (for example, white paint) printed by silk printing as a second insulating paint on a white paint film whose part number is a paint film. On the other hand, among the plurality of substrates, a box body 1111a molded from a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 serves as a second member disposed at a position visible to the player. For the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, which is a substrate attached (accommodated) in a box body 1111a molded from a colorless and transparent resin, a white coating film (that is, white Compared to the main control board 1310, which is a board attached to the first member placed in a position where it is difficult for the player to see, the electronic components (for example, the one shown in FIG. 272) are This makes it possible to make it difficult to estimate the contents of a circuit formed by mounting electronic components such as the magnetic detection element MSD and the controller CTR.

In this way, a green paint film is formed using a green resist liquid as the first insulating paint, and a part number, which is a display section that identifies the electronic component (RAM clear switch, etc.), is displayed on the green paint film. Regarding the main control board 1310, which is formed of a paint (for example, white paint) printed by silk printing as a second insulating paint, there is a risk that the contents of the circuit formed by mounting electronic components may be estimated. Therefore, the main control board box 1320 is attached to (housed in) a transparent main control board box 1320 that is placed at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 in a position that is difficult for players to see. On the other hand, regarding the magnetic sensor board 1111b, which makes it difficult to estimate the contents of the circuit formed by mounting electronic components, the starting port unit 2100, which is located at a position that is visible to the player, The magnetic sensor 1111 is disposed near the back side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in surface contact (abutment), and is molded from a colorless transparent resin. It is attached (accommodated) in the box body 1111a. Therefore, countermeasures against fraud can be taken.

Also, a box body 1111a molded from a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111, which is a second member, is attached to (accommodated in) the box body 1111a molded from a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111. In the magnetic sensor board 1111b, which is a board, a display part is formed to specify the mounting direction of the component. Specifically, for example, a circle symbol is created near a position corresponding to a front side electronic component (front side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is The foil removal reference terminal symbols are formed on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b, and the foil removal reference terminal symbols are formed by solid white resist on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. It can be configured to be covered.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board is attached (accommodated) in the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114, for example, as a plurality of boards. The substrate 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 110, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, and the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. A magnetic sensor board 1111b and the like is mounted, and is attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114, for example, as a plurality of main side boards related to the progress of the game. It includes a main control board 1310, a function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, and a magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded from colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. 113. The main control board 1310 that is attached (accommodated) in the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114 is provided with a display section (first main side board). On the other hand, the function display board 1111b of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107 and the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the box 1111a molded from colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. Since no identifiable display section is provided (second main side board), the main control board 1310 is attached (accommodated) in the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114. (first main side board), it is difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside.

In this way, a plurality of main side boards related to the progress of the game include a transparent main board of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. The main control board 1310 attached to (housed in) the control board box 1320 does not have a display section that can identify the mounted components, and the contents of the electronic circuit can be estimated from the outside compared to the first main side board. The function display board of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 107, which is the second main side board made difficult to display, and the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in the box 1111a molded from a colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 shown in FIG. There is. As a result, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, which is the second main board described above as a board that can prevent the contents of the electronic circuit from being inferred from the outside among the plurality of main board , fraud countermeasures can be taken by adopting the structure of the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded from colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the plurality of substrates include, for example, the function display substrate of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, and the box molded from colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. A magnetic sensor board 1111b accommodated in the body 1111a, a main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) in a transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114, and a main control board 1310 of the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. The transparent main control board box of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114 is mounted with the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 of FIG. 110, etc., and is the main board related to the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 attached to (housed in) the main control board 1320, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, and the magnetic sensor housed in the box 1111a molded from colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. 113. The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 110, which is a sub-side board related to the effects performed during the game, is provided. A plurality of main-side substrates and a plurality of sub-side substrates are provided. For example, the main side board includes a function display board of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 107, a magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded from colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 shown in FIG. A main control board 1310 and the like is installed (accommodated) in the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 114, and the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. , the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 in FIG. 110, etc. are provided. The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 110, the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 in FIG. It is configured. On the other hand, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, which is the main board, and the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded from colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. Among the main control boards 1310 attached (accommodated) in the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. The magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded from a colorless and transparent resin in FIG. Compared to the peripheral control board 1510, the performance drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 in FIG. 110, etc., it is configured as a specific main side board that makes it difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside. In other words, the main side board is configured with a specific main side board that does not have a display section that can identify the mounted components and makes it difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside compared to the sub side board. ing.

In this way, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, which is the main board related to the progress of the game, and the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. 113 housed in the box body 1111a molded from colorless transparent resin. Among the main control boards 1310 attached (accommodated) in the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, FIG. The magnetic sensor board 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111, which is housed in a box 1111a molded from colorless and transparent resin, does not have a display section that allows identification of the mounted components, and is a sub-side display related to effects performed during the game. Compared to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 110, the performance drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 in FIG. has been done. As a result, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107 and the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. By adopting the configuration of the magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded from a colorless and transparent resin, countermeasures against fraud can be taken.

[Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 137 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 274 to 279. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 274, and FIG. 276 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process, FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing an example of an error display process, and FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation display process. First, we will explain the various random numbers used for game control, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. Display processing will be explained.

[Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a random number for reach determination used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on a symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol or small win symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the hit type), and a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc. are available. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a random number for normal symbol hit determination, which is used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to accept game balls, and this normal symbol hit determination. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used to determine the initial value of the random number for use, and the normal symbol used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers and the like for variable display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and then performs a random number circuit at high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on a clock signal input to the MPU. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

Note that in this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at power-on, or when the main control side power-on process described later, various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU are The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the information as numerical values and calculating the sum is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the main control MPU does not clear the specified area, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is obtained from the built-in non-volatile RAM by the main control MPU. The ID code is extracted, and based on the extracted ID code, an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and this derived fixed value is It has a mechanism to be set. In other words, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure is that once the ID code is memorized, it cannot be rewritten even using an external device, and the initial value derivation process is used when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. The second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the ID code.A two-step security measure is taken to prevent analysis.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who attempts to illegally acquire game balls that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and steal the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU. Even if it is obtained illegally and it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the ID code is attached with a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is allowed to pass through the gate part 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to allow the game ball to be received into the second starting port 2004. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which

[Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 274 and 275. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S14). In this determination, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, the main control MPU determines that the RAM is to be cleared and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated. Note that since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing of this routine to the determination in step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is not pressed. The person who does this will turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch.

When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, and includes game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). This is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.), and is set to the value 1 when various information is to be erased, and to 0 when the various information is not erased. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF. The setting key 1311a is turned on, and the setting key is turned on based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 due to the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. and/or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination at step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S18 that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (setting value exclusive area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the settings to be changed (values set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of the first ON operation), and the settings of the setting values are changed. The value is set to 1 when the setting value is allowed to be changed, and the value is set to 0 when the setting value is not allowed to be changed. Note that the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time waiting processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. Note that at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510, so the payout control board 633 ) is in a state where it can receive various commands from.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is an input of the power outage warning signal, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that no power outage warning signal is input, it determines whether the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and to a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination in step S25, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. (Step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not to be erased. In the determination at step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not to be deleted, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM during main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This is a flag indicating whether or not the main control side power off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off process has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main control side power off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, error display processing is performed (step S33) and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Note that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After performing the first ON operation by rotating the machine 60 degrees clockwise, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. In the determination in step S18 described above, the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b, and the main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. By determining that the setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned on, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 1. In order to set , in the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change is performed in step S37, which will be described later. Following the process, in the process of step S38, which will be described later, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game ( (Hereinafter, this will be referred to as the "first RAM error cancellation method.")

As an alternative method to this first RAM error release method, the present routine can be resumed by turning off the power to the pachinko machine 1, and turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch. The main control side power-on process starts. The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination at S26, it is assumed that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38, which will be described later, a specific area is excluded from the entire area of the RAM with built-in main control. By clearing the RAM error, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error cancellation method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, an error display is performed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM is When informing that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or that it cannot be trusted), there are two methods of clearing the RAM error: the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. It is now possible to do so. As a result, if there is no need to change the settings at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, or by fraudulent means (for example, if a fraudulent This also includes a state in which the main control MPU itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device) and then returned to normal state.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) is successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, the main control MPU executes the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change is permitted to be performed. (Step S37). In this setting change process, which will be described in detail later, each time the press operation section of the setting change button of the setting change board 1311 is pressed, based on the detection signal from the setting change button of the setting change board 1311. , the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, a decision key ON signal is sent from the setting key switch 1311a. Based on this, the changed setting value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built into the main control MPU.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control MPU All areas except for a specific area are cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU performs this by writing the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, and when the setting change process is finished, the main control built-in RAM is (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specified area among the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the "specific area" refers to a setting value dedicated area where setting values are stored, an out port 2010, a first sub out port 2011, and a second sub out port provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. 2012, and a dedicated area for counting out balls, in which the result of counting the number of game balls (total number) collected by 2012 is stored. The setting value dedicated area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described later, and the out pitch counting area stores the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the The result of counting the number of game balls (total number) collected through the second sub-out port 2012 is stored.

Note that the main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU uses the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch to instruct RAM clear, and when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply When the timeout process has not been completed normally, a counter that retrieves a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU and updates a random number for normal symbol hit determination based on the retrieved ID code. Perform initial value derivation processing to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of Set to random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value of 0. Further, the main control MPU will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, we will use the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register (described as "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until it reaches the time set by the timer setting value and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU can be performed normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU (for example, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (receiving channels and transmitting channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, at a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware, so the random number is input to the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU. Settings such as latching and acquisition are performed, and settings such as activation of the built-in hardware random number circuit for the main control are set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical value range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract other values one after another without duplication. Note that when the main control MPU obtains a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hardware The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power restoration) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. A status command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are created and sent as transmission information to the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out various information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this various information. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power outage warning. Ru. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU outputs drive signals to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, the base monitor, etc. It stops (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing, and then executes the main control side power-on processing again. . In other words, since the main control side power off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum value calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset and restarts. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM will always occur, and in the process of step S38, the check sum (sum value) of the main control built-in RAM will be It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on process is performed.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the determination of step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when changing the setting value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value is 1). In other words, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the press operation part is operated when the power is restored (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch), the set value is changed and determined. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This means that if the press operation section of the RAM clear switch is pressed, the pachinko machine 1 will be in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, when the game hall is closed) , etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information mentioned above before the next business starts, so the staff such as the clerk of the game hall must press the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation section. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information, including various information such as game information, from the main control's built-in RAM.As mentioned above, in addition to changing the setting values, the setting key can also be used to Because it is an important key that allows you to check the setting values, only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people.In this embodiment, the setting value Even if no changes are made to the information, that is, even if there is no setting key that only a limited number of people possess, staff such as game hall clerks can erase (clear) game backup information from the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation section of the clear switch, game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, receives the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2. DC +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V, so that the island of the game hall The main control side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing (described later) occurs. When the power from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 when the power is restored, the wait time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots) is 2.5 seconds), and if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs just before reaching the standby time, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the electric charge charged in is applied as DC +5V, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side, which will be described later, Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing may not be completed. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage are compared in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall, and the RAM is forcibly stored in the built-in RAM of the main control even if the staff such as the staff member at the game hall does not express their intention to clear the RAM. There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information that is currently available must be erased (cleared).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is input, Returning again to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) This prevents the checksum from being updated, and thus prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. As a result, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when the main control board 1310 is restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine Even if the power to the main control MPU is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU. The main control board performs the main control-side power-off process, which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can complete the process, when the main control MPU of the main control MPU is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process are Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is never initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby updating the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the processing immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal is being input. If the power outage warning signal is being input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is made. By repeatedly doing this, it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

Such software makes it impossible to proceed with the game, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, initial settings for interrupts are performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination A mechanism has been adopted that can avoid updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter). In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment The software is used to ensure that the contents of the main controller's built-in RAM (game information, game information, By configuring the system by dividing it into two parts: a part covered by hardware, and a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) will not be changed at all. , to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this information, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output at power-on are created and sent to the main control as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415, and information instructing the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. . Here, first, the main control return destination command at power-on includes information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415, and information instructing the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. The problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on is not set to reserve the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418. When the first big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member or when the second attacking solenoid 2612 is driven and the second big winning opening 2006 is opened by the opening/closing member, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. When the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 detects a momentary power outage or a power outage based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. By restoring the gaming state immediately before the occurrence, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven, and the first big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member, and the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven. The second big prize opening 2006 will transition from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round it is at all. In other words, for example, when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005, it is detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402, and the big winning hole 1 count tells the number of game balls that entered the first big winning hole 2005. Even if the main control board 1310 sends the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 will display the first big winning slot 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number of game balls played can be displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 so that the first jackpot 2005 opens and closes when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state is finished. The main prize is the big prize opening 1 closing display command that instructs the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing the first big prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 between rounds). The control board 1310 sends a message to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) in the jackpot game state, it starts driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 and closes the first jackpot. 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening/closing member (that is, the start of the opening of the 5th round of the first big prize opening 2005). It is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Also, for example, a screen may be displayed to notify the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that communicates to If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the 2004 is in a state where it is open, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred, and the start port solenoid 2415 is started to close and the movable piece is closed. A transition will be made to a state in which the secondary start port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage may occur. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to return by displaying it in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to convey the information in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, players seated at the front of the pachinko machine may be surprised at the occurrence of a momentary power outage or power outage, and when the power is restored, game balls may be received into the second starting port 2004 just before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the user may forget that the gaming state is such that the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game to be played (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game cannot be played. There was also the problem that the player would not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 to restore the first prize opening 2005 from the state where it is closed by the opening/closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the transition to the open state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (in other words, what round is this? Although it is not possible to display (a screen showing the above) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it is a jackpot game state and the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to be driven and the first jackpot 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member. A screen informing the player that the player is in a state where the player is in a state where the player is in a state of winning (for example, ``You have won the jackpot. The jackpot is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the jackpot.'' screen) on the display area of the production display device 1600 to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball is placed in the first prize winning slot 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, when the gaming state is such that the game balls can be received into the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then When the power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to a screen ( For example, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the effect display device 1600 (a screen that tells the player the message "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port"). This can be displayed in the display area to instruct a player seated at the front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when the power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and in step S38 all areas of the RAM with built-in main control, except for a specific area, must be cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command categorized as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball at power-on are generated. Only three commands, namely the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands first send a power-on status command, then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on. A counter notification command for information output determination is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on status command is used when the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM is The above-mentioned low-level information is included in the information that instructs when clearing is to be performed, and when the power is turned on (this includes not only when the power is turned on, but also when the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage occurs). Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among the probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of information and. Here, a problem occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

When creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is determined based on which work's copyright it corresponds to. What kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a game specification in which the number of changes of special symbols is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) )), it is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as a so-called ST machine) are such that a probability change occurs in a state where

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line.

Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the RAM built in the main control. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine.

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 274 and 275.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 276 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks, each consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the above-mentioned main control side power-on processing, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to a variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands has been input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU receives, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning a prize opening sensor 3051, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401. signal, a detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 2601, a detection signal from the out opening sensor 3053, the first sub out opening sensor 2403, and the second sub out opening sensor 3054, Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame release switch, detection signals from the main body frame release switch 4b, setting key switch 1311a , a signal from the setting switch button, and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described later. , is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding starting port prize command classified into others is sent as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3052, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting port sensor 2401. When there is a detection signal, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when this switch input processing is started, the state in which input is being input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is , are each read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it will be treated as if no game ball entered or the input will be ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the status of inputs to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is determined from the first to the third time. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the two times and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth times, it is possible to avoid false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to Detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 2601, detection signal from the out opening sensor 3053, first sub out opening sensor 2403, and second sub out opening sensor 3054, magnetic sensor 1111, Detection signals from 2404, 2602, and 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame release switch, detection signals from the main body frame release switch 4b, signals from the setting key switch 1311a, It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the signal from the setting switching button and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. .

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone vacant terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, so that the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which vacant terminal processing has been applied is LOW among the input terminals of various input ports. Based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal that is being processed as an empty terminal is not LOW, it displays a notification indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuits of the main control MPU. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to winning/losing determination (hit/losing determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for hit determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs pitch counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the exit sensor 3053 is inputted to the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. When the out port sensor 3053 detects a game ball collected through the out port 2010 provided, the value 1 is added to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected through the out port 2010. (increment) calculation is performed, and the detection signal from the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is input, and the game ball collected by the first sub-out port 2011 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned on the game board 5 is transferred to the first sub-out port sensor 2403. When the sub-out port sensor 2403 detects the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011, a value 1 is added (incremented) to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out port 2011. When a detection signal from the second sub-out port sensor 3054 is input and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012 provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned on the game board 5. performs an operation of adding (incrementing) a value of 1 to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out port sensor 3053 detects the game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port sensor 2403 detects the game balls collected by the first sub out port 2011, and When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, a calculation is performed to add the value 3 to the value of the collected ball counter. The main control MPU uses the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012. It is stored in an area dedicated to counting out pitches in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and also sets the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor, and stores it as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, the main control MPU determines that when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls. For each, a ball retrieval command is created to convey that fact, and is stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535), and the value of the recovered ball counter is further added (incremented) by 1, the main control MPU detects the recovered ball. The value of the counter overflows and becomes the value 0, and an operation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created that pays out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is 10 balls. has been reached, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check is performed to confirm the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A command is created and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In order to convey this fact, a main prize pitch number information output command classified into others is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is calculated based on the input information read from the input information storage area mentioned above, that is, the general winning hole 2001 provided on the game board 5, the gate section 2003, Based on the game balls that have entered various winning holes (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5") such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the first big winning hole 2005. This counts the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. There is. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is The input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of , and the value indicating the added number of balls is the value 10. (In other words, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), create a main prize ball number information output command to convey that fact, and send it as the transmission information. In addition to storing the value in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of pitches is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave emission (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave emission") is being carried out, the value of the radio wave emission counter is incremented by 1. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time it is determined that a radio wave emission has occurred in the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display informing that the radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, and 3055 are input, fraud using a magnet ( Hereinafter, it is determined that a "magnet goto" (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is being performed, and the value of the magnet goto counter is added (incremented) by 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation goto has been performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is initialized. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet notification command classified into a notification display to notify that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, by using such a mechanism to reliably detect and notify magnet spots, it is possible to contribute to the ability of staff such as game hall clerks to discover magnet spots at an early stage. It has become.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when the jackpot game state is not detected, the detection from the first big winning hole sensor 2402 or the second big winning hole sensor 2601 is performed. When a signal is being input (when a game ball enters the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006), when an abnormal winning occurs in the big winning hole, it is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state. A winning abnormality display command is created and stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation spot and/or the magnet spot are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud detection, while the value of the radio wave irradiation spot and the magnet spot is set to 1 as fraud detection. When no fraud is detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, indicating that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Also, when the occurrence of abnormal winning in the big winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs firing permission signal setting processing (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the launch permission logic is set as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information, while when the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value is 1), that is, fraud is detected. When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame release switch detects that the main body frame release switch 4b detects that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 due to the input of the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, is set to the launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the launch permission signal is set such that the launch permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine is performed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). It is constituted by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set until the firing is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. The random number is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether the special random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery") and updates the symbol random number.The value of the counter is taken out and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance according to the jackpot type or small win type. It is determined whether or not the winning type matches any of the winning type determination values (determining the winning type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3052, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect are created, while the judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the second starting port sensor 2401. , create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and determine the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for the fluctuation display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is changed so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display command, jackpot opening 1 closing display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is driven to open and close the opening/closing member. When the output of the signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the first big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the round of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set to light up the 2nd round indicator lamp of the display unit, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and when the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set, Set the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp so that the 15th round indicator lamp of the round indicator lights up, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or turn it on in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not time saving has occurred. It sets the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment mentioned above is extracted and used as the normal winning opening winning information built in the main control. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

This normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is arranged in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning slot winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. Shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening winning information. The regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage is shifted to the 0th compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage, and the regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the first compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section for storing the winning information of the normal winning opening are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is held and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. In order to light up the hold display, the output of the lighting signal for the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the normal winning hole winning process, the normal winning hole winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read normal winning hole winning information, and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on the result of this determination (the result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece should be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The fluctuating display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the fluctuating display pattern of the regular symbol mentioned above, various commands classified as related to the synchronized production of the common symbol are created, and the above-mentioned transmission information is stored as the transmission information. At the same time, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and output information is stored in the area. is stored in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and sent. In addition to storing the information in the transmission information storage area, the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2415 is set to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. , creates various commands related to the common pattern synchronization performance, stores them in the above-mentioned sending information storage area as sending information, and lights up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause the function display unit 1400 to do so, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning normally) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S117). In this setting value confirmation display process, detailed explanation will be given later, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information, a process is performed to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. When the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b and the setting key are inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the rotation of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a clockwise by 60 degrees clockwise from the setting key switch 1311a. By determining that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the frame 2 and determining that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key is turned on due to the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key of the switch 1311a is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is met, a lighting signal is sent to display the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, while if the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends and returns to the main routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU successfully receives various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on output information, the main control MPU sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633. A movable piece for outputting a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first big prize opening 2005 when in the jackpot game state, and for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2415 that opens and closes the opening/closing operation, it also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display. Various information (gaming information) signals related to the game, such as an information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a starting slot prize information output signal, are output to the payout control board 633, and firing permission logic or firing stop logic (launch disallowance logic) Outputs the launch permission signal set to the payout control board 633, and displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012. It outputs a display signal to the base monitor, and outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, when a game ball entering the first big winning hole 2005 is detected, the big winning hole 1 corresponding to the big winning hole count command based on the detection signal from the first big winning hole sensor 2402) (count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display. Various commands classified into various commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into other categories (for example, the main control board 1310 generates prize balls based on the game balls that enter the various winning holes provided on the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball number information output signal to that effect is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as main prize ball number information. main prize ball count information output command, etc.), and various commands categorized into specific history (for example, when the number of game balls collected at the exit 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 is 10 balls) There is a ball retrieval command that tells you that each time the setting value is reached, a setting change command that tells you that the setting value has been changed, and a setting change command that tells you that the setting value has been changed. ), a setting key ON operation command that indicates that setting values stored in a setting value dedicated area (to be described later) in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM are to be confirmed, etc. are stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V DC to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. is now possible. When powering on the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs after the power is turned on, the data is transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 275. In order to notify that the power has been restored, a power-on state command categorized as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are set to notify that the power has been restored. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial data consists of the status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on, are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main prize ball count information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the gaming backup information and the data is stored according to this various information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

Furthermore, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the peripheral control board 1510. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the outlet 2010, the first sub-outlet 2011, and the second sub-outlet 2012 for each received ball recovery command, and calculates the number of game balls (not shown). The ball recovery information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (updated with the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012) (information that associates the date and time). Note that if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off after the game hall's business hours have ended without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (i.e., the output port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011) Ball collection information that associates the total number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012 with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 transfers the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the pachinko machine 1 for operation. Ball recovery information is created again from the day it started, and the ball recovery information is stored as ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored and held as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the values counted so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, by restarting time measurement by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU does not have to be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the above-mentioned backup function for storing game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. It is now possible to output. That is, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of A main control return destination command when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine is performed. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main serial data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which make up the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be displayed in effect. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and the power is restored afterwards, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage can be restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 can be kept in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from seeing something and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are necessarily cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when the power is turned on. A state in which only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process as main serial data in the order of Then, when the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is sent to the inspection equipment of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information is output. A determination counter notification command is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[Settings change process]
Next, the setting change process will be explained. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU obtains the current installation values as shown in FIG. 277 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU obtains the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out, but when taking out the setting value, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as calculating .

Following step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process (power off) in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 274, respectively. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is used to store game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process, which will be described later. This is a flag that indicates whether or not it has been stored in the RAM. It is set to 1 when the main control side power off processing has been completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed. be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed as a setting value, and in this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value It is preset to a value up to 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets the initial value, ie, the setting value 1, to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In addition, in the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 that is within the normal range. However, without performing the determination in step S208, in the determination in step S204, the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match. or in the determination at step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process may proceed to step S210 and set the setting value 1, which is an initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU When the MPU determines that the setting change permission lamp 1310z is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the setting switching button is operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button and determining whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button is being input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is being operated when a detection signal from the setting switching button is input, while determining that the setting switching button is not being operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button is not being input. It is determined that the

In the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated, the main control MPU performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 will be added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step S222 ). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (in other words, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) The setting key switch is turned OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turning it OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. 1311a determines that the enter key has been operated based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, When the enter key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the enter key is not operated, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S216 and determines whether or not the setting switching button is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switch button has been operated, the main control MPU performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, and performs the determination of step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. If it is determined that this is the case, the process returns to step S216 and the setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the setting switch button is operated until the enter key is operated, and the setting display 1310g is updated. If the setting switching button is not operated, the setting value that was updated when the setting switching button was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Note that even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be used for main control. Since it is not stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded, and the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The updated setting value is returned to the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control. Even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored after the process of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the OK key was operated before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area.

Following step S224, the main control MPU determines whether there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by inserting the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the switch 1311a OFF, and by performing the OFF operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S226 and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is in the first This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow changes to the settings (values set among settings 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permission is given to change settings. The value is set to 1, and the value is set to 0 when changing the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting value from being changed from now on.

Following step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, the "normal range" is set to set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value. It is preset to a value up to 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU confirms that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is within the range of set value 1 to set value 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that the range is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236), Next, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, which is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238. This is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial serial data, but this is given priority before the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed using a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be explained. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. 278. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the value is 1, the setting Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not displayed for confirmation.

In the determination in step S350, the main control MPU determines whether or not the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, detects the detection from the main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). When the setting key switch 1311a is rotated by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 to move against the outer frame 2. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 4b, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that there is no setting value, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU immediately ends this routine, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and the current setting value is subsequently obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU obtains the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. The values are set in advance to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU determines the setting value obtained in step S356 (in other words, in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the set value (stored in the set value stored in do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that the setting value is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ), this routine ends. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process that is this routine has started (that is, confirming the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is a command to convey.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 reads the setting key ON operation history information (when the setting value has been confirmed) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). information that associates the date and time).

Further, upon receiving the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 generates the above-mentioned ball recovery history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. A predetermined condition for permitting display of specific history information is established, such as permitting display of specific history information such as . The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who checks the specific history information to perform a rotation operation on the rotary operation section 302 and a press operation on the press operation section 303 in a state in which the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. By doing this, control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the determination key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, if the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, if the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as is, but if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it does not display the setting value for confirmation. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , sets the setting key OFF operation command (step S368), and ends this routine. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process of this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). This is a command that conveys.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling to display the above-mentioned specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image that was displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt disallowance (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which it continues to clear the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control built-in WDT to continue to be cleared, but since the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped once started, the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is resumed. The MPU does not have to be forcibly reset. Furthermore, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be explained. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 278), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal, as shown in FIG. 279 (step S400). As mentioned above, the launch permission signal is to notify the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is activated. On the other hand, if the logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of launch permission logic, it is possible to communicate that launch is to be stopped (non-permitted). .

The error display process that is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274 or a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 277), the main control MPU interrupts the step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic becomes firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 277), the main control MPU displays an error message that is the main routine after power is restored in step S400. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the process has started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and the prescribed output port is It is output from the output terminal to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633 via a main control output circuit with a reset function.

When the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 278, the main control MPU In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting shown in FIG. Since interrupts are not permitted in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine is finished, an infinite loop is entered as described above, so that the main control side shown in FIG. 276 Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent game ball B from being fired under certain conditions, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the specified output port. It is output to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633 via the functional main control output circuit.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabetical character E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets the transmission information in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial settings in step S406 are the same as the serial communication initial settings in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 277 and the serial communication initial settings in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 277 and the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 276. This processing is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 274, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 278) and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initial settings are performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is sent to the peripheral control board as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. It is sending to 1510.

Note that the error display command is a command that informs that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 generates error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) to update.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays a message in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In addition to controlling the display of a message image in white text, the system also adjusts the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff" by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Control is performed such that the volume is forcibly set to be the maximum volume without depending on the volume set, and is played from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying a RAM error using an error display command is a process with the highest priority. Give top priority to error notification.

[Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 283. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control section timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained.

[Payout control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the Pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 280 to 282. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power outage notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is determined that it is not an instruction to clear the RAM. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is being operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in , and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs settings to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, it is possible to access the payout control built-in RAM, and, for example, write (storage) or read payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not to be deleted, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value has been stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU uses the payout control built-in RAM as the power restoration. A work area is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 0, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and when the power is restored, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas, etc. (for example, the prize information stored in the prize ball information storage area, Ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (inconsistency counter reset judgment time, etc.) stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU When it is determined that the power-off processing of the payout control unit has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the dispensing control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2ms, which will be described later.When 2ms has passed, the value is 1, and when 2ms has not passed, the value is 0. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU receives the input power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the determination at step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2ms have elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544 ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this various information, various signals are outputted from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area includes, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received from the main control board 1310, and drive control for the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator is stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558). Each time the ball is put out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is provided to determine whether or not to output the prize ball number information. The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (not shown) for monitoring.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, a counter for outputting prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The memory is updated by adding to the value the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the read value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, Reads the BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands sent in the command transmission process described later, and inputs them as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jamming state has occurred due to the dispensing blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 during the full tank determination time. In addition to managing time such as the ball outage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and put out by the ball storage portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the discrepancy between the number of balls detected and the number of balls detected in Performs time management of the conditions and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jam determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is the value By setting it to 0, the ball jam judgment time is accurately measured. Note that these various judgment times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, various information stored in the various information storage areas. etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc.) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

Through this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power outage or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. to the values immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. As a result, even if you are unable to continue the putting-out operation due to a momentary power outage or power outage while the putting-out device 580 is performing the putting-out operation of game balls, the putting-out operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. will be maintained when the power is restored. The values are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage can be continued from the time power is restored, and game balls can continue to be paid out. ing.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit exchange various signals, even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, when the power is restored, the exchange will be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or stoppage. This prevents various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the influence of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530. For example, if the PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is used for payout control. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as a part of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. Based on this, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is an abnormal operation. It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gag operation determination setting process, As a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, output the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after power restoration, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. output to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state will be restored when the power is restored, so it can be done very quickly after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that a payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible can be outputted from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game ball is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a wasteful ball lending request signal, at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine When 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the PRDY While the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to convey that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible. output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the CR unit. Note that the logic state of the EXS signal that conveys that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and is communicated with the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out of ball checking process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is stored in the game ball based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether the tank is full or not, and the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. and determine whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls or not by using the current fullness and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns OFF in the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the full tank sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition occurs, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and out of bulb check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating the fact is stored in the status information storage area.

The current full and out of ball check process also uses the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. When the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch is OFF during the previous full charge and out-of-bulb check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, measurement of the above-mentioned ball outage determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the out-of-ball judgment time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the out-of-ball judgment time is reached, check whether the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and a ball cut to that effect is sent. While the information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number. Ball-out information that conveys this fact is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information informing that fact is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, there is a connection error that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the state information storage area mentioned above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, rental ball, ball removal, and ball holding, etc. are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and is stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned ball outage information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball outage information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the corresponding Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command sending process, various types of information are read from the status information storage area mentioned above, and various commands classified into status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created based on this various information. and transmits it to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, the frame state 1 It creates a command and sends it to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, in step S546 the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, in step S548 port output processing is performed, in step S550 port input processing is performed, and in step S552 performs timer update processing in step S554, performs CR communication processing in step S556, performs full tank and bulb out check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control section main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. There is. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures enough processing time to perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned payout information from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. Note that the processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S528, it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 280 to 282.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to prohibit and switches (saved) the register, as shown in FIG. 283 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described main processing of the payout control unit is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control section timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2ms, and the value is 1 when 2ms have passed, and the value is 0 when 2ms have not passed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). In this return, the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is switched to a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control section main processing, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control section timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 288. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, we will explain the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and then we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the priority of interrupt processing is set to the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The order is set as V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 284. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, the process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing described later, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs commands related to control of game effects, which are output from the main control board 1310. The pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 and the status of the pachinko machine 1.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to indicate that it is ready to accept screen data (information that defines the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the above. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), it returns to step S1006 again and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the peripheral control unit enters a standby state until the steady state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the performance operation unit 300, The rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation section 302 is performed based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300"). Various information obtained from the operation of the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and press operation The rotation direction of the rotary operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 are monitored based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the rotation operation section 303 is set. It is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation unit 303 is to be reflected in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the production operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the production operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of an LED used as direct light, the brightness of an LED used as indirect light, and Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to set the first When a specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set to the specified brightness value. It is now possible to update the information.

Here, the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that make up the lamp palette setting table will be briefly explained. The specified brightness value can be set to one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out) to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, respectively. The player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the operable performance operation unit 301 (rotary operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) to change the 31st brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. One specified brightness value can be set up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise, the current brightness is temporarily set to the 0th (zero) brightness, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). When the brightness is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed along a tone curve (or a spline tone curve) to increase the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. When rotating clockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear (or a spline-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to become lower. When a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the rotary operation section 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the press operation section 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress. , etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. In addition, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, a predetermined position of the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress is displayed with a first brightness specified value to a 31st brightness value. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image the desired brightness level of the player (or the staff such as a clerk at the game hall). It is now possible to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normally, the palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. be. Normally, the palette value is selected from 17 stages in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%), and the brightness described above is selected. The pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation among the 32-level range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designation values mentioned above. (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the brightness specified value mentioned above. This is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are irradiated with direct light, the palette The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in a light guide plate that is irradiated with indirect light. The special palette value differs from the normal palette value in that it has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Palette values corresponding to the brightness designation are set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value that is set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light using indirect light at the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th designated brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st designated brightness value to the 31st designated brightness value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one specified brightness value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. When setting the brightness and brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) adjusts the brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) can control the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section. The brightness is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value by the operation 303. As a result, when a player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets it by operating the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 in order to reduce the brightness, it is possible to use the LED as direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off), and the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level), and Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light was also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, in contrast to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the lighting mode that follows the flow of the performance, and the flow of the performance depending on the lighting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After looking at this, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative board that is too bright (or the effect would be better achieved with a slightly darker brightness), and set the other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative board, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one brightness specification value that extends up to the brightness specification value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board. , For other decorative boards, one luminance specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set respectively, so the relationship between the mutually set luminous modes (bright or dark) The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without disturbing the relationship.

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (in other words, independent from the normal palette values) are required for LEDs used as indirect light. You can now set the brightness. As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by special palette values, and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by normal palette values. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. (one frame worth) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, the vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame The system is such that priority can be given to presentations using presentation sounds such as music and sound effects that match various presentations from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers").

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, it is necessary to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is used to indicate which light emitting data is to be output from the first light emitting data among the light emitting data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode. Update.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used instructs other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that was originally supposed to be used.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the various received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the performance. Random numbers (for example, random numbers used for effects related to pending prefetching) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM. (Extract it) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) schedule data for generating light emitting modes from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the production operation section 301 (rotary operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. When a single luminance specification value up to the 31st luminance specification value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the set luminance specification value is used. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting opening winning command to instruct the start of the starting opening winning presentation, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation display such as a variation display of decorative symbols on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. The command, the symbol memory command that is output when the starting pending number changes, and the grand prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 are analyzed, and currently, Recognize which game state you are in.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the received command analysis processing. Analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands related to jackpot, various commands classified to power on, and general commands. Various commands classified as figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as normal electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, etc. There are various other types of commands. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process regarding notices etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery results, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Note that the peripheral control ROM stores in advance the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data for generating light emission modes for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating production sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for instructing in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification display, the abnormality display mode is set to execute various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. I can do it.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date will be updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is transferred to the peripheral control ROM. It is read out from (extracted from) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. (one frame worth) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is adjusted based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and outputs the output set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Output sound data from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the sound source is output from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. Music and sound effects are played from here. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It looks like this.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values.

Specifically, for production sound, the above-mentioned board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for notification sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined during a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable pattern command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the peripheral control unit received the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern has elapsed. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example operates for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command and the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, or after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative pattern. By operating the rotary operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch can be applied to the board in the sound data creation process. The volume is converted into 7 levels of values from 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the rotational operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume and setting the board volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC are Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound is In fact, the volume is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, and this amplified performance sound is serialized. and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at the maximum volume, the top central speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is amplified to the master volume value. The volume of the sound coming from the top side speaker 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value to adjust the volume is synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually adjusted to the top center of the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4 amplify the volume up to the master volume value, and serialize this amplified performance sound and output it as audio data, and use it as notification sound. For this, the volume is adjusted based on the sound data of the notification sound built into the track being used and the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track being used. The maximum volume without depending on It is amplified to a master volume value that corresponds to the volume of the sound coming from the frame speaker 622, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, if the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, a problem may occur in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine To briefly explain the control that plays a notification sound to notify the hall staff of the fraudulent activity against 1, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is installed is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is Combines the sound data of the incorporated track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track embedded with the notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound. , the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound are compared to the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. The amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. At this time, the performance sound is muted, so it does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, but the performance sound is as described above. The process is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period of time has elapsed, the volume of the production sound that is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute will be changed to the sub-board volume that was adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch. The volume value is set again as the volume value (at this time, if the volume of the performance sound is adjusted by operating the rotary operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the sub volume of the adjusted performance sound is The sound is set to a volume value), and is output from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the performance sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the pachinko machine 1 or When a notification sound is played to notify the hall staff of fraudulent activity on the machine 1, the volume of the performance sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame. 4, but this muted production sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, so the notification sound is output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. 462, when the sound stops flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, the performance sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but after the notification sound starts playing, it continues for a predetermined period of time. The flow starts again from the point at which the sound generation schedule data has progressed up to the elapsed point.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral control by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. It is now possible to control and adjust the sound source of the IC. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers will be reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff such as clerks at the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or fraudulent activity by a player.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Copy it to the backup area for regular processing and back it up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeatedly performed until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this manner, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1008, indicating that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed.In step S1010, a 1ms interrupt timer activation process is started. , performs each process in steps S1014, . Become. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is sent from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, and which is executed upon input to the CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the peripheral control IC is ready to accept screen data from the CPU. I will explain about it. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. 285. As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control section power-on processing of FIG. 284 is being executed; They are each set to the value 0 when the processing is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC continues to perform the normal processing. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB - Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value is 1, and the value is 1, and the peripheral control They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 284. In order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing in this routine is informed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 0 in step S1038 in the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine By transmitting the information to the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing. It is determined whether the execution has been completed or not. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes about 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is repeatedly executed each time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 284. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control section steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 284. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 286 (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 284. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before the process is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is smaller than 33, it adds a value of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (increments step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various presentation units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a moving body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Understand the movable position by setting or obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit (Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of press operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotational direction of the rotary operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the production operation section 301, the volume of the production sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 It is also possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the performance from step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 284, various processing related to the effect from step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as the effect progresses within a period of about 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send the main circuit serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 287 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives information of 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer, and when the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the mode, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, it takes the value 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC selects a mode when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the status is still the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. , and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the status in the 2nd byte of the main serial data following the status which is the 1st byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, have been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated, so the pachinko machine 1 is not affected by the noise. It is in a favorable environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the total (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main frequency serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to different from normal main frequency serial data due to the influence of noise. can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status is assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period in which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is immediately terminated.

[Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control block power outage warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. 288, and checks whether the power outage warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input. If it is determined, this routine is immediately terminated, while if it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control section power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is this routine, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the power saving processing. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the production display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off the lights of various LEDs. By suppressing this, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control section command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal is input, it performs a WDT clearing process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. Determine whether In other words, it continues to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been inputted indefinitely. By continuing to make the determination indefinitely in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it will no longer be able to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if it is determined in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and clears the peripheral control IC. The CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control section power-on process shown in FIG. 284 is restarted.

In this way, if the input of the power outage notice signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power outage occurs. It is designed so that it does not take too long. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is now possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 will first start the process using the first starting port sensor 3052, as shown in FIG. 289. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", 15R A process for controlling the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 is executed according to the jackpot game state. In addition, when the mode suggests a "5R jackpot", a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the 5R jackpot gaming state, and when the mode suggests a "2R jackpot" Then, a process is executed to control opening and closing of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the 2R jackpot game state.

In addition, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the first big winning hole 2005, each setting process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect, and the 2R jackpot game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops changing during the time-saving state becomes a mode that suggests a "2R jackpot". Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot gaming state based on a mode that suggests "5R jackpot", when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time saving state and non-time saving state. . Then, the time saving flag is activated when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 300 described later or the second special symbol stop (not shown) Reset during processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time saving state continues, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of times the time saving state continues is set. The time saving counter counts down every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the counter value reaches 0, but the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches 0. Sometimes, it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 300 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later.

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0". (Step S237), executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), and executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238). On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, then as shown in FIG. 290, In step S241, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. whether or not to be a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as the type of variation pattern is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first reservation memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reservation number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first reservation memory. At the same time, the command for instructing the first pending memory number (first pending number designation command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 to 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned effect preliminary determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 or not. The mode type of game performance is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the production advance judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting gate passage process, the specified preliminary judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the 1 (value of the special reservation number counter), and a first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to the value is set (step S262).

Then, by transmitting a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the command is stored in correspondence with the first starting port 2002 where the starting prize has occurred. In addition to the number of retained memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the starting winning that has occurred is considered a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot. The peripheral control installed in the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect to be executed or prior determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed before starting variable display according to the starting winning. You will be able to understand IC.

Note that when the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first pending storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of pending memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order starting from the area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the first variable pattern command notifying the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is received, the preset data stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area is stored in accordance with the received first variation pattern command. Discard the judgment information and move the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N = 2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). (shift the stored pre-judgment information). Thereby, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of variable display is suspended can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation level (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in response to the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, then as shown in FIG. 292, In step S251, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "1" (step S252). In the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as a process in step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in a second special symbol retention storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special retention number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory. At the same time, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a command for instructing the second pending memory number (second pending number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory commands 0 to 1). It looks like this.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the number of game balls entering the second starting port 2004 is set to "4". The upper limit of the second pending memory number based on the ball being entered is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, the number of second pending memories is reduced. Even if the upper limit is set to "1", if the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed fluctuating continues for a long time, or if the period in which the number of second pending memories is at the upper limit continues for a long time, the second starting port 2004 This prevents the player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to get a chance to win a jackpot even if the game ball enters the ball.

FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). It should be noted that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used for determination are the same. Since only the table and table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and based on the read out first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode of the first special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped. Normal symbol processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process for
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol is displayed as follows (step S284)

In addition, the said 1st special symbol process flag is operated in the said main control side power-on process (refer FIG. 274) so that it may indicate that the said 1st special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed.

FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 294, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process in step S302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Thereafter, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning or losing the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. Thereafter, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process ends.

FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table shown in FIG. If the second special symbol normal process is being executed, the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process is compared with the second special random number (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 296(A) shows that the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state)) and time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). The system includes a low probability jackpot determination table used when the game is in a low probability time saving state) and a high probability jackpot determination table used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability time saving state). . In the low probability hit judgment table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, the setting value is 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and the setting value is 3. The first special random number wins the jackpot with a probability of 1/299 if the set value is 4, 1/289 if the set value is 5, 1/279 if the set value is 6, and 1/269 if the set value is 6. The first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won the small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and the other first special random numbers are the above-mentioned losers. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that there is a loss determination value. In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process, in the low probability hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, when the setting value is 1, it is 1/319, and when the setting value is 2. 1/309 if the setting value is 3, 1/299 if the setting value is 4, 1/289 if the setting value is 5, 1/279 if the setting value is 6, and 1/269 if the setting value is 6. The second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number won the jackpot with a jackpot probability of The second special random numbers are associated with each other so that the other second special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers are a loss. That is, the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of determining a small hit is higher than that of the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number. and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. This is considered to be a more advantageous situation for the player. Furthermore, the hit determination table at high probability is configured such that the jackpot probability for each set value is increased ten times as compared to the hit determination table at low probability.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of the comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a jackpot (step S312), a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a jackpot is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is ended.

In addition, as a result of comparing the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing), If it is determined that the fluctuation is a small win (step S314), a small win flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a small win is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, when neither the jackpot nor the small hit has been won, that is, when it is determined that the winning is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, and a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the non-time-saving state. It is equipped with a reach determination table in the state. In the reach judgment table in the time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach judgment value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating no reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach judgment table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach judgment table in the time saving state match the reach judgment value indicating reach, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost (step S317) as a result of comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag indicating that the game is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 297, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S321) and whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296(B). The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S322).

in particular,
1. Closes after the first grand prize opening 2005 is left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2005, and after the end of the jackpot game state, a special symbol (first special Until the fluctuating display of the symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the fluctuating display will be shorter than usual, and the special lottery result will be drawn with a higher probability than usual in a high probability time saving state. 15R guaranteed variable jackpot to control 2. The first grand prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to the 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol (the first special symbol , 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed 77 times,
3. The first grand prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first grand prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first grand prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening/closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the first big prize opening 2005, and it is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, if the jackpot does not occur, the time-saving state is ended, and the 2R 2R jackpot, which is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state ends;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, the mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the second special symbol (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is as follows:
in particular,
1. Closes after the second grand prize opening 2006 is left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the second big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol (first special Until the fluctuating display of the symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the fluctuating display will be shorter than usual, and the special lottery result will be drawn with a higher probability than usual in a high probability time saving state. 15R guaranteed variable jackpot to control 2. The second grand prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 5 times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the second big prize opening 2006, and after the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol (first special symbol , 5R time-saving jackpot that shortens the execution period of the variable display than usual until the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed 77 times,
3. The second grand prize opening 2006 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second grand prize opening sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the second grand prize opening 2006. By repeating the opening/closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the second big prize opening 2006, and the time saving state is controlled before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. If the jackpot game state ends and the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times, if the jackpot does not occur, the time-saving state is ended, and the 2R 2R jackpot, which is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to the normal state after the jackpot gaming state ends;
One of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed in the case of a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R jackpot. In this case, 92 judgment values are assigned. That is, when a lottery result based on the first special random number is obtained as a jackpot, there is a 4% probability that it will be a 15R jackpot, a 50% probability that it will be a 5R jackpot, and a 46% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 92 judgment values are distributed for a 15R probability variable jackpot, 100 judgment values are distributed for a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 2R Eight judgment values are distributed in case of a jackpot. That is, if a lottery result based on the second special random number yields a jackpot, there is a 46% probability that it will be a 15R variable jackpot, a 50% probability that it will be a 5R jackpot, and a 4% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. . In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of determining a 15R probability variable jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 is executed more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. This creates an advantageous situation for the player.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a 2R jackpot, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, if it is determined to be a 5R jackpot, the 5R jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol, and if it is determined to be a 15R jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined to be the jackpot symbol. The 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 reads the small hit flag in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing if the small hit flag is set (step S324) when the jackpot flag is not set in step S131. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296(C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

in particular,
1. The opening/closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the game ball into a small winning game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2006. First small hit 2. The opening/closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed nine times to control the small winning game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the second big winning opening 2006. One of the two types of second small winnings is determined as a jackpot.

In addition, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are distributed in the case of the first small win. That is, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 100% probability that the first small win will be won, and the second small win will not be won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 180 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. ing. That is, when a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% probability that it will be a first small win, and a 90% probability that it will be a second small win.

Furthermore, when the type of small hit is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small winning is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a first small hit, the first small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol, and if it is determined to be a second small winning symbol, the second small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol. .

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the symbol is a loss when neither the jackpot flag nor the small win flag is set (step S327). Then, after the process of determining the stop symbols is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, in which the lottery results (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, out of reach) are selected. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also be an instruction for the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328 ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changes the display from left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol to middle). The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative patterns (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same pattern, are synchronously displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit or a 2R jackpot from the received judgment result notification command as the mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing, is determined to be a small hit symbol ("Final Battle"), and if a 5R time-saving jackpot is specified, the 5R time-saving jackpot symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same among the symbols "0" to "9") If the combination is determined to be an even numbered symbol), and a 15R probability-variable jackpot is specified, the 15R probability-variable jackpot symbol (the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right will be the same odd-numbered symbol among the symbols ``0'' to ``9''). combination). In addition, when a reach miss is specified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss symbol with a reach; If the pattern is determined and a miss is identified, it is determined as a miss symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols), and the variation is determined. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance), the determined stop symbols are controlled to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times after the jackpot game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the shift control is performed. Specifically, if the jackpot game state is controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state, and a jackpot has occurred a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) after that, the time saving state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state for the predetermined number of times. , it may be controlled to a normal state. Further, even if the number of jackpot occurrences is less than a predetermined number, the control may be made to be in a non-time saving state during the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag as shown in 298 of the same figure. If so (step S341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. If it is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit corresponding to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal If it is a loss (a loss without performing the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the fluctuation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the surroundings for starting the determined fluctuation pattern are determined. A variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Furthermore, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variable time determined in this way.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random numbers and symbol random numbers, and the variation random numbers read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by comparing the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Note that the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with the fluctuation random number. . For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state increases.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol variable display control is started, then in step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter where the number of continuations of the time saving state is set is "0". do. If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state control (time saving control) is to be ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point Then, the process moves to step S355. Then, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a miss, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol, which is set to about 1 second in the time shortening state, is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), The special symbol fluctuation pattern is set in such a way that the special symbol fluctuation time information, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . In other words, the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the time saving state is such that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the non-time saving state. Fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 299, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S371. As the process, a variable timer in which a variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S282) is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process moves to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process ends at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 300, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S381 As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the display control is performed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time saving control (control in the time saving state) is ended and the non-time saving control is performed. (normal state control) starts.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game (step S387), and starts the jackpot game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed in which the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to a jackpot number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter reaches "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that a specified number of rounds have been executed. Then, the jackpot game is controlled to end. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described later, the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S401) and the jackpot opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0", and the jackpot opening process (step S402) is repeatedly executed. When the round is ended in the opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1, and based on the fact that it becomes "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process (step S403) and the jackpot game ends. Execute control to

Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time saving jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time saving jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process, similarly, the jackpot start command (15R probability variable jackpot start command, 5R time saving jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 5R time saving jackpot, 2R jackpot) Start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set.

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set when the jackpot game is finished, specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A). Opening/closing control of the first grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have entered the first grand prize opening 2005 (opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern that closes when detected by the first big winning hole sensor 2402 2, 5, or 15 times) and opening/closing control of the second big winning hole 2006 (for example, opening/closing control of the second big winning hole 2005) After being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is closed twice and 5 times. (opening/closing control repeated 15 times) is reset (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), and the first It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (step S386), and if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates to start a small win game. A small winning start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the small winning game starts (a time for displaying a message indicating that the small winning game is to be started, etc.) is set in an interval timer (step S392). Then, a small winning execution flag indicating that a small winning game is being executed is set (step S393). Note that the small winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of small winning. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. In addition, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process, similarly, the small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) 2 small winning start command) is set.

In addition, when the small winning game is finished, the small winning flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is set in the small winning process (step S411) of the small winning control process (step S236A), which will be described later. ) to open and close the second big prize opening 2006 according to the type of small win (for example, open/close control that repeats an opening/closing pattern in which the second big prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed 2 or 9 times) Reset when exiting. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in the function display unit 1400. It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if you lose, set the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next variable display of the special symbol starts to be displayed in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process moves to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value, the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the state will shift to the jackpot game state based on the state in which the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop varying and display becomes a jackpot symbol. 1510 or the start of the next round (step S401)
2. The first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the state when the variable display of the special symbol stops is a jackpot symbol, or based on the fact that the next round is started. control to open the first grand prize opening 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006, and after opening the first grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls are placed in the first grand prize opening 2005. When the first big winning hole sensor 2402 detects that the player has won a prize, or after the second big winning hole 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when ten game balls are placed in the second big winning hole 2006. Big winning hole opening process to close when the second big winning hole sensor 2601 detects that a prize has been won (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for jackpot opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state ends when all rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, in the big winning hole opening process (step S402), at the start of a round in which the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006 is controlled to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is sent. At the end of the round in which the first jackpot opening 2005 or the second jackpot opening 2006 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game performance according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is performed using a device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker, and the like.

[Inner lens]
In the conventional pachinko machine 1, the mounting surface of the board on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is provided so as to directly face the player, and is decorated with light. In addition, the mounting surface of the board on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent decorative body, and the LEDs mounted on the board are made to emit light in various colors to make the decorative body color. The light emitted from an LED or the like is made visible through the screen.

In addition, the board of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is coated with a solid green resist, and on top of this resist, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic components are arranged, etc. , is printed on white or black silk close to electronic components such as LEDs. The information formed on these boards is difficult for players to see when the LEDs are lit, but is visible to the players when the LEDs are turned off.

In addition, in recent years, pachinko machines 1 have a unified design throughout, and images from the production display device 1600 are combined to express the world view of characters, animation, etc. The design quality is a very important element. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 1, information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, written on the board is displayed when the LED is turned off. By being visually recognized, the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 may be disrupted, the design may be degraded, and there is a risk that the interest in the game may be reduced.

To solve this problem, we mounted the LED on the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, and on the back side of the board, we recorded information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and the outline where electronic components are placed. The information can be printed on white or black silk to make it difficult for players to see, or the surface of the board on which the LED is mounted (LED mounting surface) can be printed in a predetermined color (white in this example, but green or green). After applying paint (resist, silk, etc.) (other colors such as black or purple are also acceptable), the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and electronic components are arranged depending on the unevenness and light reflection condition. In order to make information such as the outline of the game recognizable, countermeasures have been taken, such as applying double coats of paint of the same color except for these information areas to make these information difficult for players to see.

However, if information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and outline where electronic components are placed is printed on the back side of the LED, which is different from the mounting surface of the LED, it will be difficult to perform maintenance and inspection. LEDs, etc. must be identified by alternately comparing the front and back sides of the board, which reduces work efficiency, and the fact that the LEDs and information related to the LEDs are not provided on the same surface makes it difficult to identify LEDs. It becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between information such as the number of pins on the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of where the electronic components are placed. There is a drawback that mistakes such as erroneous identification occur. In addition, if information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and the outline of the electronic component are to be made visible depending on the unevenness or the state of light reflection, the part showing these information (area) and other parts (areas) are the same color, making them difficult to distinguish, which has the disadvantage of reducing workability during maintenance and inspection.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the external shape where the electronic parts are arranged, and the number of pins of the connector written on the board, while suppressing the decline in workability during maintenance and inspection etc. This makes it possible to suppress information unrelated to the game, such as lines, from being visually recognized by the player. This will be explained in detail below. In addition, as information unrelated to the game written on the board, any one of the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, etc. The following inventions can be applied to any invention described in (Packaging aspect).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the inner lens is disposed between the decorative body that covers the front of the LED and the substrate on which the LED is mounted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the front (surface) of a handle decoration board 184 provided in the handle unit 180 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent handle cover 185. A transparent inner lens 185a is disposed between the handle decoration board 184, and as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the upper left decoration board 273 of the dish is provided in the upper left decoration unit 270 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon. The front surface (surface) of the plate is covered with a plate upper left decorative body 271, and a transparent plate upper left inner lens 272 is disposed between the plate left upper decorative body 271 and the plate left upper decorative substrate 273. The front surface (surface) of the upper right decorative board 278 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered by the upper right decorative member 276, and a transparent upper right decorative board 278 is provided between the upper right decorative member 276 and the upper right decorative board 278. The front surface (surface) of the lower left plate decoration board 283 on which the upper right inner lens 277 is arranged, which is provided in the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, is covered by the lower left plate decoration body 281. A transparent lower-left inner lens 282 is disposed between the body 281 and the lower-left decorative substrate 283, and the lower-right decorative substrate 288 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is mounted on the lower-right decorative unit 285. The lower right inner lens 287 is covered between the lower right decorative body 286 and the lower right decorative substrate 288.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the upper surface (surface) of the plate center upper decorative board 314 provided in the production operation section cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is located at the center of the plate. A transparent plate center upper inner lens 313 is provided between the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center upper decoration substrate 314, and is covered by the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a. The upper surface (front surface) of the plate center lower decorative board 316 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered by the plate center lower decorative body 312b, and the difference between the plate center lower decorative body 312b and the plate center lower decorative board 316 is A transparent plate center lower inner lens 315 is provided between them, and the upper surface (surface) of an outer button decoration board 377 provided in the production operation button unit 360 of the production operation unit 300 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, Covered by a cover 380, a transparent outer periphery decorative inner lens 379 is provided between the outer periphery button cover 380 and the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front (surface) of the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is a transparent door frame left side decorative body 404. A transparent left side inner lens 403 is disposed between the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, and as shown in FIG. The front (surface) of the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent door frame right side decoration body 419, and this door frame right side decoration body 419 and the side window interior decoration body 419 are covered with a transparent door frame right side decoration body 419. A transparent right side inner lens 415 is disposed between the decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame top central decorative board 455, which is provided in the door frame top unit 450 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon, and the door frame top left decoration. The front surfaces (surfaces) of the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are covered with a transparent door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, and the door frame top left decoration A transparent top central inner lens 458, a top left inner lens 459, and a top right inner lens 460 are arranged between the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the front surface of the first decorative board 3322, which is provided in the lower inner decorative body unit 3320 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, is connected to the lower inner rotating decorative body 3310. A transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is disposed between this back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and as shown in FIGS. 193 and 194, the back front left The front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the decoration unit 3710 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered by the front cover 3711, and there is a space between the front cover 3711 and the lower back middle first decorative board 3322. A back front left decorative body 3713 in the form of a transparent flat plate functioning as an inner lens is disposed, and as shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, a back front right decorative body unit 3810 is equipped with a plurality of LEDs. The front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is covered by a front cover 3811, and between this front cover 3811 and the back front right decorative board 3814 is a transparent flat plate-shaped back front right decorative body 3813 functioning as an inner lens. It is located.

This inner lens has an uneven three-dimensional surface to make the refractive index non-uniform and irregularly diffuse the light from the LED, and is provided at a predetermined interval behind the decorative body. (provided apart from the decorative body). Then, when viewing information unrelated to the game such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic components marked on the mounting surface of the board through the inner lens. Because of the three-dimensionally formed uneven surface, this information becomes visible in a distorted state (out of focus, distorted to the extent that it cannot be recognized as text or information). This allows players to recognize information unrelated to the game, such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part numbers, pin numbers, and the outline of electronic components written on the mounting surface of the board, as information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the design quality, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game. Note that the surface of the inner lens is not limited to three-dimensionally formed with unevenness, but instead of or in addition to this, the thickness of the inner lens can be made uneven to make the refractive index uneven, or the light from the LED can be made uneven. may be spread irregularly. In this case, the number of pins of the connector marked on the mounting surface of the board, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline of the electronic component, etc., which are visible through the inner lens, are irrelevant to the game. Information becomes visible in a distorted state (out of focus).

The inner lens of this example is made of colorless and transparent resin, and is designed to transmit light from the LED. Note that as long as it is made of a material (resin, etc.) that has translucency, it is not limited to a colorless and transparent material, but may be a colored transparent material that is colored to the extent that it can be seen through. In addition, the surface of the inner lens in this example is three-dimensionally formed by forming multiple small surfaces with different angles like the cut of a diamond, and although the inner lens is made of colorless and transparent resin, the refraction of the surface Because the ratio is said to be uneven, it has a cloudy appearance in some places.

In addition, the decorations of this example (handle cover 185, upper left plate decoration 271, upper right plate decoration 276, lower left plate decoration 281, lower right plate decoration 286, upper center decoration 312a, lower center decoration 312b) , outer button cover 380, door frame left side decoration 404, door frame right side decoration 419, door frame top decoration 453, lower back middle rotation decoration 3310, front cover 3711, front cover 3811) are made of transparent materials. It has a relatively smooth surface. In addition to the inner lens, the front and back surfaces of the decorative body may also be formed into a three-dimensional uneven shape. In this case, the decorative body and the inner lens can be combined to adjust the number of pins of the connector on the board and the direction of the IC. It becomes possible to reliably prevent information such as part numbers, pin numbers, outlines where electronic parts are arranged, etc. from being visually recognized by the player. Further, in this case, the degree of unevenness on the surface of the decorative body placed on the side closer to the player may be made weaker than the degree of unevenness on the surface of the inner lens. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transparency of the decoration placed on the side closer to the player from decreasing, and to make the inner lens, which looks cloudy due to the decrease in transparency, be visible through the decoration. This makes it possible to create three-dimensional decorations with a sense of depth.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, white is used as the resist for the board on which the LED is mounted, so the resist that is provided between the mounting surface of the board and the decoration body is white and cloudy. The inner lens, which has an appearance, blends in with the white resist and does not give any discomfort. In other words, the design of the pachinko machine 1 is not degraded.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, white is used as a resist on the surface of the board on which the LED is mounted, and the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and electronic components are arranged on this LED mounting surface. Information such as the outline of the image is printed on yellow silk. Generally speaking, yellow and white have the closest reflectance and brightness compared to other colors, and there is little visual difference (contrast), so it is important to note that yellow and white are the closest to each other in terms of reflectance and brightness, and there is little visual difference (contrast). In comparison, even when the board is directly viewed, it is difficult to identify information such as the number of pins of a connector, the orientation of an IC, a part number, a pin number, and the outline of an electronic component. Note that white color resist may be used only on the LED mounted side (front side) and various information may be printed with yellow silk, and the non-LED mounted side (back side) may be printed with a color other than white (for example, green). Alternatively, various information may be printed using silk in a color other than yellow (for example, white or black).

On the other hand, when performing maintenance and inspection, information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and outline where electronic components are placed should be written in a color different from the resist color of the board. In addition to being able to easily identify and understand this information, it also supports information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and outline where electronic components are placed. Because it is written close to the LED that is connected, it is possible to clarify the correspondence between the LED and information such as the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic component is placed. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a connector, etc. are mounted on the surface (back surface) on which the LED is not mounted. That is, only the LEDs are mounted on the surface of the board (LED mounting surface). As a result, LEDs are mounted so that the emitted light is directed toward the player, and the front side of the board, which is easily visible to the player, has ICs and other ICs that are easily visible to the player due to their color, shape, size, etc. By mounting the IC, resistor, capacitor, connector, etc. on the back side of the board where it is difficult for the player to see, the presence of the IC, resistor, capacitor, connector, etc. can be made difficult to notice without mounting the resistor, capacitor, connector, etc. Furthermore, if a connector or the like formed in the same white color as the resist on the LED mounting surface is used, it may be mounted on the LED mounting surface.

Furthermore, the degree of unevenness on the surface of the inner lens may be varied depending on the distance between the inner lens and the substrate. Specifically, when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is short (for example, less than 1 cm), the degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens is strengthened, and when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is long (for example, more than 1 cm), the degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens is strengthened. The degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens may be weakened. This allows the number of pins of the connector, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and external shape where electronic components are placed to be printed on the mounting surface of the board through the inner lens by performing optimal obscuration according to the distance from the board. It is possible to suppress lines etc. from being visually recognized, and it is possible to suppress information unrelated to the game from being recognized by players as information, thereby preventing the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and reducing the design quality. This can prevent a decline in interest in gaming. The degree of three-dimensional formation can be changed by increasing the degree of three-dimensional formation by deepening the unevenness on the substrate surface, weakening the degree of three-dimensional formation by making the unevenness on the substrate surface shallower, or by increasing the degree of three-dimensional formation by making the unevenness on the substrate surface shallower. Examples include increasing the degree of unevenness by making the features (surfaces with different angles) smaller, or decreasing the degree of unevenness by increasing the features (surfaces with different angles) on the surface of the substrate.

Further, the inner lens may be one that makes the information written on the board difficult to see, and is not limited to one that makes all the information written on the board difficult to see. Part of the information may be visible to the extent that it can be recognized as information (recognizable as lines or characters), or all or part of the information written on the board may be visible to the extent that it can be recognized as information. It is possible to recognize that the written information is written, but it is considered difficult to see to the extent that it is difficult to recognize the written information as information (to the extent that the lines and letters are blurred and visible) It may be difficult to recognize all or part of the information written on the board, and the fact that some information is written on the board itself is difficult to recognize (to the extent that lines and letters are not visible at all). It may be something that is currently in use.

Further, in the above example, a resin molded member whose surface is three-dimensionally formed into an uneven shape was used as the inner lens, but instead of or in addition to the resin molded member, all of the information written on the substrate or A translucent sheet may be used that makes part of the information unclear or makes it difficult to recognize that some information is written on all or part of the information written on the substrate. For example, an LED board 5070 provided in the light emitting production unit 5000 shown in FIG. A sheet similar to the diffusion sheet 5050 that is processed and molded from a transparent resin plate may be used, or a sheet that reduces transparency such as a frosted glass-like translucent sheet or a crystal-like translucent sheet may be used. You may also use In this case, the space between the mounting surface of the board on which the LED is mounted and the decorative body can be narrowed compared to the case where a three-dimensionally formed member is used, so the degree of freedom in design is increased.

Further, in the above example, the decorative body and the inner lens are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body itself may be used as the inner lens. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration in the design of the pachinko machine 1 at low cost.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light-emitting members such as LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 are used when the game performance is not executed, such as during a period when the performance display device 1600 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed using the performance display device 1600. Among them, a plurality of light emitting members (in this example, LEDs provided on the door frame 3, back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710) are provided at positions that are always visible to the player. LEDs mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper production unit 3400, LEDs mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, back lower right The ratio of each of the LEDs mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the production unit 3250, the LEDs mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left production unit 3200, etc. The ratio is set to be higher than the percentage that is considered to be in the off state. As a result, the period in which the lights are on can be made longer than the period in which the lights are in the off state, and each board can be made difficult to see due to the light emitted from the LED when the lights are on. Information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, can be made difficult for the player to see. In addition, by making it difficult for players to see this information unrelated to the game, it is possible to prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress the deterioration of the design quality, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the interest in the game. become.

[Occupation of the board mounted on the movable decorative body]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the rear movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotation decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621, which are exposed in front of the performance display device 1600, are Players can also visually check information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic components are arranged, which are written on the board with multiple LEDs mounted on the front. It's going to be difficult. This will be explained in detail below.

As described above, the back movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are difficult to see from the player during normal times (when not being driven). It is housed in a position (standby position), and moves to a position (driving position) where it can be seen by the player in front of the performance display device 1600 at the time of performance (during drive), and becomes visible from the player.

Therefore, under normal conditions (when not driven), the rear decorative board 3114, which is provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, A back top and rear decorative board 3452 is provided and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, a back rear left decorative board 3522 is provided at the rear of the back left decoration body 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, It is difficult for players to visually recognize information such as the outline of electronic parts.

On the other hand, at the time of execution (during driving) of a performance in which the back movable decorative body 3110, the back vertical rotation decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed in front of the performance display device 1600. The back movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are driven so that they can be seen by the player from a standby position that is difficult to see from the player. By moving to the position, the rear decorative board 3114, which is provided at the rear of the rear movable decoration body 3110 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the front A back top and rear decorative board 3452 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back rear left decoration body 3521 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front, and a back rear right decoration The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the arrangement of electronic components are written on each of the rear right decorative board 3622, which is provided at the rear of the body 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. There is a possibility that information such as the outline of the game will be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 302(A), the back movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed for effect. When the device 1600 is exposed to the front, the back rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back rear left The LEDs mounted on the back left decorative board 3522 provided at the rear of the decorative body 3521 and the back rear right decorative board 3622 provided at the rear of the back right decorative body 3621 are controlled to emit light to visually recognize each board. Make it difficult to be attacked.

That is, after starting the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the back rear drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back up and back rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to rotate the back up and down. The decorative body 3440 is exposed, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to display the back rear right decoration body 3621. When exposing, the back movable decorative body 3110 is moved in accordance with the timing of driving the back rear drive motor 3126, the back up-and-back rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A back rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the back upper rear decorative body 3440, a back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided at the rear of the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back The LEDs mounted on the back right decorative board 3622 provided at the rear of the rear right decorative body 3621 are controlled to emit light, and the movable decorative bodies (back rear movable decorative body 3110, back up and down rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left The timing when the movable decoration body is moved from the drive position to the standby position after the movable effect or light emission effect by the decoration body 3521, back right side decoration body 3621) (back side drive motor 3126, back top and back rotation drive motor 3454) , the back rear decorative board 3114 and the back upper rear rotary decorative body 3440 provided at the rear of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in accordance with the timing of stopping the driving of the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625). , a back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper rear decorative board 3452 , a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided at the rear of the back rear left decorative body 3521 , and a back rear right decorative board 3622 provided at the rear of the back rear right decorative member 3621 . Turn off the LED mounted on the

As a result, the back movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotation decorative body 3440, the back left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 display effects while controlling the light emission of the LEDs mounted on each of them. Since it is exposed in front of the device 1600, it is possible to make each board difficult to see due to the light emitted from these LEDs, and the number of connector pins, IC orientation, and part number marked on each board can be seen. By making it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as pin numbers, external lines where electronic components are arranged, etc., it is possible to prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress the deterioration of the design. It becomes possible to prevent a decline in interest in games. That is, in a situation in which the board is easily visible to the player, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs mounted on each board, it becomes difficult for the player to see the board.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic component is arranged is written near the LED on each board. In order to cause the LED to emit light in the vicinity of this information, the light emitted from the LED is used to determine the number of pins of the connector on the board, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline where the electronic component is placed, etc. It is possible to make the area where information is written difficult to see. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a light source (LED) is placed near information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, and the light emitting device is emitted. By doing so, it is possible to make this information difficult to see.

Note that the timing for controlling the light emission of the LEDs is not limited to the above-mentioned timing, and as shown in FIG. 3521, and when the rear right decorative body 3621 finishes moving to the driving position in front of the effect display device 1600, that is, when it reaches the driving position and stops moving, a back rear decorative board 3114, a back upper and rear decorative board 3452 provided behind the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back rear left decorative body 3521, and a back rear right decorative body. The back movable decorative body controls the LEDs mounted on each of the rear right decorative substrates 3622 provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3621 to emit light. 3110, a back top and rear decorative board 3452 provided at the back of the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440, a back back left decorative board 3522 provided at the back of the back left decorative body 3521, and The LEDs mounted on each of the back right decorative substrates 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 may be turned off.

That is, after starting the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the back rear drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back up and back rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to rotate the back up and down. The decorative body 3440 is exposed, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the back rear left decoration body 3521, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to display the back rear right decoration body 3621. When the back movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are exposed to the driving position, the back Back decoration provided at the rear of the back movable decorative body 3110 in accordance with the timing of stopping the driving of the drive motor 3126, the back up-and-back rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A substrate 3114, a back top and rear decorative board 3452 provided behind the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440, a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back rear left decorative body 3521, and a back rear right decorative body 3621. The timing of controlling the LEDs mounted on each of the rear right decorative boards 3622 to start moving from the drive position to the standby position after finishing the movable effect (back rear drive motor 3126, back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decoration body 3110 in accordance with the timing of starting the driving of the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625, and the back upper and rear rotation decoration body. 3440 , a back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back left decorative body 3521 , a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided at the rear of the back rear right decorative body 3621 , and a back rear right decorative board 3622 provided at the rear of the back rear right decorative body 3621 . The LED mounted on each may be turned off.

As a result, when the production display device 1600 is exposed at the front drive position and is most easily seen by the player (back rear drive motor 3126, back up and rear rotation drive motor 3454, back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and when the drive of the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is stopped), the back rear decoration board 3114 provided at the rear of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 and the back upper rear decoration provided at the rear of the back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440. The LEDs mounted on each of the substrate 3452, the back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 are made to emit light. , each board can be made difficult to be visually recognized. In addition, when the LED is off, the back rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper rear rotary decorative body 3440, the back rear decorative board 3452, A rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and a rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 are exposed in a position where they can be easily seen by the player. However, since the back movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are moving, the player stares at each board. Because it is difficult to do so, even if each LED is turned off, information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and outline where electronic components are located can be seen on each board. Hard to be seen by players.

In addition, the back rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back provided at the rear of the back rear left decorative body 3521. The timing for emitting light from the LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative board 3522 and the rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 is not limited to the above-mentioned timing, During the movement of the decorative body 3110, the back vertically rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 from the standby position to the drive position, for example, the back movable decorative body 3110, the back vertically rotating decorative body Each LED may be made to emit light at the timing when the body 3440, the back left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 actually become visible to the player, or at the timing immediately before they reach the driving position. , back movable decorative body 3110, back vertical rotation decorative body 3440, back rear left decorative body 3521, and back rear right decorative body 3621. 3110, execute an effect that causes each LED to emit light at the timing when the back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 reach the drive position and stop driving each motor. In other words, one or more of a plurality of timings may be executed in combination.

In addition, in this example, the state in which the LED is emitting light refers to the state in which the light emission is controlled according to a predetermined light emission pattern, and is not limited to the state in which the LED continues to be lit, but at least the state in which the LED is lit and the state in which it is turned off. It also includes a blinking state that is controlled one or more times. In either case, the LED light emitted by the player can be made to feel dazzling, making it difficult for the board to be seen. , it is possible to prevent information such as external lines where electronic components are arranged from becoming difficult for players to visually recognize, thereby preventing the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, and to suppress deterioration in design quality. It is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to the decline.

In addition, a back rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and a rear rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back rear left decorative body 3521. When emitting light from the LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative board 3522 and the back rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621, high brightness (in this example, the maximum brightness that can be set) is required. value (100%), it may be more than half (85% or more in this example) of the settable brightness range (70 to 100% in this example), or it can be higher than the backlight of the effect display device 1600. ) may be used to emit light. Thereby, since the LEDs are emitted with high brightness at a position closer to the player than the effect display device 1600, it is possible to make the players feel the light from these LEDs is dazzling and make it difficult to visually recognize each board. In addition, since a stronger light than the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is emitted toward players who are paying attention to the effect display performed on the effect display device 1600, players who are accustomed to the brightness of the effect display device 1600 The probability that a person will feel dazzled is increased, and the effect of making each board difficult to see is increased.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decoration body 3110, the back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper rear rotating decoration body 3440, A back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and a back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 each employ white as a resist on the LED mounting surface (front). At the same time, information such as the number of pins of the connector, IC direction, part number, pin number, and the outline of the electronic component where the electronic component is placed is displayed on the LED mounting surface, and the reflectance and brightness are similar to white, and the visual difference ( Printed on yellow silk with little contrast. As a result, compared to printing on silk in colors other than white or yellow, even when the board is visible, the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and electronic components can be placed. Information such as outline lines becomes difficult to identify. In addition, this technical idea is applied to the rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the rear up-and-back rotary decorative body when the production display device 1600 is exposed to the front and is most easily recognized. 3440 , a back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back left decorative body 3521 , a back rear left decorative board 3522 provided at the rear of the back rear right decorative body 3621 , and a back rear right decorative board 3622 provided at the rear of the back rear right decorative body 3621 . This technology makes each board difficult to see by emitting light from the LEDs mounted on each board.In addition to this technology, white resist is used on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and yellow silk is applied to the LED mounting surface. Although it is possible to increase the effectiveness of printing various types of information, these technologies are not essential to solving the problem.

In addition, in the game performance performed on the performance display device 1600 in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it suggests the jackpot expectation level (possibility of a jackpot) of the variable display being executed and the variable display (pending display) to be performed in the future. It is designed to perform a performance that suggests the level of expectation. In this expectation level suggesting performance, the expectation level of a jackpot is suggested by the type, color, pattern, etc. of images such as characters displayed on the performance display device 1600. For example, when the same character is displayed, the expected jackpot probability is increased in the order of white < blue < yellow < green < red < gold as the color of the character.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a back rear decorative board 3114 provided behind the back movable decorative body 3110, a back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided behind the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, and a back rear left decorative body 3521. The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, The color of the silk used to print information such as the outline of where electronic components are placed is yellow, which is used to indicate the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, when the back movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotation decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are visibly exposed, there is no relation to the game printed on these boards. However, even if the player recognizes that there is something yellow, it will remind the player of the expectation of a jackpot and prevent the player from playing the game. It can be made difficult to recognize that irrelevant information is written.

In addition, among the colors used to suggest the jackpot expectation level, yellow, which suggests a relatively high jackpot expectation level, is used to indicate the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and electronic components on the LED mounting surface. Since the color of the silk used to print information such as the outline of the game is used, it is possible to make players who have recalled the hint of the expectation of a jackpot think that the expectation of a jackpot is high, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. can. In addition, the yellow used as the color of the silk is a color that has a very high expected jackpot (70% jackpot expectation) and is similar to gold, so the back that is provided at the back of the back movable decorative body 3110 is a color similar to gold. The rear decorative board 3114, the back upper and rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative board 3522 provided at the rear of the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621. A player who just glances at the rear right decorative board 3622 provided at the rear may mistakenly think that it is gold, and there is a very high possibility that he will recognize that there is something gold-like and win the jackpot. It is possible to improve the game interest of a player who recognizes that the game is expected to be expensive. Further, as shown in FIG. 149, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent portion (for example, a portion excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) and an opaque portion (the metal decorative portion 3111d). A golden metal decorative portion 3111d is formed. When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is visibly exposed, the player who glances at the metal decorative part 3111d can be made to recognize that the expectation of a jackpot is very high. Note that the metal decoration part 3111d is not limited to the same color as gold, which has a high jackpot expectation among the colors that indicate the jackpot expectation, but also a color similar to gold to the extent that it is recognized as the same at a glance, or a color similar to gold. The back decoration board 3114 provided at the rear of the back movable decoration body 3110 and the back upper rotation decoration body 3440 may be formed in a color such as yellow (for example, yellow). Silk printed on the LED mounting surfaces of the rear decorative board 3452, the rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621. In addition to the yellow mentioned above, among the colors that indicate the expectation of a jackpot, there are colors that are the same as gold, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, colors that are similar to gold to the extent that they can be recognized as the same at a glance, and colors that are similar to gold. etc. may also be used.

In addition, as described above, the back movable decorative body 3110, the back up-and-back rotation decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed on the production display device 1600 from a standby position that is difficult to see from the player. It moves to a driving position that is visible to the player in front, and during this movement, the rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the rear of the rear up-and-back rotary decorative body 3440 Stare at the back top and rear decorative board 3452 provided on the back, the back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3621. Because it is difficult to do so, it is difficult for players who just glance at these boards to know that information such as the number of connector pins, the orientation of the IC, part numbers, pin numbers, and the outline where electronic components are placed is written on them. It is difficult to recognize, and it is easy to recall the suggestion of the expectation level of jackpot. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to a decline in design quality.

In addition, a back rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a back upper rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and a rear rear decorative board 3452 provided at the rear of the back rear left decorative body 3521. A member similar to the inner lens described above may be provided in front of each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621. As a result, even if these boards are visible when the LEDs are emitting light, it is possible to prevent information unrelated to the game written on the boards from being recognized by the player as information. It is possible to prevent the world view from collapsing, to suppress the deterioration of the design quality, and to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the above example, the movable decorative bodies (rear movable decorative body 3110, back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left decorative body 3521, and back rear right decorative body 3621) are equipped with a board on which an LED is mounted. In the above example, the movable decorative body is moved from a standby position where it is difficult to see the player to a driving position where it is visible to the player. The present technical idea can be applied even to a state in which the player can hardly see the player and a state in which the player can see the player. For example, the rear movable decorative body 3110, which is normally difficult to see from the player because the front side is covered by the back upper front decorative body 3421, can be moved to the rear by moving the back upper front decorative body 3421 between the raised position and the lowered position. The state in which the front side of the decoration body 3110 is covered and difficult for the player to see is changed to the state in which the front side of the rear movable decoration body 3110 is opened and visible to the player (exposed state), and the back side of the decoration body 3110 is movable. Even when performing light emitting effects, movable effects, etc. using the decorative body 3110, the number of pins of the connector, IC direction, and part number written on the rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the movable decorative body 3110 are required. It is possible to make it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as pin numbers, outlines where electronic parts are arranged, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 303, after starting the display effect on the effect display device 1600, when driving the motor to move the back upper front decorative body 3421 from the raised position to the lowered position, the back upper front The LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3110 are controlled to emit light in synchronization with the timing of driving the motor that moves the decorative body 3421, so that the rear movable decorative body 3110 can perform light emitting effects. After the movable performance ends, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved at the timing when the back upper front decorative body 3421 has finished moving from the lowered position to the raised position (the timing at which the motor that moves the back upper front decorative body 3421 is stopped). The LED mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 provided on the rear side may be turned off.

As a result, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is changed from a state in which it is difficult for the player to see the rear movable decorative body 3110 while the LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3110 are controlled to emit light. Changes to a visible state (visible to the player when the LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 provided at the rear of the rear movable decorative body 3110 are controlled to emit light) Therefore, the rear decorative board 3114 can be made difficult to be seen due to the light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 3114, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, By making it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as part numbers, pin numbers, and external lines where electronic components are arranged, it is possible to prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress deterioration in design. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Note that the timing for controlling the light emission of the LEDs mounted on the back and rear decorative board 3114 is not limited to the above-mentioned timing, but may occur during the movement of the back upper and front decorative body 3421 from the raised position to the lowered position, for example, during the movement of the back and rear decoration bodies 3421. This may be the timing when the decorative body 3110 actually becomes visible to the player, the timing immediately before the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the timing when the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position. It may be timing. That is, while the back top and front decorations 3421 are moving, there is a low probability that the player will be distracted by the movement of the back top and front decorations 3421 and pay attention to the back and rear movable decorations 3110. The LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 3114 may be controlled to emit light at a timing when the display is likely to attract attention.

In addition, there is a front movable decoration that can be moved between a predetermined standby position and a drive position, and a front movable decoration that is provided behind the front movable decoration in the standby position and that is difficult to see from the player by moving the front movable decoration to the drive position. In the case where a rear movable decoration is provided that can change from one state to a state that is visible to the player and can operate in a predetermined manner (rotation, vibration, etc.), the rear movable decoration can be moved in a prescribed manner. By operating in this manner, information such as the number of pins of the connector, IC orientation, part number, pin number, outline line where electronic components are arranged, etc., written on the board provided on the back side of the rear movable decorative body is displayed. It may be made so that it is difficult for players to see it.

For example, the back top front decorative body 3421 is configured to be movable between a raised position and a lowered position, and the back top front rotating decorative body 3410 is placed behind the back top front decorative body 3421 in the raised position in a state that is difficult for the player to see. In this case, after starting the display effect on the effect display device 1600, when driving the motor to move the back upper front decorative body 3421 from the raised position to the lowered position, the back upper front decorative body 3421 The back top and front rotation drive motor 3425 is driven to rotate the back top and front rotation decoration body 3410 in accordance with the timing of driving the motor that moves the back top and front rotation decoration body 3410. The back top front rotation drive motor 3425 is stopped at the timing when the back top front decorative body 3421 has finished moving from the lowered position to the raised position (the timing at which the motor for moving the back top front decorative body 3421 is stopped). You can.

As a result, when the back top and front rotating decorations 3410 are operated, the back top and front rotating decorations 3410 change from a state in which they are difficult to see for the player to a state in which they are visible to the players. It becomes difficult to stare at the back upper front decorative board 3422 provided at the rear of the front rotating decorative body 3410, and the number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, electronic component written on the back upper front decorative board 3422 becomes difficult to stare at. By making it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as the outline where the pachinko machine 1 is placed, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress the deterioration of the design quality, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game's interest. become able to.

In addition, in this example, the state in which the movable decorative body (in this example, the back and front rotating decorative body 3410) is operating refers to the state in which the movable decorative body is driven and controlled in a predetermined operation mode, and the movable decorative body is in operation. It is not limited to a state in which the motor continuously moves without stopping, but also includes an intermittent operating state in which the motor is controlled at least once to a moving state and a stopped state.

Further, the timing at which the back top and front rotating decorative body 3410 is operated is not limited to the above-mentioned timing. This may be the timing when the player actually becomes visible to the player, the timing immediately before the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the timing when the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position. Good too. That is, while the back top and front decorations 3421 are moving, the probability that the player will be distracted by the movement of the back top and front decorations 3421 and pay attention to the back top and front rotating decorations 3410 is low. The back top and front rotating decorations 3410 may be operated at the timing when the back top and front rotating decorations 3410 are moved and the back top and front rotating decorations 3410 are likely to attract attention.

[Occupation assistance by surrounding light emitting means]

Next, we will discuss an example of making it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and outline of electronic components marked on the board on which the LED is mounted. A modification will be explained. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, predetermined LEDs are turned off under specific conditions. In this case, since the LED is off, the board on which this LED is mounted can be visually recognized, and the number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, pin number, electronic There is a risk that information such as the outline of the parts where the parts are placed may be visually recognized by the player. In this example, even if a predetermined LED is turned off under specific conditions, the information written on the board on which the LED is mounted is made difficult for the player to see. This will be explained in detail below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a specific ready-to-win performance is executed in the display performance executed by the performance display device 1600, the LEDs provided around the performance display device 1600 are turned off. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304, when moving the lower back center decorative body unit 3320 from the lowered position to the raised position by rotating the lifting arm 3357 by the back lower middle elevation drive motor 3352, the back upper rear rotation When moving the decoration 3440 to an appearance position below the back top and front decorations 3421, move the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 to the first appearance position or second appearance position to the right of the back front left production unit 3700. When moving, when moving the back-rear right rotation decorative body 3610 to the first appearance position or second appearance position to the left of the back-front right presentation unit 3800, and when moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back-rear drive motor 3126. In order to release the lock by the locking member 3134 and drop the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the retracted position to the appearance position by moving it, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is mounted on the rear front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710. (the LED placed in the area A in FIG. 304), the LED mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back top presentation unit 3400 (the LED placed in the area B in FIG. 304), The LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 (the LED placed in the area C in FIG. 304) and the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right presentation unit 3250. (the LED placed in the area D in FIG. 304), the LED mounted on the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200 (the LED placed in the area D in FIG. 304) ) and turns off.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has movable decorations in front of the production display device 1600 (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration When performing an effect to expose the decorative body 3610 and the rear movable decorative body 3110, the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off to display them in front of the effect display device 1600. The display is designed so as not to obstruct the visibility of the performance performed by the movable decorative body. Note that when the lower back center decoration unit 3320 is not moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the LED mounted on the lower back center first decorative board 3322 provided in the back lower center decoration unit 3320 is turned off. (LED placed in area D in FIG. 304).

In addition, when turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side decorative board 418 of the door frame , door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, plate upper left decorative board 273, plate upper right decorative board 278, and plate center upper decorative board 314 are also controlled to emit light. ) may be used to control light emission. That is, in a situation where the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off and the board on which the LEDs are mounted is easily recognized, the right side of the door frame provided so as to surround the game area 5a of the game board 5. The LED mounted on the door frame right side decorative board 418 of the side unit 410, the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top of the door frame top unit 450. The LEDs mounted on each of the central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are controlled to emit light.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the door frame right side unit 410, door frame left side unit 400, and door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are located in front of the pachinko machine 1 (on the player's side) rather than the game board 5. It is placed prominently. That is, the LED provided in the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light at a position closer to the player than the game board 5.

Therefore, when the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off, the LEDs provided in the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are turned off. By controlling the light emission of the LEDs, it is possible to control the light emission around the game board 5 at a position closer to the player than the game board 5. By controlling the light emission more emphatically than the above, it is possible to direct the player's attention from the game board 5 to the door frame 3 and prevent him or her from staring in the direction of the pachinko machine 1.

This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boards on which the LEDs mounted around the effect display device 1600 are mounted. Since it is possible to make it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as the outline of the electronic components, it is possible to prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress the deterioration of the design. It becomes possible to prevent a decline in interest in games.

In addition, the light emission mode when controlling the light emission of the LED provided in the door frame 3 includes, for example, a mode in which the LED is kept lit for a certain period of time, a blinking state in which the LED is switched between a lighted state and a lighted out state one or more times. brightness higher than normal (in this example, the maximum brightness that can be set (100%), and more than half of the brightness range that can be set (70 to 100% in this example) (85% or more in this example) (or may have a higher brightness than the backlight of the effect display device 1600) (including not only those that remain lit for a certain period of time, but also blinking states and flashes), etc. can be mentioned. In either case, the light emitted from the LED provided on the door frame 3 is made to feel dazzling, or the light emitted from the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to be more emphasized than usual, thereby drawing the player's attention to the game board 5. This can be used to prevent players from staring in one direction of the pachinko machine by directing the player towards the door frame 3 around the game board 5, and by making the difference in brightness clearer, it can be Since visibility can be made difficult, the board on which the LEDs provided on the game board 5 are mounted can be made difficult to be seen. As a result, information such as the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, outline where electronic components are arranged, etc. written on the board on which the LED mounted on the game board 5 is provided is available to the player. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the pachinko machine 1, preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and preventing a decline in design quality, thereby preventing a decline in gaming interest due to a decline in design quality.

Also, under certain conditions, the LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, the LEDs mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, and the back The LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, and the back of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200. Even when the LED mounted on the lower left decorative board 3203 is turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 remains lit. Therefore, the light from the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the light from the LED provided on the door frame 3 illuminate the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the back upper front of the back upper effect unit 3400. The decorative board 3422, the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right presentation unit 3250, and the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left presentation unit 3200. , it is possible to irradiate light from the periphery of these substrates by sandwiching them, and this can create brightness and darkness between the area where the substrate is placed and the periphery of the substrate. It can make visibility difficult.

In addition, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 on which LEDs are mounted, the back front left decorative board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, and the back front right of the back front right decorative body unit 3810. A member similar to the inner lens described above is provided in front of each of the decorative board 3814, the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right presentation unit 3250, and the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left presentation unit 3200. You can do it like this. As a result, even if these boards are visible when the mounted LEDs are turned off, it is possible to prevent information unrelated to the game written on the boards from being recognized by the player as information. It is possible to prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, to suppress deterioration in design quality, and to suppress deterioration in game interest.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 on which the LED is mounted, the back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper presentation unit 3400, and the back The back front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back lower right presentation unit 3250, and the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left presentation unit 3200 each have an LED. In addition to using white as a resist for the mounting surface (front), information such as the number of pins of the connector, IC direction, part number, pin number, and outline where electronic components are placed is printed in white and reflective on this LED mounting surface. Printed on yellow silk, which is similar in rate and brightness and has little visual difference (contrast). As a result, compared to printing on silk in colors other than white or yellow, even when the board is visible, the number of connector pins, IC orientation, part number, pin number, and electronic components can be placed. Information such as outline lines becomes difficult to identify. In addition, this technical idea is to make each board difficult to see by controlling the light emission around the board on which the LED is mounted in a predetermined manner when the LED is turned off. Although it is possible to enhance the effect by using white as a resist on the mounting surface (front) and printing various information with yellow silk on the LED mounting surface, these technologies are insufficient to solve the problem. It is not required.

In addition, under certain conditions, movable decorations are placed in front of the production display device 1600 (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, The explanation has been given using an example of a case in which an effect is performed to expose a movable decorative body 3110), but the present invention is not limited to this. LEDs mounted on the back top front decorative board 3422 of the back top presentation unit 3400, LEDs mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, LEDs mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250. LEDs mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253, LEDs mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203 of the back lower left production unit 3200, movable decorations (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotating decorations) Turn off the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3440, the rear left rotation decoration 3510, the rear right rotation decoration 3610, and the rear movable decoration 3110). On the other hand, a state in which the backlight of the production display device 1600 and the LED provided in the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (a state in which the lights are not turned off), for example, in the case of a door opening error when the opening of the door frame 3 is detected. The present technical idea can be applied even to such cases. Furthermore, even under certain conditions, among the light-emitting members (lamps, LEDs, etc.) provided on the game board 5, those that display important information related to the game, such as the function display unit 1400, are not turned off. Good too.

[Occupation of the board mounted on the production operation unit]
Next, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic components are arranged on the performance operation ring decoration board 352 that is provided in the performance operation unit 300 and has an LED mounted on the surface. An example of making it difficult for players to visually recognize information such as external lines will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a predetermined condition is met, the LED mounted on the production operation ring decoration board 352 is turned off (not limited to turning off the light, the brightness may be lowered than usual). . In this case, since the LED is off, the number of connector pins, IC direction, part number, and pin number are written on the performance operation ring decoration board 352 by visually recognizing the performance operation ring decoration board 352. , there is a risk that the player may be able to visually recognize information such as the outline of the electronic components. In this example, even if the LED mounted on the production operation ring decoration board 352 is turned off based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, or is set to a standby lighting state with lower brightness than usual, The information written on the performance operation ring decorative board 352 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize. This will be explained in detail below.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when performing a player participation type performance in which the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 are operated, the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 An LED mounted on the surface of a central button decoration board 376 and a peripheral button decoration board 377 provided therein, and an LED mounted on the surface of a performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330. The central button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360, the outer circumference decorative lens 379, the outer circumference button cover 380, and the rotary operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330 are decorated with light emission by controlling the light emission.

Then, when the player participation type performance in which the player operates the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 is finished, the central button decoration provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 is completed. The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 and the LEDs mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330 are turned off.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when performing a player participation type performance in which the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 are operated, the performance operation unit 300 is controlled to emit light. The center button cover 375, the outer decorative lens 379, the outer button cover 380, and the rotary operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are decorated with light, thereby allowing the player to operate the effect. The rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the unit 300 are drawn to the user's attention to encourage these operations.

On the other hand, in normal times when a player participation type performance is not performed in which the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300 are operated, the center button provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 is used. The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 and the LEDs mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330 are turned off.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the player participation type performance is not performed, the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 are When the performance operation unit 300 is operated during normal times when the mounted LEDs and the LEDs mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330 are turned off, The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light for a certain period of time, and the center button of the performance operation button unit 360 is controlled to emit light for a certain period of time. The button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are decorated with light.

This makes it difficult for the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED, and allows the number of pins of the connector, IC orientation, part number, Since information such as pin numbers and external lines where electronic components are arranged becomes difficult for players to see, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and prevent deterioration in design, which increases the enjoyment of the game. can suppress the decline in In this way, when the performance operation unit 300 operates the rotation operation section 301 of the performance operation section 301 and the player participation type performance in which the player operates the press operation section 303 during normal times, the performance operation section 301 is operated and the player performs the performance. In a situation where attention is being paid to the operation unit 301, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 are controlled to emit light, and the center button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360 and the outer peripheral decoration lens are controlled. 379, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 due to the light emitted from the center button cover 375 and outer peripheral decoration lens 379, which are decorated with light emission, and the LED. Become.

In addition, when the production operation unit 301 is operated during normal times, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 is controlled to emit light for a certain period of time, causing the center button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360 to emit light. control to decorate; control to control the LEDs mounted on the surface of the outer button decoration board 377 to emit light over a certain period of time to decorate the outer decoration lens 379; and a production operation provided below the production operation ring 330. Controlling the LEDs mounted on the surface of the ring decoration board 352 to emit light over a certain period of time to decorate the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 with light emission, and any one or a combination of two or more (all ) may also be executed. Furthermore, if the effect operation section 301 is operated again before a certain period of time has elapsed, these LEDs may be turned off when a certain period of time has passed since the operation. That is, these LEDs may be turned off when the period in which the performance operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a certain period after the performance operation unit 301 is operated.

Further, the LED to be controlled to emit light may be different depending on the part of the production operation unit 300 that is operated during normal times. For example, when the press operation section 303 is operated, the production operation button unit of the production operation unit 300 The center button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360, the outer circumference decorative lens 379, And the outer button cover 380 is decorated with light emission, and when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated, the LED mounted on the surface of the production operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the production operation ring 330 is illuminated for a certain period of time. The rotation operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 may be decorated with light emission by controlling the light emission. This makes it possible to control the light emission of the LED provided at the part that the player is paying attention to, and to prevent the board on which the LED is mounted from being visually recognized.

Further, in the above example, the buttons are mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 during normal times when the player participation type performance is not performed. Although the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330 are shown as turning off the lights, they are not limited to turning off the lights, and can be used in player participation type performances. A lighting mode at the time of production when prompting the operation of the production operation unit 301, and a lighting mode at standby in which the brightness is lowered compared to the lighting state at the time of the production (including not only a lighting state but also a lighting off state). The present technical idea can be applied to any device that controls light emission by switching.

In addition, since the player participation type performance is not being performed, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300, and the performance When the performance operation unit 300 is operated during normal operation when the LED mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the operation ring 330 is controlled to emit light in the standby mode, the above-mentioned Separately from or in addition to the process of controlling the light emission by switching from the standby light emission mode to the performance light emission mode, the operation button lift drive motor 367 is driven and controlled to vibrate the press operation section 303 for a certain period of time ( The rotary operating section 302 may be rotated or vibrated (alternately rotated left and right) over a certain period of time by driving and controlling the operating ring drive motor 342.

That is, based on the fact that the performance operation unit 300 is operated during a normal time when a player participation type performance is not performed, the central button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 are activated. Move the board 377 so that it is difficult to stare at (vibrate in this example), or operate the rotary operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330 so that it overlaps in front of the production operation ring decoration board 352 and blocks the view For example, it may be rotated or vibrated). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic components written on the mounting surfaces of the center button decorative board 376, the outer button decorative board 377, and the production operation ring decorative board 352 are arranged. Since it becomes difficult for players to visually recognize information such as external lines, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress deterioration in design quality, thereby suppressing deterioration in game interest.

In addition, in this example, the performance operation ring is composed of a performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided inside, and a rotating operation part 302 that constitutes the surface of the performance operation ring 330 and covers the front of the performance operation ring decoration board 352. In 330, the rotary operation unit 302 is operated in front of the performance operation ring decoration board 352, but a decoration body provided separately from the performance operation ring 330 is operated in front of the performance operation ring decoration board 352. The visual recognition of the production operation ring decoration board 352 may be blocked by operating (vibrating, reciprocating, etc.) such that at least a portion thereof overlaps with the operation ring decoration board 352, or the production operation button unit of the production operation unit 300 Only the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 that cover the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 are vibrated without moving the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the center button decoration board 360. This may make it difficult to visually recognize the center button decorative board 376 and the outer button decorative board 377.

Furthermore, based on the operation of the press operation section 303, the press detection sensor 381 indicates that the center button cover 375 of the production operation button unit 360 is shifted from the normal (when not operated) reference position (origin). When this is detected, an operation (return-to-origin operation) may be performed to return the center button cover 375 to the reference position (origin). When it is detected that the production operation button unit 360 is deviated from the normal (non-movable) lowered position, an operation (origin return operation) is performed to return the production operation button unit 360 to the reference position (origin). Alternatively, the elevation detection sensor 382 detects that the production operation button unit 360 is in a halfway position that is neither the normal (non-movable) lowered position nor the movable upper position. In this case, an operation of returning the production operation button unit 360 to the reference point (origin) (origin return operation) may be performed.

In this case, since the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 move with the return-to-origin operation, it becomes difficult to stare at the surfaces of these boards. In addition to the case where the production operation button unit 360 is operated, the movable decorations described above (rear movable decoration 3110, back up-and-back rotating decoration 3440, back rear left decoration 3521, back rear right decoration 3621) etc.) is shifted from the standby position (origin), the movable decoration may be moved back to the standby position (origin) (origin return operation). Also during operation, the substrates mounted on the movable decorative body move, making it difficult to stare at the surfaces of these substrates.

In addition, the above-mentioned movable decorative bodies (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and back rear movable decorative body 3110) are Even if it is detected that the object has deviated from the standby position or drive position due to the The surface of the board on which the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the back vertically rotating decorative body 3440, the back left rotating decorative body 3510, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and the rear movable decorative body 3110 are moved and mounted. can make it difficult to stare at. That is, in the movable decorations arranged in such a way that it is difficult for the player to see them, such as the back up/back rotation decoration 3440, the back back left rotation decoration 3510, the back back right rotation decoration 3610, and the back rear movable decoration 3110, the standby In a situation where there is a risk that the surface of the board mounted on the board may be visible to the player due to it being out of position, the movable decorative body can be operated to move the board to make it difficult for the player to stare at the surface of the board. At the same time, the surface of the substrate may be changed from a state where it is visible to a state where it is difficult to see by moving it to a standby position.

In addition, in the above-described player participation type production, the operations of the rotary operation part 302 and the press operation part 303 of the production operation part 301 are valid for a predetermined period of the game production, and the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation part 301 or the press operation part When the operation unit 303 is operated, the display content of the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 is changed in accordance with the operation. That is, by executing the player participation type performance, the player starts to pay attention to the performance operation section 301. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, before the start of the period (operation valid period) in which the operations of the rotary operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 are valid in the player participation type performance, the performance is The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the operation unit 300 and the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330. The center button cover 375 of the performance operation button unit 360, the outer periphery decorative lens 379, the outer periphery button cover 380, and the rotation operation part 302 of the performance operation ring 330 are controlled by controlling the LEDs mounted on the surface to emit light in a light emission mode during production. By decorating the center button decoration board 376 with light emission, the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, and the production operation ring decoration board 352 are made difficult to be visually recognized.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 305, the center button provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed at the timing to start the player participation type performance before the operation of the performance operation unit 301 becomes effective. The LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 and the LEDs mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330 are controlled to emit light to produce the effect. The central button cover 375 of the operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer button cover 380, and the rotary operation section 302 of the production operation ring 330 are decorated with light, and the rotation operation section 302 of the production operation section 301 and the press operation section 303 are decorated with light. When the period during which the operation is valid (operation valid period) has elapsed, these LEDs are turned off. As a result, the center button cover 375 of the performance operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, The rotating operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission, and the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, and the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be suppressed from being seen, and these boards can be decorated with light. Information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged, can be suppressed from being visually recognized.

Note that the light emitting mode of the LED may be changed before the start of the valid operation period and during the valid operation period, for example, the color of the illumination decoration can be changed between the light emitting mode before the start of the valid operation period and the light emitting mode during the valid operation period. It may be possible to determine whether or not the operation of the production operation section 301 is valid by making the LEDs different or by making the brightness of the LEDs different. That is, at the timing of starting a player participation type performance, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 and the performance operation ring The LEDs mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decorative board 352 provided below 330 are controlled to emit light in the first performance light emission mode, and during the valid operation period, the light emission mode changes from the first performance light emission mode to the second performance. Light emission control may be performed by switching to a light emission mode. Also, at the timing when the operation validity period has passed, the light emission mode is switched from the light emission mode during the second performance to the light emission mode during the first performance, and the light emission is controlled, and after the game performance, the light emission mode is switched from the light emission mode during the first performance to the light emission mode during standby, and the light emission is controlled. You may also do so.

Furthermore, when the player participation type performance is started, a display prompting the performance operation section 301 to be operated is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this example, the same image as the effect operation section 301 is displayed, and the message "Press the button!" is displayed to prompt the player to press the effect operation section 301. Note that an expectation level suggesting performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level may be executed by changing the aspect of the image (color and pattern in this example) of the performance operation unit 301 displayed on the performance display device 1600. . As described above, in this example, the expectation of a jackpot is set to increase in the order of white < blue < yellow < green < red < gold, and the appearance of the image in the production operation section 301 is set to one of these. The color may be used to indicate the degree of expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300, and the performance operation ring decoration provided below the performance operation ring 330. When the LEDs mounted on the surface of the board 352 are controlled to emit light in the second effect light emission mode, the image is the same as the image of the effect operation section 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 (not limited to exact match, but approximately Light emission may be controlled by color (including the same color). Thereby, the effect operation section 301 can be decorated with light emission in connection with the expectation level suggesting effect executed by the effect display device 1600, increasing the sense of realism. In addition, if the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is decorated with light emission before the timing of displaying the image of the performance operation unit 301 on the performance display device 1600, the image of the performance display unit 301 is displayed on the performance display device 1600. Until then, the production operation section 301 was decorated with light emission in the normal (color with the lowest jackpot expectation) luminescent color (white in this example), and the image of the production operation section 301 was displayed on the production display device 1600, or the timing. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed (such as several seconds), the light-emitting decoration may be changed to the same color as the image of the effect operation section 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[Lamp/LED brightness adjustment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by rotating the rotary operation section 302 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300, the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board of the door frame 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457; 273, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the upper right decorative board 278 and the upper decorative board 314 in the center of the dish may also be adjustable. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, The brightness of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the back rear decorative board 3114, back upper and rear decorative board 3452, back rear left decorative board 3522, and back rear right decorative board 3622 mounted on the movable decoration body can also be adjusted in brightness. Alternatively, the brightness of a plurality of LEDs as a backlight of the effect display device 1600 may be adjustable. It is desirable that the brightness of the provided LEDs (LEDs) cannot be adjusted.) The brightness of the LEDs (LEDs provided) can be adjusted in 5% increments over a range from 70% to 100%.

Specifically, when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is increased, and the rotation operation section 302 is rotated. When rotated counterclockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is reduced.

Furthermore, when adjusting the brightness by operating the rotary operation section 302, a barometer corresponding to the current brightness is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period of time, and when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer increases until the brightness reaches 100%, and when the rotary operation section 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer decreases until the brightness reaches 70%. In this way, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, by drawing attention to the display content of the performance display device 1600, the button provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300 It is possible to suppress the central button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 37, and the production operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the production operation ring 330 from being visually recognized, and the connectors marked on these boards can be suppressed. Information such as the number of pins, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline where the electronic parts are arranged becomes difficult for players to see, preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and improving the design. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, as described above, since the player participation type production is not performed, the buttons are mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300. When the rotary operation unit 302 is operated during normal times when the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the production operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the production operation ring 330 are turned off, the center button decoration board 376, an LED mounted on the surface of the outer button decoration board 377, and an LED mounted on the surface of the performance operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the performance operation ring 330. , are controlled to emit light over a certain period of time to decorate the center button cover 375 of the performance operation button unit 360, the outer circumferential decoration lens 379, and the rotary operation part 302 of the performance operation ring 330 with light emission. When the period in which the performance operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a certain period, the display of the barometer of the performance display device 1600 disappears, and the LED of the performance operation unit 300 is turned off.

In this way, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided in the production operation unit 300, the center button decoration board 376 on which these LEDs are mounted, The surfaces of the outer button decoration board 377 and the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer button decoration board 377 provided in the performance operation button unit 360 of the performance operation unit 300, and the LEDs mounted below the performance operation ring 330 The brightness of the LEDs mounted on the surface of the production operation ring decoration board 352 provided in the display cannot be adjusted. That is, the brightness of the LEDs provided in the performance operation unit 300, which is located close to the player and tends to attract attention, cannot be adjusted in brightness, and is controlled to emit light at a preset brightness. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 300 is decorated with light in the above-mentioned light emission mode during performance, it is always mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, and the performance operation ring decoration board 352 with a brightness above a certain level. It is possible to emit light from the LED in a situation where the player pays attention to the performance operation unit 300 (a situation where the performance operation unit 301 is operated such as when a player participation type performance or volume adjustment is being performed). The center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, and the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be made difficult to see by the light, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the components written on these boards can be made difficult to see. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, and external lines where electronic components are arranged becomes difficult for players to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing and to suppress deterioration of the design. A decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, white is used as the resist for the mounting surfaces of the center button decoration board 376, the outer button decoration board 377, and the production operation ring decoration board 352, and the number of pins of the connector is marked with yellow silk on the mounting surface. Information such as the orientation of the IC, part number, pin number, and outline where electronic components are placed is printed. In this way, in this example, this information is printed on the mounting surface of the board using yellow silk, which has little visual difference (contrast) compared to white, so it can be printed not only when the LED is on, but also when the LED is off. Even this information is becoming difficult to identify.

Note that the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 until the peripheral control MPU is activated, before and after the special symbols displayed in a variable manner stop). It may be possible to always execute it except for a certain period (one or both of them, etc.), or it may be possible under certain conditions such as a period when the performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while waiting for a customer. It may be possible to execute the program only when the following is true. Further, the result of brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 may be reflected depending on the situation (such as whether or not variable display is being performed). It may be possible to change between a case where the brightness adjustment result is reflected immediately and a case where the brightness adjustment result is reflected at a timing delayed from the operation timing of the rotation operation unit 302.

In this example, brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be performed even when the door frame 3 is open. In addition, when the door frame 3 is open, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the LED mounted on the back top front decorative board 3422 of the back top direction unit 3400 are displayed. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810, LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200. LEDs mounted on the back lower left decorative board 3203, movable decorations (lower back middle rotation decoration 3310, back upper and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LED provided on the rear movable decorative body 3110), are turned off (unable to light up), and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example Then, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the plate upper left decorative board 273, The plate upper right decorative board 278 and the plate center upper decorative board 314 may also be controlled to emit light.) are in a light emitting controlled state (lighting enabled state). That is, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness while the door frame 3 is open, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 described above are turned off. , the brightness cannot be determined based on the light emitting states of these plurality of LEDs.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is not open (the door frame 3 is closed), the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 and the back upper direction unit 3400 LED mounted on the back top front decorative board 3422 of , LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 , LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 The LEDs mounted on the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the back bottom left production unit 3200, the movable decorations (back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration Control is not performed to turn off the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the LEDs provided on the body 3510, the back clockwise rotation decoration 3610, and the rear movable decoration 3110). possible state). Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, when the rotary operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness, the brightness can be determined based on the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.

In addition, as described above, the back front left decorative board 3714, the back upper front decorative board 3422, the back front right decorative board 3814, the back lower right decorative board 3253, the back lower left decorative board 3203, the back rear decorative board 3114, the back upper and rear For the decorative board 3452, rear left decorative board 3522, and rear right decorative board 3622, white is used as a resist on the mounting surface, and the number of connector pins, IC orientation, and components are marked on the mounting surface with yellow silk. Information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines where electronic components are placed are printed. Therefore, even if the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these boards are in a non-lighting state, this information can be made difficult to identify.

[Backside light emission of pachinko machine]
Conventionally, the back side of a pachinko machine is only equipped with a control board, etc., and is not a part that is recognized by players, so no special measures have been taken, except for countermeasures against fraud. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 of this example employs a novel configuration that has not been seen before so that the efficiency of various operations on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. This will be explained below with reference to FIGS. 306 to 311.

FIG. 306 is a side view schematically showing the light from the light-emitting decoration in the standby position when looking at the pachinko machine 1 from the side, and FIG. FIG. 308 is a side view schematically showing light from a light-emitting decoration, FIG. 308 is a diagram showing a rear decorative board provided with a plurality of holes, and FIG. 309 is a diagram showing a light-emitting area on the back side of a pachinko machine. FIG. 310 is a perspective view showing the light-emitting area on the side of the game board when viewed from the front left, and FIG. 311 is a perspective view showing the light-emitting area on the side when the game board is viewed from the rear left. It is.

(About light from luminescent decorations)
The game board 5 of this example is provided with an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image. is provided with a plurality of light-emitting decorations. In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided with a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. The production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, while the various units having light emitting decorations are mounted inside the back box 3010 at positions in front of the production display device 1600. installed.

The light emitting decorations in this example include a back top and front rotating decoration 3410, a back top and front decoration 3421, a back top and back decoration 3451, a back and back movable decoration 3110, etc. These light emitting decorations Regarding the LEDs mounted in the game board, there are cases where the LEDs emit light as part of the performance when the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, and cases where they are emitted as a decoration of the game board 5 when the symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner.

First, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3421 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back top front decoration body 3421 of the back top performance unit 3400 is provided above the display area of the performance display device 1600. A back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is attached to the central front side of the body 3421. More specifically, the back-top-front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting part and a light-transmitting lens part. In addition, the back top front decoration body 3421 has two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 stacked one on top of the other in the center in the left and right direction, so that the rear petals overlap the front petals. It is formed in a rotated shape so as to be located between the two lenses, and there is almost no non-transparent part, and almost the entire lens part is transparent. Note that the "translucent lens part" is a part having a lens cut shape that bends light, making the light-emitting decoration more dazzling when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 306, a back top front decorative board 3422 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back top front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back top front decorative body 3421. The back top front decorative board 3422 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top front decorative body 3421 in the left and right direction. The back upper front decorative board 3422 allows the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs is transmitted to the lenses of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421. The lens parts of the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back upper front decoration body 3421 can be decorated with light emission.

Furthermore, top-view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface facing the front side facing the player) of the back upper front decorative board 3422. The top view type LED is capable of emitting light toward the front (player side) of the back upper front decorative board 3422. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated to the lens parts of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3421 located in the front, and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front rotating decorative body The lens portion of 3421 can be decorated with bright light.

In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back top front decorative board 3422, excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated to the lens parts of the back top front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421, and the lens parts of the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421 can be efficiently irradiated with light. It can be made into a bright and luminous decoration. In addition, the back upper front decorative board 3422 allows the player to see the front side of the back upper front decorative board 3422 through the lens parts of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, especially when the LED is not emitting light. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back top front decorative board 3422 with a coating film made of white solder resist, even when the lens portions of the back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and the back top front decoration body 3421 are passed through, From the player's side, the lens portion can be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front side of the back and front decorative substrates 3422 being visible.

Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) of the back upper front decorative board 3422 in this example. As for the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422, top view type LEDs are mounted. This makes it possible to irradiate light toward the rear side of machine 1.

In addition, the back top front decorative board 3422 has a coating film made of white solder resist not only on the front side but also on the rear side, excluding the multiple mounted LEDs and other mounted components. are doing. As described above, the coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the upper and lower back decorative substrates 3422.

As shown in FIG. 306, when the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and back rotating decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, the back top and back rotating decoration is placed behind the left side portion of the back top front decorative board 3422 in the left and right direction. Since the body 3440 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451 are located, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top and front decoration board 3422 is transmitted to the back top and rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451. It will be irradiated towards. A part of such light is reflected by the back top and back rotating decoration body 3440 and the back top and back decoration body 3451, and is reflected on the back top and front decoration board 3422 (back top and front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top and front decoration body 3421). Light leaks from the gap between the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451, and such leaked light (light leakage) becomes visible to the player. Become. In this way, not only the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 emit light, but also light leaks from the rear side of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421. Therefore, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives the player a sense of depth.

In addition, when the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and The rear decoration body 3451 is not located. In addition, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion of the back upper front decorative board 3422 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part of the back upper front decorative board 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper and front decorative board 3422 is transmitted to the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper and rear decorative body 3451, the back and rear movable decorative body 3110, The light is not blocked by the effect display device 1600 and is irradiated directly toward the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located behind the back top and front decorative boards 3422. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use transparent members (transparent parts), and the transparent parts can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, a portion of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, when the back top and back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and back decoration body 3451 are in the appearance position, there is a back top The rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 are not located. In addition, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper portion of the upper and lower rear decorative substrates 3422 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part of the back upper front decorative board 3422 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top and front decorative board 3422 is transmitted to the back top and back rotating decoration 3440, the back top and back decoration 3451, the back and rear movable decoration 3110, and the effect display device. The light is not blocked by the light beam 1600 and is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative board 3422. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use transparent members (transparent parts), and the transparent parts can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, a portion of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

Next, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described in detail above, the back upper and rear decoration body 3451 of the back upper and lower decoration unit 3450 is provided behind the back upper and front decoration body 3421, and the back upper and rear decoration body 3451 is provided at the front side of the back upper and rear decoration body 3451. , a back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting part and a light-transmitting lens part. In addition, the back top and back decoration body 3451 has two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440 stacked one on top of the other, so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it has been rotated, and there are almost no non-transparent parts, and almost the entire lens part is transparent. Note that the "translucent lens part" is a part that has a lens cut shape that bends light, making the light-emitting decoration more dazzling when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 306, a back top and rear decorative board 3452 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back top and back rotating decoration body 3440 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451. The back upper and rear decorative board 3452 allows the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens parts of the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451. As a result, the lens portions of the back upper and rear rotating decoration body 3440 and the back upper and rear decoration body 3451 can be decorated with light emission.

Further, the back top and back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and back decoration body 3451 can be moved from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. When the back top and back rotating decoration 3440 and the back top and back decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the back top and front decoration 3421 and are not visible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located at the rear of the upper part of the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3451; An effect display device 1600 is located at the rear of the lower part. In addition, when the back top and back rotating decoration 3440 and the back top and back decoration 3451 have moved to their appearance positions, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600 and are visible to the player.

Furthermore, top-view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface facing the front side facing the player) of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452. The top view type LED is capable of emitting light toward the front (player side) of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated to the lens parts of the back top and back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and back decorative body 3451 located in the front, and The lens portion of 3451 can be decorated with bright light.

Further, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452, excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated to the lens parts of the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451. It can be made into a bright and luminous decoration. In addition, the back upper and rear decorative board 3452 allows the player to see the front surface of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452 through the lens parts of the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper and rear decorative body 3451, especially when the LED is not emitting light. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 with a coating film made of white solder resist, even when the lens portions of the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451 are passed through, From the player's side, the lens portion can be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front side of the back upper and rear decorative substrates 3452 being visible.

As shown in FIG. 306, when the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and back decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, there is a A rotating decorative body 3410 and a back upper front decorative body 3421 are located. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 is reflected by the back top and front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back top and front decoration body 3421, and the light from the back top and rear decorative board 3452 The light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located at the rear of the tank. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use transparent members (transparent parts), and the transparent parts can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, a portion of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3452 passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 in this example. As for the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper and rear decorative board 3452, top view type LEDs are mounted. This makes it possible to irradiate light toward the rear side of machine 1.

In addition, the rear top and rear decorative board 3452 has a coating film made of white solder resist not only on the front side but also on the rear side, excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear side and other mounted components. have. As described above, the coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the back upper and rear decorative substrates 3452.

As shown in FIG. 306, when the back top and back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back top and back decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, regardless of whether the back movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, The rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper part of the decorative board 3452 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 is not blocked by the back movable decorative body 3110 and the effect display device 1600, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 is The light is irradiated directly toward the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located at the rear. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use transparent members (transparent parts), and the transparent parts can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010, and further passes through the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, when the back top and back rotating decoration 3440 and the back top and back decoration 3451 are in the appearance position, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600, so that the back top and back decoration board 3452 is Light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not irradiated toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553. For this reason, when the back top and back rotating decoration body 3440 and the back top and back decoration body 3451 are in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top and back decoration board 3452 are controlled not to emit light. .

Next, the rear movable decorative body 3110 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described above in detail, the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the back rear effect unit 3100 is provided behind the back upper and rear decorative body 3451. More specifically, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 that extends in the left-right direction and has a decoration that constitutes a part of the decorative portion 3150 with relief-like unevenness. , a sheet-like decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear of the decorative body 3111 and having decoration (pictures) and having a translucent property, which constitutes the rest of the decorative section 3150 ; A back decoration board 3114 is provided at the rear of the light guide and radiation plate 3113 and has a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. There is. The rear decorative board 3114 allows the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body 3111 (the rear The movable decoration body 3110) can be decorated with light emission.

As shown in FIG. 307, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is capable of moving from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 and is not visible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located at the rear of the upper part of the rear movable decorative body 3110, whereas the effect display device 1600 is located at the rear of the lower part of the rear movable decorative body 3110. . In addition, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

In addition, on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 (the surface facing the front side facing the player), as a plurality of LEDs, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a side view type and a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a top view type are provided. has been implemented. The side-view type first LED 3114a can emit light toward the front (player side) of the rear decorative board 3114, while the top-view type second LED 3114b can emit light toward the rear decorative board 3114. It is possible to irradiate light toward the sides of 3114. In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a transparent flat light guiding radiation plate 3113, and the first LED 3114a and second LED 3114b of the rear decorative board 3114 emit light toward the light guiding radiation plate 3113. By irradiating it, the light guide radiation plate 3113 emits light forward, and the decorative body 3111 can be uniformly irradiated with light as a whole. ) can be decorated with light for easy visual recognition.

Further, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the decorative body 3111 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the decorative body 3111 (rear movable decorative body 3110) can be brightly decorated with light. Furthermore, the rear decorative board 3114 has a possibility that the front side of the rear decorative board 3114 may be visible from the player side through the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110, especially when the LED is not emitting light. be. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 with a coating film made of white solder resist, even if the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is passed through, the decorative body 3111 can be seen from the player's side. can be recognized as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front side of the rear decorative board 3114 being visible.

As shown in FIG. 306, when the back movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, in front of the back movable decorative body 3110, there are the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front rotary decorative body 3421, Decorative body 3451 is located. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back and rear decorative board 3114 is reflected by the back top and front rotating decorations 3410, the back top and front decorations 3421, and the back top and back decorations 3451. The light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located behind the rear movable decorative body 3110. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use transparent members (transparent parts), and the transparent parts can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the rear movable decorative body 3110 passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

Furthermore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is diffused by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and irradiated toward the front of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Light is also irradiated from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 toward the sides of the light guide radiation plate 3113. In other words, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 passes through the light guide radiation plate 3113 from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the rear decorative board 3114 ( The light is irradiated toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is transmitted through the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the vicinity of the transparent area on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1. The region L2 and the light emitting region L3 can be visually recognized brightly.

Furthermore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is irradiated from the top, bottom, left and right ends of the light guide radiation plate 3113. A part of the light irradiated from the rear decorative substrate 3114 is irradiated upward and rearward. When the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the effect display device 1600 is not located above and behind the rear decorative board 3114. In other words, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is blocked from the upper end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the effect display device 1600 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, the light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the rear decorative board 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use transparent members (transparent parts), and the transparent parts can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the rear decorative board 3114 passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010, and then the light emitted near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The region L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 306, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600, so that the plurality of rear movable decorative bodies 3110 mounted on the front surface are The light from the LED is not irradiated towards the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553.

In addition, in this example, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a transparent flat light guiding radiation plate 3113, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is guided. Although the light is diffused in the light emitting plate 3113, the light guide and emitting plate 3113 may not be provided. In such a case, the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is provided with a first side-view type so that light is irradiated to the sides of the rear decorative board 3114 and to the top and rear of the rear decorative board 3114. Preferably, an LED 3114a is provided. With this arrangement, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is irradiated toward the side surface of the rear box 3010 located on the side of the rear decorative board 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 The light-emitting region L2 and the light-emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the sides of the back box 3010 can be visually recognized brightly. Furthermore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear rear decorative board 3114 is irradiated toward the rear box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the rear decorative board 3114, and the rear box 3014 The light emitting area L1 near the transparent area of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightly recognized through the transparent area.

Although the back box 3010 of this example is partially provided with a transparent portion, the back box 3010 may be provided with a penetrating portion instead of the transparent portion. Even in such a case, the light from the LED of the light-emitting decoration can pass through the penetrating portion of the back box 3010. For example, a portion of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top front decorative board 3422 passes through the bright penetration area of the back box 3010 and further passes through the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent region can be visually recognized brightly.

Further, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a light-transmitting part that is a transparent part and a non-light-transmitting part. The side) is printed or painted in white, or has a mirror print or mirror finish, making it possible to reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.) I have to. Thereby, the light directed to the non-transparent part can be efficiently reflected onto the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be seen brightly.

Furthermore, regarding the above-mentioned light-emitting decoration, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of various decorative boards is not only emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also illuminates the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. Although it is irradiated towards the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located in The light from the plurality of LEDs is configured so as not to be directed toward the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, for decorative boards that need to be specialized for presentation, the mounting surface can be coated with a green or black solder resist coating, or the board can be enclosed in a box to help diffuse the light from the LEDs. By suppressing the amount of light emitted from the LED, the LED emits a point light so that the light from the LED can be clearly seen.

As another example, the rear decorative substrate 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be explained with reference to FIG. 308. As shown in FIG. 308, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 located in front of the upper and rear decorative board 3452. A part of the light irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 is reflected and directed toward the rear of the decorative body 3111. When the rear decorative board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes, the reflected light of the light irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and heads toward the rear of the rear decorative board 3114. becomes possible. Note that a decoration base 3115 is attached to the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114 so as to cover the rear side of the rear decorative board 3114. Holes are provided at corresponding positions. As a result, a portion of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the rear decorative board 3114. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the rear decorative substrate 3114. In other words, a portion of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the rear decorative board 3114. , is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear (top and rear) of the back back decorative board 3114, passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010, and further illuminates the tank rail 553 at the back of the pachinko machine 1. The light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of can be visually recognized brightly.

In the above, the rear decorative board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the size of these holes is as small as possible. It is preferable that the LED be formed smaller than the existing LED. For example, when the size of the hole provided in the rear decorative board 3114 is large, the light from the rear of the rear decorative board 3114 (for example, the light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is transmitted to the rear decorative board 3114. 3114, and there is a risk that even when the LED mounted on the front side of the rear decorative board 3114 is off, it will appear as if it is on. By reducing the size of the hole provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114, such a problem can be reduced.

Similarly, the rear decorative board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, but the number of these holes is as small as possible. It is preferable that the number is smaller than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided in the rear decorative board 3114 is increased, light from the rear of the rear decorative board 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is transmitted to the rear decorative board 3114. 3114, and there is a risk that even when the LED mounted on the front side of the rear decorative board 3114 is off, it will appear as if it is on. By reducing the number of holes provided in the rear decorative substrate 3114, such adverse effects can be reduced.

In the above, the back and rear decorative board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-back direction, but similarly, the back top and front decorative board 3422 and the back top and rear decorative board 3452 are also provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front and rear direction. holes may be provided. With this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 is reflected on the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the light is reflected on the back upper front decorative body 3421. Light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the upper back front decorative substrate 3422 through the plurality of holes provided in the front decorative substrate 3422. In addition, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back top and rear decorative board 3452 is reflected by the back top and back rotating decoration body 3440 and the back top and rear decoration body 3451, and the back top and rear decoration Light can be efficiently irradiated toward the rear of the upper and lower back decorative substrates 3452 through the plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452. In other words, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 and the back upper and rear decorative board 3452 becomes reflected light, and the back upper front decorative board 3422 and the back upper and rear decorative board The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, passes through the transparent part of the back box 3010, and further illuminates the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen brightly.

Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 306 and 307, but will be described below. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back front left decoration 3713 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 is provided on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the effect display On the right side of the display area of the device 1600, a back front right decoration 3813 of a back front right decoration unit 3810 is provided. More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are decorated with designs such as characters, items, logos, etc. in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the non-transparent parts and transparent parts are decorated with designs such as characters, items, logos, etc. It consists of a photosensitive lens part. Note that the "translucent lens part" is a part that has a lens cut shape that bends light, making the light-emitting decoration more dazzling when viewed from the front.

A back front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back front left decorative body 3713. The back front left decorative board 3714 causes the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens part of the back front left decorative body 3713. The lens portion of the decoration body 3713 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, there is a possibility that the front side of the back front left decorative board 3714 may be visible from the player side through the lens part of the back front left decorative body 3713, especially when the LED is not emitting light. There is. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 with a coating film made of white solder resist, the lens part can be seen from the player's side even if the lens part of the back front left decorative body 3713 is passed through. It is possible to keep the color to be recognizable as white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front side of the back front left decorative board 3714 being visible.

In addition, side view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (the surface facing the front side facing the player). The side view type LED is capable of reflecting light on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 and emitting light toward the front of the back front left decorative board 3714 (towards the player). Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated onto the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 located in the front, and the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 can be brightly decorated with light.

Further, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 can be brightly decorated with light.

In the above, the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided with a side view type LED facing leftward so that light is irradiated toward the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. That is, on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714, among the side surfaces of the back box 3010, the left side of the back box 3010 that is closer to the back back decorative board 3114 is located, and the direction of the side view type LED is is provided facing the left side of the back box 3010. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is irradiated toward the left side of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. becomes. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 310, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is emitted from the light emitting area near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be seen brightly.

The back front right decorative body 3813 has the same configuration as the back front left decorative body 3713, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted to the back front right decorative board 3814. It is configured so that the light is irradiated toward the right side of the back box 3010 located on the right side of the back box 3010. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 311, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted through the transparent portion of the light emitting area L3 on the right side of the back box 3010 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. The surrounding area can be seen brightly.

Next, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described above in detail, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, the back lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 of the back lower middle performance unit 3300 is provided at the center of the lower side of the display area of the performance display device 1600. More specifically, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeric decorations formed in a relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface, rotating 60 degrees clockwise around the center. They are arranged on the circumference for each angle and are composed of a non-light-transmitting part and a light-transmitting lens part. Note that the "translucent lens part" is a part having a lens cut shape that bends light, making the light-emitting decoration more dazzling when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 306, a lower back middle first decorative board 3322 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 causes the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to emit light, so that the light directed forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens part of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the back The lens portion of the lower middle rotary decorative body 3310 can be decorated with light emission.

As shown in FIG. 307, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is capable of moving from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In addition, when the back-lower-middle rotating decorative body 3310 has moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

Furthermore, top-view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back. The top view type LED can emit light toward the front (player side) of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated onto the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 located in the front, and the lens portion of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be brightly decorated with light.

In addition, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 excluding the plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. There is. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated onto the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be brightly decorated with light. In addition, the front side of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 is visible from the player side through the lens part of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, especially when the LED is not emitting light. There is a possibility that it can be done. In this regard, by providing a coating film made of white solder resist on the front surface of the first decorative board 3322 on the lower back side, it is possible to pass through the lens part of the lower side rotating decorative body 3310 from the player's side. It is possible to limit the lens portion to a recognizable white color, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back being visible.

Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the rear surface (the rear surface facing the back of the game machine) of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 in the lower part thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 are top view type LEDs, and are located at the rear of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 (on the side opposite to the player side). In other words, it is possible to irradiate light toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 306, when the lower back middle rotary decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower back middle first decorative board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. However, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located behind the back box 3010, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back is Although the light is irradiated to brighten the vicinity of the light emitting region L4 near the transparent part of the back box 3010, it is blocked by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, in a state where the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, in a state where the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle first decorative board 3322 are controlled not to emit light.

From the above, the light-emitting decorations that brighten the back and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1 include the back top and front rotating decorations 3410, the back top and front decorations 3421, and the back top and back decorations at the top of the game board 5. 3451, a rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5, and three back front right decorative bodies are provided on the right side of the game board 5. A unit 3810 is provided. As shown in FIG. 309, the light-emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. , the light-emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the rear. , as shown in FIG. 311, the light-emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is visible near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind. The light emitting region L3 of is made brighter.

(About the advantages of providing a light emitting area on the back side of a pachinko machine)
Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on one side of the island equipment, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on both sides of the island equipment. Sometimes it happens. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the interior thereof is closed and dark. By the way, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, wiring that connects the control members, a supply mechanism for the game balls B used in the game, etc. are arranged. , maintenance may be required for a predetermined location on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, if a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on both sides of the island equipment, the pachinko machines 1 on one side of the island equipment can be opened and the pachinko machines 1 on the other side can be opened. Although it is possible to perform maintenance on the back side, since the inside of the island equipment is dark, the visibility of the area to be maintained is poor, making it difficult to visually inspect the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 with one side as an axis, and for the pachinko machine 1 that requires maintenance, the main body frame 4 It is possible to maintain the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by opening it. However, when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light from the hall) is transmitted to a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be seen brightly, it is difficult for light from the outside (light from the hall) to reach the part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. Cannot be seen brightly. In other words, when the area to be maintained is close to the open shaft of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the area to be maintained is poor, making it difficult to visually inspect the back side of the Pachinko machine 1.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes, the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes. It is designed to brighten the screen for the purpose of Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light-emitting decoration body is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the back side and sides, and the light illuminates the transparent part of the back box 3010. By configuring it to pass through, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light emitting area L2 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the side side of the pachinko machine 1 are brightened. be able to. For example, the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 can pass through the transparent parts of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553, and further illuminate the rear of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, the inside is closed and dark, but by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island equipment can be brightened. Thereby, when performing maintenance on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the location to be maintained becomes good, and the efficiency of visual inspection of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in this example, the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 serve both of the roles of illuminating the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and the role of illuminating the back side and side sides of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to do so. For example, it is possible to brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1 by providing an LED that can emit light toward the rear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but if an LED dedicated to maintenance is provided, This increases the number of parts and increases costs. In this regard, the multiple light-emitting decorations that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also have the role of brightening the back and side sides of the pachinko machine 1, thereby preventing an increase in costs. can.

In addition, in this example, the light from the LEDs of the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 is configured to brighten the back side and side side of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is undesirable for the LED light source to be viewed directly during maintenance on the back side or side side, the light from the LED that brightens the back side or side side of the pachinko machine 1 should be It is configured to provide indirect light that cannot be viewed directly. For example, the back top front decoration body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top front decoration board 3422, and is capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, a cover body is provided on the LED so that the light source of the LED is not viewed directly when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 is viewed). The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. Thereby, when maintaining the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 from interfering with the work.

(About the characteristic configuration of the luminescent decorative body of this example)
The light-emitting decoration of this example is designed in various ways not only to brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for decorative purposes, but also to brighten the back and side surfaces for purposes other than decoration. Although the details have been described above, specific configurations include the following configurations.

First, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114, and is capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. When the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back top-front rotating decorative body 3410, the back top-front decorative body 3421, and the back top-back decorative body 3451 are located in front of the back-back movable decorative body 3110. There is. Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back and rear decorative board 3114 is reflected by the back top and front rotating decorations 3410, the back top and front decorations 3421, and the back top and back decorations 3451. , the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located behind the back rear decorative board 3114 are indirectly irradiated. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 illuminates the rear movable decorative body 3110, and in addition to brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, 3010 to brighten the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, which can serve to brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The rear movable decorative body 3110 of this example emits light by receiving light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear rear decorative board 3114. The upper and front rotating decorations 3410, the back and upper front decorations 3421, and the back and upper and rear decorations 3451 have larger areas than the back and rear movable decorations 3110. From this, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back and rear decorative board 3114 is reflected on the back top and front rotating decorations 3410, the back top and front decorations 3421, and the back top and back decorations 3451, In addition, it will be spread over a wider area than the rear movable decorative body 3110. Thereby, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

In the above, a coating film made of white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the back top front decoration body 3421 and the back surface of the back top and rear decoration body 3451. A coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back and rear decorative board 3114 is reflected at a high reflectance on the rear surface of the back top and front decoration body 3421 and the back surface of the back top and rear decoration body 3451. As a result, the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located behind the back rear decorative board 3114 are efficiently irradiated. Thereby, the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

Next, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114, and is capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as explained as another example, by providing a plurality of holes penetrating the rear decorative board 3114 in the front-rear direction, the reflected light of the light irradiated toward the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented. , it becomes possible to pass through a plurality of holes and go to the rear of the rear decorative board 3114. In other words, a portion of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 is reflected by the decorative body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the rear decorative board 3114. The light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and tank rail 553 located at the rear (top and rear) of the back rear decorative board 3114. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114 illuminates the rear movable decorative body 3110, and in addition to brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, The light passes through the transparent portion 3010 and brightens the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, which serves to brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, the back top front decoration body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back top front decoration board 3422, and is capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. There is. Behind the back top and front decoration body 3421, there is a part where the back top and back rotation decoration body 3440, the back top and back rotation decoration body 3451, and the back top and rear movable decoration body 3110 are located in the retracted position, and a back top and back rotation decoration body. 3440, a back upper and rear decorative body 3451, and a portion where the back movable decorative body 3110 is not located. Among these, the parts where the back top/back rotating decorative body 3440, the back top/back decorative body 3451, and the back/back movable decorative body 3110 are located in the retracted position are mounted on the rear surface of the back top/front decorative board 3422. The light from the plurality of LEDs is reflected on the rear up-and-down rotating decorative body 3440 and the back up-and-back decorative body 3451 located at the rear, as well as the back movable decorative body 3110, and is directed toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. It will be irradiated with On the other hand, the back box 3010 located behind the back top front decorative board 3422 and the tank rail are located in areas where the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back top and rear decorative body 3451, and the back movable decorative body 3110 are not located. 553 will be directly irradiated. As a result, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 not only serves to brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also passes through the back box 3010 and illuminates the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 at the rear can be made brighter, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be made brighter.

Next, as light-emitting decorations, a back top and front rotating decoration 3410, a back top and front decoration 3421, a back top and back decoration 3451, and a back and back movable decoration 3110 are provided at the top of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back and front left decoration units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back and front right decoration units 3810 are provided. It is being The light-emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 , when viewing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light-emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is illuminated. , when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from behind, the light-emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and multiple areas on the back and side sides of the pachinko machine 1 are illuminated. It allows it to be bright.

In addition, the light-emitting decoration includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, and an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. is provided. For LEDs that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, the light is reflected by a member located further forward, and is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. The back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the indirect light. On the other hand, with regard to an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by its direct light. At this time, an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 is used on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and an area that can be brightened by indirect light and a It may be configured to use an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the screen, and to separate an area that can be brightened by direct light from the LED.

In the above, the area that can be brightened by direct light from the LED may be the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where a worker such as a hall manager can work. Are suitable. As will be described in detail later, examples of parts on which an operator such as a hall manager can work include the operating section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640. The operating section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640 are provided at positions where they can receive direct light from the LEDs, so that the display can be seen brighter than when receiving direct light from the LEDs than when receiving indirect light. can. As a result, when working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. By making the operating section 640a and the detachable section brightly visible, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, and the back cover 640 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 4, making inspection work easier for the hall manager. It is possible to facilitate the

In addition, when direct light from an LED is irradiated to a part where a worker such as a hall manager can work, as mentioned above, the board on which such an LED is mounted is It is preferable that the mounting surface is dark colored (for example, green or black). If the mounting surface is dark-colored, light will not be easily reflected on the dark-colored mounting surface, so the direct light from the LED will not be diffused very much, and the direct light from the LED will be able to pinpoint the area that is irradiated. It becomes possible to irradiate light. As a result, if, for example, the operation section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640 are provided at a position where they can receive direct light from the LED, the direct light from the LED can be received in a pinpoint manner. Due to the difference in brightness from the surrounding area, the operation section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640 can be clearly seen.

(About adjusting the light intensity of the light emitting area provided on the back side of the pachinko machine)
Note that there are various hall environments in which island equipment is provided, and for example, the interior of the island equipment may be configured to be separately brightened regardless of the brightness on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, although the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration that brightens the back side, there is a possibility that there is no need to brighten the back side. In addition, if the inside of the island facility is dark, but there are only a few pachinko machines installed on the island facility that have a bright back side, you can simply brighten the back side with the normal brightness. In this case, there is a possibility that the interior of the island facility cannot be sufficiently brightened. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to adjust the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment will be described below.

The light-emitting decoration of this example includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, and an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. , but for these LEDs, the light intensity can be adjusted in stages by performing a light intensity adjustment operation using the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300. allows it to be adjusted. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of light intensity of the LED from 1 (lowest light level) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light level), and the larger the level, the more the LED light level increases. . In other words, the LED of the light-emitting decoration is configured so that the light is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, making the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter, but the amount of light from the LED can be adjusted. This allows the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to be changed. For example, if the inside of the island facility is a bright hall environment, a worker such as a hall manager can darken the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by adjusting the light intensity of the LED to decrease. If the inside of the island facility is a dark hall environment, an operator such as a hall manager may brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by adjusting the amount of light from the LED to increase. In this way, by making it possible to adjust the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment, when performing maintenance on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the area that needs maintenance is improved, The efficiency of visual inspection of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, by making the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decoration body adjustable, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed, and the degree of freedom in viewing the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, if the light intensity of the LEDs of all the light-emitting decorations provided on the front side of the game board 5 is adjusted at once, for example, if the light intensity of the LEDs of all the light-emitting decorations is reduced, If the front side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes too dark, the original effect of using the light-emitting decoration (attracting customers, etc.) may be lost while the operator is working during the hall operation. In addition, if the worker reduces the light intensity of the LED of the light-emitting decoration and neglects to return the light intensity of the LED after completing the work, the original effect of using the light-emitting decoration may be reduced. There is a possibility that it will be stored away. In this regard, in this example, among the light-emitting decorations for decorative purposes provided on the front side of the game board 5, the back top and front rotating decorations 3410, the back top and front decorations 3421, the back top and back decorations 3451, and the back As for the rear movable decorative body 3110, etc., as mentioned above, they also have the role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so the light intensity of the LED is adjusted by the light intensity adjustment operation. Among the light-emitting decorations provided on the sides for decorative purposes, the light-emitting decorations having the first big winning hole decoration board 2420 for lighting the first big winning hole 2005 are placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is considered a light-emitting decoration that does not have the role of brightening up the room, but focuses on the purpose of attracting customers, and is not subject to adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation. That is, among the light-emitting decorations for decorative purposes, the light-emitting decorations that have the role of brightening at least the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are subject to adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation. As a result, even if the light intensity of the LED of the light-emitting decoration is adjusted and, for example, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, the light-emitting decoration provided on the front side of the game board 5 for the purpose of attracting customers will remain bright. The purpose of attracting customers can be maintained without the darkness becoming too dark.

The light amount adjustment operation of the LED of the light-emitting decoration can be performed both in a standby state in which the symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and in a variable display in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in this example, the player can perform a light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300, but in addition to this, On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a separate operation section may be provided that allows the hall manager to adjust the amount of light. At this time, the object of adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation section for the hall manager is the same as the object of adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation section for the player. Note that even if the light intensity is adjusted to the lowest level, the light intensity cannot be reduced to zero and the LEDs cannot be completely turned off. Regarding the light amount adjustment operation, when the light amount is adjusted to the lowest light amount, the light amount may be set to zero and the LED may be completely turned off.

(Regarding the visibility of the wiring installed on the side of the pachinko machine)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various boards and wiring for connecting the various boards are provided. Since the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured to brighten the back side using light from the light-emitting decoration provided on the game board 5, the wiring exposed on the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is Although it is easy to check the status from the outside, it is difficult to check the status from the outside of the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, an example will be described below in which it is possible to easily check the status from the outside of the wiring that is not exposed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, three back-front left decoration units 3710 are provided on the left side of the game board 5 as light-emitting decorations that brighten the back and side sides of the pachinko machine 1, and on the right side of the game board 5, Three back and front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. As shown in FIG. 310, the light-emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 is visible from the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from behind. The light-emitting decoration body provided on the right side of the game board 5 brightens the nearby light-emitting area L2, and as shown in FIG. The light emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side surface of the screen is brightened.

Further, on the back side of the back box 3010, a performance drive board 1720 is attached that drives the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. It is being The effect driving board 1720 is electrically connected to the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, etc. through a plurality of wirings, and these wirings are connected along the left side and right side inside the back box 3010. I arranged it like this. In this regard, the light-emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 illuminates the light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear. Since the light is irradiated to make it brighter, the state of the wiring along the right side inside the back box 3010 can be clearly seen. Similarly, the light-emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 illuminates the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from behind. Since the light is irradiated to make it brighter, the state of the wiring along the left side inside the back box 3010 can be clearly seen. For example, if the decorative board, drive motor, drive solenoid, etc. stop working properly, the wiring along the left or right side inside the back box 3010 may be disconnected or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating the left side and right side with light, the visibility of the wiring from the side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes better, making it easier to check the condition of the wiring. Efficiency can be improved.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 which is the part of the side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the opening axis of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear. On the left side of the pachinko machine 1, light from the outside (light from the hall) easily reaches and can be seen brightly, whereas on the right side of the pachinko machine 1, which is the part closest to the open axis of the main body frame 4. It is difficult for light from outside (light from the hole) to reach the area, making it difficult to see it brightly. For this reason, if a conventional gaming machine does not have a structure that brightens the back side or side side, the wiring is placed near the right side of the pachinko machine 1, which is the part close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. It has become particularly difficult to check the condition of the wiring when it becomes necessary to do so. In this regard, in this example, light is irradiated to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010, and the wiring that needs to be placed near the right side of the pachinko machine 1 is , are arranged along the right side inside the back box 3010. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the wiring along the right side inside the back box 3010 cannot be visually recognized.

In addition, in this example, the wiring that connects the effect drive board 1720, the decoration board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, etc. is listed as the wiring that runs along the side inside the back box 3010, but other than that, For example, it may be a wiring connected to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and, for example, outputs information regarding the game to the outside (hall computer) via an external terminal board 558 that is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring. It is said that At this time, if the wiring that connects the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558 is tampered with, information regarding the game cannot be properly grasped externally (hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 This creates a situation where it is easy to commit fraud. In other words, among the various types of wiring, the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be highly important in playing the game. In this regard, by irradiating the side of the pachinko machine 1 with light to make it brighter, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 becomes better, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to such wiring. It can be prevented.

Further, regarding the wiring along the left side and the right side inside the back box 3010, a plurality of wires are bundled by a hook portion integrally formed in the back box 3010 or a bundling wire. These hook portions and binding wires are made of a translucent material and are provided at positions where they can be seen through the transparent portions on the left and right sides of the back box 3010. As a result, light is irradiated to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the hooks and the bundled wires themselves are made brighter, making it possible to clearly see the condition of the wires. Also, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1). In addition, the brightness of such a light emitting region can be prevented from decreasing without hindering the progress of light.

In addition, regarding the wiring that runs along the left side and right side inside the back box 3010, multiple wires are arranged so that the transparent parts on the left and right sides of the back box 3010 are not blocked by the multiple wires. Wiring lines are provided vertically on the left side and right side of the back box 3010 so as to be overlapped or bundled. For example, if a plurality of wirings are provided parallel to the left side and right side of the back box 3010, the transparent parts on the left and right sides of the back box 3010 will be blocked, and the left side of the back box 3010 will be blocked. Although it becomes difficult to maintain the brightness of the light-emitting region L2 near the transparent part of the face and the light-emitting region L3 near the transparent part of the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1), By providing a plurality of wiring lines so as not to block the transparent portions on the left and right sides, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

(Regarding changes in the visibility of the light emitting area when the state changes)
In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island equipment and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment Even if an abnormality occurs, it is difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 where the abnormality has occurred cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, an example in which the state of the Pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back side of the Pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as light-emitting decorations, a back top-front rotating decoration 3410, a back top-front decoration 3421, a back top-back decoration 3451, and a back-back movable decoration 3110 are provided on the upper part of the game board 5. On the left side of the game board 5, three back and front left decoration units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back and front right decoration units 3810 are provided. In addition, if any abnormality occurs with these light-emitting decorations, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations, and the game cannot be played, the light-emitting decorations will be removed until the abnormality is resolved. The LEDs installed on the body are controlled to blink. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1), as a light emitting area that can be brightened by a light emitting decoration ), and a light-emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1) is provided, and the LEDs provided on the light-emitting decoration are controlled to blink. At this time, these light-emitting areas were made to blink. As a result, when multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island equipment, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment can be When an abnormality occurs, the light-emitting area that can be brightened by the light-emitting decorations of other pachinko machines 1 flashes, making it possible to recognize the occurrence of an abnormality through the inside of the island equipment. Become. In other words, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, abnormalities in other pachinko machines 1 in the same island equipment can be detected early through the inside of the island equipment, and as a result, It is possible to prevent fraud against other pachinko machines 1.

In addition, regarding the LED of the light-emitting decoration, the light amount can be adjusted in stages by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the presentation operation section 301 in the presentation operation unit 300. making it possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of light intensity of the LED from 1 (lowest light level) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light level), and the larger the level, the more the LED light level increases. . As described above in detail, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by making the amount of light of the LED of the light-emitting decoration adjustable. However, if the LED of the light-emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to blink with a controlled light intensity when some abnormality occurs, such as when fraud due to magnets or vibrations is detected, When the adjusted light amount is darkened, the occurrence of an abnormality may not be noticed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Also, if the operator reduces the light intensity of the LED of the light-emitting decoration and neglects to return the light intensity of the LED after completing the work, the light intensity of the LED is low and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 However, there were times when I did not notice that an abnormality had occurred. In this regard, in this example, during a period in which the game cannot be played due to an abnormality such as detection of fraud due to magnets or vibrations, the light intensity of the LED of the light emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. Adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to blink at a predetermined light intensity (for example, at stage 5, which is the upper limit of the light intensity that can be adjusted under normal conditions). Thereby, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area that can be made brighter by the light emitting decoration does not become too dark when the light emitting area blinks. In other words, even if viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the occurrence of an abnormality will not go unnoticed, and the abnormality can be reliably discovered, thereby preventing fraud from being committed against other pachinko machines 1. It can be prevented.

Similarly, regarding the light-emitting decoration, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LED provided on the light-emitting decoration is controlled to blink until the main body frame 4 is closed. I have to. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1), as a light emitting area that can be brightened by a light emitting decoration ), and a light-emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1) is provided, and the LEDs provided on the light-emitting decoration are controlled to blink. At this time, these light-emitting areas were made to blink. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on an island facility and the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, the main body of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility Even if a fraudster illegally opens the frame 4, it is difficult to notice the illegal opening because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that was illegally opened cannot be seen. However, in this example, when a fraudster illegally opens the main body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment, it is possible to brighten it by the light-emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1. By flashing the light-emitting area, it becomes possible to recognize an act of unauthorized opening through the inside of the island facility. In other words, even if the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and is undergoing maintenance, the act of illegally opening it to other pachinko machines 1 on the same island equipment through the inside of the island equipment can be detected at an early stage. This makes it possible to prevent fraud against other pachinko machines 1.

Regarding the light-emitting decoration, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, not only the period until the main body frame 4 is closed, but also the period after a certain period of time has elapsed after the main body frame 4 is closed. Until then, the blinking control of the LED provided in the light-emitting decoration may be continued. As a result, when a fraudster illegally opens the body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment, even if the opening is for a short time, the luminous decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 will be displayed. The light-emitting region, which can be made brighter by the body, continues to blink for a certain period of time, making it possible to prevent as much as possible the situation of overlooking illegal opening through the inside of the island equipment.

In addition, regarding the light-emitting decoration, when it transitions to a standby state where no symbol fluctuation is performed, the light intensity of the LED provided on the light-emitting decoration is reduced from the start of the symbol fluctuation until the end of the standby state. We are trying to control the decrease. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1), as a light emitting area that can be brightened by a light emitting decoration. ), and a light emitting area L3 near the transparent area on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1) is provided to reduce the amount of light from the LED provided on the light emitting decoration. It was decided that these light-emitting regions would become dark when controlled. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on an island facility and the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance, the front side of the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility Since the side cannot be visually recognized, it is difficult to grasp whether the pachinko machine 1 is in game mode or not. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island equipment enter the standby state, the light-emitting areas that can be brightened by the light-emitting decorations of the other pachinko machines 1 are darkened. , it becomes possible to know whether a game is being played or not through the inside of the island equipment. In other words, even if the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is in progress, it is possible to know whether other pachinko machines 1 on the same island equipment are playing through the inside of the island equipment. , it is possible to judge whether it is necessary to strengthen monitoring to prevent fraud during the standby state.

(Regarding changes in the visibility of the light-emitting area during operation of the light-emitting decoration)
In addition, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, since the front side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be seen, the movable It has become difficult to see if the body is working properly. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to check whether the movable body operates normally even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

In this example, as light-emitting decorations that brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1, on the upper part of the game board 5, a back top-front rotating decoration 3410, a back top-front decoration 3421, a back top-back rotating decoration 3440, and a back top A rear decoration body 3451 and a rear movable decoration body 3110 are provided, and the light-emitting decoration body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. are doing. Of these, the back up/down rotating decoration 3440, the back up/back decoration 3451, and the back movable decoration 3110 are capable of moving from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined performance condition is met. . When the rear up-and-back rotating decorative body 3440, the back up-and-back decorative body 3451, and the back movable decorative body 3110 have moved to their appearance positions, the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorations is transmitted through the transparent tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 near the site was prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1. In particular, the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back top and rear decorative body 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. On the other hand, regarding the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back top and front decorative board 3422, the back top and back rotating decoration 3440, the back top and back decoration 3451, and the back and rear movable decoration 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, and the light is not blocked, but reaches the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. That is, when a light-emitting decoration that can be operated among the plurality of light-emitting decorations is in operation, the brightness in the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 changes, and it is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The visual recognition mode of the light emitting region L1 can be changed. Thereby, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to understand whether the light-emitting decoration is operating by changing the visibility of the light-emitting region L1.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initial operation of the light-emitting decorations that can be operated among the plurality of light-emitting decorations is performed. Specifically, the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper and rear decorative body 3451, and the back movable decorative body 3110 move from the retracted position to the appearance position, and then move from the appearance position to the retracted position. An operation is repeatedly performed to confirm that these light-emitting decorations can be moved to the appearance position. When powering on the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch on the power supply board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Sometimes, it is not possible to directly visually check from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 whether the initial operation of the light-emitting decoration is being performed normally, making it particularly difficult to check the operation. In this regard, in this example, the brightness of the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 is changed as the light emitting decoration moves, so that even when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 By visually observing changes in the visual appearance of the light-emitting decoration, it is possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light-emitting decoration is being performed normally. As a result, although the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visible when the power switch is operated, the visibility of the light emitting area L1 changes from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 when the initial operation of the light emitting decoration is performed. It is only necessary to check whether or not the light-emitting decoration is in operation, and the efficiency of visual inspection of the initial operation of the light-emitting decoration can be improved.

Note that when a light-emitting decoration that can be operated among the plurality of light-emitting decorations is in operation, the brightness in the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is configured to change. It is preferable to configure the light-emitting decorative body so that the change in brightness is large between the state in which the light-emitting decoration is in the retracted position and the state in which it is in the emerging position. For example, an LED that emits light toward the light emitting area L1 is mounted on the rear surface of the back top front decorative board 3422, but the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440 located at the rear of the back top front decorative board 3422 When the back upper and rear decorative body 3451 and the back movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back upper and front decorative board 3422 may be controlled to turn off. The configuration may be such that the LED itself is not mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative board 3422. In such a configuration, when the back top/rear rotating decorative body 3440 and back top/back decorative body 3451 located behind the back top/front decorative board 3422 or the back/back movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position, the back top The light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative board 3422 does not reach the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting region L1 can be reduced. As a result, there is a large change in brightness in the light emitting area L1 between the state in which the light emitting decoration is in the retracted position and the state in which it is in the appearance position, and it can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that the light emitting decoration is operating. You can easily understand what is going on.

(About light from the back side of the production display device)
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured to brighten the back side of the game board 5 by using light from the light-emitting decoration provided on the game board 5. Regarding the area behind the device 1600, the light from the LED of the light-emitting decoration is blocked by the effect display device 1600, and it is possible that the area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that you want to brighten cannot be brightened just by using the light-emitting decoration. There is sex. For example, in the area behind the effect display device 1600, if a region where the hall manager needs to work is dark, it becomes difficult to work on that region. Therefore, an example will be described below in which it is possible to brighten a predetermined area even in the area behind the effect display device 1600 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

First, the effect display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIG. 312. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an opening provided on the back side of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 312, the effect display device 1600 includes a box-shaped box 1611 (metal frame) having openings at the front and rear, and is provided so as to close the front opening of the box 1611, and displays a predetermined image. a transparent flat light guide plate 1613 that is provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612 and that can irradiate light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612; and a transparent flat light guide plate 1613 that is provided below the light guide plate 1613. , a light emitting board 1615 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the light guide plate 1613 are mounted; It includes a metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) that can block light from the light plate 1613 to the rear. Although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel drive board that drives a liquid crystal panel 1612.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 can irradiate light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting board 1615. Further, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light guide plate 1615 and emit surface light from the front side of the light guide plate 1613, and can be positioned in front of the light guide plate 1613. It is possible to irradiate light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated onto the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

Further, the light emitting board 1615 has a coating film made of white solder resist on the surface excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounted components. The coating film made of white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently irradiated onto the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

Furthermore, a connector 1615a for electrically connecting to the effect drive board 1720 is mounted on the top surface of the light emitting board 1615. Note that the connector 1615a is an opaque member. The connector 1615a mounted on the top surface of the light emitting board 1615 has a terminal surface facing backward, and can be connected to the wiring side connector where the wiring from the effect drive board 1720 is bundled, thereby connecting the light emitting board 1615 and the effect. It can be electrically connected to the drive board 1720. Thereby, the effect driving board 1720 can control whether or not the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 are lit, brightness adjustment, and the like.

The light guide plate 1613 is configured so that the front side of the light guide plate 1613 receives light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the light guide board 1615 and emits strong surface light. In addition, the light guide plate 1613 is configured to emit weak light from the rear and side surfaces as well. As described above, the light emitting board 1615 has a coating film made of white solder resist on the surface excluding the plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface and other mounted components, so it is a conductive material. The light emission becomes stronger not only on the front side of the light plate 1613 but also on the rear side and side faces of the light guide plate 1613.

The back panel 1614 is configured to block light from the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from a plurality of LEDs and blocks the light from the light guide plate 1613 to the rear. A plurality of openings through which the openings can be passed are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. As a result, from the plurality of openings, light from the rear side and side surface side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted toward the rear (backward of the production display device 1600). Is possible.

Specifically, when viewed from the rear of the production display device 1600, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at the lower left of the back panel 1614, and the two openings B are provided on the right side of the back panel 1614, slightly toward the center. The opening C was provided on the right side along the right edge of the back panel 1614, and the opening D was provided on the upper side along the upper edge of the back panel 1614.

First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. Further, the opening A is one size larger than the connector 1615a. Thereby, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 can be visually recognized through the opening A. Since the opening A is illuminated with light from the rear and side surfaces of the light guide plate 1613, which receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light, the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a is illuminated. It can be visually recognized. As a result, the connector 1615a mounted on the top surface of the light emitting board 1615 needs to be connected to the connector 1615a on the wiring side where the wiring from the effect driving board 1720 is bundled, but the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a By making the wiring bright and visible, it is possible to easily check whether the wiring side is properly connected to the connector, and the inspection work for the hall manager can be facilitated.

Incidentally, the light emitting board 1615 is provided with a plurality of LEDs, but while the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 is visible from the opening A, none of the plurality of LEDs are visible. It is configured in such a way that it is impossible. In other words, even if the LED closest to the opening A among the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting board 1615 is not provided at a position that is visible from the opening A. For example, if light from some of the plurality of LEDs is directly irradiated through the opening A, when working on the connector 1615a mounted on the top surface of the light emitting board 1615, Direct light from the LED enters the eyes of the worker, making it difficult to perform the task. On the other hand, since the light from the plurality of LEDs is only indirectly irradiated through the opening A, it becomes difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the top surface of the light emitting board 1615. This can be prevented. Note that the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are similarly configured so that none of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting board 1615 are visible from the openings B to D.

The openings B of the back panel 1614 are vertically spaced apart from each other and are provided side by side on the right side of the back panel 1614 at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C when viewed from the rear of the performance display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, A back cover 640 is provided to cover. The back cover 640 can be opened and closed about the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. On the right side of the back cover 640, two operating sections 640a are provided vertically apart from each other so that the operator can operate them, while the main body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operating sections 640a. Two detachable parts are provided at positions where the two operating parts 640a can be attached and detached, and by attaching and detaching the operating parts 640a to the detachable parts, the back cover 640 can be attached to and detached from the main body frame 4. can be opened and closed. Note that both the back cover 640 (the operating section 640a thereof) and the detachable section are transparent or semitransparent members.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the operation section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640 are provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (the rear of the effect display device 1600). ing. In other words, since the opening B is irradiated with light from the rear and side surfaces of the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light, the operating section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640 are illuminated. is located at a position where it can receive such light. Thereby, the operation section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640 can receive the light from the opening B, and make the light emitting region L6 near the operation section 640a and the detachment section of the back cover 640 bright and visible. When working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. By making the light-emitting area L6 near the attachment/detachment part bright and visible, the operator can easily confirm the object to be operated, and the back cover 640 can be easily attached and detached from the main body frame 4. inspection work can be facilitated.

Further, the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed about a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 located on the right side of the outer frame 2 when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. That is, the operation section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640 are provided at a position close to the opening axis of the main body frame 4. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side on a game island, and the inside of the game island is a closed space and is dark. When the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, light from the outside (light from the hall) reaches a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. However, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is difficult for light from the outside (hall light) to reach the part near the open axis of the main body frame 4, making it bright and visible. Can not do it. In this respect, the operation part 640a and the detachable part of the back cover 640 are located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 in a part close to the opening axis of the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. However, by receiving the light from the opening B, the light emitting area L6 near the operating section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640 can be seen brightly. I can do it.

The opening C of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is located at the rear of the opening C. A dispensing unit 560 is provided at the position. The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the board unit 620 side, but behind the opening C, a ball guiding unit 570, a dispensing device 580, and an upper full ball path unit of the dispensing unit 560 are provided. 600 is located. Note that at least the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full ball path unit 600 of the payout unit 560 are transparent members.

Since the opening C is irradiated with light from the rear and side surfaces of the light guide plate 1613 that receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light, the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560, The light emitting region L7 near the dispensing device 580 and the upper full bulb path unit 600 can be brightly recognized. As a result, in the payout unit 560, ball clogging may occur when guiding the game ball B downward from the tank rail 553, but by making the light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560 bright and visible, the game It is possible to easily check whether or not a ball is clogged in the path guiding ball B, and when a ball is clogged, it can be easily removed, making inspection by the hall manager easier. Work can be facilitated.

The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided on the upper side along the upper end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from the rear of the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces the front, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, A tank rail 553 is provided at the position. Note that the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent member and can transmit light with high transmittance. Since the opening D is illuminated with light from the rear and side surfaces of the light guide plate 1613, which receives light from a plurality of LEDs and emits light, the light emitting area near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is illuminated. L1 can be seen brightly.

As mentioned above in detail, the light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 will detect an abnormality when an abnormality occurs, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations, and the game cannot be played. Until the problem is resolved, the LEDs provided on the light-emitting decoration are controlled to blink. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine ), and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1) is provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decoration is controlled to flash. This causes these light-emitting areas to blink.

In addition, if an abnormality occurs such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations and the game cannot be played, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the outer frame 3 There are cases where it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 and perform maintenance on the members provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, in order to perform maintenance on various boards arranged inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 from the main body frame 4 by operating the operating section 640a of the back cover 640. In some cases, a ball jam occurs in the dispensing unit 560 and it is necessary to remove the ball jam. However, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LEDs provided on the light-emitting board 1615 of the performance display device 1600 are controlled to blink in the same way as the LEDs provided on the light-emitting decoration, which reduces maintenance costs. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the work target. In this regard, in this example, even if some abnormality occurs in the effect display device 1600, such as detecting fraud due to magnets or vibrations, and the game cannot be played, the effect display device 1600 The LED provided on the light emitting board 1615 is not controlled to blink, but is controlled to be lit all the time as in normal times. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the area around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 is used as a light emitting area that can be brightened by receiving light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the performance display device 1600. A light emitting area L5, a light emitting area L6 near the operation section 640a and the detachable section of the back cover 640, a light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560, and a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 are provided. By controlling the LEDs provided on the light emitting board 1615 of the display device 1660 to be lit at all times in the same way as in normal times, the visibility of these light emitting areas does not change. As a result, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LEDs installed in the light-emitting decoration are controlled to blink, but areas that require high maintenance are controlled to be lit at all times as usual. By providing a light-emitting region having a shape of 1, the visibility is good without changing, and the efficiency of maintenance work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 in the event of an abnormality can be improved.

(Regarding the visibility of the gap between the control boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (the back side of the back box 3010), various boards and wiring for connecting the various boards are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration that brightens the back side using the light emitting decoration provided on the game board 5 and the light from the opening of the back panel 1614 in the performance display device 1600. By configuring the entire area on the back side of Pachinko machine 1 to be bright, it will be easier for the hall manager to perform maintenance work in the island equipment, and at the same time it will be easier to perform maintenance work on the various boards installed on the back side of Pachinko machine 1. This makes it easier for fraudsters to commit fraud. Therefore, an example will be described below in which the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be bright, but the various boards provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are made difficult for cheaters to commit fraud. .

As shown in FIG. 309, the light-emitting decorations that brighten the back and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1 include a back top and front rotating decoration 3410, a back top and front rotation decoration 3421, a back top and back decoration at the top of the game board 5. A decorative body 3451 and a rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided. On the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3710 are provided. A decoration unit 3810 is provided. The light-emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decoration provided on the left side of the game board 5 , when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind, the light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light-emitting decoration provided on the right side of the game board 5 is illuminated. , when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from behind, the light emitting region L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened.

Furthermore, a characteristic configuration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes an opening in the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, an opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, an opening B is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614, slightly closer to the center, and an opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. An opening D is provided on the upper side of the back panel 1614. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the production display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, and the light from the opening B brightens the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. The light emitting area L6 near the part 640a and the detachable part 640a is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting area L7 near the dispensing unit 560, and the light from the opening D brightens the light emitting area L7 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 is made brighter. Note that the light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the production display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, but the main control Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, the light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, making it difficult to visually recognize the light emitting area L6 from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

Also, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 are installed on the back side of the back box 3010. A pilot lamp is provided on each of the performance driving board 1720 and the performance driving board 1720 at a position that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is a member that indicates whether each board is operating normally or not by the light emission mode of the LED. The light from the pilot lamp of the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light emitting area L8 near the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp of the effect drive board 1720 brightens the light emitting area L9 near the pilot lamp. However, the light from the pilot lamp of the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting region L10 near the pilot lamp. In other words, these configurations can also be cited as configurations that brighten the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The above-mentioned light emitting areas are located on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the drive board unit 1700, which are attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It is arranged around the control board group consisting of the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, except for the control board group attached to the rear side of the back box 3010, the light emitting area is configured to be bright. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island equipment, the inside thereof is closed and dark, but by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island equipment can be brightened.

On the other hand, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A light emitting area is not provided in the area where the control board group consisting of the display drive board 1720 and the effect driving board 1720 is provided. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the gaps between the control boards that make up the control board group (the gaps between the main control board 1310, the panel relay board 1710, and the effect drive board 1720, the gaps between the peripheral control board 1510, and the panel The gap between the relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 is configured to be dark. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring as well as to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. Such wiring is arranged in gaps between the control boards constituting the control board group. Among these, the main control board 1310 in particular controls the progress of the game, so if fraud is committed to the wiring connected to the main control board 1310, the fraudster will gain profits, etc. The problem is that an unfair situation arises. In this regard, by brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 but darkening the gaps between the control boards that make up the control board group, it becomes difficult to see the wiring placed in the gaps, and the main It is possible to prevent unauthorized access to wiring or the like connected to the control board 1310.

(Regarding visibility of the configuration of metal powder countermeasures)
Next, electrical trouble (short circuit ) will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 and 313. FIG. 313 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of a cross section taken along the line CC in FIG. 99(a), and shows an outline of the structure as a countermeasure against metal powder.

The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall as metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. Therefore, when the metal powder generated due to the wear of the game ball B becomes attached to the main guide portion 553a, the downstream flow of the game ball B is obstructed, and the game ball B is smoothly moved downstream. As a result, it becomes difficult to supply the game balls B, and the payout device 580 stops paying out the game balls B.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 309, in this example, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the main guide part 553a, so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide part 553a. has been done. Thereby, for example, metal powder generated due to wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide part 553a by naturally falling from the main guide part 553a to the outside via the notch 553aa, Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide part 553a, metal powder produced by wear of the game ball B adhering to the main guide part 553a falls from the main guide part 553a to the outside via the notch 553aa. This allows the metal powder to be removed from the main guiding part 553a, and a cotton swab can be inserted into the notch 553aa by an attendant such as a clerk at the game hall to remove metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guiding part 553a. The metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by performing the work of removing the metal powder.

By the way, the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game balls B falling from the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553. Then, an electrical trouble occurs, causing a malfunction or malfunction of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with ICs such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM, which will be described later, and the peripheral data ROM board, which will be described later, is equipped with ICs such as peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs becomes smaller, the pin spacing of the various connectors 1615a and special connectors 1615a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 becomes narrower, and as the number of connectors 1615a on the peripheral control board 1510 increases, the various connectors 1615a Since the distance between the connector 1615a and the special connector 1615a has become narrower, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail.

Firstly, as shown in FIG. The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the production display device 1600 attached to the rear side is shifted toward the rear (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). They are placed with a difference of the distance dimension).

As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side (from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side). It is formed into a step-like shape with multiple bends downward according to the direction of the building. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 313, a first eaves portion 551da is configured that extends to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 such that the lower end of this top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . Further, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end portion of the back cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa can be received and attached to the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a. There is. That is, the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a causes the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa to be transferred to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. The metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa is suppressed from entering into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the game This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above in detail, as shown in FIG. 309, in this example, as a light-emitting decoration that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a back top and front rotating decoration 3410 and a back top and front decoration are provided at the upper part of the game board 5. A body 3421, a back top and rear rotating decoration 3440, a back top and back decoration 3451, and a back movable decoration 3110 are provided, and the light emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is brightened. In other words, since the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorations is irradiated toward the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is transmitted to the tank rail 553. If the metal powder is attached to the main guiding part 553a of the pachinko machine 1, when the tank rail 553, which is a transparent member, is visually observed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the metal powder will appear like a black dot, and the visibility of the metal powder will be good. It has become a thing. As a result, it is possible to easily check whether metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the work of removing metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a can be efficiently performed. It can be carried out.

The light emitting region L1 also includes a first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below the main guide portion 553a. Note that the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, since the light from the LED of the light-emitting decoration provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is irradiated toward the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a in the light-emitting area L1, the cutout part 553aa is If the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the metal powder adheres to the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a located below, the transparent member is removed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1. When the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually observed, the metal powder stands out like a black dot, and the visibility of the metal powder is good. Thereby, it is possible to easily check whether metal powder is attached to the first eave part 551da of the top plate part 551a, and also regarding the work of removing metal powder from the first eave part 551da of the top plate part 551a. , can be done efficiently.

Regarding the above, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the closed pachinko machine 1 Since it is bright, by opening the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island equipment, the metal powder generated by the wear of the game balls B in the closed pachinko machine 1 can be transferred to the tank rail 553. It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the main guide portion 553a or the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. Note that the light from the LEDs of the back top-front rotating decorative body 3410, the back top-front rotating decorative body 3421, the back top-back rotating decorative body 3440, the back top-back decorative body 3451, and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 is emitted from the tank. Although the light is emitted toward the light emitting region L1 near the transparent part of the rail 553, it is undesirable for the LED light source to be viewed directly during maintenance on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The light from the LED, which is designed to brighten the area, is configured to be indirect light so that the light source of the LED cannot be viewed directly.

In addition, after confirming the adhesion of metal powder, when removing metal powder from the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the tank rail 553 at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 Light-emitting decorations that brighten the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part (back top-front rotating decoration 3410, back top-front rotation decoration 3421, back top-back rotation decoration 3440, back top-back decoration 3451, back movable) It is also conceivable that the light from the decorative body 3110) may interfere with the removal process. Therefore, if you open the main body frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 to confirm the adhesion of metal powder, and then open the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 from which you want to remove metal powder, the rear part of the pachinko machine 1 Light-emitting decorations that brighten the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 (back top and front rotating decorations 3410 and back top and front decorations 3421, back top and back rotation decorations 3440 and back top and back decorations 3451) , the rear movable decorative body 3110) may be turned off so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not illuminated. In addition, not only the light-emitting decoration that brightens the light-emitting area L1 but also other LED lights that may interfere with the work of removing metal powder may be turned off. This can prevent the light from the LED that illuminates the back side of the pachinko machine 1 from interfering with the work of removing metal powder.

However, depending on the hall environment, the hall itself may be dark, and when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1 such as removing metal powder, it may be preferable for the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to be bright. Therefore, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open, a light emitting decoration body (back upper front rotating decoration body 3410 and A light emission start switch may be provided that enables the LEDs of the back top and front decorations 3421, back top and rear rotating decorations 3440, back top and back decorations 3451, and back movable decorations 3110 to start emitting light. Such a light emission start switch is provided at a position where it can only be operated with the main body frame 4 open. As a result, when the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is open, the hall manager can freely control whether or not to start emitting light from the LED that brightens the back side of the pachinko machine 1, to suit the hall environment. be able to.

Further, the tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent material (polycarbonate resin, etc.), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed (balls jammed) inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so the interruption of the game due to ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in playing due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable presentation unit, etc., the status of the drive motor, gears, belts, and other transmission mechanisms can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4, and the above-mentioned components can be checked. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those obtained by using this method.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back cover 640 contacts the first eaves part 551da so as to cover at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 when assembled to the main body frame 4. Since the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa and adheres to the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a, When the metal powder falls from the first eave part 551da of the game board 5, the metal powder falls on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 falls toward the base body 1502, and the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the first eaves part 551da of the top plate part 551a falls on the cover of the peripheral control unit 1500. By suppressing entry into the body 1501, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to metal powder from the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the top plate part 551a of the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 are designed to prevent metal powder from the game balls B falling from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a. to prevent the game board 5 from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000). It functions as a canopy or cover. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder from the game ball B coming from the tank rail 553.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, the main eave portion 551da is provided through the notch portion 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the guiding part 553a can be received and attached to the first eaves part 551da, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding part 553a through the notch part 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa falls on the peripheral control unit. By suppressing entry into the cover body 1501 of the game ball B, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the example described above, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eave part 551da, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eave part The portion 551da may be arranged apart from the portion 551da. That is, the back cover 640 and the first eaves part 551da cooperate to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da does not matter as long as it suppresses the intrusion.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the gutter-shaped main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553, and a plurality of notches 553aa are formed on the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached production display device 1600 (on the rear side) is misaligned in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). Due to the arrangement where the peripheral control unit 1500 is not placed directly under the notch 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is It is effective as a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder.

Further, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later), while the upper side, left side, Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, it is assumed that metal powder from the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). This makes it difficult for the user to enter the cover body 1501 even when the user is using the cover body 1501.

Note that among the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, any one or a combination of ventilation holes is provided. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of the game ball B) does not fall toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. This makes it possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling onto various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. Note that the reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 Foreign matter generated by game ball B (for example, metal powder caused by wear of game ball B) falls and enters into the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring increases.

In addition, when the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the top surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function is supplemented by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on other surfaces or expanding the area of the ventilation holes 1501. You can. This can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 is in a substantially horizontal state. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa and adheres to the top surface of the cover body 1501, it is possible to keep this metal powder on the top surface of the cover body 1501. can. This can prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501. Note that part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined as long as the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation hole 1501az formed in the cover body 1501.

Further, the first eave member 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate portion 551a as a separate member (another structural component).

In addition, when the first eave section 551da of the top plate section 551a and/or the back cover 640 covers the upper part or rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, or when the gutter-shaped main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553 For example, when the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guiding part 553a and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged to be shifted in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of notches 553aa formed in the main guiding part 553a are If there is a low probability that the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside will go to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, a portion of the top surface of the cover body 1501 when attached to the pachinko machine 1 is Ventilation holes 1501az may be provided at the corners of the cover body 1501 (for example, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is mostly closed, but the ventilation holes 1501az are formed in a part thereof, etc.).

Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Compared to conventional pachinko machines, the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding part 553a to the outside through the notch part 553aa is suppressed from entering into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, when the cover body 1501 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 (for example, a corner of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed, but a part of the upper surface has ventilation holes 1501az). This technical idea also applies to a device in which ventilation holes 1501az are provided in the air conditioner (eg, a ventilator is formed).

Further, a plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The cover body 1501 also has seven connector holes along its lower side at positions corresponding to seven connectors and a volume adjustment switch, which will be described later, provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501. A volume adjustment hole is formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501, A volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from this volume adjustment hole. Furthermore, when a liquid crystal output board (described later) is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 allows air to flow from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, and a shield plate accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. 1540 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, and the above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed between the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, A gap formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed on the cover body 1501, and the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connectors formed on the cover body 1501. It will be taken in through the hole (the gap formed in the hole).

Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy metal powder of the game ball B is influenced by the air flow and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a high probability that the metal powder will be sucked in, and electrical troubles (short circuits) caused by the sucked metal powder may cause damage to various electronic components installed on various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501. This will cause problems (failures) to occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in order to prevent such electrical troubles (short circuits), a first eaves portion 551da is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, so that the game ball It can be configured to have a function as an eaves that prevents heavy powder such as metal powder B from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501. Note that a detailed description of the configuration of peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the main guide part 553a of the tank rail 553, so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide part 553a. However, a cutout, hole, or groove similar to the cutout 553aa may be formed in the ball path in which the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, the metal powder of the game ball B in the guiding passage 570a is removed from the guiding passage 570a. A cutout, hole, or groove that can be removed to the outside may be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570. A dispensing device 580, a board unit 620, etc. are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570. , a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc., and various boards are arranged therein. Therefore, if a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, the game ball will fall through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the metal powder B from adhering to various substrates arranged below the guiding unit 570. Therefore, an eave-like member may be formed to protrude rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580, and a notch portion formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 may be formed. , the position of the hole or the groove and the position of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be shifted, or it can be configured by adopting both. You can also do it. Further, an eave-like member is formed to protrude rearward along the upper sides of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, the position of the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be adjusted. The configuration can be made by shifting the configuration, or the configuration can be configured by adopting both.

[Dot matrix display]
Next, a description will be given of a board on which an LED, which is used as a display section having an important function, is mounted. In this example, the display section with important functions includes information related to the player's interests (for example, special lottery results, types of jackpots and small wins, whether or not there is a specific jackpot (probable jackpot, 15R jackpot, etc.), high probability Indicates whether status control is being executed or not, whether time saving control is being executed, etc.). In addition to the above, there are also displays that have important functions such as LEDs that display information related to the profits of players and gaming parlors, and boards that are equipped with LEDs that display important information related to the progress of the game. It is also possible to have a display section having the following.

As shown in FIG. 314, in this example, a dot matrix display 7000 as a display section having an important function is provided in place of the back effect unit 3400. Further, as shown in FIG. 315(A), the dot matrix display 7000 includes a case 7100 formed of a colored opaque (white in this example) resin that does not have light-transmitting properties, and a substrate 7200 provided inside the case 7100. , a plurality of LEDs 7001 arranged and mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the board 7200, a connector 7002 mounted on the back surface (rear surface: non-LED mounting surface) of the board 7200, and a connector 7002 attached to the front side of the case 7100. It has a film 7300. Note that the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and an LED bare chip enclosed in an LED package is directly mounted on the surface of the substrate 7200 (LED mounting surface). . In addition to white, the colored opaque resin may be black, gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, or the like.

Further, the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 are each divided into different systems, so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually and independently controlled to emit light. Thereby, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be displayed by causing a predetermined LED 7001 among the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 to emit light. In addition, a board on which an LED is mounted is provided to control light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating effects. Rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), the predetermined number ( Light emission is controlled for each group consisting of two or more LEDs, and by emitting light from multiple LEDs included in this group, a specific area of the light-emitting decoration (or the entire light-emitting decoration may be used). , or a part of it) is designed to emit surface light. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit light based on the lottery results of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Display symbols, shapes, etc.

In addition, a translucent film 7300 that is partially semi-transparent (in this example, has a cloudy frosted glass shape) is attached to the surface of the dot matrix display 7000 (the surface of a surface cover portion 7110 described later). The lighting state of the LED 7001 is made visible through the film 7300. Note that instead of attaching the film 7300 to the front side of the dot matrix display 7000, the film may be attached to the surface of another decorative member or printed on the surface of another decorative member, and dots may be attached to the rear of this decorative member. A matrix display 7000 may be arranged so that the lighting state of the LED 7001 can be visually recognized through another decorative member. Although the film 7300 may not be provided in front of the dot matrix display 7000, the light emitted from the LED 7001 can be made visible through the film 7300 so that the LED 7001, which is the light source, is not directly visible. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be caused to emit surface light individually by the film 7300, the light source can be made less noticeable when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light.

As mentioned above, in this example, the board on which the LED mounted on the light-emitting decoration body is mounted, which controls the light emission in relation to the fluctuating effect to emit light from a specific area of the light-emitting decoration body, is A white resist solution with the highest reflectivity is applied to increase the efficiency of reflection of emitted light at the front surface of the board (LED mounting surface) and improve brightness, creating a white coating film (solid white resist, white resist). A resist layer) is formed (white resist processing is performed). On the other hand, the substrate 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 that are provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 of this example and which cause a plurality of LEDs 7001 to emit light from each other is coated with a black resist liquid having the lowest reflectance to make it black. A coating film (solid black resist, black resist layer) is formed (black resist processing is performed). As a result, although the efficiency with which the light emitted by the dot matrix display 7000 is reflected on the front surface of the board 7200 (LED mounting surface) is reduced, the light emitted from the LED 7001 is emitted directly forward (in the irradiation direction of the LED, in the front direction of the board 7200). Interference between the light and the light reflected from the board 7200 and directed forward is suppressed, so that the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the board 7200 can be clearly seen. In this way, in this example, in order to increase the reflectance of the board on which the LEDs are mounted, a white resist treatment is normally applied to increase the brightness, but the light emission of the multiple LEDs is individually controlled independently. The board 7200 on which the LEDs 7001 of the dot matrix display 7000 are mounted, each having an important function, has a coating film of a different color from the other boards on which the LEDs are mounted. The role of the LED mounted on the board can be determined by the color of the coating film (resist) formed on the board. In other words, it is possible to easily determine whether the board is mounted with an LED having an important function or not.

In this way, in this example, a white board is used to improve the brightness of a light-emitting decoration, such as a board installed in a light-emitting decoration that controls the light emission of a plurality of LEDs for each group in connection with the above-mentioned variable effect. Regarding a substrate 7200 on which it is desired to clearly see the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted, such as a substrate 7200 provided in a dot matrix display 7000 that is subjected to resist processing and controls the light emission of a plurality of LEDs individually and independently. uses a black resist treatment, so the substrate installed on the light-emitting decoration increases the reflectance of the light irradiated by the mounted LED and suppresses the decrease in the brightness of the light-emitting decoration when the LED emits light. It is possible to improve the effect of the variable effect executed on the display device 1600. In addition, regarding the dot matrix display 7000, when the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light, reflection of light is suppressed to prevent interference between the light emitted from the LEDs 7001 directly forward and the light reflected from the substrate 7200 and emitted forward. Not only can this be suppressed, but also the light emission of each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be clearly seen by contrasting with the LED mounting surface on which the black coating film is formed. In addition, a substrate 7200 provided in a dot matrix display 7000 that is individually controlled to display important information related to the progress of the game (for example, special lottery results), and a predetermined number of LED units (groups of a predetermined number of LEDs) are used. The board provided on the light-emitting decoration is controlled to emit light (every time) and does not display important information related to the progress of the game (it may be displayed rarely), and the board is used for different purposes (i.e., displaying special lottery results and By changing the color of the LED mounting surface of the board (for example, to enhance the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600 (to improve the performance effect), etc.), the LED mounted on the defective board can be changed. This makes it easier to determine whether or not a light emitting means such as the above displays important information, and to determine the control unit of the LED (whether it is controlled for each predetermined number of LEDs or individually). If a malfunction occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game, it is possible to quickly respond to the problem, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Note that in the above example, the substrate 7200 provided in the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 is coated with a black resist liquid to form a black coating film, but the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 As long as the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 provided in the substrate 7100 can be clearly seen, the resist liquid is not limited to black, but a dark color such as purple, dark blue, or deep green can be used. Even if you apply a resist solution to form a dark coating film (solid dark color (purple, dark blue, deep green, etc.) resist, dark color (purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) resist layer) good. However, since the reflectance of a substrate on which a black coating film is formed by applying a black resist solution is lower than that of a substrate on which a dark coating film is formed by coating a dark-colored resist solution other than black, A substrate on which a black coating film is formed by applying a black resist liquid is better than a substrate on which a dark coating film is formed by applying a dark-colored resist liquid. Interference with the light reflected from 7200 and directed forward can be suppressed, and the light emitted from each LED 7001 can be clearly seen. Further, it is sufficient that the dark-colored coating film is formed on at least the surface of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is mounted (LED mounting surface), and the dark-colored coating film is formed on the back surface of the board 7200 on which the LED 7001 is not mounted (LED non-mounted surface). A coating film different from the coating film (for example, a light-colored coating film coated with a light-colored resist solution such as white) may be formed. Further, the color of the resist treatment may be the same for the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface of the board, or the color of the resist treatment may be different for the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface of the board. Furthermore, the coating film formed on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 is not limited to one coated with a resist solution (solid coating), but may also include insulating paint applied to the substrate 7200 (silk printing on a coating film of the resist solution). or it may be formed by silk printing (solid coating) on the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 (silk printing may be performed directly on the surface of the substrate 7200 without forming a coating film of resist liquid). good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 315(B), the case 7100 includes a front cover part 7110 on the front side of the board 7200 and a back cover part 7120 on the back side of the board 7200. The board 7200 is housed inside the case 7100 with the board 7200 sandwiched therebetween. In addition, the surface cover part 7110 that covers the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 (the front surface of the board 7200) has a predetermined thickness (approximately 5 mm in this example), and has a cylinder so as to correspond to each of the LEDs 7001 mounted on the board 7200. The board 7200 is brought into close contact with the surface cover part 7110 so that a shaped through part 7110a is formed, and only one LED (one LED element) is placed in this through part 7110a, and the board 7200 is held in this state. It is designed to be fixed (attached) to the front cover part 7110. As a result, the front surface (LED mounting surface) of the board 7200 is divided so that the plurality of LEDs 7001 mounted on the board 7200 are arranged in separate penetration parts 7110a, and the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 is divided. Since leakage to other penetration parts 7110a and the rear surface side of the board 7200 is suppressed, and interference of the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be suppressed, the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually transmitted to the penetration part 7110a. The light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be easily identified individually. For example, even if the first LED and the second LED of the plurality of LEDs 7001 emit light in different colors, the emitted light color of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be changed by suppressing the mixing of these colors. Since they can be individually identified, it is possible to prevent the information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 from being conveyed to the player as being different from the original information.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100, in addition to the plurality of LEDs 7001, there are also LEDs near each of the plurality of LEDs 7001, such as an area indicating the part number of the LED and the position where the LED is placed. Attributes (which may also include the shape of the LED, the size of the LED, the mounting direction of the LED, and the model of the LED) are displayed in white, which is easily noticeable against black (limited to white). First, it is silk-printed on a solid black resist using a bright color (for example, yellow) paint with high reflectance. In this example, the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 is divided so that the silk-printed notation part is included in the penetration part 7110a. Specifically, one LED is disposed in the through-hole 7110a, and an inscription printed on silkscreen near this one LED and indicating the part number of this LED, etc. ( The notation part may be arranged so that all of it fits within the penetration part 7110a, or a part of the notation part may be arranged so that it fits inside the penetration part 7110a). As a result, the reflectance of the area inside the penetration part 7110a (the area where one LED 7001 is arranged) on the substrate 7200 is increased by the marking part silk-printed with white paint with the highest reflectance and placed inside the penetration part 7110a. Since it is possible to further suppress a decrease in the brightness within the penetrating portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light, the light emitted by one LED 7001 can be clearly seen. Further, as described above, since the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 is coated with a solid black resist having the lowest reflectance, it is possible to maintain a low reflectance state in the area outside the penetration portion 7110a. Even if the light from the LED 7001 disposed inside the penetrating portion 7110a leaks out of the penetrating portion 7110a, this light can be prevented from being diffused. In this case, reduce the proportion of the notation occupying the area outside the through-hole 7110a on the board 7200 as much as possible (most of the inscription is within the through-hole 7110a, and a portion slightly protrudes outside the through-hole 7110a). The effect of preventing light diffusion can be further enhanced.

Note that the inscription may not be silk-printed on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100, and in this case, the effect of suppressing the decrease in brightness in the through portion 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light is weakened. However, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED 7001 disposed inside the penetrating portion 7110a from diffusing outside the penetrating portion 7110a. In this case, a marking part may be silk-printed on the non-LED mounting surface (back surface) on which the plurality of LEDs 7001 of the board 7200 are not mounted, so that the light from the LED 7001 disposed inside the through-hole 7110a is directed outside the through-hole 7110a. In addition to being able to prevent the light from spreading to other areas, it becomes easy to understand the attributes of the LED, such as the part number of the LED and the area indicating the position where the LED is placed.

In addition, the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) of the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 is white (not limited to white, but also bright colors with high reflectance (for example, The reflectance may be improved by changing the color to yellow). For example, as shown in FIG. 315(C), a resist layer 7200A is formed by applying a black resist liquid to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, and a region of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (through A silk-printed layer 7200B may be formed by painting (silk-printing) the inner area of the portion 7110a with white paint from above the resist layer 7200A, or as shown in FIG. 315(D), A resist layer 7200A is formed by applying a white resist solution to the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200, excluding the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (the area inside the penetration part 7110a) of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200. The silk-printed layer 7200B may be formed by applying black paint all over the resist layer 7200A (silk printing).

That is, in FIG. 315(C), a black resist layer 7200A is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200, and a white silk printing layer is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a. 7200B is formed. In addition, in FIG. 315(D), a black silk printing layer 7200B is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200, and a white resist layer is formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a. 7200A is formed. In this way, a black coating film (black resist layer 7200A, black silk printing layer 7200B) is formed around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200, and By forming a white coating film (white silk printing layer 7200B, white resist layer 7200A) in the area, the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a (one LED 7001 is arranged) on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200 is formed. Since the reflectance of the area inside the penetration part 7110a can be increased, when the LED 7001 emits light, the reduction in brightness inside the penetration part 7110a can be further suppressed, and the light emission by one LED 7001 can be clearly seen. Since it is possible to maintain a low reflectance state around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface of the board 7200, even if the light from the LED 7001 disposed inside the penetration part 7110a is reflected outside the penetration part 7110a. Even if the light leaks into the room, this light can be prevented from being diffused. In this case, the above-mentioned notation may not be silk-printed, or the notation may be silk-printed on the back surface of the board 7200 where the LED 7001 is not mounted (LED non-mounted surface), A marking portion is written on the black resist layer 7200A or the black silk printing layer 7200B formed around the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a on the surface using a bright color paint with high reflectance such as white or yellow. Silk printing may be performed, or a bright color with high reflectance such as yellow may be printed on the white resist layer 7200A or the white silk printing layer 7200B formed in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a on the LED mounting surface. The markings may be silk-printed using the following paint.

In addition, under the above-mentioned specific conditions, at least some of the LEDs provided in the door frame 3 are set to a higher brightness than normal (normal brightness: brightness that reflects the result of brightness adjustment by the player, Higher brightness than normal: Brightness higher than the brightness that reflects the result of brightness adjustment by the player, maximum brightness of the brightness range in which the player can adjust the brightness, higher brightness than the brightness range in which the brightness can be adjusted by the player ( Even when the player controls the light emission to a high brightness that cannot be set by adjusting the brightness, the plurality of LEDs 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 are controlled to emit light while maintaining the normal brightness. Since the light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 7001 can be individually identified, important information displayed on the dot matrix display 7000 can be recognized. In addition, under the above-mentioned specific conditions, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, the back The LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, the back bottom left of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200. Since some of the plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) provided on the game board 5, such as LEDs mounted on the decorative board 3203, are turned off, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 is reduced. This makes it easier to determine the light emitting states (displayed information) of the plurality of LEDs provided on the dot matrix display 7000. In addition, at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light with higher brightness than usual, and the decorations (movable decorations (movable decorations (back lower middle rotating decorations 3310) provided on the game board 5) , back top-rear rotating decorative body 3440, back back left rotating decorative body 3510, back right rotating decorative body 3610, and back movable decorative body 3110), back front left decorative body unit 3710, back top direction unit 3400, back front Light-emitting means provided in decorations that do not display important information (excluding the function display unit 1400 that displays important information) such as the right decoration unit 3810, the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, the back bottom left presentation unit 3200, etc. (LED) may be turned off, and the LEDs serving as the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display device 7000 may be controlled to emit light while maintaining the normal brightness ( For example, if you want to draw attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600 (such as when super reach or an error condition occurs), in this case, the brightness inside the glass frame 161 can be further reduced, so the dot matrix display This makes it easier to determine the light emitting states (displayed information) of the plurality of LEDs provided in the device 7000.

In addition, since all the light from the LED 7001 provided in the penetration part 7110a can be emitted from the front of the penetration part 7110a without leaking outside the penetration part 7110a, the brightness inside the penetration part 7110a is reduced. can be suppressed. Note that the substrate 7200 may be firmly attached to the front cover portion 7110 (difficult to remove, irreversible attachment state that cannot be removed without destroying at least part of the front cover portion 7110 or the substrate 7200 due to welding, etc.). As a result, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 can be protected by the surface cover portion 7110, thereby suppressing malfunction of the LED 7001 mounted on the substrate 7200 due to mischief or the like.

In addition, an opening is formed in a part of the back cover part 7120 that covers the back surface (rear surface) of the board 7200 on which the connector 7002 is mounted, to expose the connector 7002 that is mounted on the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the board 7200. has been done. Note that in order to fix the board 7200 to the front cover part 7110 in close contact with the front cover part 7110 so that only one LED is arranged in the penetration part 7110a as described above, the rear surface side of the board 7200 is The light leakage of the LED 7001 is suppressed, and the light of the LED 7001 is prevented from leaking from the opening formed in the back cover part 7120 that exposes the connector 7002.

As mentioned above, in this example, the light-emitting decoration body provided with the LEDs that control light emission in connection with the variable effect is formed of a translucent resin, and emits surface light by the light emitted from the LEDs. . On the other hand, the case 7100 of the dot matrix display 7000 is a colored opaque white that does not have translucency (it may be other than white as long as it is opaque and does not have translucency; for example, it may be black, dark blue, deep green, etc.) The light from the LED 7001 can be seen only from the penetration part 7110a, and the light from the LED 7001 cannot be seen from other parts of the case 7100. . In addition, the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered (welded) in close contact with each other without any gaps, so that light leakage from the joint between the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 is prevented. suppressed. In this way, the case 7100 that houses the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 that is individually controlled to display important information related to the progress of the game (for example, special lottery results) is made of a non-transparent resin. On the other hand, a light-emitting decorative body housing a board on which LEDs are mounted, which are controlled to emit light in units of a predetermined number of LEDs (for each group of a predetermined number of LEDs) and do not display important information related to the progress of the game. Since it is made of transparent resin, it is important to check whether the defective LED or other light emitting means displays important information, and whether it is controlled in units of LED control (i.e., whether it is controlled in units of a predetermined number of LEDs). It becomes possible to easily determine from the appearance whether the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game can be easily determined from the appearance, and it becomes possible to quickly respond if a malfunction occurs in the light emitting means that displays important information related to the progress of the game. It can prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the front cover part 7110 and the back cover part 7120 of the case 7100 are firmly adhered by welding or the like, so that the board 7200 cannot be taken out from inside the case 7100 without destroying at least a part of the case 7100. It has become. Further, as described above, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and after opening the main control board box 1320 by destroying one of the plurality of sealing mechanisms, the destroyed sealing mechanism The main control board box 1320 can be closed using one different sealing mechanism. On the other hand, the case 7100 of this example does not have such a sealing mechanism, and even once a part of the case 7100 is destroyed and the case 7100 is taken out, the case 7100 cannot be returned to its original state. There is. In this way, since the substrate 7200 is protected by being enclosed in the case 7100, which cannot be taken out (exposed) without destroying at least a portion of it, the LED 7001, which has an important function, is physically destroyed. can be suppressed. On the other hand, a light-emitting decoration body (back bottom middle rotation Decorative body 3310, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, back left rotating decorative body 3510, back right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top and front rotating decorative body 3421, The back front left decorative body 3713, the back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) are formed to be removable (reversible) by screwing, etc., so that the board can be taken out without destroying the light emitting decoration. There is. As a result, electronic components (such as LEDs) mounted on the board 7200 housed in the case 7100 that accommodates the board on which the LEDs displaying important information are mounted are difficult to be physically destroyed, and important information is The light-emitting decoration that houses the board on which the LED that does not display important information is mounted can be replaced immediately in the event that an electronic component (LED, etc.) malfunctions. .

Furthermore, in the dot matrix display 7000 of this example, the LED 7001 provided in the case 7100 has a preset constant brightness, and when the production operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, press operation section 303) is operated. However, the brightness cannot be adjusted. This makes it possible to keep the brightness of the LED 7001, which has an important function, constant, and it becomes possible to reliably convey important information such as information related to the player's interests. Note that the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information even under the above-mentioned specific conditions uses LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side of the door frame LEDs provided on the side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, as well as the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper center of the dish. (The LED provided on the decorative board 314 may also be included.) Similarly, the light emission may be controlled without turning off the light.

Specifically, a specific reach effect is executed in the display effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and as shown in FIG. When moving the middle decorative body unit 3320 from the lowered position to the raised position, when moving the back top and rear rotating decorative body 3440 to an appearance position lower than the back top front decorative body 3421, when moving the back left rotating decorative body 3510 to the back When moving the back-rear right rotation decorative body 3610 to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the front-left presentation unit 3700, the back-rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the left of the back-front-right presentation unit 3800. When moving to the appearance position, and when moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the rear drive motor 3126 to release the lock by the locking member 3134 and dropping the rear movable decorative body 3110 from the retracted position to the appearance position. , the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decoration unit 3710 (the LED arranged in the area A in FIG. (the LED placed in the area B in FIG. 301) and the LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 (the LED placed in the area C in FIG. 301). LED), the LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250 (the LED placed in the area D in FIG. 301), and the back bottom left decorative board of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200. 3203 (the LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 301) is turned off, but the dot matrix display 7000 may be continuously controlled to emit light without being turned off. . Thereby, even under specific conditions, important information such as information relating to the interests of the player can be displayed, and the player etc. will not be disadvantaged.

In this example, an error condition occurs, such as detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame release switch, not only when a specific reach effect is executed, but also when the back front The LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the left decoration unit 3710, the LED mounted on the back top front decoration board 3422 of the back upper direction unit 3400, the back front right decoration of the back front right decoration unit 3810. LED mounted on the board 3814, LED mounted on the back bottom right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right presentation unit 3250, LED mounted on the back bottom left decorative board 3203 of the back bottom left presentation unit 3200, movable LEDs provided on the decorative bodies (back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, back up and back rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and back movable decorative body 3110), Even when turning off at least some of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 such as the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3, The LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 is controlled to emit light without being turned off. As a result, when an error condition occurs, for example, at least some of the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and at least some of the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are turned off during normal operation. Notifies that an error condition has occurred (for example, door frame 3 is open) by controlling the light emission in a different error mode (for example, flashing light at higher brightness and for a shorter time than usual). Or, the effect display device 1600 displays a message to notify that an error has occurred (e.g., "An abnormality has occurred!"), or outputs an audio message indicating that an error has occurred (e.g., "The door is open."). .'', ``Please remove the ball.'', etc.), while controlling the light emission of the LED 7001 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 without turning it off, if a variable effect is being executed. It is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted, and by continuing to update the dot matrix display 7000 (fluctuating display), it is possible to prevent anxiety and distrust that the special lottery results will not be displayed. can.

Note that whether or not to turn off the dot matrix display 7000 may be changed depending on the type of error state (degree of urgency). When a vibration sensor (not shown) detects the vibration of the game board 5 continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (an act such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed) ), when a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input (when it is detected that the tray 202 is full of game balls B), a detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is input. is input (an error in which there is a low possibility that the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a, etc.), the dot matrix display 7000 is provided. By controlling the light emission of the LED 7001 without turning it off, the progress of the game is not interrupted, and errors that have a serious impact on the game (serious errors: when a radio wave irradiation is detected, when a magnet is detected, when a second When the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401 is input when the starting opening 2004 is not open, the first big winning opening sensor 2402 or the second big winning opening is activated when the starting opening 2004 is not open and the detection signal is input from the second starting opening sensor 2401. If a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2601 is input, which is likely to be an error that is likely to be caused by a goofing act, the dot matrix display 7000 can be controlled to turn off while the variable effect is being executed. Even if there is an error, the variable performance may be interrupted or terminated.This allows the control state of the dot matrix display 7000 to be varied depending on the degree of error, and does not cause any disadvantage to the player or the game parlor. You can choose not to give it.

In addition, when an error condition occurs, depending on the type of error condition, a display notifying that the error condition has occurred on the effect display device 1600 and an LED provided on the door frame 3 are displayed in the state at the time of error. Either one of the notification by controlling the light emission and the notification of the occurrence of an error state by audio output may be executed, or any combination of the two may be executed. You may also choose to execute all of them. For example, if a minor error that has a small effect on the game occurs, the performance display device 1600 will display a message notifying you of the error state, and the LED provided on the door frame 3 will emit light in the same manner as when the error occurs. A serious error that has a serious impact on the game occurs by either one or a combination of two of the following: notification by control and notification that an error condition has occurred by audio output. In this case, the effect display device 1600 displays a display to notify that an error has occurred, a notification is made by controlling the light emission of the LED provided in the door frame 3 in the manner at the time of an error, and an error is output by audio. It may also be possible to perform all of the above, including notification that a condition has occurred.

Furthermore, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is directly controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. As a result, compared to the case where the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs control based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems (such as displaying content different from the content originally displayed). , it is possible to avoid putting disadvantages on players and the like. Furthermore, as described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control routine processing approximately every 33.3 ms, whereas the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. In order to do this, the display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 are updated in a shorter cycle than when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. Even if a problem occurs and the dot matrix display 7000 displays content that is different from the original content, the display content can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) to the original display content. It can be changed and will not cause any disadvantage to players, etc. That is, the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information (high importance) outputs a control signal at a shorter cycle than the light emitting decoration that does not display important information (low importance), and the light emitting means ( Since the lighting mode of the LED (LED) is updated, even if a problem occurs with the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 (lighting mode of the LED 7001) that displays important information, it can be immediately changed to the normal display content. This light can prevent different content from being displayed and disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, if the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the dot matrix display 7000 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the There is a risk that a communication error will occur and a problem will occur in the information shown by the dot matrix display 7000 (emission state of the LED 7001), but in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the dot matrix display 7000, so the peripheral Compared to the case where the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510 controls the dot matrix display 7000, problems are less likely to occur in the information shown by the dot matrix display 7000 (emission state of the LED 7001), which is disadvantageous to the player. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the film 7300 is attached to the front cover portion 7110 of the case 7100 as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 315(A), the film 7300 is made of a translucent sheet, and the area around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a of the case 7100 is printed with opaque black (not limited to black). The area corresponding to 7110a is colored in a color (such as a dark color) that makes it easier to see the light emitting state, so that no light is transmitted. On the other hand, the area corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a is not printed in black, but is in a translucent state with light-transmitting properties, and emits light from the surface by the light emitted from the LED 7001. As a result, when the LED 7001 is made to emit light and the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a emits surface light, the area around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a appears dark like a shadow, and the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a appears dark. By contrasting the area with the surroundings of the area corresponding to the penetration part, it becomes easier to visually recognize the surface emission (emission state of the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200) in the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a, and the dot matrix display 7000 displays various information. By being able to clearly display characters, symbols, figures, etc., it is possible to reliably convey important information such as information related to the player's interests. Further, by providing a region that does not transmit light between each of the surface-emitting regions corresponding to the penetrating portions 7110a, it is possible to suppress interference of light emitted from the plurality of penetrating portions 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light, and Even if light of different colors is emitted from each of the penetration parts 7110a, it is possible to suppress the mixing of the emitted light of various colors and make the individual colors clearly visible. Since it is possible to identify each region corresponding to the penetrating portion 7110a that emits light from the surface as a separate light emitting region, various characters, symbols, figures, etc. can be clearly displayed. Note that, without providing the film 7300, at least the surface cover part 7110 of the case 7100 itself is formed of a dark-colored resin such as black to make it easier to see the light emitted from the through part 7110a when the LED 7001 emits light. In this case as well, the dot matrix display 7000 can clearly display various characters, symbols, figures, etc., so important information such as information related to the player's interests can be clearly displayed. I can tell you.

[Example of production using a dot matrix display]
Next, a presentation example using the above-mentioned dot matrix display 7000 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 314, the dot matrix display 7000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. It also displays important information related to the progress of the game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 316, when performing a variable effect on the effect display device 1600 based on a starting prize at the first starting port 2002 and a starting winning at the second starting port 2004, the dot matrix display Also at 7000, the display contents are updated (variably displayed). Then, a predetermined mode is displayed when a predetermined period of time (variable time) has elapsed since the start of updating the display contents on the dot matrix display 7000.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 317(A) and 317(B), information related to wins and losses, such as "jackpot" and "loss," is displayed as the variable time elapses. In this way, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is different from a light-emitting decoration etc., which is provided with a board on which LEDs are mounted and controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating effect, in that the dot matrix display 7000 is different from a light-emitting decoration, etc., which is provided with a board on which LEDs are mounted and which controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating effect. The second special lottery result) can be determined (at least, it is sufficient if it displays different contents depending on whether it is a jackpot or a loss). That is, it is possible to determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of a light-emitting decoration, etc., which is provided with a board on which an LED is mounted and controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned variable effect. Although it is said to be difficult, it is possible to determine the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000. It is considered possible. In addition, if some conditions are met (for example, when executing a jackpot confirmation effect that notifies you that a jackpot is confirmed before the special lottery result is derived), a board on which an LED is mounted is provided. The light emission may be controlled so that the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) can be determined from the light emission mode of the light-emitting decorative object, etc., which is controlled to emit light in connection with the above-mentioned variable effect. However, in the dot matrix display 7000, it is possible to always determine the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) from the light emission mode of the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200, not only under specific conditions. Even if a malfunction occurs in the light emitting mode of a light emitting decoration such as a light emitting decoration that is provided with a board on which an LED is mounted and controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned variable effect, the special lottery result (number Since the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result can be discriminated, the players etc. are not disadvantaged.

Further, the dot matrix display 7000 displays the jackpot type (15R jackpot, 5R jackpot, 2R jackpot) during the jackpot game state. Note that it may be possible to display a message to that effect when the time is short, or to display a message to that effect when the state is in a high probability state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game aiming at entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004 during time saving (low probability time saving state (also referred to as time saving state), high probability time saving state (also referred to as probability variable state)) (so-called "right-handed hitting") is now practiced. In addition, as mentioned above, the second starting port 2004 is opened more frequently when time is shortened, and the starting prize (first prize) is higher than in normal times (low probability non-time saving state (also referred to as normal state), high probability non-time saving state). Since it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the starting hole 2002 and the game ball to enter the second starting hole 2004, the situation is advantageous for the player. However, if the player does not play a game (so-called "right-handed hitting") in which the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 during a time saving period, this advantageous state cannot be enjoyed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when time is short, as shown in FIG. "Right hit →" is displayed as a notification. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to enjoy an advantageous state even though the time is short, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this way, the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is different from a light-emitting decoration, etc., which is provided with a board on which LEDs are mounted and controls light emission in connection with the above-mentioned fluctuating performance, and displays important information related to the game. It looks like this. Further, as described above, the LED mounting surface of the substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000 and on which the LEDs 7001 are mounted is treated with a resist of a different color from the substrate provided on the light emitting decoration etc. and on which the LEDs are mounted. Therefore, when the LED mounting surface of the LED is visually recognized, it can be easily determined from the color of the LED mounting surface whether or not the board is mounted with an LED for displaying important information related to a game.

In this example, the dot matrix display 7000 is provided inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, but it may be provided outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the areas inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and allows structures and movable objects to be provided to enhance decorativeness and presentation effects.

By the way, as mentioned above, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a payout base unit 550 that receives the game balls B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550 that pays the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side. A dispensing unit 560 for dispensing. Further, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A dispensing device 580 that dispenses game balls B one by one through the dispensing device 580, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the dispensing device 580 downward, and a door frame that directs the game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600. 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side (see FIG. 4).

In addition, the game balls B supplied to the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 are easily charged as they move downstream while rubbing against each other, and when electrostatic discharge occurs from the game balls B, nearby There is a possibility that a malfunction may occur in the light emitting means (LED etc.) arranged. As described above, in this example, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 directly controls the LED 7001 mounted on the board 7200 provided on the dot matrix display 7000 that displays important information related to the game, and displays the information every 4 ms. Since the content (lighting state of the LED 7001) is updated, even if a problem occurs in the display content of the dot matrix display 7000 due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, the display can be immediately updated to the correct content, and the game This is to ensure that no person or person is disadvantaged.

In this way, the area near the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 is susceptible to noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but in this example, the area near the payout base unit 550 and the payout unit 560 is By updating the display contents of the dot matrix display 7000 in a short period of time (4 ms), areas susceptible to noise, for example, a front view of the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The dot matrix display 7000 can be placed even in the upper left area or the lower left area when viewed from the front. That is, even if the dot matrix display 7000 of this example is placed in an area susceptible to noise, it can display without causing any disadvantage to the player.

According to the above embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means (light emitting decorations (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back top and rear rotating decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear right rotation decoration 3610, back movable decoration 3110, back top front rotation decoration 3410, back top front decoration 3421, back front left decoration 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.), LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board) 456, and the LED provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457, and may also include the LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate), dots. matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, effect display device 1600, etc.), and the plurality of light emitting means are divided into separate systems for each light emitting means and each light emitting means is individually controlled. 7000, function display unit 1400), and a second light emitting means (light emitting decoration body (back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, back upper and rear Rotating decoration body 3440, back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, back movable decoration body 3110, back top front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side decorative board 418 of the door frame, and the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame) , the LEDs provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and also include the LEDs provided on the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the plate center upper decorative board 314. )), in order to make the mounting surfaces of the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted and the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted different in color, the circuit board By looking at the color of the mounting surface of the board, it is possible to determine the control unit of the light emitting means mounted on the board. The circuit board to be mounted (the board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, the function display board provided in the function display unit 1400) and the other circuit boards (light-emitting decoration body (back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, back top and rear rotation decoration body 3310, back top and rear rotation Decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back a board mounted on the LED mounted on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the left side decorative board 402 of the door frame, the right side decorative board 418 of the door frame, and the center top of the door frame). The decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper center decorative board 314 may also be included. )) By making the mounting surfaces of and have different colors, it is easier to determine whether the malfunctioning light emitting means is an important light emitting means or not, and it is possible to quickly respond if a problem occurs in the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

Further, the first light emitting means emits light in a light emitting manner that makes it possible to distinguish the special lottery result, the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting manner that makes it difficult to distinguish the special lottery result, and the first light emitting means emits light in a light emitting manner that makes it difficult to distinguish the special lottery result, and the first light emitting means is mounted on a circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted. The mounting surface of the circuit board has a special color (black) that is different from the color (white) of the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted, so the light emitting means in which the defective light emitting means plays an important role It becomes easy to determine whether or not it is.

A first board case (case 7100 that accommodates the circuit board 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box that accommodates the function display board of the function display unit) that accommodates the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted; A second board case that accommodates the circuit board on which the means are mounted (upper left decoration 271 of the tray unit 200, upper right decoration 276 of the tray, upper center decoration 312a of the production operation unit 300, upper left side decoration 312a of the door frame left side unit 400) Door frame left side decoration body 404, door frame right side decoration body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decoration body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421 , Back front left decorative body 3713, Back front right decorative body 3813, Back bottom left rotation decoration 3201, Back bottom right rotation decoration 3251, Back bottom middle rotation decoration 3310, Back top front rotation decoration 3410, Back top front Decorative body 3421 etc.), and the first board case is formed of a non-transparent material (a case 7100 housing the board 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a function display unit). A first display part (through-hole 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole of the box housing the function display board) capable of determining the light emitting state of the first light-emitting means. The second board case has a second main body portion formed of a translucent material (a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper portion of the production operation unit 300). Decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404 of door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side decorative body 419 of door frame right side unit 410, door frame top decorative body 453 of door frame top unit 450, back top front Rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, back bottom left rotation decoration body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration body 3251, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310, 3410, back top front rotating decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, etc.), it can be determined whether the light emitting means is a control unit or a light emitting means that plays an important role depending on whether or not the board case is translucent. becomes easier.

The first board case becomes a state where the circuit board can be removed by destroying a part of the first board case, and the second board case becomes a state where the circuit board can be removed without destroying a part of the second board case. Since the circuit board cannot be removed without destroying a part of the first board case, it is possible to prevent the light emitting means, which plays an important role, from being physically destroyed. On the other hand, it is easy to physically replace light emitting means of low importance.

First light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotation decoration 3310, back top and rear rotation decoration 3440, back left rotation decoration 3510, back rear Right rotation decoration body 3610, rear movable decoration body 3110, back top and front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.). The LEDs provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top) The LED provided on the right decorative board 457 may also include the LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, and the upper center decorative board 314 of the plate), and the first light emitting means. The first circuit board to be mounted (light-emitting decorative body (back lower middle rotation decorative body 3310, back upper and rear rotation decorative body 3440, back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, back rear movable decoration body 3110 , back top and front rotation decoration body 3410, back top and front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.), a board on which the LEDs provided in the door frame 3 are mounted ( In this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the top left decorative board of the plate. 273, the upper right decorative board 278 of the plate, and the upper decorative board 314 of the center of the plate. , a function display unit 1400) and a second circuit board on which a second light emitting means is mounted (a board 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, a function display board provided in the function display unit 1400), A white coating film is formed on the mounting surface of the circuit board on which the first light emitting means is mounted, and a dark coating film is formed on the mounting surface of the second circuit board on which the second light emitting means is mounted. The reflectance of the circuit board increases, and a decrease in brightness when the first light emitting means emits light can be suppressed. In addition, since a dark-colored coating is formed on the second circuit board on which the second light-emitting means for individually controlling light emission is mounted, reflection is suppressed and the individual light emission can be clearly detected by contrasting with the mounting surface of the dark-colored coating. It can be visually recognized.

A suppressing member that suppresses interference between the colors of light emitted by each of the plurality of light emitting means of the second light emitting means (each light emitting means is divided into a cylindrical shape by the penetration part 7110a of the case 7100 and the LED insertion hole of the box housing the function display board). ), diffusion and interference of the emitted light colors are suppressed, making it easier to individually identify the emitted colors of the plurality of light emitting means.

The board case further includes a board case (a case 7100 that accommodates the board 7200 of the dot matrix display 7000, a box body that accommodates the function display board of the function display unit) that accommodates the second circuit board, and the board case has a plurality of light emitting means. There is a display part (through-hole 7110a of the case 7100, an LED insertion hole in the box housing the function display board) that allows you to determine the light emitting state, and a dark-colored display auxiliary part (the case 7100) that is formed around the display part. The film 7300 is opaque and black around the area corresponding to the penetrating part 7110a, and the black function display sticker is black around the transparent part. The light emitting state of the light can be easily determined.

A game board 5 on which games are played, a frame (door frame 3) provided with a game window (door window 101a) disposed in front of the game board 5 to make the game board 5 visible, and the frame. A plurality of frame side light emitting means provided on the body (door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457, which may also include the LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper center decorative board 314), and the LEDs installed on the game board and the game window. A plurality of board-side light-emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400, light-emitting decorations (back lower middle rotating decoration 3310, back upper rear rotation decoration 3440, back rear left rotation decoration 3510) , back-rear right rotation decoration body 3610, back-rear movable decoration body 3110, back top-front rotation decoration body 3410, back top-front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.). When a predetermined specific condition is met, the plurality of frame side light emitting means emit light with higher brightness than usual, and at least the specific board side light emitting means among the plurality of board side light emitting means is provided. The device (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) emits light while maintaining the normal brightness, and the specific board-side light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LED elements) and the light emitting elements A light-emitting board to be mounted (substrate 7200, function display board) and a partitioning member for partitioning each of the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted on the light-emitting board (penetrating portion 7110a of case 7100, LED of a box housing the function display board) Each light emitting means is divided into a cylindrical shape by the through hole for the frame. Even in a situation where the side light emitting means emits light with high brightness, it is easy to determine the light emitting state of a specific board side light emitting means.

When a specific condition is met, a predetermined number of board-side light-emitting means (light-emitting decorations (lower back Middle rotating decorative body 3310, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, back left rotating decorative body 3510, back right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top and front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), the brightness inside the game window can be reduced, and it is possible to This makes it easier to determine the light emitting state of the board side light emitting means.

The area around the area of the light emitting substrate that is divided by the partitioning means and where the light emitting elements are arranged (around the area corresponding to the penetration part 7110a of the substrate 7200, the area corresponding to the function display board) is colored with a dark color with low reflectance. Because a coating film is formed, it is possible to suppress the diffusion of light even if the light emitted from the light emitting element leaks outside the area divided by the partitioning member, and contrast with a dark-colored coating film. This will allow you to see it more clearly.

A first light-emitting means (light-emitting decoration body (back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310, back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440, back rear rotation left rotation decoration body) which receives a predetermined control signal and emits light in a light emission mode based on the received control signal. Decorative body 3510, back right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.) LEDs provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457. , which may also include LEDs provided on the upper left decorative board 273 of the plate, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper central decorative board 314 of the plate), which represent information of higher importance than the first light emitting means. and a second light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) to obtain control signals, and since control signals are output at different cycles between the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, when a malfunction occurs, In addition, it is possible to prevent both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means from emitting light in a light emitting manner different from the original light emitting manner.

A first light emission control means that outputs a control signal to the first light emission means (the part that controls the light emission of the light emitting decoration by the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510), and a second light emission control means that outputs a control signal to the second light emission means. (a portion for controlling the light emission of the dot matrix display 7000 and the function display unit 1400 by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310); Since a signal is output, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a problem in the information displayed by the second light emitting means.

The first light emitting control means controls the first light emitting means to emit light in a manner that makes it difficult to discern the special lottery result, and the second light emitting control means controls the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner that allows the special lottery result to be determined; By controlling the light emission in a manner that allows the results of the lottery process to be determined, the second light emitting means, which is more important than the first light emitting means, is controlled to emit light by outputting a control signal at a shorter cycle than the first light emitting means. , it is possible to prevent disadvantages from occurring in the information displayed by the second light emitting means and causing a disadvantage to the player.

A game control means (main control MPU of main control board 1310) that includes a first light emission control means and controls the progress of the game, and a second light emission control means that controls the performance based on commands from the game control means. The first light emitting means is controlled by the game control means, and the second light emitting means is controlled by the performance control means. The occurrence of can be reliably suppressed.

A game control means (main control MPU of the main control board 1310) that controls the progress of the game, and a plurality of light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, Function display unit 1400, light-emitting decorative body (back bottom middle rotating decorative body 3310, back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, back left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top LEDs provided on the front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713, back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame right side decorative board 418 , the LEDs provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457; ), and the plurality of light emitting means are mounted on different substrates depending on the purpose (performance purpose, notification purpose of game status or special display result), A first substrate (a substrate 7200 provided in the dot matrix display 7000, a function display substrate provided in the function display unit 1400) on which a light emitting means (dot matrix display 7000, function display unit 1400) used for the first purpose is mounted. ), and a light-emitting means (light-emitting decoration body (back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310, back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440, back rear left rotation decoration body 3510, back rear rotation decoration body) used for a second purpose different from the first purpose Right rotation decoration body 3610, rear movable decoration body 3110, back top and front rotation decoration body 3410, back top front decoration body 3421, back front left decoration body 3713, back front right decoration body 3813, etc.). The LEDs provided on the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, as well as the upper left decorative board of the plate. 273, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the second board (which may also include LEDs provided on the plate center upper decorative board 314) Rear rotating decorative body 3440, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, back movable decorative body 3110, back top front rotating decorative body 3410, back top front decorative body 3421, back front left decorative body 3713 , back front right decorative body 3813, etc.), a board for mounting the LED provided in the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame The top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, and may also include the top left decorative board 273, the top right decorative board 278, and the top center decorative board 314. . )) and the mounting surfaces are made to have different colors, so the reflectance of the light emitting means can be increased or decreased depending on the application. For example, by using a light color for a board that wants to increase reflectance and a dark color for a board that wants to suppress light diffusion, it is possible to prevent erroneous information from being conveyed to the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

The light emitting means mounted on the first board is used to enhance the presentation effect, and the light emitting means mounted on the second board is used to display information related to the lottery results. By forming a dark-colored coating film on the surface of the second decorative substrate that displays the information, it is possible to suppress light interference and to suppress notification of incorrect information.

A white coating film is formed on the surface of the first substrate, a dark coating film is formed on the surface of the second substrate, and the first substrate is provided with a light emitting means used to enhance the presentation effect. By forming a white coating film on the surface, the reflectance of the light emitting means can be increased, so that the brightness of the light emitting means mounted on the first substrate when emitting light can be increased, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. On the other hand, by forming a dark-colored coating film on the surface of the second substrate for displaying information related to the lottery results, it is possible to prevent the light emitted from each of the light emitting means from diffusing and interfering with each other. Each light emitting state becomes clear, and information related to lottery results can be prevented from being misunderstood and transmitted.

A first board includes a game board 5 in which a game area 5a in which game balls roll is formed on the front surface, and a rail member (outer rail 1001, inner rail 1002) that partitions the front surface of the game board 5. , is placed in the inner area of the rail member, and the second board is placed in the outer area of the rail member, and a white coating film is formed on the surface of the first decorative board, so that the inner area of the rail member attracts attention of the player. It is possible to enhance the performance effect by increasing the reflectance of light.

[Details of the main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 320 and the like. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses a main control board 1310 that controls game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 that can set gaming performance, and a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. A main control board box 1320 made of non-conductive resin is attached to the board holder 1200.

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when looking at the game board 5 from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 long in the left and right direction is on the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It is formed and arranged in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the top side, right side, and bottom side, and the remaining one-fifth area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner region where the upper and right sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 rotates the main body frame upper hinge part 310 and the main body frame lower hinge part 320 of the main body frame 4 on the same axis by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward centering on the left side when viewed from the front, the main body frame upper hinge portion 310 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 320 of the main body frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is the pivot side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the opposite right side of the main body frame 4 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, the back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 300 of the main body frame 4 in an openable/closable manner covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, as described above. It is something. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered by the back cover 640. Further, as described above, the right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front, and the left side when viewed from the front is attached to the rear right end of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. Since it is designed to be attached to the back cover attachment part 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment part 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600, the right side in front view becomes the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640. The left side in front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, while the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the main control board 1310 are painted solidly with green resist except for various land patterns. In contrast, the setting change board 1311's resist is white, which is a different color from the main control board 1310's resist, and the entire front (mounting surface) and back (soldering surface) of the setting board 1311 is white. It is painted solid with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, the point that a color different from that used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be explained. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are both boards housed in the main control board box 1320. The main control board 1310 is a board of high importance for crime prevention because it controls the progress of the game (controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc.) for game hall managers, game hall clerks, and other staff. There is a very high level of awareness about this. Therefore, there is no need to draw attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310, distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, the setting change board 1311 is a board that has a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1, that is, it can set the game performance, so although it is housed in the main control board box 1320, it is not important for crime prevention. There is extremely little awareness of the fact that it is an expensive board. Therefore, it is necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311, distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in this embodiment, green, which is generally used as a resist for boards, is used as the resist for the main control board 1310, and a white color, which is different from the color used as the resist for the main control board 1310, is used as the resist for the setting change board 1311. Adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 stands out compared to the main control board 1310, and in addition to the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311 also has high importance for crime prevention. This can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

Note that in the present embodiment described above, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but it is not possible to distinguish between the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. If possible, yellow, red, blue, transparent, etc. may be used.

In addition, in the present embodiment described above, a white color different from the green color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used as the resist of the setting change board 1311, but instead of the resist of the setting change board 1311, It may be printed in white to cover almost the entire front surface (mounting surface) and/or back surface (solder surface), or it may be printed in one of black, blue, yellow, and red as silk printing. May be printed.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 includes a non-conductive resin cover body and a non-conductive resin base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not any unauthorized modification has been made). or whether a fraudulent IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Note that the cover body is formed with a plurality of vent holes for heat dissipation that can release the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting hole sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting hole sensor 2401, a general winning hole sensor 3051, a first big winning hole sensor 2402, a second big winning hole. It is connected to the sensor 2601, the outlet sensor 3053, the first sub-outlet sensor 2403, the second sub-outlet sensor 3054, and the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm the setting values. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). (electrical wiring).The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (reduces) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a, and connects the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1311. ). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. Note that connector connections, which are inter-board connections, include connections that use normal connectors that do not have a floating mechanism, and connections that use special connectors that have a floating mechanism. A normal connector without a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug fit together by inserting the plug into the socket and pushing it in. When the socket and plug fit together, The structure is such that there is no movement in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed (for example, in the vertical direction). On the other hand, special connectors with a floating mechanism consist of a socket and a plug, and the socket and plug fit together by inserting and pushing the socket into the plug. When fitting, it is possible to absorb errors that occur during fitting (mating axis misalignment) by moving within a predetermined distance range in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed (e.g., up and down). It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as a connector connection between boards, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape, with the distance on one side being about one-fifth of the horizontal distance of the cover body of the main control board box 1320, and the upper side of the board 1311 is in the shape of a square. It is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side of the main control board 1310, and its lower side is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoint of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the vertical distance dimension, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311. It is located on the right side of , and at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at the center point where the vertical and horizontal center lines of the square setting change board 1311 intersect. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line in the left-right direction of the setting change board 1311 and closer to the connector MSCN. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. Further below, a base monitor 1310h is arranged, which is composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center toward the right side.

In this embodiment, the setting key is set at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the metal setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the metal setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 has been removed from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot when inserted into the outer frame 2. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the setting keys will not interfere with the members of other pachinko machines (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) installed in a row opposite to the island equipment of the game hall. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted to prevent damage.

By turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on, and this setting key ON signal is sent to the setting change board 1311. is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Procedure for changing setting values, procedure for confirming setting values]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633, and the setting display 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting value, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on. As a result, the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be satisfied, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch of the payout control board 633 is operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value should first check that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated while operating the press operation section of the RAM clear switch to power on the pachinko machine 1.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Open the setting key switch 1311a, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by setting the setting key switch 1311a. Next, while operating the press operation part of the RAM clear switch, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the Pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). 2) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from off to on.

When the person who changes the setting value presses the push operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. be done. Each time a person changing the settings of the set value presses the press operation part of the RAM clear switch, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current set value by 1 based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch. When the maximum value, set value 6, is reached, control is performed to return to the initial value, set value 1, increase the value by 1 again, and display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (in other words, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). OFF setting key Rotate the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotational position of the cylinder to turn it OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set values determined by changing the settings in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and changes the setting value from being displayed to hidden on the setting display 1310g. state, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from a lit state to an off state.

The person who changes the settings of the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. Complete the configuration change task.

When displaying the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on. As a result, the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied, that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is not operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the power to Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Open the main body frame 4 from the frame 2, then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the RAM clear switch press operation section.

A person who wants to check and display the currently set setting values must first check that the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the Pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Then, insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise. By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 without operating the push operation part of the RAM clear switch. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1310z remains off, and even if the person who wants to display the currently set setting value presses the RAM clear switch press operation section, this press operation will not be supported. The set value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

After completing the confirmation of the currently set values, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set values moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned on to the initial position, which is the original position. Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting values must remove the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. and complete the confirmation display of the currently set setting values.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are such that when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on. However, as mentioned above, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is When power is turned on to the machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a is opened. A setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the cylinder 1311ab, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned on, thereby turning on the setting key, and pressing the RAM clear switch. It is necessary that the part has not been manipulated. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions and the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are the conditions that apply when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). When the power is restored, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is moved clockwise. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on by turning it 60 degrees and turning it on, and the predetermined setting value change permission conditions include ``When the power is turned on to Pachinko machine 1 or when there is a power outage ( In contrast to the requirement that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch be operated when the power is restored after a momentary power outage (instantaneous power outage), predetermined setting value display permission is required. The condition is that ``the press operation part of the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power is turned on to Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage).'' The difference is that

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the distribution rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls that can be played is preset. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. (such as a small winning symbol determination table, a normal time transition determination table that defines the ratio of determination values for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and is used in various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. In addition, the various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays setting values, but also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own internal RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible), and an error message will be displayed to inform you of this. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[About production using contact/non-contact with the handle]
In this embodiment, as an effect using a handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182, an effect corresponding to a touch on the handle 182 or an effect when the handle 182 is not touched for a predetermined period of time is used. It performs performances according to what has passed. The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity that acts on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 182, etc., it detects the static electricity that acts on the player, and the handle unit 180 detects the static electricity that acts on the player's handle 182, etc. It detects contact with the object.

First, the signal path at the time of detection by the handle touch sensor 192 will be described with reference to FIG. 321. FIG. 321 is a diagram for explaining a signal path when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the signal.

The detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 via the handle rear relay board 106. Then, upon receiving the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing control unit 633b outputs the detection signal to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU performs the above-described firing permission signal setting process (step S113) and sets the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the firing of the game ball B is permitted. It makes it possible. In this process, when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input, it is possible to set the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, while when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input. If not, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the launch permission logic. That is, when the handle 182 is in contact, it is possible to output a firing permission signal to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633, while when the handle 182 is not in contact, the firing permission signal can be output to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633. A launch permission signal is not output toward 633b. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated during the period in which the firing permission signal is being received (the period in which the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact), the firing control unit 633b detects the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189. is accepted, the drive of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, and the game ball B can be hit. On the other hand, even if the player attempts to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the player may try to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a without touching the handle 182. Since this is a period in which contact by the player is not detected, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 182 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

However, when the main control MPU determines that the setting value change is not permitted or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, it is possible to set the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal. When it is determined that the value change is permitted or the set value is displayed for confirmation, the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic. In other words, even when the handle 182 is touched, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 while the setting value is being allowed to be changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. . Therefore, even if you try to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 while the setting value is being allowed to be changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball It is now impossible to type B.

In the above, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 while the setting value change is being permitted or while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. After the set value confirmation display is completed, it is possible to output a launch permission signal to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, but before the set value change permission or set value confirmation display is completed. If the user continues to touch the handle 182 from then until after the firing is completed, the firing permission signal is not outputted even after permission to change the set value or confirmation display of the set value is completed. In such a case, after permission to change the setting value or confirmation display of the setting value is completed, by releasing the hand from the handle 182 and touching it again, a firing permission signal can be output, and the handle 182 can be released. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a by rotating it.

Furthermore, as described above in detail, the main control MPU determines that, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected. When this occurs, it is possible to set the launch permission logic as the logic of the launch permission signal, and when the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (the value is 1), it is determined that fraud has been detected. Sometimes, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the launch permission logic. That is, when a fraudulent act is detected, a firing permission signal is not outputted to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Therefore, when fraudulent activity is detected, even if you try to drive the game ball B into the gaming area 5a by rotating the handle 182, the firing solenoid 542 will not be driven and you will not be able to drive the game ball B. ing.

The main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and when outputting the firing permission signal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, notifies the user that it is time to output the firing permission signal. A launch permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the handle 182 is in contact during the period in which it is receiving the launch permission command, and when it is not in contact with the handle 182 in the period in which it is not receiving the launch permission command. It is possible to understand that However, while the setting value is being allowed to be changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Since no firing permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the handle 182 is not in contact. Similarly, when fraud is detected, even when the handle 182 is touched, a firing permission signal is not output to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 Since the launch permission command is not output toward the target, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the handle 182 is not in contact with the handle 182.

Note that while the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 continues to be input, the firing permission command may continue to be output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU; When the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 switches from non-input to input, the launch permission command is output, and when the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 switches from input to non-input, the launch stop command is output. Good too. In such a case, the peripheral control MPU can determine that the handle 182 is in contact during the period from receiving the firing permission command to receiving the firing stop command.

Next, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the handle 182 is in contact, depending on whether or not a launch permission command is input, and performs an effect corresponding to the contact with the handle 182 or An effect is performed in response to a predetermined period of time elapsed without contact. Execution control of such effects will be explained with reference to FIG. 322. FIG. 322 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a firing permission command-related process executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

As shown in FIG. 322, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether a firing permission command has been received (step S1701). In the process of step S1701, if it is determined that the firing permission command has not been received, it is determined that the handle 182 is not in contact with the handle 182, and the non-contact time counter indicating the time of non-contact with the handle 182 is set. Count (add) (step S1702). This non-contact time counter increases the longer the firing permission command is not received, that is, the longer the handle 182 is not touched. The non-contact time counter is allowed to increase until the predetermined time continues, that is, until the predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time for the handle 182.

Following the process of step S1702, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the setting value change is permitted (step S1703). When permission to change the setting value starts, the change permission start command is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU, and when permission to change the setting value ends, the change permission is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. By outputting the end command, the peripheral control MPU can determine whether or not the setting value change is permitted.

In the process of step S1703, if it is determined that the setting value change is not permitted, it is determined whether or not the firing permission command has not been received for a predetermined period of time. It is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time (step S1704). At this time, if it is determined that the state in which the firing permission command has not been received has continued for a predetermined period of time, that is, the predetermined period of time has elapsed as the non-contact time with the handle 182, then the predetermined period of non-contact with the handle 182 has elapsed. As a corresponding performance, a demonstration performance in which the pachinko machine 1 is introduced is started and executed (step S1705). As a demonstration performance, for example, the performance of A→B→C is repeated using sounds, displays, and lamp lighting.

Note that the demonstration performance starts when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without contact with the handle 182, but the timing at which the predetermined period of time has elapsed is when the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, or when the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. If it is within a predetermined period from the end of the fluctuating display, the demonstration performance is not started, but after the predetermined period has elapsed from the end of the fluctuating display of symbols, the demonstration performance is started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the demonstration effect from being started while the player is temporarily away from the handle 182, such as during the fluctuating display of the symbols or within a predetermined period from the end of the fluctuating display of the symbols.

In addition, in the process of step S1703, if it is determined that the setting value change is permitted, a change permission effect is provided to notify that the setting value change is permitted. Start and execute (step S1706). The effects when the change is permitted include a voice repeating "Settings are being changed", a message saying "Settings are being changed!", and a lamp emitting light in the corresponding color while the setting value is being changed.

In the process of step S1703, even if it is determined that the setting value change is permitted, whether or not the state in which the launch permission command has not been received continues for a predetermined period of time is determined. It is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time (step S1707). At this time, if it is determined that the state in which the launch permission command has not been received continues for a predetermined period of time, that is, the predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time to the handle 182, the demonstration effect and the change permission effect are performed in parallel. However, by giving priority to the change permission effect over the demo effect and making it appear externally, the change permission effect will continue as the effect that can be recognized from the outside, and the demonstration effect will be A demonstration performance standby timer that measures a predetermined standby time is started to delay the appearance timing to the outside (step S1708). In addition, "giving priority to the change permission effect over the demo effect and making it appear externally" means that the demonstration effect is not recognized from the outside, and the demonstration effect execution program itself is the same as the change permission effect execution program. An example is to start internally in parallel, and more specifically, a layer of a demonstration effect image by a demonstration effect execution program, a layer of a change permission effect image by a change permission effect execution program, However, by making the layer of the effect image when change is allowed to be a layer on the front side than the layer of the demo effect image, only the effect image when change is allowed is the image displayed on the effect display device 1600. An example is being visually recognized.

In this way, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time for the handle 182 in a state where the setting value change is permitted, the change permission effect is prioritized over the demonstration effect, and the demonstration After the end of the state in which the effect is not executed but the setting value change is permitted, the change permission effect is ended, so it becomes possible to execute the demonstration effect. At this time, after the state where the setting value change is allowed ends, when executing the demonstration effect, it is assumed that the demonstration effect has progressed for the time of the demonstration effect standby timer, and the demonstration effect is executed from the middle of the demonstration effect. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1701, if it is determined that the firing permission command has been received, it is assumed that the handle 182 has been touched, and the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time with the handle 182 is counted. (Addition) Not done (step S1709). In other words, as long as the handle 182 is touched, the demonstration performance will not be performed. In addition, when switching from a state in which the launch permission command is not received to a state in which the launch permission command is received, the non-contact time counter that was counted in the state in which the launch permission command was not received is reset. There is.

Following the process of step S1709, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (step S1710). Furthermore, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, a variation start command is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol, a variation end command is output from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. By outputting this, the peripheral control MPU can grasp whether or not the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner.

Then, in the process of step S1710, if it is determined that the symbol is not displayed in a fluctuating state, when switching from the state in which the firing permission command is not received to the state in which the firing permission command is received. It is determined whether or not (step S1711). At this time, if it is determined that it is time to switch to the state in which the firing permission command is received, the game is started by switching to the state in which the handle 182 is in contact as an effect corresponding to the contact with the handle 182. A handle touch effect is started and executed to notify that the state has changed to a wet state (step S1712). The handle touch effect lasts for 1 to 2 seconds, and includes a voice saying ``You can start playing!'', a message display saying ``Start playing!'', and a lamp in a color that corresponds to the state in which the handle 182 is in contact. It is intended to emit light.

Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where change of setting values is permitted will be explained with reference to FIG. 323. FIG. 323 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while changing the setting values. In a state where such setting values are changed, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different from a state where the setting values are not changed.

As shown in FIG. 323, when changing the setting value, first check whether the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on or not. In some cases, it is necessary to shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1. If the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2, open the main body frame 4 (timing t1), then insert the metal setting key into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and move the setting key cylinder clockwise. By turning the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees and turning it on, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a while operating the RAM clear switch to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), the state becomes a state in which it is possible to change the settings (change permission state). . In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the setting value (setting value 1 to 6) each time the RAM clear switch, which operates as a function of the setting change button, is pressed, and then the setting key switch 1311a can be changed. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to its original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON, and then turning it OFF (timing t4). In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value can be changed. It becomes impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the player can play the game. It becomes possible to do this.

In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the firing permission logic is inverted as the logic of the firing permission signal that tells the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted. It is possible to set the firing stop logic (fire disallowance logic) to output the firing permission signal to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 regardless of whether the handle 182 is touched or not. do not have. In other words, in the change permission state, even if you try to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by contacting the handle 182 and rotating the handle 182, the firing solenoid 542 will not be driven and you will not be able to hit the game ball B. It is in a state where it is not possible to fire (a state in which it is impossible to launch). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, after the change permission state changes to the change non-change state, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is input when the handle 182 is touched, and a firing permission signal is input. The logic is set to firing permission logic, and a firing permission signal is output to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633. That is, in the unchangeable state, the player contacts the handle 182 and rotates the handle 182 to make it possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a (fireable state).

In addition, in the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the game ball B enters various winning holes such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the gate part 2003. In this case, the detection of the game ball B by the corresponding detection sensor is treated as invalid. Thereby, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 for some reason during the setting change work of the setting value, the game progress due to this can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, after the change permission state changes to the change disabled state, various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the big winning port 2005 are activated. When the game ball B enters the gate section 2003, the detection of the game ball B by the corresponding detection sensor is treated as valid.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol (first special symbol) on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 , second special symbol) cannot be displayed in a variable manner (non-variable state). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, after the change permission state changes to the change disabled state, it is possible to perform a variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. state (variable state).

Furthermore, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, strictly speaking, when the control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1, a count is made against the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182. (addition) starts. In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU sends a firing permission signal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Since there is no output and no firing permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that there is no contact with the handle 182, A non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182 is counted (added). However, in the change permission state, even if a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time for the handle 182, execution of the demonstration performance is delayed until the change permission state ends. In other words, the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, is a state in which the execution of the demonstration performance is on standby (demonstration performance standby state).

Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the change permission state shifts to the change non-change state. After the transition to the unchangeable state, the performance content of the demonstration performance is not executed for the time that the execution of the demonstration performance is delayed, but is executed from the middle of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time for the handle 182 after the transition to the unchangeable state, the demonstration effect is executed from that point on. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the state is changed from the change permission state to the change impossible state, and then the state is set in which the demonstration performance can be performed (demonstration performance executable state).

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU sends a firing permission signal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Since there is no output and no firing permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that it is when there is no contact with the handle 182. There is. In other words, the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, is a state in which it is impossible to execute the handle touch performance (a state in which it is impossible to execute the handle touch performance) even if the handle 182 is switched to the state in contact with the handle 182. ).

Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, after the state changes from the change permission state to the change impossible state, in the main control MPU, when the handle 182 is touched, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 It becomes possible to output a launch permission signal toward the peripheral control board 1510 and output a launch permission command toward the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, after the change permission state changes to the change disable state, the state changes to the state in which the handle 182 is in contact with the symbol while the symbol is not being displayed. When there is a handle touch effect, the state is set in which the handle touch effect can be executed (handle touch effect executable state).

As described above, if the state in which the launch permission command is not received continues for a predetermined period of time, that is, if the predetermined period of time without contact with the handle 182 has elapsed, the demonstration effect is started. As in the past, when a demonstration performance is started when the state in which no ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the symbol fluctuation display continues for a predetermined period of time, the handle 182 is operated. If the ball continues to not enter the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 even if the ball is in the middle (even if there is contact with the handle 182), a demonstration effect will start, which may irritate the player. The drawback was that it made it easier to use. In this regard, in this example, the demonstration effect is started when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time for the handle 182, but as long as the handle 182 is in contact, the game is not started. Since it is assumed that the player has an intention and the demonstration effect is not started, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming irritated.

Furthermore, while the setting value change is being permitted, the main control MPU does not output a firing permission signal to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Since no firing permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that there is no contact with the handle 182. In other words, while the setting value change is permitted, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that even when the handle 182 is touched, it is considered as a time when the handle 182 is not touched, and indicates the time when the handle 182 is not touched. Counting (adding) to the non-contact time counter. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time to the handle 182, including the time during which the setting value change is permitted, the demonstration effect is started. As a result, when the power is turned on, permission to change the set values is granted, and even if the hall manager changes the set values near the start of business, the demonstration performance will start before the start of business. be able to. For example, if the time during which setting value change is permitted is not included in the non-contact time for the handle 182, the start of the demonstration performance will be delayed by that time. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time to the handle 182 while the setting value change is permitted, the demonstration effect and the change permission effect are executed in parallel; It is possible to make the demonstration performance appear outside with priority given to it, and after the state in which change of setting values is permitted (after the end of the performance when change is permitted), the demonstration performance can be made to appear outside. . In other words, even if the predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 while the setting value change is being permitted, the demonstration production will not be performed until the setting value change permission ends. The external appearance timing is delayed. As a result, while the setting value change is permitted, the demonstration performance is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager from being hindered by the demonstration performance.

In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 while the setting value change is being permitted, the demonstration performance will be stopped until the setting value change permission ends. However, when executing the demonstration performance, it is assumed that the demonstration performance has progressed by the amount of time for which the execution of the demonstration performance has been delayed, and the demonstration performance is executed from the middle of the demonstration performance. For example, the demonstration performance is set to repeat the sequence A → B → C, but the time required to reach the middle of demo performance B until the state in which changes to the setting values are allowed ends. If the period has elapsed, the demonstration effect B will be executed from the middle after the state in which the setting value change is permitted ends. In addition, in the hall, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side on a game island, and before business starts, power is turned on to the plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed on the game island at the same time. Ru. In this regard, when the power is turned on, the setting value change is permitted for one pachinko machine 1, and even if the setting value is changed, the setting value change is permitted. After the completion of the demo performance, the demo performance can be executed with the same progress status as the demo performance being executed on other pachinko machines 1. As a result, the progress status of the demonstration performance for multiple pachinko machines 1 will not change after the hall starts operating, so just visually checking the demo performance will not allow the hall manager to change the settings before the opening of the hall. This makes it possible to maintain a fair gaming experience.

Furthermore, as a demonstration performance, the pachinko machine 1 is introduced using audio, displays, and lamp lighting. If a predetermined period of time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 while permission to change the setting value is being granted, the demonstration performance based on the demonstration performance will continue until the state in which the permission to change the setting value is ended. Sound, display, and lamp lighting are all disabled. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time for the handle 182 while the setting value change is being permitted, the demonstration production will not be performed until the setting value change permission ends. Based on this, only some of the audio, display, and lamp lighting may be omitted. For example, if only the display of the audio, display, and lamp lighting based on the demonstration effect is not performed until the state in which change of the setting value is permitted ends, the display based on the demonstration effect will not be performed. , will be executed after the state in which setting value change is permitted ends. With this arrangement, part of the demonstration effect is not started while the setting value change is permitted, so that it is possible to prevent the hall manager's setting change work from being hindered by the demonstration effect.

In addition, in this example, even when the set value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU controls the dispensing control board 633 regardless of whether or not the handle 182 is touched, in the same way as when changing the set value is being permitted. A launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b, and a launch permission command is not output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, even when the set value is displayed for confirmation, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that even if the handle 182 is touched, it is assumed that the handle 182 is not touched. , is counted (added) to a non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time to the handle 182. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time to the handle 182, including the time during which the set value confirmation display is being performed, a demonstration effect is executed. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 while the setting value is being displayed, the change permission effect is given priority over the demonstration effect, and the setting value is being displayed. It is possible to perform a demonstration performance after the completion of the program. In other words, even if the predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 while the setting value confirmation display is being displayed, the demonstration effect will not be displayed until the setting value confirmation display ends. I'm trying to delay execution. This eliminates the need to perform a demonstration performance even during the setting value confirmation display, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager's work of confirming the settings from being hindered by the demonstration performance.

As described above, in a state where the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, when the state is switched from the state in which the firing permission command is not received to the state in which the firing permission command is received, that is, when the handle 182 is touched. When there is a change to the state, a handle touch effect is executed. In other words, in a state where symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, even if the state is switched to a state in which the handle 182 is in contact, the handle touch effect is not performed. Thereby, the handle touch performance is not executed during the fluctuating display of the symbols, and it is possible to prevent the handle touch performance from obstructing the visual recognition of the fluctuating display of the symbols.

Further, while the setting value change is permitted, the main control MPU does not output a firing permission signal to the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 even when the handle 182 is touched. Since no firing permission command is output to the peripheral control MPU of the control board 1510, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that there is no contact with the handle 182. Therefore, while the setting value is being allowed to be changed, it is impossible to display a changing pattern, but even if the state is changed to a state in which the handle 182 is in contact, the handle touch effect cannot be executed. do not have. Thereby, the handle touch effect is not performed while the setting value change is permitted, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager's setting change work from being hindered by the handle touch effect.

Further, as handle touch effects, a voice saying "Game can start" is displayed, a message "Game start!" is displayed, and a lamp is emitted in a color corresponding to when the state of contact with the handle 182 is changed. If the handle 182 is switched to a state in which the handle 182 is in contact while the set value is being allowed to be changed, all of the sounds, displays, and lamp lighting based on the handle touch effect are not performed. On the other hand, if there is a change to the state in which the handle 182 is touched while the setting value change is being permitted, only some of the sounds, displays, and lamp lighting based on the handle touch effect are not performed. Good too. For example, among the sounds, displays, and lamp light emission based on the steering wheel touch effect, only the display may be suppressed, and the other sounds and lamp light emission may be performed. As a result, a part of the handle touch performance is not executed while the setting value change is permitted, so that it is possible to prevent the handle touch performance from interfering with the setting change work of the hall manager.

Further, while the setting value change is permitted, the main control MPU does not output a firing permission signal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633, and the firing is performed to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Although no command is output when permission is granted, it is possible to output a firing permission signal to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 after permission to change the set value or confirmation display of the set value is completed. This makes it possible to output a firing permission command to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, if the handle 182 is continuously touched from before to after the set value change permission ends, a firing permission signal is output even after the set value change permission ends. There is no command, and no command is output when the launch is permitted. Therefore, even if the handle 182 has been touched continuously since before the end of permission to change the setting value, the peripheral control MPU recognizes that the handle 182 is not touched. The handle touch effect is not executed. In such a case, after permission to change the set value or confirmation display of the set value is completed, release the handle 182 and touch it again to output the launch permission signal or the launch permission command. It is possible to perform handle touch effects.

In addition, in this example, even when the set value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU controls the dispensing control board 633 regardless of whether or not the handle 182 is touched, in the same way as when changing the set value is being permitted. A launch permission signal is not output to the launch control unit 633b, and a launch permission command is not output to the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, even while displaying confirmation of the set value, it is impossible to display fluctuations in the symbol, but in the same way as when changing the set value is permitted, the peripheral control MPU switches to a state in which the handle 182 is in contact. Even if there is, it is recognized as a non-contact time to the handle 182, and the handle touch effect is not executed. Thereby, the handle touch effect is not performed even during the setting value confirmation display, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager's confirmation display work from being hindered by the handle touch effect.

[About a modification of the timing to start counting the non-contact time to the handle]
In the above, while the setting value change is permitted, the peripheral control MPU counts ( addition). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time to the handle 182, including the time during which the setting value change is permitted, it is possible to start the demonstration effect. On the other hand, while the set value is being allowed to be changed, the peripheral control MPU counts against the non-contact time counter that indicates the non-contact time for the handle 182, regardless of whether the handle 182 is touched or not. (Addition) may not be performed, and counting (addition) to the non-contact time counter may be started at the end of permission to change the set value. In other words, the demonstration performance may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time to the handle 182, without including the time during which the setting value change is permitted. Such a modification will be explained with reference to FIG. 324. FIG. 324 is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 while changing the setting values.

First, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the peripheral control MPU sets a non-contact time period that indicates a non-contact time period to the handle 182, regardless of whether the handle 182 is touched or not. Counting (adding) to the counter is prohibited. In other words, the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, is a state in which it is impossible to start the demonstration performance (demonstration performance standby state).

Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the change permission state changes to the change disabled state, but at this timing, the non-contact time counter indicating the non-contact time on the handle 182 is Counting (addition) has started. If a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 after the transition to the unchangeable state, the demonstration performance is started from that time. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, after the change permission state changes to the change disabled state, the demonstration production is not performed until at least a predetermined time period has elapsed as a non-contact time with the handle 182. It is in a state of waiting for execution (demonstration production standby state).

Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, if the handle 182 is not touched for a predetermined period of time after the change permission state is changed to the change disabled state, the handle 182 is not touched. After a predetermined time has elapsed as the non-contact time, a demonstration performance is performed. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the change permission state changes to the change disabled state, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point, a state in which it is possible to execute the demonstration effect (demonstration It is in a state where the performance can be executed).

In this way, counting (addition) to the non-contact time counter that indicates the non-contact time to the handle 182 is prohibited while the set value change is permitted, and from the end of the set value change permission. , is counted (added) to a non-contact time counter. In other words, the demonstration performance is not performed until a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 starting from the end of permission to change the set value, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the demonstration performance is It is possible to execute. As a result, while the setting value change is permitted, the demonstration performance is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager from being hindered by the demonstration performance.

Further, as a demonstration effect, for example, the effect is set to repeat A → B → C, but a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 starting from the end of permission to change the set value. Since the demonstration performance will be executed later, when the demonstration performance is executed, it is possible to start from the first performance, the demonstration performance A. As a result, after the permission to change the set value is ended, the demonstration performance can be executed from the beginning, and it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to visually check the demonstration performance from the beginning.

Furthermore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the state changes from the change permission state to the change no-change state. , the effect operation unit 301, the back top and back rotating decorative body 3440, the back top and back decorative body 3451, etc.) have started their initial operations. Each of these presentation members is a member that can move between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the presentation member, the presentation member moves from the initial position (retracted position) to the operation position (appearance position). ), we will confirm that it is working properly and perform accurate positioning so that the presentation components are waiting in their initial positions. After the initial operation of the performance member is completed, a performance using the performance member can be executed. For example, if a variation pattern (variation pattern command) that is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is a variation pattern in which a production using a production member is set during symbol variation, the pattern The performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation.

Furthermore, in this modification, after the transition to the unchangeable state, the initial operation of the presentation member is completed before a predetermined time elapses as the non-contact time to the handle 182. In other words, the predetermined time until the demonstration performance starts after transitioning to the unchangeable state is set to be longer than the time from starting to completing the initial operation of the performance component after transitioning to the unchangeable state. are doing. In such a case, it becomes possible to start the demonstration performance after completing the initial operation of the performance member after transitioning to the unchangeable state. As a result, although it may be necessary to visually check the initial operation of the production member in the event that a malfunction occurs in the operation of the production member, it is possible to avoid starting the demonstration production during the initial operation of the production member. It is possible to prevent visual inspection of the initial operation of the performance member from being obstructed by the demonstration performance. In addition, when performing the movement of a performance member as a demonstration performance, the initial movement of the performance member must be completed before starting the demonstration performance, otherwise the performance member cannot operate as a demonstration performance. However, by completing the initial operation of the performance member before starting the demonstration performance, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, in this modified example, the initial operation of the presentation member is started when the state changes to the unchangeable state. Initial operations may be started. In such a case, even if the initial operation of the presentation member is started before the changeable state is entered, the initial operation of the presentation member is not completed by the time the presentation member is changed to the unchangeable state. After transitioning to the unchangeable state, there is a possibility that the initial operation of the presentation member will be completed. However, by setting a predetermined time period until the demonstration effect starts after the transition to the unchangeable state, it is possible to prevent the demonstration effect from starting during the initial operation of the performance component that continues after the transition to the unchangeable state. This makes it possible to prevent visual observation of the initial operation of the performance member from being hindered by the demonstration performance.

In addition, during the initial operation of the performance component, we check whether the performance component moves normally from the initial position (retreat position) to the operation position (appearance position), and make sure that the performance component is in the correct position so that it will wait at the initial position. However, only if there is no abnormality in the initial operation of the production component, the production will be restarted before the predetermined time elapses after the transition to the unchangeable state and the start of the demonstration production. The initial movement of the member may be completed. In other words, if any abnormality occurs in the initial movement of a production member, the process is repeated to confirm whether the production member moves normally from the initial position to the operating position, and to repeatedly perform accurate positioning. In such a case, the time required for the initial operation of the presentation member becomes long, and the demonstration presentation may be started during the initial operation of the presentation member that has become longer. Even in such a case, if there is no abnormality in the initial movement of the performance member, the demonstration performance will not be started during the initial movement of the performance member, and the demonstration performance will obstruct visual inspection of the initial movement of the performance member. This can be prevented.

In addition, in this modification, even while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, it is prohibited to count (add) to the non-contact time counter that indicates the non-contact time for the handle 182, as well as when changing the setting value is permitted. The non-contact time counter is counted (added) from the end of the setting value confirmation display. In other words, the demonstration performance will not start until a predetermined time has elapsed as a non-contact time for the handle 182 starting from the end of the setting value confirmation display, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the demonstration performance will start. It allows you to start. As a result, the demonstration performance is not started even during the setting value confirmation display, and it is possible to prevent the hall manager's confirmation display work from being hindered by the demonstration performance.

[About base monitor count limit]
Next, the base monitor 1310h will be explained with reference to FIG. 320. A game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which the game balls B can enter. Among the plurality of ball entry holes, the winning hole which is the object of paying out the prize ball by entering the ball is a plurality of winning holes (in this case, four) that are always open to receive the game ball B hit into the gaming area 5a. The general winning opening 2001 and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the gaming area 5a, and a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at a gate part. 2003, the second starting port 2004 becomes capable of accepting the game ball B according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing through the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. A second grand prize opening 2006 is provided in which game balls B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance of the game ball B.

Also, among the plurality of ball entry ports, an exit port for collecting game balls B that did not enter the winning hole is provided at the lower end of the gaming area 5a, and discharges the gaming balls B from within the gaming area 5a. It is provided with an out port 2010, and a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 that are provided midway in the vertical direction within the gaming area 5a and discharge the gaming ball B from within the gaming area 5a.

Also, among the game balls fired into the gaming area 5a, the game balls that entered the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the first big winning hole 2005, and the second big winning hole 2006 B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and is detected by the out opening 2010 and the first sub out opening. 2011, the game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012 are detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and these detection signals are sent to the main terminal via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the control MPU.

The main control MPU is configured to control the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry openings (winning openings, out openings) provided in the gaming area 5a that is sectioned on the gaming board 5 (the number of entering balls), that is, the number of balls that have entered the gaming area 5a. The number of game balls B discharged from the ball is counted. In addition, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B (number of payouts) that are paid out from the payout device 580 by entering the winning hole. Then, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered, stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. The formula for calculating the ratio of the number of balls put out to the number of balls entered is (number of balls put out/number of balls entered) x 100. For example, if the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered is too high, there is a possibility that the balls are only entering the winning holes where prize balls are paid out by entering the ball. By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h, it is possible to determine whether or not a ball is being entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, among the plurality of game states, only in the low probability non-time saving state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls), The number of game balls B put out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) is counted and reflected on the display on the base monitor 1310h. In the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and the high-probability time-saving state (probability variable state), since balls enter the second starting port 2004 frequently, the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 also increases. The ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of pitches tends to increase. In other words, whether the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered will increase or not depends on the period of time in a low probability time saving state (time saving state) or a high probability time saving state (probability variable state). By excluding the period, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered can be kept within a certain range, provided there is no fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, the base monitor 1310h displays the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered. ) and the number of game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 (number of payouts) may be displayed.

In this example, depending on whether or not there is contact with the handle 182, whether or not to count the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls) is varied. There is. Execution control regarding such base monitor 1310h will be explained with reference to FIG. 325. Figure 325 is. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-balls counting process performed by main control side timer interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 325, the main control MPU first determines whether or not a ball has entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (step S1801). If it is determined that a ball has entered the ball entry port (input port, out port), a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 was stopped. It is determined whether or not the ball entered later (step S1802). In the process of step S1802, if it is determined that the ball has not entered after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is stopped, the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 is determined to be The ball enters the ball while a detection signal is being input, or a predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 was stopped. The number of game balls B that have entered the ball opening (winning opening, out opening) is counted against a counting counter (step S1803). In other words, if the ball enters the ball while it is in contact with the handle 182, or if the ball enters the ball within a predetermined period of time after releasing the handle 182, the ball enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole). It is possible to count the number of game balls B against a counting counter.

In the process of step S1802, if it is determined that the ball enters after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 was stopped, the symbol (special symbol) It is determined whether or not the ball enters during the variable display (step S1804). If it is determined that the ball has not entered during the fluctuating display of the symbol (special symbol), the ball has entered within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuating display of the symbol (special symbol) has stopped. It is determined whether or not (step S1805). In the process of step S1804, if it is determined that the ball has entered while the symbol (special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, or in the process of step S1805, the ball has been entered within a predetermined period of time after the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) has been stopped. If it is determined that the ball has entered, the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) is counted against a counting counter that indicates the number of balls B that have entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port) (step S1803).

In the process of step S1805, if it is determined that the ball has not entered within the predetermined time after the fluctuating display of the symbol (special symbol) has been stopped, the game ball that entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) The counter that indicates the number of pitches is not counted (step S1806). In other words, among the balls that enter after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the input of the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 was stopped, regarding the balls that enter after a predetermined period of time after the variable display of the symbol (special symbol) was stopped. is not counted with respect to the counting counter that indicates the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole). When such a situation occurs, that is, when a ball enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) but does not count against the counting counter, the effect display device 1600 etc. This is used to notify the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality (step S1807). In addition, if a situation occurs in which the ball does not count against the counting counter even though the ball enters the entry hole (input hole, out hole), the ball has already been counted before such a situation occurs. We try to retain the information that we have.

As described above, when a ball enters while in contact with the handle 182 or within a predetermined period of time after releasing the hand from the handle 182, the ball enters the entry hole (winning hole, out hole). The number of entered game balls B is counted against a counter that indicates the number of balls B. This is because it takes a certain amount of time from when the game ball B comes into contact with the handle 182 and is launched until it enters the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole). If the ball is entered within a predetermined period of time, there is a high possibility that the ball is entered in a regular game. From this, even if the ball enters within a predetermined period of time after releasing the hand from the handle 182, the accuracy of the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be maintained even if the ball is counted against the counting counter. .

On the other hand, for balls that enter after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the hand is released from the handle 182, in principle, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is displayed on the counting counter. It is not included in the calculation target. This is because it takes a certain amount of time from when the game ball B comes into contact with the handle 182 and is launched until it enters the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), but this time has been exceeded. Regarding the ball entering the game, there is a low possibility that the ball is entering the ball in a regular game. For example, if a large number of game balls B are illegally entered into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 using a magnet or the like among the ball entry ports (winning port, out port), the payout device Since the number of game balls B paid out from 580 increases, the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered increases as information displayed on the base monitor 1310h, making it possible to grasp the fraudulent activity. However, if you count the number of all the game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening), many gaming balls B will enter the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. If a large number of game balls B are illegally entered into the outlet by releasing the handle 182 and opening the door frame 3 after the ball is released, the ratio of the number of balls B paid out to the number of balls entered is high. The value goes from an excessively high level to a low level, making it difficult to identify fraudulent acts from the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h. In this regard, in this example, for balls that enter after a predetermined time has elapsed after releasing the hand from the handle 182, a count indicating the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is calculated. Since the information is not counted by the counter, the accuracy of the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be maintained, and traces of fraudulent acts can be left behind.

Also, when a ball enters after a predetermined time has elapsed since the hand is released from the handle 182, during a variable display of a symbol (special symbol), or within a predetermined time after the variable display of a symbol (special symbol) is stopped. Incoming balls are counted against a counter that indicates the number of game balls that have entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening). In such a situation, when paying attention to the fluctuating display of the symbol (special symbol), there is a high possibility that the person is simply waiting with his or her hand off the handle 182, and there is a high possibility that the user is simply waiting with his or her hand off the handle 182, and is therefore likely to take his or her hand off the handle 182 and commit fraud. This is because it is difficult to imagine that the player is trying to get the ball to enter the entrance hole (input hole, out hole).

As a result of the above, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the hand is released from the handle 182, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are illegally accessed using a magnet or the like out of the ball entry ports (winning ports, out ports). If a large number of game balls B are entered in succession, the first ball entered indicates the number of game balls B that entered the entry hole (winning hole, out hole). It is not counted by the counting counter. However, for the second and subsequent balls that come in consecutively from the first ball, the symbols (special symbols) are displayed in a variable manner based on the first ball that enters, so they are counted against the counting counter. It becomes. In this regard, for example, if there is an incoming ball that is not to be counted by the counting counter, successive incoming balls may not be counted by the counting counter. According to this, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the hand is released from the handle 182, if a ball is illegally entered into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the ball entering port (winning The accuracy of the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be maintained because the number of game balls B that have entered the game ball B are not counted by the counter that indicates the number of balls B that have entered the game ball (opening, exit opening).

In addition, in this example, for balls entering after a predetermined time has elapsed after releasing the hand from the handle 182, in principle, the number of game balls B entering the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is calculated. It is not counted against the counting counter shown, but only a part of the ball entry opening (input opening, out opening) (only the winning opening, only the out opening, only a part of the winning opening, only a part of the out opening) , (possible)) may not be counted by the counting counter. For example, when targeting only the out gate of the ball entry slots (input slot, out slot), the player may take his hand off the handle 182 and open the door frame 3 to illegally allow the ball to enter the out slot. The number of game balls B can be excluded, and the accuracy of the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be maintained.

In addition, in this example, for balls entering after a predetermined period of time has passed after the hand is released from the handle 182, in principle, the number of game balls B entering the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) is calculated. Although it is not counted by the counting counter shown in the figure, in addition to the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening), a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the hand was released from the handle 182. It is also possible to count the number of balls that enter the ball after hitting the ball, and display the counting results on the base monitor 1310h or other display device. In such a case, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the hand was released from the handle 182, the game ball B that has abnormally entered the ball entry port (winning port, out port), after the ball has entered the ball abnormally. However, detailed information can be obtained.

[About restrictions on the execution of setting suggestion effects]
In this embodiment, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value is executed. In this embodiment, the first starting hole 2002 and the general winning hole 2001 provided in the left side area of the gaming area 5a (excluding one general winning hole 2001 provided in the right side area of the gaming area 5a) enter the ball. When the ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001, the sound of the ball entering the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001 is output as an audio output from the speaker. In some cases, instead of just the ball entering sound, a setting suggestion sound that suggests the setting value is output as a setting suggestion effect. Execution control of such ball entering sound and setting suggestion sound will be explained with reference to FIG. 326. FIG. 326 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting suggestion effect related processing executed in the peripheral control section steady processing.

As shown in FIG. 326, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not a ball has entered the ball entrance for which the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is determined whether a ball has entered the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 (step S1901). In addition, when the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001, the main control MPU outputs a ball entering command to the peripheral control MPU, so that the peripheral control MPU It is possible to know that a ball has entered the general winning hole 2001.

In the process of step S1901, when it is determined that a ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001, the execution pattern of the setting suggestion performance is determined (step S1902). In this embodiment, the execution patterns of the setting suggestion effect include a normal execution pattern in which no restrictions are placed on the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and a normal execution pattern with some restrictions added to the execution of the setting suggestion effect. and a restricted execution pattern B which has greater restrictions than the restricted execution pattern A regarding the execution of the setting suggestion performance, and the player selects one of these execution patterns, Various settings and output processes related to setting suggestions are performed in accordance with the selected execution pattern, thereby making it possible to change the estimated level of setting values during the game progress process in accordance with the player's needs. Note that the details of the restrictions regarding the execution of the setting suggestion effect will be described later.

Here, the setting suggestion effect of this embodiment will be explained. The setting suggestion effect of this embodiment utilizes the ball landing sound that is output when a ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001 in a normal gaming state. By outputting sound in a special manner different from normal, the setting value is suggested to the player. Specifically, when a ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001, which is the ball entrance for execution of the setting suggestion effect, the peripheral control MPU sets a predetermined random value X for the suggestion effect, and sets the suggestion effect. A random number value Y for the suggestion effect is obtained, and an execution determination (execution lottery) is made as to whether or not to output a setting suggestion sound consisting of sound data different from the normal pitch sound, based on the obtained random number value X for suggestion effect. , and outputs a normal pitch sound or a setting suggestion sound based on the result of the execution determination. In determining the execution of the setting suggestion sound, the random number value X for suggestion performance is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion sound can be outputted at a probability of 1/500, which is lower than the probability of winning a jackpot. When determining the output of the setting suggestion sound, select one of setting suggestion sound A suggesting a low setting value, setting suggestion sound B suggesting a high setting value, and setting suggestion sound C suggesting setting value 6. , is determined according to the currently set setting value and the random value Y for suggestion effect. Here, if the currently set setting value is setting value 1 to 3, setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value has a higher probability than setting suggestion sound B (setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound A performance is determined in accordance with the value of the random value Y for suggestive performance with reference to a low setting performance distribution table determined at a ratio of B=7:3. In addition, when the setting value is 4 to 5, setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value is sent with a higher probability than setting suggestion sound A (ratio of setting suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B = 3:7). A performance is determined in accordance with the value of the random value Y for suggestive performance with reference to the high setting performance distribution table 1 to be determined. In addition, when the setting value is 6, setting suggestion sounds A to C are generated at a predetermined probability (setting Suggestion sound A: setting suggestion sound B: setting suggestion sound C = ratio of 1:5:4) The effect is determined according to the value of the random value Y for suggestion effect with reference to the effect distribution table 2 for high settings. will be held. In other words, setting suggestion sounds A and B may be output regardless of the current setting value, so a single output will not confirm the low or high setting. When the suggestion sound C is output, it is confirmed that the currently set setting value is the setting value 6. In this way, when the setting suggestion sound is output, the user can have expectations based on the setting value suggestion that can be grasped from the setting suggestion sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state (normal state), the first starting opening 2002 provided in the left area of the gaming area 5a and the general winning opening 2001 (provided in the right area of the gaming area 5a) A game is being played in which the player aims to get a ball into a ball (excluding one general winning hole 2001). Then, only in the normal gaming state (normal state) out of multiple gaming states, it is possible to output the ball entering sound and setting suggestion sound when a ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001. I have to. However, it may also be possible to output the ball hitting sound and setting suggestion sound during other game states such as the winning game state and the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). In this case, the ball entrance to which the setting suggestion performance is executed may be changed for each game state. For example, during the winning game state, since a game is played in which the ball enters the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second grand prize opening 2006 provided in the right side area of the gaming area 5a, the setting suggestion effect is The entry hole to be executed may be the first big winning hole 2005 or the second big winning hole 2006, and in the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), it may be provided in the right side area of the game area 5a. Since a game is played in which the ball enters the second starting port 2004 that is provided, the second starting port 2004 may be used as the ball entering port for which the setting suggestion performance is executed.

Further, in this embodiment, as one of the setting suggestion effects, at least when the setting suggestion sounds A to C are output, the effect display device 1600 sends a suggestion effect execution notification informing that it is time to output the setting suggestion sounds. It is intended to be displayed on Although this suggestion effect execution notification differs from the setting suggestion sound and does not suggest the setting value itself, its main purpose is to inform the player that the setting value has been suggested by the setting suggestion sound. At the output timing of the suggestion sounds A to C, for example, a character image "Suggested" is displayed. In addition, since this suggestion performance execution notification is positioned as an announcement to players who missed the setting suggestion sound, any of the setting suggestion sounds A to C will be displayed even after the setting suggestion sound has finished outputting. It is set to be displayed over a period longer than the output period. In addition, this suggestion performance execution notification includes a predetermined image (such as a pending image or Displayed near the bonus prize ball winning image).

In addition, the currently set setting values are stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU, but at the timing when the fluctuation pattern is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as a fluctuation pattern command, the current setting value Setting values are sent as commands to peripheral control board 1510 and are also stored in peripheral control MPU, and setting suggestion sounds A to C are determined based on the stored information.

In addition, the types of normal ball entering sounds when the setting suggestion sound is not output are sound data in which a "pop" sound is output from the speaker in response to the ball entering the first starting port 2002, and general winning sound. Sound data for outputting the sound "poco" from a speaker in response to the ball entering the mouth 2001 is provided separately. On the other hand, common sound data is used for the setting suggestion sound that is output in response to the ball entering the first starting hole 2002 and the setting suggestion sound that is output in response to the general winning hole 2001. As the setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value, sound data is used in which a sound "bee" is output from a speaker, and as the setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value, a sound "bee beep" is output from a speaker. Sound data in which a sound is output is used, and as the setting suggestion sound C suggesting the setting value 6, sound data in which a sound "bee beep" is output from the speaker is used. In this way, by outputting different setting suggestion sounds for each setting value suggestion, it is possible to grasp what kind of setting value is being suggested. In addition, the setting suggestion sound that is output in response to the ball entering the first starting hole 2002 and the setting suggestion sound that is output in response to the general winning hole 2001 are not common sound data but separate sound data. You can.

In the process of step S1902, after determining the execution pattern of the setting suggestion effect currently set by the player, first, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a normal execution pattern (step S1903). . If it is a normal execution pattern, since it is possible to output the setting suggestion sound described above, an execution determination (execution lottery) is performed as to whether or not to output the setting suggestion sound described above (step S1904). ), the effect distribution of the normal pitching sound or setting suggestion sounds A to C is set and output according to the result of the execution determination (step S1905).

In the process of step S1903, if it is determined that the execution pattern is not a normal execution pattern, it is determined whether the execution pattern is a restriction execution pattern A regarding the restriction of the output of the setting suggestion sound (step S1906). If it is determined that the restricted execution pattern is not A, then the restricted execution pattern B does not perform any setting suggestion performance, so all setting suggestion performances including the output of the setting suggestion sound described above are not performed. (Step S1908). In other words, when the limited execution pattern B is selected, although the random value X for suggestion effect and the random value Y for suggestion effect are acquired, the execution judgment is made as to whether or not to output the setting suggestion sound using them. There is no (execution lottery) or performance distribution at all, and the normal ball entering sound is played selectively.

Further, in the process of step S1906, if it is determined that the restriction execution pattern is A, as a restriction on some setting suggestion effects, only the above-mentioned setting suggestion sound is not output as a setting suggestion effect. (Step S1907). In other words, even when the limited execution pattern A is selected, although the random value X for suggestion effect and the random value Y for suggestion effect are acquired, the execution judgment is made as to whether or not to output the setting suggestion sound using them. There is no (execution lottery) or performance distribution at all, and the normal ball entering sound is played selectively. However, when limited execution pattern A is selected, unlike when limited execution pattern B is selected, the display of the suggestion effect execution notification that informs that it is time to output the setting suggestion sound, As with normal execution patterns, it is performed without any restrictions.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution pattern of the setting suggestion performance described above can be executed by the player operating the performance operation section 301 whether the symbol is being displayed while changing or the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped. It allows you to choose. In other words, when the restriction execution patterns A and B are selected by the player operating the performance operation section 301 and the execution of all or part of the setting suggestion performance is restricted, the selection is immediately reflected in the game. It is designed to allow In addition, it is difficult to say that it is desirable for the set value to be revealed to the player immediately after the game hall opens (for example, after winning the first prize) in view of the operation of the game machine concerned and other game machines. Therefore, in this embodiment, the restriction execution pattern B is set to the default value when the power is turned on so that no setting suggestion performance is performed during a specific period (for example, one hour) after the power of the gaming machine is turned on. has been selected as. Further, during this specific period, even if the player operates the performance operation section 301, the player is not able to select the execution pattern of the setting suggestion performance. Note that after a specific period has elapsed since the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the player can make a selection, and even if the player has not made a selection, the restriction execution pattern B can be activated after the specific period has elapsed. is canceled and the program switches to a normal execution pattern in which all setting suggestion effects are performed. Thereby, the effect of improving the player's interest can be exerted, such as when the player sits on the game machine some time after the game hall opens and the set value is known by the first start-up winning or the like.

Next, the selection of the execution pattern of the setting suggestion effect and a specific example of the effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 327 and 328. FIG. 327 shows a specific example of performance when the normal execution pattern is selected (when setting suggestions are not restricted at all), and FIG. This is a specific example of the effect when some or all of the content is limited.

First, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation section 301 while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner or while the symbols are being stopped changing, the effect display device 1600 determines whether or not to limit setting suggestions. It is possible to display a selection screen for selection (FIG. 327(A)). Then, on the selection screen, if the player performs a predetermined operation on the performance operation section 301 and selects "No restriction", when the player subsequently enters the first starting opening 2002 or the general winning opening 2001. In addition, all setting suggestion effects including setting suggestion sounds can be executed without restricting the execution of setting suggestion effects (FIG. 327 (B, B')).

If the execution of the setting suggestion effect is not restricted, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001 and it is decided to output the setting suggestion sound, the sound is output from the speaker. , the setting suggestion sound A that suggests a low setting value, the setting suggestion sound B that suggests a high setting value, and the setting suggestion sound C that suggests a setting value of 6.

In addition, the effect display device 1600 displays a hold display based on the ball entering the first starting port 2002, and above the hold display, a suggestion effect indicating that it is time to output the setting suggestion sound. As an execution notification, a message indicating "Suggestions" is displayed. As a result, depending on the output of the setting suggestion sound, it is possible for the player to grasp the setting value, and depending on the display of the suggestion effect execution notification, the setting suggestion sound caused by the ball entering the first starting port 2002 can make the player understand the setting value. The player can be made to understand only what has been suggested. Regarding the hold display, the display position moves each time the hold is used up, and when the hold is used up and the fluctuating display of symbols ends, the hold display is erased. The "suggested" message display is moved as the pending display moves, and is erased at the same time as the pending display is erased. In addition, in this embodiment, a bonus award display (display of "Get a bonus prize ball!") indicating that a small amount of prize balls will be given to the player based on the ball entering the general winning hole 2001 in the normal gaming state ), and when outputting a setting suggestion sound based on the entry of the ball into the general winning hole 2001, a message indicating that it is time to output the setting suggestion sound is displayed at the top of the privilege award pending display. A message displaying ``Suggestion available'' is displayed as a notification of execution of the suggested performance. As a result, in the same way as when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002, depending on the output of the setting suggestion sound, the player can understand the setting value, and depending on the display of the suggestion effect execution notification, the player can understand the setting value in the general winning hole 2002. The player can only understand that the setting value has been suggested by the setting suggestion sound caused by the ball entering the ball. The benefit award display will be erased after a predetermined period of time (3 seconds in this example) after the display is started, and the "Suggestion" message displayed at the top of the benefit award display will be deleted. is deleted at the same time as the benefit award display is deleted.

On the other hand, on the selection screen, if the player performs a predetermined operation on the performance operation section 301 and selects "Limit", the next step is to have the player select more specific restrictions. A selection screen is displayed (FIG. 328 (B, D)). If the player performs a predetermined operation on the performance operation section 301 and selects "Restriction A" on the selection screen that allows the player to select specific restriction contents, then the first starting gate When a ball enters the 2002 or general winning slot 2001, the execution of some setting suggestion effects is restricted, and it is possible to output a ball entering sound that does not suggest a setting value without outputting a setting suggestion sound ( Figure 328 (C, C')).

If "Limit A" is selected, the timing at which the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 and the setting suggestion sound is determined to be output is determined as audio output from the speaker. Similarly to the case where it is decided not to output the setting suggestion sound, the ball entering sound that does not suggest the setting value is output. At this time, similar to the case where the setting suggestion sound is output, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Suggestive effect execution notification" at the top of the hold display or benefit award display to notify that it is time to output the setting suggestion sound. "Suggestions" message is displayed. In this way, when "Limit A" is selected, the setting suggestion sound is not output, so the player cannot grasp the setting value, but depending on the display of the suggestion effect execution notification, the setting suggestion sound may be The player can be made aware of only the fact that the set value has been suggested.

In addition, in the selection screen where the player selects the specific content of the restriction, if the player performs a predetermined operation on the effect operation section 301 and selects "Restriction B", then the first starting gate When the ball enters the 2002 or the general winning slot 2001, the execution of any setting suggestion effect is restricted, and the output of the ball entering sound that does not suggest the setting value is made possible without outputting the setting suggestion sound (Fig. 328 (E, E')).

If "Limit B" is selected, the timing at which the ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 and the setting suggestion sound is determined to be output is determined as the audio output from the speaker. In the same way as when it is decided not to output a setting suggestion sound without outputting a setting suggestion sound, a ball landing sound that does not suggest a setting value is output, and a suggestion effect execution notification is not executed. ing. In this way, when "Limit B" is selected, not only the setting suggestion sound but also the suggestion effect execution notification will not be executed, and not only will the player not be able to grasp the setting value, but the setting value will not be suggested. It is also possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the player has won the game.

As described above, in this example, the player operates the performance operation section 301 in advance to allow the player to select whether or not to restrict the execution of the setting suggestion performance. As a result, for players who wish to grasp the setting value through setting suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performance is selected not to be restricted, and for players who do not wish to grasp the setting value through setting suggestion performance, the setting suggestion performance is restricted. It is only necessary to select such a value, and even though the configuration suggests setting values, it can be adapted to the needs of the player.

In addition, in this example, as a restriction mode of the setting suggestion performance, a restriction execution pattern A is provided that involves some restrictions on the setting suggestion performance, and a setting suggestion sound that may be directly connected to guessing the setting value is not output, but some The suggestion effect execution notification that informs that the setting suggestion effect has been performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the same way as when the output of the setting suggestion sound is not restricted. Thereby, it is possible to meet the needs of a player who wants to recognize only the suggestion effect execution notification that informs that some setting suggestion effect has been performed.

In addition, regarding the selection of whether or not to restrict the execution of the setting suggestion performance, the player can perform a predetermined operation on the performance operation section 301, regardless of whether the symbols are being displayed while fluctuating or the symbols have stopped fluctuating. By doing so, it is possible to quickly reflect the changes. Thereby, it is possible to switch whether or not to restrict the execution of the setting suggestion performance at a timing desired by the player, and it is possible to meet the needs of the player.

In addition, in this example, the message "Suggestion available" displayed at the top of the pending display or benefit awarding display as a notification of execution of the suggestive performance is deleted when the pending display or benefit awarding display is deleted. However, the message display may be erased before erasing the hold display or privilege grant display. For example, the message display may be erased at the time when the variable display of the symbols related to the pending display is started. In this example, the pending display is displayed even while the symbols related to the pending display are being displayed. For example, if a message display is attached to the pending display, the symbols related to the pending display are displayed. There is a possibility that a misunderstanding may arise that some kind of expectation is attached to the display of fluctuations. In this regard, such a situation can be prevented from occurring by erasing the message display at the time when the variable display of the symbols related to the pending display is started.

In addition, in this example, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value, a setting suggestion sound that suggests the setting value is output when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001. However, such a setting suggestion effect is not limited to the setting suggestion sound, and may be performed using any of audio, display, and lamp light as long as it suggests the setting value. Further, the suggestion performance execution notification may be any notification as long as it conveys that it is time to execute the setting suggestion performance, and may be performed using any of audio, display, and lamp light emission. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be achieved by allowing the player to select whether or not to restrict execution of the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, in this example, it is possible to limit the output of the setting suggestion sound by selecting whether or not to restrict the execution of the setting suggestion effect. By doing this, it is possible to adjust the volume of the game sound output from the speaker, and when the volume of the game sound is adjusted to zero, the output of the setting suggestion sound is limited (not output). Good too. However, when the volume of the game sound is adjusted to zero, when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001, the output of the ball entering sound that does not suggest the set value will also be limited (not output). .

In addition, during the fluctuating display of symbols (decorative symbols), if a reach effect with a high expectation level is executed after forming a reach effect, during the execution of the reach effect with a high expectation level, the first starting port 200 When a ball enters the general winning hole 2001, the output of the ball entering sound that does not suggest a setting value is limited (not output), but the output of the setting suggestion sound is not limited. In this way, during execution of the highly anticipated reach effect, even if the ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001, the ball entering sound that does not suggest the set value is not output, and the ball entering sound is not output. The attention to the highly anticipated reach performance is not disturbed by the sound. On the other hand, during execution of highly anticipated reach effects, it is possible to output setting suggestion sounds when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001. By selecting to limit the setting suggestion sound, it is not possible to output the setting suggestion sound, and it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion sound from distracting attention to the highly anticipated reach performance.

In addition, in this example, as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value, a setting suggestion sound that suggests the setting value is output when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001. However, such a setting suggestion performance may be performed not only when the ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001, but also at a predetermined timing of the performance. For example, during the fluctuating display of symbols (decorative symbols), in the case where a reach effect with a high expectation level is executed after forming a reach, a reach effect in the event of a loss is executed in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol. In this case, the stop performance is executed during the temporary stop period at the end of the reach performance in the event of a loss, but it may be possible to output a setting suggestion sound as part of such stop performance. . In addition, the temporary stop period refers to the stop display after the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop, and the stop display is confirmed from the state where the stop pattern of the decorative pattern fluctuates (the state where the decorative pattern sways little by little up and down or left and right). (about 1 to 2 seconds). In addition, at the time when the stop effect is executed, the display of the decorative symbols does not start to change again from the state where the losing symbols are oscillating and fluctuating, and it is confirmed that the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the losing symbols, and the variable display of the decorative symbols is started again. No expectations are given as to whether or not it will start.

Specifically, in the stop performance, character A appears when it is decided to output a setting suggestion sound, and character B appears when it is decided not to output a setting suggestion sound. has been done. In other words, character A is a character that appears when a setting value is suggested by a setting suggestion sound, and character B is a character that appears when a setting value is not suggested. This corresponds to a suggestion performance execution notification that tells you that it is the output timing. When character A appears, a setting suggestion sound is output, but as a setting suggestion sound suggesting a low setting value, a sound saying "leave it to luck" is output from the speaker, and a setting suggestion sound suggesting a high setting value. In this case, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Chance", and as the setting suggestion sound suggesting the setting value 6, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Congratulations". Even in the case of such a configuration, the same effect as described above can be achieved by allowing the player to select whether or not to restrict the execution of the setting suggestion effect.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a game machine, but it is also applicable to other game machines such as a mahjong ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It is also applicable to slot machines that rotate rotating drums or reels. Here, the slot machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 329. FIG. 329 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 329, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body portion (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body portion (box) 6004 are interconnected via a hinge (not shown). By inserting the key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise around this hinge, the front door (front frame) 6002 can be locked into the main body. Part (box) 6004 can be opened.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body part (box) 6004. It is used to open and close the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 6005 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a metal keyhole 6005 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. It includes a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates when a regular metal key is rotated. The cylinder body of the metal locking device passes through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame of the door frame reinforcing unit from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed into a cylindrical shape with an open rear end (more specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notched parts. The rotation transmission member is formed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. By inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated. If the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

In addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, the door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground, and connects the main body ( It is electrically connected to the ground board provided inside the box (box) 6004. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) is capable of concentrating electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall. Electrically connected to equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body part (box body) 6004 is arranged on the main body part (box body) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. There is. This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal due to the opening/closing operation of the metal locking device. Rather, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body portion (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch should not be placed near the metal locking device, and should be located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that has entered the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the part (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise were to enter the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch would not be affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative parts have no decorative plating applied at all, while others have decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating, such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has conductivity, so electromagnetic noise may penetrate. Among the various decorative parts, those whose entire front and back surfaces are decorated with decorative plating are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the various decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit through wiring (not shown), while others have electrically conductive members attached directly to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. (Some are connected electrically). This makes it possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative sections from entering the board ground of the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative sections by transmitting it to the metal door frame reinforcing unit. In addition, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into various decorative parts that have decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, and from the ground board to the ground of the island equipment of the gaming hall via the island equipment ground wire, and removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side, as described above.

Note that a static eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator at a predetermined location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body portion (box) 6004, A static eliminator pad may be provided as a static eliminator on the open side opposite to the side where the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static electricity removal pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative parts. Some have decorative plating applied to the entire surface, and among various decorative parts, those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring not shown. The ground board provided inside the main body part (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are connected electrically to the terminals of the power supply board of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. may be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that transiently protects against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and hardly allows current to flow through it, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value instantly decreases and current flows, and when the overvoltage disappears, the surge protection element (surge absorber) , which has the ability to return to its original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protrusion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protrusion. Further, a storage payment button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 accommodates the main control board 1310 as well as a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a that can change setting values is mounted. That is, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the main body portion (box) 6004. Note that the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and may be attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004, or It may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box body) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 includes a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot). A settings display device 1310g configured with the above-mentioned settings change permission lamp 1310z, etc. may be implemented.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the gaming panel 6006, and through this display window, three variable rotary bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000, performance devices (not shown), etc. can be viewed. It is now possible to see through. The three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side attachment member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. On the other hand, a presentation device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

For these variable rotating bodies, a translucent pattern band with multiple types of patterns (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) printed as pattern information is attached to each cylindrical frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotary body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and each variable rotary body is connected to an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in the display window that changes continuously from top to bottom. It looks like this.

The performance device includes a plurality of movable performance bodies (not shown), the above-mentioned performance display device 1600, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable presentation objects, the drawing control of the presentation display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates, etc. based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The progress of the performance is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

The main control board 1310 starts displaying symbol information in a variable manner based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal slot 6008 as game media. The variable display of symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026 on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode.

In addition, in the integrated gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 controls when a predetermined number of game balls as game media are inserted into the ball slot 6008', and when the start lever 6014 is operated. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount to the game ball receptacle 6026 as a game medium.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back rear production unit 3110 Back movable decorative body 3111 Decorative body (decorative member, decorative plate body)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative board)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Main body part 3113b Flange part (peripheral wall part)
3113c First LED housing part 3113d Second LED housing part 3113e Reflection part 3114 Back decorative board (decorative board)
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Board body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decoration body base 3115a Cover plate portion 3115b Flange portion EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with multiple boards,
As multiple boards,
a main control board provided with a display section with a part number that allows identification of the mounted components;
A magnetic detection board and a magnetic detection board in which neither a display part with a part number that can identify the mounted component nor a board management number display part with a board management number that can identify the board are provided on either side of the board. , has
The magnetic detection board is mounted with a magnetic detection means capable of detecting magnetism and is housed in a predetermined housing member,
The housing member has a product management display section in which a product management number is written that allows identification of the housing member housing the magnetic detection board.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images